JP2020089685A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that is devised according to a game situation.SOLUTION: A game machine has a plurality of game situations including a first special game state, a second special game state, and a third special game state, which are different from a normal game state. In the first special game state, a first operation instruction performance corresponding to an operation mode that facilitates acquisition of game media is executed as an operation instruction performance. In the second special game state, an instruction performance having the same instruction content as the instruction content indicated in the first operation instruction performance is executed as the operation instruction performance. In the third special game state related to the second game state, a second operation instruction performance having the instruction content different from the instruction content indicated in the first operation instruction performance can be executed as the operation instruction performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 672

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

Conventionally, when an internal lottery is won, a bonus game, an ART (assist replay time) game, and an AT (assist time) game, in which more game media can be obtained compared to the normal game state, are executed, such as a slot machine. A rotating body type game machine is known. Further, as a gaming machine, there have been proposed a number of spinning drum type gaming machines that have a plurality of gaming states and execute effects according to the gaming status (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-142346, A

However, there are not a few players who are looking for a game machine that is further devised according to the game situation.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is devised in accordance with the gaming situation.

Means 1: Operation means operable by the player,
Production display means capable of displaying a predetermined production,
Operation instruction effect execution means capable of executing operation instruction effect for the operation means,
An operation instruction effect display means for displaying the operation instruction effect executed by the operation instruction effect execution means on the effect display means,
A gaming machine in which one game is completed by performing a lottery on winning and displaying a result of the lottery on a predetermined display unit,
The gaming machine has a plurality of gaming situations,
The plurality of game situations,
Normal gaming state,
A first special game state different from the normal game state,
A second special game state different from the normal game state and the first special game state, a game state different from the normal game state and the first special game state, and related to the second special game state Including at least three special game states,
When in the first special game state, a first operation instruction effect corresponding to an operation mode that facilitates acquisition of a game medium is executed as the operation instruction effect for the operation means,
When in the second special game state, an instruction effect having the same instruction content as the instruction content shown in the first operation instruction effect is executed as the operation instruction effect for the operation means,
In the third special game state, when a predetermined number of the games are exhausted, the state changes to the first special game state, but is indicated by the first operation instruction effect as the operation instruction effect for the operation means. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a second operation instruction effect having an instruction content different from the instruction content being displayed.

When the player enters an advantageous game state in which an instruction effect that facilitates acquisition of a game medium is generated, it becomes an advantageous state for the player, but a loss increases for the hole. However, if a hole is used with a large number of settings that have a low probability of transition to an advantageous gaming state, the number of players coming to the store may drop, and the profit of the hole may decrease. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, the first special game state, the second special game state, and the third special game state are provided, and in the first special game state and the second special game state, it is easy to acquire the game hall body. The first operation instruction effect corresponding to the operation mode is executed, and in the third special game state, the second operation instruction effect having the instruction content different from the instruction content shown in the first operation instruction effect can be executed. . As a result, in the third special game state, unlike the first special game state and the second game special game state, it is possible to suppress the number of game media acquired, even if the gaming machine is not set to a low level. It is possible to provide a game machine that both the hall and the hall can satisfy. (For example, see paragraphs [5901] to [6074], FIGS. 665 to 684, and the like).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is devised according to the gaming situation.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the front view which cut the front component in the game board and the front unit in the center of the front and back direction inside the game territory. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of a serial communication circuit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. 22 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a character ratio calculation/display process. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the accessory ratio calculation/display process of FIG. 24. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code) and data stored in ROM and RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the structure of an accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. FIG. 6 is a timing chart of data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows a load register selection table. It is a figure which shows a character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of a prize ball, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area|region for base calculation. It is a front view showing another example of a game board. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base calculation field update processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flow chart which shows another example of timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4. It is a flow chart which shows an example of base display processing. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation processing 4. It is a flow chart which shows another example of base display processing. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a main control I/O port. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a main control I/O port. It is a timing diagram in the example of a structure of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the change of the state (section) concerning calculation of a base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 101. It is a figure which shows the structure of the area|region for base calculation. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of base display data generation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows the calculation of the base when a game state switches. It is a figure which shows the structure regarding a storage area among the internal structures of the main control MPU1311. It is a figure showing an example of a program of timer interruption processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure showing an example of a program of timer interruption processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code) and data stored in ROM and RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recorded in the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an error screen. It is a figure which shows the example of an error signal. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure showing an example of a game history. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a peripheral control board and its periphery. It is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back in the opened state. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 from the back in the closed state. It is a figure which shows the setting part of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown in FIG. 135 from back. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of special design and special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of special symbol fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of special symbol change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of fluctuation pattern selection judging processing. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a normal state and the result of the special lottery is out. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production|presentation performed in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. 150A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is a short-time state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. FIG. 151 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A′ in FIG. 151(B). It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of initialization processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. It is a timing diagram of a security signal. It is a flow chart which shows another example of initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a setting confirmation process. It is another example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is an example of a final reserved color table. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retention color is determined by the final retention color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final retention color for each variation pattern of setting 1 is displayed. This is an example. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retention color is determined by the final retention color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final retention color for each variation pattern of setting 3 is displayed. This is an example. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retention color is determined by the final retention color table of FIG. 161, a table showing the appearance rate of each final retention color for each variation pattern of setting 5 is displayed. This is an example. It is an example of a notice production table. It is an example of a dialogue production table. It is another example of the notice production table. It is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the setting suggestion production as a prefetching production. (A) is an example of a setting confirmation mode effect restriction table, and (B) is an example of an error occurrence effect restriction table. It is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. It is an example of a processing table 1. It is an example of a processing table 2. It is an example of a processing table 3. It is an example of a processing table 4. It is an example of a processing table 5. It is an example of a processing table 6. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a performance display process of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the alerting|reporting aspect of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the alerting priority of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a RAM abnormal time initialization process of another example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a random number update process 2 of another example 1. 8 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the other example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a switch input process 1 of another example 1. FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. is there. 199(A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199(B) is another configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a setting change/confirmation process of another example 1. FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of another example 1. 202(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1, FIG. 202(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on return destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command of another example 1. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a transmission order of commands of another example 1. 9 is a diagram showing a state transition of a setting state management area of another example 1. FIG. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold value table of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold value table of example 1 of another. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold value table of example 1 of another. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process according to another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process according to another example 2. 13 is a flowchart of a setting value confirmation process of another example 2. It is a flow chart of RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at power-on of another example 2. It is a flow chart of RAM out-of-game area processing of another example 2. 13 is a flowchart of a non-use area RWM initialization process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of another example 2. FIG. 220(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting state management area of another example 2, and FIG. 220(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 2. 220(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of the second example. 9 is a flowchart of a power-off process according to the second example. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 2. 9 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 2. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 3. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 3. 13 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of the third example. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for setting change process of another example 3. It is a flow chart of a timer interruption process for base games of another example 3. 13 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side of another example 4. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for setting change process of another example 4. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a front view showing a state in which the first design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit. It is a front view showing a state in which a second design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern displayed on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the picture seen by plane is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the picture seen by plane is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that a pattern which is stereoscopically viewed is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that a pattern which is stereoscopically viewed is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a circuit diagram around a synchronous serial interface of the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection of a serial/parallel conversion circuit and LED. It is a figure explaining the example of connection of the terminal of IC which accommodates an inverter buffer. It is a figure explaining the example of connection of the terminal of IC which accommodates an inverter buffer. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning on the main control board of the main control MPU and a peripheral component. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of the port in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the output of data by a synchronous serial signal, and the timing of acquisition. It is a figure which shows another arrangement|positioning of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a figure which shows another arrangement|positioning of the main control board in a main control board box. It is the block diagram which shows the connection of the power source system of the periphery of production drive baseplate. It is a block diagram showing connection of signals around a handle unit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the branch circuit provided in a relay substrate. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the slot machine. FIG. 38 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member opened. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like included in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the memory area provided by ROM, RAM, etc. in this embodiment, and the detail of a ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area of this embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine is reset. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of regular processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of information signal N output processing. It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing/retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from below. (A) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the lower front. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raise position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower part. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled to a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 379 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 379(a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area|region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 385 from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 385 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component members, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 385. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail. (A) is a perspective view of a front constituent member and a game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front constituent member and a game panel as viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in a game board from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in the game board from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is It is a left side view of a starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning a prize mouth, and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning a prize mouth in an open state. It is an enlarged front view showing a portion of a starting opening unit and a side unit in the game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st special winning opening door in a 1st attacker unit from a left side surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory of the front unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory of the front unit from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit from the front, and (b) is the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at from the back. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in a second attacker unit and a side right middle unit in a cross section. FIG. 403 is an explanatory view enlarging the right part in the game area in FIG. 393. It is the perspective view which saw the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. It is the front view of the pachinko machine which expands and shows the upper left corner of the game board in the state where the door frame is made transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back guidance unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the back guidance unit in the back unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back behind production unit and saw it from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear production unit and was seen from the back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back behind production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back behind production unit. It is a front view which shows a back back movable decoration with a back back decoration board. 420A is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 420, and FIG. 46B is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back back movable decoration. FIG. 425 is an explanatory diagram showing a light guide radiation plate and a back rear decorative substrate by broken lines in the front view of FIG. 425. (A) is a front view showing a part of a decorative body in a back and rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of a decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), (c) FIG. 8A is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the rear rear decoration substrate in the same portion as the decorative body of FIG. It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of FIG. 421 (a). FIG. 434 is an exploded view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 428. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front surface of a back back movable decoration and shows the relationship between a decoration by a decoration and a decoration sheet, and a light guide radiation plate and a back and back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a light guide radiation plate and a back rear decoration board in a site|part of 1st LED in a cross section, (b) shows 2nd LED on the optical axis of 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the light guide radiating plate in the part which exists from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body, and a decorative sheet, and 1st LED of a back rear decorative board It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back decoration board with copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back-rear decoration board, (b) is a rear view of a back-rear decoration board. (A) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body in a back and rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a different form from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b). (A) is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a back-rear movable ornament of a second embodiment different from the back-rear movable ornament of Fig. 420 in section, and (b) is a back-rear movable ornament of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of above in a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back back movable decoration of 4th embodiment in a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit in the back unit from the front, and (b) is seen the rear lower left production unit and the lower back right production unit in the back unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit, and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the inside-under-raising-and-lowering mechanism of the inside-under-the-stage production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the inside-under-raising-and-lowering mechanism of the inside-under-the-stage production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle decoration body unit of the back lower middle effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering of the lower back middle decoration body unit by the lower back middle raising/lowering mechanism in a lower back inside production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure concerning rotation of the back lower middle rotation decoration body of a back lower middle decoration body unit in a back bottom middle effect production unit from a front, (b) is a stop position of a back lower middle rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between each detection sensor with a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement|positioning of LED of the lower back middle decoration body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back up and down decoration body unit in the back up production unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper and lower decorative body units in the back unit, which is disassembled and seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotation decoration body in a back upper production unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the back-and-forth lifting decoration unit in the back-and-forth production unit from the front, and (b) is the back-and-up lifting decoration with the back-and-up lifting decoration unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation decoration body from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration board from the front in the state which moved the back side elevation decoration body unit to the appearance position in the back side production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back rear left production unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back rear left production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left production unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decoration body unit of the back rear left production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decoration body unit of the back rear left effect|production unit, and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back rear left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left effect|production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right production unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right effect|production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right effect|production unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back right production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right decoration body unit in the back rear right effect|production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front left production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front left production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in a back front left production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a front front left production unit in an open state. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front right production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which saw the back front right production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front right ornamental body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back-up rear rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effecting unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back-rear right effecting unit It is a front view of the game board showing the rear right rotating decorative body moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. The state in which the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear right rotating decorative body of the back-rear right rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is the front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit respectively from the closed state to the open state. The back and rear movable decorative body of the rear rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear and rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the rear rear left rotating decorative body of the rear rear left production unit From the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit rising from the lowered position It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved to each position. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure for main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure for interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special design process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting mouth passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used in the lottery process for winning, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process for types of big hit, (C) is a type of small hit Is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the small hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate section passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a universal figure hit judgment table used in the lottery process for hitting a universal figure, and (B) is a universal pattern hit pattern table used in a decision process for the opening pattern in hitting a universal figure. is there. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design fluctuation pattern decision processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design stop processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric auditors product opening process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16mS regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about production control processing performed by peripheral control MPU. (A) is an example of a hit probability table, and (B) is an example of a big hit distribution table. It is a transition diagram showing an example of a game state transition of the pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rush rush chance effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rush rush chance effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rush rush chance effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect during a small hit rush. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect during a small hit rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|play during high accuracy short time no big hit. It is an example of a timetable of a demo screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition of volume control. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stand-up effect. It is an explanatory view showing another example of a stand-up effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing when the promotion production in rise production is performed. (A) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball wins the starting opening without holding and during fluctuation non-execution. (B) is a reserved color determination table used when a game ball wins a starting opening without suspension and during execution of variation. (C) is a reservation color determination table used when a game ball wins the starting opening in the state where there is one reservation. (D) is a reservation color determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening in the state where there are two reservations. (E) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening in the state where there are three reservations. 7 is an example of a changing reserved color determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the suspension notice production by a suspension color change. (A) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening without holding and during fluctuation non-execution. (B) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening without holding and during variation execution. (C) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball wins the starting opening with one hold. (D) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when a game ball wins the starting opening in a state where there are two holds. (E) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a starting opening in a state where there are three holds. It is an example of a gacha coin reserve color correspondence table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a gacha coin hold notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a reach collapse pseudo continuous production. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of reach design promotion production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect on a Sugoroku stage. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect on a Sugoroku stage. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pine zone effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pine zone effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of super pine zone production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of super pine zone production. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of reservation peep production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rocket effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rocket effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rocket effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the schedule of the dynamic production of the character A and fuel after the still image production starts in a rocket production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of a battle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of a battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reel effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reel effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach production in which Mr. Daruma fell. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach production in which Mr. Daruma fell. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the reach production in which Mr. Daruma fell. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a notification process selection reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a notification process selection reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a notification process selection reach production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a hold set effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a hold set effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a divided reach effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a divided reach effect. It is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the door-type front member is omitted. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the slot machine. FIG. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state where the door-shaped front member is omitted. FIG. 57 is an enlarged view of a Z1 portion of FIG. 572. FIG. 57 is an enlarged view of a Z1 portion of FIG. 572, showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. FIG. 5A is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 575, and FIG. 5B is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 575 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of FIG. 576 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is a front view which abbreviate|omitted the cover body of a wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of a stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of a stopper showing other forms. It is a sectional view of the important section showing the guide structure of a case member. It is a sectional view of the important section showing the guide structure of a case member. It is a partial perspective view of a symbol variation display device showing another form of a handle. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a main part showing a relationship between a case member and an outer body side stopper. It is a sectional view of an important part showing a relation between a wiring window and a reel of a symbol variable display device. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. It is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 594. It is a rear view of the heat dissipation port seen from the back side of the slot machine. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up the power supply device from the bottom. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a main part of a side plate of an outer body and a power supply device, showing another embodiment. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member which decomposes|disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which decomposes|disassembles and shows a transparent plate. FIG. 601 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the line 601A-A of the door-shaped front member on which a transparent plate is mounted. It is a disassembled and assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-type front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door type front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the backside which shows the upper half part of a door type front member. It is a cross-sectional perspective view which cut|disconnected the coupling tool in the longitudinal direction. It is a principal part cross-sectional top view of the door type front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing the door-shaped front member of FIG. 610 in the middle of opening. It is a perspective view showing the state where an image display object and a frame member were opened in a model unit. It is a perspective view showing the state where a door type front member was opened with a connecting tool connected. It is a development view in which a symbol row of the reel band is developed in a plane. It is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the symbol display window in the slot machine viewed from the front. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, and operation members equipped in the slot machine. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination when the setting is 1. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination when the setting is 2. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination when the setting is 3. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination when the setting is 4. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination when the setting is 5. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination when the setting is 6. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of one basic game in the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the processing procedure of starting processing. It is an example of a block diagram showing the transition of the RT state. It is a figure for explaining an example of the rough flow of processing of indication function processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing concerning generation of an indication function. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a hell state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of advantageous state A. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of advantageous state B. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of advantageous state C. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of advantageous state D. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of advantageous state E. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a pull back state. It is an example of a lottery table used for additional determination lottery. It is an example of a lottery table used in the additional game number determination lottery in the ART medium low probability state. It is an example of a lottery table used in the additional game number determination lottery in the ART medium-high probability state. It is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for determining the number of games to be added to the specialized zone. It is an example of a lottery table used for the number-of-games determination lottery during the special zone preparation. It is an example of a table used for the ART first win lottery when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip” or “normal maintenance lip”. In the case where the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip” or “normal maintenance lip”, (a) is an example of a table used for addition determination lottery, and (b) ) This is an example of a table used for lottery for determining the number of additional games. It is an example of the ART initial win lottery table in the advantageous state D during the game number management process. It is an example of a lottery state transition drawing during ART. It is an example of a specialized zone lottery table. It is an example of the ART first win lottery table in the pullback state. It is an example of a production operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT1. It is an example of a production operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT2. It is an example of a production operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT3. It is another example of the production operation lottery table when the internal lottery is won. It is a figure for demonstrating an indication function display. It is a figure for demonstrating an indication function display. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of reel stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of reel stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of judgment processing. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of a bonus game start processing. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of a bonus game end determination processing. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of ART game determination processing. It is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the entire game. It is a figure for demonstrating the data block of RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display by a special display LED. It is a flow chart for explaining processing at the time of an error occurrence. It is a flow chart for explaining processing at the time of an error occurrence. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a processing procedure of power failure recovery processing. It is an example of an effect image related to the addition determination lottery and the addition game number determination lottery. It is an example of a small role lottery table. It is an example of an AT first hit lottery table. It is an example of a precursor game number lottery table. It is an example of an AT stock lottery table. It is an example of a pseudo bonus lottery table. It is an example of an AT initial game number lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop type of various bells. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a precursor effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a precursor effect. It is a flow chart which shows an example of flag processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during AT sign. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in the state where AT is stocked. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing of a relief state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing after reel full stop. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a precursor effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a precursor effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a precursor effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a precursor effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a precursor effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a precursor effect.

A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the body frame and the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the door frame 3, the game board 5, It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 and was seen from back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the curtain plate member 50. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back, and a game attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to a left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 which is attached to the lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100 by penetrating the plate unit 200. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the game board 5 into the game area, and a dish unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives a game ball that has been hit into the game area. The foul cover unit 520 for discharging to the lower tray 202, the ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 for feeding the game balls of the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the glass unit 560 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front view left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a body frame 4 mounted on the right side surface of the body frame base in front view. , And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and pays out the game ball to the player side. The character-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with a character ratio display 1317. The character ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The character ratio display 1317 may be configured by an effect display device. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided on the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

Further, it is also possible to display the accessory ratio on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244 without separately providing a display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the character ratio is always displayed on any of the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, the character ratio can be notified to the player, and the player can check the condition of the pachinko machine.

The character ratio can be calculated by multiplying the number of character acquisition balls by the total number of acquired balls, as will be described later. For example, a pachinko machine with a high numerical value of the character ratio (for example, 90%) will receive many prize balls depending on the big hit. Since it has been obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low number of accessory ratios (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls in the jackpot, so it can be said that it is in poor condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the character ratio.

As a mode of notifying the player of the character ratio, the numerical value of the character ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the character ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in green. To do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a mode that is not mistaken for a decorative design. For example, it may be displayed in such a manner that it is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative pattern when it does not change, or that the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio is smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the aspect of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed according to the numerical value of the accessory ratio to notify the player of the accessory ratio. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the decorative design is displayed in red, and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and if 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. Or flashes. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, it may be displayed on the effect display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-described display mode may be changed, and not only the accessory ratio but also other information may be displayed. The other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called number of consecutive chan), the number of balls held, the remaining balance, and the like.

Further, not only the character ratio but also the continuous character ratio, the base value, and the like, which will be described later, may be displayed in different modes as described above. The character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the base value may be displayed differently.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320, which is sealed so that it cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The removed parts can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 can be used for the pachinko machine. It can be seen from the back side of machine 1. By enclosing the character ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the character ratio indicator 1317 for making the pachinko machine 1 look less gambling, and to improve the accuracy of the pachinko machine 1. You can display gambling.

When the back cover 980 is made of an opaque resin, a hole is formed in the back cover 980 at the position of the character ratio display 1317, or the position of the character ratio display 1317 is made transparent so that the pachinko machine can be used. The character ratio display 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1.

Even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, it is possible to flatten the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or to make the back cover 980 thin so that the accessory The ratio indicator 1317 may be made easier to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided an outlet for collecting game balls that have flowed out from the game area 5a via the outlet 1111 and the winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006 and the like, and discharging the balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is advisable to display (print, stamp, seal, etc.) that the switch is a switch for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320. Although the display switch 1318 is preferably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, other boards (for example, the production control board 4700) may be used if the operation is easy, even if the display is not the main control unit 1300. Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 or the relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it by mistake.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball-shaped tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. Based on the payout device 830 for paying out one by one, and guiding the game balls, which are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, and paid out by the payout device 830, and at the same time, store the game balls in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Depending on, the upper full tank ball route unit 850 which discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port, and the normal discharge port of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 Guide the discharged game ball forward and guide it from the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and guide the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port forward to the front end of the door frame 3 A lower full tank ball path unit 860 having a full tank guide path for guiding to the full tank receiving port 530.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910, which is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in a front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of game balls are housed inside. And a payout control board unit 950.

As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven and places the game ball emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a table unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning openings attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving the game balls hit in the game area 5a. ) And a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the substrate holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 causes the game to be played with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the received winning holes. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the left front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. Also, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view in which the front component member and the front unit in the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and the rear end of the game region 5a. A partitioning plate-shaped game panel 1100, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 are driven by driving the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling the contents of the game. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is inside the game area 5a (not shown).

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions within the gaming area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary draw, and a first special that is selected by accepting the game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. It is provided with a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, in which the game balls can be accepted according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second special winning opening 2006 is composed of two big winning openings, a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower special winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which game balls flow (FIG. 16).

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first special winning port 2005, and starting. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and is attached above the left end of the side unit lower 2200 when viewed from the front. Frame-shaped having a side unit upper 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006, which are attached at approximately the center in the game area 5a. The center accessory 2500 is provided.

The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the bookmark table unit 2000, and a lock mechanism attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600. 3020, and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in front view inside the back box 3010 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, and the back A lower right sphere passage unit 3035 for discharging game balls that are attached to the front end of the lower right corner in the front view inside the box 3010 and are received in the second big winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. And are equipped with.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 that covers the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rotatably attached rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 covering the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 that is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A lower back rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached to the front view left side above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box. A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper attached to the front center right side in the left-right direction above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 mounted below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

[2-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to a diagonally upper left in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 in a right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends forward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

On the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball hit in the game area 5a is provided. For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and flowed into the game area 5a. The launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the firing ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and the inspection at the manufacturing site and the inspection after installation in the hall become easy.

The launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a, such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002, detects an out ball before the winning opening sensor detects a winning of the gaming ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out balls and the prize balls, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting the prize balls caused by the game balls that are not counted as the out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the front unit 1000 is attached on the rear side and the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, an out port 1111 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on its rear surface.

In the state where the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled on the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 14) can be discharged downward.

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 is provided with a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a state indicator consisting of one LED for displaying a game state, and two LEDs based on the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Ordinary symbol display for displaying these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the ordinary lottery result after the variable symbol is displayed by flickering control, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition for change display has not yet been established, and the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 2002 (start prize) After the first special symbol is variably displayed by flickering and controlling the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result selected by (generation), these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the first special lottery result. With the first special symbol display device, the number of holdings which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established among the variable displays of the first special symbol relating to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002, A first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display, and eight LEDs to blink based on the result of the second special lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 (start prize). A second special symbol display device for displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is variably displayed by controlling, and the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. A second special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbols pertaining to When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, a round indicator including two LEDs for displaying the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening and closing patterns of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And is mainly equipped. In addition, a part of the display unit of the function display unit 1400 (for example, the first special symbol display unit) may be configured by a 7-segment LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the effect presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17), and the peripheral control board containing the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Performance display device]
Next, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. This effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. And are equipped with. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c that are open to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding.

[2-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface. In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is selected by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, either the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, which allows the game balls to be accepted, is provided.

Three (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially right below the hitting portion 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 in the front view. The general winning opening 2001, which is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a among the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the first special winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002 in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second special winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 is a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower big winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls flow. It is composed by. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged such that the second upper special winning opening 2006a is located near the lower right of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is viewed from the front of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first special winning port 2005, and starting. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and is attached above the left end of the side unit lower 2200 when viewed from the front. Frame-shaped having a side unit upper 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006, which are attached at approximately the center in the game area 5a. The center accessory 2500 is provided.

[2-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged right above the out opening 1111 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and a first special winning opening 2005.

The starting opening unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first special winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape that extends leftward and rightward and penetrates forward and backward. A ball receiving portion 2102 that protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction above the special winning opening 2005 and forms a first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guide portion 2103 for guiding the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guide portion 2103 for detecting the game ball received in the first start port 2002, and A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the one big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first special winning opening 2005 from the rear side, and the front end is open to the front with substantially the same size as the first special winning opening 2005. Box-shaped unit case 2111 and a horizontally-long rectangular flat plate-shaped first big winning opening door whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first special winning opening door member 2112, and a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received in the first large winning opening 2005. A first special winning opening sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball, a first starting opening sensor 2104 attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111, a first attacker solenoid, and a first special winning opening sensor 2114 and a main control board 1310. A starter unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection with the starter unit decoration board 2115 and a starter unit decoration board (not shown) mounted on the lower part of the unit case 2111 for illuminating and decorating the first special winning opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first special winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open toward the front in a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time.

In the starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 is opened upward, and the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is united by the ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided to the rear side of 2101, the first starting port sensor 2104 can detect and then the first attacker unit 2110 can be penetrated and discharged downward. In this embodiment, two first starting opening sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting opening sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting opening is detected. In 2002, it is determined that the game ball has been accepted. Accordingly, it is possible to detect an illegal act by inserting an illegal tool into the first starting opening 2002.

In the starting opening unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened in the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the rear into the mouth 2005 to close the first special winning opening 2005. The first special winning opening door member 2112 is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by the unit case 2111 in an upright state where the first special winning opening 2005 is closed, and the upper side is forward and By rotating so as to move downward, the first special winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is upright in a normal state (the first attacker solenoid 2113 is in a non-energized state) and closes the first special winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first special winning opening door member 2112 is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be located. That is, the first special winning opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so that the height increases from the lower side of the first special winning opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game sphere flows down in front of the first big winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first big winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game sphere is from below due to the inclination of the first big winning opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first special winning opening 2005 to enter the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first special winning opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first special winning hole sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in the figure, composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). Peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices in the game based on commands from main control board 1310, and effect display device 1600 or upper plate effect display based on commands from peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and an input/output device (I /O device) as a main control I/O port 1314, a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control A RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. The main control MPU 1311 has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 has a first starting opening sensor 2104 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 and a second starting opening sensor for detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004. 2551, a general winning hole sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a gaming ball received in the first big winning hole 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006, and the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball received in the second lower big winning opening 2006b. The detection signals from the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, the discharge ball sensor 3060, the launch ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor for detecting the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are respectively passed through the main control I/O port 1314. Is entered.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting opening solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I/O port 1314. The drive signal is output to the display device, the second special symbol memory display device, the normal symbol display device, the normal symbol memory display device, the game status display device, the round display device, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2557, whereas a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 2104 and the second starting opening sensor 2551 are provided. And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game ball is frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches having high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3015.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various kinds of information (game information) regarding games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 issues various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the periphery of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. It is transmitted to the control unit 1511. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power board in the power board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. This stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314 and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

On the main control board 1310, an accessory ratio display 1317 is attached at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The character ratio display 1317 displays the character ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

A display switch 1318 is provided on the main control board 1310. The display switch 1318 may be a push-button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317. The character ratio display 1317 may always display the character ratio, and the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311, CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, matching block 13119, unique. It has information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary for executing the program.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect contents of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation unit that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for winning a special symbol, a lottery for a winning symbol of a special symbol variable display game, and a lottery for hitting a normal symbol.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to/from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. In addition, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various kinds of information (game information) related to a game, various commands related to the payout of gaming balls, and the like to the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the character ratio to the character ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupt and various time control. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMI that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table determined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I/O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0-A15), and 8-bit data (D0-D7) can be input/output.

The clock circuit 13118 generates the internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by the set number and outputs it from the CLKO terminal to the outside. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The collation block 13119 is a functional block that collates using a predetermined code whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address outside the predetermined range of the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit estimates that the access is due to an unauthorized program, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a time-out signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by the reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program with respect to an arithmetic result, and includes a multiplication circuit 132111 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a product of 32 bits, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result obtained by multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing the values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 causes the multiplication input register 131212. , 1311213, the multiplication result can be acquired by referring to the multiplication result register 131214 after a predetermined number of clocks has elapsed.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a quotient of 32 bits and a remainder of 32 bits. It functions as a conversion circuit that outputs an input value (divisor, dividend) by performing quotient and remainder conversion by a function.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores the dividend of 32 bits or less in the division input register A 131216, and stores the divisor of 32 bits or less in the division input register B 131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored value at a predetermined timing and divides the dividend by the divisor. The division result register A131218 is stored, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131212. When the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 may erase the read values and clear the registers. Further, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 at the timing when the start command is input. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not have to be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may have values already stored therein (without clearing the stored values), or may be capable of overwriting values.

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131212. The process from writing a value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the calculation result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks). The values can be stored in the registers 131216 and 131217, and after a predetermined number of clocks has elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be acquired by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, a division process is required to calculate the base value, and since the division in which the CPU 13111 executes the program is executed by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions, a considerable time is required. It is something like this. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). .. In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division processing from the writing of the values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the calculation result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. The base calculation process during the timer interrupt process can be efficiently executed.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmitting/receiving circuits, and each data transmitting/receiving circuit transmits/receives data for one channel to/from a predetermined device. In FIG. 20, only the data transmission circuit is shown, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is mounted) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 has the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio, as described above. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148 and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

The data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores a command for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 causes an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores the baud rate setting for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, whether or not to use the FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, 1××1010B meaning even parity In the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and 1×××1000B meaning parity unused are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set the parity when transmitting data at a high speed outside the main control board 1310.

Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise as compared with communication with another board via an electric wire for communication. Also, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and the need to use parity is scarce. In addition, along a pattern for transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, left and right and/or a thickness direction of a signal line provided on a surface or an inner layer of a printed circuit board). A ground pattern is provided on a layer adjacent to the above), and the noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shield effect of the ground pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 defines the data amount at which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 causes an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 has a vacancy, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

It should be noted that the relevant bit of the status register can be used to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, there is no vacancy in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed after it is determined that data has not been transmitted from the FIFO.

The baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 sets 19200 bps, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 sets 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317. The channel 2 used for communication with is set to 1200 bps.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed depending on the data transmitted on each channel. This is because the game ball is rolling inside the game machine, and the electronic circuit of the game machine is in an environment susceptible to noise. For this reason, data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the payout, which is directly related to the profit given to the player, is surely transmitted. On the other hand, since the peripheral control board 1510 has a large amount of data to be transmitted and is not related to a ball being thrown, it transmits data at a high rate. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command Request re-transmission. Then, when it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. Therefore, the communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting opening to the start of the fluctuation of the symbols, which may reduce the interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or a low rate (1200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Good. Further, the communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 has a high rate (19200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Rates between and may be adopted. This is because if the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistors of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if the transmitted data is abnormal due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the content displayed on the character ratio display 1317 is displayed. This is because there is no need to set the transmission rate to an extremely low value, since is returned to the normal state.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission state, and each bit is defined as follows, for example.
Bit 7: SnTC is a flag indicating completion of transmission, where 0 indicates transmission and 1 indicates transmission completion. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (communication mode not using FIFO), it is a flag indicating transmission data empty, where 0 indicates not transferred to the transmission shift register and 1 indicates transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when the data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, it is set.

In the SnTFT FIFO mode, it is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level, where 0 indicates that the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level and 1 indicates that it is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. The amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, the data is written in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5-2: Unused (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL transmission buffer, a bit for clearing break code transmission, emptying transmission data, or setting a transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written from the outside. For example, when the contents of the buffer are forcibly cleared, 1 is set in the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written in the FIFO, but the transmission of the written command is stopped due to some circumstances (for example, an abnormality has occurred). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of asynchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal (not shown) for synchronous communication. In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114, not the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission/reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a start/stop synchronization serial communication circuit and a synchronous communication serial communication circuit may be separately provided.

Although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data fetch timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Discharge control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. Although not shown in detail, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc., performs a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, and a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by the ball feed solenoid 551. A firing control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a game ball in the payout device 830 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and a ball removing switch for starting a ball removing operation is provided.

[3-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 951 has a built-in micro, such as a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands and a RAM that temporarily stores data. Issue control MPU which is a processor, issue control I/O port as an I/O device, external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the issue control MPU is operating normally, and issue A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has not only built-in ROM and RAM but also a function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various types of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various types of commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch being input from the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. It

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I/O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1. Among the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED display is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means "ball ball" (specifically, blades). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout vane and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout vane is difficult to rotate, and the number "3" is displayed. If it is, the fact that there is a “count switch error” (specifically, there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is displayed, and the number “5” is displayed. "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value) is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, "full retry" is displayed. Is displayed (specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. If it is, "CR is not connected" is notified (the electric connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Occasionally, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial system, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. To be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. Entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Firing controller]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball forwarding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551, although not shown in detail, is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to a ball-sending solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of a game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

Based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the launch solenoid drive circuit inputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504, as a launch reference pulse. When triggered, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 triggered by the input of the ball feed reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to send the accepted game ball to the ball launcher 680 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 is provided with a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244 is provided.

[3-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the production drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors for operating the various effect units provided in FIG. 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the frame 3, and a color provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive emission data composed of a door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like is transmitted from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port to the door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the upper plate effect display device 244 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512. In addition, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 and the production button pressing sensor 258 of the production operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 outputs the signal based on the operation signal. Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts the sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and uses the speaker 921 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or sound signal) as sound information are output to the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By sending a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has a built-in WDT and an external WDT. Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, a plurality of initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command, display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box The serial input/output port is set to 250 kbps as the bit rate in this embodiment.

This effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives the game board side lighting blink command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

In addition, the production drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Or output to.

[3-3b. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing described later, a command or pachinko related to control of game effect output from the main control board 1310. It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying the year/month/day and time information for specifying the hour/minute/second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit stores the current calendar information in the peripheral control RAM. And the current time information in the time information storage unit.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal which will be described later and is executed in response to the input of the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing is being executed and a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated and the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN to count the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the operation button 220C is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220. Based on the acquired various information, whether or not the operation button 220C is operated is monitored, and whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect is appropriately determined.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation process described later is displayed on the game board side decorative board 3053 and door frame side by the sound source built-in VDP. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the speaker 921 sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation processing to be described later, and informs in addition to the music and sound effects. The sound data of the sound or the notification sound is output to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data to output to the sound source built-in VDP among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data, Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data to be the light emission mode of various LEDs , Update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound of the sound command data instructing the sound data of music, sound effect, etc. The pointer is updated to instruct which sound command data is output from the command data to the VDP with built-in sound source.

Further, in the scheduler update processing, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data to the output target is set. Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, the production control program is information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command Receiving means) analyzes various commands received (command analyzing means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the production control program further notifies various abnormalities. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral controller 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormalities are automatically notified. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before that abnormal condition is resolved. You can

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is various commands classified into status display, for example, In the case of an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side A decorative substrate 233 (rendering device) and a lamp (rendering device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to auditorily warn the outside (error notifying means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 despite the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game can be suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information and the time information storage unit stored in the calendar information storage unit, which is acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer in the emission control program in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and the emission data is arranged in time series to form the emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is performed. Created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511 and setting in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. From the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and a game board side decorative board 3053. And drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. The sound data such as music and sound effect is incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the production control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM externally attached to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs up the contents. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

The peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral controller steady processing. Set to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the V blank signal which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps for a second, and thus the V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the effect display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 60 will be described. .. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting in the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps for a second, and thus the V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

In step S1100, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, this routine is finished as it is. When the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V in this embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer is selected from the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order which form the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. Drives electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids according to the drive data instructed by, updates the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and executes the motor and solenoid drive processing every time. Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, it is possible to obtain the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input, so that history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation The operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decoration board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When judged, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact.

After step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. 1 area and backup 2nd area are respectively copied and backed up.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 60, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt process is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. Even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. Performance display control unit]
Next, the effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510, although not shown in detail, is displayed as a microprocessor. A control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the effect display device 1600 and the plate effect display device 244, and an effect display device 1600. , An image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the sub effect display device 3114 or the upper effect display device 244, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM. I have it.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to produce the effect display device 1600, the sub-display. Drawing control of the effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244 is performed. If the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs the interrupt process when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores control programs (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244. A plurality of corresponding schedule data, its control data (display command) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the plate effect display device 244. ing. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. As the non-resident area transfer data, screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114 or the upper plate effect display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data is stored in advance in various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which to transfer is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the top screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input to the VDP, the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM based on the input screen data to generate the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect. Drawing data to be displayed on the display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244. Further, when the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114 or the upper plate effect display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. .. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244 is held in the line buffer and is held in this line buffer. The drawing data for one line is output to the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114 or the upper plate effect display device 244.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114 or the upper plate effect display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the effect display device. 1600, the sub-display effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244 will be affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 or the plate effect display device 244. For example, in the case where various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, or the upper plate effect display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, houses, mountains, roads, and the like that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set to a position arranged on the screen or a vertical relationship when the sprites are overlapped with each other (hereinafter, referred to as “order of sprite superposition”), and the effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3114 are set. Or on the upper plate effect display device 244.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 perform main scanning for sequentially setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from the left to the right when viewed from the front. , Sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the plate effect display device 244 perform the main scanning as the effect display device 1600 and the sub effect. When viewed from the front of the display device 3114 or the upper plate effect display device 244, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right to pixels for one line. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 move to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially scanned from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each pixel.

[4. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 10, FIG. 16 and FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, That is, it is possible to hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the downflow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) While coming into contact with, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, the center character object passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 through the guide path 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 on the left and right thereof. Is released backward from either of the. When the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so the game released from the central guiding portion 2531. The ball has a high probability of being received in the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the first big winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300 brings it to the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, or the like. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500 that is higher than the highest part. ), and enters into the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although not shown in the figure, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right circulation space 2541, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails and are circulated while changing the downward direction thereof variously. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at an upper portion, a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 normally closed by a second starting opening door member 2549 are provided.

The game ball flowing down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the downstream right circulation passage 2542. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize hole 2006a and the second lower prize hole 2006b that are lined up on the left and right as the second prize hole 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and is lowered from the left end of the discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side in front view into the game area 5a. Is released. The downstream end (discharging plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball goes to the first special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first special winning opening 2005 is open. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted by the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game balls that circulate in the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 flow down while the increase in the circulation speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right distribution space 2543, the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a may enter, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 through the second outlet 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. One ordinary random number is obtained from the above, and the obtained ordinary random number is collated with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform an ordinary lottery. When the result of this normal lottery is “normal hit” when the time saving control to be described later is not executed, the second starting opening door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second starting opening is opened. 2004 is opened, it is possible to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, the ordinary lottery is performed to select whether the "normal win" is "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". When the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is “first ordinary hit”, “second ordinary hit”, or “third ordinary hit” when the time saving control is executed, the second starting door member 2549 is Front view After turning in the counterclockwise direction and opening the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then the front view Opening and closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 to make it impossible to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 by turning in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting opening 2004). Repeat) times. In addition, when the result of the ordinary lottery of the ordinary lottery is "first ordinary hit", "0.3 seconds" is set as the period of each of five times when the second starting opening 2004 is in a state in which the game balls can be accepted. , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "second ordinary winning" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times when the second starting opening 2004 is set in a state in which the game balls can be received. , "0.3 seconds", and the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "third ordinary hit", the second starting opening 2004 is set to a state in which a game ball can be received. The period is set to "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", and "second normal hit" and "third normal" The "hit" is a hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "first ordinary hit" (it is easy to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2004). Further, when the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbol performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is changed after the variable symbol display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is made (normal suggestion of a lottery result) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal variation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. It should be noted that during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, control is performed such that the normal fluctuation time is shortened compared to normal (a state in which time saving control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting opening door member 2549 to open the second starting opening 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, for example, the time saving control is executed. When there is no time saving control, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is displayed on the gate unit until the game symbol passes through the gate unit 2003 and the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display is stopped (until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested). When passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device, so the variable display start of the ordinary symbol is ended until the variable display of the previous ordinary symbol is finished (ordinary lottery result I try to put it on hold until the suggestion ends. Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the variable display of the normal symbol can be started. Until the start of variable display of ordinary symbols is suspended. It should be noted that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 has an upper limit of four, and if the number is more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated within a predetermined numerical range. By obtaining one first special random number from one special random number and matching the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit") , "Small hit", etc.) is drawn. Then, based on the first special lottery result selected by lottery, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display device are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode according to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after the first special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, in the first special lottery result which is drawn by the game balls being received in the first starting opening 2002, "defeat", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" Yes, by comparing the obtained first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which one of them, and after the jackpot game is normal (low probability state: with a probability of about 1/395 in this example). Probability improvement control (high-probability state (also called probability variation state): in this example, winning the big jackpot with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) Whether or not to execute (whether or not it is a probability big hit) and whether or not to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out (whether it is a time saving big hit or not) Or) and the period for executing the time saving control (the number of times saving time: special symbol (the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change)) are also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

In addition, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. Of the second special random number of, and by comparing the obtained second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. The second special lottery result is generated. Then, based on the selected second special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, in the second special lottery result that is drawn by the game balls being received in the second starting opening 2004, "outfall", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and it is determined which one of them by collating the obtained second special random number with the jackpot determination table, and further after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low-probability state: In this example, the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot with a probability of approximately 1/395). Probability improvement control (high-probability state (also called probability variation state): this example) With a probability of about 1/44 to win the big hit) (whether it is a probability big hit or not) and at least the second special lottery result is a time saving control that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when the result is out of sync. Whether or not (time saving state) is executed (whether or not it is a time saving big hit) and the period for executing time saving control (time saving number: special symbol (the number of changes of the first special design symbol and the second special symbol)), it is also determined. It is supposed to be done.

In the case where the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. , After the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, display 8 LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first big winning opening Any of 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 becomes a state in which a game ball can be received in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 while the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number from the payout device 830 (for example, 11 when the game balls are received in the first special winning opening 2005, or 15 when the game balls are received in the second special winning opening 2006). The game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 to receive the game balls when the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 can receive the game balls, many games can be played. The balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first special winning opening 2005 plays the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The open/close pattern of closing after opening to a receivable state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", "1R jackpot" A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or is predetermined to the first special winning opening 2005. When either one of the number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted into the second special winning opening 2006, the condition is satisfied. The opening/closing pattern (a single opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game ball into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "4R jackpot", 4 rounds, in the case of "5R jackpot", 5 rounds, in the case of "16R jackpot", 16 rounds are repeated, and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. In addition, when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the opening/closing pattern (first big winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)) Meanwhile, it is difficult to practically enter the game ball into the first special winning opening 2005 in an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is closed after being opened so that it can be received. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, “16R jackpot” (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big winning opening 2005. Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is received or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is received in the second special winning opening 2006. If that condition is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in an open/close pattern in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the above first jackpot After a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game balls can be received, or the predetermined first winning opening 2005 is determined. Either the number of existing game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) is received in the second special winning opening 2006, whichever condition is satisfied. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening/closing pattern that puts the game ball into the unacceptable closed state is executed may be the actual special lottery result, and the number determined in advance in the first special winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result (for example, , 7) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted into the second special winning opening 2006, the game ball is satisfied. Opening and closing patterns that make the unacceptable closed state and opening and closing patterns that are executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (first big winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds). (Between 0.6 seconds) and an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is closed after being in an open state in which the game ball can be received). For example, as a result of the special lottery, "8R jackpot which is substantially 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted in the first big winning hole 2005, or the second big winning hole. If a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted in 2006, or if any one of the conditions is satisfied, after repeating the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is in the unacceptable closed state four times, When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the opening/closing pattern (first special winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)), You may make it repeat 4 times the opening and closing pattern which closes after it becomes the open state which can accept the game ball.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second big winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of “big hit”, for example, in the first round (1R), the second upper special winning opening 2006a is opened to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed by satisfying the condition of being unacceptable, and then allowed to be accepted next. Until (during the interval), the second round special winning opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game balls can be accepted, and when the second lower special winning opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has elapsed in the meantime, the second upper special winning opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds have been exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "big hit", one of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is in a state in which the game ball can be received, so this state When you hit the right button to distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will always be accepted in the second prize hole 2006, and you can enjoy the player by eliminating the missed game ball. You can

In addition, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned plurality of big hits, whether or not the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (when the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. If the second special lottery result in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed) is the 2R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is the 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Also, in the low probability non-time saving state (state in which neither probability improving control nor time saving control is executed: also called normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute probability improving control after the big hit game. If it is a 2R probability variation big hit, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improving control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in the state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improving control after the big hit game. When it is a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002, and the receiving of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol display devices is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the stop display of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 (until the result of the first special lottery is suggested) and (2) Until the stop display of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the receipt of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (until the result of the second special lottery is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second starting mouth 2004, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is newly started on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device. Because it is not possible, start the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery It is put on hold until the result and the suggestion of the second special lottery result are completed. Specifically, the first starting random number sensor 2551 and the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104. By the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004, and stored, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The variable display start of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbols) can be started. The number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively. For more than four, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are played. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without holding it. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are designed to preferentially digest the second special random number. That is, if the second special random number is stored and the variable display start of the second special symbol is suspended regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the symbol.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) and the effect display device 1600 (the sub effect display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs that are lit during this stop.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled based on a control signal (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and a special lottery result is suggested by the effect image. Is done. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, each decoration in a state where a series of a series of decorative design patterns composed of a plurality of different designs (for example, three columns of a left decorative design, a middle decorative design, and a right decorative design) is displayed. The variable display of the design row is started, and after that, it is sequentially stopped and displayed (in this example, the left decorative design → the right decorative design → the middle decorative design is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative design rows are stopped and displayed. Then, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, a plurality of decorative symbol rows fluctuate according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start winning occurs. After the display, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. The decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 are larger than the first special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) that suggests the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and the time that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left center, according to the special lottery result that is drawn. Using the decoration unit 3050, the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc., as appropriate, It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, the system/user reset process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the timer interrupt process executed in a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer activated in the system/user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization process of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 to be writable (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written to the watchdog timer control register, and further "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Then, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the time from when the power is turned on to when it reaches the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure warning signal is input from. In the wait processing, a predetermined monitoring weight value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated, and the processing waits for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required to activate the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). .. When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the character ratio (area for character ratio calculation 13128) out of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased (step S30). ), and proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off through normal processing such as a power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the character product ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and the checksum calculated in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( Parts other than the character ratio calculation area 13128 are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

Then, it is determined using the check code whether the work area for character product ratio calculation (area 13128 for character product ratio calculation) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the character product ratio calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the character product ratio calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

If one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 It is preferable that the data in the backup area, which is first determined to be normal, be copied to the main area after being determined in the order of 2, and N. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

In the character ratio calculation area, the data in the character ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined time, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, a predetermined amount of operation (for example, a predetermined number of shot balls, a predetermined number of prize balls, a predetermined number of special symbol variation display game, a predetermined number of special symbol variation display game jackpot, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (the game control data 13132 and the role ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase on condition. That is, by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased, and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the staff at the game arcade. It is possible to prevent concealment of a state in which the accessory ratio is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine that has been modified to have a high accessory ratio or a low accessory ratio.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the initial setting for setting to the various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization processing is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is initialized and interrupts are permitted. Further, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initialized. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is initialized.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation processing, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. To generate a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the gaming state at the time of return after power-off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric auditors. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure notification signal (step S36) and determines whether the power failure notification signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure notice signal is not ON (result of step S38 is “No”), that is, the random number updating process is executed (step S40). In the random number updating process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for making a winning decision is mainly updated in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. The random number updating process for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are the main processes on the main control side (normal means after initialization).

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-off time process (power-off time setting means). In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, for example, the output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption in the time until the main board side power-off processing is completed, and to reliably complete the main board side power-off processing.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Then, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the work ratio calculating work area (the work ratio calculating area 13128) (step S50). If the check code has a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, not in the main board power-off process.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Then, the data of the main area of the work for character role ratio calculation (area 13128 for character role ratio calculation) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) by the accessory ratio calculation/display process, instead of the main board power-off process.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the character ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the character ratio is retained even when the power is cut off. , It is possible to calculate the ratio of role goods in long-term operation.

Further, a value indicating that the backup is normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as the power failure flag (step S56). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, by outputting "01H" indicating the write prohibition to the RAM protect register, the writing of the RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S58), and the process waits until the power is restored (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the main control program to first set RBS (register bank selection flag) in the program status word to 1 and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in the present embodiment has banks 0 and 1 and is switched and used each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect a game ball that has entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, and a winning ball control processing. The payer ACK signal or the like from the payout control board 951 which informs that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in (4) is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Then, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer updating process (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time when the special symbol display 1185 lights according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, the normal symbol and the ordinary electric auditors product control process are normally determined. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up in accordance with the pattern variation display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the signal is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number update process 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number and the small hit, which are updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S40 in the system/user reset process (main control side main process) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a self-check for creating a prize ball command for paying out game balls and for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 sends the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the region corresponding to the current game state, and the role ratio calculation region 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information that informs the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and transmits it as the transmission information described above. Store in the information storage area. Further, in the prize ball discharge processing, the number of discharged prize balls is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) defined by the game state of the character ratio calculation area 13128.

The character product ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the character product ratio calculation/display process (step S89). .

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a fraudulent activity detection process (step S84). In the fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the game ball is detected in the special winning opening 2005, 2006 by the count switch when the jackpot is not in the gaming state, the main control program is executed. Creates a winning anomaly display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the big hit symbol random number value. Then, if the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, then the probability variation state is shifted to, while if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state is changed to a state other than the probability variation state. Here, the "probability variation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether to open/close the second starting opening door member 2549 according to the result of the lottery in the ordinary lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), and the starting opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous for the player. Shift to the state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated. If the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio calculation/display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is called, and the accessory ratio is calculated. The prize ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the character ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the character ratio, the character ratio (the gambling property of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

Note that, regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, if the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio may be displayed. . Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the character product ratio is displayed on the character product ratio display 1317. Good. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, when the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, if the character ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division or subtraction for calculating the character ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. A specific example of the method of displaying the character ratio will be described later. When the display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the value is displayed every time the display switch 1318 is operated. You may calculate only the value that Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated.

Even if the pachinko machine 1 detects an injustice and stops the game, it executes the character ratio calculating area updating process (step S81) and the character ratio calculating/displaying process (step S89). Regardless of whether or not a fraud is detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to confirm the role ratio even during the fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands are normally received from the payout control board 951 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in the state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening/closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as signals, time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the payout control board 951.

In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

In the output data setting process, the test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as a command and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created by the timer interrupt processing of this routine. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). The watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be clear by setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 controls the character ratio and the continuous character. You may perform the calculation process of an object ratio. In this case, the main control board 1310 may send a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio to the peripheral controller 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout controller 952 to the peripheral controller 1511. A command for displaying the character ratio or the continuous character ratio may be transmitted.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation/display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within the predetermined range (or outside the range), the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the character ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed to give a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the character role ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code corresponds to the check code stored in the character rate ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the main area is normal, so character product ratio calculation processing is executed, and character data is calculated from the data in the main area. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the character ratio is calculated by multiplying the number of character acquired balls/the total number of acquired balls, and the number of continuous character acquired balls/the total number of acquired balls is calculated. It is recommended to round off or round off the fractional part (the value below the decimal point) of the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, the updated value may be copied to the backup area every time the accessory ratio and/or the continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

When the number of bits for storing the number of acquired balls is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311, is insufficient, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted in the calculation of the character ratio, and the character ratio is calculated. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit arithmetic, the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 out of the acquired number of spheres stored in 32 bits are extracted and operated. It is advisable to store in a special register (16 bits) for division. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or smaller than the maximum value of the number of bits that can be used for calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for calculation.

Further, if the total number of balls acquired is divided by 100 (rounding down the decimal point) and used as the dividend (divided number) to calculate the character ratio, it is possible to avoid calculation with a decimal.

Alternatively, the upper limit of the character ratio may be set to 99, and may be set to 99 when the calculated result of the character ratio is 100 or more.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character role ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal. Therefore, the character rate ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the character part ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character part ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148). ), the character ratio calculation process is executed, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated from the data of the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character role ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the character rate ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the character ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined (step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), the character ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, similarly, it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the character ratio (area for character ratio calculation 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculating area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing by the RAM 1312 in the initialization processing because the power failure flag and the checksum are not calculated when the reset code is reset in the middle of the main board side power-off processing. The backed up data is initialized, but if a check code is periodically calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation/display processing, even if the pachinko machine is turned on again, the character ratio calculation work area This is because the data in the character role ratio calculation area 13128 can be left without being erased.

Then, 1 is added to the backup area allocation counter value to update it (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area allocation counter value is odd, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area allocation counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). It is possible to prevent the abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas by allocating the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area allocation counter value and writing the data in only a part of the backup areas.

When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas to which the data are written may be allocated according to the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Next, the calculated character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory character ratio and the calculated value, a conversion table (not shown) is referred to, and data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory character ratio indicator 1317 is acquired. The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the accessory ratio is the accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the upper two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

Although the character ratio calculation process (step S156) of the character ratio calculation/display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the character ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the character ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data in the storage area related to the acquired number of balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128. Data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

As described above, since the data for calculating the character ratio in the character ratio calculation/display processing is copied to the backup area, if the normal power-off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset, etc. , The data for calculating the accessory ratio can be protected.

Note that the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, and thus may be configured by one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the processing for determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the method of checking and backing up data differs depending on the model. However, if the method of checking and backing up data is shared between the models, it may be arranged in the common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of an arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

In the ROM 1313, a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a character ratio calculation/display code 13135, and a character ratio calculation/display. An area for storing the usage data 13136 is included. In the ROM 1313 of the present embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1, such as a game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And a character ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating a character ratio, such as a character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and character ratio calculation/display data 13136. Has been assigned.

A free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the character ratio calculation/display code 13135. When displayed in the dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. It should be noted that the value stored in the empty area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area or the debug area or a value having a low frequency. The value stored in the empty area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

In addition, even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not separated, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 are stored in a part of the debug area. Good. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the character ratio calculation area (character ratio calculation/display code 13135 or character) that is a process not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. The ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a defect (bug or the like) in the character product ratio calculation/display code 13135 affects the game control.

In the debug (inspection function) area, programs and data for purposes not directly related to the game are stored. For example, various functions other than game control of the pachinko machine 1 are used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. The debug (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal. Further, in the character ratio calculation area, a program for calculating the character ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read from and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and it is configured such that writing to the area cannot be performed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area accessible only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed. However, from the debug (inspection function) code 13131 to the game control code 13131. Is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The character ratio calculated by the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the character ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the character ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. In addition, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing the details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The role ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the result of the role ratio calculation is stored. .. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, and the power-down process on the main control side (Fig. 22 may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the power-down process on the main control side (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as the power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

If it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the power-off process on the main control side, the value in the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). In addition, in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing, each time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digit of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of balls to be acquired in the character ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) when the main control MPU 1311 times, and the character ratio calculation process (step of FIG. 24) of the character ratio calculation/display process. It is read in S156). In this way, the character ratio calculation/display processing reads the acquired sphere number data from the character ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) stores the acquired sphere number data in the character ratio calculation area 13128. By writing, it is possible to completely separate the game control program and the program for executing the character ratio calculation/display processing, and to share the program for the character ratio calculation/display processing even with game machines having different specifications. ..

In the character ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the character ratio calculation/display process, the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio are calculated as the character ratio and the continuous character in the character ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The data of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are read in the accessory ratio display processing (step S170 of FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area for the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the character ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27A shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27A, the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, the total number of acquisition balls, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio are stored. The number of winning accessory balls is the number of winning balls due to winning an active winning object (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 being opened, the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is opening). is there. The number of consecutive winning role balls is the number of winning balls for winning a winning role during which the winning role is continuously moving (for example, the winning opening is open in a series of big hits). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The character ratio can be calculated by the number of character acquisition balls/total number of acquisition balls. The continuous character ratio can be calculated by the number of continuous character acquisition balls/total number of acquired balls. The number of character acquisition balls, the number of continuous character acquisition balls, and the total number of acquired balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing. Is stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls and the total number of acquisition balls correspond to the total cumulative total of FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 429496295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are 1-byte storage areas and can store up to 255 decimal numbers.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of other acquisition balls, the number of continuous character acquisition balls, the total number of acquired balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are stored. In addition, the storage area of each data is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n=10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total winning balls is obtained. When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all the data move and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after a predetermined number of prize balls worth of data are stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (number of character acquisition balls, number of shot balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of jackpots of special symbol variation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number, The write pointer may be moved.

The write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all the data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for every predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the accessory ratio is calculated using the latest data of 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer completes one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the accumulated value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Therefore, even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data by going through the ring buffer once, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27B, the number of accessory acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27A. The number of other acquired balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than a winning accessory (a prize opening that does not open and close, for example, a general prize opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and the write pointer moves when this value reaches a predetermined number. As for the number of character acquisition balls, the number of other acquisition balls, the number of continuous character acquisition balls, and the total number of acquired balls, the data of the storage area having the write pointer is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the character ratio and the continuous character combination are acquired. The material ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B) can be acquired, and the number of balls for ordinary electric auditors, the number of balls for special electric auditors, and the number of balls for starting opening acquisition are obtained. , Other winning prize winning ball number, continuous winning character number, total winning ball number, character ratio and continuous character ratio are stored. The storage area of each data is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after a predetermined number of prize balls worth of data are stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of acquired balls (special electric accessory acquisition number of balls, number of launched balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of jackpots of special symbol variation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number Alternatively, the write pointer may be moved.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer completes one cycle and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes round and round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C, the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of balls, and the ordinary electric winning ball Each of the number, the number of balls for special electric accessory acquisition, the number of balls for starting mouth, and the number of balls for winning prize holes is a 2-byte storage area, and a decimal number up to 65535 can be stored. Number of balls acquired, number of balls acquired other, number of balls acquired consecutively, total number of balls acquired, number of balls normally electric winning, number of balls special electric winnings, number of balls starting winning opening and other winning balls The cumulative number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store up to 16777215 decimal numbers. Since the total is the total of data for 6000 prize balls×n (60,000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of balls acquired, number of other balls acquired, number of balls acquired continuously, total number of balls acquired, ratio of characters, ratio of continuous characters, number of balls acquired of ordinary electric characters, number of balls acquired of special electric characters, starting opening The total cumulative total of the number of acquired balls and the number of other winning prize winning balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a numerical value up to 16777215 or 429496295 can be stored in decimal. Since the total sum is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The cumulative total and total cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal values.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27C, the total number of acquired balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27B. The number of other balls acquired is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than a prize (a prize opening that does not open and close). The number of balls for ordinary electric accessory winning is a prize ball obtained by winning a prize for an ordinary electric auditors product (the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open) based on the result of the lottery based on the ordinary symbols. Is a number. The number of special electric accessory winning balls is the number of prize balls due to winning the special electric winning object that is in operation (for example, the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 being opened) according to the result of the lottery based on the special symbol. The number of balls acquired in the starting opening is the number of prize balls acquired by winning the winning in the starting opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of other winning prize holes is the number of winning balls that are won by winning the winning prize (general winning prize 2001) that is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger the special symbol lottery. The number of ordinary electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of special electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of starting mouth acquisition balls, the number of other winning prize winning balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, and the total number of acquired balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area in which the write pointer is located is updated, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27A, when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not deleted at the trigger. Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, or January). Similarly, the total sum shown in FIGS. 25B and 25C may be deleted every predetermined period.

In addition, the data of the character ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated character ratio are abnormal values (for example, the character ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculated result of the character ratio greatly changes from the previous calculated value. , Number of balls acquired> total number of balls acquired), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but all the data in the character ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. In addition, when the data of the character product ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated character product ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. Alternatively, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, the normal backup area data may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Structure of character ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The character ratio display 1317 includes a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed as one unit in one package, but both may be housed in another package.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data displayed on the character ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operating state of the character ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating a data acquisition timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit a signal for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signal transmitted on the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. The direction of the signal (current) shown in the drawing differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is the anode common type or the cathode common type, but the example of the anode common type is shown.

To the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171, a resistor 13174 that determines the value of current flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, an 8×4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2×8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, and It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit controller 3181, a duty ratio controller 3182, a data selector controller 3183, a standby mode controller 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it as parallel data to the 16-bit data latch 3172. The four bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode (see FIG. 35) of the driver circuit 13171, and the four bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are data of the detailed setting.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and controls D15 to D8 in each control unit (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). Unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184) and sends D7 to D0 to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 captures the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). Further, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 among the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 which stores display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), when D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 determines that the data register 0, that is, 8-bit Digit-A. A signal for selecting the 8-bit data latch 3173 is sent so that the data latch 3173A stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided by the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, fetches the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3D at a predetermined display timing of each digit and sends it to the decoder 3175 and the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 converts the input data into a character to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, using the character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34), and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The 2×8 data selector 3176 selects the data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to use the decoder with reference to the decoding setting, and the 8× when the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 Select data from the data selector 3174. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 outputs a current signal for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp using the data from the 2×8 data selector 3176. The current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal, as described above.

The driver 3179 receives the sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 controls which of the 7-segment LEDs (digits) is displayed by controlling the current sink timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be turned on to 1 to 4 digits by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXXXX11B, a setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGIREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio controller 3182 controls the duty ratio when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by an external setting, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio controller 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, a duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has a 16-step duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 according to an external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001×××B, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 is set to 0000××. By inputting the data as XXB, the setting of NO DECODER without using the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select the data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and the 2×8 data selector 3176 when the decoder is not set to 2 The x8 data selector 3176 controls to select the data from the 8x4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by an external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are 0100B and D3 to D0 are 0000B. In the standby mode, the current setting is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Further, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all the data held inside by the setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all the data held in the register or the latch is cleared and initialized.

The oscillator 3185 generates a clock used in the driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of the first mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner so that the main control board box 1320 cannot be opened without breaking once closed. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) or opening seal is stuck. The opening seal is a seal for recording the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31B shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes a main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that improper modification has not been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been performed by not arranging parts around the main control MPU 1311.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 or the model number 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable that the accessory ratio display 1317, the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 are mounted in the same direction. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same as the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310. The accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 may be mounted as described above. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. The accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that they face each other.

Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for pulling out the signal line from the main control board 1310 are aligned in the longitudinal direction with the accessory ratio display 1317, and are end portions along the long side of the main control board 1310 (the upper length in the figure). Although it is the upper end along the side, it may be mounted on the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the wirings (harnesses) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlap the accessory ratio display 1317, and that the connectors CN1 and CN2 be arranged at positions where the visibility of the accessory ratio display 1317 is not hindered. ..

Furthermore, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the unsealing sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to a position where neither the main control MPU nor the accessory ratio display 1317 overlaps.

By mounting the accessory ratio display 1317 in this manner, the model number display of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct direction, and the visibility of these is improved, and the manufacturing process and the game hall are improved. Even in the inspection after the installation, it is possible to confirm the ratio of the accessory and the presence or absence of the modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31C, the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numeral display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are mounted. The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numeral display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping with the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized modification, and therefore the meanings of arranging them on the main control board 1310 in the same direction are small.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close to each other as possible.

For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). It is arranged so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

In addition, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311, in order to easily confirm from the outside that improper modification has not been made, as indicated by the dotted line. Therefore, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in any case, they are mounted so that L1 is larger than L2.

32B is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32C is the same as the implementation example shown in FIG. 32B. It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 having no signal pattern is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101. It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

Explaining the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies a clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are It is placed so that it does not intersect. Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through to the back surface or the inner layer by the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged so as to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

The main control board 1310 is generally a two-layer board having patterns on the front and back surfaces and no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. It can also be applied to a multi-layer substrate having inner layers (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register that stores the data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence or absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence/absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and the data of the data selector control unit 3183 It is written in the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3D, and the data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for lighting the 7-segment LED and is written in the data register in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The duty ratio, the presence/absence of decoding, and the number of display digits, which are set in the register described above, do not have to be set each time the character product ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, in step S28 of FIG. Is set as. If the initial setting is performed only once, the setting may be changed by the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Therefore, a predetermined condition (for example, every time the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected, the switch button is It may be reset each time is pressed. As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, correct display can always be performed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when numbers are displayed, D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, and therefore the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 without conversion and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the character ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 according to the present embodiment has five states, namely, an initial state, a data input state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Is being prepared.

In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, all lighting, and standby mode setting commands. The blank instruction cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after the completion of each setting. When the normal operation command is input without setting the display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits used, the duty ratio, the decoder used or not used, and the display data input. A register in which data is written is selected with D11 to D8, and contents to be set in the register are input with D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side to light all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction includes a standby instruction that is divided into two depending on the parameter and transits to the standby state, and a clear instruction that transits to the initial state. The standby command maintains the setting at that time, stops the operations of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. In addition, the clear instruction clears and initializes all the data held in the registers and latches, and turns off the display.

Since the blank command is also a kind of display command, in the present specification, “display” includes all the states of the 7-segment LED, some of the segments are lit, and all the segments are all lit.

A display example in each state described above will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the power of the game machine is turned on, the driver circuit 13171 has not been initialized or the display data has not been set, and therefore the game machine is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is displayed as shown in FIG. All segments are turned off and become in a non-illuminated state. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed and the game can be performed, the character ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine.

Then, when the display data is input after the control data is set in various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays a predetermined display. In this predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit. This predetermined display may allow the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 to be confirmed.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lighting corresponding to the input data). Specifically, the character ratio display state is entered, a code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and a numerical value of the character ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), “y175” is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display so that it can be identified. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed by blinking, or the decimal point is turned on or blinked.

When the display switch 1318 is further operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, another type of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. Also in this case, similarly to the above, it is preferable to display such that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the character ratio indicator 1317 is displayed (FIG. 36(E)), and after the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is preferable to turn off the light and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. The state of non-display of the accessory ratio is the same as that after completion of the initial setting, but may be a different mode as long as it is distinguishable from the display of the accessory ratio.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the character ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 is abnormal and the character ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be illuminated or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. The abnormal display may be different from that shown in the figure, and may be any form that can be distinguished from the normal accessory ratio display to indicate that the accessory ratio cannot be displayed.

Further, in any state, when the all-lighting command is input, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lighted. When a blank command or a standby command is input in any state, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are extinguished while holding the data. When a data clear command is input in any state, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned on, and the state returns to the initial state.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

As described above, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the character ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a performance display device, displays the numerical value of the character ratio in the lower two digits, and the numerical value type in the upper two digits. Is displayed.

Further, the accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value may be alternately displayed.

The display mode of the numerical value of the character ratio may be displayed differently depending on the result of comparison between the character ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, red when the standard is exceeded, etc.) and displayed. By changing the display mode according to the result of comparison with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the character ratio display 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the result of comparison between the character ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in a different manner. For example, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Further, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is turned on, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, it is displayed by blinking.

When the character ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, one LED lamp is set to 10% to display the character ratio. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display content (proportion of character role or ratio of continuous character product, display of latest data or display of medium-term data, etc.)

If the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of prize ball data may be short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged. Therefore, display in different display modes (display color, blinking, etc.) You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the reference value.

The character ratio display 1317 may switch and display the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The medium-term data display is the ratio of the accessory character calculated by using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated by using the total sum in the ring counter shown in FIGS.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may also be used as the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, it is preferable that the progress of the game is continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the accessory ratio display to the game state display. For example, when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variable display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but when the main frame 4 is closed before the change time elapses, the variable display for the remaining time may be performed. it can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variable display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, the player can be configured so as not to feel uncomfortable.

The character ratio display 1317 may display a character other than the character ratio. For example, the number of prizes or the number of prize balls paid out for each type of prize hole per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched between 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, 10 hours, etc. by operating the display switch 1318.

The character ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the ball payout rate in normal times excluding special prizes (big hits), and can be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls. The number of shot balls (the number of out balls) is detected by the shot ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention members 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game balls from the ball launch device to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). The number of out balls may be detected by the discharged ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, the number of game balls detected by the out-passage ball sensor 1021 is provided by providing an out-passage ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the bottom of the game area 5a. The number of out balls may be detected by the total of the number of game balls detected by the starting port sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball supplied to the ball launching device 680, and a game ball that was launched from the ball launching device 680 but did not reach the game area 5a (so-called foul ball). With a foul ball sensor (not shown) for detecting the number of foul balls subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor, the number of out balls (the number of launched balls) is calculated. It may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the discharged ball sensor 3060 or the projected ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

The number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as a payout rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric support, during probability change, during time reduction), and calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each game state. .. By displaying the base on the character ratio display 1317, it is possible to confirm the deviation from the design value of the pitching performance during operation for each gaming machine on the spot. Further, since the exit performance can be confirmed without using the hall controller, the inspection for each gaming machine becomes easy at the time of the on-site inspection of the gaming hall.

The character ratio display 1317 is for information on other base prizes and prize balls (the number of prizes to the general prize hole 2001, the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes at the starting hole 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, The number of winnings to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls by the winnings, and the like) may be displayed.

The character ratio display 1317 may always display the character ratio, or may display the character ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318 which is a push button switch is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the character product ratio is displayed on the character product ratio display 1317. Good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated when the main body frame is not open, the character ratio display 1317 does not display the character ratio.

Further, the display content may be changed every time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the character ratio (cumulative), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the character object for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls. Display the ratio in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits is switched to A6 which means the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the ratio of the continuous character for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) of prize balls is lowered to the lower two. It may be displayed in digits (FIG. 37(B)). Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the character ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the character ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (the latest data display). (FIG. 37(C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits is changed to y6 which means the character ratio (total), and the character ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is reduced to the lower two digits. It may be displayed (medium-term data display) (FIG. 37(D)).

The display switch 1318 does not have to be provided as an independent switch, but may be used also as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated while the pachinko machine 1 is operating. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff in the game hall is one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation, and to confirm the gambling property of the gaming machine in operation.

Further, since the data of the number of prize balls is accumulated as the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 and the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is erased when the check code is abnormal, an incorrect character product ratio display. Can be avoided.

Also, since the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the condition for deleting the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate prize ball number data is held. , You can calculate the exact character ratio.

Further, since the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be prevented from being accidentally deleted by the operation of the attendant at the game hall. Since the object ratio calculation/display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by the erroneous operation of the staff at the game arcade. Further, since the game hall cannot intentionally delete the character ratio calculation/display data, the reliability of the character ratio displayed can be increased, and concealment of a state where the character ratio is high can be prevented.

[9. Show base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
Up to this point, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the accessory ratio has been described. Next, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value is described exclusively, but the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball is won in the starting opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), random number lottery is performed and a special symbol variable display game is executed. .. The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game is a variation pattern of a relatively short time (a regular variation pattern of about 10 seconds, a shortened variation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easy to be selected when the number of holdings is large) Alternatively, there is a relatively long time variation pattern (variation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, since the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of the error, it can be notified at the timing when the special symbol variable display game is switched to the next variable display game. However, when the variable display time is long, when a predetermined condition is satisfied without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (the number of paid balls)). It is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, during the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (the number of paid balls)). ) Changes), calculate and display the base value. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 for calculating and displaying the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration indicated by reference numeral 1317 is a base display rather than a character ratio display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may use a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 28, for example, and may have a different number of digits (eg, 2 digits). A 7 segment LED may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires data of the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the accessory character ratio calculation area updating process (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. Note that, in the following description, the "role portion ratio calculation area update process" in step S81 of FIG. 23 is read as "base calculation area update processing", and the "role portion ratio calculation/display processing" in step S89 is referred to as "base". Calculation/display processing" will be replaced with the description. Further, the “characteristics ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is replaced with the “base calculation area 13128”, and the “characters ratio calculation/display code 13135” is replaced with the “base calculation/display code 13135”. The description will be made by replacing "accompaniment ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls paid out as a game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 is updated. To do. In particular, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The state of the game being in the special state means that the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can obtain many prize balls, but even if the opening and ending times of the big hit game are included. Good. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the right-handing instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include a time saving period, a positive change (during ST), and a power support. Furthermore, during a time saving period, during a probable change (during ST), and in a game state other than during electric power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting opening 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball winning the starting opening is detected as an out ball). Up to the required few seconds) may be included in the prize.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special prize regarding the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize, normal winning (so-called big hit) to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during special prize (low probability or non-time saving) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electric actuated auctions (big prize holes 2005 and 2006) are used for calculating the base value based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). The other accessory (starting opening 2004) is not used, and whether the winning ball number and the winning ball number are used for calculating the base value or not is switched according to the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). It will be. Not to use the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means that the paid prize balls are not counted in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value). Even if a winning signal is input, it also includes not creating edge information for paying out a prize ball by the winning signal.

Further, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during shortened working hours, and since it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize because it is opened for a short time, it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated during a period other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be released only during a time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and winning balls to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits other than during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of small hits other than during the prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the prize ball number or the out ball number. On the other hand, if the game state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of award balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of award balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls may correspond to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the receipt confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Further, the main control board 1310 may send a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the number of award balls (paid award ball number) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of payout may be used. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped. Further, although the game balls are won in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the upper limit value is the hold, and the prize balls are paid out even when the winning in the starting port is not held, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the prize is not generated, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total prize ball number is recorded in a total prize ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the switch input processing of step S74 reads the detection signals of these sensors, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out ball number is output. The number of balls=1 is acquired. The total out ball count is recorded in the total out ball count storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total out-ball count is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40). Therefore, the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is generated. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the base value calculation process. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 from the payout control section 952. May be sent.

Further, in one timer interruption process, even if the information of both winning and out balls to the winning opening is acquired, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or a prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Then, the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (or an out ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Further, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of winning a prize to a plurality of winning openings is acquired, the total number of award balls due to a plurality of winning awards is the total award ball number (or, in the embodiment described later, an award ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when winning is detected for a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of five winning balls and a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of three winning balls, a total of eight winning balls are totaled. (Or the prize ball number buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning, which is detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020, may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). Further, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (further, the launching control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops the operation. It is also possible to add only the number of prize balls relating to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) to the total prize ball count or the prize ball count buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) when the player operates the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls relating to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the palm or the finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball is not fired or an illegal act, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. Further, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, the base is calculated by excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the special prize, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the general winning opening and the starting opening is counted even in the special prize. The base value may be calculated by counting the number of out balls excluding the number of balls that have won the big winning opening.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Furthermore, when an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs and a base value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated), the base value is not calculated. Good. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the total prize ball count/total out ball count is multiplied by 100 to calculate the base value. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number multiplied by the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated to the nearest hundredths, and the base value is not calculated below the decimal point. Also, if this predetermined number is 10,000, the base value is calculated to a decimal two digits with a percentage of 100. In other words, if the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit is divided by 100, the base value of 100 fraction with two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. In the wait time of 32 clocks from the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to the reading of the data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 does not perform any processing but waits for other processing. You may go. For example, a random number for determining a big hit may be updated between the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and the reading of data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or the signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time Also the hard random number is updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. The other process related to the game includes at least a process of updating the random number for determining the winning or losing. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random number that affects the result of the game is updated once or more.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 causes an error, and therefore it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges.

There are various methods of reporting the base, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, a base display (7-segment LED) 1317, a performance display device 1600, 3114, 244, etc. may be used to notify the value of the base constantly or at a predetermined timing. Notifying the player of the base value may allow the player to check the condition of the pachinko machine. In that case, you may apply the display mode demonstrated by the accessory ratio to a base value. When notifying the value of the base, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage on the above-mentioned display device or display device. The value below the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On display devices capable of displaying an image such as the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the first decimal place is displayed for more detailed display. May be.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates the display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as the base notification command. More specifically, the main control MPU 1311, as shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, designates a digit for displaying a numerical value in D15 to D8 by “data n setting”, and designates a display content in D7 to D0. Is generated and written in the shift register 3171.

Further, when displaying the base value on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and when the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. .. For example, it is displayed by blinking a numerical value or changing the color (normally green, when the standard is exceeded, red, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It is also possible to divide the display into a plurality of stages and change the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage for display. Also, at each stage, a self-deprecating comment may be displayed when the base value is low, such as "I feel good," "I'm feeling down," "I'm not terrible," "It's amazing in some sense." If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is behaving differently than expected, and it is possible that fraud has occurred. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a mode showing a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, “similar” means that at least one of display, lamp, and sound is the same.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, and the like. Further, when the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification not possible on the effect display device may be generated. By sending a notification command to the generated sub-board, the production device controlled by the sub-board can notify the state of the base, so a wider variety of notifications can be made than the notification on the main board, and the load on the main board can be reduced. Can be reduced. Further, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to separate the failure of the base display 1317 from the absence of the base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the effect display device, the abnormality of the base value can be known without looking at the back side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, it is advisable to use a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 for constant notification. Further, it may be notified at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variable display game is not being executed, the timing of ending the special symbol variable display game).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game arcade. In this case, as in the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.) described later, when the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls). Good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary (high, low) signal indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. Further, a signal having a length showing an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse of 30 milliseconds when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Further, the number of continuous pulses that indicates the outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, 3 continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

The base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command may not be generated when the base value is not updated. Even if the base notification command is not generated, the display of the base value is continued.

Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, and a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated to notify the player or hall employee of the base abnormality. You may notify.

Further, whether to inform the player of the base may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because if the player is informed of the base value at all times, the player's attention may be neglected regarding the effect of the special symbol variable display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Is.

Further, the effect of the special symbol variable display game which is being executed or will be executed in the future may be changed based on the calculated base value. For example, a plurality of display selection tables may be prepared, and effects may be selected from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Further, during the special symbol variable display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%). Therefore, the effect of the special symbol variable display game may be changed when the threshold value is exceeded or dropped during the special symbol variable display game. The effect may be changed in the same manner or may be changed in a different manner when the base value rises and falls below a predetermined threshold.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base. The prize ball count buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). After that, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. The number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Absent. On the other hand, when backing up the number of unpaid prize balls in the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout, but a payout command reception confirmation is transmitted to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, the abnormality of the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variable display game, and the base value is abnormal across the predetermined threshold. Even if it is determined that, the base value calculation process is continuously executed without stopping the game regardless of the abnormality determination. For example, in the special symbol variable display game, there are short time ones such as normal variation and long time ones such as reach variation, and the base value is calculated between the start and end of one special symbol variable display game. When the condition to be satisfied is satisfied multiple times, the base value may be calculated each time, and the base value may be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variable display game is limited (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variable display), the base value may change depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the time may not be noticed, the information necessary for operating the hall may not be output at an appropriate timing, and the hall may be annoying.

In addition, if the game ball that has been launched does not win the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value decreases. In this state, the player is losing, so, for example, an additional effect is added to the effect that is being performed on the liquid crystal (for example, an effect related to a win not related to a change in the base value, or an effect that appears with a change in the base value). A special effect to be added) or a notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit (a notice effect that is not related to a change in the base value, a notice effect with a high expectation such as the next notice effect, or a change in the base value. A notice effect having a high degree of expectation (for example, the base value is displayed in a rainbow display) may be performed among the specific effects that appear. As a result, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the start opening and the general winning opening, and can be motivated to continue the game.

On the other hand, if most of the game balls that have been shot win the starting opening or the general winning opening (if more than the average value of the number of past winnings), the base value rises. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is out, the player is provided with more game balls than usual, so that the player's disappointment is reduced. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to an effect with low expectations.

[9-2. Variations on the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42 to FIG. 44, variations of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figure 41: Calculation of number of prize balls → Update of number of prize balls → Calculation of base value → Transmission of payout command ・Figure 42: Calculation of number of prize balls → Update of number of prize balls → Transmission of payout command → Calculation of base value ・Figure 43: Calculation of number of prize balls → Sending payout command → Updating the number of prize balls → Base value calculation ・Fig. 44: Counting prize balls → Sending payout command → Confirming command reception → Updating number of prize balls → Base value calculation ・ Fig. 45: Calculation of number of prize balls → Sending payout command →Payout completion notification→Award number update→Base value calculation The variations of FIGS. 41 to 44 are not limited to the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. It is applicable to any of the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation/display processing.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and the base ratio calculation is performed after the output data setting processing (step S90). The display process (step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. After that, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. As described above, depending on which of the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the unpaid prize ball number among the prize ball numbers calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89). To execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs the output data setting process. In step S90, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in an embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command to calculate the base ratio. The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted), instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. As described above, depending on which of the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the unpaid prize ball number among the prize ball numbers calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

The timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation or the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830. The order of the step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs the output data setting process. In step S90, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls is calculated as the number of award balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation is received. Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the award ball count buffer is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, since the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the payout control board 951 backs up the data of the number of unpaid prize balls. Therefore, although it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after the ball payout completion notice is received from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls defined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs the output data setting process. In step S90, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, it sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or in the embodiment described later, the number of prize balls that have been paid out). The prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, so the main control board 1310 backs up the data of the number of unpaid prize balls. For this reason, although the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used in the calculation of the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processing shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the number of prize balls is updated when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input processing (step S74). Further, in the processing shown in FIG. 43, when the payout command is transmitted, the number of prize balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed. In the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls in the prize cannot be accurately counted due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the gaming state is in the prize and the update timing of the prize ball. In particular, the problem becomes serious when the time from the winning of the prize hole to the updating of the number of prize balls is long. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning in the special prize, and the flag is inherited to the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification by the prize. Then, by using the flag, it is determined whether or not the prize ball is in the special prize at each stage. In this way, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated even if it takes a long time from the winning of the prize to the update of the number of prize balls.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these occasions, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known from the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be manufactured efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects the winning of the gaming ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port in which the winning is detected is not determined. Add to the number of payout balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, the prize ball number buffer for calculating the base value or the total prize ball number may be updated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects the winning of the gaming ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which the winning is detected. Is sent to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out the prize balls, the payout command is transmitted, and the number of unpaid balls is held in the payout control board 951. In this case, each time the payout command is transmitted, the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value may be updated.

Further, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In addition, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold value Th1, each time a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winnings or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As described above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings. However, when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base indicator 1317 is updated in real time. May be displayed, or the base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every one minute).

[9-3. Timing of update of prize balls and calculation of base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・FIG. 39 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle. ・FIG. 46 and FIG. 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls. ・FIG. 48 and FIG. 49: The base value for each predetermined number of out balls. Calculation-Figures 50 and 51: Base value is updated when one of the number of prize balls and the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies the predetermined condition (step S813). Note that, in FIG. 46, the same portions as those in the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 39) described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the prize ball number or the out ball number. On the other hand, if the game state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether or not there are prize balls, that is, whether or not the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). It should be noted that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, and the number of prize balls described later becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). For example, the abnormal number of prize balls means that many prize balls are present at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, in consideration of the number of prize balls of a general winning opening or a starting opening, a prize corresponding to 10 or more winnings per minute). Sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide an allowable range of a plurality of stages and judge the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls. When the number of prize balls is abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls does not have to be added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813, and the number of prize balls added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813 is subtracted. Good.

As a result, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player or the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods of reporting the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, various lamps, effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sounds, and the like may be used to notify the abnormality of the number of prize balls. Further, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall. Further, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. In addition, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and is notified by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, effect display device, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and all the data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, in the initial state, the game is started from the operation confirmation. As another method of stopping the game, the game is once stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped), and then the error notification is stopped and then returned to the original state to restart the game. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a power failure detection signal even if it does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. Then, after the error notification is completed, the data in the main control internal RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in the same state, the suspended game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, since 100 game balls (that is, out balls) may be launched into the game area 5a and all the game balls may enter the general winning opening or the starting opening, the number of winning balls is reported to be abnormal. It is desirable that the mode to be performed is a mode in which the degree of urgency is lower than that of a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error) and that the mode of operation is gentle (for example, a lower volume and a lower light amount than a normal error notification). Further, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 second and notification may not be performed.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822).

Then, it is determined whether or not the award ball abnormality notification timer started in step S817 has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so that the prize ball abnormality is notified by the predetermined number of shot balls. May be. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined in step S985 whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal. However, after the number of out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. Whether (that is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, when the number of award balls exceeding the number of out balls is counted in a predetermined time, or considering the number of award balls of a general winning opening or a starting mouth, the number of out balls is high (for example, 50% or more). Such as when.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 40) described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). In addition, the determination result obtained by comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 47), the prize ball number buffer value is changed by the flag. May be determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, in a gaming situation in which the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the prize ball number is set. Remaining (fractional number Th1 subtracted from the prize ball number buffer is left in the prize ball number buffer), other parts are stored in the memory (total threshold number Th1 is added to the threshold Th1), and used to calculate the base value. Execute the process. Specifically, when the threshold value Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when five prize balls are generated by winning the general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for the calculation of the base value, and the remaining four pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four award balls left in the award ball number buffer is used for calculating the base value when the award ball number buffer value becomes equal to or more than the threshold Th1 next time. Further, although the threshold value Th1=100 pieces has been described, other values such as 1000 pieces may be used. However, if a large threshold value Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a big hit is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed, so the threshold value Th1 is equal to or less than the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit (a plurality of types). If there is a big jackpot (for example, a big jackpot in 4 rounds and 8 rounds), it is preferable to set it to the minimum value or less of the number of award balls. Further, from the viewpoint of early detection of fraud, it is preferable to update the base value frequently. For example, the threshold value Th1 is preferably 10 instead of 100, because the base value is frequently updated.

Note that steps S891 and S892 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1. Furthermore, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of RTC (real time clock).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or indefinite), so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

In addition to the case where the total number of out balls is 0, or when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of shot balls (out balls) is obtained, and the game is normally performed. Since it is not in the state of being present, it is not necessary to store a numerical value in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and to calculate the base value. When the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as the threshold value. The maximum value of the theoretical base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls of 15 per prize hole is 1500%, so a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. Also in this case, the base value may not be calculated, or the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is set, and if it is outside the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is set to the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, the abnormal base value may be displayed even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same as the total number of balls since the pachinko machine 1 started operating, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. It may be initialized at a timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, and thus fraud can be detected early. This is because in a normal game, a high probability that a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of shot balls) will not win the general winning opening 2001 and the starting openings 2002 and 2004. Therefore, an abnormality in the winning of the winning opening (general winning opening 2001 or starting openings 2002, 2004) that is always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the example shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the calculation amount required for calculating the base value (for example, when calculating the base value for each prize ball) (for example, The load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated to notify the new base value, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. To be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48, the out-ball number is recorded in the out-ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the out-ball number satisfies the predetermined condition (step S819). Note that, in FIG. 48, the same step numbers are given to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there are prize balls, the number of acquired prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

Then, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired out-ball count is added to the out-ball count buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. Therefore, for example, when a game ball is won in the starting opening and it is determined to generate the prefetching effect, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (flashing display, red hold, etc.), The player expects that the special symbol variable display game corresponding to the prefetched hold will be a big hit, but if the special symbol variable display game is lost, the player is discouraged. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned discouragement of the player can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the prize ball generation timing, and the base value increased by the prize ball due to winning the start opening is notified. That is, even when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at the time of winning at the starting opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning at the starting opening is added, the above-described predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1=100) is obtained. If not reached, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should rise (only the lower number changes due to the number of digits displayed, and the display may not change). Therefore, even if the look-ahead effect described above is off, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the condition is good), and can suppress a decrease in interest. In other words, even if it is determined that the prefetch effect is executed, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1). Further, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. ..

The player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, at the start of the game, it can be selected by the operation button 220C. Further, the timing of calculating the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is decided to perform the prefetching effect, it is preferable to execute an effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. It should be noted that if the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery is not executed even if the winning is achieved at the starting opening. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, when a specific error is made, even if the winning opening is won or the general winning opening is won, it is treated that there is no winning, and if the winning balls are not paid out, the number of winning balls is not counted, and depending on the winning, the base value Is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that, in FIG. 49, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the storage area for the number of out balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls is composed of 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, the determination result obtained by comparing the number of out balls with the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), and the number of out balls is predetermined by the flag in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 49). It may be determined whether or not the threshold Th2 is equal to or more than the threshold Th2.

If the out-sphere count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900). Note that steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball-count buffer value with the threshold Th2.

Then, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate a base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operating, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize). Initialization may be performed for each number of balls or for each predetermined number of out balls.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. The base notification command may be one that simply notifies the base value, one that notifies the base value with a specific effect, or one that notifies the abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed each time the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which fun is pursued.

Further, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (detection of prize, transmission of payout command, arrival of payout command, completion of payout of prize balls, etc.). This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball). For example, even if the shooting is not carried out for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the ball-hanging (vine) state caused by the game ball catching on the nail arranged in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because there are cases where a prize is won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of whether or not there are out balls.

When both the out-ball number and the out-ball number buffer value are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball number buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the out-ball number buffer value may be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, so that the base value is calculated more than the case where the base value is calculated every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated to notify the new base value, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. To be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 50, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , Record the number of out balls in the out ball count buffer. Note that, in FIG. 50, the same portions as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are designated by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the abnormality of the base value. The base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, or the base value may be calculated or the base notification command may not be generated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls of the base calculation area 13128 is the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 39, FIG. 46, FIG. 47, FIG. 48) executed by the main control MPU 1311. 49, 51, etc.) and read by the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 40, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Further, the data of the prize ball count buffer and the out ball count buffer of the base calculation area 13128 is written in the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -Read by display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation/display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), and a game ratio calculation/display process program is shared by game machines with different specifications. it can.

FIG. 52A shows an example of a work area structure of the simplest method. The structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52A stores a prize ball number buffer, a total prize ball number, an out ball number buffer, a prize ball number buffer, a specific prize ball number buffer, a total out ball number, and a base. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on the condition that the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls). Used to calculate The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid to the player other than during the special prize. The out-ball number buffer is the number of game balls that the player has shot during a period other than during the prize, and is used to calculate the base when the out-ball number meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out-balls). Be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls winning the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning sphere number buffer temporarily stores the number of spheres won in a particular general winning opening or starting opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is counted by the number of balls passing through the outlet (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls shot by the player other than during the special prize. The base is calculated by total prize balls/total out balls×100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total accumulation of FIG. 52(B) described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It is possible to store numerical values up to 16777215 or 429496295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of the base of FIG. 52(B) described later, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers. It should be noted that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded with a decimal number may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), a prize ball number buffer, a total prize ball number, an out ball number buffer, a prize ball number buffer, a specific prize ball number buffer, a total out ball number and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. 52(A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls, for each predetermined time) (for example, for every 6000 prize balls). It is configured by a ring buffer having (n=10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all the data are moved to change the storage area where the data is updated. .. Then, after a predetermined number of prize balls worth of data are stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. The writing pointer may be moved when the data other than the number of prize balls (the number of out balls, the predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all the data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for every predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The total number of total prize balls and total number of out balls is the total value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the value of the base total is the total number of total prize balls and total number of out balls. It is a value calculated from the value, and when the ring buffer goes round and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the data in the cleared area is excluded and the cumulative value is Recalculated. The total sum of each data is the total value of all the data collected in the past, the value of the base total sum calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total total value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one cycle, the total cumulative value including the original data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are each a storage area of 2 bytes, and a numerical value up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. Since the total is the total of data for 6000 prize balls×n (60,000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a decimal number of 16777215 or 429496295 can be stored. Since the total sum is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The base total and the total total are each 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers. It should be noted that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded with a decimal number may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52A, the stored data is not erased, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, or January). Good. Similarly, the total sum shown in FIG. 52B may be deleted every predetermined period.

If the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value, but all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, the data in the normal backup area may be copied to the main area, and then the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Display base value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Since it is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Naturally, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off.

The base display 1317 may always display the base value or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318 which is a push button switch is pressed, the display of the base value is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. The base value may be displayed on the base display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, a predetermined display may be provided on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is displayed (FIG. 36(E)), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. , It is good to reduce the power consumption of the game machine. This base non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36(B)), but may be a different mode as long as it can be distinguished from the displayed base value.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, it is possible to quickly switch from the base display to the display of the game state when the main body frame 4 is closed. For example, when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variable display game, the base value is displayed, but when the main frame 4 is closed before the elapse of the variable time, the variable display for the remaining time can be performed. .. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variable display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, the player can be configured not to feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the character ratio) may be displayed on the base display (character ratio display) 1317. In this way, the base value (characteristics ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, so that the reduction in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the body frame 4 is open. Further, in the island facility in which the pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back side of the pachinko machines installed on the other side can be seen. In such a gaming machine, by opening the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, it is possible to check the bases (proportion of character parts) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back. When the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, on a display device that displays the effect of the special symbol variable display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer showing the condition of a pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Moreover, you may transmit the signal for displaying a base value via a relay substrate.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 does not change even when shifting to the energy saving mode. This is because if the light amount of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the game balls have not won in any of the winning openings and the pending storage of the special symbol variable display game has been exhausted. .. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs the BGM that is output in so-called normal fluctuation. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the game machine is played, and the game machine is explained. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, in order to suppress power consumption, the light amount of the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is necessary to reduce the light amount of these display devices. Good. Further, if the light quantity of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who is going to play on an empty table can easily visually recognize the result of the last lottery.

Also, even if the game ball does not win at the starting opening or general winning opening, if the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is a nature. If the number of prize balls does not increase even if the number of out balls increases when the game balls are fired, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will be in revenge.

By informing such a player of the state of the game on the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display unit that displays the base value maintains the light amount before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or raises the light amount, and It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

In this way, we explained the maintenance or increase of the light quantity of the display unit that displays the base value, but with an emphasis on the reduction of energy consumption, even if the light quantity of the display unit that displays the base value is decreased or turned off. Good. For example, a predetermined operation during the energy saving mode (a firing stop button that forcibly stops the firing, an operation button that changes the rendered effect, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of RAM, a power supply to the gaming machine It is preferable to reduce the light amount of the display device on which the base value is displayed, when the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine, such as the supply adjustment button for switching the presence or absence of) is detected. Furthermore, not only during the energy saving mode, but by performing the above-mentioned predetermined operation, the light amount of both the lamps that reduce power consumption and the display that displays the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. Good.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp and the display unit that displays the base value, reduce the light intensity of the lamp that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode before the display unit that displays the base value. It may be turned on or off. In this case, the light amount of a lamp or the like which consumes a large amount of power is first reduced, and the power consumption is greatly reduced. In addition, the display unit that displays the base value may be turned off or turned off before the lamp, etc., and the light intensity of the display unit that displays the base value may be turned off. Produce an effect. In addition, the lamps that reduce power consumption and the indicator that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time during the energy saving mode. In this case, the amount of power consumption can be reduced and the energy saving effect is high. .. In addition, before and after the time (meaning “previously” and “simultaneously”) in these descriptions includes the order of internal processing timings and the order of appearances from the player.

Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The indicator for displaying the base value may be configured by multi-color LEDs, and the emission color may be changed to white, blue, or yellow at each stage. Also, by configuring the display device that displays the base value with a performance display device, the base value is low at each stage, such as "I feel good," "I'm feeling down," "It's not dangerous," "It's amazing in some sense," etc. Occasionally you may display self-deprecating comments. Furthermore, without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value, the effect of adding the comment as described above may be executed on the effect display device 1600 that displays the decorative pattern.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the exit]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the processing described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated by using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out mouth, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
54 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt period. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 54 to FIG.

If the out-ball passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out-port 1111 detects the out-ball, there is a problem that the accurate out-ball number cannot be counted. This means that the game ball shot toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the general winning opening 2001, the starting opening 2002, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in addition to the out opening 1111. Therefore, the out-passage ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls shot toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out mouth, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has a structure similar to that of the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the bottom of the game area 5a and passes through the out port 1111 to flow out from the game area 5a (out. An out-passage ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of passage balls) is provided. The out-passage ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By placing the out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111, it can be made aware that the out-balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

Further, the out-passage ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a collecting gutter in which game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-port 1111 are aligned. If the player is installed at a position that cannot be visually recognized, it is not necessary for the player to be aware of counting out balls. Further, by providing the out-passage ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111 it is possible to secure a sufficient place for arranging the effect display device and the accessory (movable body), and improve the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. it can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the out-passage ball sensor 1021 is rolled so that the game ball that has passed through the out-passage ball sensor 1021 does not bounce back. It is better to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the number of prize balls, the number of out-pass balls, and the number of prize-winning balls are acquired in order to calculate the base value using the number of out-pass balls at each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are given to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

After that, the number of out-passing balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of out-out passage balls and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , The number of out-passing balls is recorded in the out-ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. Note that, in FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out-out passage balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out-out passage balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the winning ball buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of out-pass balls and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. Then, the acquired number of out-pass balls and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out-ball number buffer, winning-ball number buffer). As described above, the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

Further, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired out-passage ball count and winning prize count are recorded in different storage areas, the out-ball count increases by 1 when the winning prize is won. The counting of the number of spheres passing through the outlet and the counting of the number of winning spheres are executed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out-number-of-balls buffer and the winning sphere-number buffer. At that time, if both the out ball count buffer and the winning ball count buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, the number of balls passing through the out mouth is given priority, or the winning ball count is given priority. It is better not to be decided by lottery, but to be decided in advance. At that time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over the other processes, the prize ball payout process can be executed promptly, but it may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same parts as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are designated by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of out-out passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). ). The sum of the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the award ball number buffer value is added to the total award ball number (step S897), and the award ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). .. Note that steps S896 to S901 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (out ball number buffer value+winning ball number buffer value) with the threshold Th2.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the number of out-passing balls to calculate the number of out balls, so the number of out balls is accurately counted, and the base value is accurately calculated. it can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process or the inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317 and the process for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of abnormalities in the base]
The process described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
-FIG. 57: A base value is calculated every time a timer interrupt cycle is performed.-FIG. 58: A base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. A pattern for calculating a base value for each predetermined number of prize balls, a predetermined pattern. The description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each out-ball number is omitted, but it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG. 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or the hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display processing ends. The method of notifying the abnormality of the base can be the same as the method of notifying the base described above.

For example, one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the effect display device 1600, 3114, 244 may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. By notifying the player of the abnormality in the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display device or display device to notify the abnormality of the base value. The value below the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On display devices capable of displaying an image such as the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the first decimal place is displayed for more detailed display. May be.

Further, when displaying the base value on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, it is displayed by blinking a numerical value or changing the color (normally green, abnormal red, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It is also possible to divide the display into a plurality of stages and change the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage for display.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, and the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. Further, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall.

Note that the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57 is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, when the total number of award balls and the total number of out balls are determined at a timing when the number of award balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update processing to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are designated by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or the hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display processing ends.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, for example, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of prize balls and the number of out balls. It is preferable to use it in combination with the base calculation area updating process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall employee can It is possible to know the possibility of illegal operation on the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of the gaming machine which cannot be detected by the conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of change in base]
Next, an example of the gaming machine for notifying the change of the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by a pachinko machine naturally goes up and down. Since the base value represents the condition of the gaming machine, the player who is playing the game cares about the change of the base value in addition to the base value itself. Therefore, it is desired to inform the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the upper and lower sides of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the history of the present base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 59, the same steps as those of the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the base value management timer has timed out (step S904). If the base value management timer has not expired, it is not the time to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used for recording the base value at every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times out. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128 or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be formed in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, a predetermined time×10 base values. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time×n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored, The base value may be calculated if necessary.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral controller power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral controller 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. It is determined whether or not (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is referred to, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the decrease of the base value. (Step S10302). Then, if the predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the base is decreasing is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the lowering of the base continues is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than (equal to or larger than) the current base value, the base decrease duration measuring timer is reset (step S10305), and the display selection table during base rising is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, it is determined in step S10301 whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value. However, the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether they are large, equal, or small. You may. Since the base value is obtained by division, it is generally a decimal value. Therefore, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing an example of the display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variable display game by the random number selected with the winning of the winning opening as a trigger (or before the start of the special symbol variable display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or the base value is not changed, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are used when the base value is decreasing. To be selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes each item of effect number, effect content, change time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The effect content is the name of the effect. The fluctuation time is the time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the effect to the end thereof. The remarks are information that describes the outline of the effect so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (out) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is out and the base value is increasing or there is no change, and the display selection table 1 (out of 1) shown in FIG. Is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is a normal big hit that does not lead to a probability variation state, and the base value is increasing or there is no change. The display selection table 1 (2 per win) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is a positive variation big hit that derives a positive variation state and the base value is increasing or there is no change.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2 that are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

If the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease, the display selection table 3 is used to select an effect, and the selected effect is selected. You may switch.

Further, whether to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because if the player is constantly informed of the change in the base value, the player's attention will be neglected for the special symbol variable display game that is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variable display game (game situation where the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the effect of the special symbol variable display game is preferentially executed, and when it is not changing, the base value rises. It is advisable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guide for the change in the base value) at the time of descending or descending.

The specific effect may be displayed at a timing when the time when the special symbol variable display game is not executed continues for a predetermined time. This is because, if the particular effect is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension continues and fatigue is accumulated. When the game ball wins the starting opening while the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variable display game is executed. This is because the jackpot lottery is performed upon the winning of the winning opening, and the special symbol variable display game is started. Therefore, it is better to let the player pay attention to the special symbol variable display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1) or the number of out balls has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but may be executed without fail if the same condition is satisfied.

Further, it is preferable that the particular effect is not displayed when the base value rises but is displayed only when the base value falls. This is because if the player is informed of the increase in the base value, the player's expectation rises, and if the base value does not rise to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to the gap with the expectation. is there. On the other hand, if the player is informed of the decrease in the base value, some players will increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display selection table is changed while the base value is decreasing and other times (increasing and steady), but the display is divided into three states of the base value decreasing, steady and rising. A selection table may be defined to inform the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is in a steady state (whether the base history value is equal to the current base value) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Further, the particular effect may be displayed during the special symbol variable display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed during a special symbol variable display game than when displayed during the special symbol variable display game.

In the state where the game ball does not win the starting opening and the special symbol variable display game is not executed, the base value is normally lowered. If the special symbol variable display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of the special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7 and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing a game of rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of the special reach 2. The left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing a match, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the match.

FIG. 69D is a display example of the freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative design is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative design (for example, the lower right part of the screen). Is displayed in a recognizable manner. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative design is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower part of the screen) that does not disturb the recognition of the decorative design. Display the continuation recognizable. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

Although the example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the effect display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decoration lamp may be changed. Also, instead of the tendency of the base value to rise and fall, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value is the total sum of the base values calculated before the predetermined time even in the comparison result of the base value calculated during the time interval before the predetermined time and the base value calculated during the current time interval. May be the result of comparison between the latest total base value and the total.

[9-8. Calculation based on specific winning a prize mouth]
Next, a process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of the winning of a specific general winning opening will be described.

In a pachinko machine, a player aims at a specific winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 2005, 2006 that is in an open state) in which a gaming ball is easy to win during a big hit, and the player can play the game ball. Adjust the firing strength. Even during a big hit, a game ball is shot at the same spot as a so-called normal hit to aim at the big winning opening 2005, or the strength of the shooting is strengthened to the maximum, so-called right hitting is aimed at the big winning opening 2006 There are variations. In such variations, a game board may be designed so that a starting opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the special winning opening and a ball spilled from the big winning opening is picked up.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that is hit to the right during a big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player makes a right-handed hit in order to put the game ball into the open big winning opening. Most of the game balls shot toward the game area enter the open special winning opening 2006. As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 16, the general winning opening 2001 is provided on the right side of the big winning opening 2005, and the game ball that has been hit to the right is open. When no prize is won in the big prize hole 2006, the general prize hole 2001 is won. In other words, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the special winning opening 2005 is won only when the right-handed game ball does not enter the opening large winning opening 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out when the 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a, that is, the number of prize balls paid out by the winning in the starting opening and the general winning opening (that is, 100 out balls are paid. To show the ratio of the number of prize balls that have been put out), the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win at the starting opening and general winning opening (high probability of winning at the large winning opening) It is assumed that when calculated as (out sphere number), it deviates from the actual base value when calculated as the base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the special winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the particular general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
-Figures 70 and 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt period-Figures 71 and 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls Note that the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls The description of the pattern for calculating and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, but it can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, in order to calculate the base value by using the out ball count corrected by the winning ball count to a specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt cycle, Get the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. Note that, in FIG. 70, the same portions as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls (specific winning ball number) to a specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, a value obtained by subtracting the specific winning ball count from the out ball count is added to the total out ball count (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71 records the number of award balls in the award ball count buffer and calculates the number of award balls in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of award balls and the number of out balls satisfy predetermined conditions. Record the number in the Out Ball Buffer. Note that, in FIG. 71, the same step numbers are given to the same portions as the above-described base calculation area update processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning opening for the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls for the specific winning a prize hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning ball number recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same steps as those of the base calculation/display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold value Th1, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or for each predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1.

Then, it is determined whether the sum of the number of out-out passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). ). The sum of the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the award ball number buffer value is added to the total award ball number (step S897), and the award ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific winning ball count is subtracted from the total out ball count, the threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball count buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total out ball count is not 0, the total prize ball count is divided by the total out ball count to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of allowable ranges. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or the hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display processing ends.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value remains the same value, and if the number of total prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both of them are updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated by excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting opening and the general winning opening, the deviation from the actual base value Can accurately calculate small base values.

Also, the case has been described in which the general winning hole 2001 is located downstream of the special winning opening 2006 in a pachinko machine that hits right during a big hit, but the invention according to the present embodiment aims for the large winning opening 2005 by a normal hit during a big hit. It can be applied to a pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a start opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the special winning opening 2005.

Further, the game area 5a is provided with special winning openings 2005 and 2006 that normally do not accept game balls but can accept the game balls according to the result of the jackpot. The prize balls due to winning in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins the starting openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variable display game starts, and after the special symbol is fixed, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening), the big winning opening The detected out-balls are excluded from the out-ball counts as the special prize during the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 until the start of the next special symbol variable display game (big hit ending). In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the special prize can be counted without determining in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like whether or not the special prize is being awarded. In addition, when the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed with one big hit, the time between the closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 (closing interval) may be included in the prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the right-handing instruction. Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include a time saving period, a positive change (during ST), and a power support. Furthermore, during a time saving period, during a probable change (during ST), and in a game state other than during electric power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting opening 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball winning the starting opening is detected as an out ball). Up to the required few seconds) may be included in the prize.

Further, in the game area 5a, a second starting opening 2004 is arranged which normally does not accept a game ball, but can accept the game ball according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize balls due to winning in the second starting opening 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 to perform a lottery of ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol variable display game starts, and after the regular symbol is fixed until it is opened (opening), the second starting opening 2004 The detected out-ball is excluded from the out-ball count as a special prize during the period from the closing of the game until the start of the next normal symbol variable display game (ending). In addition, when the second starting opening 2004 repeats opening and closing according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time between the closing of the second starting opening 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the prize. In this way, all winnings to the second starting opening 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value, not only during the time saving.

As described above, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize (big hit, shortened time, etc.) can be accurately counted without determining in step S810 in FIG.

By doing so, the number of out balls and the number of prize balls can be accurately excluded while the player is hitting right, and the base value can be accurately calculated.

In addition, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game by left-handing in a state where it is neither big hit nor shortening (so-called normal state), and playing it right-handed during a big hit or shortening. In such a gaming machine, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, which wins when hitting left, a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004, which wins when hitting right, are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings from the left side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when left-handed) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when right-handed) and The winning rate at each winning opening differs depending on the arrangement and the arrangement position of the nails. In other words, the base value when left-handed and the base value when right-handed are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player hits left in a normal state. However, as described above, when the base value is different between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value for right-handed in a normal state is designed to be lower than that for left-handed) In the normal state, when the player hits right, a low base value is calculated.

Hall judges that the pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or judges that it is a gaming machine with poor payout performance. Even in a pachinko machine that is judged to have poor payout performance (lower than the expected base), the hall determines that the player is left-handed, so there is a starting opening that acts on the base when left-handed. Make adjustments to increase the winning rate at the general winning openings. Then, adjust the nail with the abnormality to increase the base value. If you hit the left with the game machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even in the normal state. In other words, you can win a lot of lots for a small amount. In other words, even if the base when left-handed is the same as what the hole assumed, the hole is misunderstood and adjustments are made to increase the entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that are won when left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole will be disadvantaged by such a player's bad faith, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when left-handed and the base value when right-handed.

By the way, a pachinko machine that makes a right hit during a time saving, a second start opening 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state, and a gate section 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second start opening 2004, when making a right hit. It is arranged in the area where the game balls roll. Further, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by hitting the right in the normal state, even if the normal symbols are drawn, the probability of winning the universal symbol is extremely low so that the second starting opening 2004 does not open, Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened, and it is difficult to win the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the right-handed state in the normal state, the rate of entry into the second starting opening 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the rate of entry into the second starting port 2004 puts pressure on the profit of the hall. Therefore, it is advisable to calculate the base value corrected using the number of passing balls of the gate unit 2003 when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the specific winning ball number. A high base calculated value can be obtained by reducing the number of out balls. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate unit 2003, an extremely high base value is calculated. Note that the degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls passes through the gate portion 2003 without winning the starting opening) (A condition may be added), and the number of out-balls counted in a predetermined time after passing through the gate unit 2003 (or before and after) or in a predetermined number of shots need not be used for calculating the base value. By doing so, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate unit 2003 is detected, a display or voice such as “please return to left-handing” may be output without actively notifying the player that it is not reflected in the calculation result of the base value. In addition, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, it may be notified to the hall that the player is right-handed. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, a lighting mode may be changed, or a right-hand hit may be output from an external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in a game arcade.

As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game balls roll when hitting right) from the number of out balls, hitting right in a normal state The base value at time can be corrected to a large value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation of the calculated value of the base depending on the game style of the player.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value of confirming the operation status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be held for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the condition for deleting the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, it is possible to hold accurate data of the number of prize balls and calculate an accurate accessory ratio.

Specifically, the base calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is shut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is changed. By the second operation of shutting off, all the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. The second operation may be provided with one switch for realizing this operation, or the employee of the game shop may remove the connector of the power supply line for backup supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 The power of may be shut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, and only the data related to the progress of the game is erased in the first operation, but the calculated base value in the second operation. Erase all data including data related to game progress.

With such a configuration, the base calculation/display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation of an attendant in the amusement arcade, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved and the concealment of a state where the accessory ratio is high can be prevented. ..

[9-10. Calculation based on the consideration of winning anomalies]
FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update processing in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in winning may be detected. For example, when a winning is detected other than during the opening of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 due to the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variable display game, or the starting opening 2004 due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol varying display game. If a winning is detected during the period other than when the game is open, the winning is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where many prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, the prize winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning in a state where winning is impossible or a large number of winnings in a predetermined time are detected.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and accurately calculate the base. For this reason, in the base calculation area update processing in consideration of the prize abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of prize balls related to the detected prize abnormality.

It should be noted that, usually, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 are won only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, There is no need to consider abnormalities.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls paid out as a game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 is updated. To do. In particular, the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 73 is similar to the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle, the prize ball control processing (step S80). The total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822). Note that, in FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the base calculation area update processing described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded.

If the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the prize ball number or the out ball number. On the other hand, if the game state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of award balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of award balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls may correspond to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the receipt confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Further, the main control board 1310 may send a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the number of award balls (paid award ball number) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of payout may be used. This variation has already been described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped. Further, although the game balls are won in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the upper limit value is the hold, and the prize balls are paid out even when the winning in the starting port is not held, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the prize is not generated, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total prize ball number is recorded in a total prize ball number storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Then, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning anomaly is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when the winning of the special winning opening 2005, 2006 is detected in addition to the special prize (during the operation of the condition device) which is caused by the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variable display game, , If the winning in the starting opening 2004 is detected even though it is not open due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variable display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

It may be determined that the winning is abnormal when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or the winning abnormality is detected when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, if a predetermined number of consecutive winning prize balls are detected, it may be determined as a winning prize, or if a predetermined number of winning balls are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined as a winning prize. You may.

Then, the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls for abnormal prize winning from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or after adding the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls The number of abnormally awarded balls may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total out ball count is recorded in the total out ball count storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total out-ball count is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40). Therefore, the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is generated. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the base value calculation process. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control section 1511 from the payout control section 952. May be sent.

Further, in one timer interruption process, even if the information of both winning and out balls to the winning opening is acquired, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or a prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Then, the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (or an out ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Further, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of winning a prize to a plurality of winning openings is acquired, the total number of award balls due to a plurality of winning awards is the total award ball number (or, in the embodiment described later, an award ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when winning is detected for a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of five winning balls and a winning opening sensor with a winning opening of three winning balls, a total of eight winning balls are totaled. (Or the prize ball number buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning, which is detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020, may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). Further, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (further, the launching control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops the operation. It is also possible to add only the number of prize balls relating to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) to the total prize ball count or the prize ball count buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the player operates the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is detected to be touched by a hand or finger is calculated as the total prize ball number ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball is not fired or an illegal act, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, the out-ball number is recorded in the out-ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the out-ball number satisfies the predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are assigned to the same portions as the above-described base calculation area update processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If the number of prize balls is not abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). .. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated every time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

Then, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired out-ball count is added to the out-ball count buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification ( Step S825).

In the base calculation region update processing shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the winning balls related to the particular type of winning abnormality and It is not necessary to correct the out ball in the winning ball related to the particular type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of prize ball related to the prize abnormality, the prize ball may or may not be paid out for the prize ball. Whether or not the prize balls are to be paid out with respect to this prize abnormality may be determined for each prize hole. In this case, with respect to the winning abnormality in which the winning balls are not paid out, the winning balls are not counted as the total out balls and should not be used for the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, in regard to the winning abnormality in which the prize balls are paid out, it is preferable that the prize balls are counted as total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out are also counted as the total prize balls number, and are used for the calculation of the base value. It should be noted that even if the prize balls are paid out abnormally, the prize balls may not be counted as the total out balls, the prize balls to be paid out may not be counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used for the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance of a game machine failure (clearing a ball clogging, etc.), a hall employee may insert a game ball into the starting port by hand to compensate for the exit ball so as not to damage the player. In this case, prize balls are paid out for winning the prize at the starting opening. The winning in the starting opening is detected as an abnormal prize, but the prize ball is paid out. When the prize balls are paid out in this way, they should be reflected in the base value, and therefore it is not necessary to determine that the prize is abnormal. In this case, the prize balls are paid out at the winning openings (starting openings 2002, 2004) reflected in the calculation of the base value, no abnormality in the winning is determined, and the prize balls are not paid at the other winning openings (large winning openings 2005, 2006). It is advisable to determine the prize winning abnormality without paying out. The number of prize balls to be determined for abnormality of the prize is smaller than that of the prize hole for which abnormality of the prize is not determined (3 prize balls for the starting prize, 15 prize balls for the major prize). For this reason, although the winning a prize is judged to be abnormal at the special winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not judged at the starting opening, it is not a large security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraudulent acts. In this way, by determining the prize winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent the inconsistency between the out ball and the number of prize balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls relating to a winning prize that does not generate a winning ball, it is possible to match the number of winning balls with the out ball that causes the winning ball.

As described above, the winning abnormality can be determined by various winning openings, but a specific example of mounting on a pachinko machine will be described.

First, the prize winning abnormality may not be determined at the general winning opening 2001, and the prize winning may be determined at a winning opening other than the general winning opening 2001 (large winning openings 2005, 2006, starting openings 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult to simultaneously win a plurality of game balls at the general winning a prize, it is possible to improve the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activity, and to open and close the large winning a prizes 2005 and 2006 and the starting prize 2002 ( The player can be compensated for the exit by entering the general winning openings 2001 (4 in total), which are provided more than the total of 3). Further, since the general winning hole 2001 can be easily identified by an employee of the hall, the operation for maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and compensation for a ball can be easily performed. The reason why the employees of the hall can easily identify the general winning opening 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged in a game area (in a divided area), and the electric prize (the large winning opening is large). This is because the decoration members (appearance) are different from those of 2005, 2006, the starting ports 2002 and 2004). In addition, when the number of prize balls for one prize in the general winning opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraud is improved. It should be noted that the abnormality determination may not be determined only for a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), and the abnormality determination may be determined for another general winning opening.

In addition, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 having a large number of prize balls do not determine a prize winning abnormality, and the prize winning openings other than the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 (general winning openings 2001, starting openings 2002 and 2004 having a small number of prize balls) are won. You may judge abnormality. Since there are a large number of prize balls for one prize in the special winning opening, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of prize balls. Therefore, it is convenient that the change of the base value can be easily inspected when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that the abnormality determination may not be made only by using a particular special winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 that allows easy entry of game balls), and the abnormality may be determined by another large winning opening (eg, 2006). ..

Further, the winning opening may not be determined at the starting openings 2002 and 2004, and the winning abnormality may be determined at winning openings (general winning opening 2001, big winning openings 2005 and 2006) other than the starting openings 2002 and 2004. Since the number of prize balls for winning one ball is smaller than that of the large winning port, the starting port can improve the security resistance of the gaming machine against the goto and can compensate the player for the ball. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific starting opening (for example, the starting opening 2002 provided at the center of the game board is easy to understand the position), and the other starting openings 2004 may be determined by the winning abnormality.

Furthermore, at the special winning opening and the starting opening, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is in a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the winning opening is determined by the winning opening where employees in the hall can easily operate the opening/closing member. Otherwise, the prize opening/closing member may be in a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the prize opening in which the employee of the hall has difficulty in operating the opening/closing member may determine the prize winning abnormality. For example, an opening/closing member that is vertically positioned in a closed state is inclined to an oblique position, so that an employee of the hall can easily operate the winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening/closing member picks up a game ball. On the other hand, in the closed state, the prize hole is closed by the plate member, and when the plate member is retracted inward, the hole of the prize hole (so-called belochu) has a structure that opens the entrance to the prize hole. Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only to the winning holes used to compensate the player for a ball, so that the employee of the hall can easily understand the security level of the gaming machine.

Further, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the prize winning abnormality may be the same as the method of notifying the prize ball number abnormality described above (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a game board or a frame). It is advisable that the notification of the prize abnormality is looser than the notification of other abnormalities, such as lighting or blinking of the decoration lamp, output of sound, sound effect, and warning sound. Specifically, the abnormality notification time is short, the characters that notify the abnormality are small, the lamp does not light up when the abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is smaller than the volume of the notification sound of other abnormalities (suppressed). ) Good.

In addition, in the notification of the prize abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the prize abnormality is detected, and even if the prize abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the predetermined time is set without extending the predetermined time. The notification may be terminated or the notification mode may be changed in a predetermined time. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not the illegal act by the player. For this reason, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued thereafter, it is possible to improve work efficiency without hindering the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Further, it can be seen that by changing the notification mode after a predetermined time, the maintenance work of the gaming machine is not disturbed and the work is correctly continued. Specifically, the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued, but the notification by sound may be stopped (or the volume may be decreased).

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correcting means divides the plurality of winning openings into a plurality of types (starting opening, large winning opening). However, for the first type of winning port, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning ball detected when the predetermined condition is not established (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning port, the predetermined type The number of out-balls is not corrected based on the winning ball detected when the condition is not established (during special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent the deviation of the out-ball number when compensating the player due to the maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the out-ball number. Further, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as an adjustment (maintenance). This allows an accurate base value to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, the abnormal prize detection and the exceptional handling of the abnormal prize detection (when not detected) have been described. However, the gaming ball determined to be abnormal prize is not the prize ball acquired in the game, but the pachinko machine's Since there is a high possibility that it will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning ball for which a winning abnormality has been determined is not reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used for calculating the base value.

Further, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the injustice detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a prize abnormality display command is created with the prize abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the winning abnormality may be performed when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. In addition, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the prize abnormality are continuously detected, the prize abnormality may be notified, or if a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the prize abnormality is detected. You may notify.

Further, the notification of the prize winning abnormality may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be ended when the prize opening is subsequently opened (the condition device is activated).

In addition, it is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of arithmetic circuits]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division processing for calculating the base value, so that the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processing than the CPU 13111 executing the division by the program. The base calculation process described so far does not make the best use of this characteristic.

That is, in the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) related to the calculation of the base value, in the switch input processing (step S74), the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the discharge ball sensor 1020 are read to determine the number of out balls. Is calculated, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S98), the number of award balls and the number of out balls of the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in the base calculation/display process (step S89), the base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Since the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined time, the predetermined process must be completed for each timer interrupt, so in a slow division process by a program, a time-consuming process is included in the timer interrupt process. That is, it was difficult to include the base calculation process of multiple times in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated plural times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division processing from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the operation result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and the divisor are different from the output timing of the quotient, the degree of freedom of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that makes use of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98), and therefore the description of the same processing is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is read by reading a detection signal from a sensor that detects a winning ball, a detection signal from a switch that detects fraudulent activity, a detection signal from a discharge ball sensor 3060, or a launch ball sensor 1020. Is counted.

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 1 (step S97). In the base calculation process 1, the total number of out balls is updated by using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer updating process (step S76) and a random number updating process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

Subsequently, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric auditors product The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). The watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be clear by setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the total out ball number. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

Then, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify the player or the hall employee of the base (base value or abnormality of the base value). The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (production display devices 1600, 3114, 244) or the speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the effect display control unit 1512. Or sound output command. Further, when notifying by the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs or LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is a prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). When the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value may not be calculated. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process at every predetermined time (for example, one minute of a longer period than the timer interrupt process). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the calculation amount (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) required for calculating the base value can be reduced as compared with the case of calculating the base value for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the base value is calculated for each predetermined out ball number and each predetermined prize ball number.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the out ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball-count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the out-ball-count storage area (specifically, the out-ball-count storage area is 8-bit). If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out ball count is updated so that the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S9705), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify the player or hall employee of the base.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is in the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805). If the number of prize balls is not abnormal, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods of reporting the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

Abnormality in the number of prize balls means, for example, that there are many prize balls at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, in consideration of the number of prize balls at a general winning opening or a starting opening, there are 10 or more winnings per minute). Sphere) is obtained. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide an allowable range of a plurality of stages and judge the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball count is updated so that the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S9809), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

It should be noted that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, and the number of prize balls described later becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) is read from the division result register A131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

Then, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 has timed out (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so that the prize ball abnormality is notified by the predetermined number of shot balls. May be. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23, FIG. 75) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S93 and S94) and the base display process (step S95), and therefore the same process will be described. Is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer updating process (step S76) and a random number updating process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and a parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85.

Subsequently, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric auditors product The control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base display process of reading out the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generating a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). The watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be clear by setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing the steps after S9709 from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the total out ball number. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). When the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 3 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing the steps after step S9813 from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is in the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). When the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that, in step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, but in step S9812 of FIG. 82, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is input to the division input register A131216. , And the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process for each predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 85. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 78 with steps S9709 and subsequent steps removed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired out ball number is added to the out ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9703). When the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without wastefully calculating the base value.

Then, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball-count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the out-ball-count storage area (specifically, the out-ball-count storage area is 8-bit). If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out ball count is updated so that the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S9705), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether the prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is in the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805). If the number of prize balls is not abnormal, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer. The sphere count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods of reporting the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

Abnormality in the number of prize balls means, for example, that a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls at a general winning opening or a starting opening) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. Such as when. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide an allowable range of a plurality of stages and judge the degree of abnormality in a plurality of stages based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit of the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, and the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball count is updated so that the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S9809), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

It should be noted that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the game hall each time it is added to the prize ball number buffer, and the number of prize balls described later becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

It should be noted that, in step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, but in step S9812 of FIG. 85, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is input to the division input register A131216. , And the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total prize ball count/total out ball count) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902) to notify the player and the hall employee of the base.

Then, it is determined whether or not the award ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed up (step S8903). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so that the prize ball abnormality is notified by the predetermined number of shot balls. Good. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit The input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is written at the timing when the division result can be read from 13121. Specifically, the write timing of the input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121, the first half of the timer interrupt process, before the random number update process (step S78), the special symbol or the normal symbol It is better before the control processing (steps S86 and S88).

Further, the presence or absence of execution of the process of calculating the base value may be determined by the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening, whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls for the calculation of the base value may be switched. For example, the prize ball of the winning opening that gives the maximum prize ball to one prize ball does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) given when a game medium defined for each winning opening provided in the game area is won is 3 In the case of three types of individual and five, the maximum five award balls and the corresponding out balls may not be used for the calculation of the base value. This is because when a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value becomes large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded by the processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). Even if it is displayed, the displayed value may change frequently. This is because, in such a case, it becomes difficult to judge by the hole whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether it is in accordance with the set payout rate).

Further, it is not necessary to use the minimum one prize ball number and the corresponding out ball number for the calculation of the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the one prize ball is not used in the calculation of the base value, the lower digit of the base value calculated by the processing means is rounded. This is because the base value to be displayed may not change when it is displayed (rounded up, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), and therefore processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

Moreover, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number is the minimum is described, the intermediate number of prize balls between the maximum and the minimum need not be used for the calculation of the base value. In this case, the maximum and minimum award numbers are used to calculate the base value, so the maximum and minimum awards are averaged to show the award number and out-number of balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine. A base value can be indicated.

Although the pattern of the number of prize balls is three, the number of prize balls is not limited to three, and may be another type such as five or seven.

Furthermore, if the winnings of the number of prize balls of a specific type (one of the above-mentioned minimum value, three of the intermediate value, five of the maximum value, etc.) are not used in the calculation of the base value, the prize is won. All winnings in the gaming state when detected need not be used for calculating the base value. For example, when the winning of the winning opening that gives five prize balls is not used for the calculation of the base value, in the gaming state in which the winning of the winning opening is detected, the winning of the winning is completed until the end of the gaming state. Do not use mouth or other winnings to calculate the base value. Further, even after the start of the gaming state, the winning of the winning hole and the other winning holes are not retroactively used for calculating the base value.

In addition, when the gaming state when the winning is detected occurs again, the winning does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected changes to another gaming state. The winnings up to need not be used to calculate the base value. This is whether the pachinko machine is normal by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the gaming state where the calculated base value changes greatly for the calculation of the base value (for example, whether it is according to the set payout rate). This is to eliminate the possibility of delaying the determination of.

In addition, when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the maximum (or minimum, intermediate) prize balls with respect to one winning ball may not be used for the calculation of the base value.

Next, a specific process in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in the calculation of the base value depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above will be described.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the winning for calculating the base value. .. For prizes that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total prize balls and total out balls for calculating the base value are not updated, or the base value calculation process is not executed. To do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and the base ball is excluded from the number of out balls to calculate the base. In the process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If all the detected winnings are not used in the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75 may not be executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If all the detected winnings are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the base calculation process 4 (step S94) and the base display process (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. May be.

As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, a method similar to the method of correcting the out ball due to the abnormal winning described in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning balls whether or not the detected winning is used for calculating the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the base calculation process 2 (step S98), and the base calculation process 3 ( In step S93) and the base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether the prize is being won.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls for a given winning from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, so it is easy to check whether the process is being executed accurately especially in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Further, by not performing the process of calculating the base value and updating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and the other processes (lottery process, process of determining variation pattern, etc.) are accurately executed. it can.

In other words, even if there are multiple awards with different degrees of advantage, even if the maximum award is given to the player, it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the base value is displayed without being changed by the award of the prize. It Further, the calculated base value is displayed without change until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize is awarded is completed.

[9-12. Different configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, as the discharge ball sensor 3060, the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5, and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is the main frame. 4 is provided. Note that either one of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both of them may be provided.

As described above, the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is the out-passage ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower portion of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of gaming balls detected by the out-passage ball sensor 1021, the number of gaming balls detected by the starting port sensors 2104, 2551, and the number of gaming balls detected by the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. The sum of the number and the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and a connector that connects the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B are provided, the count result of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the count result of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B are compared to obtain two count results. The error may be notified when a difference of a predetermined value or more occurs. Further, when the difference between the two counting results within the predetermined time exceeds a predetermined value, an error may be notified.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an indispensable component, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 can be switched at predetermined time intervals as described later ( The base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318 (see FIG. 99).

The configuration other than the above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which the out balls are aligned in one line in the ball passage 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts the out balls. .. The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the outlet 1111, the general winning opening 2001, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball passage 960 that allows the discharged game balls to flow down to the right side in front view and is aligned in one line. The frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one line.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which the out balls aligned in the ball passage 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are caused to flow down by two rows and counted by the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting openings 2002 and 2004, and the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball passage 960 that allows the discharged game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and is aligned in two lines. Each of the two frame side discharge ball sensors 3060B provided counts the game balls arranged in each line.

The frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, but it may be configured as a unit together with the ball flow path 960 and detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a connection example of the discharge ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is the main control board 1310. It is good to be provided under.

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected are provided separately. The output line of 3060A and the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

The output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 You may.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensors 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects a prize in each of the various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006 (the position of a star in the figure). It is provided in. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5 and partially overlaps.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111. This is to prevent an incorrect calculation of the base value. That is, when the player brings the magnet close to the out port 1111 and operates the discharge ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted more than it actually is, and the base value decreases. For this reason, a game shop may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 so as to restore the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine that has undergone maintenance work based on a base value different from the actual base value, the number of balls in the normal state will increase, allowing the player to play in a more advantageous state than usual and obtain many balls. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the outlet 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent the illegal payout of the ball. In addition to the vicinity of the outlet 1111, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided at a position where the discharge ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided in the vicinity of the outlet 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030, as illustrated. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060 detect an out ball, the magnetism is detected within a sufficient range capable of covering the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided in the vicinity of the outlet 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 provided above the outlet 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the structure of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes a discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening). The output signals of the sensor 2554, the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, etc.) and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 performs level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal) of signals input from various sensors and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to any one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, the level-converted and shaped signals of the interface circuit 1331 are output from the terminals Y1 to Y8, and are buffered. The signal is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result of each sensor is captured by the main control MPU 1311.

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs of the terminals A1 to A8, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 4V) or a predetermined threshold value (for example, power supply voltage- 0.1V), the disconnection of the connection line to the switch or the short circuit of the switch is detected, and when the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, the abnormal signal E And outputs a signal of a level at which each sensor is OFF, from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals from the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 12V-20%) and the power supply abnormality is detected, the abnormality signal E is output. At the same time, irrespective of the input signals of the terminals A1 to A8, the signals of the level in which each sensor is OFF are output from the terminals Y1 to Y8. That is, even if an ON-level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit for that input becomes the OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). As a result, the main control MPU 1311 does not need to determine whether or not to process the input signal depending on whether or not the power supply of the switch has dropped, and the processing load can be reduced and the output signals of Y1 to Y8 can be reduced. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, a signal of a level at which each sensor is turned off can be output.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, the main control MPU 1311 does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives a signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value (number of discharged balls, number of prize balls) and a signal from a sensor not used for calculating the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). .. The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in the sensor that is not related to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for the calculation of the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for the calculation of the base value, and when either signal becomes abnormal, An abnormal signal is output to stop the calculation of the base.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing mounting examples of the main control board 1310. 93A shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93B shows that the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are one. An example of connection to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement on the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. FIG. 95(A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, the display data is output from the different driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, the display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line for outputting the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 from the main control MPU 1311 and the signal line for the reset signal or the clock signal do not intersect.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310. To the connector 13101, not only the output line from the board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, but also the other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the output line from the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are connected. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided below the main control board 1310. The signal from the discharge ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a printed circuit board that constitutes the main control board 1310 from the back surface side. Solid lines are patterns on the back surface side, broken lines are patterns on the component surface side, and dotted lines are components mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. Indicates. The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333) and passed through the driver 2 (1334) to the cathode side segment of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the terminal.

In addition, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 is input to the latch 1 (1333) and passes through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the common terminal on the anode side of.

A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is a timing when the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, the data for controlling the blinking of each segment is fetched from the data lines (D1 to D8). The latch circuit 1 (1333) fetches data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

The reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333. The latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect the signal lines for the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so that a pulse signal is transmitted through the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 is connected. The level of the data line between the base display 1317 and the base display 1317 changes frequently. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly, between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a cause of noise. When the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal intersect, noise is placed on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, and the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines may occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board or at the intersection of the wiring patterns of the inner layer and the surface layer (front surface, back surface).

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that should never occur, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, and the game may be stopped or the game state may be erased. .. If the game state is erased at a timing that should never occur, the normal power-off process is not executed and is reset. Therefore, the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the jackpot is ended, and the fluctuation display is displayed. The game ends midway, or the special symbol variable display game or the normal symbol variable display game is deleted.

The main control board box 1320 is partially low in height and high in other portions depending on the height of the components attached to the main control board 1310 and the interference with other members when assembled. Is becoming For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the main control board box 1320, the height of the main control board box 1320 is increased, and components such as a relatively tall electrolytic capacitor are mounted. On the other hand, in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low, and a component such as a short IC is mounted (a tall component cannot be arranged). The area where the main control board box 1320 is high and in which high-height components can be mounted is indicated by hatching. Further, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height that is equal to or lower than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted and removed (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is recommended that the cable (connector) to be connected to the board of (2) is not hindered from being inserted or removed.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the goto action of mounting an unauthorized component (circuit) on the main control board. it can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310. However, even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for the sake of maintenance, it is difficult for the player to see the display contents at the base. A display 1317 may be provided. For example, when the player can visually check the display contents of the base display 1317 when the main body frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance during operation (check whether or not there is a game ball in the supply tank). Often does not understand how to read the display on the base display 1317 correctly, the player may be required to explain the display contents on the base display 1317, and in order to prevent such complications. In addition, the base display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display contents. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from the player. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value of 52,000 working balls at the maximum, but it is different from the base value in the short-time game played by the player, so that a claim about the ball-out rate may occur. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The above is the same with the character ratio display 1317 described above, and the character ratio display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display content.

As shown in the figure, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 has a low height, and thus is mounted in a region where the height of the main control board box 1320 is low.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93A, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of light emitting diodes (LEDs) will be described, but they may be composed of lamps (light bulbs) or other light emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. To do.

As described above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 takes in the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds the data until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs the data. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12 V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 fetches the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK and outputs the bus data to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED that constitutes the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to turn on the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D8 captured by the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). The driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first-digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 is changed. Driven.

Further, in order to turn on the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 fetched by the latch 3 (1333) are transferred to the segment data (when turned on LOW, at the rising timing of CS2). ) Is output. The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched by the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven) at the rising timing of CS3. Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 is of the common anode type, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 through the 7-segment LED. Therefore, when the segment is turned on, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and have a data bus. A signal may be output from any one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 in accordance with the binary data acquired from.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93A and FIG. 96, signal output timings when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. In addition, segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via different signal lines, both the display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are It is output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (group of LEDs) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated by another process in the timer interrupt process and output at another timing in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area to generate and output the display data to the base display 1317. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game control code 13131 in the game control area to generate and output display data to the function display unit 1400. These data are generated by another program (code) and output at different timing.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 is executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be executed subsequently.

The process of outputting a signal to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same processing is performed. In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the timing, it is preferable to use control data common to the two codes so that the common signal transmission timings do not overlap. For example, a common counter commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 is provided. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400 and the common counter is used. Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. Each of the game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 are provided. It is preferable to call the subroutine at a timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of the data sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of the data sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt process. The game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, but the subroutine is called by different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, a display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310. Even if noise is mixed in, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. 3 is a circuit diagram of an example of FIG. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. To do.

As described above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334. The configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, and therefore the difference from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for turning on the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common of the function display unit 1400 is the common signal with the base display 1317. It is common.

Since the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on, the bus data D1 to D8 fetched by the latch 3 (1333) is set as the segment data (LOW is turned on) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the driver circuit, so that the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily downsized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (a printed circuit board having three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of a two-layer board, an area for routing the wiring pattern cannot be secured, and the board must be larger than a multilayer board having three or more layers. Therefore, downsizing by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a break in timer interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing start timing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. The latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 fetches D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and the driver 1 (1334) selects the common data (when driven) corresponding to the digit designated by D1 to D4. Outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment turned on in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 fetches D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) receives the segment data (low is lit) designated by D1 to D8. Then, the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment turned on by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 fetches D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW is lit) designated by D1 to D8. Then, the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is turned on.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, and repeats the above-described processing to output the digit selection data and the display data. In this way, the base display unit 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share a common driver circuit, time-divisionally output segment data, and use common common data to function as the base display unit 1317. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

As shown in FIGS. 93B and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, the circuit size of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example, It is possible to easily mount components on the main control substrate 1310, which does not allow the use of a multilayer substrate or the close placement of components.

Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 with common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display can be controlled during the period when the common data is being output. The segment data is output at a timing different from that of 1317. Therefore, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled by a common common data line while the display of both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled within one timer interrupt process. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, when the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display unit 1317. It will be longer. This lengthens the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and increases the brightness, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the illumination of the hall. This is to prevent it. Further, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side that is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED emits light with low brightness, the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is displayed by the function display unit 1400. May be longer than time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in the state (section) for calculating the base value.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the provisional section display and the confirmed section display are switched and displayed at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." is displayed in the upper two digits to indicate that the base value A is being displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the lower two digits as a two-digit percentage. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that whether the base value A is 0% or 100% can be understood.

In addition, in the provisional section display, when the low probability/non-time saving out ball number is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the upper two digits (or all four digits) are blinked and displayed (for example, a cycle of 0.6 seconds). Then, the lighting for 0.3 seconds and the turning off for 0.3 seconds are repeated), indicating that an accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the upper two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that the accurate base value can be measured.

In the confirmed section display, the base value of the immediately preceding section is displayed. Specifically, it indicates that “bb.” is lit up in the upper two digits to display the base value B, and the lower two digits indicate the base value of the immediately preceding section (below the previous period. The base value B), which is the final two-digit value, is lit and displayed with a two-digit percentage. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value B is 99, “99” is displayed, when it is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed, and when it is 0, “00” is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that whether the base value B is 0% or 100% can be understood.

In the first section, the previous section is a test section, so the base value is not measured. Therefore, in the confirmed section display, "bb." is blinkingly displayed in the upper two digits and "---" is blinkingly displayed in the lower two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base value is not calculated as a predetermined number (for example, 256) of which the number of out balls is less than 500 after the first power-on, as a test section. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on for the first time and a predetermined number of shots are launched, the balls may fluctuate within the probability distribution range, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. .. For this reason, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317 and the base value is indefinite. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." is displayed in the first two digits, "--" is displayed in the last one digit, and "bb." is displayed in the first two digits in the final section display. , "---" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits of the base display 1317 are blinked to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured. The base value may be calculated in the test section, and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value may be indefinite.

Here, when the power is turned on for the first time, the power is turned on for the first time after completion of the pachinko machine 1 or immediately after the initialization of the work area for base calculation (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. It is in a state. In addition, the power-on state generally used in this specification is a power-on state other than the first power-on period.

Further, all the LEDs of all the digits of the base display 1317 may be blinked at a predetermined time after the power is turned on or at a predetermined time after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). ..

In the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls reaches 52000 in all game states (big hit, normal game, short-time medium, non-time-short medium, high probability medium, low probability medium, etc.), the next zone Switch to and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, but may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the operating time of the pachinko machine 1 per day is 10 hours, 60000, which is the operating time per day (the number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. It is also possible to adopt 50,000 or 100,000, which are sharp numbers.

The number of out balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, or the like) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls in one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, when the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or even if restarted from the beginning of the current section. Good. Since pachinko machines are often operated immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and when the business period elapses, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit of calculation of the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the operation set by the setting means. The length of one section is set.

Note that, as the confirmed section display, an example in which the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured is displayed will be described. However, the base values of a plurality of confirmed sections (for example, sections 1 to 3 sections before) are switched and displayed. You may. At this time, even if the display is switched by changing the provisional section → the confirmed section 1 → the confirmed section 2 → the confirmed section 3 every predetermined time, the provisional section → the confirmed section 1 → the confirmed section 2 → by the operation of the display changeover switch which is separately provided. The confirmed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the fixed section display are not “bb.” but “b1”, “b2”, and “b3” so that the displayed section can be understood in each fixed section. Different display is recommended.

In this way, the base display 1317 switches and displays the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding section or sections at predetermined time intervals. Further, a display capable of distinguishing the display contents is displayed on a part of the base display 1317, and the measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a multi-digit (for example, four-digit) 7-segment LED, and displays a number or a character by lighting or blinking the segment of each digit. Numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and-signs can also be displayed. Furthermore, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. The case where the numeral 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and the case where the numeral 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of initialization processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is different from the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, and the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the calculation of the check code of the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 to be writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. The determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area is erased (step S30). , And proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and the checksum calculated in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( The areas other than the base calculation area 13128 are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

Then, it is determined whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality (step S20) in which the power failure flag is not set are detected. , The RAM checksums do not match, the RAM abnormality (step S22), and the base calculation work abnormality (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack area are However, the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of the base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128. The entire RAM area including may be cleared. If all RAM areas are cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, if the memory configuration is such that the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed, the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation Only initialize it. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

When providing one or a plurality of backup areas in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and when it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in this order, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128) for each data type. To do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. When the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased, the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the staff at the game arcade, and the abnormal base value is hidden. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming machine that has been modified to have a high or low base value.

The main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting process (step S28) for setting various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the peripheral control board. A power-on command setting process for transmitting to 1510 (step S32) is executed, and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure notification signal (step S36) and determines whether the power failure notification signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure notice signal is not ON (result of step S38 is “No”), random number update processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-off time process (power-off time setting means). In the power-off processing, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output port is cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and the checksum calculation result is checked in the RAM 1312. It is stored in the thumb area (step S48).

Then, the data of the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. The backup may be appropriately executed (for example, each time data is updated) by the base calculation process instead of the main board-side power-off process. In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for the base calculation and the calculated base value even when the power is cut off. Can be held and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modified example described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value indicating that backup is normally performed is stored in the backup flag area (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to the RAM 1312 (step S56). S58), it stands by until it recovers from the power failure (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26(A) is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is configured by a partial area of the RAM 1312, and as described above, is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area).

The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for the base value A, the base value B, the section counter, the total out ball count, the low-probability/non-time saving short out ball count, and the low probability/non-time saving short prize ball count.

The storage area of the base value A is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area of the base value B is composed of 1 byte, and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is made up of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section where the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated each time the section is switched, and is used to control display contents that differ depending on the section. The section counter may be controlled so that it does not exceed 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter=0 in the test section, the section counter=1 in the first section, and the section counter=2 after the second section. Further, the section counter may be controlled so as to have a value of 0 to 255 so as not to be larger than 255, and the section counter=2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out balls (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine) regardless of the gaming state. The total out ball count is used to determine the switching of intervals, which is the base unit of measure. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with one day of operation as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of out balls. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls that do not depend on the gaming state for each section, and the total number of out balls in the above-described embodiment (the number of out balls in the prize) Value of the pachinko machine 1 since the start of operation).

The storage area for low probability non-time saving out balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the out balls for calculating the base value (out balls in a game state other than during the prize) Store. The storage area for the low-probability/non-time saving award balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of awards balls (the number of awards balls in a game state other than during special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. It should be noted that the storage area for the low-probability/non-time saving out ball count and the storage area for the low-probability/non-time saving award ball count need only be 2 bytes or more. It is better to do.

The storage capacity (the number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

When the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 in that a base calculation process (step S801) is provided in place of the accessory ratio calculation area update process of step S81, and the role of step S89 is provided. The material ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. The same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIG. 23 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the main control program to first set RBS (register bank selection flag) in the program status word to 1 and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to the region corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation region 13128 (of the main control internal RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103), and the base value is calculated (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but in order to surely execute each timer interruption, it is preferable to execute the base calculation process in an earlier order. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process ( Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so that the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of the base calculation process.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called by the timer interrupt process and is executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first big winning opening sensor 2114, second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower prize hole sensor 2557) or the discharge ball sensor (board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B), the base signal is accurately calculated by the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be made. Also, if it is determined that a fraudulent activity is being performed (for example, the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value is accurate. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be calculated. When it is determined that there is this error, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error associated with a game stop (for example, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error not accompanied by a game stop (for example, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) Failures that are not directly related to the calculation of the base or the base (such as out-of-supply, full tank error) may be determined not to be an error (NO). That is, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if some of the plural kinds of abnormal states have an abnormality, and not to execute the base calculation process if there is another abnormality.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the switch input processing of step S74 reads the detection signals of these sensors, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out ball number is output. The number of balls=1 is acquired. When the out-balls are detected by the plurality of discharged-ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by the sensors is acquired as the out-ball number. That is, a plurality of out-balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process of step S80 is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls may correspond to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the receipt confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Further, the main control board 1310 may send a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the number of award balls (paid award ball number) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of payout may be used. This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If the out ball is not detected, the process relating to the out ball is not executed and the process proceeds to step S8022. On the other hand, if the out ball is detected, the detected out ball number is added to the total out ball number stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is the initial value. Is becoming Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that the section is a test section. Since it is not necessary to calculate the base value in the test section, the process advances to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test section, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8019). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. The state of the game is in the special prize means that the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit, and the player can get a lot of prize balls, including the opening time and the ending time of the big hit game. May be. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the right-handing instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include a time saving period, a positive change (during ST), and a power support. Furthermore, during a time saving period, during a probable change (during ST), and in a game state other than during electric power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting opening 2004 is closed (for example, until a ball winning the starting opening is detected as an out ball). Up to the required few seconds) may be included in the prize. It should be noted that the so-called "hidden game state", which is a high-probability game state but does not become short-time (electric power support), is not included in the special prize, and is the same as the normal state (low-probability/non-time-saving state). The base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal game state and the latent game state, and the base value may be displayed so that it can be discriminated whether or not the base value is displayed.

Even if the latent game state is a high probability, it is a game state that does not let the player recognize that it is a high probability state, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, if the frame is opened during business In some cases, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that the player is in a latent game state (that is, a high probability). That is, in the state where the frame is open, when the employee of the hall grooms the ball in the winning opening or throws the ball in the outlet, the player can know the playing status depending on whether the base display changes. By calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the latent game state, such a problem can be avoided.

On the other hand, when operating a hole, it may be necessary to manage the base value in a low-probability/non-time saving state, and if the base value is calculated including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage it according to the operating mode of the hole. .. Such a problem can be avoided by excluding the latent game state and calculating the base value. The same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different from each other in the first place, it may be desirable to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state depending on the business mode of the hall. ..

When the base value is calculated by dividing the normal game state and the latent game state, even if the base value is calculated using a dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using a common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using the common calculation process, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special prize regarding the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variable display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize, normal winning (so-called big hit) to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during special prize (low probability or non-time saving) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electric actuated auctions (big prize holes 2005 and 2006) are used for calculating the base value based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). The other accessory (starting opening 2004) is not used, and whether the winning ball number and the winning ball number are used for calculating the base value or not is switched according to the gaming state (whether the prize is being won or not). It will be.

Further, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during shortened working hours, and since it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize because it is opened for a short time, it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated during a period other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be released only during a time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and winning balls to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits other than during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of small hits other than during the prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the gaming state is a prize, it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low probability/non-time saving out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 is to be used for the base calculation, so the number of low probability/non-time saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 is detected. The calculated number of out balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than the prize is detected each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If no prize ball is detected, the process relating to the prize ball is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S8026. On the other hand, if a prize ball is detected, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not a special prize is being held may be the same as in step S8019.

If the gaming state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low-probability/non-time saving prize ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 is to be used for the base calculation, so the number of low probability/non-time saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 is detected. The number of prize balls thus obtained is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). If the update flag is 1, an out ball or a prize ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), so the low-probability/non-time saving award ball is a low probability/non-time saving out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by the number and stored in the storage area for the base value A in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, when the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is the test section, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the section counter indicates that it is a test section. If the total number of out balls is equal to or more than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is the timing to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, in order to continue the test section, the base calculation area 13128 is not updated and the process proceeds to step S8034. On the other hand, if the timing is in the test section and the test section ends, the test section shifts to the first section, and the process advances to step S8032. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low probability/non-time saving short out balls, and the number of low probability/non time saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this processing, the test section is finished and the first section is started.

On the other hand, when the section counter value is not 0 in step S8028 and it is determined that the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total out-ball number is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is 52000 or more, the section is ended, and the processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128 and writes it in the base value B storage area (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the section counter is controlled so as not to become a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, larger than 2. Therefore, when the section counter value is 2, even if 1 is added to the section counter. The section counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low probability/non-time saving short balls, and the number of low probability/non time saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch and display the provisional section display and the confirmed section display described in FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is a cycle of blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 of FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It is better to set the time sufficiently longer. This is because if the blinking and the display switching are at the same cycle, it becomes difficult to understand the blinking display (that is, whether the low-probability/non-time saving out ball count is less than 6000). This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). As the calculation method of the check code, the same calculation method as the processing of calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization processing (FIG. 22) is used. In addition, when the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, it may be a value of a plurality of bytes in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, in the case of 2 bytes, A55AH (1010010101011010B)). To). Further, instead of setting a fixed value in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored at the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code has a fixed value, it is preferable that the check code is configured with a larger number of bytes than the check data calculated to improve the possibility of determining the RAM abnormality.

As described above, according to the base calculation process of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value is not delayed at each timing of occurrence of prize balls and occurrence of out balls. It can be displayed (in real time) and can judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay. Since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126, a check code is issued at the end of each base calculation process. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

Also, for the prize balls, when the base value is calculated and displayed using the expected number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing when the base value is calculated and displayed and the timing when the prize balls are paid out Is different. In other words, the payout device is abnormal and the prize balls are not paid out (the supply device is out of supply due to a supply replenishment, the upper plate being full, a failure of the payout number sensor provided in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.). The base value will be calculated and displayed even if (such as stop).

In the base calculation process described above, the base value is calculated each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process by using the number of out balls detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning hole sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. This makes it possible to distinguish which of the preceding and following sections the base value should be calculated in, even if the timing of the above-mentioned section switching (52,000 out balls) arrives in one base calculation process. , Can display accurate base value in real time.

Further, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is generated. May be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display data generation process.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499, so the processing in steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is 0 to 1249, and the display switching counter is in the range 1250 to 2499. Executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." in the upper two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not the test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." in the upper two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether it is currently the test section or the first section (step S8047). Since the base value has not been measured in the past fixed section in the test section or the first section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest definite section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the low probability/non-time saving out ball number is smaller than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the low probability/non-time saving out ball count is less than 6000, the base value may not be stable because the operating number (out ball count) after starting the base value measurement is small in the section. The display on the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low probability/non-time saving out balls is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display of the base display 1317 is turned on without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process proceeds to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition is completed, and the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Lastly, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are designated (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt process (base calculation process) executed at predetermined time intervals, the display contents on the base display 1317 are switched by using the display switching counter which is updated regularly, so that The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed section can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, since blinking is displayed in the range where the base value is not stable in each section, it is possible to easily confirm whether the base value is in the stable range or in the unstable range by the display of the base display 1317.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the base calculation process. The modification shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except that a check process for the base calculation work (steps S8012 and S8013) is added. In FIG. 108, the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) of the base calculation process will be described, but the processes of steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those of FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When providing one or a plurality of backup areas in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and when it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in this order, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). It may be determined whether 13128 is normal (step S8012), and after performing necessary processing based on the determination result, whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

Subsequent processing (from step S8014) is the same as that in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In the base calculation processing shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal for each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds). It is possible to suppress the display of various base values.

Next, a method of determining an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for the calculation of the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the internal RAM 1312 (the “role ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is the “base calculation area 13128”). It is stored as (reread) and determines whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations in which processing (timing) the normal/abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization process).
106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 106.

When the initialization process is as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is obtained in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106). A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the above data.

In step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined using the check code whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

When providing one or a plurality of backup areas in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and when it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. When it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

In this case, the check code is determined less frequently, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off when the power is turned on (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization processing is as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation processing is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off processing of the initialization processing (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case in which the check code is calculated and determined by timer interrupt processing)
Next, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108.

When the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

In step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined using the check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization processing is as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the steps of determining whether the base calculation work area is normal in steps S24 and S26 may be omitted.

In this case, the abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

When a fixed value is used for the check code instead of the checksum, the check code setting and determination timing may be the same as the checksum calculation and determination timing. Alternatively, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used as the check code for the determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the calculation of the base value when the game state is switched.

One game ball was won while the starting opening 2004 (electric tulip) was open, and then the variable display game for a predetermined number of times ended, the time saving state ended and the normal state was returned. After that, in the normal state, it is further assumed that a game ball wins the opening opening 2004 that is open.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device according to the winning of the start opening 2004. That is, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in relation to any winning in the starting opening 2004 is performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting opening 2004 is not added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number, The second winning ball is added to the low probability non-time saving out ball number.

In the above description, the end of the time saving state is described, but the same applies to the end of the probability change by ST.

In addition to the end of the time saving state described above, the same phenomenon occurs when a big hit occurs in the special symbol variable display game. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins during opening of the starting port 2004 (electric tulip), a big hit state starts after that, and a game ball wins at the opening port 2004 that is still open.

Also in this case, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in association with the winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is executed. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball at the starting opening 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball is low probability.・It is not added to the number of non-time saving out balls.

Furthermore, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while opening the starting opening 2004 (electric tulip), a specific error occurs after that, and a game ball wins the starting opening 2004 that is still open. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error in which the base value cannot be accurately calculated due to the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the out Do not use the sphere for the base calculation.

Also in this case, the variable display game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in association with the winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is executed. On the other hand, since the out ball during the occurrence of a specific error is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball at the starting opening 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball. Is not added to the low probability non-time saving out ball count.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls won during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (at the end of time saving, at the time of a big hit of the special symbol variation display game, at the time of occurrence of a specific error, etc.). Regarding, there are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and the variation of the special figure can be started in any winning.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the look-ahead effect of the special symbol variable display game that is being held, the first prize won in the starting port 2004 in the time saving state is not the target of the look-ahead effect and is in the normal state. The second prize that has won may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize that is won in the time saving state at the starting opening 2004 may be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the second prize that is won in the normal state may not be the target of the look-ahead effect.

Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the positive change state (ST) or the power support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be described.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration relating to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 is configured as a whole as shown in FIG. 18, but FIG. 110 shows the configuration regarding the storage area in detail.

A RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 are provided in the main control MPU 1311 as storage areas for storing data. The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores exclusively data when the program is executed by the CPU 13111 (for example, a flag indicating a state of a calculation result, a program execution state, data input to and output from the CPU 13111). The CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores, for example, a random number value updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) or an intermediate value in the random number update operation. Also, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the address of the jump destination are temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, a value input to a port from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, a value in the middle of creating edge information of a signal input from the switch or a detection result of edge information) is temporarily stored. To store.

Further, when a random number is acquired and stored in the hold storage area at the time of winning the start mouth, the random number value is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random value is stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 1312. Remember. Further, when a random number at the time of winning the starting opening is obtained and pre-reading determination (judgment determination at the time of winning the starting opening) is performed based on the value of the random number, the random number temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is used. The pre-reading determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random number value stored in the reserved storage area may be (re)read to any storage area of the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU to perform the pre-reading determination.

The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from the memory space configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and specified by an address, and is specified by the name (for example, Area0) of each storage area included in the in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. .. The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C are composed of a plurality of storage areas (Area0 to 6) having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is formed for each storage area of a predetermined number (7 in the figure). Each group is configured to be accessible from the processor core 13141. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and C.

As will be described later, the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas for each group by one CHANGE command. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of the group 0, and the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 is switched to the group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but may be any number as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage areas (Area0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are storage areas provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data during program execution, and even one (1 byte=8 bits) can be used. Therefore, it is possible to use a plurality of sets (for example, 2 bytes=16 bits in which Area0 and Area1 are combined). For this reason, 8-bit data or 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without causing an excessive capacity in the storage area. Further, the storage area (Area 6) is set as a storage area used with a capacity of an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of other storage areas, and cannot be used by being divided into 1-byte storage areas. In this way, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured by the storage areas having a plurality of capacities, and the storage area that can be used in any combination is provided. Therefore, the storage area is properly used according to the application (for example, data length) in the arithmetic processing. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, the address can be specified by one (or a set of combined storage areas). Therefore, the argument of the instruction can be reduced and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches the group of storage areas that the processor core 13141 can access according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area accessible by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 has, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching four areas), and an abnormality flag indicating that switching has not been normally performed. (If the abnormality flag is set, the switching instruction will be executed again), and the unauthorized access flag that is set when the abnormality that the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 has changed is stored. It is good.

Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity/overflow flag, a zero flag, a sign flag, etc.) indicating the state of the operation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 may be provided regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. For example, a program counter indicating the address where the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program of the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and shows a specific example of a part that calls the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returns from the base calculation process.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the base calculation process is started. The base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing from the DI instruction to the EI instruction due to an interrupt.

After that, the PUSH instruction saves the data in the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is used in the base calculation process of the callee from the group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller by the CHANGE command. Switch to group 1. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE command, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one command (that is, a small number of steps).

The LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 and saves the stack pointer value. After that, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the LD pointer restores the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 1 used in the call-destination base calculation processing to the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt processing, and then the RET instruction switches to the caller's timer interrupt processing. Return. Generally, the instruction for switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the instruction for restoring the data saved in the stack have different roles, but in the present embodiment, after returning from the base calculation processing to the timer interrupt processing, The auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched by returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary storage area 13145 does not have to be switched to the group 0 by the CHANGE command after the base calculation processing is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be surely switched by the CHANGE command.

As described above, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP command. It should be noted that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) may be used without using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

After that, the interrupt is permitted by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main process on the main control side (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

The DI instruction may be used to prohibit the interrupt at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the EI instruction may be allowed to be enabled at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, the interrupt may be prohibited when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be permitted at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where the interrupt is prohibited, it is not necessary to further disable the interrupt or enable the interrupt in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interruption prohibition by the DI command is to set the interruption-prohibited state to the interruption-prohibited state for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the example described above, the saving of the switching register 13144 is executed by the timer interrupt processing of the calling source, and the switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the stack area are executed by the base calculation processing of the calling destination. One process may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves to the outside of the game control region and when the process returns to the game control region. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the timer interrupt processing of the calling source will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of the program of the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and shows a specific example of a part for calling the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returning from the base calculation process.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the base calculation process is started. By the interruption between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, the base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing during the interruption.

After that, the PUSH instruction saves the data in the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113). After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the call source to the group 1 used in the base calculation process of the call destination. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE command, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one command (that is, a small number of steps).

After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation processing, before starting the processing shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt processing is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is written. To evacuate. After that, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the LD pointer restores the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the CHANGE command switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 1 used in the base calculation process of the callee to the group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller, and the game is played by the POP command. The data in the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored in the switching register 13144. It should be noted that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) may be used without using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before calling the base calculation process by the restoration of the switching register 13144, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the CHANGE command. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be surely switched by the CHANGE command.

After that, the interrupt is permitted by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main process on the main control side (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that, similarly to the above, the interrupt may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the interrupt may be permitted by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, the interrupt may be prohibited when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be permitted at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where the interrupt is prohibited, it is not necessary to further disable the interrupt or enable the interrupt in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interruption prohibition by the DI command is to set the interruption-prohibited state to the interruption-prohibited state for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

Although the example in which the timer interrupt process, the base calculation process, and the auxiliary storage region 13145 are switched has been described with reference to FIG. 111, the auxiliary storage region 13145 may be switched in the inspection process executed by the debug (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, it is preferable to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing at the head of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 by the CHANGE command. Further, an initialization process (step S10 of FIG. 21 to step S34 of FIG. 22), a main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 of FIG. 21), and a power-off process (steps S42 to S58 of FIG. 21), The auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched depending on the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23, FIG. 75, FIG. 80, etc.) and a different auxiliary storage area 13145 may be used for each processing.

Furthermore, when only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed in the game control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and outside the game control area (for example, debug ( Inspection function) area, base calculation area, etc.) (for example, debug processing, base calculation processing, etc.) to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145, and use different auxiliary storage areas 13145 inside and outside the game control area. Good.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main process and the timer interrupt process, but since the main control side main process being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt process is started, the timer interrupt process is executed. The value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 at the start of processing (for example, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing), and at the end of timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of timer interrupt processing). The value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 may be returned to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality (bytes) of storage areas, saving one unit (byte or word) in the stack area increases the number of instructions for saving. Similarly, the number of instructions for recovering data from the stack area increases. Further, in this case, if the processing order is mistaken for saving data to the stack area and restoring data from the stack area, different data may be read from the stack area, and the subsequent processing may not be performed correctly. .. Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and to collectively restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area, The above problems can be solved.

Furthermore, if all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved in the stack area, the stack area may overflow and the data outside the area planned as the stack area (such as the stack area for other purposes) may be rewritten. is there. Therefore, in addition to an instruction to collectively store all storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area It is also possible to provide an instruction to collectively restore to a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas of the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area and execute the instructions.

In this way, when moving to the processing outside the game control area, it is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to the processing inside the game control area, it is switched to the original auxiliary storage area 13145, so it is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. The processing can proceed without saving the created data in the RAM 1312 (eg, stack area).

In addition, since the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area) when moving to the processing outside the game control area, and the switching register 13144 is recovered from the RAM 1312 when moving to the processing inside the game control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be recovered without being recovered from the RAM 1312.

Also, when moving to processing outside the game control area, it switches to another stack area, and when moving to processing inside the game control area, it switches to the original stack area, so the stack area used for processing inside the game control area is , The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely divided without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

In addition, the value stored in the switching register 13144 when shifting to processing outside the game control area is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area), and the value saved when shifting to processing inside the game control area is used for switching Since the register 13144 is restored, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the processing outside the game control area, and the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. In the arrangement on the memory shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted in the arrangement on the memory described above with reference to FIG. 26 is illustrated in the RAM 1312, but the RAM 1312 shown in FIG. 26 also has the stack area.

In the ROM 1313, a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a base calculation/display code 13135, and a base calculation/display data 13136. Contains the storage area. In the ROM 1313 of this embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1, such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing a program or data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And a base calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of calculating the base value, such as the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136.

A free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation/display code 13135. When the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more, it is desirable that the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in the dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. It should be noted that the value stored in the empty area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area or a value with low frequency. The value stored in the empty area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, a debug area (code for debug (inspection function), data for debug (inspection function)) that is a process not directly related to control of the progress of the game. ) And a base calculation area (base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, and a defect (bug, etc.) in the base calculation/display code 13135 is caused in the game control. Avoids the risk of affecting.

In the debug (inspection function) area, programs and data for the purpose not directly related to the game are stored. For example, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. The debug (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal. The base calculation area stores a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Also, the game control code 13131 can be read from and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Is configured to be executable, and writing to the relevant area cannot be performed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area accessible only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed during execution of the game control code 13131, but the game control code 13131 is changed from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

The base calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 can be inspected. This can be performed separately, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the base calculation/display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area for storing data used by the game control code 13131, and can be read and written from the game control area 13126. In the game control area 13126, data cannot be written from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but read access is possible, and the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and base calculation are possible. -The display code 13135 can refer to the data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but only the reading of data is permitted and the writing of data is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation/display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only the reading of data is permitted and the writing of data is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is exclusively used to temporarily save the data stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. The stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113B is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the base calculation result is stored. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation/display process, and the main control side power off process (see FIG. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the power-down process on the main control side (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as the power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

If it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the power-off process on the main control side, the value in the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the base calculation/display processing, the value of the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation/display processing. It suffices if the entire main area or only the area having the updated value is copied to the backup area when at least a part of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digit of the address.

[11. Record of game history]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine for recording gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines, from among a plurality of prepared effects, effects suitable for the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the determined effect display device. It is displayed at 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 decides to present a specific effect (for example, two kinds of specific effects out of three types of super reach) out of a plurality of prepared effects, the switching of the game state is started. As to how many times the special symbol variable display game is played, the particular effect is displayed (in other words, at what number of rotations the effect appears), in the effect display device 1600 together with the progress status of the game. indicate.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appears at 34:10:25, and the result of the special symbol variable display game is lost. At 127:10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol variable display game was lost, Super Reach 2 appeared at 428th rotation at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variable display game was a sudden change jackpot. Is displayed.

The jackpot history display (for example, the jackpot on the 15th rotation and the jackpot on the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that has appeared before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players can judge whether the pachinko machine 1 is in good condition or out of order from the appearance of a specific effect (for example, if the super reach 2 appears within 50 revolutions after the end of the big hit, it is considered that the big hit is won in a short time). In order to meet such a player's expectation, the degree of appearance of the effect is visually displayed. Also, when the player is confirming the degree of appearance of the effect, the player does not shoot the game ball, so if a display that shows the degree of appearance of all the prepared effects is displayed, the player It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance, and the operation of the gaming table may decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (a reach effect with a high expectation for a big hit) of the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores information on the number of variations and the effect produced. Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the information on the number of fluctuations and the effect that has been shown, based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like) is operated, not all the produced effects but the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect is displayed is added and displayed. It suffices to perform processing.

In addition, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in business, the pachinko machine 1 outputs error information to notify the employee of the hall. In the form of this notification, the error screen shown in FIG. 115(A) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115(B) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the cause of the error. 116, an alarm sound is output, and the error signal shown in FIG. 116 is output from the external terminal board 784. In addition, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 include those shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. The error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified outside the pachinko machine 1 so that the employee in the hall can know the cause. For example, a code defined for each error type may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, if the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, “0” is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED on the right side of the door is displayed. Lights blue.

However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a minor malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnection of the connector), a serious malfunction requiring replacement of parts, and a malfunction.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must search for the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. It takes time and cost to search the cause of the error, and the suspension of the operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know the detailed information of the error that occurred, the error can be resolved early and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall determines the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on a signal output from the external terminal board 784 using a hall computer. However, in order to search for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, preferably, "the number of winnings of the general winning opening", "the number of winnings of the large winning opening", "the number of passing gates", and "variation of the normal symbol" Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions, it will be solved by repairing or replacing parts, so there is no big problem, but if a game ball is acquired by cheating, the chances that a normal player will profit will decrease, May interfere with the business of the company, and eventually the hall may become difficult to manage.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. In addition, events such as "general winning award", "big award winning", "gate passing", and "normal symbol changes" occur frequently, so when you output all the data from the pachinko machine 1, the data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, which increases the burden on the hall.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment stores the data, which is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748, inside the pachinko machine 1 so that the stored data can be referred to later. This made it possible to check the details of the process leading up to the error.

In addition, the time of occurrence of events (number of winnings for general winning a prize, number of winnings for a large winning a prize, number of passing gates, number of normal symbols, etc.) that occur during the course of these errors is recorded, so how much time does it take? You can understand how many events have occurred. For example, an abnormality such as the number of winnings at the general winning opening being 50 per minute can be seen.

Note that if the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used to search for the cause of error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur within a predetermined time (for example, one minute), the error information may be output and notified.

For example, in any game state, you can win the general prize hole, so if you receive more than a predetermined number of prizes in a predetermined time, you may output error information and notify, but the big prize hole is won only during the jackpot game Therefore, it is advisable to set a predetermined time from the start of the big hit game to the end, and output error information when a predetermined number or more of special winning openings have been won in a predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing according to this embodiment. The peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 120 has a game history recording process (step S1023) added to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command. The game history is recorded as the date and time of event occurrence, for example, in the format shown in FIG. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but in consideration of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off, it is preferable to record in a SRAM which does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power.

The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit steady process, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped midway and some effects are not executed. That is, even if some of the effects are not executed (even if all the effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is none, the game history is recorded prior to the production. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process relating to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared by a plurality of pachinko machines.

Next, the process when the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit will be described. When the data amount of the recorded game history has reached the upper limit of the capacity of the memory, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can be used every time. The processing of can be reduced.

Further, when the memory capacity of the recorded game history has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to erase the oldest game history and record the latest game history. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the empty state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 every time can be reduced.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the useless process from being executed. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs another process (effect control, lamp). Control and sound control can be executed reliably, and new processing (for example, processing executed over a plurality of peripheral control unit steady processing due to lack of processing time) by utilizing the available processing time Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in the peripheral control unit steady process may be executed because it does not need to be executed every time.

The received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

The game history recording condition setting table registers the type of command recorded as a game history among the commands received by the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310, that is, the event recorded as a game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the generation condition of the command and the purpose of recording as a game history are as follows.

For example, the start opening 1 winning command and the start opening 2 winning command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral controller 1511 when the winning of the game ball into the starting opening 2002 and the starting opening 2004 is detected, respectively, and the surrounding area. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting opening. Further, the special symbol 1 symbol type command, the special symbol 2 symbol type command, respectively, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of variation of the special symbol, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the special symbols 1 and 2. The number of fluctuations can be counted.

The power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The variation start state command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310 at the start of variation of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of variation of the special symbol. There are four states that can be distinguished by the change start state command: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/time saving, and high probability/non-time saving. The number of fluctuations made can be counted. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that the jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is the jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game. Is a state in which the probability of being derived is higher than usual. Time saving, the probability that the above-mentioned second starting door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) has a higher probability than non-time saving, or the time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol until it is determined. For example, when the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), the frequency of opening (or expanding) is higher than in the non-time saving state. Along with this, the probability that an effect with a short time of one special symbol variable display game is selected is increased.

The special winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are transferred from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively. The command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each special winning opening.

The special winning opening 1 winning command (below the specified winning prize) and the big winning entrance 2 winning command (below the specified winning prize) are won at the special winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively, until the end of the round. If not performed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has passed from the time of closing each special winning opening (for example, after one second and before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 You can get the winning status in one round for each big winning hole. The special winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the specified winning prize) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the specified winning prize) are rounded when the number of game balls exceeds the specified number at the special winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively. When is finished, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each special winning opening (for example, after one second and before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 is You can get the status of winning in one round to each prize hole. It should be noted that this command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, when the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls defined in one round is detected and the big winning opening is detected. This is because there is a possibility that an undetected game ball will be present in the big winning opening when the game is closed, and the situation of the winning is accurately grasped even when such an over-winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral controller 1511 when the jackpot is generated (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuously operating device is activated), and the peripheral controller 1511 acquires a change to the jackpot state. Yes, you can count the number of jackpots. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, and the termination of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the situation after the jackpot.

The small hit OP command is for opening the special winning opening in a relatively short time (for example, the opening time of one time is 1.8 seconds or the total opening time of multiple times is less than 1.8 seconds). Therefore, when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stop symbol of the normal symbol and can count the number of variations of the normal symbol. The general-purpose gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls passing through the gate unit 2003.

Even if the special symbol or the normal symbol is not selected by lottery even if the player wins the starting mouth or passes through the gate (such as when there is no overflow or memory), the main control board 1310 causes the peripheral control unit 1511 to win the starting mouth 1. The hour command, the start opening 2 winning command and the universal figure gate passing command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls entering the starting port and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the error occurrence number.

The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball wins each general winning opening 2001, and the surrounding area. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. It should be noted that the general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of the general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided has been exemplified above. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 16, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with four general winning a prizes 2001. Therefore, four types of general winning a prize winnings, from the general winning a prize 1 winning command to the general winning a prize 4 winning command The command is defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in order of the event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the time when the main control board 1310 detects the event occurrence is notified to the peripheral control unit 1511. Then, the peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the date and time of event occurrence is recorded with granularity up to the minute, but may be recorded up to the second.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the event that has occurred in association with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, the change in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.). .. For example, the power-on command of history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, RAM was cleared from the contents of the command, and the game started with a low probability/non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the hall starts business at 15:30, turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and the player starts striking after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette) and wins the general winning opening 2001. I understand. Further, the special figure 1 variation start event of history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, from the content of the special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol) received, special symbol variation You can see the result of the display game. The special figure 1 fluctuation start event of history number 6 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, from the content of the special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol) received, the special symbol variation display game You can see the result of. In addition, although the result of the special symbol variable display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variable display game is represented by a numerical value indicating the result of the variable display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of variation of the special symbol. The result of the variable display game (miss, normal 4 rounds, high probability 4 rounds, high probability 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as the game history.

Next, a method in which the hole refers to the information (game history) recorded in the memory will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 for outputting the information recorded in the memory from the peripheral controller 1511 is provided. Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

In addition, when the data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral output unit 1590 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be composed of a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be held by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that becomes a trigger for the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history is a command that is not transmitted during a normal game after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, even with a history reference command dedicated to the game history output (Fig. 121). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed with a command not defined in the above may be used as the history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, even with a command transmitted during a normal game, the history reference command may be transmitted under the condition of an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur). For example, this is the case when 50 prizes are won in the starting opening or the general winning opening in one minute. In addition, the game history may be output when the commands used for game control are received in a special order which is not normally possible.

The operation history may be displayed by providing an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (effect display device) on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (a place invisible to the player).

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its periphery.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and transmits the performance display drive board 4450 and control information and various information (various data) via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Effect display control for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control unit 1511 that communicates with the effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and for controlling the sound such as the music or the sound effect that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that control the effect operation to be executed, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the effect display control unit 1512 described later. Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, a schedule that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc.). Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing data and the like, and various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of a jackpot gaming state and management of special effect flags) Peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for operating the peripheral control MPU 1511a and peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e"). .) and.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when power is cut off for a long time (when power is cut off for a long time), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. When the backup power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”), the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its contents.

Further, power is supplied to a part of the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. A game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium-ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capacity capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the package of the peripheral control CPU together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 124(A) shows a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which a package different from the peripheral control CPU constitutes an area for storing a game history. As shown in the figure, the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. Be done.

When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage outside the peripheral control CPU) The data in the work area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124(B) shows a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d which constitutes an area for storing a game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124B, when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control is performed. The data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, the effect control area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d and the game history storage area are preferably physically separated.

Note that, in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which power is not supplied, without providing the backup power supply 1513.

In either of FIGS. 124A and 124B, the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be any method other than the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. Good. For example, if a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. May be turned into.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control board 1310 continues to send power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. When it does, or when the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By thus providing the means for initializing the data in the game history storage area, for example, even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The lighting data of the game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is output from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) to the lamp. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive data for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 is a frame decoration drive The signal is sent from the amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, or to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is driven from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the frame decoration drive. Send it to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, which are provided in the effect operation unit 220. Detection signal is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is output from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, to the serial operation I/O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180, which is not shown in the figure. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control circuit board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the event that occurred during the game is recorded as the game history in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so the event occurs during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the opening of the hall), and the performance or failure of the gaming machine can be grasped. Further, the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power source is input), so that the game history can be confirmed even after the gaming machine is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Further, for example, in the case of winning the starting opening 1, (1) the fact that the winning opening 1 was won, (2) the time when the winning opening 1 was won, and (3) the event that occurred before winning the starting opening 1. As described above, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. 116 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1. This is because the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that the (1) winning in the starting mouth described above) is output from the external terminal board 784 in the case of winning in the starting mouth, etc. This is because the information stored in the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed when the information is investigated. This is because, if all of the information stored inside when winning the prize at the starting opening is output from the external terminal board 784, the output amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 may increase, which may burden the hall. Is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is pachinko machine via the external terminal board 784. 1 so that the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed in a special case.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs the game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modified examples described below are a modification of a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, the event (command type) that occurred and the date and time when the event occurred are recorded for a predetermined command that is predetermined from among the commands that are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d that records the game history is finite, and it is difficult to record all of a huge amount of events that occur during the game for a long time. For this reason, in the modified example 1 (compact plan 1), the change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in the state are recorded.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification.

In the game history recording condition setting table of the modified example 1, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately for counting commands and commands that trigger state changes, and commands for which both attributes are set. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the obtainable state change column are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is installed in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is required. ..

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the command in which the counting attribute is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the command issuance as a result of the command analysis. In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is received, as a result of command analysis, the state of the game history recorded in the memory is renewed, and a record for counting the number of events. To add.

For example, a power-on command, a fluctuation start state command, a big hit OP command, a big hit operation end transition destination command, and an error display command are commands issued by a state change, respectively, power on, special symbol fluctuation display start, It can be grasped as the switching of the state of big hit state start, big hit state end, and error state occurrence.

The count command is used to count the number of events that triggered the issuance of the count command. Specifically, the start opening 1 winning command and the start opening 2 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each starting opening. Special symbol 1 symbol type command, special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of fluctuations of each special symbol. With the big winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning), the number of winning balls to each big winning opening can be counted. With the special winning opening 1 winning command (below the specified winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (below the specified winning), it is possible to count the number of rounds that have ended below the specified winning number. With the big winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the specified winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the specified winning), it is possible to count the number of rounds that have exceeded the specified winning number (that is, over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can normally count the number of fluctuations of the symbol. The universal figure gate passage command can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion. The error display command can count the number of errors that have occurred. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

The game history of the modified example 1 is the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurs, and the state from a predetermined starting point. And the cumulative number of count events detected until the end of (up to the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time of initialization of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The states where the counting events are recorded separately are assumed to be 5 states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in the first modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as a counting event, the number of winning openings 1 wins, the number of winning openings 2 wins, the number of changes in one special symbol, the number of changes in two special prizes, the number of winning one general winning holes, the number of winning two winning general prizes, The number of general winning openings 3 winning, the number of major winning openings 1 winning, the number of winning two major winning openings, the number of passing gates, and the number of normal symbol variations are recorded. The number of events other than those shown in the figure may be counted.

A storage area for the cumulative number of each counting event of 2 bytes is sufficient. In particular, data that is not derived very often and whose cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of general winning awards) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, 1-byte data and 2-byte data may be arranged in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or 1 byte and 2 bytes) without being mixed.

When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, the date and time when the event occurred are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The count result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. Although a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, a new record may be created at the start of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, data may not be stored in the created new record while counting events are counted, but 0 may be stored as an initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event of the period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and recorded in the work area. Numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of count events detected during the state (from the last state change event to the state change event) is recorded as a game history, the count value of the count event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , It will be initialized by the normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in the low probability/non-time saving state, the game history information in which the number of winnings to the starting opening 1 is 50 is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the first modification. In 1, the game state is changed and then recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, when the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed in the low-probability/non-time saving state, the winning number of the 50 prizes is initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Further, even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, in the current state, the recording of the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is continuously executed, and the accumulated number of counting events may not be stored from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral controller 1511 is reduced each time. it can. Also, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary process execution and reduce the process of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As described above, in the first modification, the state switching of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (each winning number, the number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state during the switching is recorded, so that the game of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification is also characterized in that more information is internally recorded than the information output from the external terminal board 784.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, it is stored in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Information (game history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is performed in a state in which a new record cannot be created in the game history storage area (while the same gaming state continues), it may be difficult to find fraud. As described above, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1. Unless the game state changes, the information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function may be provided to detect fraud early.

Specifically, the first record (the latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the latest state is recorded and the second record (the record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded. An error may be notified when the result of comparison with the above satisfies a predetermined condition.

For example, in a high probability/time saving state or a jackpot gaming state, in a pachinko machine 1 that shoots a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a, so-called right hitting, transitions from a high probability/time saving state to a jackpot gaming state. However, if the state changes to a high probability/time saving state after the jackpot game state has ended, even if the state is switched, it is usually right-handed, so there is a possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent high probability/time saving state, and when a difference is detected, an error may be notified. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states is set to 1, and an error may be notified when a difference of 2 or more occurs. This is because when the hand is released from the firing handle, the firing force may be uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. Since the early fraud detection check function described above detects an error by predicting a game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, since it is a high-probability/time-saving state, it will hit the right), an unskilled player may There is a possibility that an error will be detected if you make an unexpected hit. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error and only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a location away from the pachinko machine 1 without the player being aware of it, and prevent troubles with the player.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In Modification 1 described above, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event is recorded as the state change of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is recorded. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state that occurs repeatedly is sufficient. Therefore, in the second modification (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of the modified example 2 is composed of a history of state events and the cumulative number of count events for each state. The history of state events includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. It The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 2 includes a start opening 1 winning number (starting opening 1 winning command), a starting opening 2 winning number (starting opening 2 winning command), special Symbol 1 fluctuation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 fluctuation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning a prize 1 winning number (general winning a prize 1 winning command), general winning a prize 2 winning number (general) Prize hole 2 prize command), general prize mouth 3 prize number (general prize mouth 3 prize command), big prize mouth 1 prize number (large prize mouth 1 prize command), big prize mouth 2 prize number (large prize mouth 2 prize command) ), the number of passing gates (general figure gate passing command), the number of normal symbol variations (normal symbol stop command).

The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time when the event occurred are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the counting event described above is corresponding to the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

Note that the counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out to the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is initialized by a normal ram clear operation, although the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but it is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event for each type of state (each winning number, the number of fluctuations, etc.) is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. It is possible to record a long game history without increasing the capacity of.

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In Modification 2 described above, of the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded at the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing at which the state is switched may not be important in some cases, and may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state is known. For this reason, in the modified example 3 (compact plan 3), the switching of the states of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the modified example 3, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the modified example 1.

In Modified Example 3, the same event as the event recorded in Modified Example 1 is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of modification 3 includes the accumulated time of each state. The cumulative time is included so that the hall can estimate the number of times an event has occurred (for example, the number of jackpots) from the cumulative time. The states in which the counting events are recorded separately are 5 states of a low probability/non-time saving state, a low probability/time saving state, a high probability/non-time saving state, a high probability/time saving state, and a jackpot state. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 3 includes a starting opening 1 winning number (starting opening 1 winning command), a starting opening 2 winning number (starting opening 2 winning command), special Symbol 1 fluctuation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 fluctuation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning a prize 1 winning number (general winning a prize 1 winning command), general winning a prize 2 winning number (general) Prize hole 2 prize command), general prize mouth 3 prize number (general prize mouth 3 prize command), big prize mouth 1 prize number (large prize mouth 1 prize command), big prize mouth 2 prize number (large prize mouth 2 prize command) ), the number of passing gates (general figure gate passing command), the number of normal symbol variations (normal symbol stop command). The number of counting events other than the above may be counted.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of counting events described above is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

Note that the counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out to the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is initialized by a normal ram clear operation, although the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but it is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event for each type of state (each winning number, the number of fluctuations, etc.) is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. It is possible to record a long game history without increasing the capacity of.

As described above, in the modified examples 1 to 3, when the event is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) when the event occurs by the game history recording process, and the condition for writing in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is satisfied. First, the data of the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in a normal ram clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here is a brief description of the hall's operations. In many cases, the business hours of the hall are set, for example, the opening time is 10:00 and the closing time is 23:00. Therefore, in a time zone with many players, such as a time zone just after the opening of the store or a time zone in the evening, it may be difficult for a clerk to monitor whether the game player is playing an illegal game. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players also decreases, and if there is a high probability/shortening time pachinko machine near the closing time, the high probability/shortening time pachinko machine is initialized for the next day's business, and low probability/ May be in an untimely state. In this case, since the number of game players is small, it is possible to monitor a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short working time, and it is possible to know whether the latest game is illegal. In other words, in consideration of the situation that some pachinko machines do not require the latest game history, it is possible to provide an efficient game machine by allowing the clerk to select whether to leave the latest information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the most recent event is deleted, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the most recent event. The game history stored in the area is left. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, information that is recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and information that is recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, the clerk may cause the state change of the pachinko machine, and if you want to delete the event record recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform a ram clear operation. By clearing all the game history by ram clear operation, it was decided to delete only the game history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the most recent event, as described above, before the most recent event. This is because the clerk has not seen the events that have occurred up to this point (it cannot be seen because there are many gamers).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the recording of the information that the winning opening is won, but also the winning of the general winning opening unrelated to the lottery is temporarily recorded in the work area, so the special symbol ( In the symbol that starts changing by winning the start opening, even if the symbol indicating the winning lottery result is shown in the stopped state of this symbol) does not change, while the game ball is being launched in the game area 5a, the game is played. It is characterized by collecting history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed when the winning lottery is triggered, but a process that may be always executed while power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

Further, in the low probability/non-time saving state, the game ball is shot so that the game ball wins the starting opening 2002 like a so-called left hitting or a slight hit. In such a case, the player should appropriately win the starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001. However, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 2001 (or very few), but there are many gaming balls winning in the starting opening 2002, or conversely, there is no winning in the starting opening 2002 (or very few). However, if a large number of game balls are won in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that fraud is being made. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening in which the game balls win at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning opening is a predetermined multiplication factor of the number of winnings in the second winning opening. You may be notified of an error when it exceeds.

Further, instead of the error notification, the security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. The above-mentioned detection method may detect an error when an unfamiliar player makes an unexpected hit. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error and only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a location away from the pachinko machine 1 without the player being aware of it, and prevent troubles with the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of play history data that can be recorded, if one game (one variation) is recorded, many games (long time) cannot be recorded. There is.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has a setting function of changing the operating ratio of the condition device, for example, as the game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine having the setting unit, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having the setting unit as seen from the back side in the open state. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as seen from the back side in a closed state, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a setting unit of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display unit 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132(A), a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode is provided on the setting board 970, and a setting for changing a set value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that receives an operation for changing settings.

In the present embodiment, operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are fetched by the payout controller 952. Further, the setting display unit 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The confirmed setting is transmitted from the payout controller 952 to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 may control the components on the setting board 970, as described later.

The setting key 971 is for inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion portion) and maintaining the short-circuited or open state of the contact by the operation of turning the key to the setting position to change to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. The setting key 971 may not be provided, and other switches may also be used. In this case, by operating the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 is operated during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode may be ended by long pressing.

The setting change mode may be started or ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing (long-pressing) the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more. Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing the RAM clear switch 954 for a long time during the setting change mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, the operation may be detected at the fall of the setting change switch 972.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select set values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is increased by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the setting value=6, the setting value=1. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be less (for example, 2 levels) or higher (for example, 8 levels).

Further, the setting key 971 may serve as the setting change switch 972 without providing the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three steps, and the key can be inserted/removed at the neutral position (normal position). When turned to the left, it becomes an operation for starting the setting change mode, and when turned to the right, the setting to be set. This is an operation for selecting a value (when it is turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value is for changing the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the special symbol hit probability). The set value=1 has a low hit probability, and the set value=6 has a high hit probability. Also, depending on the set value, the ratio of probability variation big hits, the ratio of time saving (ST) after big hits, the number of time saving, the number of rounds and counts of big hits, the probability of hitting a general figure, the general winning opening, the starting opening and the big winning opening. Various parameters relating to the game such as the number of prize balls may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary type switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that the switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a momentary type toggle switch.

The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. In addition, the selected set value may be set in response to the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, operation of the operation button 220C, ball lending button. The selected setting may be confirmed by the operation of, the operation of the return button, the detection of the winning of the game ball to the starting openings 2002 and 2004, or the like. The operation unit that substitutes the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is provided with three switches (including setting keys) in order to set the game performance in the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 has one or two switches. It is enough if you provide it.

Further, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing (long-pressing) the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more. Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the setting change mode. Instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, a RAM clear switch is provided. The set value can be confirmed by operating (long-pressing) 954 for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting indicator 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). .. It should be noted that the setting indicator 974 may be configured with LEDs having a settable value instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error. The error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are also used. The selected set value and the current set value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off in displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on in displaying the set value. Further, the display of the error type may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the display of the set value may be a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to a power supply board (not shown) in the power supply board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 together with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 that are operated when changing the settings are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of the setting change is improved. Can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

As yet another form, the setting board 970 may not be an independent board but may be configured as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface of the lower portion of the main body frame 4 (that is, not the game board 5 but the frame side) of the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 131. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the interval between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, and thus it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. As described above, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, prevents the key from being inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to change the setting that makes it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting changing operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting key 971 as the at least part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, it is advisable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. Thus, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting is performed while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). This makes it difficult to operate the board 970 and suppress an illegal act by the player changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (setting change obfuscation means) facing the setting board 970 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in association with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 is provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The setting change obfuscation unit configured by a member provided so as to face the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, it is advisable to cover the setting key 971 that triggers the setting change mode with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in the setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover for preventing an inadvertent operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (for example, a door-like lid that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, the outer frame 2 is provided with a second cover body that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310. The second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started by an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to prevent an illegal player from changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Is less than the length.

The setting board 970 may be arranged in the vicinity of the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 that are operated when changing the settings are arranged in the vicinity. With this configuration, the operability when the setting change mode is activated can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1 is provided in the power board box 930, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initialized in the payout control board unit 950. A RAM clear switch 954 for changing to a memory is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 suppresses an illegal act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game by hiding the setting key 971 so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, it is desirable that the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for the selection of the player's table. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, like the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 and a state where the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player cannot know the set value. Is desirable. As described above, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-improving unit that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting status display unit).

FIG. 132(B) is a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, and the setting key 971 moves. The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not positioned in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. It is difficult to confirm the current set values for the pachinko machine.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting board 970.

Also in this modification, similarly to the above-described example, the setting board 970 is provided with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974. However, in this modified example, the setting key 971 is arranged laterally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of the present modification is installed not on the side surface side of the main body frame 4 but on the rear surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. Then, as shown in FIG. 133B, when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40 with the main body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2. , The head of the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971.

In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of the board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 is operated during the operation of the pachinko machine 1, It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4 and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of the present modified example, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 136 is shown in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown from the back.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be that shown in FIG. 132A or FIG. 133A.

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311. Controls the display of the setting display 974.

The function and configuration of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, and common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used together and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. On the base display 1317, the base value of the provisional section (section currently being measured) and the base value of the final section (straight section) are normally switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting change mode, the selected (next set) set value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current set value is displayed.

In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the base value is displayed using four digits, but the set value is displayed using only a predetermined one digit (for example, the rightmost digit), and “−” may be displayed. Digits that are not used for displaying the set value may be displayed with other numbers, letters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used for displaying the base value. Further, when the set value is displayed, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set value is displayed in 6 steps of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value is blinked while the setting value is being selected, and the confirmed setting value is lit. Further, the current set value may be displayed in a lighted state. Also, in the base display, the upper two digits indicate the type of display data, and no number is displayed. Therefore, the highest digit may be used to display the set value. When the base display 1317 is also used as the setting display 974, the setting value is preferentially displayed during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation, so the base value is displayed, but the base value is displayed. Not done. After that, when the confirmation of the setting change mode and the set value is completed, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value.

When the base display 1317 is also used as the setting display 974, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area to display the display content on the base display 1317. The output process is executed by the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation/display code 13135 (for example, a process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided in the game control area. By making the processing common, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display unit 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control region, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display unit 1317 is for the base calculation/display outside the game control region. By executing the code 13135, the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and the security can be improved.

Further, the processing of changing the setting and confirming the setting may be executed outside the game control area.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is also used as the base display 1317, both cases are included in the scope of the invention described in this specification. In this way, while confirming the setting change mode and the setting value, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confusing, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of changing the setting and an erroneous recognition of the setting value.

Even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not combined, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or all the lights may be turned on while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the confirmation of the setting change mode and the set value is completed, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value. By not displaying a plurality of displays on the main control board box 1320 while confirming the setting change mode and the set value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of changing the setting and an erroneous recognition of the set value.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or notches for operating the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening/closing direction differs depending on the direction of the key hole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted vertically from the front side of the board into the board, the main control board box 1320 is separated vertically into the setting board 970 by the front surface and the back surface of the setting board 970 or the front side box body ( Alternatively, the cover) and the back side box body may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 includes the front side box body (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box body in the extending direction of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure in which it is slid in the (key 975 insertion direction) and separated.

In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are fetched by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display unit 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface (left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. 136, the game board 5 is attached. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the interval between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is small. Therefore, in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and It is difficult to operate the switch. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting key 971 as the at least part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, it is advisable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. Thus, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting is performed while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (setting change obfuscation means) facing the setting board 970 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in association with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 is provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting substrate 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Is less than the length.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1 is provided in the power board box 930, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initialized in the payout control board unit 950. A RAM clear switch 954 for changing to a memory is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 suppresses an illegal act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game by hiding the setting key 971 so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, it is desirable that the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for the selection of the player's table. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, like the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 and a state where the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player cannot know the set value. Is desirable. As described above, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-improving unit that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting status display unit).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIG. 132(B) and FIG. 133(B). .. In this state, since the setting board 970 and the keyhole of the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. The current settings of the pachinko machine cannot be confirmed.

Next, processing related to setting change will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 21 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key is operated (steps S17 and S30) and the CPU initialization process (steps). The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIG.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 to be writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. The determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, the data of the set value among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the reserved storage of the special symbol or the normal symbol, the prize ball) Information) and other data are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area is erased (step S30). , And proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and the checksum calculated in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( The areas other than the base calculation area 13128 are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

Then, it is determined whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag error that has not been performed (step S20), a RAM error where the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an error in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) (For example, probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information regarding prize balls), data other than that is cleared, and area 13128 for base calculation (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared to calculate the base. The area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of the base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128. The entire RAM area including may be cleared. If all RAM areas are cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, if the memory configuration is such that the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed, the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation Only initialize it. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data), for base calculation. Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value for each RAM clear operation, and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the setting value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

As the processing after step S28, either of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence/absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is shut off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of the setting change process and the setting display process. In FIG. 138, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 (or is configured integrally with the payout control board 951. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(A) cooperate with each other will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When the setting key 971 is operated to be on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permissible state generating means. As conditions for starting the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card) It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) or a balance inserted in the cash sand. Further, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects some possibility of fraud (for example, a magnetic error). The determination of these conditions may be performed by the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 after receiving the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to perform the setting change operation. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(2) When the setting change mode starts, the payout control unit 952 sends a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clearing process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before changing the setting is a game control area 13126 (including a game work area and a game stack area), in which a game state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a special symbol or a normal symbol reserve storage) , Information about prize balls), the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. The set value does not have to be cleared in this step because it is set to the initial value later in step (6).

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification during the setting change mode is to perform an initial action of the accessory or to perform a predetermined display on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or state of setting change on the effect display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the effect display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the setting change operation will be performed. Because it will interfere with.

The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as the firing disabling means to notify the setting change mode. Good. When the shooting of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the shooting of the game ball during the shooting stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value=0 is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended at the setting value=0, and the game (game ball Shooting, fluctuation display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout controller 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is also determined in the procedure (1) described above, it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permissible state generation unit that determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and confirms the setting value. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed set value by blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended, and thus the payout control unit 952 sends a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. By this setting change end command, the confirmed set value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

(13) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification of the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

It should be noted that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a lapse of a predetermined time. If the notification given in step (5) is considered as a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification given in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after a lapse of a predetermined time after the setting change mode ends. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to detect that an unauthorized player changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When stopping the firing of the game ball in a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game state (for example, probability change state, time saving state, special symbol or normal symbol) Data of the reserved storage of, and information about prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clearing process after the setting change, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the set value is not initialized.

Then, the setting change mode ends.

In this way, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951). The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other to execute the setting change process.

In the process described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a pulse having a predetermined frequency is transmitted a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage is transmitted. However, a signal of an intermediate potential other than the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent an illegal act of short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key 971 and activating the setting change mode, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is output from the main control unit 952 by a signal that cannot occur when the terminal is short-circuited. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the substrate 1310.

Next, a setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(B) cooperate with each other will be described.

When the setting key 971 is operated while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout controller 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and sends a setting value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout controller 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

In the above description, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores it in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, the setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139A will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as setting change permissible state generating means. Whether the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch. The detection signal of the main frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may send a main frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch. Further, the payout control board 951 may directly output the received detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When the setting key 971 is operated to be on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. As conditions for starting the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card) It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) or a balance inserted in the cash sand. Further, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects some possibility of fraud (for example, a magnetic error). In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to perform the setting change operation. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952 and executes the RAM clearing process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before changing the setting is a game control area 13126 (including a game work area and a game stack area), in which a game state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a special symbol or a normal symbol reserve storage) , Information about prize balls), the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. The set value does not have to be cleared in this step because it is set to the initial value later in step (6).

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification during the setting change mode is to perform an initial action of the accessory or to perform a predetermined display on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or state of setting change on the effect display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the effect display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the setting change operation will be performed. Because it will interfere with.

The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functions as the firing disabling means to notify the setting change mode. Good. When the shooting of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the shooting of the game ball during the shooting stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value=0 is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended at the setting value=0, and the game (game ball Shooting, fluctuation display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is also determined in the procedure (1) described above, it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the conditions for setting change are satisfied before the setting change is confirmed (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951). It functions as an allowable state generating means.

(9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) The main control MPU 1311, if the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value has been confirmed. It is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed set value by blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is operated to OFF, the setting change mode is ended, so the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification of the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

It should be noted that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a lapse of a predetermined time. If the notification given in step (5) is considered as a notification to the outside (players, hall employees), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification given in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after a lapse of a predetermined time after the setting change mode ends. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to detect that an unauthorized player changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When stopping the firing of the game ball in a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game state (for example, probability change state, time saving state, special symbol or normal symbol) Data of the reserved storage of, and information about prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clearing process after the setting change, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the set value is not initialized.

Then, the setting change mode ends.

In this way, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 obtains the detection signal of the main frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the setting change process cannot be executed only by the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. The setting change process is being executed.

Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139(B) cooperate with each other will be described.

When the setting key 971 is operated while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error in the setting change mode in the setting change process described with reference to FIGS. 138(A) and 139(A), the setting change mode may be invalidated and the setting change mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again to restart the stopped setting change mode. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage at which the setting is stopped due to the error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (the setting value=0 in the state where no setting value is selected).

The setting value may be changed by recording the history a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is fixed and the fixed setting value are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When the history of set values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Further, the recorded change history of the set value can be output. For example, it is preferable to display the recorded change history of the set value on the effect display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

The base value measurement section may be changed when the set value is changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total out-ball number of the section whose base value is currently being measured is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the game performance of the gaming machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate a base value that does not mix different game performances, and grasp the transition of the base value due to the change of the set value. ..

Further, when the set value is changed, the section for measuring the base value may be continued without changing the section for measuring the base value. Although the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, it is also possible to design the base value so that it does not change significantly by changing the set value. This is because, in such a case, it is not necessary to change the base value calculation section by changing the set value.

If both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. With regard to the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971, it is less likely that the operation of the setting key 971 is erroneously performed in view of the operation method and the arrangement of the operating means, so the setting change mode is activated. Is considered to be the operator's intention. Further, in the setting change mode, since the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode even if the RAM clear is desired. ..

On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM clear may be performed without starting the setting change mode. This is because it is considered that the operator desires at least the RAM clear when both are operated. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may not be activated and the RAM may not be cleared. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the operator's intention is not clear.

In the RAM clear of the procedure (3) or (15) described above, the data of the game state is maintained, but the reserved storage of the special symbol may be erased. Where the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the determination result of the random number in the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved storage of the special symbol and newly perform the lottery.

On the other hand, the special symbol lottery (extraction of the random number per hit) is performed when the game ball is won at the starting opening, but the determination of the lottery result is performed at the start of the variable display game, so the condition after changing the set value It is only necessary to judge the random number value stored and stored. Therefore, you may maintain the reserved storage of special symbols.

Further, in the RAM clear of the procedure (3) or (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear process in the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased (the game state data is also erased), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the time the hall is closed and the next day it is opened, so erase the game state data (probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special and normal symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) This is because there is no need to maintain it without doing so.

[12-2. Production on a pachinko machine with a setting function]
[12-2-1. Special symbol and special electric accessory control processing]
Hereinafter, the details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described. First, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing. The special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed in the processing of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt processing. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 will be collectively referred to as a starting port. Further, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as big winning openings. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, acceptance of the game ball into the starting opening, that is, with the start winning as an opportunity (start condition satisfied), a big hit for each start memory information (start information) where this start condition is satisfied A random number for determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not this random number for large-scale determination coincides with the large-scale determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM (lottery means). Then, based on the result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state, and when the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (the predetermined winning condition is satisfied), it is normal. It shifts from the gaming state to the big hit gaming state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 140.

When the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won the special winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B is won in the special winning opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the game ball has won in the starting opening (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening is determined by the switch input processing (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt processing based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 or the second starting opening sensor 2511. It is performed based on the input information that is read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1311, when the game ball wins the starting opening (the result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting opening winning time process (step S116). In the starting mouth winning process, the starting mouth winning command transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting mouth is set, the random number for jackpot determination etc. is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, a special symbol The process for executing the prefetching effect is executed.

Then, the main control MPU1311 executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol/electric accessory operation number which is the game progress state variable in which the type of the branch process executed according to the progress of the game is designated (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control RAM and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branching process designated based on the value of the game progressing state variable stored in the game progressing state storage area, and the special branching and the special electric auditors product control are performed when the transitioning branching process is finished. The process ends. The value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, and thus is backed up in the main control side power-off process.

In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch process, a special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), a special symbol variation process (step S132), a special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), Special symbol disengagement stop process (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), special winning opening before opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step) S144) or the special winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the game ball B entering the starting opening, the process of starting the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device is performed.

In the special symbol changing process (step S132), the process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the game ball entering the starting opening, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been fixedly stopped causes the big hit game state.

In the special symbol disengagement stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and the process of notifying that effect is performed. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when the big hit game state is generated, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and the process of notifying that effect is performed.

In the special winning opening pre-opening interval process (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it easy for a game ball to enter each special winning opening by opening the special winning opening is performed.

In the process for closing the special winning opening (step S144), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter each special winning opening by changing the state from the open state to the closed state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process of notifying the fact is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol fluctuation waiting processing]
Next, details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol variation waiting processing. In the special symbol variation waiting process, the variation display of the special symbol is executed in a state where it is not executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

The main control MPU1311 first determines whether or not the variation of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether the number of special symbol operation holding balls is not 0. Note that the number of special symbol operation holding balls is stored for each starting opening when a plurality of starting openings are provided. If the variation of the special symbol is not held (the result of step S420 is "no"), the variation display of the special symbol is not started, and this process is ended.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 sets a reserved ball number designating command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed on the basis of a random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning at the starting opening.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as the lower order command data (step S458). Further, by acquiring the fluctuation type classification value from the fluctuation type classification area (step S460) and adding the fluctuation type classification value to the command value set in the process of step S452, the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation type Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the fluctuation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the variable state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designating command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmitting process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing.

The main control MPU1311 first acquires the special symbol operation holding ball number (step S530). The special symbol operation holding sphere number is stored in the special symbol operation holding sphere number buffer. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets a big hit flag from the big hit flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process of selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol operation holding ball number and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing (step S544). Then, the special symbol variation time data is searched for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The fluctuation type classification value acquired by the fluctuation type determination processing is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variation time addition value data for a variation time addition value corresponding to the variation type type value (step S552). The variable time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo-repetitions. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variation time addition value retrieved in the process of step S552 to the reference variation time value retrieved in the process of step S546 to obtain the final variation time (step S554). .. Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

[12-2-4. Variation pattern selection judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table, according to the game state, etc., hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), out (defect fluctuation selection information status table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability) Table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) are table data for storing table information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the big hit has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the big hit value (step S350). When the big hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variable information number search process based on the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hitting variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the obtained variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 has not won the big hit or the small hit (the result of step S350 is “no”), it is determined whether or not the reach is generated in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step). S372).

When the reach is not generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the deviation fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved balls (step). S376).

On the other hand, when the reach is generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the reach variation selection information state table based on the state flag. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the process of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the fluctuation information number search process, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the fluctuation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two stages by two types of random numbers, the variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, S378) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1. Further, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied and displayed is selected. The method of lottery is not limited to two stages, and a method of lottery in three or more stages may be used, or a variation pattern may be directly selected by one variation pattern random number.

[12-3. Explanation of production in pachinko machine with setting function]
Hereinafter, the effect in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggesting effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the larger the number of game balls to be paid out with respect to the number of special lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability in the uncertain variation state (for example, setting 1:1/300, setting 2:1/290, setting 3:1/280, setting 4:1/270. , Setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play a game with the pachinko machine 1 set as high as possible, the desire to play the game is enhanced by the setting suggesting effect being installed.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a fluctuation pattern with one fluctuation pattern random number in the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311, the current gaming state (whether in a time saving state (a state in which time saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time saving state), and the result of the special lottery (winning the big hit Yes or No) and a variation pattern table according to When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a variation pattern random number, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number and distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, A fluctuation pattern is selected from the selected fluctuation pattern table. Further, if the result of the special lottery is out, further determine the reach occurrence, to obtain the random number for the fluctuation pattern, the random number for the fluctuation pattern acquired, and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, Based on the above, the variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table.

FIG. 144(A) is an example of the variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out. FIG. 144(B) is an example of the variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. The fluctuation pattern table includes, for example, a fluctuation pattern type field, a fluctuation time field, a corresponding effect content field, and a fluctuation pattern determination random number allocation field. The fluctuation pattern type column stores information for specifying the type for identifying the fluctuation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information that specifies the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information specifying the effect content executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for fluctuation pattern determination stores the distribution for which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. The distribution random number column for fluctuation pattern determination in the fluctuation pattern table (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144A and FIG. 149A described later) selected when the special lottery result is out of order is the time when the reach occurs. For each of the above and when the reach is not generated, the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion production executed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A) will be described. First, the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 as well.

FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In the variation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed after the SP reach 1 is executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is subsequently missed. A confirmation display indicating that there is is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the variation of the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, setting is performed after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed after the SP reach 1 is executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The suggestion effect is executed, and thereafter, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As described above, in the variation patterns 25 to 29, even if the temporary display is performed by performing the setting suggestion effect after performing the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order. The player can expect the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect after that and maintain the expectation. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is generated due to the deviation, even if the special lottery result is missed, it is possible to suppress the player's discouragement due to the result of the special lottery, and to enhance the uplifting feeling.

In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 24, after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is executed. However, the confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the effect display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion effect itself.

The SP reach is a reach effect in which a high proportion is selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and a low proportion is selected when the result of the special lottery is out. In other words, there is a high expectation of a big hit for fluctuations in executing SP reach.

The effects that are executed in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29 will be specifically described below. In each production, in addition to the contents described below, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and/or display on the production display device 1600 are simultaneously executed. Good.

In the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29, the pre-reach effect is first executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative patterns on the effect display device 1600 change. Subsequently, in the out-of-range variation patterns 20 and 24-29, the normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 is in the reach state. Specifically, for example, among the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a changing state.

Then, in the deviation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, the SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of the SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a rock-paper-scissors game is performed. In the first half effect of the SP reach 1 in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. Note that, during SP reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed at a position smaller than the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect, and close to the periphery of the effect display device 1600, for example.

Then, in the deviation pattern 20 and 24-29, it develops to the latter half production of SP reach 1. In the second half effect of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival effect is executed, and at the start of the second half effect, for example, the voice of the main character such as "Still still!" On the display device 1600, an effect of playing a rock-paper-scissors game between the main character and the enemy character is executed again. In the second half effect of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Then, the temporary display in which the special lottery result is out is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one combination of the decorative symbols in the detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same as the symbol stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is the same). (A different pattern from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner that it is shaking with a small width.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation pattern 20, after the temporary display, a finalized display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the effect display device 1600 without any other effect being performed. In the deviation variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion gasse effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the tentative display, and then the confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the final display, for example, on the effect display device 1600, the same combination of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped state. In the provisional display and the confirmation display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion gasse effect in the deviation pattern 24, for example, in the effect display device 1600, an effect in which one hero character discovers two enemy characters and chase the enemy character but cannot catch the enemy character is executed. Like the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 24 in FIG. 144(A), it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which the setting suggestive gaze effect is executed is equal or approximately equal in all settings. This is because, if the distribution is not uniform, the setting suggestion gasse effect suggests the setting.

In addition, it is desirable that the proportion of the outlying variation pattern 24 in the total variation distribution executed by the SP reach 1 is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion gase effect frequently occurs when the SP reach 1 is developed, which may reduce the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one hero character discovers two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy character, and then three people play a rock-paper-scissors game. The performance is executed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 25, an effect in which all three players go out and become Aiko in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people is executed. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is set so as to be distributed only in the low setting (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 144(A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 has the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is When it occurs, the player may stop the game early. Therefore, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other setting confirmation effects in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern. 25 itself may not be present.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 26, an effect in which all three of the scissors scramble to make Aiko in the rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is set so as to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is confirmed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 27, an effect in which all three play a par and become Aiko in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people is executed. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is determined so as to be distributed only in the even setting (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even setting is confirmed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 28, the effect that all three people put out different hands in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people is executed. In addition, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is determined so as to be distributed only in odd-numbered settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is fixed.

In addition, for example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect by installing the above-described odd number setting fixed effect or even number setting fixed effect. ..

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest) in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 and settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, Probability change jackpot proportion of jackpot winning is high in the order of 2 (5 is the highest and 2 is the lowest), and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are set in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability variation ratio in each setting are set so that the ratio of the total payout amount of the game balls to the winning number of the game balls to is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, the even number setting is higher than the odd number setting in that the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high, but the probability of probability change is low, that is, although the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be small, The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in a single condominium from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, compared to the even setting, the odd number setting has a lower probability of winning the big hit in the normal state, but has a higher probability of probability change, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to increase, but the first hit The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in a single condominium from is likely to increase. In such a case, a situation may occur in which one player prefers the odd-set payout tendency and another player prefers the odd-set payout tendency. The player's interest in the production increases. Further, the even-numbered setting may have a feature that the jackpot with a smaller number of rounds is more likely to be selected, instead of the jackpot winning probability in the normal state being higher than the odd-numbered setting.

In the deviation patterns 25 to 29 described above, the effects up to the start of the setting suggestion effect are the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion effect are different (the results of the rock-paper-scissors game with three players are different). In addition, it is desirable that the three-player rock-paper-scissors game production be used only in the deviation pattern 25 to 29. As a result, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion effect has started at the time when the three-player rock-paper-scissor game effect has started, and the feeling of uplifting can be further enhanced.

Note that, for example, the deviation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect for confirming the high setting is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the high setting is likely is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even in the low setting and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect in the deviation pattern 25 is produced. Is not an effect in which a high setting is determined, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect in which the high setting is confirmed is executed, a variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high as described above is executed may be set. The above is the same for the low setting final effect, the odd setting final effect, the even setting final effect, the highest setting final effect, and the like.

In addition, according to the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(B) (variation pattern table at the time of normal and jackpot winning), when the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, except the hit variation pattern 34 in which the maximum setting is confirmed. The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. Further, the distribution of the variation patterns in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is out of alignment. As a result, the setting suggestion effect is an effect mainly executed when the special lottery result is off, and the player can obtain an expectation even when the special lottery result is off.

[12-5. Setting suggestion production using shortened variation]
The deviation pattern 30 will be described below with reference to FIG. 146 as well. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A).

In the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the shortening variation is executed. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative pattern is started on the effect display device 1600, all the decorative patterns are not developed into the reach state. Is a fluctuation that stops. In the normal variation, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may be simultaneously stopped.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after performing a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is missed is performed. The description of the temporary display and the confirmation display is the same as the above description, and thus will be omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation times of all the other variation patterns in which the shortened variation such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 is executed. In the example of FIG. 144(A), the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. .. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is defined so as to be distributed only in the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is confirmed.

The distribution of the out-of-range fluctuation pattern 30, which is a fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed and suggests the setting, is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed (for example, the other fluctuation pattern). Is less than or equal to 10% of the minimum distribution). Further, in each fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the fixed display are the same and only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which other shortened fluctuations are executed is recognizable to the player (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). ..

As a result, at the time when the shortened fluctuation is executed, the player assumes the fluctuation time such as the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 that are often distributed, but when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the fluctuation time is equal to the assumed fluctuation time. You can recognize that they are different, and enjoy the performance in which the highest setting is finalized. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144(A), since the variation pattern including the shortening variation is selected only when there is no reach, the player loses his/her expectation when the shortening variation is executed, and is interested in the shortening variation. I can't have it anymore. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortening variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening variation that is selected only when there is no reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 are the same, but only the shortening variation time is different. This allows the player to concentrate on the effect so as not to miss the highest setting confirmation effect.

The deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the highest setting is determined and the shortening variation is executed. However, for each setting other than the highest setting, the variation is determined and the shortening variation is executed. There may be patterns. In this case, for example, the variation time of each variation pattern is preferably different from the variation time of another deviation variation pattern in which the shortened variation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion production executed before temporary display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are set so that they are distributed only in the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 flows on the effect display device 1600 at the same time when the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the deviation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be missed is displayed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is missed is displayed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the special movie 1 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

The deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are different from the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, and the setting suggestion effect is started before the tentative display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the variation starts). As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling waiting for the notification of the big hit lottery result in the state where the highest setting is confirmed. Further, particularly when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and thus the player. Can feel a sense of superiority to the other player, and it becomes easier for the hall to appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion production that jackpot winning or high setting is confirmed]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is set to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is confirmed.

In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 flows on the effect display device 1600 at the same time when the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that is generated only by the deviation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

In the deviation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is displayed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the special movie 2 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting or the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. In other words, if the special lottery result is missed after the occurrence of the special movie 2, the high setting is confirmed, so that the player can suppress the disappointment that the special lottery result is missed, and eventually the high setting. A feeling of elation can be obtained by confirming that.

In addition, particularly when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel superiority to other players, and the special movie 2 is further generated. If the result of the special lottery is off, it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion production in time saving state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected when the gaming state is in the shortened state will be described. FIG. 149(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. FIG. 149(B) is an example of the variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 2 at the time of deviation without reach. The fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the variation patterns are the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a shorter time, The number of payouts of game balls may increase, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the more the variation patterns having a long variation time are distributed. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the number of payouts of game balls by the big hit per unit time in each setting. it can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the outlying variation pattern 3 having a long variation time among the variation patterns including the shortened variation. Therefore, the outlying variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern suggesting a high setting. You can

Similarly, even when the reach-out occurs, the higher the setting, the greater the distribution of the out-of-range variation pattern 11 having a long variation time and the smaller the distribution of the out-of-range variation pattern 12 having a short variation time. Further, also at the time of winning the big hit, similarly, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the hit variation pattern 2 having a long fluctuation time and the smaller the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having a short fluctuation time.

As described above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the variation patterns are the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the more game balls are shot before the jackpot is won. For example, if the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times, and the smaller the selection rate of fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times, the more each player will be to stop the firing of game balls during fluctuation. It is possible to equalize the number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting.

Note that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing at which the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated to be executed only during the setting suggestion effect. Further, particularly in the setting suggesting effect in which the high setting or the highest setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emitting effect, which is executed only by the setting suggesting effect, be executed.

In addition, it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed or the effect suggesting that the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other variation patterns. If the variation pattern is highly distributed, the player loses his/her expectation unless the high setting suggestion effect or the highest setting suggestion effect is executed, even though the player is playing for a short game time. This is because there is a risk of canceling.

Further, it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the effect that suggests that the low setting or the minimum setting is confirmed or is highly likely to be executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other variation patterns. This is because if the variation patterns are highly distributed, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, and the player may lose his/her expectation and eventually stop the game early.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting group such as the high setting, the low setting, the highest setting, the odd number setting, and the even setting has been described, the setting group in the setting suggesting effect is not limited to these. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for an arbitrary group of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be set as low settings, settings 3 and 4 may be set as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 may be set as high settings, or a group including only settings 5 may be present.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 obtains the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974, but in the following description, The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

FIG. 150A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner such that it cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150B shows a state in which the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 150A accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. In the example shown in FIG. 150B, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310 in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown). The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310 but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971) that trigger RAM clearing are provided in the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 in which the data is erased differs when the RAM clear switch 954 alone is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided in the vicinity of the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected to each other directly with a connector or with an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of various switches 971, 972, 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the port of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting indicator 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, the authentication code for each manufacturer of the pachinko machine is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out and verifies the authentication code set on the setting board 970. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 cannot start the game. That is, although the game ball can be shot toward the game area 5a, the prize ball is not paid out even if the prize is won, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or may be set for each pachinko machine serial number. The authentication code can be set by, for example, setting the authentication code by a DIP switch, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, a pattern short-circuit provided on the setting board 970 or a logic circuit (for example, a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set). A small capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, the setting control board 970 and the dummy board 979 output different signals to the main control board 1310 so that the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. To do. Specifically, the setting substrate 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy substrate 979 outputs 0V (ground level). The signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines which board is connected by the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (each model), it is possible to prevent the setting board 970 from being erroneously mounted on the main control board box 1320. Further, by setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, it is possible to prevent unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970.

FIG. 150C shows a state where the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG.

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine related to prize balls that the player obtains such as the big hit probability in the special symbol variable display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and some halls do not require a setting function. Therefore, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine needs to design and produce both the pachinko machine that does not have the setting function and the pachinko machine that has the setting function. It is required to efficiently design and produce pachinko machines.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 having no setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. To Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between the pachinko machine having no setting function and the pachinko machine having the setting function.

Although the dummy substrate 979 does not have devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting substrate 970 mounted thereon, it may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, the pattern for mounting the device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, but the device is not mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 does not have to be a printed board, but may be a member (for example, a unit formed of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970.

Further, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is not open or ground in the dummy board 979, but is terminated by the dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent the driver circuit from being damaged due to overcurrent. When the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. A small door that can move so as to close the hole 971A is provided in the main control board box 1320 so that it can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be shared by the non-pachinko machine, the pachinko machine having a setting function, and the pachinko machine 1320.

An authentication code for authentication by the main control board 1310 may be set on the dummy board 979 described later. Further, the dummy board 979 does not need to be authenticated by the main control board 1310, and the authentication code may not be set. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With the setting change switch 972 and with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and is rotated to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed). Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without the setting change switch 972 and with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

(4) Without the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

The mounting examples shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differ from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150 in that a small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320.

FIG. 151A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner so that the main control board box 1320 cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, as described above. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. Holes 976A are provided for operating 976.

The hole 976A is normally covered with the small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1322. By inserting a key 975 into the key hole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 152A, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the bar 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the bar 1323 is inserted into the seat 1324, and the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 are inserted. Engage with and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152(B), when the key 975 is inserted into the key hole and is rotated, the bar 1323 retracts from the maximum protruding position, and the engagement between the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. With the hinge 1325 as an axis, the small door 1321 can be opened. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on a back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600 by inserting and operating the key 975 in the keyhole of the key unit 1322, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It will be possible.

That is, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is accommodated in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back surface side. The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner such that it cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 accommodates a main control board 1310 and a setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, a main control MPU, a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310 but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

The setting board 970 is provided in the vicinity of the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected to each other directly with a connector or with an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of setting change process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 differs from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). The same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 101 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protect of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, and sets the RAM 1312 to be writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. The determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

The RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, so the process proceeds to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the internal RAM 1312. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the setting change mode is entered. That is, since it is necessary to operate the two switches and the power switch to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of accidentally starting the setting change mode.

In the setting change mode, first, the set value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974. Then, the security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 in the setting change mode during a game, and fraudulent acts are possible. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting change mode is entered during business hours.

The security signal is output from the start of the setting change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, regardless of whether the security signal is output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode or between the start and the end of the setting change mode. You may output. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period in which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation is performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes the setting value in the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured by a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value is changed by one step. When the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned to the right once, the set value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

Then, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is ended and the process proceeds to step S30. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by an operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the above-described process, after the setting change mode ends, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), the power failure flag is not set, and the check is performed. If the thumbs do not match, a predetermined area of the internal RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, the data of the set value among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312, the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128), the game state (for example, the probability change state, Time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on prize balls) is left, and other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24. The data on the gaming state may be erased without remaining. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the operation of ending the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62, and the setting change operation is further detected.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) are backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 in step S30. ), the other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 and determines whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). ..

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area. Then (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and uses the checksum calculated at the previous power-off to calculate the check calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312. The sum and the checksum stored in step S48 are compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 backs up to the work area. The stored data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the step S24 is performed. Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are power failure flag abnormalities that have not been set (step S20), RAM abnormalities where the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and abnormalities in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) (For example, probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information regarding prize balls), data other than that is cleared, and area 13128 for base calculation (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack) (Including the area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of the base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128. The entire RAM area including may be cleared. If all RAM areas are cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, if the memory configuration is such that the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed, the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation Only initialize it. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data), for base calculation. Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value for each RAM clear operation, and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the setting value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

As the processing after step S28, either of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence/absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is shut off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (FIGS. 155 and 156). However, the setting confirmation process is executed in the initialization process. You may execute. By executing the setting confirmation processing in the initialization processing, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the setting value confirmation by the careless operation during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

In this case, an operation unit (for example, a push button switch) for confirming the setting is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the operation unit for confirming the setting), and when the power is turned on. When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, data for reading the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and displaying it on the setting display unit 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 974. Good to do. Also in this case, it is preferable to output the security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear processing even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (end of the setting change mode). It can be said that during the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to store the execution of the RAM clear processing. On the other hand, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described above in detail. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared together with this. Further, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 does not have to be cleared. Further, whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit may be switched by an operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout controller 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on, When the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout controller 952 is not cleared. In this way, by changing the operation method, it is possible to execute a process in which a part of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

When clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952, the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 differs from the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power with the setting key 971 being turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the condition (operation), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

Further, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while changing the set value. The RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared when the power is turned on. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but the payout control unit 952 detects the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 operates. It is determined whether or not it is operated, and whether or not the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared is determined. Providing a RAM clear switch on the payout control board 951 has the effect of supporting various models without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23, and a base calculation process (step S801) is provided in place of the accessory ratio calculation area update process of step S81, and the role of step S89 is provided. The material ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 23 and 104 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the main control program to first set RBS (register bank selection flag) in the program status word to 1 and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to the region corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation region 13128 (of the main control internal RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) to calculate the base value (step S801, see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but in order to surely execute each timer interruption, it is preferable to execute the base calculation process in an earlier order. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU1311 is a frame command reception process (step S82), fraud detection process (step S84), special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process ( Step S88) is executed.

Then, the setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying the set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation processing, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 974 by the employee of the hall performing a predetermined operation. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Subsequently, an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process ends, the timer interrupt process ends and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

In the setting confirmation processing, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting confirmation operation is being performed (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. When the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers the transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and when it is operated, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and the current setting can be displayed.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, since the setting key 971 has been returned to the normal position, data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

As the setting display condition, it is determined whether the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 by the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even when the outer frame 2 is closed, it is estimated that some abnormality (failure or cheating) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the setting is performed. It is better not to display. Further, since the setting indicator 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting indicator 974 cannot be viewed unless the outer frame 2 is open, and it is not necessary to display the setting.

The set value may be displayed at any time during operation of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, a setting display condition that allows display at a specific time may be provided. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time from power-on (or CPU initial setting in step S28) and display the set value until the timer expires.

In addition, setting display conditions may be provided that enable setting values to be displayed in a specific game state. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game. That is, the setting display condition is set so that the set value can be displayed during the period other than during the special symbol variation and the big hit. Note that the set value may not be displayed in a game state other than the above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the set display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to confirm the setting during the game, which is a forerunner of fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a predetermined time after the start of displaying the set value, during the time between the start and the end of displaying the set value, or during the predetermined period after the start of displaying the set value for the predetermined period. Good. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the display of the set value, the period in which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation processing, the security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied, but even when the setting display condition is not satisfied, the security signal is transmitted when the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. Good.

Then, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974.

If the setting display conditions are not met, the conditions are checked until the setting display conditions are met, but it may not be possible to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be terminated. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, when the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display ends. And the set value is displayed. If the setting condition is not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be immediately ended without repeating the confirmation of the setting condition.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, the new special symbol variation display is not started during the display of the set value, and the new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, the set value can be confirmed without disturbing other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are both used, the setting value is preferentially displayed during setting confirmation, so the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. In a game state in which a large number of prize balls are paid out in a short time, it may be desired to confirm the change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without disturbing the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Security signal output for setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing diagram of the security signal output in accordance with the setting change and the setting confirmation.

As described above, the security signal is output during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation (S61 of FIG. 154, S8063 of FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than or equal to the time that the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or may be several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output during the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

Also, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(B), the security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in accordance with the setting change mode.

At the time of confirming the setting, as shown in FIG. 157(C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of confirming the setting. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than or equal to the time that the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or may be several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output during the period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the set value is displayed), instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation.

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157(D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the error detection. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157(E), the security signal is output for a predetermined time after the error is detected. That is, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection are continuously output for more than the predetermined time (T seconds) (the predetermined time from the error detection). Even if an error is detected during the setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal does not have to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during the output of the security signal, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error in the setting change mode, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation does not overlap with the security signal caused by the error detection. That is, even if an error occurs in the setting change mode, the security signal output time does not extend, but if an error occurs during setting confirmation, the security signal output time extends.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another example of the setting confirmation process will be described. In the above description, the example in which the setting confirmation process is performed in the timer interrupt process in the peripheral control unit steady process has been mainly described, but in the following, the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. An example will be described.

Specifically, for example, if the setting key is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. The details of the process will be described below. Note that the timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is assumed to be the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process that does not include the setting confirmation process in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of the initialization process. Differences from FIG. 154 will be described. When determining in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S18). S29).

When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to the setting confirmation processing in step S807, and then proceeds to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation processing in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). When determining that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). When determining that the setting display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the process of step S8062 again.

Following the processing of step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is off (step S8071). When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S8071: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the determination of step S8071 again after a predetermined time elapses. When determining that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 hides the setting value (step S8075), and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, the number of pending memories managed by the main control board 1310 and the remaining variation time in the special symbol are stored as they are. After that, when the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 being in the ON state), after the setting confirmation process is completed (the setting is performed without turning the power off). After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol variation restarts. At this time, for example, the effect (effect using the display device, effect using the lamp, sound effect using the speaker, effect using the movable body, etc.) that has been executed together with the special symbol change is the special symbol. No change will take place after the change resumes.

Moreover, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process, the special symbol change is performed. The presentation that was being executed may be restarted. For example, the suspended effect using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker is restarted. Further, regarding the effect using the movable body, for example, after the movable body is returned to the initial position when the special symbol variation is restarted or when the power is turned on, the movable body is operated in the effect pattern of the effect. If so, the movable body is operated according to the effect pattern.

In other words, when the movable body moves to the setting confirmation state when it is not in the initial position, it is returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation processing is completed, and then based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. If the determined effect includes an effect of moving (moving) the movable body, the movable body may be moved (moved). If the movable body moves (moves) to the setting confirmation state, the operation pattern of the movement (movement) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to the initial position once. The movable body may be operated as long as the pattern can be operated even from the bottom.

Moreover, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process, the special symbol change is performed. Among the effects that were being executed together with the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, and the sound effect using the speaker are restarted, the movable body is moved to the initial position after the restart of the special symbol fluctuation or when the power is turned on. It is not necessary to perform the returning and the effect using the movable body.

Moreover, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process is finished, the effect display device 1600. It may be possible to restart the fluctuation of the decorative pattern displayed in (restart the production originally planned), or until the symbol is fixed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (or until the fluctuation fluctuation immediately before the symbol is fixed). The decorative pattern may be made transparent at a high speed, or the decorative pattern may be hidden until the symbol is determined (or until the swing fluctuation immediately before the symbol is determined). In addition, at the time of symbol determination, for example, a combination of decorative symbols planned before the power is turned off is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in this case, at the end of the special symbol fluctuation after resumption, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the initial power-on, or a special decorative symbol not displayed during normal special symbol fluctuation A combination (for example, “XXX” or the like) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the change of the special symbol, the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, and when the setting confirmation process ends and returns to the normal state, the setting key 971 is in the off state. The same initial operation (for example, a predetermined operation of the movable body, an operation of confirming a predetermined light emission of the LED, or the like) similar to that when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally started) may be performed. (You may make it restart the above-mentioned production etc. after performing this initial operation).

Further, when the pre-reading effect is being performed during the change of the special symbol, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and when the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is finished. When resuming the symbol variation, the prefetch effect, and the prefetch effect for the special symbol variation that was held immediately before turning off the power is not executed (specifically, for example, it is performed before turning off the power source). The special zone that was displayed during the change of the special symbol that was being displayed (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the expectation of a big hit is high across multiple changes, from rival horse production to horse racing production described later. Evolving zone (a special zone where the horse racing performance is set to have a high degree of expectation (for example, a relatively high expectation compared to the dialogue production described later)) Waiting display and the special zone The display effect in the zone is erased, or if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, it is returned to normal white). However, the pre-reading effect may be executed for the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning after the setting confirmation process is completed.

Further, when the pre-reading effect is being performed during the change of the special symbol, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and when the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is finished. At the time of resumption of the symbol change, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is stopped (specifically, for example, the special zone displayed during the change of the special symbol that was performed before the power was turned off). The display on standby or the display effect in the special zone is erased, or if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, it is returned to normal white). The look-ahead effect may be restarted from the special symbol change (the erased display may be returned to the original, or if the effect pattern is to promote the look-ahead effect at the start of the change, it may be restored in the display mode after promotion. Good). In this case, the pre-reading effect executed from the next special symbol variation is restarted as if the pre-reading effect during the special symbol variation was not stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the pre-reading effect that was scheduled to be executed after the next special symbol change is executed. Further, a new look-ahead effect pattern may be set, and the effect of the new look-ahead pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion production]
Hereinafter, an example of processing in which execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described. In the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of the settings 1 to 6 in the normal state are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively. It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of setting 1 to setting 6 at time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability change rate at the time of jackpot winning is 50%.

[12-14-1. Variation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the fluctuation pattern table. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. In the description of FIG. 142 and the like, the example in which the variation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. 160, the variation pattern for each winning type of the special lottery result in one variation pattern table. Is defined. Also, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common variation pattern table is used in all settings.

The variation pattern table of FIG. 160 shows correspondences between the winning type of the special lottery result, the variation pattern identifier, the outline of the effect of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. Note that, as in the example of FIG. 144, the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column is a reach production that is highly selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and extremely low when the result of the special lottery is out. Is. In other words, there is a high expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation that movie reach is executed. Also, when a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in the summary column, when the winning type is “out”, the “+1 symbol” means that the decorative symbol that has changed to the end after the decorative symbol stops in the reach state is in the reach state. It shows that it stops after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after the reach state is reached with the decorative pattern “7”, the decorative pattern that has been changed to the end stops at “8”. When the winning type is "big hit", "+1 symbol" means that the decorative symbol stops in the reach state, and then the decorative symbol that fluctuates to the end passes once through the decorative symbol in the reach state and then temporarily stops. After the appearance, the decoration pattern is stopped as the same as the reach state decoration pattern. Specifically, for example, after the reach is reached with the decorative design "7", it seems that the decorative design that has fluctuated to the end is temporarily stopped at "8", and then the decorative design is stopped at "7". And notify the big hit.

In the summary column in the example of FIG. 161, “+1 symbol” is selected only when the winning type is “big hit (non-probable change)” of the big hits, but when “big hit (probable change)” Only may be selected, or may be selected in the case of "big hit (non-probable change)" and "big hit (probable change)". Further, the “+1 symbol” may be selected only when the winning type is “out”.

Further, “+pseudo 1” and “+pseudo 2” described in the outline column indicate that two consecutive pseudo continuous effects and three consecutive pseudo continuous effects are respectively executed. Pseudo continuous effect is an effect to perform the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design multiple times during one fluctuation of the first special design display or the second special design display. .. “Ending the variation of the decorative design” means, for example, a mode in which a part or the whole of the decorative design is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation of the decorative design is once finished, and the decorative design. Partly, the pseudo-relational pattern (the pattern in which the pseudo-relation is determined if this symbol is stopped) is stopped, and the like. In addition, a pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N continuous pseudo continuous effects, and the M-th variation of the decorative pattern in the N continuous pseudo continuous effects (M is 1 or more N The following natural number) is referred to as the M-th consecutive pseudo continuous effect. In addition, while the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is changing once, while actually suggesting to the player that the action may be performed again, the action is actually performed again. The effect that is not performed is called “pseudo-gase effect”. Further, hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous effect”.

Pseudo continuous production occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design is performed again during one change of the first special design display or the second special design display. When it is determined that the peripheral control MPU, at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design may stop the pseudo continuous design. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as "continue!" in the middle decorative pattern as a pseudo continuous pattern. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd numbers or even numbers and no reach is generated) may be used as the pseudo continuous symbol. The pseudo gasse effect may be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is “normal fluctuation” or the like. Further, for example, even in a variation pattern in which “+pseudo 1” is executed, a pseudo gasse effect that suggests the occurrence of a third pseudo-pseudo in “+pseudo 2” may be executed.

[12-14-2. Final reserved color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored in the peripheral main control ROM, for example. The final hold color table is, for example, the display color of the hold display at the end of the change for each change pattern (the winning type of the special lottery result, the change pattern identifier, and the outline of the effect of the change pattern) (hereinafter, the final hold color. (Also referred to as the selection rate).

It should be noted that the effect display device 1600 includes a hold display area that indicates the numbers of the first special random numbers and the second special random numbers that are being held. In the startup mouth winning time process of step S116 of FIG. 142, a reservation number designation command for designating the number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays, in the hold display area, the hold number indicated by the hold number designation command.

Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (the starting condition is satisfied), the number of holdings (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command is increased. , And displays one additional hold display in the hold display area. On the other hand, when the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold number (hold storage number) specified by the hold number designation command decreases. , The hold display in the hold display area is erased.

Note that there may be a plurality of display modes in the hold display. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there is a display mode of pending display in a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). Hereinafter, it is assumed that the expected jackpots of the special lottery results corresponding to the pending display become higher in the order of the pending display colors of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. Particularly in the example of FIG. 161, the iridescent hold display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. In addition, the peripheral control MPU responds to the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display during the display period from displaying the hold display in the hold display area to deleting the hold display, for example. It is possible to execute a pending announcement effect that suggests a big hit expectation degree for a variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special symbols).

Further, in the present embodiment, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute the hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes. In addition, the hold change effect and the hold notice effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the variation corresponding to the hold is also referred to as a hold prefetch effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a pending notice table (not shown) that defines the timing of changing the display mode of the pending display. Specifically, for example, the pending notice table defines, for each final pending color, the timing of changing the displaying mode of the pending display and the displaying mode (display color) of the pending display at the time of winning and at each changing timing. The start time, the change time, and the end time of the special symbol change after the winning prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing.

The display mode of the hold display at each change timing is preferably a hold color having a jackpot expectation degree equal to or lower than the jackpot expectation degree of the final hold color. Further, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the hold display is not demoted at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue hold display does not change to the white hold display). There may be a different pending notice table for each number of pending memories at the time of winning.

Note that, for example, at the start of the special symbol fluctuation that was suspended before the pending display, it is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the pending display described above. Also, for example, during the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the pending display. The timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

The prefetch effect including the hold prefetch effect is executed based on the predetermination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the predetermination process performed in the starting mouth winning time process of step S116 of FIG. 142. It

Hereinafter, the preliminary determination process in the starting mouth winning process for the first special symbol will be described. Since the same applies to the preliminary determination process in the starting mouth winning process for the second special symbol, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-determination process, the main control MPU 1311 compares the pre-determination table (not shown) with the special random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number to determine whether or not to be a big hit. The type of big hit, if not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. Game play mode type), the acquired special random number type (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved counters) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the production pre-judgment process for the first special symbol, set the first special symbol pre-judgment command according to the specified pre-judgment information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first reserved memory number. ..

Then, by sending a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the starting opening in which the start winning is generated, a special symbol based on the generated starting winning. Whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final retained color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final retained color is determined by the final retained color table of FIG. 161. Is an example of a table showing FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in the same case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in the same case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the higher-ranked jackpot expectation hold display. In addition, the higher the expectation of jackpot of each color, the higher the setting. Note that these appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probability of each setting described above, and regarding the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used in all settings. It is supposed to be.

The peripheral control ROM may hold a final reserved color table that is different for each setting. In this case, for example, in the display mode of the same hold display, the selection ratio of the last hold color table of the last hold color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. As a result, for example, when a big hit is won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red reserved display, the degree of expectation for the higher setting is also increased, so that the player can obtain a feeling of uplifting.

In addition, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is selected most, for the display mode of the same hold display, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the lower the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation degree becomes. A selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation in the case where the hold display mode is red is 50% in the setting 1 with the low setting, and 30 in the setting 6 with the high setting. Set to be%). As a result, for example, even if you do not win the big hit in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red hold display, the expectation for the high setting is high, so you can suppress the discouragement of the player and continue the game. Can be promoted.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than the white color that is most selected, for the display mode of the same hold display, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the jackpot expectation is almost common in all settings. The selection rate may be set. Thereby, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final holding color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the hold display. Further, for example, in the case where the big symbol is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the display mode of red, it is possible to prevent the possibility that the low setting is increased from occurring.

[12-14-3. Notice production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of the notice production table. The notice production table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example. The notice production table holds, for example, the selection rate of notice production for each variation pattern (specified by the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the outline of the production of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, the notice effect includes a dialogue effect, a weather change effect, and a rival horse effect. The dialogue production is, for example, a presentation in which a predetermined character is displayed on the presentation display device 1600 in the change and says a dialogue. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes in the change. The rival horse effect is an effect in which a rival horse of a horse brought up by the main character appears on the effect display device 1600 in the variation.

It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect using the notice effect, and the notice effect table stores the selection rate of each notice effect depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 165, “without set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and “with set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the advance notice effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selection rate of the advance notice effect table.

In each notice production in each variation pattern of the notice production table, it is desirable that the selection rate without the setting suggestion is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with the setting suggestion. If the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect frequently occurs. This is because, if the frequency of occurrence of the setting suggesting effect that suggests the high setting is low in this state, the player is likely to stop the game in a short time. In other words, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 which is set to a low level is significantly reduced, which may impose an excessive burden on the hall. On the contrary, for example, when the frequency of the setting suggesting effect suggesting the high setting is high, the number of players who speculate that the setting of the other pachinko machines 1 in the hall is low increases and the other pachinko machines 1 operate. There is a risk that the rate will drop and the hall will be overloaded.

Note that the selection rate of the variation patterns in the variation pattern table is determined so that the jackpot expectation degree increases as the number of pseudo consecutive times increases, but, for example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect does not change substantially depending on the number of pseudo consecutive times. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table is determined. That is, for example, with respect to the variation patterns whose outlines are “SP reach”, “SP reach+pseudo 1”, and “SP reach+pseudo 2”, the pseudo setting suggestion effect is set so that the appearance rates of the setting suggestion effect are substantially the same. The selection rate of whether or not to execute is determined. As a result, for a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-repetitions, although the jackpot expectation is low, the occurrence rate of the setting suggestive effect is not low compared to a variation pattern with a large number of pseudo-repetitions, so that the player has a small number of pseudo-repetitions. It is possible to be interested in the fluctuation of a small fluctuation pattern.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher as the number of pseudo repetitions increases, or as the number of pseudo repetitions decreases, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. In addition, when the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-repetitions is decreased, the above-described problem may occur. Also, it is preferable to set the numerical values to be substantially equal (specifically, for example, if there is a dialogue effect set when the variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of leaving, 15/256, and if there is a dialogue effect set when the variation pattern 6 is selected, 16/256, etc.).

Also, a variation pattern with a high jackpot expectation degree (or an effect that is not a variation pattern with a high jackpot expectation degree, but has a relatively high expectation degree of the produced effect (for example, an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is a predetermined value or more) ), the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be determined in the notice effect table so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Specifically, for example, in order of “normal fluctuation”, fluctuation including “normal reach”, fluctuation including “SP reach”, and fluctuation including “movie reach”, the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect becomes high, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined.

Also, in the example of FIG. 165, setting suggestive effect may occur in all the notice effects (speech effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect). May exist.

Further, if the outline of the variation pattern is the same, if the special lottery result is a big hit without a certainty change, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than if the special lottery result is a big hit with a certainty change, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined. As a result, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased when the big hit without probability change is won, and it is possible to reduce the player's discouragement that the probability change is not given. In the above example, the three types of notice effects, that is, the line effect, the weather change effect, and the rival horse effect have been described, but needless to say, the number is not limited to three.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
Hereinafter, of the notice productions, the details of the dialogue productions will be described. If the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue effect without the setting suggestion effect as the notice effect, for example, the character A appears on the effect display device 1600 after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the change, The text of character A is displayed as "what day is it today?" Then, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the effect display device 1600, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the display of the character A's dialogue, and the character B's dialogue reads "Come...". indicate. Note that, for example, the dialogues of the character A and the character B may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit of the variation.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue of the character B (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from the dialogue production table described later when the dialogue production with the setting suggestion production is selected as the notice production. The peripheral control MPU, for example, displays a character on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change (for example, after 2 seconds, that is, the same timing as the character A appears in the case without the above setting suggestion effect). A is made to appear, and the text of character A is displayed as "what day is it today?" Peripheral control MPU, for example, causes character display B to appear on effect display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the display of character A's words, and displays the characters of selected character B. In addition, the dialogue of the character A may be a dialogue that directly expresses a set value such as "Do you know the setting of this stand today?"

FIG. 166 is an example of a dialogue production table. The speech production table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example. The dialogue production table holds the production type of dialogue production and the selection rate of the dialogue contents of character B for each setting. In addition, the effect type includes “a pattern that is halfway together” and “a pattern that suddenly branches”, and there is a “Kamonane” dialogue and a “determined dialogue” for each of the two patterns. ..

Each of the dialogues belonging to the "halfway together pattern" includes the same dialogue halfway and then branches to a different dialogue. In the example of FIG. 166, all the dialogues that belong to the “halfway together pattern” start with “Cha...” and then branch to different dialogues. On the other hand, dialogues that belong to the "suddenly branched pattern" branch to different dialogues from the beginning. In addition, it is desirable that the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the “halfway together pattern” is higher than the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the “suddenly branched pattern”. This is to pull expectations.

The dialogue belonging to "Kamone" is a dialogue that suggests the current setting but does not announce the setting definitely. For example, “But it feels like it was an even number of days...” is a line of “Kamone system” that suggests an even number setting. "But I feel like it was an even number of days..." is a dialogue in the "Kamone" series, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even in odd settings. However, the selection rate of the dialogue in the odd setting is sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the dialogue in the even setting. Similarly, with respect to the dialogues of other "Kanene", the selection rate of the dialogue in the setting suggested by the dialogue is sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the dialogue in the other setting.

On the other hand, the dialogue belonging to the "determined system" is the dialogue that definitely announces the setting. For example, “Ah! I remembered! Even days!” is a line of “determined system” that definitely announces even-numbered settings. Therefore, the selectivity of the dialogue in the odd setting is 0, and the selectivity exceeds 0 only in the even setting.

In addition, it is preferable that the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the "Kamone system" is higher than the selection rate of the dialogue belonging to the "determined system". If the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "determined system" is high, there is a sufficient possibility that the player will be definitely notified of the high setting within a short time after the game starts. This is because there are a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, which may reduce the operation of other game machines.

In addition, in the dialogue production when performing a specific reach presentation such as SP reach or movie reach, or in the dialogue presentation when performing pseudo-relation, the dialogue for suggesting the setting of the character B is written in red (in the big hit expectation suggestion presentation etc. The dialogue of the normal production may be displayed in white letters. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish the expected suggestion dialogue from the setting suggestion dialogue, so that two types of presentations (setting suggestion production and expectation suggestion production) coexist without making the player feel unnatural. Can be made The expectation suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree in the special symbol variation is a predetermined value, and specifically, a notice effect that suggests the expectation for the jackpot within one variation, or a plurality of notice effects. Includes look-ahead production that suggests expectations for jackpots across fluctuations in.

Although not shown, the peripheral control MPU may determine the setting suggestion effect by a lottery table similar to the speech effect table, although not shown for the weather change effect and the rival horse effect. For example, in the setting suggestion effect in the weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" is displayed due to a thunderlight (an effect of "Kamone system" that suggests even setting) or a rival. In the setting suggestion effect in the horse effect, the combined horse effect by the horse raised by the main character and the rival horse is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and for example, a number such as “135?” is displayed on the number of the rival horse ( The production of "Kamonane" that suggests an odd number of settings.

In the above-mentioned example, "What day is it today?" was displayed as the dialogue of the character A in the dialogue production. In addition to this dialogue, the character A also asked "What was the test last week?", Character B is like “66 points! (“Confirmed system” that confirms setting 6)” and “I think it was 55 points (“Kamonane system” that suggests setting 5)” You may make it provide several variation with respect to production (for example, dialogue production). In this case, the B effect (for example, the effect of listening to the score of the test) may be more reliable than the A effect (for example, the effect of listening to the date) with respect to the setting suggestion. Specifically, for example, although the expectation level which is setting 6 when "I feel like it was a day with 6 ... (Kamone system)" in A production is only 30%, in B production " When I was told that I had 66 points... (Kamone system), the setting 6 is 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of notice production table]
FIG. 167 shows another example of the notice production table. In the example of FIG. 167, the notice effect table 173 holds the notice effect selection rate for each variation pattern. Unlike the example of FIG. 165, the notice production table of FIG. 167 does not hold information on whether or not the setting suggestion production is executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of the notice effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the notice effect table of FIG. 167.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion effect, based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected notice effect. FIG. 168(A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing distribution of setting suggestion effect execution in the case where the outline of the change pattern is “normal change” and “speech effect” is selected as the notice effect. is there. FIG. 168(B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing distribution of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outline of the variation pattern is “normal reach+1 symbol” and “speech effect” is selected as the notice effect. Is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of variation patterns and notice effects as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in the peripheral control ROM in advance.

In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestive effect after determining the content of the noticeable effect, but determines the content of the noticeable effect after determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestive effect. You may. By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than that in the table shown in FIG. 165, the appearance rate and reliability of the effect can be set in detail. Also, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this another example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect. 169 (A), (B), (C) in the order of production, the setting suggestion in the case where "4, 5 or 6 is the day to add!" is selected as the dialogue of character B in the dialogue production It is an outline of the production.

In FIG. 169(A), the special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169(B), after the start of the special symbol change, the character string “character 4 or 5 or 6 is added!” of character B is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 169(C), the dialogue is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

169 (A), (D), (E) in the order of the production is the outline of the setting suggestion production in the case where "the day with 6!" is selected as the dialogue of character B in the dialogue production. is there. 169 (A), (D), in the production proceeding in the order of (E), while the setting suggestion production starts from the start of the special symbol variation, the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production is during the end of the special symbol variation. has been changed. Specifically, in FIG. 169(D), after the start of the special symbol variation, the character display “1” is the day when “4, 5 or 6 is attached!” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 169(E), at the end of the special symbol variation, the character B's dialogue “It's a day with 6!” is displayed. That is, the setting suggested by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Specifically, for example, for each dialogue in the dialogue production table (the dialogue finally displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the dialogue change timing and the dialogue at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. It may be defined for each. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue production table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which the dialogue "It's an even number of days!" is displayed after the dialogue "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" desirable.

Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggesting effect is performed in the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree) may be executed in parallel. Although the example in which the dialogue of the character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol change is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be promoted before the end of the special symbol change. Although character A appears before the character B's dialogue, character A speaks to character B, but this is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect. In FIG. 170(A), the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002 during the special symbol variation in the state where the special symbol variation is not reserved. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(B), immediately after the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002, the dialogue “Character B's day, 4 or 5 or 6 is added!” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is indefinite, the character B may be displayed immediately without displaying the character A, or the character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has passed from the winning. Alternatively, the character A may be displayed first and then the character B may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 170(B), the number of holdings indicated by the display in the holding display area is increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(C), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation is ended. Further, the character display of the character B "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" is still displayed on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(D), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is started. Further, at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation, the dialogue of the character B displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to “the day when 5 or 6 is attached!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(E), all the decorative symbols are stopped and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is finished. At the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning, the dialogue of the character B displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to “It is a day with 6!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Note that, for example, the peripheral control ROM holds a dialogue pre-reading effect table (not shown) that defines the dialogue of the character B and the change timing of the dialogue. Specifically, for example, the dialogue prefetch production table defines the dialogue change timing of character B and the dialogue of character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, the change time, and the end time of the special symbol change after the winning prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing. It is desirable that the setting suggested by the dialogue should not be demoted at each change timing. It should be noted that a different dialogue prefetching effect table may exist depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the prefetching effect based on the pre-determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the prefetching effect by referring to the prefetching effect table at a predetermined ratio, for example. In addition, in the case of promotion, in FIG. 170, it is promoted by one step at a time ("4 or 5 or 6 is the date attached!", "5 or 6 is the date attached!" !" in that order) may be promoted in multiple stages at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue (D).

The setting suggestion effect may be executed under a specific situation other than the above. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the condition of the continuous reservation is satisfied. The holding sequence means that the next big hit is realized by a special random number that is held until the end of the big hit game. In this case, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the holding is performed and before the jackpot game is finished. Further, for example, when the specific variation pattern continues for a predetermined number of times, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the predetermined number of special symbol variations.

[12-15. Limitation of setting suggestion production]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the setting suggestive effect under a specific condition will be described.

[12-15-1. Limitation of setting suggestion production after special state]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestive effect after the special state will be described. Hereinafter, both the setting confirmation mode and the error occurrence are examples of special states. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying the setting value, which is started when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171(A) is an example of a setting confirmation mode effect restriction table. FIG. 171(B) is an example of an error occurrence effect restriction table. The effect confirmation table in the setting confirmation mode and the effect restriction table in the event of an error are stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example.

[12-15-1-1. Limitation of setting suggestion production after setting confirmation mode]
First, the effect confirmation table in the setting confirmation mode will be described. In the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table, when the setting confirmation mode is started while the change (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change) determined to execute the setting suggestion effect is being executed or is on hold, A restriction flag indicating whether or not to limit the setting suggestion effect is stored.

In the setting confirmation mode production restriction table, the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion production (that is, when the production related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) although it is determined that the setting suggestion production is performed) A record 1701 that stores a restriction flag in the case where is started, and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion change (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is determined to be performed (displayed)) A record 1702 that stores a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. .. Accordingly, the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table stores a column 1703 for storing a restriction flag when the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode starts, and a restriction flag for a case where the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. And a column 1704.

Further, if the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended by the game ball winning the starting opening during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the column 1704 includes a column 1705 which stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to winning at the starting opening in the setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode indicates, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or in a hall or the like, an operation medium provided on the pachinko machine 1 (even if the player cannot operate the operation medium, the operation medium cannot be operated by the player). It can be set depending on the operation medium that can be operated). In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, when a game ball enters the starting opening, the lottery information may not be acquired and the prize ball may not be executed for the entered ball. However, even in such a case, in the special symbol fluctuation that is already held, it is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

When the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, one of the fields 1706 and 1707 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, the fields 1708 to 1711 have a value of 0, and the fields 1712 and 1713 One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of the fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

Further, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the value of the field 1706 and the field 1707 is 0, the value of one of the field 1708 and the field 1709 is 1 and the value of the other one is 0, and the field 1710. And one of the values of the field 1711 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are 0, one of the fields 1714 and 1715 is 1 and the other is 0, One value of the field 1716 or the field 1717 is 1 and the other value is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion effect in accordance with the restriction flag in each state defined in the setting restriction mode start effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) About the case where the setting confirmation mode is started before the setting suggesting effect is started, and the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode is started.

(1-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change processing is executed, and a sense of security that the game result is not affected Can be given.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 0 and the value of the field 1707 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a voice or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the setting confirmation mode is started before the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1708 is 1 and the value of the field 1709 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not lost. When the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sound and image are output with priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were performed. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1708 is 0 and the value of the field 1709 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggesting effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "is it a high setting?" If the suggested effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggested effect.

(2') New setting suggestion fluctuation corresponding to winning at the starting mouth in the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is started before the start of the setting suggestion production and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode About setting suggestion production.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1710 is 1 and the value of the field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1710 is 0 and the value of the field 1711 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because the hall is in doubt, the setting value may be changed thereafter. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting confirmation effect is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is displayed. There is a possibility that an odd number setting will be confirmed in the subsequent setting suggestion effect), so a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid such a situation.

It should be noted that it is preferable that the image, sound, light, and the like indicating the setting confirmation state described above be displayed regardless of the value of the field described above. In addition, since it may be possible to activate a new winning even when the game is stopped after shifting to the setting confirmation state, in that case, the same process as the process of advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the setting suggestion effect is displayed). And, about the case where the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) After the game is restarted, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). When the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may feel distrust that the setting has been changed, and by restarting the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game, Occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a voice or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect is finished). And, regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1714 is 1 and the value of the field 1715 is 0). Since the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not lost. When the sound and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sound and image are output with priority over the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed ( (The image related to the setting suggestion effect does not overlap with the image indicating the setting confirmation mode, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect does not overlap with the character indicating the setting confirmation mode such as "in the setting confirmation mode") . Note that this display and the like can be performed in the same manner even when an error described later occurs. The term "does not overlap" as used herein means that the images are not actually set in the RAM, and the appearances of the player do not overlap.

In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were performed. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggesting effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "is it a high setting?" If the suggested effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggested effect.

(4') New in response to winning at the starting mouth during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is started during the setting suggestion variation and after the setting suggestion production is started, and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. About setting suggestion production of various setting suggestion fluctuations.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1716 is 1 and the value of the field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1716 is 0 and the value of the field 1717 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because the hall is in doubt, the setting value may be changed thereafter. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting confirmation effect is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is displayed. Since a display for confirming the odd number setting is displayed in the setting suggestion effect later), a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid such a situation.

In the case where the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, when the setting confirmation mode spans a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311, after the setting confirmation mode is started. When the first symbol is determined or the next variation starts, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode. When it is determined that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, the peripheral control MPU performs the setting suggestion effect along with the change corresponding to the hold if the newly won hold is the setting suggestion change. By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change processing is executed, and a sense of security that the game result is not affected Can be given.

Further, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggesting effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, it suggests a high setting such as "is it a high setting?" If an effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In this way, when the setting suggestive effect is performed and when the setting suggestive effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of the business style of.

[12-15-1-2. Limitation of setting suggestion performance when an error occurs]
Next, the effect occurrence effect restriction table will be described with reference to FIG. 171(B). When an error occurs during execution or suspension of a change (hereinafter referred to as “setting suggestion change” in this chapter) determined to execute the setting suggestion effect, the error limit effect limit table is used to suggest the setting suggestion effect. A restriction flag indicating whether or not to store is stored.

The error occurrence performance restriction table includes a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the start of setting suggestion production, and an error occurs during the setting suggestion variation and after the setting suggestion production starts during the setting suggestion variation. And a record 1802 that stores a restriction flag in the case of doing so.

The error includes a strong error that is reported by stopping the game and a weak error that is reported while the game is in progress. The error that detects the illegal magnetism in the firing ball sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. The full tank error (an error indicating that the gaming ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, an error production effect restriction table, a column 1803 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error notified when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

Further, when the game progresses even while the error is occurring, a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended by the game ball winning the starting opening while the error is occurring. Therefore, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to winning in the starting opening during an error.

The restriction flag in the error occurrence effect restriction table is, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (a player can operate an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player. It may be an operation medium).

In the error occurrence effect restriction table, one of the fields 1806 and 1807 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and one of the fields 1808 and 1809 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0. One of the fields 1810 and 1811 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, one of the fields 1812 and 1813 has a value of 1 and the other has a value of 0, and one of fields 1814 and 1815 has a value of The value of 1 and the other is 0, and the value of one of the fields 1816 and 1817 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion effect according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the effect occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) Regarding the case where an error starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game is stopped when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is canceled by the hall clerk, and give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. it can.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed may be disadvantageous for the player, and thus the player can proceed with the game so as not to cause an error. Can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even after the occurrence of the error (weak error).

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1808 is 1 and the value of the field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved. When the voice and the image indicating that an error is occurring are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these voice and the image are output prior to the audio and the image in the setting suggestive effect. .. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Also, in order to provide the player with an expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1808 is 0 and the value of the field 1809 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed may be disadvantageous for the player, and thus the player can proceed with the game so as not to cause an error. Can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(2') Setting suggestion If an error occurs before the start of production, and the game progresses even while the error is occurring (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to winning at the starting mouth during the error occurring About setting suggestion production of fluctuation.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1810 is 1 and the value of the field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1810 is 0 and the value of the field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error, so that the player cancels the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

(3) About the case where an error occurs during the setting suggesting fluctuation and after the start of the setting suggesting effect, and the game is stopped when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) The setting suggestion effect is restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). When the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may feel distrust that the setting has been changed, and by restarting the setting suggestion effect after restarting the game, Occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is stopped may occur. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game without causing an error, and Can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses (weak error) even while the error occurs.

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1814 is 1 and the value of the field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved. When the voice and the image indicating that an error is occurring are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these voice and the image are output prior to the audio and the image in the setting suggestive effect. .. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "when the setting suggestion effect indicating the high setting was displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects should be hidden. Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation may occur in which the setting suggestion effect is stopped, which is a disadvantage for the player. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game is It is possible to proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4') New in response to winning in the starting mouth during error occurrence when the error occurs after the setting suggestion variation and the start of the setting suggestion production, and the game progresses during the error occurrence (weak error) About setting suggestion production of various setting suggestion fluctuations.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1816 is 1 and the value of the field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when the error occurs, the interest of the player can be improved.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1816 is 0 and the value of the field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning during the error, so that the player cancels the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

In this way, when the setting suggestive effect is performed and when the setting suggestive effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of the business style of.

[12-15-2. Limitation of production in new starting prize]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning in the state where the special symbol variation and the new variation can be held will be described. FIG. 172 is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. The new start winning effect control table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example.

The new start winning effect restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by an assumption about the effect of the previous change and an effect restriction on the effect in the new start winning based on the assumption. The pre-variation in this chapter is the variation just before the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. As the condition of the effect of the previous change, there are a case where only the expected suggestion effect that the special lottery result corresponding to the change is a big hit is performed, and a case where the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed.

In addition, as the effect restriction of the prefetch effect in the new start winning, only the setting suggestion effect in the prefetch effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not executed), and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect in the prefetch effect are restricted (that is, the setting). There is no suggestion effect and expected suggestion effect), and neither setting suggestion effect nor expectation suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, setting suggestion effect and look-ahead effect are executed).

The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table, which is included in the corresponding conditions and is referred to when executing the prefetching effect restriction in the new start winning. The flag column stores a flag indicating which condition is to be executed and which process table is used to determine the process for the prefetch effect in the new start winning.

Note that 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning effect control table is, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (an operation medium that cannot be operated by the player or an operation medium that can be operated by the player). It doesn't matter).

Peripheral control MPU, when there is a new start winning in the state of being able to hold the new fluctuation during the special symbol change, and if it is determined that only the expected suggestion effect will be executed in the previous change, the new start winning effect limit table The condition indicated by the condition column corresponding to the flag column in which the value in the “Previous change effect” column is a flag column corresponding to “expectation suggestion only” and storing 1 as a value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column to determine the content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU, if there is a new starting prize in the state of being able to hold the new fluctuation during the special symbol fluctuation, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous fluctuation, the new start prize. The value in the “previous change effect” column of the effect restriction table is a flag field corresponding to “expectation suggestion+setting suggestion”, and a flag field storing 1 as a value The content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to a different starting winning is determined.

Hereinafter, each condition shown in the condition column will be described. The first condition (condition for selecting the processing table 1) is to limit only the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning when the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation. Is to be done. Under the first condition, the expectation suggestive effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. When the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning in such a state, the player's consciousness is directed also to the setting suggestion effect, so that in the effect of the previous change. The uplifting feeling may be reduced. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestion effect with the expectation suggesting effect, and may make the player happiness. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the first condition.

Further, in the first condition, the expected suggestion effect is performed in the previous change, but in this state, when the setting suggestion effect is further executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player Even if it is assumed that there is a deviation in the previous variation, the variation corresponding to the new start winning can still be expected, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting an effect based on the notice effect table of FIG. 165, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the effect is determined by the table, and whether or not the flag in the condition column indicating that the setting suggestion effect is restricted is 1 thereafter. Whether or not it is restricted is determined, and if 1 (restricted), the setting suggestion effect is restricted by performing processing such that even if set is selected, it is rewritten and displayed without set. To do. That is, the peripheral control MPU can limit the setting suggestion effect by using the advance notice effect table shown in FIG. 165 by performing the determination process after determining the effect. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold the effect table for each effect restriction type, the amount of data can be reduced. Similarly to the expected suggestive effect described later, when the peripheral control MPU uses the final pending color table in FIG. 161 and selects a read-ahead pending display other than white, when the expected suggestive effect is limited, The selected hold display is rewritten to white and displayed.

The second condition (condition for selecting the processing table 2) is a setting suggestion effect and an expectation suggestion as a look-ahead effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect alone is executed in the previous change. It is to limit both the production. Under the second condition, the anticipation suggestive effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. When the setting suggestion effect and the term attitude suggestion effect are executed as the look-ahead effect of the variation corresponding to the new start prize in such a state, the player's consciousness is directed toward these effects as well, There is a risk that the uplifting feeling in the production of the pre-variation may be reduced. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the second condition.

The third condition (condition for selecting the processing table 3) is a setting suggestion effect and an expectation suggestion as a look-ahead effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect alone is executed in the previous change. It is not to limit any of the production. Under the third condition, since the expectation suggestive effect is performed in the previous change, the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, so that in addition to the feeling of uplifting the jackpot, the feeling of uplifting the setting suggesting effect (in particular, the high setting confirmation suggestion effect). Alternatively, a case where a high setting confirmation effect or the like is executed) can be given to the player.

The fourth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 4) is a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. Only is to be limited. In the fourth condition, the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, so that the player may be able to win the jackpot due to the previous change, and (especially the high setting suggestion effect or the high setting confirmation effect). I feel a sense of elation due to the setting suggestion). When the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new starting winning in such a state, there is a possibility that the feeling of uplifting to the expectation for the big hit in the hold of the previous change may decrease. ..

Specifically, for example, when setting 4 or more is set in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change and setting 5 or more is set in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new starting winning, The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (although it is originally set to 5 or more, setting 4 is also suggested). In such a case, the player infers that a large amount of inaccurate information is included not only in the setting suggestion effect in the previous change but also in the expectation suggesting effect (specifically, for example, the display mode is red. There is a possibility that the big hit expectation is not high even for the hold, which means that the uplifting feeling for the expectation suggestive effect may be reduced. Execution of the fourth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The fifth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 5) is a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. It is also to limit both the expectation suggestion production. In the fifth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, when the setting suggestion effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times in a short period of time. There is a possibility that the player will infer the set value with high accuracy (for example, if odd number setting suggestion effect and high setting suggestion effect are performed, it is likely to be setting 5). In such a state, if the player determines that the setting is low, the pachinko machine 1 may stop the game, and if it is determined that the setting is high, another pachinko machine in the hall may be stopped. The operation of the machine 1 may be reduced. Execution of the fifth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Also, especially, if the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed as the look-ahead effect even in the change corresponding to the new start winning, many effects occur in a short period of time. However, the player may be confused. Execution of the fifth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The sixth condition (condition for selecting the processing table 6) is a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. Also, neither of the expectations suggestive effects is limited. Under the sixth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, the player assumes the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect in the setting suggested by the setting suggestion effect. In this state, the setting suggestive effect and the expected suggestive effect are performed in the change corresponding to the new start winning, so that the degree of expectation due to these two expected suggestive effects may be raised.

Specifically, for example, when the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting 4 or more in the previous variation is executed and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting 5 or more is executed as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning, the player Expectation at setting 4 or higher is assumed for the expectation suggestion effect in the previous change. However, after that, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize suggests the setting degree of 5 or higher, so that the expectation degree of the expected suggestion effect is assumed to be the setting degree of 5 or higher. The feeling of uplifting increases.

In this way, since the effect is exhibited for each prefetching effect restriction content corresponding to the new start winning, by making it possible for the hall etc. to set such prefetching effect restriction content, the needs of the business style of the hall etc. It is possible to provide a game machine adapted to.

Hereinafter, each processing table and the prefetch effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Each processing table is stored in the peripheral control ROM, for example.

FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, common contents of each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous change, the processing content related to the new starting winning corresponding to the winning classification, and the processing number that is the identifier of the processing content.

It should be noted that the processing content held in each processing table defines the processing content regarding the prefetch effect that is not a restriction target. Specifically, for example, as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing content of the processing table 1 which is a table referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion effect includes the expected suggestion effect. The processing content is defined. Similarly, the processing content of the processing table 3, which is a table referred to when limiting both the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect, as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, is the expected suggestion effect and The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the look-ahead effect to be restricted in the new start prize and the processing table to be referenced based on the flag of the new start winning effect restriction table, and is not the restriction object based on the processing table. The processing for the prefetching effect is determined.

It should be noted that processing tables 3 and 6 to be described later store flags for selecting the processing content related to the new start winning from a plurality of processing content. The flag in the processing table may be, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or in a hall or the like (an operation medium that the player cannot operate or an operation medium that the player can operate). ), it is possible to set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new start winning defined by the processing table 1 will be described. The processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation and only the setting suggestion effect is limited as the look-ahead effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which the hold prefetching is performed as the prefetching effect for performing the expectation suggestion will be described.

The process of process number 1 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time reduction. In the process of process number 1, when the peripheral control MPU has a specific mode in which the new starting winning hold display is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, blue, green, red, or the like hold display mode), , At the start of the big hit opening screen that was won in the previous variation, the mode of the new starting winning hold display is returned to the default (white display mode in the final hold color table of FIG. 161). However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the big hit opening screen, the hold display of the particular mode is deleted like other hold displays. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the new start winning pending display to the specific display mode (that is, the default display) at the time saving transition after the jackpot. Note that the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the new start winning pending display to the specific display mode even when the new winning is not held at the end of the time saving (that is, Keep the default display).

The process of process number 2 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. In the processing of processing number 2, when the mode of the new starting winning hold display is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation degree, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation, The mode of the new start winning hold display is returned to the default. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the big hit opening screen, the hold display of the particular mode is deleted like other hold displays. Further, even when the normal state transition is controlled after the jackpot game is over, the mode of the new starting winning pending display is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display is left as it is).

The process of process number 3 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-change winning type is a small hit. In the process of the process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the new start winning hold display (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if the blue hold display mode is blue, The hold display mode of is continuously displayed). Further, the peripheral control MPU may restore the default display mode of the new starting winning hold display at the start of the opening screen for the small hit that was won in the previous variation. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small hit opening screen, the hold display of the particular mode is deleted like other hold displays.

The process of process number 4 is a process related to a new starting winning when the winning type of the previous change is out of the range. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the new starting winning hold display (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if the blue hold display mode is blue, The hold display mode of is continuously displayed).

FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change and both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there. Since the processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when limiting both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. The processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expected suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there.

The processes of process numbers 5 to 6 are processes related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 5 to 6, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is being held, etc. By the processing of the process number 5, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation or the like, the player can not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. It should be noted that, since the jackpot with the time saving is won in the previous change, the change corresponding to the new winning is likely to start after the end of the time saving (the game ball is in the second starting opening 2004 during the time saving). If you win with a high frequency, and there is a suspension of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed in priority to the first special symbol fluctuation). Therefore, by the processing of the processing number 6, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the end of the time saving, so that the player's discouragement due to the end of the time saving can be reduced.

The processes of process numbers 7 to 8 are processes related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. One of the processes of process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 7 to 8, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. “Before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during a big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he has won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion production starts at the latest during the jackpot game by the processing of processing number 7, the player will be discouraged. You can enjoy a big hit game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 8, the setting suggestion effect is started immediately after the jackpot is finished, so that the player's disappointment with respect to not being given the time saving can be reduced.

The processes of process numbers 9 to 10 are processes related to a new starting winning prize when the winning type of the previous change is the small hit. One of the processes with process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 9 to 10, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The “before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won in the previous change, or during the small hit. In the case of a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player. However, the processing of the processing number 9 causes the setting suggestion effect to start at an early timing, and thus is discouraged. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion time for small hits is shorter than the series of digestion times for big hits, if the player recognizes that the setting suggestion production has started before the start of the previous change, etc. Players may feel distrusted if they do not. By the processing of the processing number 10, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

The processes of process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new start winning when the pre-variation winning type is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 11 to 13, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU only performs the new start when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetching effect of the previous change is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). During the change corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning is executed. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds), or may be advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) from the normal timing. By the processing of the processing number 12, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels discouraged from the fact that a hold display mode with a high jackpot expectation appears in the previous change, but that is out of order. it can. 175 and the later-described FIG. 178, the old hold is a hold corresponding to the previous fluctuation, and the new hold is a hold corresponding to the new start winning.

In the process of process number 13, when the mode of the hold display is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation level (for example, green or red), the peripheral control MPU suggests setting as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning. Do not execute the performance. By the processing of the processing number 13, although the mode of the hold display in which the big hit expectation degree is high appears in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect does not appear even in the change corresponding to the new start winning. , It is possible to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game.

FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. ..

The process of the process number 14 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with time reduction. In the process of the process number 14, the process of the expected suggestive effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 1.

The process of the process number 15 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. In the process of process number 15, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

The process of the process number 16 is a process related to a new starting winning when the pre-change winning type is a small hit. In the process of process number 16, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process of the process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the pre-variation winning type is out of order. In the process of the process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 4.

Since the processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when limiting only the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning, a new start regardless of the jackpot type of the previous change. It is defined that no special process is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the winning.

FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. The processing table 5 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and both the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table that is played. The processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestive effect and the expected suggestive effect as the look-ahead effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning.

FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expected suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Table.

The processes of process numbers 18 to 21 are processes related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit with a time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 18 to 21, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is being held, etc. By the process of the process number 18, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation, etc., the player can not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

In the process of the process number 19, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Is better (specifically, for example, it is informed that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and the setting as the prefetch effect is performed before the variation corresponding to the new start winning is started. Only when it is informed that the setting 5 or more is settled in the suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is being held, etc.

By the processing of the processing number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion effect at the latest during the big hit with time saving, so that a double uplifting feeling due to the big hit with time saving and the high setting indication can be obtained. In addition, for example, it is notified that the setting 5 or more is settled in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting 4 or more is settled in the setting suggestion effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. If it is notified, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, By the processing of number 19, such a useless effect can be omitted. On the contrary, for example, when it is informed that the setting 4 or more is settled in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is set 5 before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started. Even if the player is not notified that the above is settled, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect is likely to be an unnecessary effect, and the process of the process number 19 causes such an unnecessary effect. The presentation can be omitted.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the process of process number 20, since the setting suggestion effect often starts immediately after the end of the time saving, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment with respect to the end of the time saving state.

In the process of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect described in the processing of the processing number 19 or reduce the player's disappointment with respect to the end of the time saving state.

The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes related to a new starting winning when the pre-variation winning type is a big hit without time saving. One of the processes of process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by the flag. In the processes of process numbers 22 to 25, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. “Before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during a big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he has won the big jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion production starts at the latest during the jackpot game by the processing of processing number 22, the player will be discouraged. You can enjoy a big hit game in a reduced state.

In the process of the process number 23, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. “Before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during a big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. By the processing of the process number 23, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the big hit game, the big hit game can be enjoyed with the discouragement reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 24, the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the big hit ends, so that the player's disappointment for not having entered in a short time can be reduced.

In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggesting effect as the prefetching effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19 or reduce the player's disappointment for not having entered in a short time. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production as the look-ahead production is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production of the previous variation, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, If the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is executed, the player who is disappointed not to rush in a short time will show the useless setting suggestion effect. There is a risk that the person will be stroked in reverse.

The processes of process numbers 26 to 29 are processes relating to a new starting winning prize when the winning type of the previous change is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 26 to 29 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 26 to 29, the process regarding the expected suggestive effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of the process number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The “before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won in the previous change, or during the small hit. In a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player, but by the processing of the processing number 26, the setting suggestion production is started at an early timing, and the player is discouraged. Can be reduced.

In the process of the process number 27, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested production as the look-ahead production before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. The “before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning” is specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won in the previous change, or during the small hit. By the processing of the processing number 27, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, or reduce the discouragement of the player due to the small merit given to the small hit.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion time for small hits is shorter than the series of digestion times for big hits, if the player recognizes that the setting suggestion production has started before the start of the previous change, etc. Players may feel distrusted if they do not. By the processing of the processing number 28, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU is set in the setting suggesting effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, rather than the setting suggested in the setting suggesting effect of the previous change. Only when the above is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 29, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect described in the processing of the processing number 19 or reduce the player's discouragement that only a small merit is given in the small hit. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production as the look-ahead production is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production of the previous variation, before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the change corresponding to the new start winning is executed, a more useless setting suggestion effect is given to the player who is discouraged that only a small merit is given in the small hit. It will be shown, and the player may be stroked backwards.

The processes of process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new starting winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is out. One of the processes of process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 30 to 34, the process of expectation suggestion effect as the prefetch effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of processing number 30, it is possible to reduce the player's discouragement due to the deviation from the previous variation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU only performs the new start when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). During the change corresponding to the winning, the setting suggesting effect as the look-ahead effect in the new starting winning is executed. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds), or may be advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) from the normal timing. By the processing of the processing number 31, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels disappointing that he/she deviates from the appearance of the pending display mode in which the jackpot expectation is high in the previous change. it can.

In the process of the process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the previous fluctuation when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). If the setting suggested as a look-ahead production is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion production before the change corresponding to the new start winning is started, the new start prize is given only if During the change corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect in the new starting winning is executed. By the processing of the processing number 32, the player's discouragement that the previous fluctuation, which was the mode of the hold display with a high jackpot expectation degree, is off, can be alleviated by the setting suggestion effect.

In the process of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU only applies to the new start winning prize when the mode of the hold display in the pre-change pending hold look-ahead effect is not a particular mode with a high jackpot expectation (for example, green or red). During the change corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the prefetch effect in the new starting winning is executed. By the processing of the processing number 33, such a discouragement can be reduced by the setting suggestion production for the player who has been disappointed because the expectation for the big hit cannot be obtained in the pre-variation hold look-ahead production.

In the process of the process number 34, the peripheral control MPU is the case where the mode of the hold display is not the specific mode with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, green or red), and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Therefore, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is better before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize, only when the change corresponding to the new start prize is changed, A setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect in the new starting winning. By the processing of the processing number 34, a situation in which the player's irritation that the mode of the pending display of the previous change has a low expectation and suggests a low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the change corresponding to the new start winning is amplified. Can be suppressed.

In the above-described process, even if the setting suggestion effect is not limited as a look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU will indicate the setting suggestion. It is not necessary to execute the production. For example, when the new start winning is performed during the big hit, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because immediately after the big hit game, the player is likely to continue the game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

As in the example of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, the effect can be exerted in each processing related to the new starting winning prize defined by each processing number, so that the hole etc. can set the processing related to the new starting winning prize. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the needs of a business style such as a hall.

Further, for example, the new start winning is near the end of the ST state (probably changing state that continues until a big hit is won or a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed) (specifically, for example, until the ST state ends. The remaining number of variations of the symbol is 4 or less which is the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the remaining number of variations of the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the effect display device 1600). In this case, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the ST state ends, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win the jackpot in the ST. When the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect related to a new start winning in such a state, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as an effect with a high expectation for a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is delighted. May occur. The above-mentioned processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, for example, after the ST state ends and shifts to the normal state, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (specifically, for example, four special symbol fluctuations, which is the maximum number of special symbols reserved, or from the ST state There may be a case where the second starting port 2004 is opened immediately after the transition to the normal state, and in consideration of it, a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) a special symbol variation) is performed before the new start. When the start winning is performed, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win the jackpot immediately. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that a variation corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol which is easy to win the big hit of the type having a great advantage for the player is executed. When the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect related to a new start winning in such a state, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as an effect with a high expectation for a big hit, and a situation occurs in which the player is delighted. May occur. The above-mentioned processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, when it is determined that a setting suggestion effect that is completed independently for each of a plurality of holds is executed, one setting suggestion effect that spans the changes corresponding to the plurality of holds is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original function of the RAM clear switch 954 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 and In order to distinguish between the setting change function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

179 and 180 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on process shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 of FIG. 21 to step S34 of FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the fetched level data in the register (step S201). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely activated. Therefore, if an employee of the hall mistakenly interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to be activated, the RAM of the hall is cleared in an unintended state. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of the power-on process, and after the peripheral control board 1510 ends the standby state. By determining the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if an employee of the hall mistakenly interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the power is turned on. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the closing operation is surely detected.

The ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be different. For example, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be switched between positive and negative logic so that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON at the high level and the setting key 971 is ON at the low level. The RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may change the voltage determined to be ON. By doing so, it is possible to change the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with a radio wave and make it difficult to carry out a fraudulent act of activating the setting change mode. Further, as described later, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to monitor the signal level of the sensor for fraud detection.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stages of setting 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the set value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the set state management area and the initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is awaited (step S203). Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, the abnormal set value is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing relating to a normal game such as a special drawing or a general drawing is not executed.

In addition, the set value is not only determined when the power is turned on, but also when winning at the starting opening, when starting the variable display game, and when the game state is switched (from normal state to jackpot state, from low probability state to high probability state) , Non-time saving state to time saving state). This prevents the lottery from being performed based on the incorrect set value, even if the set value accidentally becomes an abnormal value.

If it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is turned on again, or until the set value is changed, the state of the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) is maintained. .. When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, a value corresponding to the setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the lowest setting may be used to update the setting value storage area.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated only through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated only by turning the power on again. This is because the RAM abnormality may occur not only due to a defect but also due to fraud, and if the RAM abnormality caused by fraud can be resolved by a power-on operation, the RAM abnormality can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated unless the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since the setting key 971 which can be operated only by the employee having the key is operated, the security performance against fraud can be improved.

In addition, in order to deal with the illegal act of illegally changing the set value to an indefinite value, if the set value is determined to be abnormal, if the value is updated to the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the minimum setting, the security of the gaming machine is improved. It is effective because it can improve the sex.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, a normal game state (game startable state), setting confirmation mode, setting change mode , The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is awaited (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the previous power-off time and the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and stored in step S48 are compared (verified). Note that a check code having a fixed value may be used instead of the checksum. Further, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power has been normally backed up is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM is normally backed up when the power failure occurs (step S205).

If either the checksum or the value of the backup flag area is abnormal as a result of the determination, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 (setting The area including the value is also initialized) (step S207), and the process proceeds to step S216. Although erasing the data stored in the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 or in a predetermined area is called “initialization”, “RAM clear” is also used in the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the values of the checksum and the backup flag area are normal, the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 is ON, setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (content) of the setting key stored in the register. It is determined. If the operation is not a setting change operation (both the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 or both are OFF), the setting state management area is set to determine whether the state is being changed before the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the change is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that the setting change operation is performed, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that the state. If a value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting changing operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 that should be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

In step S208, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. At this time, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting is changed to the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the state.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether or not the state is RAM abnormality, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on is RAM abnormal (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the state before the power is turned on is not in the RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), so the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether it has been done (step S212).

As a result, if the register stores the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954, the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON when the power is turned on, so the RAM in the game control area excluding the setting value and the setting state management area. In order to initialize the area (clear area when RAM is normal), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the register does not store the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, so the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

Then, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 has been operated when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is indicated in the setting state management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

After that, the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each unit at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220, and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is completed and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, initial setting at the time of starting a game or initial setting at the time of power failure recovery is performed. After that, the power-on state command for notifying the state of each part when the power is turned on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, the power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol when the power is restored is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. The various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in the timer interrupt process.

Further, the set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), the interrupt is permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to the normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

181 and 182 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. Unlike the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 executes setting change processing within the timer interrupt processing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, the digit to be displayed. In the present embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are combined is described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, LED common counters may be provided as many as the number of displays.

Then, the switch input process is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not an initial value (value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (the value indicating the game startable state) is recorded in the setting status management area, it is not necessary to execute the setting change/confirmation processing (after step S234) in the timer interrupt processing, and thus the normal timer interrupt processing (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt process of step S233, a performance display process (FIG. 183) described later is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating the game startable state) is not recorded in the setting status management area, the normal game processing is not executed by the timer interrupt processing, and the setting change/confirmation processing is executed.

In the setting change/confirmation processing, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing/checking the setting value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether or not the operation of changing/checking the setting value is performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

If the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the result of adding the set values exceeds the upper limit, it is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (the value indicating the setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 is detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, the setting change/confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change/confirmation mode is not ended and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change/confirmation mode end processing, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and initial setting at the time of game start or power failure recovery In order to send to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command for notifying the state of each part at the time of power-on (low probability/high probability, gaming state such as time saving/non-time saving etc.) To the buffer (step S242). Then, the power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of return after the power failure is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating a processing state relating to a special symbol/special electric auditors product (a state of each process relating to a special symbol/special electric auditors product (standby, changing, determination, big hit, etc.)) is transmitted as a command. .. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the game state related to the special symbol and the operation state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, the set value command for notifying the set value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

It should be noted that the command for notifying the set value may be transmitted not only in the setting change/confirmation mode ending process when the power is turned on, but also when the fluctuation starts or when the game state is switched. At that time, the command of the set value transmitted when the power is turned on and the command transmitted during the normal game at the start of fluctuation may be the same command or different commands (for example, the value of the upper byte is different).

When the set value command is made different at the time of turning on the power and at the time of the normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a series of commands (change pattern command, pattern command, etc.) including the set value at the start of the special symbol variable display game. When received, it is determined whether the command is missing. By changing the content of the command at the timing when the command is transmitted (when the power is turned on, during a normal game, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 has a value other than the set value that is correctly received when the power is turned on, or other than the set value when the fluctuation starts. It is possible to determine whether the variation pattern command or the pattern command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting status management area, the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) is set to display an error (step S246). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting for displaying the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) is performed (step S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). As described above, after the timer interrupt process is started, the set value changing operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt to display the set value (display of the set value). Switch). The setting value will be displayed without setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, the setting change/confirmation process is being executed by not performing the process related to the setting change/confirmation as the process when the power is turned on, but by performing it in the same timer interrupt process as when the normal game is started. Even if the power is restored to the original state after the setting key 971 is returned to the original state even if the setting key 971 and the setting change switch 972 are not operated at the same position as when the power failure occurs, the setting when the power failure occurs It is possible to return to the state of change/confirmation processing. Further, in the setting change/confirmation processing, it is possible to make common the processing executed in the normal game processing, such as command transmission processing and control of dynamic lighting of LEDs.

Then, the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing ends. That is, in step S249, the command stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc. is actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

In the timer interrupt process described above, the process is branched depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 of FIG. 181), but a plurality of timer interrupt processes May be provided to start different timer interrupt processing depending on the normal game state and the setting change mode and/or setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include a common process in part (for example, a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or all of them may be configured by different routines. That is, the timer interrupt process 1 (for setting change/confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called in the normal game state, which is common to these two timer interrupt processes. It has a process (module) to be executed and a dedicated process (module) to be executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing the output of various detection switches such as a winning opening sensor and a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the register bank may be shared by the process executed in the normal game and the process executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used for main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used for both timer interrupt processing. Since two timer interrupt processes do not start at the same time, one register bank can be shared. That is, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched depending on the bank, and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed. 1 (during normal game) and timer interrupt processing 2 (setting change mode) that is periodically executed, and is common to at least two of the main processing on the main control side, timer interrupt processing 1 and timer interrupt processing 2. Use the bank registers.

The timer interrupt processing executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may execute in different cycles. The sampling of the switch in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, so that the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is 4 ms. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be early (for example, 2 ms) or late (for example, 8 ms). If the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED that displays the set value will be delayed, and the display mode of the set value will differ from the base display during the normal game. become. If there are 8 LED commons and the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms), and the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 4 ms. The cycle is 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time becomes long in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing, and the LED flickering becomes large, and the display mode with the base display during the normal game is displayed. And can be recognized differently.

Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started at the time of starting the power supply, the timer interruption processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is permitted, and the timer interruption processing 2 for normal game is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power is started in the normal game state (when the setting change/confirmation mode is not entered), the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal game is permitted. Then, at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the timer interruption processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interruption processing 2 for normal game is permitted.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (eg, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

The performance display process is executed in the timer interrupt in the normal gaming state described above. Specifically, it is executed by the normal interrupt processing of step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 or the base display output processing of step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address in the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves the register used in the game control area in the register saving buffer (step S260). S261). The save destination of the register used in the game control area in step S261 may be a work area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area. The save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

Then, it is determined whether the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The first power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether the power is turned on for the first time). When the area outside the game control area is initialized, 5AH is set. To be done. That is, if the value of the first power-on flag is 5AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used to display the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the value of the parameter is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is stored in step S264. initialize.

If the power failure flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within the predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized and set to the power failure flag 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within the predetermined range, the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected, and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time of the section for calculating the base value (step S266), and if the switching time has come, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each section. For example, display control for each section includes display of a test section having less than 500 out balls, blinking display when the number of low-probability/non-time saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000) ( Step S269).

After that, the value of the register is restored from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, a notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on, or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is notified, the hall employee is notified of the pachinko machine. Notify the state in an easy to understand manner.

The notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with the display setting on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, the setting display process of step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190 is executed. A dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the processing.

First, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). It should be noted that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is given priority over the notification of other abnormalities and states.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off, or all LEDs flash at high speed at the same cycle Performance display device 1600 Sound of displaying "RAM error" (sound effect) RAM abnormality notification sound is output (RAM abnormality notification sound is in the setting change mode (Although it may be the same as the notification sound other than setting confirmation mode)
Sound (sound) Outputs the sound of "RAM error" Volume Volume maximum volume decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player LED specified frame lamp (top lamp is installed on the door frame 3 Including, ball out and excluding stock notification LED) blinks in red Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition to re-notify output By changing settings on main control board 1310 RAM cleared or power was reapplied to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, the setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up, or all LEDs flash at the same cycle at medium-speed effect display device 1600 Sound of character "in setting change" is displayed (sound effect) Sound of notification of setting change mode is output (sound) "Setting" Outputting the sound "I am changing" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp (top) provided on the door frame 3 Blinking white including lamps, excluding bulb burnout and stock notification LED) Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification release condition Peripheral control board 1510 is power supply "A001H" was received as the closing operation command.

Next, the setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up, or all LEDs blink at the same cycle at low speed. Performance display device 1600 Displaying the characters "setting confirmation" (sound effect) Outputs the confirmation sound of the setting confirmation mode (the notification sound of the setting confirmation mode) May be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (sound) The sound of "setting confirmation" is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Volume is set to the maximum volume frame decoration LED door frame 3 that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. Predetermined frame lamp (including top lamp, excluding bulb burnout and stock notification LED) blinks in white Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification cancellation condition The peripheral control board 1510 receives "A001H" as a power-on operation command, and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed.

Regarding the notification of the three states described above, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and the notification is given with priority in the order of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priority may be set in the order shown in FIG. Priority 1 has a high notification priority, and priority 9 has a low notification priority. That is, when a plurality of notifications should be given, notifications with a high priority (small numbers) are given. In addition, if the notifications of the same priority are satisfied and the notifications conflict with each other, even if the notifications are switched by switching between the conflicting notifications, the notification that is satisfied first is performed, and after the notification is released. If the competing notification satisfies the condition, the competing notification may be performed. Specifically, in priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so the notifications do not conflict. In the priority 4, the excess ball abnormality notification and the normal electric auditors prize winning abnormality notification may occur at the same time, and the two notifications may conflict with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM abnormality is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification priority in setting change mode 3: RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 954 Notification (except RAM clear by setting change)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification priority in the setting confirmation mode 4: Excessive prize ball abnormality notification when prize balls are paid out by a predetermined number or more Priority 4: Normal electric auditors when a predetermined number or more are continuously inactive Normal electric auditors product prize abnormality notification priority 5 when a winning prize is detected or when a predetermined or more prizes are detected during one operation of the ordinary electric baking products: The difference between the winning number and the ejecting number of the special winning opening Of the discharge abnormality when the number of times exceeds a predetermined number 6: Priority of vibration sensor abnormality notification when vibration is detected 7: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When a predetermined number or more of consecutive winnings are detected when the special winning opening is not operated, or when a single big hit hits a predetermined winning or more Large prize winning prize notification when detected

Next, details of the above-described power-on process (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be described. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the processing of the start address 8000 of the program code. Disable protection and disable area of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2001) and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then turning it OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated, the hall control board 1510 waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. If the employee of the above mistakes the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the process at power-on, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed. Even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the register or the like which is a temporary storage means is determined later. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is surely detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2006). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and therefore the process waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within the predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stages of setting 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the set value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), the value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is set. Wait for initialization by. Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the set value is an abnormal value, it is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the set value is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not activated. In the hall where the pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, clear latency probability variation (high probability non-time saving) and return to normal state with low probability time saving) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the setting value is initialized by the RAM clear operation during business, the setting value is reset and the power is cut off to continue the business, the setting change mode is started, and the original setting value is reset. There is a need. In order to prevent such trouble, the RAM clear operation maintains the set value without clearing it.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the sub-start waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires. Waits for activation (step S2008). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time after the power is turned on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, not after the setting value is determined.

After that, it is determined again whether or not the power failure notice signal indicates that there is a power failure (step S2009). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and thus the process waits in step S2009.

Also, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in the register (step S2010). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from the data (excluding the data saved in the stack) used as the game control area in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power is normally backed up (the processing at the time of power failure was normally executed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data of the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality because the power-off processing has not been normally performed.

If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). ..

Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded are masked (step S2013). Then, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 has been operated to ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that the setting change operation is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode was set when the power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting status management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be performed using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting status management area is a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 in FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to the normal state. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the values of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2016 and S2019 to step S2031 are different, so that both programs can be made common, The size can be reduced.

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON, it is determined that the RAM clear operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is shut off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed to turn on the power, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from a value indicating RAM abnormality (08H) to a value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is always via the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is performed before it is determined whether the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, in order to recover the state before the occurrence of the power failure, the information on the game state at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2020).

After that, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). If the setting key 971 has been operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022). It proceeds to step S2036. That is, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is in the setting confirmation mode, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Since steps S2018 to S2022 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S2019) and the setting key 971. Any of the operation determination (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2019), and the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on process (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, in step S2032, the determination can be performed based on the determination result stored in the register.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2033), and by the RAM abnormality initialization processing, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). Details of the initialization processing at the time of RAM abnormality will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2035).

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and the hardware random number (for example, winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2037). Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main processing on the main control side (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2039 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number updating process 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. In the random number update process 2, a random number other than the random number for making the winning determination in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery is mainly updated.

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is detected, the power-off time processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, data writing to the main control internal RAM 1312 is prohibited, and rewriting of game information is protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores the checksum in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2045). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Lastly, RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and invalid area invalid are written in the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2046), and wait until recovery from power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid to enable access to all areas of the main control RAM 1312. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormal time initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the game control area outside stack pointer value in the stack pointer (step S2051), and registers all registers. The value is stored in the register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

After that, it is determined whether initialization is performed at the first power-on based on the value of the first power-on flag at power-on (step S2053). The first power-on means the power-on as a pachinko machine for the first time, and the power-on after the backup power supply is cut off and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is erased. For example, when the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the backup power supply to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off and the data in the main control RAM 1312 cannot be held.

If the initialization is performed when the power is first turned on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined whether the base calculation target discharge ball is outside a predetermined range (step S2054). If the base calculation target discharge ball is outside the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharge ball of the base calculation target is within the predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range (step S2055). Then, if the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range, the RAM abnormal initialization process is terminated and the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is out of the normal range, 00H is written and initialized in all work areas outside the use area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2056), and 00H is written in all stack areas outside the use area. Is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set to the initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the calling source.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1 for performing bank switching. Without being configured, the registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt, and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to its original state. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. When the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 described later is a process related to input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interruption process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since it is determined as NO in step S2604, the winning is detected, but the fraud is not detected. Even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize balls, the variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered preferable that the injustice is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the injustice is not detected.

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input processing 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which the person who intends to commit a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by radiating a radio wave or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, in order to change the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random numbers and the small hit symbol determining random numbers updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 188, respectively. Update the random number for initial value determination.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

After that, the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and the test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, it is preferable to turn on only the game state error signal and turn off the other signals.

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2068). The details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the value stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

Next, FIG. 191 will be described. When it is determined in step S2064 of FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 detects the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection. Is executed (step S2080). Specifically, when a detection signal or the like from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is read and a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information storage area is displayed. Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether or not fraud is detected in the fraud detection process of step S2084. In addition, in the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, a prize winning abnormality such as a special winning opening or an excessive winning of ordinary electric auditors' prizes is also determined.

After that, the timer updating process is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time when the special symbol display 1185 lights according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process, the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation determined by the normal electric auditors product control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, the payer ACK signal that indicates that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set, the time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a self-check for creating a prize ball command for paying out game balls and for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 sends the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data.

Subsequently, a frame command reception process is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to inform the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area Remember. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 conforms to the system of commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is directly output from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, a fraudulent activity detection process is executed (step S2084). In the fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, prize winning abnormality, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when it is not in the jackpot gaming state, it is detected by the count switch that the game balls have entered the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the main control program Creates an award-winning abnormality display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Then, a switch passing command output process of creating a command corresponding to passage detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting opening switch and setting it in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output process is executed (step S2087). Unlike other processing, the base display output processing is processing that is executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is common processing that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, before and after the execution of the base display output processing, the predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area, and the base display is executed. It is not updated in the output process. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Then, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, and the probability variation state is set based on the big hit symbol random value. It is determined whether or not to move. When the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be received in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to an advantage for the player. If the probability variation transition condition is established, then the probability variation state is entered, while if the probability variation transition condition is not established, the game state other than the probability variation state is entered. Here, the "probability variation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Then, the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether to open/close the second starting opening door member 2549 according to the result of the lottery in the ordinary lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), and the starting opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous for the player. Transition to the state.

Then, the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or the big hit game. In the state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as information output to the hall computer, information output signal during probability change, special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals, ordinary symbol display information output signals, time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Then, it progresses to step S2070 of FIG.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interruption process when the setting state management area does not have the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes the process of changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the calling process without executing the setting process.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be performed at all. This RAM abnormality is set to the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power supply is cut off and the power failure process is executed. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original position, the setting change mode ends and the normal game can be started.

When the power is turned on again, if the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated other than to activate the setting change mode, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, RAM abnormal condition continues, normal game cannot be started. In other words, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode without fail.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it is detected whether an edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the calling process.

When the operation for ending the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is ended by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. Set up. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, when the power is restored and hot start is performed in the normal game state, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the RAM. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 and the output of the security signal is stopped.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even after the power is restored, so that the security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. In case of hot start, the security signal is output only for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time for starting the peripheral control board 1510). The output of the security signal restarts after the transition. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, a period during which the security signal output is stopped is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to RAM abnormality, power is restored and RAM abnormality continues. When: ・The power supply recovers after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal in the setting change mode, and the setting change mode continues.・The power supply recovers after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, the security signal output is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the security signal is generated on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or the state associated with the output of the security signal is canceled.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends. The output of the security signal is stopped after a lapse of time. In addition, the same processing as the setting confirmation mode may be performed in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether it has been done (step S2106). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1. When the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, the process returns to the calling process.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is turned on. In this way, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored, the setting change switch 972 It can be prevented that the setting can be changed by the operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting status management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2113), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , Return to the processing of the calling source.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command is, as shown in FIG. 202(A), a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 which is the initial value. It should be noted that other bits may be set to 0 (step S2121). The bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode or the RAM abnormality, so the power-on setting process is terminated and the calling source is called. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area is determined according to whether the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. The area is initialized (step S2123).

After that, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in FIG. 202(B), the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not the normal game startable state is based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). The power-on return destination command is, as shown in FIG. 202(C), a command for notifying the gaming state regarding the special symbol.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The set value command is a command for notifying the set value, as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that a power-on state command, a power-on return destination command, and a set value command are transmitted together with a special symbol hold number command indicating the hold number of the special symbol variable display game, and in the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The hold number display may be restored to the state before the power failure. In addition, the special symbol hold number command is sent in the order of sending the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command, before sending these commands, and during sending these commands. May be.

After that, the process returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is executed when the power is restored and is not in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. , Power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and set value command) are transmitted at the time of a power failure recovery that is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode ends, or the setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interruption prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interruption permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number updating process 1 of step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt is prohibited before the initial value random number updating process so that the initial value random number updating process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process. Interrupts are enabled after the initial value random number update process. Initial value random number is a big hit determination random number for lottery of special symbols, a random number for lottery of ordinary symbols, a type of symbol at the time of special symbol big hit (low probability/high probability/time saving/non-time saving etc.) ) Is a random number for changing the initial value for each cycle such as a random number that determines ).

After that, the random numbers other than the winning random number (except the initial value random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the setting confirmation mode as in the setting change mode. In this modified example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 954 is set to the setting change mode or the setting change mode. It does not switch the confirmation mode, but has only a function as an operation for changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), and executes the switch input processing 3 (step S2141). Details of the switch input processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. To do. Note that in step S2141, the switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of the switch input process 3 described in FIG.

Then, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063), and the setting change/confirmation process is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change/confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the switch input process 2 is executed (step S2080), the timer updating process is executed (step S2081), and the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083), the injustice detection process is executed (step S2084), and the switch passing command output process is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), the base display output process is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2086). S2088). Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2089), the normal symbol and ordinary electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2090), and output data setting processing is executed (step S2091). Further, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), and the register bank is switched (step S2072) by the return command (for example, RETI) to return to the process before the interruption. To do.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the switch input process 3. The switch input processing 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt processing, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates ON edges, and inputs the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and acquires the number of times the process is repeated from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of times the process is repeated is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address designated by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2162), and the input level data area address designated by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2163). Further, the input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using the logical correction value specified by the switch winning information data (step S2165).

Then, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). If it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, it is possible to acquire the bits of the input port used during the normal game.

On the other hand, if the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during the setting change/confirmation designated in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode of the input port can be acquired.

After that, input level data is generated from the bits acquired by the mask processing, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, the edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

After that, it is set in the next block as the switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether the processing of all the switch input ports is completed (step S2172). If it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports is not completed, the process returns to step S2162 to process the next input port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports is completed, the switch input processing 3 is ended and the processing before the interruption is returned to.

FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198(A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times the process is repeated), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, and a normal game mask. The value, the mask value during setting change/confirmation, and the address of the input level data area are included.

FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area.

The switch input level/edge data area includes n sets of the address of the input level data area and the address of the input edge data area.

Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area as shown in the figure, it is not designated in the switch winning information data. When the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set in the same table together with the input level data area. Although the address of the input level data area and the input edge data area is a 16-bit (2 byte) value, it is set as the address of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be a lower 8 bits (1 byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change with the value of the input level data area or the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the RAM area address, and only the lower byte needs to be set. Can be reduced.

199 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table, FIG. 199 (A) shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, FIG. 199 (B) Shows an example of the configuration of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times the process is repeated), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, And the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports having different logical correction values and mask values. That is, in the switch prize information data table shown in FIG. 198(A), the mask value is set to be different between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, but the switch prize information data table shown in FIG. 199. In, in the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, different switch winning information data tables are used, and different switch winning information data can be acquired.

In order to deal with such a configuration, the switch input processing 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state, and the start address of the switch winning information data corresponding to the determination result is set. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167 without determining whether it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the setting change/confirmation process. The setting change/confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change/confirmation processing shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting status management area, the setting change/confirmation processing is ended and the processing before interruption is returned to. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and the test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, in bit 7, a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 is detected at level 1. In bit 6, the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. In bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. In bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned on, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door opening sensor detects the opening of the door frame 3, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, the level becomes 0 when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are unused.

FIG. 201(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting status management area.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting state management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are defined. Not not. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H is recorded if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, the setting change mode is updated from 08H to 02H, and when the setting change mode is ended, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte is the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. This is because the value of the setting status management area is 00H during normal play, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error with an output of 0. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, it is created once in the case of hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and twice in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, that is, processing at power-on and completion of setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 gives a notification in the above-described manner according to the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality state (see FIG. 184).

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the game command during the normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game command during the normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, a symbol operation, a lamp, a movable body, a voice, etc., is an effect corresponding to the received command. Then, the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the game state is inconsistent. Further, it may be notified with a small volume that the mismatch of the game state occurs. This is a player who does not understand that the game state is inconsistent without performing any effect until the predetermined condition is reached, and the special symbol variable display game does not start even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a trouble of the pachinko machine 1 that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, so that the function display unit 1400 normally displays the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol. To be done.

FIG. 202(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not it is in the normal game startable state based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, which indicates that the normal game can be started. The low-order byte of the power-on status command may be used to notify the series code of each pachinko machine model. For example, bits 6-4 can be used to identify eight different series. The power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220(C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220(C), the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the information (game state before power failure) recorded in the power-on buffer.

FIG. 202(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on return destination command. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state regarding the special symbol, for example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, the lower byte indicates the game state regarding the special symbol. Show. The power-on return destination command notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when a power failure occurs. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202(D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting value command. The set value command is a command for notifying the set value. For example, the set value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A1H, and the lower byte is the set value. The set value command is transmitted when the power is restored and the setting change mode ends or the setting check mode ends, which is neither the setting change mode nor the setting check mode. In addition, when the special symbol fluctuation starts, or when the game state changes (big hit, probability change, start and end such as shortening), it is transmitted. Thereby, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the set value command transmitted when the power is turned on, in the subsequent game (for example, the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol), the setting value is changed to the correct set value, so that the wrong setting is made. The production is not performed based on the value. The effect based on the set value is an effect that suggests the set value using an effect device such as a display, a lamp, a sound, and a movable body, and with a predetermined probability, an effect mode that is difficult to occur (or does not occur) in normal times. The generated value indicates the set value. This set value suggestion effect may include effects in other forms of the effects exemplified below, and may include a gaze. As the set value suggesting effect, in the effect display device 1600 which is an example of a display device, an effect such as a notice corresponding to the set value is displayed, or the variation mode of the symbol is changed from the normal time (for example, the variation start of the left and right middle symbols is started. Or the timing of confirmation will be different from the normal time (in normal time, each symbol will start fluctuating at the same time, in the case of high setting, it will start fluctuating in the order of left, middle, right, etc.) If you use it, a notification sound corresponding to the set value will be generated with a predetermined probability when the start mouth winning, or a sound different from the normal sound will be generated during the production (normal time is a male voice, high sound is a female voice) Voice etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating a processing state relating to a special symbol/special electric accessory, and m is a value according to a set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start in which the normal game state is activated, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on state command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (310nH) → set value command (A10mH) Sent in order.

When the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (3101H)→a set value command ( A10 mH).

Further, in the setting change mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation is performed. The command (A001H)->power-on state command (3001H)->power-on return destination command (3101H)->set value command (A10mH) is transmitted in this order.

In the setting confirmation mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, the set value is confirmed, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H). -> Power-on status command (3001H) -> Power-on return destination command (310nH) -> Set value command (A10mH).

When the RAM is abnormal, first, the power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted, and the setting change mode is activated by the setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is cut off. The power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (3101H)→a set value command (A10mH) in this order. Sent.

When the RAM is abnormal, first, the power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted, and if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored after the power is shut off, the RAM abnormal condition continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) continues. ) Is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, a power-on operation command (A001H)→a power-on state command (3001H)→a power-on return destination command (3101H)→a set value command (A10mH) in this order. Sent.

As described above, when the main control board 1310 is activated in the normal gaming state, a command group (combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) in which a plurality of commands indicate the return of the power supply is peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. Therefore, it is determined that the normal game state can be started after all the series of commands A001H to A10mH are received, and when some commands of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal game state cannot be started, and the fact that the normal game state cannot be started is notified.

That is, similar to the effect in the state where the game command is invalidated, of the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, a symbol operation, a lamp, a movable body, a voice, etc. are received. May be performed), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the game state is inconsistent.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game compensates for the set value command missed at power-on to start the normal game. You may.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command with the predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on. You may update to the setting value corresponding to a command.

The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously. All you have to do is send it to the board.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a state transition of values set after the power is restored from the state before the power is shut off in the setting state management area.

The operation of the pachinko machine having the setting function at the time of power-on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or the setting key 971 is operated. There are several patterns for convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204(A) when the power is cut off immediately before is in the normal game state (VALID_PLAY=00H) and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 has a game control including a whole area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. The base display 1317 also displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is a game control area including all areas stack areas other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power failure. In addition, even if all the stored contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least an area in which information for returning to the game state before the power outage is stored (memory in which information regarding a game is stored Area (special pattern, area for normal symbol, area for prize ball, random number generated by program (fluctuation pattern random number, initial value random number, etc.)) should be maintained, and is necessary to return to the game state before power failure The area in which the non-information is stored may be in a state different from that before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. The same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204(B), in the operation example 1 in the setting change mode at the time of immediately before power-off, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery, in the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power-on. Regardless of whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, the main control RAM 1312 initializes an area used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in the pattern 2-1 may be performed by initializing an area used as a game control area including a stack area in addition to the storage area initialized by the initialization processing already executed when the power failure occurs. Good. For example, if the power supply is cut off during the initialization processing of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage area for which the initialization processing has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization processing at the time of power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

When a power failure occurs during the initialization processing, an area (for example, a RAM clear processing flag) for storing whether the main control RAM 1312 is in the initialization processing is provided, and while the RAM clear processing flag is set, It is advisable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area that is the target of the initialization process.

Further, the process of monitoring a power failure in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be repeatedly executed. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, a timer interruption may be used to monitor the power failure notice signal.

The power failure monitoring process and the process when the power is cut off are performed in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal game state, whether in the common process or in separate processes. It may be executed by a common process in the mode, and may be executed by another process in the normal game state. That is, the power failure monitoring process and the power-off process may be common to at least two of the three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine.

As described above, in the pattern 2-1 when the power is shut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the setting is always performed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change work in the hall, the setting change mode may be activated even when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954 for activating the setting change mode when the power is restored may not be operated. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated when the power is restored (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is started instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. When the setting key 971 is not operated, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal gaming state is activated, and when neither switch is operated, the normal gaming state is activated. However, if control is performed as in pattern 2-1, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the control is always started in the setting change mode.

<Pattern 2-2>
When the setting change mode is set at the time of the last power-off and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of power failure recovery, unlike the pattern 2-1, even if the operation is performed by another pattern shown in FIG. 204(C). Good. When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Area is initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on is other than the above, at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated at the time of power-on (OFF), the main control RAM 1312. The memory content of does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312. The base display 1317 also displays an error (for example, an error code). The game stopped state may be a game stopped by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311, or a game stopped by not executing the normal game process.

That is, in pattern 2-1, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are unconditionally switched to the setting change mode after the power is restored, but in pattern 2-2, the setting is performed when the power is restored. When the operation to activate the setting change mode by the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the setting change mode is activated, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality) And That is, in the pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power recovery is operated, the normal game is not started as the RAM abnormal state and the normal operation is performed after the setting change mode. Start the game. Therefore, when the operation to activate the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode such as a RAM abnormality, and the game stop state is notified to notify the hall. The employee may be prompted to operate the setting change mode.

When the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are not initialized until the next setting change operation is performed. Stand by with the game stopped. The game stopped state may be a game stopped by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311, or a game stopped by not executing the normal game process. After that, the power is once shut off, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated to the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, so that the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is changed. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Patterns 3-1 and 3-2>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204(D) in the case of the setting confirmation mode at the time of immediately before power-off and the main control RAM 1312 being normal at the time of power failure recovery will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 serves as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the stored content of the main control RAM 1312 does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 also displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be set. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored content of the main control RAM 1312 does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after performing a display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) indicating that the performance display has been switched as an initial display when the power is turned on. In this case, as in the pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 204(E), the main control MPU 1311 may be activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H (the original value). The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the above), and the base display 1317 may display the current set value for confirming the setting.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204(F), an operation example when the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality at the time of power failure recovery will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 has a game control including a whole area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area becomes 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a display for changing the setting.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main operation is performed. The content stored in the control RAM 1312 does not change. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. The same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 also displays an error (for example, an error code).

If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is cut off immediately before, if the main control RAM 1312 is initialized before the power is cut off, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized again when the power is restored, and Initialize the devices built in the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random number. (3) The main loop may be executed after at least one of setting the interrupt permission is executed.

Even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 immediately before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined before it is judged whether the state before the power failure is the RAM abnormality (step S211 in FIG. 179). The presence or absence of the operation of is determined. When the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is started, but even when the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on (the setting confirmation mode is In any of the case where the operation for starting is performed, the case where only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, and the case where neither is operated), the state of the RAM abnormality is maintained. That is, normally, when the setting change mode is started and the setting check mode is started, the setting change mode process and the setting check mode process are executed in the timer interrupt process, but the power is turned off and then turned on again from the RAM abnormal state. If so, different processing is executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned off and on again to recover from the RAM abnormal state, when starting in the setting change mode, the processing of the setting change mode is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but it is started in the setting confirmation mode. When this is done, a process different from normal is executed within the timer interrupt process.

In this way, when the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
・Time chart for normal setting changes (Fig. 205)
・Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
-Time chart when the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting change mode at the time of power failure, and the setting change mode is entered (Fig. 207).
-Time chart when the setting key 971 is ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting change mode at the time of a power failure, and the setting change mode is entered (Fig. 208).
-Time chart for transition to the setting confirmation mode when the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored in the setting confirmation mode during a power failure (Fig. 209)

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Change to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184 above.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above according to the received power-on command.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6). Further, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N+1 to N+2, and updates the base display 1317. The subsequent set value N+2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and is updated to 1 when the set value exceeds 6. It

The employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal game state. Yes (T8). The generated power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the main control MPU 1311 finishes all lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts display in the normal gaming state. Further, the base display 1317 blinks all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. In this way, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined mode at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly understood, and operation mistakes at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command becomes 01H. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. 202(D). Both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on status command (3001H) are for notifying the normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously. Just send it to.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that it is in the normal game startable state by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, effect display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decorative lamp is being changed. Continue the notification production. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot know the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum output time of the security signal is This is to ensure.

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, the normal game state or the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is turned on. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 01H in the setting state management area for setting. Switch to confirmation mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the confirmation of the setting value is completed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). By setting the value of the setting state management area to 00H, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. 202(D). In the setting confirmation mode, since the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in principle, the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the power-on return destination command.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that it is in the normal game startable state by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, effect display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decorative lamp is being changed. Continue the notification production. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode because it is in the setting change mode when the power supply was cut off immediately before. Note that, as shown in FIG. 204(B), in the setting change mode at the time of immediately before power-off, the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at power-on. It shows the case of starting.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Change to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, and therefore receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes the power-off processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, it is possible to reduce power consumption during the power-off processing, and to prevent resetting due to the power supply (5 V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. The output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the special winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc. may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes the security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , Waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting status management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is set at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Move to. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again as in the case of shifting to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power failure processing is executed thereafter, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power-off processing, so the mode is the setting change mode at the time of power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power is restored and the game control area may not be initialized. After the initialization is performed again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts the output of the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets the operation state to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, and therefore receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value, and then sets the updated set value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317.

The employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. 202(D).

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that it is in the normal game startable state by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, effect display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decorative lamp is being changed. Continue the notification production. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) has been delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because when the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a different operation mode depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on even in the setting change mode immediately before the power is turned off.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Change to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, and therefore receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N+1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes the power-off processing (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, it is possible to reduce power consumption during the power-off processing, and to prevent resetting due to the power supply (5 V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. The output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the special winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc. may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes the security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , Waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the level of the signal 954. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so as to be in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again, but the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting change (02H), the main control MPU 1311 is restarted in the setting change mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. To be done. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again as in the case of shifting to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power failure processing is executed thereafter, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power-off processing, so the mode is the setting change mode at the time of power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power is restored and the game control area may not be initialized. For example, in the above-described FIG. 186, if the state before the power failure is the setting change, YES is obtained in step S2015, the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) and the RAM abnormal time initialization process (step S2034) is executed. However, if the process branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before power-off is continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization process step S2034. After the initialization is performed again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts the output of the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, in the setting change mode, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are activated by turning on the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on. The setting change mode can be started even if it is not ON.

Note that when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, the setting state management area differs from the time chart shown in FIG. 00H may be recorded and restarted in a state where the normal game cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored, the system is restarted in the state of the RAM abnormality. In other words, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally terminated at some point.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the shift to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, and therefore receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value, and then sets the updated set value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

The employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command becomes 01H. M of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value of 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. 202(D). The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously. All you have to do is send it to the board.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that it is in the normal game startable state by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, effect display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decorative lamp is being changed. Continue the notification production. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) has been delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because when the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, in the setting confirmation mode at the time of the last power-off, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of power-on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer control effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at timing T5 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Change to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power failure and executes the power-off processing, and the main control MPU 1311 stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, it is possible to reduce power consumption during the power-off processing, and to prevent resetting due to the power supply (5 V) dropping before the power-off processing is completed. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. The output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the special winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc. may be turned off to stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes the security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at timing T12. , Waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting status management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so as to be in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting confirmation (01H), the peripheral control board is restarted in the setting confirmation mode at the timing T13 when the activation waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated when the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is turned on. It is also possible to activate the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

In the setting confirmation mode, even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the set value is not updated and the set value is displayed on the base display. It is continuously displayed at 1317.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the confirmation of the setting value is completed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 starts an effect in the normal game state (for example, customer waiting effect) after a lapse of a predetermined delay time after knowing that the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started. May be. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after the predetermined delay time elapses after it is known that the normal game start is possible by the power-on state command, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the production may be switched so as to start the customer waiting production. In addition, during a predetermined delay time, it is preferable to perform a notification effect of setting change by some effect devices, for example, effect display device 1600 and sound are returned to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the setting of the decorative lamp is being changed. Continue the notification production. In addition, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) continue the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if the normal game state is restored. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because when the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table stores a hit determination threshold value of a jackpot determination random number value for randomly selecting a jackpot for a special symbol.

The jackpot threshold judgment table shown in FIG. 210 includes a set value table selection address table and a set value judgment threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 210 is an example of determining a jackpot when the jackpot determination random number value is larger than the threshold value defined in the table.

In the set value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected for each set value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte has a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold value table for each set value stores a threshold value at a low probability (normal state) and a threshold value at a high probability (probability change state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select the threshold value determination table for the current setting value. Then, using the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, the threshold for jackpot determination is acquired from the selected threshold determination table. Then, the jackpot determination random number value obtained at the time of winning at the starting opening is determined to be a jackpot when it is equal to or greater than the obtained threshold value, and is determined to be a deviation when it is less than the threshold value.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 includes a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 211 is an example in which a jackpot determination random number value is determined as a jackpot when the value is in the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

In the set value table selection address table, the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected for each set value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte has a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold table for each set value includes a lower threshold at a low probability (normal state), an upper threshold at a low probability (normal state), a lower threshold at a high probability (probability change state), and a high probability (probability change state). Stores the upper threshold.

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and this value is used as an offset to select the threshold value determination table for the current setting value. Then, the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) is used as an offset to determine whether the selected threshold judgment table is a low probability block or a high probability block, and the lower limit threshold and upper limit for jackpot judgment are determined. Get the threshold. Then, the jackpot determination random number value obtained at the time of winning at the starting opening is determined to be a jackpot when the obtained lower limit threshold value or more and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, and is determined to be a deviation when it is outside the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value.

The big hit determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 212 is a low probability setting value table selecting address table, a low probability setting value determining threshold table, a high probability setting value table selecting address table, and a high probability setting. It is composed of a judgment threshold table for values. The big hit determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 211 is configured integrally with a low probability table and a high probability table, but the big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table. It is configured separately.

The low-probability set value table selection address table defines the pointer address of the determination threshold table that is selected for each low-probability (normal state) setting value. Defines the pointer address of the determination threshold value table selected at each set value of high probability (probability change state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte has a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold value table for each set value for low probability stores a lower limit threshold value at a low probability (normal state) and an upper limit threshold value at a low probability (normal state). The determination threshold value table for each set value for high probability stores the lower limit threshold value at high probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot determination, it is determined by the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) whether the address table is for selecting the low probability setting value table or the high probability setting value table. The setting value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the setting value table, and the determination threshold value table corresponding to the current setting value is selected by the acquired offset. Then, the jackpot determination random number value obtained at the time of winning at the starting opening is determined to be a jackpot when the obtained lower limit threshold value or more and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, and is determined to be a deviation when it is outside the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value.

[12-17. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 2]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original function of the RAM clear switch 954 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 and In order to distinguish between the setting change function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

First, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the processing of the start address 8000 of the program code. The protect invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that all areas of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2201) and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By once setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then turning it OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to calculation in processing calculation) provided in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose registers are divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the register of bank 0 is used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312 and is erased without holding information at the time of power failure, and is different from the RAM area where information is backed up at the time of power failure. Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated, the hall control board 1510 waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. If the employee of the above mistakes the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the process at power-on, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed. Even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the register or the like which is a temporary storage means is determined later. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is surely detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2206). If the power failure advance notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the process waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2206.

After that, a sub-start waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is started (step S2207). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from power-on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

Then, it is determined again whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2208). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and thus the process waits in step S2208.

After that, a set value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range and whether the value of the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2210). This is because in order to ensure independence between the processing outside the game control area and the processing inside the game control area, the information used in one processing does not affect the other processing. After that, when the power is turned on, the RAM confirmation processing outside the game area is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at power-on will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is provisionally set in the B register (step S2214). The B and C registers used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. Note that the general-purpose register of bank 0 is used in the process when the power is turned on.

The value set in the setting status management area in the second modification is different from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 220(A). 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H is recorded if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode is ended, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215 and S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from the data (excluding the data saved in the stack) used as the game control area in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power is normally backed up (the processing at the time of power failure was normally executed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data of the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality because the power-off processing has not been normally performed.

If there is no abnormality inside or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), and the information of the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2218), and the process proceeds to step 2219.

Then, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded are masked (step S2220). As the register for storing the value of the PF port, a general register different from the register temporarily set in S2213 and S2214 is used. After that, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2221). Then, if the setting key 971 is operated ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated ON, it is determined that the setting change operation is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is in effect when a power failure occurs (step S2222). For example, when the value in the setting status management area is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality both inside the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting status management area is a value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

When it is determined that the power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the values of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2226 and step S2231 to step S2235 are different. In this way, since the values of the setting state management area are different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting changing process, the callers can be distinguished even if the programs for both RAM clearing processes are common. , It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2226). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed to turn on the power, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, when it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting status management area changes from a value indicating RAM abnormality (03H) to a value indicating setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is always via the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is performed before it is determined whether or not the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, in order to recover the state before the occurrence of the power outage, the information on the game state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2227).

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). If the setting key 971 has been operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. .. That is, even if the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal game state is set. In addition, when the power failure occurs in the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the state may not be the normal game state, but the same power failure confirmation mode as before the power failure may occur.

Since steps S2225 to S2229 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S2226) and the setting key 971. Any of the operation determination (step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2226), or the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, the value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, the abnormality outside the game control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, RAM clear processing outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2232), and the game area outside RAM abnormal time processing is executed (step S2233). The details of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the setting values in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, areas other than the setting state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). That is, the RAM clear processing outside the game control area will not be executed unless the setting is changed. When the RAM is out of the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, as in the case of the RAM in the game control area, and the game is stopped. Therefore, the RAM is returned from the abnormal state unless the setting is changed. I can't. However, while the RAM clear condition outside the game control area is only setting change, the RAM clear condition inside the game control area is setting change and RAM clear switch 954 operation (when the RAM abnormality does not occur. When the RAM is forcibly cleared by the employee's operation).

In the RAM clearing process in the game area in step S2235, the setting value and the setting state management area are excluded. If the setting value becomes high due to an illegal RAM clearing operation by the player, the hole side is damaged. This is because if a problem (RAM abnormality) occurs during the game with the high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clear operation changes the high setting to the low setting, which causes damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This is because when the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the power is cut off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, the power is cut off during transmission of the variation command, so that the symbol command is transmitted, but the following variation pattern command may not be transmitted. If only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, when an untransmitted command in the process related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command is transmitted during the setting process after the power is restored, and the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command. There is a possibility that the game state will be set and malfunction will occur. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately, but the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, it is recommended to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2237), and the hardware random number (for example, winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is also updated in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. However, the hardware random number is activated at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. May be. Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2240), and the process proceeds to the main process on the main control side (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the set value confirmation process. The set value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), and it is determined whether the set value of the set state management area is within the normal range and whether the value of the set state management area is within the normal range. To do. The setting value confirmation process may be executed when the power supply is turned on, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends. Further, it may be executed at the time of starting the special symbol change or at the time of changing the game state (at the start and end of a big hit, a certain change, a time saving, etc.)

In the set value confirmation processing, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the set state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220(A), 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area. Therefore, if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal and the process advances to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting status management area, it is determined whether the setting value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that can be selected in the stages of setting 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the set value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined to be outside the predetermined range.

If the set value is out of the predetermined range, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on process. .. On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on process.

Regarding the value recorded in the setting state management area and the setting value, whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is determined even during the progress of the game (every change start, when switching the game state, etc.). For this reason, a condition that is determined to be a RAM abnormality regarding the setting state management area and the setting value during the game, a RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (a work area in the game area excluding the setting state management area and the setting value, and outside the game area) The two conditions, that is, the condition determined as (work RAM abnormality) are different. The two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be partially the same. For example, when it is determined whether the setting state management area and the setting value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that some of the two determination conditions are the same.

In this way, the RAM abnormality determination conditions are different. If the RAM abnormality determination regarding the set value is performed only when the power is turned on, if the set value is changed due to misbehavior, noise, or the like, a hall or a game is played. This is because it is disadvantageous to the person, and it is desirable to detect the abnormality early and shorten the period in which the disadvantage occurs.

In addition, by subrouting the RAM abnormality determination processing relating to the setting state management area and the set value during the game, the same program is determined by calling the subroutine as needed during the progress of the game and determining the RAM abnormality. The size of the program can be reduced without providing it in a place.

Further, although the setting state management area is excluded from the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, it may be treated as the RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting status management area as the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, in the setting change mode before the power failure, and when the RAM abnormality is determined when the power is restored, the RAM abnormality is prioritized. Therefore, if the value in the setting state management area is abnormal (that is, RAM abnormality), it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area in the main control RAM 1312 in which the set value is stored may be the RAM abnormality determination target at power-on or may not be the RAM abnormality determination target.

The priority in the determination at power-on is that the RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and the normal game state has the lowest priority. Further, the setting change mode has a higher priority than the setting confirmation mode and the RAM clear processing is executed by the RAM clear operation. In this way, by executing the determination process in the order of the priority of the derived states, it is possible to accurately derive the state of high priority even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the game area outside RAM confirmation processing when the power is turned on. The power-on game area outside RAM confirmation processing is executed in step S2211 of the power-on processing (FIG. 213), and an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is determined.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value to the stack pointer (step S2261). , All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2262). The stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the processing executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by turning on the power for the first time (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5 AH, it can be determined that the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on or the like.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by turning on the power for the first time, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and the calculated checksum is normal. Is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process advances to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. It should be noted that the RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined in S2231 based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in S2266.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2267), and the LED blinking cycle timer sets the blinking cycle value (600 (Milliseconds) is set (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking and displaying the upper two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and one blinking cycle is set by the expiration of the LED blinking cycle timer. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317, and when the mode switching time timer times out, the mode is switched to the base display mode.

After that, 0 is set in the performance display monitor display management area for initialization (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

After that, the power-down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2272), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on process.

FIG. 217 is a flow chart of the out-of-game area RAM abnormal time process. The out-of-game area RAM abnormal time process is executed in step S2233 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), and sets the outside game area stack pointer value to the stack pointer (step S2281). All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). The stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the processing executed outside the game control area.

Then, the outside-use-area RWM initialization processing is executed to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the outside-use-area RWM initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 218.

After that, the RAM normality discriminating value (00H) is set in the RAM abnormality discriminating area (EX_RWMERERROR) outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal at the next power-on.

Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2285), the blink cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set to the LED blink cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to the mode. The switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

Then, all register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , The stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2289), and the process returns to the power-on process of the calling source.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the outside-use-area RWM initialization processing. The outside-use-area RWM initialization processing is executed in step S2283 of the outside-game-area RAM abnormality processing, and the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized.

First, the main control MPU 1311 writes 00H to the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for initialization (step S2290). Then, 00H is written and initialized in the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2291). Then, the process returns to the out-of-game area RAM process.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to execute the power-on initialization.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 220(B), the power-on operation command is a command composed of 2 bytes that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting state management. It is a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 which is the initial value. In addition, 0 may be set to the other bits (step S2301). The bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode or the RAM abnormality, so the power-on setting process is terminated and the calling source is called. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area is determined according to whether the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. The area is initialized (step S2304).

After that, a power-on state command is created and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220(C), the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, where the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is the state before the power failure.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in FIG. 202(C), the power-on return destination command is a command composed of 2 bytes that notifies the gaming state regarding the special symbol, and the upper byte is 31H and the lower byte is special when a power failure occurs. The state of the symbol and the operation state of the special electric accessory are shown. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202(D), the set value command is a 2-byte command for notifying the set value. The upper byte indicates A1H and the lower byte indicates the set value.

A power-on state command, a power-on return destination command, and a set value command are transmitted together with a special symbol hold number command indicating the hold number of the special symbol variation display game, and the hold number display is interrupted in the effect display device 1600. The state before the occurrence may be restored. The transmission order of the special symbol hold number command is as follows: after sending the power-on state command, power-on return destination command and setting value command, before sending these commands, or during sending these commands. May be.

After that, the process returns to the calling process.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of the setting change mode. The power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the setting key 971 is turned off and the setting change/confirmation process ends. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

When the setting change/confirmation process is executed, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, when the setting change/confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted for the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.). By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 gives a notification corresponding to the state such as the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM abnormality.

In the setting/confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the volume and brightness adjustment by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment by the employee in the hall (peripheral control board box) The adjustment of the volume and brightness by the volume provided in 1520) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

Further, in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the entire screen of the effect display device 1600 may be used to display the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormal state. In this case, a voice message indicating the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be output. Furthermore, you may notify using some or all lamps (a lamp provided in the door frame 3 may be included).

FIG. 220(B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area, and the value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. Unlike that shown in FIG. 202(A), in another example 2, the lower byte becomes 04H when a RAM abnormality occurs.

Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte is the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. This is because the value of the setting status management area is 00H during normal play, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error with an output of 0. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, the command of A001H or A004H is created once in response to hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the command of A002H or A003H is created in the power-on process. After that, it is created twice as a command of A001H at the time of ending the setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the above-described operations are performed according to the normal game startable state (A001H), the setting confirmation mode (A002H), the setting change mode (A003H), and the RAM abnormality state (A004H). The notification is performed in this manner (see FIG. 184). The notification of the normal game startable state is not shown in FIG. 184, but a demonstration screen is displayed or a standby state effect for explaining game contents is performed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the game command during the normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game command during the normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, a symbol operation, a lamp, a movable body, a voice, etc., is an effect corresponding to the received command. Then, the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the game state is inconsistent. Further, it may be notified with a small volume that the mismatch of the game state occurs. This is a player who does not understand that the game state is inconsistent without performing any effect until the predetermined condition is reached, and the special symbol variable display game does not start even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a trouble of the pachinko machine 1 that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, so that the function display unit 1400 normally displays the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol. To be done.

FIG. 220C is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on state command. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202(B) in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of the second example defines four states 01H, 02H, 03H, 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether the normal game startable state is based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, and further notifying the state before the power failure. For example, if the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify the RAM clear. If the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability/non-time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game startable state. If the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the high probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. If the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started.

Also, the power-on state buffer is a storage area that stores information on the game state at the time of the power outage in order to restore the state before the power outage as described above. The value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low probability non-time saving, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. When the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, the power-on state buffer is 0, so 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it can be notified that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2240 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, the power failure is monitored in the main processing, but the power failure processing may be executed when the power failure is detected by monitoring the power failure by the timer interrupt processing. For example, at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON, and the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that there is a power outage.

If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number updating process 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates the random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2312). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2314), the power-off processing is executed, and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off (step S2315). Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2316).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, as the power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2318). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, RAM protection valid (write prohibited) and invalid area invalidity are written to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2319), and wait until recovery from power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. Therefore, by disabling the prohibited area of the RAM protect register, the reset function by the access to the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), and the entire area can be accessed. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the power-off process. The power-off process is executed in step S2315 of the main process on the main control side (FIG. 221), and a necessary process is executed before the power is cut off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), and sets the outside game area stack pointer value to the stack pointer (step S2321). All register values are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

Subsequently, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the outside checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). After that, 5 AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). When 5 AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power failure process is normally executed. In this sense, the power-down check area and the backup flag of the RAM in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power outage process is normally executed, it is already determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, and as a result, if the power down check area is set to 5AH, the main control Initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power outage process has been normally executed are provided inside the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. .. This is for double determination in the game control area and outside the game control area, and because one storage area is not shared between the game control area and outside the game control area, independently. This is because processing is desirable. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power outage process has been normally executed, 5AH is erroneously set in the flag, and if the power is restored without performing the power outage process, it is erroneously determined that the power outage process was successfully executed. Will be judged. By thus making a double determination, the possibility of erroneous determination is reduced.

Further, the two flags should be provided in separate areas (for example, areas in which the lower byte (**00H to **FFH) or the upper byte (00**H or 01**H) of the address do not overlap). By this, even if the data is rewritten due to a noise or the like, it can be correctly restored.

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the calling source saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2325), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1 for performing bank switching. Without being configured, the registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to its original state. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2332 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is a process related to input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since NO is determined in step S2335, the winning detection is performed, but the injustice by the injustice detection sensor is not detected. Even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize balls, the variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered preferable that the injustice is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the injustice is not detected. For example, since the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member are easily shaken. Vibration may be erroneously detected. Therefore, such false notification can be prevented by stopping the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In addition, the employee in the hall possesses a magnet for collecting the ball falling on the floor, and it is possible to prevent an erroneous notification of the magnet held by the employee during the operation of changing the setting or confirming the setting. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has means for invalidating (or limiting, restricting, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on). After the end of), fraud detection is enabled, and fraud detection is invalidated (or restricted, regulated, suppressed, etc.) by the means in a specific game state (for example, during setting processing).

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input processing 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which the person who intends to commit a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by radiating a radio wave or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, in order to change the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random numbers and the small hit symbol determining random numbers updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when the setting process for changing the set value is executed. This is because the hardware random number that determines the win or loss is updated regardless of whether the setting change or setting confirmation process is in progress, so the random number generated by software is also updated at the same timing as the activation of the hardware random number, that is, By updating even during processing of setting change and setting confirmation, inconsistency between hardware random number and software random number is unlikely to occur, expected value of production in game and design value of expected value that jackpot is derived at specific production The deviation from can be suppressed.

Then, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). Note that the set value confirmation process is executed periodically in the timer interrupt process, but even if the set value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of switching the game state (for example, the jackpot probability It is advisable to carry out the establishment of a specific condition such as switching, at the start or end of a big hit game, at the start or end of a time saving state, or at the time of fraud detection (for example, when the door is open or when magnetic detection is made). The resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed if the determination is made when the specific condition is satisfied, even if the determination is not made periodically in a short cycle such as when the timer interrupt process is executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By confirming the value of the setting state management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the setting state management area immediately after is confirmed (S2335). It is controlled so that the normal game processing is not executed. If the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved in the game area stack area (step S2338). Then, the test signal output process is executed to output the test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2340). Before and after the execution of the processing for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and the register are saved as in the other out-of-game-area processing, and the processing is restored after the processing is completed. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as processing outside the game control area. The test signal processing may be executed as the processing in the game control area as long as it does not affect the game even if it is executed as the processing in the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as the processing in the game control area, it is not necessary to save and restore the flag register (steps S2337 and S2340) before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339).

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area of a multi-byte FIFO format. The command generated each time a command is generated is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The generated command may be directly stored in the transmission information storage area in the FIFO format of the serial communication circuit each time the command is generated.

Then, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2345), and the process before the interrupt is returned to.

The process after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the process described above with reference to FIG. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process advances to step S2343 in FIG. 223.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not have the value (00H) indicating the normal game state, and mainly the process of changing the set value is performed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

Thus, in the case of a RAM abnormality, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM abnormality is transmitted for each timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating a RAM abnormality is sent only once, the peripheral abnormality control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine because the RAM abnormality re-notification is not sent when the command is missing. Is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the gaming machine, the abnormality notification is not performed, so that the state of the gaming machine cannot be confirmed from the outside. Further, when the RAM is abnormal, a game other than the power-on operation command is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 because the game is not played. Therefore, as long as the RAM abnormal state continues, the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted. is doing.

That is, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, a command of the same system (for example, a power-on operation command) is triggered by the execution of a periodic process (timer interrupt process) that is executed at every predetermined cycle, and a predetermined number of times (for example, A small number of times such as one time, two times, three times, etc.), and a second case in which the pachinko machine is in operation, and the number of times is not limited and the transmission is repeated every predetermined period. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted regardless of whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 correctly receives, and other game-related commands are not transmitted when the normal game is stopped. But the command is sent.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command relating to the RAM abnormality, it notifies the RAM abnormality. Even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, the received command relating to the RAM abnormality may be invalidated and the current notification may be continued. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and normal notification can be performed.

The command relating to the RAM abnormality may always be the same, but may be different depending on the timing of transmission. The command consistency may be determined by changing the command relating to the RAM abnormality according to the timing of transmission. For example, by using the power-on operation command (A004H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at power-on and the power-on operation command (A005H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at normal timer interrupt, When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A004H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at power-on continues. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the set value and the setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during the normal game) It can be determined that has become abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be made different in each of the two determined states. For example, it is possible to notify the RAM abnormality when the RAM abnormality at the time of power-on continues, and to notify the setting value abnormality when the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored.

It should be noted that during the RAM abnormality notification, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be performed at all. This RAM abnormality is set to the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power supply is cut off and the power failure process is executed. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original position, the setting change mode ends and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated other than to activate the setting change mode, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, RAM abnormal condition continues, normal game cannot be started. In other words, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode without fail.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it is detected whether an edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determination of setting change or setting confirmation completion), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2353). (S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the calling process.

When the operation for ending the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is ended by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. Set up. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, when the power is restored and hot start is performed in the normal game state, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the RAM. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is started.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation occurs.

When the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even after the power is restored, so that the security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and a power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or a hot start is performed after the power is restored, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time for starting the peripheral control board 1510). The output of the security signal restarts after the transition. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, a period during which the security signal output is stopped is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to RAM abnormality, power is restored and RAM abnormality continues. When: ・The power supply recovers after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal in the setting change mode, and the setting change mode continues.・The power supply recovers after a power failure occurs while outputting the security signal in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, the security signal output is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the security signal is generated on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or the state associated with the output of the security signal is canceled.

In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends. The output of the security signal is stopped after a lapse of time. In addition, the same processing as the setting confirmation mode may be performed in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356), and the setting change is performed. When it is determined that the mode is set, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S2357). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, the value is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). After that, the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, the process returns to the calling process.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is turned on. In this way, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored, the setting change switch 972 It can be prevented that the setting can be changed by the operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display processing is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 223) when the setting status management area does not have the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming status, and the processing of displaying the setting value is executed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2374), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , Return to the processing of the calling source.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 3]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In another example 3 described below, the point that the timer interrupt process for the setting change process is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for the normal game is the main difference from the another example 2 described above. The processes other than those described below are the same as those in the second example described above.

Note that, as in the second modification, in the third modification, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, but the main control RAM 1312 of the original RAM clear switch 954 is selected. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of the power-on process executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts the process from the start address 8000 of the program code when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protect invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In the third modified example, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. It should be noted that the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is validated, and when access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match, or if the backup flag is not set normally, the setting change operation is not performed after the function of the gaming machine is stopped as a RAM error and the game is disabled. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is controlled so that it is not initialized and the game is not executed.

Therefore, when the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is set to be valid, a reset occurs due to an erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to malfunction or failure, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-on process, Since the power failure process is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is judged that the RAM is abnormal, not only the game is initialized by the RAM clear processing, but also the game cannot be resumed unless the employee in the hall releases the RAM error (setting change operation), so the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

The prohibited area may be set to be valid. When the prohibited area is set to be valid, if the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed due to fraud or the like, the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs the RAM abnormal operation (setting change operation). Therefore, resistance to fraud can be improved.

Next, the simple clear mode timer of a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure notice signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (not a power failure).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read out from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated, the hall control board 1510 waits until the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. If the employee of the above mistakes the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the process at power-on, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed. Even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the register or the like which is a temporary storage means is determined later. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation is surely detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2406). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and thus the process waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2406. Since the watchdog timer is not cleared in the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer resets unless the power failure is released. In the reset by the watchdog timer, the program is immediately started from the start address without executing the security check like the system reset, and the power-on process is executed. Therefore, unless the power failure notice signal is released in the loop of step S2406, the loop does not exit.

In this way, the power failure determination processing for detecting the power failure notification signal is the first in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, and the second in step S2450 of main processing main processing during normal game. Running in place. In the latter (step S2450), the power outage process after step S2462 is executed by detecting the power outage, but in the former (steps S2406 and 2408), the power outage process is not executed even if the power outage is detected. Since the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained during the loop period, it is possible to correctly return to the state at the time of the power failure without executing the power failure process.

The reset in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a system reset generated by a reset circuit and a user reset generated by an access outside the designated area of the watchdog timer or the game control RAM 1312. In the system reset, the program is started after a security check of several hundred milliseconds is executed, but in the user reset, the program is started immediately without executing the security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer during normal game processing, power failure processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. It When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by the RAM clearing process, and the game cannot be restarted unless the clerk in the hall performs the RAM abnormality canceling operation (setting changing operation). On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on process, even if the watchdog timer causes a reset, the hall clerk does not perform the RAM abnormality clearing operation (setting change operation), and the state at the time of the power failure occurs correctly. I can return.

As described above, with respect to the reset generated by the watchdog timer, the case where the setting change operation for canceling the RAM abnormality to restart the pachinko machine 1 is necessary and the case where it is not necessary are usually set. Occurrence of reset by the watchdog timer during the time game is when a software failure occurs, the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the contents different from the game state at the time of the power failure is stored. It is highly possible that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. On the other hand, the occurrence of the reset by the watchdog timer in the power-on process is when a hardware failure occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is unlikely to be destroyed. Therefore, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. This is because there is little need to convert it into a product.

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, the same processing is performed for other types of user resets other than the reset generated by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described processing can be executed by a reset (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer) that occurs with one of the reset factors.

After that, a sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is started (step S2407). The waiting for activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time after the power is turned on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, not after the setting value is determined.

Then, it is determined again whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure state (step S2408). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and thus the process waits in step S2408. It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the power failure notice signal is in the power failure may be made in either step S2406 or S2408, or in either one.

Then, the set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2410), the game area outside RAM confirmation processing at power-on shown in FIG. 216 is executed, and an abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is determined. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2412).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting status management area in the third example is different from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 220(A). 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H is recorded if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H by the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode is ended, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Further, it is determined whether the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from the data (excluding the data saved in the stack) used as the game control area in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 at the previous power shutdown, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the power is normally backed up (the processing at the time of power failure was normally executed) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data of the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when the power failure occurs. It is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality because the power-off processing has not been normally performed.

Then, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality both inside the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2417), and the information of the setting state management area is registered in the B register. (Step S2418) and the process proceeds to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register, and thus the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of "RAM abnormality" and "game state before power interruption" in the subsequent processing. The size of the program can be reduced because it is not necessary to re-execute the process (the process of determining whether the checksum and the backup flag match).

Further, the value of the setting state management area at the time of a power failure or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power restoration is set in the B register, and the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419. By setting, unnecessary processing can be deleted and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area when YES is determined in each of the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424, and step S2436 is performed. Need to execute a JUMP instruction to. However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, as shown in the source code example below, JUMP Orders can be reduced.

Example of source code when RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H; S2421 (when bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR Z,$111;
$000:
LD W,03H ;S2419 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436; Jump instruction to S2436
$111:
CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,$000;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

Example of source code for temporarily setting RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W,03H ;S2419
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR NZ,S2436;

CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,S2436;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

After that, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is provisionally recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). After that, it is determined using the value stored in the register whether or not the setting key 971 has been operated to ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2421). If the setting key 971 has been operated to ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the flow proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode was in effect when a power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality both inside the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting status management area in step S2425, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting status management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as a temporary setting value. By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the values of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2426 and step S2431 to step S2435 are different. Therefore, since the value of the setting state management area is different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process associated with the setting change process, even if the programs for both RAM clearing processes are common, the caller can be distinguished. It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination, but if this is done, 00H is set in the setting state management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to ON. A recording process is required. Therefore, since the processing contents are different between the power-on processing and the RAM clear processing when the settings are changed, a dedicated processing is required for each portion other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, in order to make the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312 common when the setting is changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, 00H is provisionally set at step S2425.

Source code example when 00H is not provisionally set in the setting status management area in step S2425
CP A,10H ;S2426 (PF register information is stored in A register)
JR NZ,$000 ;(bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR NZ,$111;

LD W,01H ;S2429
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;

$000:
XOR W,W ;S2425 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2435 ;Increase

$111:
XOR W,W; increment
LD (VALID_PALY),W; increment
JR S2436 ;Increase

S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
...
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Example of source code for temporarily setting 00H in the setting status management area in step S2425
XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

CP A,10H ;S2426
JR NZ,S2435;

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR Z,S2436;

LD W,01H;
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
...
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2426). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated to be ON, the process advances to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off and then the setting is changed to turn on the power, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, when it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the recovery from the RAM abnormality is always via the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is performed before it is determined whether or not the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it can automatically return to the normal game state.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, after the power is shut off, when it is determined that the work areas of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal when the power is restored, The game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. By doing this, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state by the ON/OFF operation of the power switch.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, it is determined that the work areas of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal when the power is restored, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. By doing this, it is possible to return to the normal game state by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is shut off, and when the power is restored, it is determined that the work areas of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal, and set. When the key 971 is operated, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized to start the game processing. By doing this, it is possible to return to the normal game state by operating the setting key 971 after the power is cut off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, in order to recover the game state before the power outage, the game state information at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer (step S2427). In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 side, each game state (for example, a low probability state or a high probability state, a time saving state or a non-time saving state) corresponding production (background, decorative pattern mode (low probability time) And using a decorative pattern of a different mode between the high probability and the high probability) is prepared.In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command Used in creating.

After that, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2428). If the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process proceeds to step S2436. .. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure occurrence is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (when the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the setting confirmation mode is entered.

Since steps S2425 to S2429 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S2426) and the setting key 971. Any of the operation determination (step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, the value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2432) and the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). The unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may be initialized together.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because when the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the power is cut off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, the power is cut off during transmission of the variation command, so that the symbol command is transmitted, but the following variation pattern command may not be transmitted. If only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, when an untransmitted command in the process related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command is transmitted during the setting process after the power is restored, and the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command. There is a possibility that the game state will be set and malfunction will occur. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately, but in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is recommended to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2437). Specifically, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to enable interrupts. The time of CTC1 for controlling the timer interrupt process in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of CTC1 for normal game remains set to be prohibited.

Then, the hardware random number (for example, the winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438), the update of the hard random number is started, and the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2440), and the process proceeds to the main process on the main control side (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting change process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the third example, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure process may be executed when the power failure is detected by monitoring the power failure with the timer interrupt process. For example, at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON, and the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that there is a power outage. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power interruption may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupt is set to be prohibited (step S2451), and whether a value (00H) indicating a game start is recorded in the setting state management area is checked. A determination is made (step S2452). If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt is set to allow (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. ..

When it is determined in step S2452 that the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt timer is switched to the normal game, and then the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). To execute. Before executing the second main loop processing, first, a timer interrupt cycle time is set in the CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), the CTC0 interrupt (timer interrupt for setting processing) is stopped, and the CTC1 interrupt ( A timer interrupt for normal game processing) is activated (step S2455), and interrupt permission is set (step S2456).

Then, the power failure notice signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates the random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. After that, returning to step S2457, the second main loop process for normal game is repeatedly executed.

When a power failure advance notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the main processing on the main control side shown in FIG. 228,
In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

After that, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power-off processing is executed, and the processing necessary before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area is executed (step S2465). ). The details of the power-off process are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, The data is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the RAM protect valid (write prohibited) and the set value for invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register to prohibit the writing of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and wait until the recovery from the power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is released to allow access to all areas. When an access is detected in the designated prohibited area by designating an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area in the RAM protect register as valid, the main control MPU 1311 is It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing of clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468) is executed in this order. However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated order, and may be another order.

In addition, in the third example, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt processing, and the power failure processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and at the end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of power failure.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal game, and always for setting change processing once. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, in the case of branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value is executed in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing), and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. The processing for calculating the base value can be switched so as not to execute the processing. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power interruption may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the setting process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. According to the configuration, either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing for setting processing or normal game. Therefore, the instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If the configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute the bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing and return to the bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to a winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since NO is determined in step S2473, winning detection is performed. , No fraud is detected. Even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize balls, the variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered preferable that the injustice is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the injustice is not detected.

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input processing 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which the person who intends to commit a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by radiating a radio wave or the like. For example, while an employee in the hall is performing a setting change or a setting confirmation operation, the door is open, and the sensor attached to the door is positioned so as to approach the adjacent pachinko machine. Therefore, while performing the setting change operation or the setting confirmation, it is possible to detect the goto action by the radio wave or the like in the adjacent pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interruption process for the setting change process, the value of the game state management area is normally other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value (00H) indicating the game start in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded, but in order to prevent a fraudulent action such as illegally shifting to the setting change mode during a normal game, a determination is made intentionally.

If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the processing relating to the change of the setting value and the setting display (steps S2474 to S2478) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , A special winning opening, a solenoid signal such as an electric chute, and a response signal (ACK) to the payout control board 951 when the command is received. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). After that, the setting display processing shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer of a FIFO format of a plurality of bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit has a finite capacity, untransmitted commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is full or full. If it is close to, it may be controlled whether or not the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit according to the free state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. If the free space is larger, the command is issued. It may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, each time the command transmission processing to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is stored. If the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds the predetermined upper limit without judging the free space, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission processing executed in the next timer interrupt processing, the remaining commands may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

The upper limit number may be set to be equal to or smaller than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, when the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, about 80 bits of serial communication can be performed in one timer interrupt cycle. When one command is composed of 20 bits, 80/20=4, so it is preferable to set 4 commands as the upper limit. Note that, in effect, one more command may be set as the upper limit. This is because the maximum length of the command is assumed to be 20 bits, but there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Note that the transmission information storage area is stored in the transmission information storage area so that the transmission information storage area does not become full regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the data amount of the command stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process. The capacity of the storage area in which the previous command is stored may be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

Then, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

Unlike other timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 229 does not execute the random number update processing (R_ART_K). However, since the hard random number has already been activated in S2438, Similar to the random number, the random number update process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

In addition, in another example 3, even if the test signal output process is executed by the timer interrupt process for the normal game (for example, output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), it is called within the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. Good.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart of the normal game timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. Is configured so that either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the setting processing or the timer interrupt processing for the normal game. Therefore, the instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If the configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute the bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing and return to the bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, in order to change the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random numbers and the small hit symbol determining random numbers updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

After that, the switch input special processing is executed (step S2494).

After that, the timer updating process is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time when the special symbol display 1185 lights according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process, the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation determined by the normal electric auditors product control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, the payer ACK signal that indicates that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set, the time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and is written in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a self-check for creating a prize ball command for paying out game balls and for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 sends the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a serial communication circuit for two-channel output, and sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 on one channel and a command to the payout control board 951 on another channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, as the transfer rate, the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side may be set lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. This is because the prize balls controlled by the payout control board 951 are accompanied by a game value, and are therefore less likely to be affected by noise or the like, and are transferred at a low speed so as not to become an abnormal prize ball command due to garbled commands or missing commands. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, a command for performance without a game value is transmitted, so it is sufficient that the performance is restored by the next command. Furthermore, a large number of commands are transmitted, the performance is performed well, and the game is played. It is desirable that the command be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 early so that the person does not feel uncomfortable. It should be noted that the response of the effect is bad (for example, even if the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts to change, the decorative symbol does not start to change in the effect display device 1600). This is because the player feels anxiety that it may be out of order.

Subsequently, a frame command reception process is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to inform the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area Remember. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 conforms to the system of commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is directly output from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. The main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, a fraudulent activity detection process is executed (step S2498). In the fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, prize winning abnormality, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when it is not in the jackpot gaming state, it is detected by the count switch that the game balls have entered the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the main control program Creates an award-winning abnormality display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Then, a switch passing command output process of creating a command corresponding to the passage detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting opening switch and setting it in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and the base display output process is executed (step S2501). Unlike other processing, the base display output processing is processing that is executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is common processing that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output process, before and after the execution of the base display output process, the predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area, and the base display device is saved. It is not updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, and the probability variation state is set based on the big hit symbol random value. It is determined whether or not to move. When the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this determination, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be received in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to an advantage for the player. If the probability variation transition condition is established, then the probability variation state is entered, while if the probability variation transition condition is not established, the game state other than the probability variation state is entered. Here, the "probability variation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Then, the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether to open/close the second starting opening door member 2549 according to the result of the lottery in the ordinary lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), and the starting opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous for the player. Transition to the state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or the big hit game. In the state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), as information output to the hall computer, information output signal during probability change, special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals, ordinary symbol display information output signals, time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784. In the output data setting process, the test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer of a FIFO format of a plurality of bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2508), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 4]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having a setting changing function will be described. In another example 4 described below, the process related to the setting change is executed by the main process on the main control side instead of the timer interrupt process. The processes other than those described below are the same as those in the third example described above.

In addition, in the modified example 4, as in the modified example 2, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the main control RAM 1312 which is the original function of the RAM clear switch 954 is selected. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control side executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main processing on the main control side is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (FIG. 227). The main control side main process of the other example 4 executes steps S2481 to S2484 instead of step S2452 of the main control side main process of the other example 3 (FIG. 228). In the main control side main processing, the setting change and the setting confirmation processing are executed not only when the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided as in the other example 4, It is also applicable to the other examples 1 and 2. For example, the main control main processing shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop processing for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). Also in the main loop process, one timer interrupt process (FIG. 196 of another example 1 and FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. The setting process (step 2068 of FIG. 190, step S2341 of FIG. 223) in the timer interrupt process. ) And normal game processing are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, it is not necessary to switch the CTCs in steps S2454 and S2455 described later.

In the main control-side main processing shown in FIG. 231, the same processing as the main control-side main processing (FIG. 228) of the third example is denoted by the same reference numeral.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the other example 4, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure process may be executed when the power failure is detected by monitoring the power failure with the timer interrupt process. For example, at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON, and the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that there is a power outage. In the other example 4, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so that the interrupt is set to be prohibited (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change/setting confirmation processing is completed depending on whether the setting key 971 is returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it is detected whether an edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF. If the operation for ending the setting change/setting confirmation processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change/setting confirmation processing is not completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed a plurality of times by one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process that detects the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is executed once, so the setting was changed once. This is to prevent the setting from being changed by using the same edge information as the last time in the first main loop processing executed later. Note that only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971. After that, the interrupt is set to permit (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. The reason why the interrupts are set to be disabled in the processing from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing from being interrupted by the timer interrupt.

In the first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453), the RAM clear switch 954 and the edge information of the setting key 971 are continuously cleared, and when the normal game is started (execution of the second main loop processing). In the middle), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not referred to.

If it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change/setting confirmation process has been completed, the second main loop process for normal games (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop processing, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), the CTC0 interrupt is stopped, and the CTC1 interrupt is activated (step S2455). CTC1 is set to interrupt enable (step S2456).

Then, the power failure notice signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power outage notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is being supplied normally, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates the random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. After that, returning to step S2457, the second main loop process for normal game is repeatedly executed. In addition, when it is detected that the setting key 971 is turned ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command to that effect, and the peripheral control The board 1510 may give a notification effect to the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during the normal game, it is desirable that the mode does not interfere with the progress of the normal game. For example, only a specific LED is lit and displayed, or characters are displayed in a narrow area of the effect display device 1600. Alternatively, a specific symbol or the like may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is operated ON may be displayed according to the progress of the game.

When a power failure advance notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power-off process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power outage is executed. Specifically, first, interruption is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

After that, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power-off processing is executed, and the processing necessary before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area is executed (step S2465). ). The details of the power-off process are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, The data is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to judge whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. Note that the target area for which the checksum is calculated is the work area in the game control area, which may be changed after the power is turned on and before the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area may be excluded.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the RAM protect valid (write prohibited) and the set value for invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register to prohibit the writing of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and wait until the recovery from the power failure ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a use area of the main control RAM 1312 and resetting the access control unit when it determines that an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is released to allow access to all areas. When an access is detected in the designated prohibited area by designating an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area in the RAM protect register as valid, the main control MPU 1311 is It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing of clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468) is executed in this order. However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated order, and may be another order.

In addition, in the other example 4, the main processing on the main control side monitors the occurrence of the power outage, but the timer interrupt processing may monitor the occurrence of the power outage and execute the power outage processing based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power failure signal at least at the start and at the end, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of power failure. In the other example 4, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any of the timer interrupt processes, and by both timer interrupt processes. You may monitor for power outages. Therefore, the power failure monitoring processing and the power failure processing are made into subroutines, and these subroutines (power failure monitoring processing and power failure processing) are executed in each of the two timer interrupt processing, so that the same program (code ) Does not need to be included in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and always for the setting change processing once. There is an opportunity to execute the timer interrupt processing of. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, in the case of branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value is executed in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing), and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. The process of calculating the base value can be switched so as not to execute the process.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process for setting change processing in the other example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in another example 3 (FIG. 229) is deleted. It is a thing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1 for performing bank switching. Without being configured, the registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in the flag register (for example, the register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt and the RET Execution of an instruction returns from the stack area. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to its original state. When the configuration in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is possible, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt permission. The flag for controlling the availability of interrupts is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, ON edges are created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 of step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even if the winning is detected, the payout of the prize ball, the special symbol, the normal The process related to the progress of the game such as the variable display of the symbols is not executed. In addition, although winning detection regarding the progress of the game is performed, detection regarding fraud such as magnets and impact (vibration) is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees in the hall. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibration) is not performed, and fraud caused by magnetism or vibration is prevented. This is because it is considered preferable not to detect.

Even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input processing 1 to monitor a particular type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraud in which the person who intends to commit a fraudulent act (master Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by radiating a radio wave or the like.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interruption process for the setting change process, it is not necessary to determine the value of the game state management area. This is to deal with fraudulent acts that illegally shift to the setting change process. Further, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area before the switch input processing 1 (step S2472), and the value indicating the game start is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the processing for changing and displaying the setting value (steps S2474 to S2476) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. When a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that abnormal timer interrupt processing is being executed may be generated. This is because when the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interruption process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232 is not executed and some abnormality has occurred. The mode of this abnormality notification may be a notification using a liquid crystal, a lamp, or a sound such as a notification of a magnet, radio waves, vibration, etc., or a security signal may be output from the external terminal board 784. One or more of these notification modes may be adopted to notify by one or in combination.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , A special winning opening, a solenoid signal such as an electric chute, and a response signal (ACK) to the payout control board 951 when the command is received. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED off time is secured, and the ghost phenomenon in which the display before and after the display switching of the LED appears to be mixed To prevent the flickering of the LED.

Then, the security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). Note that the processing of outputting the security signal may be executed in the main loop for the setting change processing of the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231 as in the case of the setting change/setting confirmation processing.

Further, peripheral board command transmission processing for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer of a FIFO format of a plurality of bytes, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral board command transmission process may be executed after the end of the process of S2480 or S2481 of the main process, instead of the timer interrupt process.

Then, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting 1 word. After that, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

Unlike the other timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 does not execute the random number update processing (R_ART_K). This is because it is not necessary to update the random number generated by software when the RAM is abnormal, but the random number update process may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine equipped with light guide plate]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate will be described. In recent years, pachinko machines are provided with a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and perform the effect of the special symbol variable display game together with the effect display device 1600. In this type of pachinko machine, a complicated effect can be achieved by using an effect display device and a light guide plate to overlap images, for example. In addition, since the light guide plate is provided on the front surface of the effect display device, a light effect having a stereoscopic effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the effect display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate that allows stereoscopic viewing using the parallax of the left and right eyes, and an effect with a greater stereoscopic effect is displayed.

However, the production using the light guide plate has become rustic, and it is necessary to improve the enjoyment by new light production. Further, there is a light guide plate capable of displaying a plurality of patterns with one sheet, and it is desired to display more diverse patterns and to have a highly entertaining effect.

[13-1. Construction]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory 2500 and the front production unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 5, which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second design is luminescently displayed in the front effect unit.

The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, and a first design substrate 2611 and a second design substrate that are attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. 2612 and. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of irradiating light to the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611, and the second pattern substrate 2612 includes light on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged vertically to the light guide plate 2610 so that the side surface of the light guide plate 2610 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the side faces of the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 can be seen, and the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 can be seen from the player side. It is getting hot and the appearance in the game area 5a is improved.

Although the present embodiment describes the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610, another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by an innumerable first concave and convex portion that reflects light from the upward direction to the front side, and light from the lateral direction to the front side. And a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by an innumerable second reflective portion having an uneven shape. In other words, when the front light production unit 2600 causes the light guide plate LEDs of the first pattern substrate 2611 to emit light 2613, the first pattern 2621 can be emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and the light guide plate LEDs 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 are displayed. When the light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and have a strong directivity for emitting light in a narrow range (LED with lens). Is desirable. By using the full-color LED, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be transferred onto the light guide plate 2610 in any single color or plural colors (for example, 7 rainbow colors).

On the light guide plate 2610, irregularities forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for reflecting the first pattern 2621 and irregularities constituting a plurality of second reflecting portions for reflecting the second pattern 2622 are minutely formed. In a state where the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 are not emitting light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and is arranged on the rear side. The various ornaments of the unit 3000 and the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well. In the light guide plate 2610, even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, a transparent region in which the effect display device 1600 provided on the back side is seen to be transparent and the light irradiated to the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected but polished. The glass-shaped matted region, the lame region in which a reflection pattern that reflects transmitted light is formed regardless of the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610, and the light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving area in which a reflection pattern is formed so that whether light is emitted changes depending on the light traveling direction in the light guide plate 2610 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first symbol 2621 becomes a part of the effect of the special symbol variable display game together with the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as described later. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving areas 2621a and 2621c, glitter areas 2621b and 2621d, and a mat area 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transparent area 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, a part of the LED 2613 for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the lighting area is switched so that the moving area 2621a emits light or the moving area 2621c emits light. Therefore, by blinking the LED 2613 for the light guide plate, the size of the first pattern 2621 can be changed.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the glitter area are arranged repeatedly twice, but they may be repeated any number of times. By forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving region and the glitter region a plurality of times, the first pattern 2621 can represent a complicated movement. Further, in the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the glitter area are alternately repeated, but the characteristics (that is, the moving area emits light without sandwiching the glitter area between the moving areas). The moving areas having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light such that the light emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 changes, it is possible to change the color of each moving region 2621a to emit light. Then, the light emission color of the LED 2613 for the light guide plate is sequentially changed (for example, red→orange→yellow→green→blue→indigo→purple→red), so that the pattern moves as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend obliquely downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed such that the obliquely extending lines of light correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one light guide plate LED 2614 is caused to emit light, a streak of light that extends obliquely downward in the light guide plate 2610 is emitted from the upper side of the light guide plate 2610 as a starting point.

The second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the brightness of the streak of light becomes darker as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), as the light guide plate 2610 is directed downward, the streaks of light appear to extend backward, and light is radiated in three dimensions. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the light emission effect by the light guide plate 2610.

Further, it is preferable to arrange the reflecting portion so that stereoscopic viewing due to parallax between the left and right eyes is possible. For example, paying attention to one light streak constituting the second pattern 2622, the second reflecting portion that emits light for forming the streak of light on the retina of the player is different between the left and right eyes of the light guide plate 2610. By arranging in the position, the parallax of the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern having a depth can be shown.

As shown in FIG. 234, in the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 that is projected by irradiation of light from one direction is reflected by the mat area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light and the traveling direction of the light. Instead, it is composed of lame areas 2621b and 2621d where reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light are formed and moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a where reflection patterns for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction are formed. , A moving picture area that appears to move (dynamic picture) and a still picture area that appears to be stationary (static picture) can be configured.

In addition, one light guide plate 2610 can project the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and the second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 depending on the difference in the illumination direction. For this reason, light of a single color (for example, red of a single wavelength or white in which lights of a plurality of wavelengths are mixed) is emitted from the lateral direction, and light of multiple colors is emitted from the upper direction (for example, adjacent LED groups). (2614 emits light at different wavelengths), a single light guide plate 2610 can produce an effect by a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single-color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, by moving light from the lateral direction, a stationary pattern in the mat area 2621e and the lame areas 2621b and 2621d of the first pattern 2621 and a moving pattern that appears to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a. Is reflected. In other words, the light guide plate production by both the still picture and the moving picture is performed by the first picture 2621 by irradiation of light from the lateral direction. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture by the first picture 2621 are displayed at the same time.

Unlike the above, the first design 2621 may be configured by the matte region and the glitter region, and the first design 2621 may not include the moving design. In this case, the light guide plate production is performed by the still picture by the first picture 2621 by the light irradiation from the lateral direction and the second picture 2622 by the light irradiation from the upper direction. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be displayed at different timings. That is, the moving picture may be shown after the still picture is shown, or the still picture may be shown after showing the moving picture. In this way, various effects can be performed by displaying the still picture and the moving picture at different timings. Particularly, by displaying a specific character with a still picture after displaying the rainbow picture as a moving picture, it is possible to perform an effect such that the character comes down. On the other hand, by displaying the background with the still picture and then displaying the character with the moving picture, it is possible to perform an effect that the character moves at a specific place.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. When the light is emitted from the lateral direction and the upward direction, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are mixedly provided in the area where the two patterns overlap each other on the light guide plate 2610, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. .. However, when the first pattern 2621 is a two-dimensional pattern and the second pattern 2622 is a three-dimensional pattern, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where two patterns are mixed. The reflection pattern of the first design 2621 is not provided, and the transmissive area 2621f where the back side (effect display device 1600) can be seen through is provided. When the design of the reflection pattern of the second design 2622 is projected, the second design 2622 is played. It is possible for a person to easily see a stereoscopic image.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in different areas without overlapping. When the first pattern 2621 is a two-dimensional pattern and the second pattern 2622 is a three-dimensional pattern, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where two patterns are mixed. When the area where the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided are projected and the pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern can be easily three-dimensionalized for the player. Can be seen.

[13-2. Light guide plate configuration]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflecting section will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (particularly, the arrangement of the reflecting portion).

As described above, in the light guide plate 2610, the rear surface side (effect display device 1600) appears to be transparent, the transmissive area 2621f, the matted area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, and the light traveling direction, Glitter areas 2621b and 2621d having reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light and moving areas 2621a, 2621c, 2622a having reflection patterns for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction are provided.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing a structure of the reflection section.

The reflection portion is formed by a recess provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 by the reflection of light at the boundary surface (reflection surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light, and the player visually recognizes the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, light incident from the light guide plate LEDs 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain spread (for example, ±30 degrees). The light streaks forming the second pattern 2622 are visible when the light traveling in the direction of the light streaks is reflected by the reflecting section 2650 described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving area 2622a shown in FIG. 237(A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streaks of light. The size of the reflecting portion 2650 is preferably several hundreds of micrometers to several millimeters, which is much smaller than the streak of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown in a large size in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 includes a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflecting surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and the perpendicular of the reflecting surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are about 45 degrees. Therefore, the light that travels inside the light guide plate 2610 and strikes the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650 is reflected to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 as illustrated in FIG. 237B.

In addition, light traveling in a direction perpendicular to the streak of light appearing in the moving region 2622a, that is, light traveling in parallel with the reflecting surface 2651 along the reflecting surface 2651 does not hit the reflecting surface 2651, but is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 and reflected by the light guide plate 2610. Does not emerge from the surface. Similarly, the amount of light traveling in a direction having an angle (particularly, an acute angle) with the light streaks appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651, and the reflecting portion 2650 reflects only a small amount of light. Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. For this reason, light with a large reaching wavelength is visible to the player's eyes, and a pattern can be shown in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, the emitting direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted to the left or right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 by slightly inclining the reflecting surface 2651. Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment emits light having a strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflector 2650 also reaches the player as a beam of light having a directivity. Therefore, parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with a depth can be shown. That is, since the reflection portion 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflection portion 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are at different positions, there is a difference between the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye. There is no virtual intersection on the light guide plate 2610. That is, if the virtual intersection of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears to be in a deep position, and the light reaching the right eye and the left eye are reached. If the virtual intersection with the light to be emitted is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern can be seen in the front position.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflection surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 similarly to the reflection surface 2651, or light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 may be provided. May be formed on the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 at an angle that does not reflect (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by the light coming from other than the specific direction without strongly reflecting the light incident from one direction.

The reflection portions 2660 of the glitter areas 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are formed by spherical concave portions provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and travel in the light guide plate 2610, and from a plurality of directions (that is, The light arriving at the reflection part 2660 is reflected by a plurality of paths and is emitted to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflection section 2660 in the glitter area reflects light from the plurality of LEDs 2614 for the light guide plate, when each of the LEDs 2614 for the light guide board blinks at different timings, the glitter area 2621b becomes glitter. When the LED 2614 for the light guide plate emits light of different colors, the glitter area 2621b is mixed with a plurality of colors and shines. Further, when the LED 2614 for the light guide plate blinks in a different color, the glitter area 2621b is mixed with a plurality of colors and glitters.

It should be noted that the mat area 2621e is not provided with a reflection portion and is processed into irregular irregularities in a frosted glass shape and does not reflect the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 to the front side.

Up to this point, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described. Next, an embodiment of the light guide plate representing different patterns will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED and the reflection section in the light guide plate that constitutes the patterns shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the back surface thereof, reflects the light incident from any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670 that operate. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 are for introducing light so that the light travels in the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. Although the plurality of specific light incident portions 2630 are illustrated as the first specific light incident portion 2630a, the second specific light incident portion 2630b, the third specific light incident portion 2630c, and the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, The specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion are provided. This is to repeatedly provide seven specific light incident portions 2630 (LED group 2614) for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors, and the number of the specific light incident portions may be determined depending on the type of emission color. The first specific light input portion 2630a to the seventh specific light input portion (not shown) are sequentially repeated on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in the drawing) from left to right (seventh specific light input portion). After that, they are arranged in the order of returning to the beginning and becoming the first specific light incident portion 2630a).

The reflecting portion 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light incident portion 2630 travels inside the light guide plate 2610) and guides the light. It has a boundary surface that is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflection portion 2670 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflecting portion 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Further, the reflecting portion 2670 reflects the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light input portion 2630 is reflected by the reflection portion 2670 toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 (in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). However, the reflective portion 2670 is seen to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 From the player seated in front of, it appears that the reflecting portion 2670 does not emit light.

In the present embodiment, the reflecting portion 2670 has a shape in which it is recessed in a triangle and extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light entering portion 2630. However, the shape is not limited to the above, and any shape may be used as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630.

The plurality of reflecting sections 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entering sections 2630, and the plurality of first reflecting sections 2670a and the second specific light entering section 2630b corresponding to the first specific light entering section 2630a. Corresponding to the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, the third specific light entering portion 2630c corresponding to the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d corresponding to the plurality of fourth reflecting portions. The unit 2670d and the like are included.

Further, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 capable of emitting and displaying in different modes by causing a specific reflection portion 2670 of the plurality of reflection portions 2670 to reflect light forward. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a including a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b including a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c including a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflecting portions. A pattern 2623d including the portion 2670d is included.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the patterns are arranged so as to sequentially and circulate from the center to the outside.

The second pattern substrate 2612 is in the form of a strip plate extending to the left and right, and the LEDs 2614 are mounted at positions corresponding to the specific light incident portions 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 includes a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light entering section 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light entering section 2630b, and a third specific light entering section 2630c. The third LED group 2614c corresponding to, the fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light entering section 2630d, and the fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light entering section (not shown). (Not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light entering section (not shown), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light entering section (not shown). (Not shown). Note that in FIG. 239, the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d are illustrated, and the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group are omitted. In each LED group, a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the drawing) on the second pattern substrate 2612 are divided in the left and right direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and the LEDs are sequentially arranged from left to right. Repeatedly (in the order of returning to the beginning after the seventh LED group and becoming the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614.

Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident from the first specific light entering portion 2630a into the light guide plate 2610, and is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610, Since the other second reflection portion 2670b, the third reflection portion 2670c, the fourth reflection portion 2670d, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the first reflection portion 2670a appears to be shining to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that it is possible to cause the pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the inside of the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light entrance part 2630b, and reflected on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 at the second reflection part 2670b. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to be shining to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b can emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident from the third specific light entering portion 2630c into the light guide plate 2610, and reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to be visible to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that the pattern composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the inside of the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d, and is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, etc. reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to be shining to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can be made to emit light.

Similarly, in the fifth to seventh LED groups 2614, when each LED group is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630, and the corresponding reflection portion 2670 causes the light guide plate 2610 to move. It reflects to the front and reflects to other than the front at the other reflectors 2670, and only the corresponding reflector 2670 appears to be shining to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, and is configured from the corresponding reflector 2670. It is possible to make the picture that is displayed emit light.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plurality of patterns 2623 can be made to emit light by switching the LED groups to make them emit light, and the plurality of patterns can be made to emit light in sequence to create a moving animation. Such a luminous effect can be performed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in the light guide plate 2610 on which similar patterns are superimposed, a moving effect of causing the patterns to emit light like an animation in which there is a movement that spreads from the center to the outside or contracts from the center to the outside. You can

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in the moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, the moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by switching the position of the LED group that emits light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and from the first LED group 2614a corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that, in FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the reference numeral.

As shown in FIG. 240(A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light is incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f and the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 is irradiated. The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light is incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e and the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is changed to the fifth reflection portion. 2670e and the 6th reflection part 2670f reflect, the pattern in which the 5th reflection part 2670e and the 6th reflection part 2670f were arrange|positioned light-emit, and a player can recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light is incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d and the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light is incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c and the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflection portion. 2670c and the 4th reflection part 2670d reflect, the pattern in which the 3rd reflection part 2670cd and the 4th reflection part 2670d were arrange|positioned light-emit, and a player can recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light is incident from the second specific light entering section 2630b and the third specific light entering section 2630c, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern on which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the position without changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size of the pattern and to make a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so as to move from the center to the outside. At this time, the LED groups may emit light of a single color or may emit light of different colors in each group (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241, the moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by changing the number of LED groups that emit light with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and from the first LED group 2614a corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light incident part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the second specific light entering section 2630b to the seventh specific light entering section 2630g is reflected by the second reflecting section 2670b. -The 7th reflection part 2670g reflects, the pattern in which the 2nd reflection part 2670b-the 7th reflection part 2670g is arrange|positioned light-emits, and a player can recognize.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light entering section 2630c to the seventh specific light entering section 2630g is reflected by the third reflecting section 2670c to the seventh reflecting section 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light incident section 2630d to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is subjected to the fourth reflection. The portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light entering section 2630e to the seventh specific light entering section 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflecting section 2670e to the seventh reflecting section 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241C, the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is subjected to sixth reflection. The portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size of the pattern (light emission range) and move the pattern so that the pattern emits light. At this time, the LED groups may emit light of a single color or may emit light of different colors in each group (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, the moving effect in which the color of the design changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and from the first LED group 2614a corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. Note that, in FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 242(A), the first LED group 2614a is turned on in red, the red light incident from the first specific light entering section 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting section 2670a, and the first reflecting section 2670a is arranged. The displayed pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entering part 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting part 2670b to emit light in orange. Further, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light entering section 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting section 2670c to emit a yellow pattern. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection portion 2670d to emit a green pattern. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entrance section 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection section 2670e, so that the design emits blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f is turned on in indigo, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light entrance section 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflection section 2670f and the design is emitted in indigo. In addition, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the purple light incident from the seventh specific light entering portion 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflecting portion 2670g to emit a purple design.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. When time further passes, as shown in FIG. 242(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in indigo color, purple color, red color, orange color, yellow color, green color, and blue color, respectively. The color changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eyes pay attention to the pattern that emits light of the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so that it moves inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED groups 2614.

In the present embodiment, the plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to the reflecting portion 2670 forming one picture, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one picture. Specifically, it is controlled so that the light emitting pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light entering portion 2630) is repeated using seven LED groups as a repeating unit. In addition, the LED emits light with directivity and is configured to illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs that emit light in the same pattern (that is, the light source of the light that constitutes one pattern) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second pattern substrate 2612 has In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

Therefore, the pattern is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 where the light is incident. For example, when the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full angle at half maximum θ=±30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern The pattern is provided so as to be separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times the interval (emission LED) α.

As a generalization, letting the length α of the repeating unit of the LED group, the illumination angle of the LED be θ, and the distance separating the pattern from the end of the light guide plate 2610 be L, the following relationships are established.
L=tan θ×α/2

In this way, when the moving pattern that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be arranged at a position separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. That is, the moving picture area in which the moving picture appears is smaller than the still picture area in which the still picture appears. When the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the effect display device 1600, the moving effect by the light guide plate 2610 can be performed in an area smaller than the display area of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the production of the variable display game, it is possible to make the player recognize the progress of the variable display game without hindering the visual recognition of the special symbol normally displayed near the end of the display area of the effect display device 1600. . Further, by performing the moving effect in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 that the player gazes at, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the player's excitement due to the moving effect.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 is attached has been described, but in this case, the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 (from the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1) In the visible window portion), a region within the predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 in which the moving effect is impossible is formed, and the region in which the moving effect is impossible can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the area in which the moving effect can be performed is narrowed and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center role object 2500, the area where the moving effect cannot be performed is hidden by the center role object 2500, and the area where the moving effect cannot be performed is the display area of the effect display device 1600. By arranging it on the outer side, the moving effect is possible in all (or most of) the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located outside the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500.

Since the back unit 3000 includes various ornaments (decoration unit 3050, movable effect units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 should be positioned behind these ornaments. By disposing the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the ornament. As a result, the substrate serving as the light source can be arranged at a position where the player cannot see, and the decorativeness can be secured.

Further, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs for causing the decorative body to emit light may be mounted on one substrate.

As described above, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 can be an area where the moving effect can be performed, and the player does not notice the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. You can

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, the moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED corresponding to each specific light incident portion. Group 2614g is located. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light incident part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the reference numeral.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light entrance part 2630a is reflected by the first reflection part 2670a, and the pattern in which the first reflection part 2670a is arranged is red. The player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entrance part 2630b is reflected by the second reflection part 2670b to emit light in orange color. Further, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident section 2630c is reflected by the third reflection section 2670c, so that the pattern emits yellow. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection portion 2670d, so that the pattern emits green light. In addition, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entrance part 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection part 2670e, so that the design emits blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f is turned on in indigo, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light entrance part 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflection part 2670f so that the design emits indigo. In addition, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the purple light incident from the seventh specific light entering portion 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflecting portion 2670g to emit a purple design.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. When the time further passes, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eyes pay attention to the pattern that emits light of the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so that the lines of light of the seven colors flow.

Although detailed description is omitted, even in the light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 235 having a pattern in which two light streaks intersect, by changing the emission color of each LED group 2614 in the same manner as described in FIG. 244, The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and it is possible to create a moving effect in which the light is emitted so that the seven streaks of light flow. Further, by using the left and right parallaxes, the streak of light can be seen deeper or closer to the front side as the distance from the light source increases, so that a stereoscopic pattern can be displayed.

Next, the stereoscopic pattern and the planar pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a pattern viewed in a plan view is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 245(B), since the reflecting surface of the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is a curved surface, light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. , Reaches the right eye 10R and the left eye 10L of the player. In addition, the reflecting section 2660 travels in the light guide plate 2610, reflects the light reaching the reflecting section 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, in a plurality of paths), and emits the light to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245(A), a parallax between the left and right eyes does not occur in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portion 2660, so that the player places the pattern 2621 in the planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. Will be seen as.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern viewed in a plan view is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 246(B), the reflection portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the left eye 10L of the player, and the reflection portion 2650R is The light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected toward the right eye 10R of the player. However, since the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. 246(A), the left and right sides of the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R. It can be said that the parallax of the eye is small, and the left-eye pattern formed by the reflecting portion 2650L and the right-eye pattern formed by the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a stereoscopically visible pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 247(B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle for reflecting the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650R is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the right eye 10R of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R, and the player can see the left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern at the rear position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating a manner in which a stereoscopically visible pattern is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 248(B), the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650R is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the right eye 10R of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflective portions 2650L and 2650R, and the player can see the left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

As described above, according to the front production unit 2600, a plurality of different patterns can be made to emit light by one light guide plate 2610. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to perform animation display and the like. In addition, the front-back direction unit 2600 can be made as thin as possible in the front-rear direction. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be located as close as possible to the player side, and it is easy to secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2610. it can. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. With this, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the production by the luminous display of the pattern 2623, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, and By performing the movable effect by the upper front movable effect unit 3300 or the like, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player and entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, by disposing the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the ornament, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of semi-transparent patterns due to the light emission of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670 emerge to show a luminous decoration that moves like an animation. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is familiar with the light emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, and to amaze and entertain the player, and to do something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since only the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emitting display of the picture by the light guide plate 2610 well, the light emitting display of the picture 2623 is displayed from other players who are far from the front. Is difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the performance using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention. The player can play the game without hesitation, entertaining the game, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614 so as to emit light. Also, the pattern displayed in light emission does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, which makes it difficult to see the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good state.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 (the first pattern substrate) can be obtained by aligning the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. 2611, the second pattern substrate 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light guide plate 2610 is present when the pattern is light-emitted and displayed. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who does not think it is surprising, and it is possible to entertain the luminous display of a plurality of patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying effect images is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the effects can be shown to the player, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and also to entertain the player by the effects of the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are light-emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and give the pattern 2623 that is light-emitted and displayed a sense of depth and stereoscopic effect. It is possible to show the player an effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting interest, which can entertain the player and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be single color LEDs or full color LEDs. Moreover, the number of the specific light entering portions, the reflecting portions, and the LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of the patterns.

[13-3. Example of production]
Next, an example of effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variable display game will be described. 249 to 254 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the effect display device 1600 displays a moving effect of causing the light guide plate 2610 to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610 and moving the image toward the predetermined image. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variable display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or notice effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249(A), nothing is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the entire screen is blacked out (blacked out). This blackout causes the player to gaze at the effect display device 1600.

Then, as shown in FIG. 249(B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. This causes the player to gaze at the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249(C), a moving effect is displayed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249(D), in the movement effect, the image 1611 may be moved from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. The image 1611 displayed by moving to the effect display device 1600 may be the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 displayed by moving to the effect display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. 250. Further, the image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed have the same character image (the pose and face may be the same or different) or the same character (for example, the name of the character) and have different fonts and colors. It may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back of the first pattern 2621 shown on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 249(D). Also, the effect display device 1600 may display the image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 249(E), in the moving effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the ratio of the moving image 1611 occupying the display area of the effect display device 1600 with the passage of time. It may be changed according to.

The mode of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 displayed on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. In this case, it is advisable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use other light guide plates to project a pattern having a different size. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, a direction different from the irradiation direction (lateral direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 having an initial size (for example, , The first pattern 2621 having a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiation with light from an oblique direction.

After performing the moving effect for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 249(F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is erased from the light guide plate 2610. Further, the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is blackened (blacked out). By this blackout, the player is focused on the effect display device 1600, and a space for improving the expectation for the next effect is created.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(G), an image 1612 (for example, a character having a high degree of reliability of winning) different from the first pattern 2621 and the image that is moved and displayed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, when the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation of hitting is increased, but when the size of the character image 1612 is decreased, the expectation of the player's hitting is decreased. The color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Further, the character image 1612 may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621. Further, together with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to display a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

The character image may be displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. Therefore, the irradiation direction (horizontal direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 is different from the direction (for example, an oblique direction). A character image may be displayed by irradiating light from the direction). In addition, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided, and the character image may be displayed on another light guide plate. When a character image having a different size or expression is projected by a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, it is possible to display effects with a sense of depth, unlike the flat effect display device 1600.

In the above-described movement effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the effect display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is displayed, but the image on the effect display device 1600 moves. After starting, the first pattern 2621 may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253(A)), as shown in FIG. 253(B), before the first pattern 2621 is projected, the first pattern 2621 is The movement effect of displaying the image moving toward the displayed position on the effect display device 1600 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 253(C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. After that, as shown in FIG. 253(D), the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time when the first pattern 2621 is displayed (time for light guide plate effect) and the effect time when the image 1611 is moved (time when the moving image is displayed on the effect display device 1600) are the first pattern 2621. The light guide plate effect in which is displayed may start before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Further, the time for the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is displayed may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, the effect of the variable display game may be performed by switching between a moving picture in which the picture where the images are gathered appear to move and a still picture in which the picture does not appear to move.

In the light guide plate production shown in FIG. 254, when the moving picture appears, the expectation for the big hit is high, and when only the still picture appears, the expectation for the big hit is low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254(A), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 254(B), the displayed still picture is displayed. A moving effect of displaying an image 1611 moving toward 2621 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, the still picture 2621 is switched to the moving picture as shown in FIG. 254(C). Further, as shown in FIG. 254(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(E), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254(F), the still picture 2621 is displayed. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. In addition, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254(G), a moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the design 1613 may be performed. Good. After that, as shown in FIG. 254(H), the variable display game ends with a loss without switching the still picture 2621 to the moving picture.

In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a specific prefetch effect) is selected in the special symbol variable display game, it is displayed in the specific display effect. The specific image 1611 performs an effect integrally with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the moving effect may not be applied to the first pattern.

Thus, in the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, since the still picture and the moving picture are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610, the player has a sense of expectation for the development of the variable display game. , It is possible to suppress a decline in the entertainment interest.

Next, an example of the effect in which the effect by the moving body is added to the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variable display game will be described.

255 and 256 are diagrams showing an example of an effect using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing in front of the effect display device 1600 form one pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255(A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears or disappears from the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a short period according to the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly, the player's expectation for a big hit is raised. Then, as shown in FIG. 255(B), the entire movable body 3601 appears on the front surface of the display screen of the effect display device 1600.

Then, as shown in FIG. 255(C), a moving effect in which a picture 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610 and an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. To do. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 255(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the design 2621. ..

The movable body 3601 may be caused to emit light at the timing when the movement effect starts or during the movement effect. The light emitting mode (light emitting color or light emitting timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emitting mode of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 249 does not appear or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 255 appears, the player's expectation for the development of the variable display game can be expected. The pachinko machine can be enhanced and has a high interest.

In the above-mentioned example, the movable body 3601 appears instead of the pattern where the images are collected, but one character may be composed of the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, when the movable body 3601 represents the body and the light guide plate 2610 represents the face, the facial expression can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. In this way, in addition to the effect by the effect display device 1600, various effects by the light guide plate 2610 can be realized.

In the effect shown in FIG. 256, the light guide plate 2610 is used as an effect that suggests the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256(A), as the variable display game progresses, the pattern 2621 is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and as shown in FIG. 256(B), the light guide plate 2610 is used. A moving effect of displaying an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern on the effect display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256(C), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 is performed. May be. After that, as shown in FIG. 256(D), the movable body 3601 appears from the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and stops at a position overlapping the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256(E), the design 1613 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256(F), toward the displayed design 1613. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. In addition, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256(G), a moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the design 1613 may be performed. Good. Then, as shown in FIG. 256(H), the movable display does not appear and the variable display game ends with a loss.

As described above, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, the effect suggesting that the movable body comes out can be performed using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to the conventional communication function by an 8-bit parallel bus.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted by one signal line or an 8-bit bus. In some cases, data output from the main control MPU 1311 is read or an illegal signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 to perform an illegal act. For this reason, it is required that the input/output signal of the main control MPU 1311 is difficult to be detected from the outside, and if the serial communication function of continuously transmitting data at a predetermined timing with one signal line is used, the serial communication function is concerned. It is difficult to read data or input data at the timing of the line.

Further, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring a signal when an inspection agency inspects a pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, a signal (for example, 5V on/off) input to a driver (transistor) for driving a solenoid is monitored in order to monitor an output signal of a solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory. Signal) was branched and used as a signal for inspection. When the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 described above is output as the inspection signal, the inspection engine needs a device for analyzing the serial signal, and thus it is difficult to use the serial signal as the inspection signal. Is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits a signal by serial communication in the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise the output of the inspection signal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, the inspection signal for changing the level at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal. Shall be generated. If the output transistor open collector (or open drain) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used, the voltage level is changed by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of steps of the program for detecting the input by serial communication to reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit and a part of the signal is directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise whether to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power is turned on may be directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 instead of being input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311 can be detected even before the interrupt processing is executed, and thus the signal level can be detected other than the timer interrupt processing immediately after the power is turned on.

Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the expansion I/O using chip select, and the input is made to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311. It is possible to capture the signal level for each clock in bit units and detect the signal level in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial/parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 261 is a main control MPU 1311 and the peripheral. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning on the main control board 1310 of components. Note that, in FIGS. 257, 258, and 261, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment includes an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, etc.), and main control board 1310. Synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, control signals of other devices (solenoid, etc.) are output, and are output from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensor and magnetic detection sensor. It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission/reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission/reception port is selected by the chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmission/reception port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), chip select output terminals (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). The transmission port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission/reception port. The number of parallel/serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission/reception port is not limited to that shown in the figure.

Note that more serial/parallel conversion circuits may be connected by making a connection like the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission/reception port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) is at 0 level, and after CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, a predetermined clock The data is output from the serial port at the timing. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 inputs signals such as a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, big winning opening count switch, ordinary winning opening, specific area switch, ordinary pattern gate switch, game board discharging switch) and a photo sensor. The game balls flowing down the game area 5a are mainly detected. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 has a 16-bit input port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit input port may be connected in parallel to have a 16-bit configuration.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is 0 level. The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, the serial port outputs serial data according to the level of the game ball detection switch at a predetermined clock timing. In this way, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 captures the output signal of the game ball detection switch by using the SERTX signal as a trigger, so that the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Further, both the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission/reception port output a signal for turning on the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). The data transmission destination is selected by the chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output the signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. To do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the next timing when the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 is connected to the LED segment side, and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the LED common side. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing, thereby dynamically lighting the LED. Each of the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 has a 16-bit output port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit output port may be connected in parallel to have a 16-bit configuration.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). The segment signal is output at a timing to turn on the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED in which the anode side of the LED is the common terminal is used for the base display 1317, and when the LED is turned on, a drive current is applied from the anode side common terminal to the cathode side segment terminal. Flowing. However, since the integrated circuit having the same configuration is used for the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each conversion circuit 1342, 1343 (the output transistor of the driver circuit Polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided at the subsequent stage of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of absorbing the drive current for lighting the LED.

In other words, the serial side-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 and the driver circuit 1344, which function as signal direction regulating means for regulating the signal direction, are connected to the common side of the LEDs (the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317). That is, a two-step signal direction restricting means is provided on the common side of the LED. On the other hand, a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 is provided on the segment side of the LED, and a one-step signal direction regulating means is provided.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may be an integrated circuit having only a parallel/serial conversion function or an integrated circuit having only a serial/parallel conversion function, respectively. Further, the parallel/serial conversion function and the serial/parallel conversion function may be switched and used by an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal.

Further, two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346, like the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, fetch the serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and the CS is 1 It is output from the parallel port at the timing of rising. The output of the parallel port is provided with a driver transistor, and switches the voltage applied to the driver transistor to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the output port (PA0 to PA7) of the channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and a signal output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, a security signal or a ball payout signal). Is output. Further, various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals of various solenoids are output. A test terminal 1348 is connected to the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the test terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric auditors opening signal, Ordinary electric accessory release signal) is output. Nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same signal branched including the chip select is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output to the parallel side. Therefore, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, the solenoid drive signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the inspection port output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. The signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348. It should be noted that +12V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid at 12V, and +5V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V inspection signal. Thus, by using the two serial-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, it is possible to generate synchronized signals having different voltage levels.

Among the outputs from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is made thick, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which a relatively small current flows The pattern may be thin. It is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern without making the pattern thick, and to form a pattern on both the front and back sides to increase the substantial cross-sectional area or to form an inner layer pattern to reduce the substantial cross-sectional area. May increase.

Further, since the two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load of one conversion circuit increases, the waveform of the output signal of the other conversion circuit is not disturbed and the output signal is affected. Does not occur. That is, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. ..

A reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311, from the reset circuit 1335. The reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336. When the main control MPU 1311 receives the reset signal, the operation is reset and the program is executed from the head address.

The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 via the two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336. When the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 receive the reset signal, the operation is reset, and the display contents of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are returned to the initial state (for example, the display is erased).

The buffer circuit 1336 has at least four inverter buffers, two inverter buffers are arranged between the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311, and the reset circuit 1335 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. Two inverter buffers are arranged between and. Inverter buffers having the same characteristics are arranged on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311, and on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. This is to make the waveform and timing of the reset signal to be the same as possible.

The inverter buffer of the buffer circuit 1336 functions as a signal direction restricting unit that allows a signal to pass in only one direction. By restricting the signal direction on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, it is possible to suppress the noise that enters from the outside from reaching the main control MPU 1311. However, when the reset circuit 1335 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are directly connected, the reset signal is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at a timing different from the reset signal input from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311. Will be entered. That is, the reset signal is transmitted faster to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 corresponding to the two stages of inverter buffers provided on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311, and the main control MPU 1311 controls the signal. The reset command reaches the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 first.

For this reason, in this embodiment, two stages of inverter buffers are mainly provided in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the control MPU 1311 and the path to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and the main control MPU 1311 and serial A reset signal is transmitted to the parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at the same timing, and each circuit is reset at the same timing. In this way, the inverter buffers arranged in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 are infinitely matched with the transmission timing of the reset signal input to the paths to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. At first glance, the circuits in the two paths look similar, but perform different functions.

Note that, in general, it is not necessary to arrange a special circuit in the path for transmitting the reset signal output from the reset circuit, but from the viewpoint of aligning the timing of the reset signal as in the present case, a buffer (timing adjusting means ) Is required.

Further, in order to match the signal timing (delay the signal), not only the above-mentioned inverter buffer but also another type of circuit for matching the timing may be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 259 and 260, an IC that accommodates 6 inverter buffers is adopted. However, in the packaged IC, 6 inverter buffers are integrated. Formed on the semiconductor chip. In a semiconductor chip, a plurality of sets of circuits are formed on a silicon wafer cut out from single crystal silicon (ingot) through some processes. This is diced to separate the circuit, and the chip-shaped circuit is packaged to form an IC. Therefore, variations in the characteristics of each of the plurality of circuits formed on the same silicon wafer are small. In this case, in consideration of such a situation, the inverter buffers housed in one IC are arranged in two paths so that the signal transfer characteristics on the paths are the same.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is arranged on the hinge side for opening and closing the frame, and the prize ball payout mechanism is also arranged on the hinge side. The game ball supplied from the island facility where the pachinko machine is installed moves in the prize ball payout mechanism while being charged. The game ball is further charged by friction with the resin member that constitutes the prize ball payout mechanism. Then, when the charged game ball discharges static electricity, electromagnetic noise is generated, and this enters the electronic circuit directly or through the signal path (electric wire forming the harness).

As described above, the main control board of the present embodiment executes the game control by the interrupt processing of a fixed cycle (the above-mentioned initialization processing-timer interrupt processing: FIGS. 21-23). Therefore, if the main control MPU 1311 operates normally, the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive new information (display data) in the next interrupt cycle (in this case, 4 ms later) even if the information is reset. It is instructed by the control MPU 1311 to return to normal operation.

However, when the main control MPU 1311 is reset, the time required for the initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effect display device 1600 is waited, so the command to the function display unit 1400 is interrupted and the function is stopped. The display of the display unit 1400 disappears, and the player is concerned about whether the game can be continued. Therefore, it is desirable not to reset the main control MPU 1311.

Next, the arrangement of the inverter buffer in the IC package and the connection of terminals will be described. 259 and 260 are diagrams for explaining an example of connection of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer.

The ICs shown in FIGS. 259 and 260 have a shape in which terminals are arranged side by side (that is, in two rows) on both sides of the IC package (for example, an insertion mounting type Dual In-line Package or a surface mounting type Small Outline Package). ), and has six inverter buffers, and the terminal numbers of the input and output of each inverter buffer are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 9-8, 11-10, 13-12. Has become.

Each inverter buffer may be a Schmitt trigger type inverter buffer having a hysteresis characteristic, not just an inverter buffer. By providing the inverter buffer with a hysteresis characteristic, the waveform of the reset signal can be reliably shaped and the resistance to noise can be improved. Further, by using the Schmitt trigger type buffer, it is possible to cope with a waveform in which the rising edge of the input signal is slow. That is, in CMOS, when the level of the input signal is near the threshold for a long time, a large current may flow in the gate to cause latch-up, but by using a Schmitt trigger type buffer, the rise of the input signal is caused. Latchup can be suppressed even with a slow waveform.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the terminals 3 and 11, and the reset signal input to the terminal 3 is output from the terminal 4 via the inverter buffer. , Is input to the terminal 5, further output from the terminal 6 via the inverter buffer, and input to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 11 is output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer, input to the terminal 9, further output from the terminal 8 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311. To be done.

As described above, in the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal sent to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is passed through the terminal on one side of the IC package in which the terminals are arranged side by side (that is, in two rows), and Since the reset signal sent to the main control MPU 1311 is passed to the terminal on the other side, the reset signals of the two systems do not cross each other, and the noise induced in the signal lines to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1311. Input can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the terminals 1 and 3, and the reset signal input to the terminal 1 is output from the terminal 2 via the inverter buffer. It is output, input to the terminal 13, further output from the terminal 12 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311. On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 3 is output from the terminal 4 via the inverter buffer, input to the terminal 11, and further output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer. It is input to 1342 and 1343.

Thus, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signals sent to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are collected in a part of the IC and passed therethrough, and the reset signals sent to the main control MPU 1311 are collected in another part. Since the reset signals of the two systems do not cross each other, it is possible to suppress the input of noise induced in the signal lines to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 to the main control MPU 1311.

Next, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 261, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. An inspection circuit arrangement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area. Circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area (serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by an inspection agency, and are generally commercially available pachinko machines. 1 is not mounted (a pattern for mounting components is provided). That is, although a connector for relaying a signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available, the inspection signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 is provided. The relay inspection terminal 1348 is not mounted. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available has a configuration in which the inspection signal is not detected by a fraudulent person and used for fraudulent activity.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 for commercial use, a print pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided although no component is mounted in the inspection circuit arrangement area. Therefore, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause a malfunction. Therefore, the wiring (print pattern) in the inspection circuit layout area is pulled up to the power supply (+5V) via a resistor (or to GND). Pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, surface mount components are not used in the pachinko machine 1 on the market, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 on the market. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the components of the inspection circuit can be downsized, the inspection circuit arrangement area can be reduced, and the main control board 1310 can be downsized. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, no components are mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310 in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are commercially available pachinko machines. No components are mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, so components can be mounted on the back side.

Of the components of the inspection circuit, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged near the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection agency, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally commercially available. Also in this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 which is generally commercially available.

In this way, by collectively arranging the circuit components used for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit arrangement area, it is easy to find the missing parts in the pachinko machine 1 for commercial use and Easy to find mounting. Further, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 having high noise resistance can be configured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 261, the circuit component arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area has a different orientation (for example, 180 degrees as shown in the drawing) from the same type circuit component arranged in another place of the main control board 1310. It should be placed in the direction of rotation. In this way, by arranging the circuit components in different directions in the inspection circuit arrangement area and other places of the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish the components used for the normal game from the inspection components. In the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which components are erroneously placed in the inspection circuit placement area.

Further, although the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed on the main control board 1310 by silk printing, for example, the symbols of the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit layout area and The numbers may be put together with the symbols or numbers following the symbols or numbers of the circuit parts used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are given the symbols after IC12. By doing this, it is possible to attach symbols or numbers that do not skip to the game control circuit components mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, and to easily check after mounting the circuit components on the main control board 1310. it can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the terminals for inspection are set to be different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors that are connected to the game control parts, the connectors and inspection terminals that are connected to the game control parts can be easily installed. It is possible to distinguish between them and prevent incorrect wiring when connecting the cables by mistake. In particular, if the symbol or number of the inspection terminal is made the same as the symbol or number of the connection destination of the other inspection device, it is convenient for connecting the cable at the time of inspection, and the connection mistake can be reduced.

Further, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused free ports, and the free ports may be arranged so as to be aggregated with the adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are continuous, it is preferable that the terminals of the empty ports are arranged at the aggregated position. By arranging the vacant terminals collectively, the area on the main control board 1310 where the print pattern is not provided is collected, and it is easy to find missing parts, and it is possible to find attachment of additional parts for fraud. It's getting easier.

Further, the terminal of the vacant port is arranged at a position close to the connector in which a relatively large current flows (for example, a solenoid is connected) in the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting a game control signal are arranged on the left and right sides (upper and lower sides in the figure) on the side where the terminals of the vacant ports are located. Therefore, when an additional function is added to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without drawing a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310, the wiring of the data bus can be reduced, and it becomes easy to find the attachment of the additional component for fraud. In other words, a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits are eliminated, and some signal lines including control lines are replaced by wirings in which circuit patterns of a large number of data buses are arranged in a complicated manner. Therefore, it becomes a clean circuit pattern. In addition, the main control board 1310 that is resistant to noise can be configured by reducing the routing distance of the data line.

Further, since the number of data lines is reduced, the circuits can be arranged without being influenced by the routing of the data lines, so that the I/O IC (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

Further, by reducing the circuit patterns, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise can be configured.

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port of the address D2 (chip select SERS0) is the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of the channel A are the common side of the function display unit 1400 (the anode terminal of the LED). And the output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base display 1317 (anode terminal of 7-segment LED). The output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Further, the parallel output port of the address D3 (chip select SERS1) is the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of the channel A are on the segment side (LED cathode) of the function display unit 1400. The output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B are connected to the segment side of the base display 1317 (cathode terminal of 7-segment LED).

The common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED) switches the output port to be turned on at a constant cycle (for example, an interrupt every 4 ms). When paying attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt process, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms),..., PA7 only in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). ON is repeated at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when switching 8 ports repeatedly, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, when the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A are grouped respectively and the output port of channel A is focused, only PA0 and PA4 are turned on by the timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned on,..., And in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms), only PA3 and PA7 may be turned on at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). By making the operation of this fixed cycle serial communication, it is difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the parallel input port of the address D5 is a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and a switch (ball detection sensor) for detecting a game ball is connected to the inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these sphere detection sensors are input as serial signals to the main control MPU 1311 and read as signals at address D5.

Furthermore, the operation information of the setting key 971, the operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, the power failure notice signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the detection signal of the frame opening detection switch are input to the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311. ing. Since these signals need to be monitored in real time (at the time the program requests them) or need to be monitored outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power is turned on), main control is performed without going through the parallel/serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to the MPU 1311.

Further, the general-purpose input/output ports (also used for input/output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311, are provided with a detection signal of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch. It has been entered. These signals are signals that are output when the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal (such as fraudulent behavior or failure), and it is necessary to monitor in real time (at the time when the program requests). It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervention. Further, the detection signals of these sensors and switches inform the production display device 1600 and the sound of the abnormality. By this abnormality notification, the employee of the hall comes to check the state of the pachinko machine, so that the game is substantially stopped. If this abnormality notification is an erroneous notification, it causes the player to feel uncomfortable, and it is necessary to suppress erroneous detection. Therefore, it is advisable to input these signals to the general-purpose input/output port and detect them a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

In this double reading process, in one timer interrupt process, read commands are continuously executed to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, Execute multiple read commands with several commands in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I/O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or read with multiple clocks in between. This is performed by executing an instruction and determining the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. For this reason, when the level of the port is continuously determined through the parallel/serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when the level of the general-purpose port is continuously determined, it is 1 microsecond. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short cycle.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, signals of various switches and sensors that require real-time property are directly input to the general-purpose input port and the general-purpose output port without using the expansion I/O using the chip select. Since it is possible to capture the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input/output port (also used for input/output) in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input/output ports (also used as input/output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, a part of the signal input via the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 is used as general-purpose input/output ports (also used as input/output) IOP4 to IOP7. You may enter in.

Although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is an empty terminal, pull up to 5V via a resistor or pull down to GND to prevent the terminal from reaching an intermediate potential, and to prevent the influence of noise induced on the power supply line. It is better to reduce. Further, when the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be opened, but it is preferable to pull it up to 5 V through a dummy resistor or pull it down to GND so that the level change of the output port does not cause noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for game control is output via the serial/parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, the winning ball detection signals are collected and input to one port, which makes it easy to handle in the game control program.

Further, of the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) are input to the general-purpose port, and signals that do not need to be read twice are serialized. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can confirm the signal level in real time, it is possible to detect the signal level a plurality of times in a short time and eliminate the influence of noise for determination. If the general-purpose input port is vacant, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, but a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 are allocated to the general-purpose input/output port (also used as input/output). Since all of them can be assigned, the general-purpose input/output port is highly versatile with respect to changes in specifications. Therefore, a general-purpose input/output port (also used for input/output) is desirable as a port left as a spare for adding a new function, and it is desirable to preferentially allocate the general-purpose input port.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the timing of outputting and fetching data by the synchronous serial signal will be described.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs the common side selection signal of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected from PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is originally output at the data fetch timing of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR/LOAD terminal that determines the data capture timing of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( When LOW), data is taken in from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken in from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the data and, after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs the serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this period, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) so that new data is not captured.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used as a trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesign. However, the input/output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the input/output interface of the main control board 1310, which is different depending on the model, is mounted on another board (the input/output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 which is common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. It is configured to The performance (for example, noise resistance) is evaluated by making the main control board 1310 common to a plurality of models, that is, by making the board size, the circuit design, the artwork of the printed board, the component arrangement, and the like the same. The main control board 1310 having stable quality can be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesign.

Further, when the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input/output board 1351, there is a problem of where to divide the circuit. One is a method of separating with a serial signal line, and the second is a method of separating with a parallel signal obtained by converting a serial signal. The former case is desirable because it can reduce the number of wirings between the substrates as compared with the latter case. Further, in the serial signal, even if the signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, and it is unclear at what timing which data is transmitted. Further, it is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and this synchronization clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 with a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 264, an input/output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 are mounted in the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 so that the main control board box 1320 cannot be opened without being destroyed once it is closed. The input/output board 1351 is provided with a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311, parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. Substrates can be connected with a smaller number. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or an inter-board connector.

Further, if the boards are serially communicated with each other, it is difficult to analyze the data even if the signal is acquired. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the content of the transmitted data is known to a fraudulent person. In addition, since the input/output board 1351 for inputting/outputting signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and the input/output signal that changes depending on the model is set in the input/output board 1351, the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without doing so increases, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Further, by housing the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Further, when the main control board 1310 is used for another model, the design of the input/output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. The main control board 1310 whose design quality is stable and whose design (e.g., noise resistance) is stable and whose design quality is stable can be used. Further, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without redesigning the main control board box 1320 unless the size of the input/output board 1351 and the positions of the mounting holes are changed. Further, the countermeasure against noise that changes for each model may be taken by the input/output board 1351 instead of the main control board 1310.

The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 which output the drive signal of the base display 1317 are preferably arranged on the main control board 1310. Note that when the base display 1317 is arranged on the input/output board 1351, the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are arranged on the input/output board 1351, and signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are input/output board. It is good to output from 1351.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal may be arranged on the main control board 1310. That is, the inspection circuit arrangement area and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel bus. Therefore, when the inspection terminal 1348 is placed on the input/output board 1351, the input/output with the main control board 1310 is performed. This is because the number of connecting lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 265, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input/output board 1351 may be attached to the outside of the main control board box 1320.

In the form shown in FIG. 265, since the input/output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common. Further, since the input/output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in different board boxes, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the boards is improved. If the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the input/output board box 1350 that houses the input/output board 1351 are provided separately, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes free. .. Further, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code and a setting key 971, it is necessary to appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input/output board 1351 is a pachinko machine. Since it does not need to be visually recognized from the back side of the machine 1, the substrate installation position is free. Thus, the form shown in FIG. 265 can improve the degree of freedom in design.

In the form shown in FIG. 265, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In the pachinko machine, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 to the outside of the sealed main control board box 1320 so that a fraudster cannot detect the operation of the pachinko machine. .. However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that a fraudulent person will detect the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311, and the data rate is constant, so that the data rate is easily estimated from the outside, and as a result, the signal transmitted by the data bus is acquired. Sometimes. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and the speed of this synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired.

In the above, an example in which the input/output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input/output function of the model-dependent signal is mounted on the input/output board 1351 has been described. It may be mounted on the input/output board 1351 if there is a portion where resistance to fraud and noise does not decrease even if it is arranged. For example, the output of a signal that requires a drive current for a solenoid or a motor attached to the game board 5, the output of a drive signal of the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) The input of the signal is a function that may be mounted on the input/output board 1351. Further, communication with the payout control board 951, output of a signal output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display The output to 1317 is a function that should be mounted on the main control board 1310.

Further, in the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input/output board 1351, when a dummy signal (0 V or 5 V) is input to the empty input terminal or a dummy resistor is connected to the empty output terminal. Good. This is because if nothing is connected to the empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, if some of the multiple signals that a fraudulent person wants to acquire are transmitted through a parallel bus or general-purpose port and other signals are transmitted as serial signals, it is difficult to analyze the serial signals. The fraudulent person needs to acquire signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, and the deterrence against fraud can be enhanced.

[15. Example of power supply path inside pachinko machine]
Next, an embodiment relating to overcurrent protection in the power supply path inside the pachinko machine will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 is supplied with 24V AC power. The power supply board 931 has a power supply creation circuit 933 that creates various direct current (for example, 5V, 12V, 24V, 35V) power supplies used inside the pachinko machine 1 from the 24V AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The power output from the power supply board 931 is supplied to these performance members and a control device for driving an accessory and a lamp (LED) for the performance and decoration of the pachinko machine 1. Although the electric wire that supplies the drive power to such effect members is generally fixed, the movable part of the drive part of the accessory has a sufficient length to prevent the electric wire from being pulled by the accessory. Is wired in. For this reason, the operation of the accessory may cause the electric wire to rub against a member forming the accessory, or be caught in the movable portion of the driving portion of the accessory, and the coating of the electric wire may be damaged. When the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other under such a situation, a short circuit occurs and a large current flows.

However, if a short circuit occurs near the power supply board 931, a large current flows, and the overcurrent protection function (fuse) mounted on the power supply board 931 operates to shut off the power supply.

However, as described above, when a short circuit occurs at a position far from the power supply board 931, a current large enough to operate the overcurrent protection function (fuse) does not flow, and the problem does not become apparent. This is because the wired electric wire becomes a load. For example, if a short circuit is made at a place where the impedance of the electric wire is about 1Ω, and if the driving power supplied to the effect member is 12V, a current of 12A flows, but the overcurrent protection function (for example, 15A fuse) of the power supply board 931 operates. do not do. It is sufficient to attach an overcurrent protection device (fuse) having an appropriate capacity in consideration of the current flowing in a normal state to all the power supply lines, but this causes an increase in component cost and assembly cost.

Therefore, in particular, when the power supply line and the ground line are arranged close to each other with an electric wire passing near the movable part, the board to which the electric wire is connected operates at 2-3 times the current actually flowing to the power supply. An overcurrent protection device (fuse) is placed to prevent large currents from flowing during a short circuit.

Here, the upper movable unit 3400 of FIG. 16 will be described as an example of the driving device.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the upper part of the game board 5 viewed from the front has a design in which a mahjong dot stick is used as a motif, and is a movable stick stick accessory (movable). A body) 3410 is arranged. The point stick role 3410 stands by at the upper position in the non-production state, and can move to the lower game board center position in the production state, and rotates around the center decoration lamp 3412a in the game board center position. It is a thing.

Although not shown, a unit base body is provided on the right rear surface which overlaps with the game area when the game board is viewed from the front, and the point rod accessory 3410 is pivotally supported by the driven shaft on the unit base body. Then, the pivotal movement of the accessory base body extending from the point stick accessory 3411 to the unit base body is regulated and assisted (the vertical movement of the dotted stick accessory 3410 is regulated and assisted). It has a slit for inserting and sliding a bush provided in the accessory base of the rod accessory 3410, and is supported by the unit base body and an arm body that is movably supported by the driven shaft.

In addition to the unit base body, a stepping motor MA for movement, a movement detection sensor, and the like for moving the point rod accessory 3410 to the lower center position of the game board are attached. Further, a stepping motor MB for rotation for rotating the accessory base body, a rotation detection sensor, an LED board (4250A) on which the LED of the central decoration lamp 3412a is mounted, and other LEDs of the left and right decoration lamps 3411 are mounted. LED board (4250B etc.) is provided.

Then, the stepping motor MB for rotation, the rotation detection sensor, and the drive signal line and the detection signal line for driving the LED are routed from the accessory base together with the power supply line and the ground line, and the relay board (3044A). , 3044B, 3044C, etc.) or directly to the production drive board 3043 for connection. It should be noted that the various electric wires are bundled loose electric wires, which are defined between the standby position and the effect position of the point rod accessory 3410 of the upper movable unit 3400 and have a certain play length. You may wire using a flat cable. Further, although the relay board and the effect drive board are provided in the upper movable unit 3400, they may be provided outside.

FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing an electrical connection relationship of various substrates, drive sources, and the like with respect to the upper movable unit 3400 that is the above-described drive device.

To the power supply board 931, an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is input. The power supply board 931 has a power supply creation circuit 933, and a power supply of 24 V AC is input to the power supply creation circuit 933 via a fuse 934 as an overcurrent protection device (overcurrent protection means).

The power supply generation circuit 933 changes from 24 V AC to various DC used inside the pachinko machine 1 (12 V, 24 V, 35 V mainly used for stepping motors and solenoids, LEDs, various sensors, etc., and electronic devices such as CPU). A power source such as 5V (which may be separately stepped down from another DC power source on the control board) to be used as a control power source for the circuit is created.

In the present embodiment, the stepping motor operating at 12V and the LED (board) for lighting and blinking by using the 12V power source will be described as an example. Therefore, in FIG. 266, only the system of the 12V power source is shown by a thick line and the other lines are shown. The system is omitted. In addition, other various control lines and drive lines described later are indicated by thin lines. In addition, each board shall be connected by a connector and a harness (electric wire).

The 12V power output from the power supply board 931 passes through the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance drive board 3043, and various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards. (4250A, 4250B).

As illustrated, a relay substrate 3044B and a relay substrate 3044C are provided between the effect drive substrate 3043 and the moving stepping motor MA and the rotating stepping motor MB, respectively. Similarly, a relay board 3044A is provided between the effect drive board 3043 and the central decoration lamp LED board 4250A. The left and right decorative lamp boards 4250B are directly connected to the production drive board 3043.

Next, various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards (4250A, 4250B) are input with drive signals for driving various stepping motors and control signals for lighting and blinking various LEDs.

When the ball entry is detected by the first starting opening sensor 2014 and the second starting opening sensor 2551 of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, which are connected to the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 transmits a command for operating the payout device 830 to execute the payout of a ball using the control line connecting with the payout control board 951 and using the control line connecting with the peripheral control board 1510 to enter A command for causing the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to execute the effect display based on the result of the lottery by detecting the ball is transmitted.

Then, along with the execution of the effect display, the drive device including various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards (4250A, 4250B) is driven. Regarding various stepping motors (MA, MB), A control signal (drive signal) output from the peripheral control board 1510 is input to a stepping motor driver provided on the effect drive board 3043 using a drive line connecting to the stepping motor (MA, MB), and further as a drive signal. It drives by receiving the drive signal output from the production drive board.

For LEDs mounted on various LED boards, control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 are temporarily received by the LED driver by using control lines that connect the various LED boards, and are further used as drive signals on the boards. It lights up or blinks in response to the output drive signal.

Here, the drive signal indicates a so-called excitation signal given to each coil (each phase) in the case of a stepping motor, and in the case of an LED, a current flowing through the LED is supplied to turn on or blink the LED, The signal for shutting off is shown.

The stepping motor driver mounted on the performance drive board 3043 has a serial/parallel conversion function, is connected in a daisy chain, and performs stepping using the control signals of the respective stepping motors serially output from the peripheral control board 1510 as drive signals. It is a device that outputs to a motor and is supplied with 12V power and operates by creating circuit power inside the device.

The fuse 934 uses a rated current that is determined by the total power consumption that the pachinko machine 1 consumes in the normal gaming state, and the breaking current has a value larger than the rated current.
In this embodiment, a device having a rating of 15 A and a breaking current of 37.5 A (2.5 times the rating) is employed so that the pachinko machine 1 does not perform the breaking operation even with the total current consumption of the power source consumed during normal use.

Further, chip fuses 3071, 3072, 3074, 3075 for cutting off current are mounted on the production drive board 3043 and various relay boards (3044A, 3044C), respectively. The role of these fuses will be described subsequently.

[15-1. Protection of accessories and driving devices with LED decoration]
The production drive board 3043 is connected to the LED boards 4250A and 4250B, and outputs a power supply for turning on and off the LEDs and a control signal of the LED driver.

Further, fuses 3074 and 3075 as overcurrent protection devices are provided on the power supply lines output to the LED boards 4250A and 4250B. This is because there is a possibility that the electric wire may be rubbed by a member constituting the drive device or pinched by a movable part such as a drive part of the accessory due to the operation of the accessory, and the coating of the wire may be damaged. Under the circumstances, when the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other and a short circuit occurs, a large current flows through the power supply line. Therefore, the fuses 3074 and 3075 are operated so that the power supply line is not burned, and damage to the accessory constituting the drive device, such as the accessory being melted or burnt due to the burnout of the power supply line, is prevented.

The rated current of each of the fuses 3074 and 3075 can be determined by the potential difference generated between the electric wires that are bundled together and arranged, and the wiring length (impedance) of the electric wires. The maximum potential difference is generated between the ground (0V) and the power supply voltage (for example, 12V). However, when the electric wire is damaged and the conductor inside is exposed and short-circuits with the ground wire, the exposed portion and the power supply. From the impedance of the electric wire with the power supply board 931 which is the supply source and the maximum potential difference, the current obtained by using Ohm's law is set as the breaking current.

Assuming that the 12V power supply is a load that consumes 2A even in the normal time in the estimation of the total current consumption of 15A, if the impedance of the wire up to the LED board 4250A is 2Ω, a current of 6A will flow at the time of short circuit. Therefore, for example, as the fuse 3075, a fuse having a rating of 2 A and a breaking current of 5 A (2.5 times the rating) may be adopted.

Also for the fuse 3074, if the LEDs to be turned on and off are the same as those used for the LED board 4250A and the same number of LEDs are mounted, the impedance of the wire up to the LED board 4250B is 1. If it is 5Ω, a current of 8A will flow in the case of a short circuit, so that it is also possible to employ a fuse 3074 having a rating of 2A and a breaking current of 5A.

Originally, if the wire were to cause a short circuit no matter where it was, a large breaking current that would cut off the fuse 934 provided on the power supply board 931 would flow and the fuse 934 would cut off immediately. Since even the electric wire for this purpose is regarded as a load (electric wire impedance), in the present embodiment, a separate fuse is considered in consideration of the impedance of the electric wire to be routed at a place far from the power supply board where there is a short-circuit factor. (3071 and the like) are provided to cut off in case of a short circuit.

Also, when arranging the drive device not only on the game board side but also on the door side, make sure that there is a sufficient length so that the electric wire for driving the drive device will not be pulled by opening and closing the door by the hall clerk. Although the wires are wired, on the contrary, when the door is opened or closed, the wires are rubbed against a member close to the route where the wires are routed, or the wires are caught in a movable part such as an opening/closing part of the door (such as a hinge), so that the wire coating is covered. It may be damaged. When the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other under such a situation, a short circuit occurs and a large current flows.

Alternatively, when the hall clerk must attach or detach the game board, and if it is unavoidable to wire the wires on the hinge side or the open/close side, the wires may be rubbed or pinched between the main frame and the wire coating. May be damaged. Even when the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other under such a condition. A short circuit causes a large current to flow.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to the case where the sliding portion is caused by the human motion or the human property is caused. It is good to place a fuse with an appropriate capacity at an appropriate position, but especially when arranging the drive device on the door side, install a fuse-mounted relay board in the vicinity of the downstream of the opening/closing part of the door, which is a factor. It is good to arrange.

Up to this point, the fuses 3074 and 3075 have been described as an example of the second overcurrent protection device. However, instead of this, a self-recovery type in which conduction is restored after a lapse of a predetermined time even if the fuse is cut off when a large current flows. Devices such as thermistors may be used.

In the present embodiment, a surface mount type chip fuse is used for the fuse 3071 which is the second overcurrent protection device in consideration of the size of the driving device. However, the chip fuse is smaller than the tube fuse. However, it is not clear from the appearance whether or not there is electrical continuity. In such a case, the performance drive board 3043 for driving the movable body from the electric wire or the load (drive source) to which the electric wire is connected, and the relay board 3044A on which the fuse is mounted also need to be replaced as a set.

The thermistor has a function of changing its temperature due to heat generated by a large current, increasing internal resistance, and interrupting the current. When the temperature of the device itself returns to a low temperature, the internal resistance is reduced and the device becomes reusable. That is, if the surface mount type thermistor is replaced with the fuse, there is an advantage that at least the substrate (for example, the relay substrate) on which the thermistor is mounted does not need to be replaced and can be continuously used.

In this embodiment, a tube fuse is used as the fuse 934 as the first overcurrent protection device. However, in the case of the tube fuse, the fuse element is blown by the flow of a large current. It is not unclear from the appearance whether or not electrical conduction is present, but since the fuse element of the tube fuse is thin and has a metal color close to gray, it is difficult to understand the fusing state on a general green resist substrate. Therefore, in order to make it easier to understand that the fuse is blown, a light-colored solid such as white or yellow is provided on the resist in the area where the fuse is mounted so that the metal-colored fuse element is conspicuous and visibility is improved. You should print silk.

For overcurrent protection devices that have different ratings or require the same rated capacity, special marking (for example, star) is printed near the device for identification purposes. The colors may be different, or the arrangement direction of the device may be arranged vertically, horizontally, or obliquely with respect to the substrate so that they can be distinguished.
[15-2. Stepping motor driver protection]

The production drive board 3043 is provided with a stepping motor driver and fuses 3071 and 3072 as overcurrent protection devices. Although two stepping motor drivers are shown in FIG. 266, a plurality of stepping motor drivers are mounted according to the number of stepping motors used in the pachinko machine 1.

The stepping motor driver switches the power supplied from the power board 931 according to a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to generate a drive signal. This driving signal drives the stepping motor incorporated in the accessory to operate the accessory. In the illustrated example, 12V is supplied to the stepping motor driver or the stepping motor, but the required power source may be selected according to the specifications of the stepping motor driver or the stepping motor to be driven.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, the fuses are provided on the 12V power supply lines of the two stepping motors, respectively. However, in the case of further daisy chain connection, the fuses may be provided on the power supply lines of the other stepping motor drivers.

The fuses 3071 and 3072 connected to the power supply lines of the daisy-chained stepping motors prevent a large current from flowing to any of the power supply lines, which may cause a jump to other stepping motor drivers and damage. is doing. That is, when the stepping motor is continuously driven in a high temperature state exceeding the specified temperature, the resistance value of the coil may decrease and a large current may flow into the stepping motor driver. In that case, a large current also flows into other stepping motor drivers connected in the daisy chain, but this is prevented.

Further, when the resistance value of the coil decreases, the stepping motor itself also generates heat, but when the coating of the electric wire (coil) for ensuring the insulation is damaged, a short circuit occurs in the stepping motor. In preparation for such a situation, in addition to damage to the stepping motor driver, a separate fuse is used to prevent damage to the accessory components that make up the drive device, such as the accessory being melted or charred due to a short circuit in the stepping motor. Should be provided.

It should be noted that the breaking current of the fuse used in the present embodiment may also be determined in consideration of the impedance of the wiring, whether it is mounted on the relay board or the performance drive board.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in the path for supplying the AC power to the power generation device (power generation circuit 933), and the power generation device is overcurrented according to the current supplied by the power generation device. The first overcurrent protection means (fuse 934) for protecting the state and the current supplied by the power generation device are arranged in the path for supplying the DC power to the drive source (the stepping motor MA, the LED of the LED substrate 4250A, etc.). And a second overcurrent protection unit (fuse 3075, etc.) for protecting the power supply generation device from an overcurrent state according to the above. It is arranged at a position closer to the drive source than the first overcurrent protection means in the latter stage of distribution to the (production driving board 3043), and protects the power generation device from the overcurrent state than the first overcurrent protection means. Since the electric current for doing so is small, it is possible to effectively prevent damage to the performance parts such as the accessory and the electric wire.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the peripheral control board 1510 for controlling the effect in the game and the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board, the effect member (point stick role object (movable body) 3410 or the center). A drive control board (production drive board 3043) for outputting a drive signal to a drive device (upper movable unit 3400) including a drive source (stepping motor MA, LED of LED board 4250A, etc.) for driving the decoration lamp 3412a, etc. A power source creating device (power source creating circuit 933) that creates a DC power source to be supplied to a power source, and a power source creating device that is arranged in a path that supplies alternating current power to the power source creating device, according to the current supplied by the power source creating device. And a drive device protection unit (fuse 934) for protecting the drive unit and a drive unit protection unit (fuse) arranged in a path for supplying DC power to the drive source and protecting the drive unit according to the current supplied by the power supply creation unit. 3075) and the like, it is possible to effectively prevent damage to the performance parts such as the accessory and the electric wire.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, two or more electric wires, which are connected to the upstream side or the downstream side of the relay board 3044A and include the electric wire that transmits the drive signal, have a potential difference between each other. The protection unit (fuse 3075) performs a breaking operation by the current flowing when the electric wires having the potential difference are short-circuited. The current for this breaking operation is obtained from the potential difference and impedance of the electric wire using Ohm's law. Therefore, even if the first overcurrent protection unit (fuse 934) arranged in the path for supplying the AC power to the power generation device (power generation circuit 933) does not operate, the second protection unit prevents the parts and the wires from being damaged. Damage can be effectively prevented.

The invention according to the present embodiment can be summarized as a gaming machine having the following means.
Means 1: Peripheral control board for controlling production in game,
A drive control board that outputs a drive signal that drives a drive source that drives the effect member, based on the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board;
A power supply creating device for creating a DC power supply supplied to the drive source,
A first overcurrent protection unit that is arranged in a path that supplies alternating-current power to the power generation device and that protects the power generation device from an overcurrent state according to the current supplied by the power generation device;
A second overcurrent protection unit that is arranged in a path that supplies the DC power to the drive source, and that protects the power generation device from an overcurrent state according to the current supplied by the power generation device;
The second overcurrent protection means is located at a position closer to the drive source than the first overcurrent protection means is after the direct current power supply created by the power supply creation means is distributed to the drive control board. A gaming machine, which is arranged and has a smaller current for protecting the power supply generation device from an overcurrent state than the first overcurrent protection means.

Means 2: a peripheral control board for controlling the effect in the game,
A drive control board that outputs a drive signal to a drive device that includes a drive source that drives the effect member, based on the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board;
A power supply creating device for creating a DC power supply supplied to the drive source,
A power generation device protection unit that is arranged in a path that supplies AC power to the power generation device, and that protects the power generation device according to the current supplied by the power generation device;
A gaming machine, which is arranged in a path for supplying the DC power to the driving source, and which protects the driving apparatus according to a current supplied by the power generation apparatus.

[16. Example regarding contact detection sensor of firing handle]
FIG. 267 is a block diagram showing connection of signals around the handle unit 500.

As described above, the handle unit 500 includes the handle lever 504 having a metal film (for example, plated) on the surface thereof as described above, and is electrically connected to the plated handle lever 504 to allow the player to connect to the handle lever 504. It has a contact detection sensor 509 for detecting whether or not the hand or the finger is touching.

The contact detection sensor 509 measures the electrostatic capacitance (floating capacitance) of the handle lever 504, measures the change in the electrostatic capacitance of the handle lever 504 due to the contact of the human body, and the measured capacitance is a predetermined threshold value. Detects human contact when the number increases. Since the contact detection sensor 509 detects the contact of the human body based on such a principle, it is preferable that the difference in electrostatic capacitance between the state in which the human body is in contact and the state in which the human body is not in contact is large. That is, the smaller the capacitance in the non-contact state, the larger the change in capacitance due to the contact of the human body, and the smaller the area of the contact portion 511 is. That is, since the change in capacitance due to contact with the human body is not the rate of change from the non-contact state but the change value of the capacitance, it is easier to detect the smaller capacitance originally (non-contact state).

On the other hand, plating is often used on the surface of the housing to enhance the decorativeness of the pachinko machine. Plating may also be used on portions of the handle unit 500 other than the handle lever 504. In this case, in order to reduce the influence on the electrostatic capacitance of the handle lever 504, a metal film may be formed on the portion other than the handle lever 504 by using discontinuous vapor deposition. Although the discontinuous vapor deposition can form a surface having a metallic luster, since the processed portion has no conductivity, it is possible to suppress an increase in the plating capacitance of the handle lever 504 in the non-contact state.

Further, in the handle unit, an LED board (printed board) on which an LED 512 and an LED driver IC 513 for driving the LED 512 are mounted is provided, and the LED 512 is used in a case where a production with high expectations is executed. Blinks red. The LED driver IC 513 in the present embodiment converts the serialized lighting/lighting-out data into parallel data, and drives the plurality of LEDs 512 mounted on the printed circuit board at a timing according to the parallel-converted data. .. Therefore, when the LED driver IC 513 is not required, for example, when one LED 512 is driven, the LED driver 513 may be omitted.

As described above, from the same viewpoint, capacitance is generated between the conductor forming the circuit pattern on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 and the plating of the handle lever 504. Therefore, the area of the circuit pattern formed on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 may be made as small as possible. For example, a printed circuit board may be provided with a wide ground pattern for noise suppression and ground potential stabilization. However, since the plating of the handle lever 504 also produces an electrostatic capacity between the handle lever 504 and the ground pattern, if the ground pattern is wide, the electrostatic capacity of the handle lever 504 in a non-contact state will increase. Therefore, it is preferable to reduce the area of the ground pattern on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 as much as possible to reduce the capacitance with the handle lever 504 in the non-contact state. That is, it can be said that an ideal printed circuit board is one in which only connectors for electrically connecting the printed circuit boards other than the LEDs 512 are mounted, and a pattern only for electrically connecting the LEDs 512 and the connectors is provided.

The contact detection sensor 509 outputs a contact detection signal when the measured capacitance of the handle lever 504 exceeds a preset threshold value. As shown in FIG. 268, the contact detection signal is output by the potential difference between the touch sensor+ signal and the touch sensor− signal, and when the contact of the human body with the plated portion of the handle lever 504 is detected, Touch sensor-Lower the signal potential to low level.

As shown in FIG. 267, the contact detection signal is input from the branch circuit 991 to the firing control unit 953a and the main control board 1310 provided on the power supply board 931. The launch control unit 953a uses the contact detection signal as a launch permission condition, and controls the launch ball 680 to launch a game ball only when the player touches the handle lever 504 of the launch handle unit 500. ..

The main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormality of the pachinko machine using the contact detection signal. For example, after the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 and the contact detection signal is interrupted for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds after the state indicating non-contact) has elapsed, it is, so to speak, 30 seconds. Monitoring will be started after the preparation period. After the preparation period has elapsed, if you count the number of balls entering the prize hole or big prize hole and exceed the specified number, there is a high possibility that a game ball was inserted into the prize hole or big prize hole due to misconduct, It is determined to be in an abnormal state. The preparation period is assumed to be a period sufficient for all the game balls launched in the game area 5a immediately after the game to reach the outlet 1111. In some gaming machines that have become less popular, there are some gaming machines that will close without opening any players during the period between opening and closing. Anomalies are correctly judged as if a natural event had occurred. In addition, in game machines, various measures are taken against static electricity applied from the outside or generated internally, but static electricity still adversely affects various control devices and various sensors, and abnormal It is useful to avoid false alarms, to correctly judge abnormalities, and to monitor if the player is actually playing to avoid unnecessary trouble with the player. There is a nature.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with the base display device (feature ratio display device, performance display monitor) 1317 as described above, and the progress management of the gaming machine can be visually performed. The display of the base display 1317 that counts the number of prize balls and displays the base value is updated only when the game ball is being shot, that is, only when the player is playing the game. That is, the base value is obtained by counting only the number of prize balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 detects the contact of the player with the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. calculate. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the abnormality of detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball is not fired and the reflection of the prize ball obtained by the cheating to the base value, and the base value can be accurately calculated. Further, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Even in the progress management of such a gaming machine, the progress management by grasping whether or not the player is actually playing the game is useful for correctly determining the performance of the gaming machine.

Next, the details of the processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 267 and the flowchart of FIG. 23, particularly the processing relating to the contact detection signal. The contact detection signal passes through any port of the main control I/O port 1314 from the main control input circuit 1315 of the block diagram shown in FIG. 267 and is subjected to the switch input process (step S74) of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is taken into the main control MPU 1311 and various processing is executed.

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a fraudulent activity detection process (step S84). In the misconduct detection process, the main control MPU 1311 switches detection of an abnormal state according to the state of the touch detection signal that is taken in. That is, whether or not the abnormal state is detected is switched to the abnormal state detection method.

For example, even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the contact detection signal was interrupted (being in a non-contact state), even if the jackpot is in the gaming state, the game is played in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 by the count switch. When it is detected that the ball is in the ball, a winning abnormality display command is created. The created command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92).

The main control MPU 1311 may execute the misconduct detection process when the contact detection signal is interrupted (becomes a state indicating non-contact). Further, only a specific fraud detecting process (for example, fraudulent winning detection process to the special winning openings 2005 and 2006) may be executed according to non-detection of the contact detection signal. When the contact detection signal changes to the detection state (becomes a state indicating contact), it is advisable to stop the execution of the fraudulent activity detection process triggered by the change of the contact detection signal.

Further, even when the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (becomes a state indicating a contact), the execution of the fraudulent activity detection process executed by the change of the contact detection signal may be continued. .. In this case, for example, by the operation of the employee in the hall such as turning on the power again, the notification of the abnormality is stopped and the normal gaming state is restored.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89) to calculate the accessory ratio (base value). At this time, if it is in a non-contact state with the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 by the determination using the contact detection signal, the game ball is not launched without performing the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The reflection of the obtained prize balls on the base value is prevented.

A command based on the detection result of the contact detection signal is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). The peripheral controller 1511 reports an abnormality detected according to the command received from the main control board 1310. The detected abnormality is a winning abnormality in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) when the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (becomes a state indicating contact). The peripheral control unit 1511 may be operated so as to transmit the non-display command and stop the notification. Further, the abnormality notification may be continued even if the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (becomes a state indicating contact). In this case, for example, by the operation of the employee in the hall such as turning on the power again, the notification of the abnormality is stopped and the normal gaming state is restored.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the branch circuit 991 provided on the relay board 990.

The branch circuit 991 includes three switching transistors Tr2, Tr3, and Tr5, and generates and outputs two signals, a touch sensor-1 signal and a touch sensor-2 signal, from the touch sensor-signal. Specifically, in the branch circuit 991, when the touch sensor-signal is at the H level, the transistor Tr2 is turned on, the transistors Tr3 and Tr4 are turned off, and the touch sensor-1 signal is at the H level (touch sensor+ signal). Same voltage). At this time, since Tr3 is an open collector output, the output of the touch sensor-2 signal becomes indefinite. On the other hand, when the touch sensor signal is at the L level, the transistor Tr2 is turned off, the transistors Tr3 and Tr4 are turned on, and the touch sensor-1 signal and the touch sensor-2 signal are at the L level (ground voltage).

In this way, the branch circuit 991 divides the contact detection signal into two signals having different signal levels and outputs the signals.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the handle operation of the player is used as the abnormality determination condition, so that the abnormality of the gaming machine can be correctly determined and the fraud can be accurately detected.

Also, whether the base value is updated, that is, whether the number of out balls or the number of prize balls is counted depends on whether or not the player operates the handle, so that the progress of the game machine can be correctly managed and the performance of the game machine can be accurately measured. Can be evaluated. That is, the out ball and the prize ball during the operation of the firing handle (+the predetermined time after the hand is released) are counted.

The details of the process (flowchart in FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below with respect to the process relating to the contact detection signal in the configuration illustrated in the block diagram of FIG. 17 instead of the configuration illustrated in the block diagram of FIG. 267. It is an explanation. The difference between FIG. 267 and FIG. 17 is that the contact detection signal input to the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 is directly input via the branch circuit 991 in the configuration of FIG. The configuration is different in that it is input to the payout control board 951 and a command is input to the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control MPU of the payout control board 951.

The contact detection signal is fetched from the payout control input circuit in the payout control unit 952 via any one of the payout control I/O ports, and is incorporated into the payout control MPU by the switch input process of the timer interrupt process to execute various processes. .. Although not shown in detail, the payout control MPU fetches the contact detection signal, and transmits it to the main control MPU 1311 using the state of the contact detection signal periodically fetched by the timer interrupt processing as a command. Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command receiving process (step S82) of the interrupt process described above to receive the command, analyzes the received command, and executes the injustice detecting process (step S84). The other processes executed by the main control MPU 1311 are the same as those described above.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the touch sensor contact detection signal is used for abnormality determination of the gaming machine, but the production control is triggered by the change of the contact detection signal to the state indicating non-contact. May be performed. The following is an example of the effect control performed when the contact detection signal changes to the state indicating non-contact.

For example, when the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 and the contact detection signal is interrupted (in a non-contact state), the effect contents are changed from the current effect to the effect with high expectations. You may change it. When the player releases his/her hand from the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the player with the high degree of expectation can be given an opportunity to continue the game to the player who intends to stop the game. In addition, at the timing when the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, an effect of directly asking whether or not to continue the game (for example, an effect of asking that the character will stop already) may be performed.

Therefore, depending on whether or not the player operates the steering wheel, an effect display that the player does not intend can be displayed, and the player can be motivated to continue the game. Not limited to the contact detection signal, similarly provided on the handle unit 500 so that the player can operate it, and the turning operation of the handle lever 504 enables the on/off operation, and the on operation temporarily shoots the game ball. Similarly, an on/off signal from a firing stop button (not shown) to be stopped may be input to the main control board 1310, and the production control as described above may be performed in response to whether or not the firing stop button is operated. Of course, also in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

The invention according to the present embodiment can be summarized as a gaming machine having the following means.
Means 1: Game control means for carrying out a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Shooting operation means that has a contact detection means for detecting contact by the player, and in which the player performs a shooting operation of the game ball,
According to the operation of the firing operation means, firing control means for controlling the firing of the game ball,
According to the control of the launch control means, a launching means for launching a game ball to a game area,
A game machine characterized in that a contact detection signal indicating a detection result by the contact detection means is input to the game control means.

Means 2: The gaming machine described in Means 1,
A game machine, wherein the game control means detects an abnormality of the game machine according to a state of the contact detection signal.

Means 3: The gaming machine according to Means 2,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means detects an abnormality of the game machine when the contact detection signal indicates non-contact.

Means 4: The gaming machine according to Means 3,
The game control means is used as an abnormality detection condition that the contact detection signal indicates non-contact.

Means 5: the gaming machine described in Means 1 to 4,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means controls whether to update a value for evaluating the performance of the game machine according to the state of the contact detection signal.

Means 6: The gaming machine described in Means 5,
The game control means evaluates the performance of the gaming machine with the winning balls detected after the contact detection signal indicates non-contact for a predetermined time and before the contact detection signal indicates contact. A gaming machine characterized by not being used to update a value.

[17. Slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described, but subsequently, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (spindle type gaming machine) will be described. The outline of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 26, but programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[17-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 269 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 270 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, in the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped casing 4100 having an open front, and a front member is provided on the front of the casing 4100. 4200 is provided so that it can be opened and closed in a single-opening type. On the upper part of the front member 4200, an image display body 4500 that produces an effect by displaying and information display according to the progress of the game, a speaker that produces an effect by sound, and the like are provided. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 constitutes an effect display unit capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 functions as a display control unit capable of performing display control of the effect display unit. Eggplant

A front panel is provided in the center of the front member 4200 so that the rear cannot be visually recognized, and a design pattern or the like is drawn. The center of the front panel allows the rear to be visually recognized (for example, transparent). ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. The front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 can be visually recognized in a state where an image is not displayed in the symbol display window 4401, and an image that mainly directs a game is displayed around the symbol display window 4401. To do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image that produces a game in the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), the symbols variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 arranged in the housing can be visually recognized. The reel 4301 is configured by a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. On the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a strip-shaped sheet having a plurality of symbols drawn along the longitudinal direction is wound, so that a plurality of symbols are arranged in a predetermined arrangement.

Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel driving motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 271) which is a stepping motor, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently driven to rotate and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c are driving sources of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c increase the drive torque and the static torque by being controlled by the two-phase excitation method similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 described above. As a result, a small motor can be adopted as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. Then, the respective reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c corresponding thereto are set as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motor 4341 corresponding to each reel is a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate, for example, from top to bottom (variable display). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 4301 is stopped, for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of consecutive symbols, that is, 3×3 total 9 symbols are displayed through the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized.

For the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401, a predetermined validatable line is set. In the present embodiment, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c a line that crosses the middle pattern (middle line), the left reel 4301a lower tier-middle reel 4301b middle tier-right reel 4301c upper tier diagonally traverses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. A line that diagonally traverses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the upper stage of the left reel 4301a-the middle stage of the left reel 4301b-the middle stage of the reel 4301c to the lower stage of the right reel 4301c (downward right line) is a valid line. Then, the validating line is validated by the player inserting a medal or inputting from the credit (hereinafter referred to as "bet operation"), and based on the symbol combination mode (roll result) formed on the valid line. The establishment/non-establishment of a winning (role) is determined.

When the winning is achieved, in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are lined up on the activated line, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on another line in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the symbols on the upper stages of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that a line (lower line) that traverses the lower symbols of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c and a front portion (visible portion) facing the symbol display window 4401 of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above should be traversed. The apparent patterns may be arranged on a virtual line located. Below, enable lines (middle row, upward right, downward right line), lines that can be visually aligned when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) collectively, symbol stop line (symbol alignment) Line).

The upper, middle, lower, upward right and downward right lines are activated lines, and a predetermined activated line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is awarded based on the symbol combination mode formed on this activated line ( Role) is established/not established. For example, when the number of bets is 1, the middle line is the effective line, when the number of bets is 2, the upper line and the upper line are the effective lines, and when the bet number 3 is the upper middle lower line, the upward right and downward right lines are the effective lines. And Further, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be dedicated only for three cards.

A payout number display LED 4562 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out by the game is provided around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of games remaining in the prize may be provided.

Below the symbol display window 4401, a step portion projecting to the front side is formed, and the upper surface of this step portion is an operation portion 4202 that inclines downward toward the front side. The operation section 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a one-piece insertion button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation section for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game can be executed by the player inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performing a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b that detects passage of medals is provided on the path along which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information from the insertion sensor 4207b.

The one-sheet insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from credits by performing a pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can be input from the credit to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) by one pressing operation, but when the number of credits is less than the upper limit, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It is like this.

A payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided below the operation unit 4202. The payout button 4209 is paid out by a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (betting medal) input as the number of bets by the one-piece insertion button 4205, the max bet button 4206, or a winning combination, and is stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the stored medals (stored medals) to the medal tray 4201. In addition, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay prize (replay prize), or a predetermined number of medals that can be stored as a credit are also used for the medal via the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the saucer 4201.

The starting lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a game of one division. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting an error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used when returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and stuck in the medal selector 4207 to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 includes a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c. The rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is stopped in accordance with the stop operation.

Further, a decorative plate (decorative panel) that constitutes a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, there are provided a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout opening, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 271) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is disposed in the upper part inside the housing. A character ratio display 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is formed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as in the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main substrate 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600 but is also used as another display (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display 4500) provided on the front surface of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED 4562 is used. Alternatively, the character product ratio may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317. It is advisable to display (print, stamp, seal, etc.) that the switch is a switch for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100. The display switch 1318 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display 1317. However, other than the main control unit 1300, if the operation is easy, another board (for example, the production control board 4700). The power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200 may be provided. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also serve as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it by mistake.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially in the center of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are placed. Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the activated line and the winning is achieved, the prize is won. The corresponding number of medals (payout medals) or medals that exceed the upper limit of credits due to the addition due to the establishment of a prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. By operating the payout button 4209, the medals for credits are paid out to the medal receiving tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals that overflow from the medal payout device 4110 and flow in are stored, and the medals that flow in are stored in the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guiding.

[17-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for centrally controlling the progress of the game, and a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, etc. are mounted on the main board 4600.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the character ratio display 1317 for displaying the character ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the display switch 1318 for switching the display of the character ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 may be a push-button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio may be displayed on the character ratio display 1317.

The one-sheet insertion button 4205, the max bet button 4206, the start lever 4210, the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, the payout button 4209, etc., are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown in the figure. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a. , 4211b, 4211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. The devices include a symbol variation display device 4300, a medal payout device 4110, and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can be independently rotated and stopped, and at the time of rotation, plural kinds of symbols are displayed from the top in the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed continuously changing downward.

Further, each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has position sensors 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position for rotation, and each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has position sensors 4331a, 4331b, 4331c. The reels are provided corresponding to each other (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, stop position information of each reel can be obtained on the main board 4600.

Inside the medal selector 4207, the solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 4207b detects a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is OFF, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted, and even if the player inserts the medals, the medal selector 4207 is not accepted. The medals flowing through the return trough return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also invalidated at the same time, so that neither betting nor medals are accumulated by inserting medals.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting the paid out medals one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. .. Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a full medal sensor 4111a, and when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the medals have exceeded the predetermined number is output to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display is displayed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, and the like to notify the abnormality of the medal storage, and the player, the hall employee, or the like is notified that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. Further, a drive signal is input to the medal payout device 4110 from the main board 4600 according to the type of symbol combination stopped on the activated line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110 or there is no medal at all, the detection of the number of coins by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 informs that a medal payout abnormality has occurred. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, and the like to notify the player, the hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 is provided with a production control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. The production control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input/output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). 4705, a sound source IC 4706 and the like are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, light extinction, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the game hall via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from an AC 24 V (AC24V) power supply supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power sources are created: direct current +5 V (hereinafter “+5 V”), direct current +12 V (hereinafter “+12 V”), and direct current +24 V (hereinafter “+24 V”). Three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each configuration included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of +5V and +12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. Is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000 and can be operated only when the front member 4200 is opened. The power switch 4112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings (for example, the settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. Further, the reset switch 4112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing the setting.

A reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605 is provided on the main board 4600. When the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic (eg, HI) of the voltage switching signal to set the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining the static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal to set the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage.

The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In the game by the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 in a state where the number of medals has been determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotate, and thereafter, the player stops the reels 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped and controlled, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the activated line and necessary. Accordingly, the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded.

As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination are displayed based on the display content (the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the activated line) displayed in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned activated line in the symbol display window 4401. In addition, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of activated lines. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, the medals are paid out in the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations.

[17-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, a storage area provided by the ROM 4602, the RAM 4603, etc. provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Note that the storage area of the pachinko machine has been schematically described with reference to FIG. 24, but has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 272 to 275. FIG. 272 is a view showing details of the access area in the game control of the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment and the ROM area 5100 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

The storage area in this embodiment is provided by a medium such as the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from “0000H” to “FFFFH” are given. The access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium providing the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I/O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. Has been. Note that each area does not necessarily correspond to a medium that provides an access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

By configuring the access area of this embodiment as described above, the CPU 4601 can specify the address to access the program or data without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. Details of the access area will be described below.

[17-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. The ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by the ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains stored contents even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the stored data can be read, but can be updated or deleted. You can't do that. Note that the ROM 4602 may be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

Addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH" are given to the ROM area 5100. The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 by designating the address “0000H” to “1FFFH”.

The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and stores programs for performing game control. In addition, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores a program and the like for debugging the control program (function inspection). The second data area is an area for storing data for performing debugging (function inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and the data for debugging may be stored in the second control area. In addition, an area (second control area, second data area) for storing a program or data for performing debugging (function inspection) of the game control program without being used for game control is a debug (inspection function) area ( The second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio. Data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing data for calculating the character ratio may be provided. An area (third control area) in which a program or data for calculating the character ratio is stored without being used for game control is defined as a character ratio calculation area (third storage area). In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. Can be performed separately, and the labor of inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. In addition, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas for which access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset processing is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the front and rear areas. For example, the start address of the first isolated area is next to the end address of the first control area. Address ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolation area is the address ("0AFFH") immediately before the first data area. Further, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function inspection) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (function inspection) area. May be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolation region is arranged between the debug (functional inspection) region and the accessory ratio calculation region, and is treated as the debug (functional inspection) region in FIG. 272. You may make it handle as an object ratio calculation area.

[17-3-2. RAM area]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in the present embodiment. The RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and also stores data derived by executing the programs. The RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as it can read and write data. Further, when a power failure occurs, the backup power supply can hold the data stored in the RAM 4603 for a predetermined period.

The RAM area 5200 is provided with addresses from “3000H” to “31FFH”. The data stored in the RAM 4603 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 by designating the address “3000H” to “31FFH”.

The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolation area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The work area for game control is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing debug control (second control) of a program. The work area for calculating the character ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the character ratio and the calculated character ratio (character ratio, continuous character ratio, advantageous section character ratio, etc.). It should be noted that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the character ratio do not necessarily need to secure a dedicated work area, and a work control work area may be used, or a game control work area may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating a character ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area is reduced. However, if the program configuration does not use the work area for debug (inspection function) or the work area for character ratio calculation, the work area for debug (inspection function) or work area for character ratio calculation is not necessarily used. Good.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used for game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various registers (calculation register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) of the CPU are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. After the processing is completed, the copied value is returned to various registers of the CPU. The save area may be commonly used for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation, but like the work area, for game control, debug (inspection function), and accessory ratio. You may divide separately by calculation. Thereby, the game control, the debug (inspection function) control, and the accessory ratio calculation can be more independent.

The isolation area is between the game control work area, the debug (inspection function) work area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area, the debug (inspection function) work area, the save area, and the accessory ratio calculation save area. It is allocated between the areas and is a continuous area with each area (front and back areas). For example, the start address of the isolation area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the address next to the end address of the game control work area (“3076H”), and the end address is The address ("307FH") immediately before the debug (inspection function) work area is set. The isolated area is an area for which access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset processing when accessed in the processing by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 273 shows the details of the accessory ratio calculating work area on the right side thereof. The work area for calculating the character ratio may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the result of the character ratio calculation is stored. .. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code has a fixed value, the check code is initialized when the initialization process determines that the check code is normal or the data is erased, and a fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). Good. The check code may also be used as the power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Moreover, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 276), it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Further, the value of the main area may be copied to each backup area in the power-off processing executed when the power is cut off.

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digit of the address.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing a concrete structure of a work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating a character ratio.

FIG. 274(A) shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(A), the number of bonus payouts, the number of continuous bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous zone games, the number of non-advantageous zone games, and the advantageous zone. Store the percentage. The bonus payout number is the number of medals paid out while the bonus product is operating (for example, during the regular bonus). The number of consecutive winning prize balls is the number of medals paid out during the operation of the consecutive winning actions (for example, during a big bonus). The total payout number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The character ratio can be calculated by the number of character payouts/total number of payouts. The continuous character ratio can be calculated by the number of continuous character payments divided by the total number of catches paid out. The number of advantageous zone games is the number of games executed in a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are hard to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous zone games is , The number of games executed in the game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by the number of advantageous section games/(the number of advantageous section games+the number of non-advantageous section games).

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(A), the number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total payout number, the number of advantageous zone games and the number of non-advantageous zone games are the total numbers in FIG. 274(B) described later. It corresponds to a cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 429496295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. Further, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are updated by the area ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 276), and the role rate is calculated. The continuous character ratio and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation/display processing (step S1119 in FIG. 277).

FIG. 274(B) shows the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(B), the number of re-plays, the number of prize payouts, the number of prize payouts, the number of continuous prize payouts, the number of games, the ratio of role products, the ratio of continuous role products, the number of advantageous zone games, non- The number of advantageous zone games and the advantageous zone ratio are stored. The storage area of each data is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the number of executed games is predetermined. When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointers for all data are moved and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that is one behind the write pointer. This is because the character ratio is calculated using the data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer completes one cycle and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes round and round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(B), the number of re-plays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, and the number of games in the ring buffer are 2-byte storage areas, Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored. The cumulative total of the number of re-plays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, and the number of games played is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and a numerical value up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. Since the total is the total of data for 400 games×n (6000 games when n=15), a large storage area is prepared. The total sum of the number of re-plays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of prizes paid out, the number of consecutive prizes paid out, and the number of games played is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a decimal number of 16777215 or 429496295 can be stored. Since the total sum is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long time. The cumulative total and total cumulative total of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store up to 255 decimal values. Each of the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games is a storage area of 3 bytes, and a numerical value up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store up to 255 decimal numbers.

In addition, by increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area forming the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same total data of 6000 games can be stored. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(B), the number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the ratio of role products, the ratio of continuous role products, the number of advantageous zone games, the number of non-advantageous zone games, and the advantage zone ratio are This is the same as the description in FIG. 274(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of winning payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-plays, the number of prize payouts, the number of prize payouts, the number of consecutive prize payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are the area update processing for character ratio calculation (step S1038 in FIG. 276). ), the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 277).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 274(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 276) erases the data in the work ratio ratio work area. However, the data will not be erased by other occasions. Therefore, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, or one month). Similarly, the total sum shown in FIG. 274(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Further, the data in the work area for calculating the character ratio and the calculated character ratio are abnormal values (for example, the character ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculated result of the character ratio greatly changes from the previous calculated value. , Number of payouts> total number of payouts, etc., the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but all the data in the work area for calculating the character ratio may be deleted. Further, if the data of the work area for calculating the character ratio or the calculated character ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. Alternatively, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, the normal backup area data may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[17-3-3. Configuration of I/O area]
Next, the I/O area 5300 will be described. Input/output ports correspond to the I/O area 5300, and the CPU 4601 can access each input/output port by accessing the I/O area 5300. The input/output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input of a switch or the like, a port related to output of a special winning opening solenoid, an LED drive signal, or the like. Input/output port settings (settings regarding use/non-use such as input settings and output settings) are set based on the setting values in the parameter information setting area 5400.

[17-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, various settings include start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in FIG. 275. In FIG. 275, the definition of the start address and the end address of each of the third control area, the work ratio ratio calculation work area, and the character ratio calculation save area is omitted, but the third control area start setting is omitted. The third control area end setting is defined similarly to the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work ratio start work area start setting and the accessory ratio calculation work area end setting are the start and end work areas of other work areas. It is defined in the same manner as the end setting, and the accessory ratio calculating save area start setting and the accessory ratio calculating save area end setting are defined similarly to the start and end settings of other save areas. Areas other than the area set here are unused (unset) areas. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Note that although continuous areas are set in FIG. 275, they do not have to be continuous as set areas, and parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals, for example.

Further, in this embodiment, when an area other than the set area (first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100, isolated areas of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to initialize the program by intentionally accessing the isolated area and causing a reset. Since the slot machine sequentially executes the processing, it is possible to execute the program from the start processing and execute the initial setting again by accessing the isolated area after the last game processing is completed. Thereby, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, it is possible to reset the normal value by executing the initial setting again. Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to force the RAM clear by accessing the isolated area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, since the game is played in parallel, if the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue the game, but in the case of the slot machine it becomes unnecessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the RAM information, it is possible to eliminate the processing for initializing the RAM information by accessing the isolated area.

The value set in the parameter information setting area 5400 is not sequentially set by user program processing such as initial setting of the CPU 4601, but the address and setting value of the parameter area are set in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. Before the control program is started by the CPU 4601, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. As a result, various parameters can be set when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the setting values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user side, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[17-4. Game control]
[17-4-1. System reset start processing]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 276 is a flow chart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation process is a process that is executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or a power failure occurs, and is a process that is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset start-up process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 5200 as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 273) is regarded as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the save area are divided into a game control area and a debug (inspection function) area (or other purpose). In the ROM area 5100, similarly to the RAM area 5200, an area for storing programs and data is assigned as a used area, and an area not assigned as a used area is assigned as an unused area.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an illegal ROM, so the activation of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has passed (step S1014).

Note that the processing from the power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (the processing up to step S1014) is not the processing defined by the user program, but the processing configured by the hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. Has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for performing initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, a process such as activation setting of a periodic process (FIG. 277, timer interrupt process) that regularly executes a predetermined process is executed. In the present embodiment, a parameter setting process executes a function that prevents settings related to game lottery, such as random number function settings, from being rewritten by the user program after a security check, and device initialization setting process other than these functions. Running in. By thus dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud in the game is less likely to occur.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the backed up contents of the RAM 4603.

When performing a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is “Yes”), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing for initializing the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when a setting change operation of the pachinko machine 1 is performed, an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power interruption flag is not set.

On the other hand, when performing a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “No”), the CPU 4601 executes a process for returning the game based on the contents of the backed up RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the restoration processing restores the processing interrupted at the time of power interruption. Specifically, in any of the processing from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation processing described later or from step S1110 to step S1130 of the regular processing (FIG. 277), the processing interrupted at the time of power interruption is restored.

In the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when the recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all areas where the checksum calculation target is used as a work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area) May be Calculating the checksum only in the game control work area is because the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process and affects the game result. Since it is a non-process, it is possible that some bugs remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, the debug (inspection function) work area where the information obtained by executing such a process is retained Using the checksum as the calculation target may impair the reliability of normal recovery from power failure. On the other hand, since the game control processing is directly related to the game, if bugs or the like are left in the product, it will cause a great trouble in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and it may be necessary to recover the product.In this case, it is extremely likely to cause enormous damage to the manufacturer and the hall in terms of cost, etc. This is because the game control work area is highly reliable as compared with the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is carried out dynamically.

When the initialization process ends or a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning the information in the RAM 4603 which is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

When the game initial setting process ends, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. The information signal output processing defines the information signal 1 to N output processing, and a required module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (information regarding start of rotation of the reel, ON of the start lever, winning combination) accompanying the start of the game in the process at the start of the game, debug regarding stop of each reel within the symbol stop process ( Inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, debug (inspection function) signal (fixing function stopped on each reel and payout associated with the winning combination) concerning the winning combination in the winning determination process. When the information about the number of coins, the information about the output signal regarding the number of payouts at the time of payout (the number of payout medals, etc.) is output, the “information signal N output processing” module required for the processing is called and executed as appropriate.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process in a previous stage in which the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not a replay (replay) execution instruction has been issued, whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not a medal clearing has been performed, and further, Confirmation of the game setting value is performed.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start processing, a random number value for performing a lottery for a game is acquired, a winning combination is determined, and the reel 4301 is started to rotate. After that, the CPU 4601 executes Wait processing for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 enables the input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes the symbol stop processing for performing the processing until all the reels 4301 stop (step S1034).

Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, the winning combination is determined, and when it is determined that the winning combination is made, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of award medals paid out as a game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the work area for calculating the character ratio in the RAM area 5200 (see FIG. 273, see FIG. 274) (step S1038). The process of step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Even if the slot machine 4000 detects an injustice and stops the game, it executes the accessory ratio calculation area updating process (step S1038). Regardless of whether or not a fraud has been detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to collect data for calculating the character ratio even during the fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process for performing a game end process (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to a winning combination is executed. If no prize has been won, or if there is no payout, the process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[17-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, a periodic process that is an interrupt process that is activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop process of the system reset initial activation process is being executed will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the procedure of regular processing.

When the regular processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the data to be saved is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. As described above, since the regular process is an interrupt process that is activated while the main loop process is being executed, it is possible to continue the process after returning by saving the CPU register used in the main loop process. Need to

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer incorporated in the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be periodically cleared.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check processing, processing relating to drive control of a driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the origin position detection, and the like are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing for updating various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the regular process is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the regular process x the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 is operated. If the display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio calculation/display processing is called, and the medal stored in the character ratio calculation work area. Calculate the character ratio by referring to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The character ratio calculation/display processing is the same as the character ratio calculation/display processing (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The specific method of calculating the character ratio and the specific method of displaying the character ratio are the same as those described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the character ratio calculation/display processing in the timer interrupt process and calculating the character ratio, the character ratio (the gambling property of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated. You may calculate only the value which is carried out. Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 in response to the operation of the display switch 1318.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. Also, the data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

The CPU 4601 executes an information output process of outputting a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing for updating the random number used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, the random number to be generated by the software process is updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, update processing of soft random numbers built in the CPU is executed. With the software random number built into the CPU, the count itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger for update is determined in this process. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the program processing related to the random number update.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, execution of interrupt is permitted (step S1130). Even if a new timer interrupt occurs during the regular processing (timer interrupt processing), the new timer interrupt is pending, and the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, the regular processing (timer interrupt processing) is configured so as not to be executed in a multiple manner.

[17-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, the information signal output process executed in the system reset activation process and the like will be described. The information signal output processing is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is configured by a plurality of modules. For example, there are "condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)""lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)" and the like. Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the description of each flow will be omitted. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output processing of this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the values will be restored even if they are destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved in the stack area. It is designed to let you. In addition, the stack area used at this time is allocated to the save area for debug (inspection function), and is allocated to a different area separated from the save area for game control.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires, from the RAM 4603, information to be referred to for selecting (ON/OFF) the output information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only the information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, data is not written in the RAM 4603 in the process, and when writing is necessary, the information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processes other than the information signal output process. As a result, even if the program for executing the information signal output processing is arranged in a different place from other game control programs, it is possible to ensure independence from other game control programs without using a common area. ..

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output by the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed by the number of debug (inspection function) signals to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each function (1 to N) of the output signal. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but a table defining output signals corresponding to the functions is stored in the debug (inspection function) area in the table. The information signal output processing may be made common by preparing in two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to the function designated by the calling source.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the program (signal output program) for executing the information signal output processing and the like is stored in an area clearly distinguished from the area (game control area) for storing the game control program. By providing the area (area for debug (inspection function)), a program for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, is a process that does not affect the result of the game, and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for other purposes (for example, to arrange a program for game control or a general-purpose program to compensate for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and protects all registers used in the game control area when called. Also, as described above, when program processing for the game control area is being executed, access to the work area for debug (inspection function) is prohibited, and program processing for the debug (inspection function) area is executed. When it is, only the reference of the game control work area is permitted, and the writing is prohibited. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling of modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the subroutine format, and after the completion of the subroutine, the program is returned immediately after being called by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for character ratio calculation) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the game state backup data is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effect described in the example of the pachinko machine described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the slot machine in operation, and the gambling property of the gaming machine in operation. I can confirm.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the following are typical ones from the viewpoint of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
And an accessory ratio display for displaying information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller is
Transmitting data for displaying on the accessory ratio display to the driver circuit by serial communication,
After the power is turned on, for serial communication with the driver circuit, a synchronization method, a communication rate, whether to use a parity, and whether to use a stop bit is set, the game according to the preceding paragraphs, Machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and peripheral control device.

As a result, it is possible to suppress an incorrect display of the accessory ratio due to data corruption during communication.

(2) The main controller is
It has a work RAM that retains data related to the progress of games and data for calculating the character ratio even when the power is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting for the serial communication is executed after clearing the work RAM.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of an incorrect accessory ratio by using the RAM data having an incorrect content.

(3) The main controller is
It has a function to transmit the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer by serial communication,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein after the power is turned on, a data storage amount that determines the timing of sending data from the FIFO buffer is set.

This allows data to be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
And an accessory ratio display for displaying information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller, the display device, and the driver are arranged so that the length of a signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit is longer than the length of a signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main control unit and the driver circuit, it is easy to find unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main control unit, and further, the signal line that connects the driver circuit and the display device. Is shorter than the signal line connecting the main control unit and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the accessory ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio indicator are housed in one case.

As a result, it is possible to easily find an unauthorized modification without arranging other parts around the main control device and further reduce the influence of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

This makes it easy to find an unauthorized modification without disposing other components on the printed circuit board around the main control device, and further to reduce the influence of noise.

(7) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Also, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit.

This can reduce the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

Thus, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device to reduce power consumption,
The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main controller sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state where the game machine ratio display is not visible in the installed state of the game machine. Machine.

With this, it is possible to prevent unnecessary power consumption of the gaming machine when the display of the accessory ratio is unnecessary.

(11) A gaming machine which gives a player a prize ball as a game value by winning a game ball launched toward a game area into a predetermined winning opening,
A main controller that controls the progress of the game,
With an accessory ratio indicator that displays information about prize balls,
The winning opening includes a general winning opening in which the shape of the entrance does not change depending on the gaming state, and an electric winning opening in which the opening opens or expands depending on the gaming state,
The main control device, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least, the number of first prize balls to be paid out at the opportunity to win the general prize hole, and at the opportunity to win the electric prize hole Separately counting the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display device displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
The memory stores a check code for verifying the stored number of prize balls,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main controller erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

This makes it possible to detect an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory, and suppress the display of an incorrect character ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main controller is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
Store the game control data in the first backup area,
Data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio is stored in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, when at least one of the data for game control and the data for the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be erased and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main controller is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
Store the game control data in the first backup area,
Data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio is stored in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. A gaming machine according to item.

If the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased, and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the attendant at the game arcade. It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of the accessory is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine that has been modified to have a high character ratio, and prevent concealment of the character with a high character ratio.

(15A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates the information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means upon the input/output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state is the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched in the game area, the game discharged from the gaming machine). The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the number by the number of balls, the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet, and the number of winning balls.

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal for detecting a prize at a winning opening, a timing for receiving a reception confirmation signal of a prize ball payout command or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a prize ball The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated at the timing of transmitting the prize ball payout command instructing the payout.

(15D) The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when receiving a signal detecting the winning of the game ball to the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the calculated number of prize balls,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) A payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player is provided,
The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of prize balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) A payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player is provided,
The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of prize balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction received the confirmation of receipt,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) A payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player is provided,
The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of prize balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving completion of payout of prize balls according to the instruction from the payout control means,
Updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction that has received the completion of the payout,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal, updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means on the updated information on the game value. The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, further comprising: a processing and displaying unit that can process (statistically process) and display a result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means in association with a game situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated at a timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means is
Stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal game state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls defined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in the buffer,
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of prize balls is consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched in the game area). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming machine, the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls.

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby obtaining the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the predetermined number is moved to a number.

(16E) The control means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal, updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means on the updated information on the game value. The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, further comprising: a processing and displaying unit that can process (statistically process) and display a result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property under the restriction of the main control device in the rule.

(17A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated in association with the fact that the counted number of consumed balls satisfies a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the information about the gaming value is calculated at a timing when the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means uses the number of game balls hit in the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet and the number of winning balls, and the number of consumed balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that

(17D) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Stores the total number of out balls used to calculate the base,
Calculate the number of spheres consumed in the normal gaming state, store in a buffer,
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing, and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of spheres consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out balls, thereby total out balls from the buffer. The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by moving a predetermined number to the number.

(17F) The control means is
With the winning of the winning a prize as a trigger, the special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed,
When the pending storage of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the winning ball to the starting winning opening is not stored, and the number of prize balls is counted, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs.

(17G) The control means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal, updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means on the updated information on the game value. The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, further comprising: a processing and displaying unit that can process (statistically process) and display a result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
And a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played is detachably attached,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays the information regarding the gaming value even when the main frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to an island facility of a game arcade,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided on a back surface side of the gaming machine that is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the body frame,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in the case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in hole sales.

(19A)
A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
Information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means in association with satisfying a predetermined condition in the game,
It has a game execution means for playing a special symbol variable display game triggered by winning a prize at the starting prize hole,
Even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variable display game is being played by the game executing means, the information regarding the game value is updated, The game machine described.

(19B) The information about the game value is a base,
The control means, as the predetermined condition, at the timing of any one of the detection of the winning of the winning opening, the transmission of the prize ball payout command, the reception of the receipt confirmation of the prize ball payout command and the reception of the prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with sufficient countermeasures against fraud even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means for controlling the production of the special symbol variable display game which is carried out with the winning of the winning opening as a trigger,
A game value information display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The effect control means,
Control the transition to the low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced from the normal mode,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a display mode that reduces power consumption of the game value information display means is not changed during the low power mode.

(20B) The effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variable display game and including liquid crystal display means having a backlight,
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the game value information display means is configured by a light emitting diode and does not reduce the brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) Equipped with effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variable display game,
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the storage of the special symbol variable display game is exhausted,
The game value information display means is characterized by not changing the display mode such that the power consumption is reduced even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the pending storage of the special symbol variable display game is exhausted. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a rich energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
A normal game state and a game state control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states advantageous to the player from the normal game state,
The information about the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state, and is updated. Game machine.

(21B) The control means, by any one of the number of game balls launched in the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means is
When the special symbol variable display game is a big hit, the advantageous game state is derived, and the player controls to open a winning opening from which many game values can be obtained.
From the jackpot confirmation by the special symbol variable display game to the start of the next special symbol variable display game, the advantageous game state is set, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information on the game value. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(21D) The control means is
In the advantageous game state, the player controls to open the winning opening through which many game values can be obtained.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of gaming balls won in the winning port is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched in the gaming area, and the number of consuming balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A game machine which gives a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game balls,
In the game area where the launched game balls roll, there is a starting port that triggers a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger that derives the open state from the closed state of the starting port. There is at least a passage opening that becomes,
The control means is
It is also possible to control to a special game state where it is easy to derive the open state of the starting opening,
The number of prize balls given to the player is excluded by excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of balls consumed by the player when being controlled to either the special game state or the special game state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming sphere is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of consuming balls consumed by a person.

(22B) The control means may be one of the number of game balls hit in the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls in the normal state is counted.

(22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the hit determination by the normal symbol variable display game to the start of the next normal symbol variable display game, and the number of prize balls and consumed balls during this period are related to the game ball. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means counts the number of consumed balls in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls winning the start opening from the number of game balls launched in the game area. The gaming machine described in each item.

According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A launcher that is operable by a player and that launches a game ball toward a game area,
Prize ball giving means for giving a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls are detected at a winning opening provided in the game area,
Main control means for executing a lottery as to whether or not to give an advantageous game state advantageous to the player, when the game ball is detected at a predetermined prize hole among the prize holes.
A peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on the information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means has an information updating means capable of updating the information about the assigned game ball to both increase and decrease,
A first state in which the information about the assigned game ball can be updated by the information updating means, and a first state in which the information about the assigned game ball can be updated by the information updating means. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information about the given game balls is updated to increase is suppressed as compared with the first state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect that indicates that the first state has transitioned to the second state.

(23B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The main control means,
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with the second state being a timing at which the base is likely to decrease.

(23C) The main control means is
Write information about the game sphere in the storage area at every predetermined time, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of consumed balls,
By comparing the information about the game ball written in the storage area with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, it is determined whether the information about the game ball has increased or decreased.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase or decrease.

According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if the variable display game is continuously discontinued.

(24A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for repeatedly executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
Prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls to be acquired by the player at a predetermined timing,
And a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by the player,
The control means is
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed ball by the consumed ball number detection means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected consumed ball number within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information regarding the game value is a base,
The control means is
Control the progress of the game by switching between the special game state in which the player can obtain many game values and the normal game state other than the special game state,
The total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition,
The game according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, it is possible to quickly display the information on the number of game media acquired by the player.

(25A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
Out-out detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the out-open provided at the bottom of the game area,
And a winning ball detection means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening,
The control means is
There is a game state control means for controlling to one of the game states among at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet from the output of the outlet detection means,
Counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detecting means,
By the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the outlet and the number of winning balls, the number of balls consumed by the player is counted,
It is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(25B) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
And a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched in the game area,
The control means is
There is a game state control means for controlling to one of the game states among at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area from the output of the detection means, counting the number of game balls consumed by the player,
It is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(25C) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
And a detection means for counting the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine,
The control means is
There is a game state control means for controlling to one of the game states among at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means, to count the number of balls consumed by the player,
It is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the game value provided,
The control means is
Game state control means for controlling to any one of the normal game state and the special game state in which the player can obtain more game value than the normal game state,
A prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area is won in a winning opening in which a prize can be won,
It has a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates the information on the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information about the game value is a base,
The number of prize balls in the normal gaming state is counted, excluding the number of prize balls that are awarded when the game balls launched toward the right side of the game area are prize-winning openings that are allowed to win,
Counting the number of consumed balls in the normal game state excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area,
The control means calculates the information regarding the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state, wherein each of the preceding paragraphs is characterized. Game machine.

(26C) The control means, for a predetermined period of time after detecting passage of a game ball of a gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or a winning of a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, which is excluded from the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period of time depending on whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the last detection, a predetermined number of game balls are consumed, or a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of a gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of winning balls and The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls is counted.

According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
First data setting means for setting the first data according to the result of the game,
Second data setting means for setting second data that does not depend on the result of the game,
Third data setting means for setting the third data according to the result of the game,
First conversion means for obtaining first converted data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means;
Second conversion means for obtaining second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means;
And a display unit that displays the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value in a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first conversion data is multiplied by the second data to obtain first conversion data. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain second conversion data. , The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(27E) The first data is a game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player,
The third data is a game value (for example, the number of out balls) consumed by the player,
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information about a given game value as second conversion data,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display displays information (for example, a base) regarding a gaming value obtained by the second converting means.

According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, the information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value required for evaluation of the gaming machine can be accurately displayed in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), it is possible to accurately display the information on the game value (for example, the base value) in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a regular process for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
And a conversion unit that calculates information about the game value,
The control means is
An argument is passed to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and a result converted by the conversion means based on the argument is obtained from the conversion means,
A game machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of obtaining the result of the conversion can be executed within one regular process.

(28B) The conversion means is
An arithmetic circuit that performs division operation,
A divisor register into which the divisor is input, a dividend register into which the dividend is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation,
The control means is
Write an argument to the divisor register and the dividend register,
After a lapse of a predetermined time from writing the argument, read the quotient from the result register,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) Prize game medium number counting means for counting the game medium given to the player in a predetermined game state,
And a consumed game medium number counting means for counting the game medium consumed by the player in the predetermined game state,
The control means is
A value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium number counting means by 100 is written in the dividend register,
Writing the consumption game medium number counted by the consumption game medium number counting means in the divisor register,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one iteration process (timer interrupt process), it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated.

(29A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
With a winning opening where game balls can be won,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the given game value,
A consumed ball counting means for counting the consumed balls consumed by the player,
And a prize ball counting means for counting the prize balls to be given to the player,
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state where game balls are easily won and a closed state where winning is difficult,
The control means is
Based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls, update the information about the game value to be displayed on the display means,
When a prize is detected in the specific winning opening even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and when the determination is made, the number of winning balls involved in the winning abnormality. The gaming machine is characterized by updating the information about the gaming value to be displayed on the display means by excluding the number from the number of consumed balls.

(29B) At least one of the winning prize holes is a starting winning prize hole that serves as an opportunity to derive a special game state that facilitates acquisition of a large amount of game balls.
When the winning is detected in the starting winning opening when the starting winning opening is closed, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consuming balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the winning openings is a large winning opening that is opened in a special game state,
The control means, when the winning of the special winning opening is detected in the closed state of the special winning opening, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and the number of winning balls related to the winning is excluded from the number of consuming balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) has a consumption ball detecting means for detecting consumption balls consumed by the player,
The consumed ball counting means subtracts the number of winning balls involved in the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed ball number detecting means, and counts the consumed balls consumed by the player. A gaming machine according to item.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of consumed balls used for calculating the information regarding the game value,
The consumed sphere counting means adds the consumed sphere number detected by the consumed sphere number detecting means to the total consumed sphere number, and subtracts the number of winning spheres involved in the winning abnormality from the total consumed sphere number to calculate the consumed sphere. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which counts.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of consumed balls used for calculating the information regarding the game value,
The consumed sphere counting means adds a value obtained by subtracting the consumed sphere count related to the winning abnormality from the consumed sphere count detected by the consumed sphere count detection means to the total consumed sphere count to count the consumed spheres. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized.

(29G) The winning opening can be switched between an open state where it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state where it is difficult to win a game ball,
The control means, when the winning of the winning opening is detected in the closed state, and the prize balls are not paid out in association with the winning, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and the number of winning balls for the winning is determined. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the number of consumed balls and is updated with information on a gaming value to be displayed on the display means.

(29H) When an abnormality in winning at the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control unit excludes the number of winning balls related to the abnormality of winning from the number of consumed balls and displays the number on the display unit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of 29A to 29H, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, it is possible to accurately display the information regarding the game value (for example, the base value) in real time by excluding the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of out balls.

(30) A gaming machine which gives a player a gaming medium as an award,
A game area with multiple winning openings,
When a game medium is detected in each of the winning openings, a prize giving means for giving a predetermined specific prize out of a plurality of prizes,
Arithmetic processing means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media awarded as a prize by the award imparting means,
Processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means;
Display means for displaying the result of the arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
When a particular prize among the plurality of prizes is generated in the game, the prize giving means gives the particular prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Amusement machine.

According to the thirty invention, it is possible to accurately and promptly display the information regarding the result of the game. In particular, a prize (for example, a prize ball paid out when a prize is awarded to a prize hole (a general prize hole or a large prize hole with a large number of prize balls, etc.) to which a high-value prize is awarded) accompanying the occurrence of a specific prize. Even if it is given, it can be displayed so that the result of the calculation processing (calculated base value) does not change, and it is easy to determine whether the gaming machine is performing the prescribed performance (for example, whether it is the set payout rate). it can.

(31A) A game provided with main control means including lottery means for executing lottery related to winning when a specific condition is satisfied, and peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. Machine,
The peripheral control means,
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
An information storage unit that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage unit;
By providing at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A game machine characterized in that the history of the game machine can be grasped.

(31B) Provided with a general winning opening through which a game ball launched in the game area can win a prize even in a special game state,
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating a winning in the general winning opening,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning in the general winning opening to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to an external terminal board,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, an information storage unit that stores more detailed information than the information output toward the external terminal board,
An information presenting means for presenting the information stored by the information storing means, and the gaming machine according to the preceding paragraph.

(31D) A first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine is provided,
The peripheral control means,
Storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
The limited initializing means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storing means even when initialized by the first initializing means, Machine.

(31E) First initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
A second initialization unit that initializes the storage contents of the information storage unit;
The information storage means can retain the stored contents even when the power of the gaming machine is cut off,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first initialization means does not initialize the storage content of the information storage means but initializes the storage content of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to the preceding item, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of the signal received from the main control means and the time when the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means is a signal regarding a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal regarding a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. Including,
The peripheral control means,
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
An information storage unit that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage unit;
A first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The peripheral control means,
Counting the counting event based on the signal received from the main control means, storing the counting result in the temporary storage means,
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in the preceding items, characterized in that.

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal regarding a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal regarding a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
Counting the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, and storing in the temporary storage means,
When the signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event, the time when the signal is received, and the information storage means are stored, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the counting result of (1) is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal regarding a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal regarding a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
Counting the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, and storing in the temporary storage means,
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the payout has changed. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, the information about the game can be properly stored.

(32) A gaming machine which gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value,
Control means for executing a regular process for the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including variable display of symbols,
A second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information on the given game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. Has and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are connected. Has and
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means,
Although the control unit outputs the selection signal at a timing common to the first terminal and the third terminal, at least one of the first light emitting element groups is in the period in which the selection signal is being output. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group; Are output at different timings to display-control the first light-emitting element group and the second light-emitting element group within one regular process.

According to the thirty-second invention, the circuit for displaying the information on the game value to be given (for example, the base value or the accessory ratio) can be simply configured, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine which gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value,
Control means for executing a regular process for the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including variable display of symbols,
A second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information on the given game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. Has and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are connected. Has and
At least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponding to the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group; A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group in response to the A process of outputting a selection signal output to one terminal and a signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, and a selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal The process of outputting the signal output to the corresponding plurality of fourth terminals is that the signal is output at different timings in the regular process by different processes in the same regular process. ..

According to the thirty-third invention, the circuit for displaying the information regarding the provided game value can be simply configured. Therefore, information about the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A game machine which gives a player a prize game medium as a game value,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
And a calculation result display unit for displaying information on the game value calculated by the calculation unit,
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
Timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device;
Controlled by the control device, at least, an output drive means for outputting a control signal for displaying on the calculation result display means,
In the board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction as viewed from the control device, and the output drive means and the calculation result display means are arranged in another direction different from the one direction, A game machine characterized by being arranged apart from the timing means.

(34B) The connection line between the control device and the timing means and the connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect with each other. And the gaming machine described in the preceding items.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal that is input to the control device, and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal that is input to the control device,
On the printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction as the oscillator circuit from the processor, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged separately from the reset circuit and the oscillator circuit. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that

According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress the interference between the signal related to the game control and the signal for displaying the information related to the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence on the game control and display the information about the game value quickly and accurately.

(35A) A game machine which gives a player a prize game medium as a game value,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
A display unit that is controlled by the control unit and displays information about the game value;
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
A memory which is accessed by the control device at the time of executing the processing and stores at least information about the game value;
The gaming machine is provided with input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means is
A first initialization unit that determines whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal at a predetermined timing, and initializes a predetermined first region of the memory when it is determined to be abnormal. ,
When the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the input unit is operated, and if it is determined that the input unit is operated, a second initialization unit that initializes a predetermined second area of the memory is provided. Have,
The first region initialized by the first initialization unit and the second region initialized by the second initialization unit are the second regions initialized by the first initialization unit. Including overlapping areas that are commonly initialized by
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region,
The game machine is characterized in that the information about the game value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) The first area stores data used for calculating the information regarding the game value,
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area,
The control means is
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized,
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input unit is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) In the first area, data used for calculating the information regarding the game value is stored,
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area,
The control means is
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input unit is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) The control unit determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the periodical processing repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. Gaming machine described in.

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal every time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. ..

(35F) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the power of the game machine is turned on.

According to the inventions of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory that stores the information (base value and accessory ratio) about the game value to be given. Therefore, information about the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A game machine which gives a player a prize game medium as a game value,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media to be given to the player,
Calculating means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and number of prize game media;
Display means for displaying information on the game value,
An electric accessory operated by the control means,
Under a specific condition, when a plurality of game media wins during the operation of the electric accessory that is triggered by one hit, among some of the game media won, the information about the game value is displayed for some of the game media. A gaming machine, which is used for calculation and is not used for calculating information on the game value for other game media, but can be a trigger for the variable display game for any of the game media.

(36B) The control means is
Run the variable display game when the specified starting conditions are met,
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first game state (time saving, high probability state, big hit, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and a second game state (normal state) that is less advantageous than the first game state And control to either
When a plurality of game media are won during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate information about the game value, and the first game The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming media won in the state is not used for the calculation of the information regarding the gaming value, but any of the gaming media can trigger the variable display game.

(36C) The control means is
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
When a plurality of game media are won during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in a state where the predetermined type of error is detected should be used for calculating the information regarding the game value. However, the game media won in a state where the predetermined type of the error is not detected is used for calculating the information regarding the game value, but any of the game media can be a trigger for the variable display game. The gaming machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, it is switched whether to use the game medium for calculating the information on the game value according to the state of the gaming machine, so that the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine provided with an outer frame, a main body frame that is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
When the body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, it is difficult to change the setting, which makes it difficult to operate the setting change operation unit, as compared to when the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame. A gaming machine, characterized by having an activating means.

(37B) An outer frame, a main body frame which is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided, and when the setting change operation for changing the setting state related to the game is performed, the changed setting state is changed. A gaming machine having a setting status display section for displaying,
A gaming machine, comprising: a visibility-hardening unit that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting status display unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting determination operation unit that performs a setting determination operation that determines a setting state related to a game. It was a gaming machine,
A gaming machine having a decision making device that makes it difficult to operate the setting decision operating unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine including an outer frame, a main body frame that is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted,
When the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, it is configured so as to prevent insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion portion by a specific portion of the outer frame. A gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for an improper person to illegally change the setting state and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of a start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A setting information determining section that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of pieces based on an operation on the specific operation section;
The gaming machine, wherein the variation time determining means can determine a specific variation time when the setting information is determined to be the specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A probability determining unit that determines the probability that the hit result will be derived to any one of a plurality of probabilities based on an operation on a specific operating unit,
The gaming machine characterized in that the variation time determining means can determine a specific variation time when the probability determined based on an operation on the specific operation section is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine which gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of the start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A setting information determining section that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of pieces based on an operation on the specific operation section;
The variation time determining means may determine a common variation time regardless of the setting information or a different variation time depending on the setting information.
A probability that different variable times are determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variable time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the start condition and deriving a winning result as the variable display result of the symbols,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the symbol,
A setting information determination unit that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of settings based on an operation on a specific operation unit,
And a production control unit for performing a predetermined production,
The fluctuation time determination means can determine different fluctuation times according to the setting information,
When the specific variation time is determined by the variation time determination means in correspondence with the specific setting information of the setting information, the effect control unit displays the variation display of the symbol within the specific variation time. A game machine characterized by sequentially performing a result suggesting effect that suggests a result and a setting suggesting effect that suggests the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determining unit.

According to the inventions of 37E to 37H, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making the player recognize the setting state in a new mode.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control section for performing game-related control, another control board connected to the main control board, and provided with a control section different from the game control section, and the game control A game machine provided with a setting-related operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game performed by a unit,
The game control unit has a setting change permissible state generating means for permitting an operation relating to the change of the setting state with respect to the setting related operation unit,
A game machine characterized in that the setting change permissible state generation means permits an operation related to the change of the setting state when the information transmitted from the another control board to the main control board is specific information. ..

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to illegally change the setting state and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control section for controlling the game and a setting change operation section for changing the setting state for the control executed by the game control section, and the game area is operated by a player operating a predetermined firing operation section. A gaming machine that gives a gaming profit by winning a game ball launched toward a predetermined prize hole,
When the setting change operation unit is operated and the setting state is changed, it has a shooting disabling means that disables the shooting of the game ball by the operation of the shooting operation unit for a predetermined period. Amusement machine.

According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine provided with a game control section for controlling a game and a setting operation section for changing a setting for a control performed by the game control section,
A game machine characterized in that a game control board constituting the game control section and a setting board constituting the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(38B) In the case, in place of the setting operation unit, a dummy unit that cannot perform an operation for changing a setting can be housed together with the game control unit. Amusement machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit is
A first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed;
A second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, further comprising a setting display device that displays the contents of the setting.

(38D) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation unit, the second operation unit, and the setting display unit.

According to the inventions of 38A to 38D, the specifications of the gaming machine having the setting function and the gaming machine not having the setting function can be made common, and the design and production can be efficiently performed.

(39A) A game control unit having a processor for executing a program for controlling a game, and a memory accessed by the processor,
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory,
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation section for changing settings relating to control performed by the game control section,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed,
The game control unit,
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected,
A gaming machine, wherein the setting state is started when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated.

(39B) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state ends.

(39C) In the second area, which is at least partially different from the first area, when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is not operated, the game control section The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by initializing a memory.

According to the inventions of 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation of setting change.

(40A) A game machine including a game control unit that performs control related to a game, and a setting operation unit that changes settings related to control performed by the game control unit,
The game control unit has a game value display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display unit for displaying the contents of the setting,
In the setting state, the game control section displays the game value display means and the setting display means so as not to be confused with each other.

(40B) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit and the setting operation unit are housed in a single case.

(40C) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are constituted by one display.

(40D) The game value display means displays the information about the given game value on the display unit without delay as the game progresses,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means, in the setting state, displays information about the setting on the display, instead of the information about the given game value.

(40E) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are configured by different displays.

(40F) The game value display means,
In other than the setting state, the information about the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, display any of the characters, numbers, or figures that are not displayed in the setting state,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means,
In other than the setting state, the information about the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, turn off or all lights,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

According to the inventions of 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion of a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate.

(41A) A lottery means for performing a lottery on winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting opening,
Production determination means for determining any production from a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery,
Production execution means for executing the production determined by the production determination means,
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determination means for determining the predetermined setting information regarding the game to any one of a plurality of,
When an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed, setting information confirmation means for displaying the setting information determined by the setting information determination means on a predetermined display section,
The plurality of effects includes a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect even if the different operation is performed when the effect deciding means decides to perform the setting suggestion effect.

(41B) A lottery means for performing a lottery on winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting opening,
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determination means for determining the predetermined setting information regarding the game to any one of a plurality of,
Production determination means for determining any production from a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery,
Production execution means for executing the production determined by the production determination means,
Error detection means for detecting errors,
An error notification unit for notifying an error detected by the error detection unit,
The plurality of effects includes a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
The game machine characterized in that the effect execution means can execute the setting suggestion effect during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error satisfying a predetermined condition.

(41C) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
During the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect is executed, or when the starting condition is newly satisfied while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held, the newly established condition A game machine characterized by limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the starting condition.

(41D) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
During the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect is executed, or when the starting condition is newly satisfied while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held, the newly established condition A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the starting condition.

(41E) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held. The gaming machine characterized by limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41F) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held. , A gaming machine characterized by limiting the execution of the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41G) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of the start condition,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determination means for determining whether or not a win,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of,
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is held. The gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

According to the inventions of 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(42A) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player according to a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means,
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Computing means for performing required computing processing by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
Access permission/prohibition is switched so that either of the first storage unit and the second storage unit can be accessed.
The calculation means is
The first storage means is used when the first program is executed,
A game machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) A game machine characterized in that the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched between accessible and non-accessible by one instruction inputted to the arithmetic means.

(42C) An instruction for switching the first storage unit to be accessible and an instruction for switching the second storage unit to be accessible are different in at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand). Amusement machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (in the game control area) for performing a winning lottery in a game,
The second program is a program (outside the game control area) for calculating information about a game value given in a game, and is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player according to a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means,
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Computing means for performing required computing processing by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
Access permission/prohibition is switched so that either of the first storage unit and the second storage unit can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used,
At the start of the second program, the second program is switched to be inaccessible to the first storage means and accessible to the second storage means,
A game machine characterized by using the second storage means when the second program is executed.

(42F) The game machine characterized in that, when the second program ends, in the second program, the arithmetic means switches to inaccessible to the second storage means and accessible to the first storage means.

(42G) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means,
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Computing means for performing required computing processing by the first program and the second program;
First storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
Access permission/prohibition is switched so that either of the first storage unit and the second storage unit can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used,
When starting the second program, the first program is switched to be inaccessible to the first storage means and accessible to the second storage means,
A game machine characterized by using the second storage means when the second program is executed.

(42H) The computing means, after the second program is finished, switches the second program from the second program so that the second program is inaccessible and the first program is accessible. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the inventions of 42A to 42H, data can be saved at high speed with a simple instruction when processing is transferred between programs, and cautions at the time of creating a program can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to perform an effect display,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
Controlled by the peripheral control means, from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel, a light emitting device for irradiating light so as to travel in the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel toward a front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel. Having a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting portion, a dynamic pattern is displayed on the display panel,
A game machine characterized in that a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section.

(43B) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The peripheral control unit changes the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time so that lights of different colors travel in different paths in the display panel, and the plurality of first reflections The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the colors of the patterns displayed by the plurality of first reflecting sections are changed according to the passage of time by emitting light of different colors from the section.

(43C) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The peripheral control unit switches lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls a path of light in the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflection units. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern displayed by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed in accordance with the passage of time.

(43D) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The peripheral control unit switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and controls the plurality of first reflecting units. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern displayed by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time by emitting light from at least a part.

According to the inventions of 43A to 43D, it is possible to display a moving pattern and a stationary pattern on one light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(44A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to perform an effect display,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel toward a front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel. Having a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The first reflecting section reflects a plurality of first right-eye reflecting sections that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel in a direction reaching the right eye of the player, and the left eye of the player. And a plurality of first left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching
The plurality of first right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of first left-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from the right-eye pattern.
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light-emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first reflection part for the right eye and the first reflection part for the left eye, the pattern for the right eye and the pattern for the left eye. Is displayed on the display panel to allow the player to recognize a three-dimensional pattern in which parallax between the left and right eyes occurs,
A game machine characterized by displaying a plane pattern in which parallax between left and right eyes does not occur by reflecting light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit.

(44B) The second reflector is a front side of the gaming machine, in which light traveling in a plurality of paths in the display panel reaches a player's right eye and a player's left eye. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by being reflected on the display panel.

(44C) The second reflector includes a plurality of second right-eye reflectors that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the second reflector for the player. And a plurality of second left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching the left eye,
The plurality of second right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of second left-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by light reflected by the second reflecting section.

According to the inventions of 44A to 44C, it is possible to display a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern with one light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of amusement of the game.

(45A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to perform an effect display,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The peripheral control means,
It is possible to display a dynamic pattern and a static pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light,
A gaming machine characterized by performing an effect that suggests the result of the winning lottery by combining the display of the dynamic picture and the display of the static picture.

(45B) The display panel has a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel and emit the light toward the front side of the gaming machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. And a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of the light traveling in the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is changed, whereby a changing pattern is displayed on the display panel. Displayed on
By displaying the stationary pattern on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein an effect that suggests a result of the winning lottery is performed by combining the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern.

According to the inventions of 45A to 45B, the moving pattern and the stationary pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, which can prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(46A) A gaming machine that adds gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means for controlling the effect in the game based on an instruction from the main control means,
A display device controlled by the peripheral control means to display a performance image,
A display panel that displays a production pattern,
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel through the display panel from a plurality of positions lateral to the display panel,
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means,
By causing the light emitting device to emit light, a target pattern is displayed on the display panel,
A game machine characterized by displaying an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device.

(46B) The game machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the picture displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or characters.

(46C) The peripheral control unit displays the target pattern on the display panel, and then displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device. Machine.

(46D) The peripheral control means displays the image moving toward the target pattern on the display device, and then displays the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

According to the inventions of 46A to 46D, it is possible to display a plurality of patterns and patterns of different modes with one light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

(47A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine comprising: setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
The game control means,
The power-on process executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and the periodic process executed every predetermined cycle,
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, in the power-on process, the setting change capable of changing the set value according to the operation state of the setting operation means Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state where the setting value cannot be changed,
In the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, after the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed, the process corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be executed in the regular process. A gaming machine characterized by:

(47B) The regular process is common to at least two of the processes related to the change of the set value, the process related to confirmation of the set value, the process related to the normal game, and the plurality of processes. The game machine according to each of the preceding items, comprising:

(47C) The regular process is composed of at least a first repetitive process that executes a process related to the normal game and a second repetitive process that executes a process related to the change of the setting.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control means selectively executes the first repeating process and the second repeating process depending on an operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in an area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is cut off,
The game control means,
In the setting change mode, as the predetermined condition, the fact that the setting change mode is set in the setting state management area,
In the setting confirmation mode, as a predetermined condition, the fact that the setting confirmation mode is set is set in the setting state management area.

(48) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine comprising: setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
The game control means,
The power-on process executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and the periodic process executed every predetermined cycle,
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, in the power-on process, the setting change capable of changing the set value according to the operation state of the setting operation means Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state where the setting value cannot be changed,
The regular processing makes it possible to execute a normal game processing related to a normal game and a setting processing related to setting change or setting confirmation,
The normal game process is configured by a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be commonly executed by the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means,
Equipped with storage means capable of storing information related to games,
In a power-on process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means of the storage means,
In the power-on process, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is operated, it is determined based on the information stored and held in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. Then
The second setting operation means stores the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on process. A means for initializing
In the power-on process, when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated, when the storage means is initialized, A game machine characterized by not initializing the storage means.

(49B) A peripheral control means for controlling the effect on the display device is provided,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the game control means determines a mode in which the gaming machine is started up by an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is started up.

(50A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means,
A storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information relating to a game and a second storage area different from the first storage area,
The first storage area is an area for storing the setting value,
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used in the game,
The game control means,
When it is determined that the set value is not a normal value, the first storage area and the second storage area are initialized,
If it is determined that the first setting operation means of the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is operated, the first storage area is not initialized. A gaming machine characterized by initializing the second storage area.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area,
The game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. The game machine described.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than an area for storing various parameters used in a normal game,
When the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power failure occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and determines the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the storage area of the gaming machine is initialized.

(51A) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means,
Equipped with storage means that can retain information related to games even when the power is cut off,
The power-on process executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and the periodic process executed every predetermined cycle,
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, in the power-on process, the setting change capable of changing the set value according to the operation state of the setting operation means Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state where the setting value cannot be changed,
The storage means has a setting state management area for storing a value set in correspondence with the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in accordance with an operation state of the setting operation means at least in the power-on process. A gaming machine characterized by including.

(51B) A setting operation unit that is operated to start in a setting change mode for changing a setting value related to control performed by the game control unit,
The game control means,
When an operation for starting the game machine in the setting change mode is performed in a state where a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area and stored in the memory. When a predetermined area is initialized and the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed by the setting operation means, the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is performed in the normal game state in which a game ball can be shot. Start the machine,
When the game machine is operated to start up in the setting confirmation mode in the state where the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if an operation to end the setting confirmation mode is performed by the setting operation means.

(52) A game control means for performing a lottery of a special game which is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means,
A power-on process executed when the game machine is powered on, a first periodic process executed every predetermined first cycle, and a second periodic process executed every predetermined second cycle are executed. Enable and
In the power-on process, it is determined whether or not an operation associated with the setting operation is performed in the setting operation means,
When it is determined that the setting operation means is performing an operation associated with the setting operation, a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed according to the operation state. Run the settings corresponding to
When it is determined that the setting operation means does not perform an operation associated with the setting operation, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. Without, it is possible to execute normal game start processing,
The first periodic process is executed after the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed in the power-on process,
The game machine characterized in that the second regular processing is executed after enabling the normal game start processing in the power-on processing.

(53A) Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A gaming machine capable of mounting an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspecting a gaming machine,
The inspection signal generation circuit,
A second driver circuit which receives the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit and generates an inspection signal from the control signal;
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The game machine characterized in that the second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal.

(53B) Each of the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit has an output transistor that switches an input power source to generate an output signal,
The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit are input with different voltages, and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

(53C) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted and a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete part and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface mount part. ..

(53E) Game control means for executing regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game,
Of the events relating to the progress of the game, first detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in the regular processing,
A gaming machine comprising: a second detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in a process other than the regular process among the events relating to the progress of the game,
The game control means,
Converting means for converting the signal from the first detecting means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input,
A general-purpose input port to which the signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means,
The game machine characterized in that the signal of the second detecting means is inputted to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has been launched toward the game area,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53G) An accessory driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The serial input port is a serial input/output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input/output port,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) In order to control the progress of the game, a game control means for executing a regular process at every predetermined cycle,
A gaming machine comprising a first detection means and a second detection means for detecting an event relating to the progress of the game,
The game control means,
Converting means for converting the signal from the first detecting means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input,
A general-purpose input port to which the signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The first detection means is for determining a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal once in the regular processing once.
The second detection means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal a plurality of times within the one periodic processing,
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means,
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means detects a signal of the second detection means a plurality of times within a single periodic process to determine a signal level.

(53I) The first detection means is a sphere detection means for detecting a game sphere launched toward the game area,
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means that is operated to change or confirm a set value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53J) Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising: a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory;
The game control means is mounted on the first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. Cage,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line for transmitting a serial signal obtained by converting a signal repeated at the predetermined cycle from the first printed circuit board side. Amusement machine.

(53K) It is possible to mount a test signal generation circuit for outputting a test signal used for testing a gaming machine,
The inspection signal generation circuit,
A second driver circuit which receives the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit and generates an inspection signal from the control signal;
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal,
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal, and is mounted on the first printed board. Amusement machine.

(53L) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the first printed board and the second printed board are housed in a single board box.

(53M) The first printed board and the second printed board are housed in different board boxes,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) Each of the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit has an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal,
The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit are input with different voltages, and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A translucent flat plate-shaped decorative member provided with a decoration,
A transparent flat plate-shaped radiation plate provided behind the decorative member and capable of radiating light in a direction along the plate surface to the front within the plate thickness,
A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on the front surface, and a decorative member provided with a decoration substrate provided behind the radiation plate. It is characterized by being provided.

Here, the "decorative member" may be one composed of one member, or one composed of a plurality of members (for example, an embossed portion formed by three-dimensional relief). And a decorative sheet having a pattern).

The "decoration" of the decorative member includes "three-dimensional relief", "two-dimensional pattern", "three-dimensional relief and two-dimensional pattern", and the like. .. Also, "decoration" means "decoration with a logo or characters that conform to the concept of a gaming machine," "decoration that has a character that conforms to the concept of a gaming machine," or "item that follows the concept of a gaming machine." "Decorations with", "Decorations with a scene in line with the game machine concept", and the like.

Further, as the "radiation plate", "a plate having a plurality of LED accommodating portions formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front and accommodating the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear side", "a plate within the plate thickness" Having a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in the direction along the surface forward, "a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front" And the like.” and the like.

Further, examples of the “LED” mounted on the decorative substrate include “side view type LED”, “top view type LED mounted sideways”, and the like. Moreover, examples of the “LED” include “full color LED”, “monochromatic LED”, “two-color LED”, and the like.

Further, as a configuration for irradiating light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate, there are "a configuration for irradiating light from the inner surface of the hole penetrating the radiation plate into the thickness", "radiation plate". ``A structure that irradiates light into the plate thickness from the inner surface of the slit that is penetrated through and is open to the side surface side of the radiation plate'', "From the inner surface of the concave portion that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the radiation plate" Examples of the configuration include a configuration of irradiating light into the plate thickness, and a configuration of irradiating light into the plate thickness from the side surface of the radiation plate.

Further, the "effect member" may be movable or may be fixed without being moved.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is provided with a light-transmissive flat plate-shaped decorative member, and a decorative member provided behind the decorative member, and the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness. Is mounted on the front surface of the plate, and a transparent flat plate that can radiate light in the front and a plurality of LEDs that can emit light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the plate are mounted on the front surface. The decorative member provided on the rear side is provided.

As a result, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative member and the decorative substrate behind the radiation plate are caused to emit light, the light from the LEDs is emitted in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate. The light radiated forward by the radiating plate and radiated forward from the radiating plate causes the light-transmitting decorative member provided with the decoration to be illuminated. At this time, since the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate is reflected forward within the plate thickness of the radiation plate so that the decoration member is illuminated and decorated, the LED is moved forward. Compared to the conventional method in which the light is emitted toward the front, the distance from the front surface of the radiation plate to the front of the radiation plate can be increased, and the light from the LED can be widely diffused to spread the light from the radiation plate. Can be emitted from the front. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit light, it is possible to widely diffuse the light from the LED and to suppress the appearance of emitting light in a dot shape, so that the decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated. It can be displayed neatly, entertaining the player and suppressing a decline in interest. Further, in the effect member, since the decorative substrate provided on the rear side of the flat plate-shaped decorative member and the radiation plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for disposing the effect member can be easily secured. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other effect members, and by providing various effect members, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player more.

Incidentally, the decorative member, a transparent and flat plate-like decorative body having an embossed portion that constitutes at least a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional embossing, and is provided behind the decorative body, It is preferable that the sheet-shaped decorative sheet has a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration. As a result, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is constituted by the decorative body having the relief portion and the decorative sheet having the pattern, the relief portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration. By the lens effect of the relief of the relief portion, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the design of the decorative sheet provided at the rear. Therefore, the embossed portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth, so that the decoration can be performed even if the thickness of the decorative member (the dimension in the front-back direction) is reduced. The effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-described effect can be reliably achieved. it can.

Further, as described above, when the decorative member is configured by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the relief portion, the transparent decorative body Even if the decorative body is not colored, the decorative body can be made to appear colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet, and the cost for the decorative body can be reduced. Further, in this case, since the decoration of the ornamental body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, the game machine can easily cope with a model change or a design change. You can

Further, the decoration member may have a hologram portion which constitutes a part of the decoration and on which a pattern is displayed by light interference fringes. As a result, the light from the LED on the decorative substrate, the light from the other light emitting means provided in the gaming machine, the light in the game hall in which the gaming machine is installed, etc. hits the hologram portion, so that the light is emitted. Since a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the hologram, it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration by the hologram, and to attract the player's attention strongly. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling thinness even if the effect member is made thin.

Further, when the decoration member is provided with a hologram portion, and the decoration member is constituted by a decoration body and a decoration sheet, the hologram portion constitutes at least a part of the pattern on the decoration sheet. Is also good. As a result, since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is configured by the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief portion. It is possible to give a sense of depth to the design and to show the player a decoration that can attract the player's interest. Further, in this case, since the decoration sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, when the decorative member is composed of a decorative body and a decorative sheet, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and then the decorative sheet is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. Is desirable. Thereby, since the outer surface of the decorative sheet is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body by flattening the rear surface of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet, Since there is no frame on the outer circumference of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of openness to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look large. Therefore, the decoration of the effect member (the design of the decorative sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the effect of the effect of the effect member can be sufficiently exerted, and the decoration of the effect member can attract the player's attention. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player.

Further, as described above, when the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flattened, the decorative sheet comes into contact with (abuts on) the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. The pattern on the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect by the pattern on the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exerted.

Further, as described above, when the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member formed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the thickness of the member and can realize the above-described operational effects.

Furthermore, as described above, when the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) with the design of the decorative sheet. By making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the effect member a decoration that is continuous with the effect member, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with a sense of unity, and the visual impact on the player. It is possible to give attention to the game, and to enjoy a large decoration, so that it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, it is desirable that the radiation plate has a plurality of LED housing portions that are formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front and that accommodate the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear. Thus, by housing the LEDs from the rear in the LED housing portion of the radiating plate, the rear surface of the radiating plate and the front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible, and the thickness of the effect member in the front-back direction can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the thickness, and it is possible to reliably embody a gaming machine that achieves the above-described effects.

Further, when the radiation plate is provided with an LED accommodating portion that is capable of accommodating the LED and is recessed toward the front, light from the LED can be emitted from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion into the plate thickness. As compared with the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, even in a portion of the radiation plate where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach (for example, the central portion), the LED housing portion is provided at the portion. By irradiating light from the inner surface, it is possible to make the site emit light brightly, and the decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Further, it is desirable that the LED of the decorative substrate is of a side-view type that can emit light in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate. Thus, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing the LED to emit light, light can be emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiating plate), and thus the light from the LED is directly emitted. Irradiation into the plate thickness of the plate can be facilitated, and the above-described operational effects can be easily achieved.

Further, it is desirable to provide a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness, on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate. Accordingly, when light is emitted from the LED of the decorative substrate in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be radiated forward from almost the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decoration member can be decorated with light emission, and the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, when a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on the rear surface of the radiation plate, light can be radiated to almost the entire decorative member, so that even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed, the light is reflected. It is not necessary to change the parts, and it is possible to easily provide a game machine that can easily respond to changes in the decoration of the decorative member and can easily respond to changes in the model or design.

Furthermore, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors provided on the decorative board on the rear surface of the decorative board. As a result, as compared with the case where electronic parts such as ICs and resistors other than LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the decorative board, the radiation plate is provided by the height of the electronic parts from the board surface of the decorative board. The rear surface can be brought closer to the front surface of the decorative substrate, and the thickness of the effect member can be further reduced.

In addition, as described above, when electronic parts such as ICs and resistors are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, when a side-view type LED is used as the LED, the LED is irradiated in the direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED from being blocked by the electronic component, and the light emitted from the LED can be sufficiently distributed. Therefore, since no shadow can be produced by the electronic parts, the entire decoration member can be uniformly light-emitted and decorated, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking light-emitting effect. Can be decorated with light emission, and an increase in cost for the game machine can be suppressed.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The decorative member is
A transparent and flat ornamental body having an embossed portion that constitutes at least a part of the decoration and is formed by a three-dimensional relief.
It is provided on the rear side of the decorative body and is composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration."

Here, as the "decoration body", the embossed portion may be provided on both the front surface and the rear surface, or the embossed portion may be provided only on the front surface. The part may be provided only on the rear surface.

As the "decorative sheet", "one having a hologram portion on which a pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light" and "one having a prism portion on which countless minute prisms are formed" , “Having a lens portion having innumerable minute lenses formed therein”, “having an opaque portion which makes the rear invisible”, and the like.

As for the relationship between the embossed portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, the embossed portion and the pattern may be related to each other, or the embossed portion and the pattern may be completely unrelated.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative member is a transparent and flat plate-like decorative body having at least a part of the decoration and having a relief portion formed by three-dimensional relief, And a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration.

As a result, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is constituted by the decorative body having the relief portion and the decorative sheet having the pattern, the relief portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration. By the lens effect of the relief of the relief portion, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the design of the decorative sheet provided at the rear. Therefore, the embossed portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth, so that the decoration can be performed even if the thickness of the decorative member (the dimension in the front-back direction) is reduced. The effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-described effect can be reliably achieved. it can.

Further, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the relief portion, the decorative body is colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet even if the transparent decorative body is not colored. It is possible to reduce the cost of the decorative body. Further, since the decoration of the ornamental body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily respond to model changes and design changes.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The decorative member is
It has a hologram part which constitutes a part of the decoration and on which a pattern is displayed by light interference fringes."

Here, examples of the “hologram part” include “transmission type hologram”, “rainbow hologram”, “Lipman hologram”, and the like. Further, the hologram portion may be provided on the surface of the decorative member or may be provided on the rear surface of the decorative member.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the decoration member is provided with the hologram portion that constitutes a part of the decoration and displays the pattern by the interference fringes of light.

As a result, the light from the LED on the decorative substrate, the light from the other light emitting means provided in the gaming machine, the light in the game hall in which the gaming machine is installed, etc. hits the hologram portion, so that the light is emitted. Since a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the hologram, it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration by the hologram, and to attract the player's attention strongly. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling thinness even if the effect member is made thin.

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 3,
"The hologram part is
"It constitutes at least a part of the pattern in the decorative sheet".

According to the configuration of the means 4, the hologram portion constitutes at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet.

As a result, since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is configured by the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief portion. It is possible to give a sense of depth to the design and to show the player a decoration that can attract the player's interest.

Further, since the decoration sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 2 to 4,
"The decorative body has a flat rear surface, and
The decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body”.

By the way, in the prior art like patent document 1, the ornamental body provided in the foremost side in a production member has a flange-shaped part which protrudes backward over substantially the entire circumference. Therefore, when a sheet-shaped decoration sheet is provided behind the decoration body, the size of the outer circumference of the decoration sheet needs to be smaller than the size of the inner circumference of the flange-shaped portion of the decoration body. Since there is a flange part on the outer periphery of the pattern of the decorative sheet that can be seen through, it looks like it is fit into the frame, and the decoration of the production member looks small and the decorative effect can be fully exerted. There is a risk of disappearing.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body.

Thereby, since the outer surface of the decorative sheet is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body by flattening the rear surface of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet, Since there is no frame on the outer circumference of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of openness to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look large. Therefore, the decoration of the effect member (the design of the decorative sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the effect of the effect of the effect member can be sufficiently exerted, and the decoration of the effect member can attract the player's attention. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player.

Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flat, the decorative sheet comes into contact with (abuts on) the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. In addition, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exerted.

Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is made flat, the dimension of the decorative member formed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be made thin and can realize the above-described effects.

Further, since it is possible to decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) with the design of the decorative sheet, the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the effect member is a decoration that is continuous with the effect member. By doing so, it is possible to show a large decoration with a sense of unity to the player, give an impact to the player's appearance and draw attention, and entertain a large decoration, which reduces the player's interest. Can be suppressed.

Means 6: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 5,
"The radiation plate is
It is formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and has a plurality of LED accommodating portions for accommodating the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear”.

Here, the "LED housing portion" includes "a hole-shaped member penetrating the radiation plate in the front-rear direction", "a bottomed concave member that is recessed from the rear surface of the radiation plate toward the front", and "radiation member". A slit-shaped member that penetrates the plate in the front-rear direction and is open to the side surface side" and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front and accommodating the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear.

Accordingly, the radiation plate has the LED housing portion capable of housing the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate. Therefore, by housing the LED from the rear in the LED housing portion, It is possible to make the front surface of the decorative substrate as close as possible, and it is possible to reduce the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to reliably embody the gaming machine that exhibits the above-described operational effects.

In addition, since the radiation plate has the LED housing portion that is recessed toward the front and can accommodate the LED, it is possible to radiate light from the LED from the inner surface of the LED housing portion to the plate thickness. .. As a result, as compared with the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, the LED housing portion is provided at the portion (for example, the central portion) of the radiation plate where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach. By irradiating light from the inner surface of the decorative member, the region can be made to emit light brightly, and the decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
"The LED is
It is a "side-view type" capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the LED of the decorative substrate is of the side-view type that can emit light in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

Thus, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing the LED to emit light, light can be emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiating plate), and thus the light from the LED is directly emitted. Irradiation into the plate thickness of the plate can be facilitated, and the above-described operational effects can be easily achieved.

In the decorative board, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors on the rear surface of the decorative board. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the side-view type LED, which emits light in the direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate, from being blocked by the electronic components, and the light from the LED is sufficiently distributed. You can make it happen. Therefore, since no shadow can be produced by the electronic parts, the entire decoration member can be uniformly light-emitted and decorated, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking light-emitting effect. Can be decorated with light emission, and an increase in cost for the game machine can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 7,
"The radiation plate is
It has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front on substantially the entire rear surface."

Here, as the "reflecting portion", "a quadrangular pyramid shape", "a triangular pyramid shape", a "cone shape", a "pentroof (gable) shape", a "hemispherical shape", Etc. Further, the "reflecting portion" may be provided in a fixed pattern regardless of the position of the LED on the decorative substrate, or may be provided on a concentric arc centered on the corresponding LED.

According to the structure of the means 8, a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting the light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate.

Accordingly, when light is emitted from the LED of the decorative substrate in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be radiated forward from almost the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decoration member can be decorated with light emission, and the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, since the plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, and light can be emitted to almost the entire decorative member, even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed. It is not necessary to change the reflecting portion, and it is possible to easily deal with a change in the decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that easily responds to a model change, a design change, and the like.

Means 9: In the gaming machine,
"A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body having a flat rear surface and having a relief portion which is a part of the decoration and is formed by a three-dimensional relief, and is provided behind the decorative body. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration and a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light, and is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, A flat plate-like decorative member having a light-transmitting property,
A plurality of LED accommodating portions provided on the rear side of the decorative member so as to be recessed from the rear surface to the front side, and substantially the entire rear surface to reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front. A plurality of reflecting portions, and a transparent flat plate-like radiation plate capable of radiating forward light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness by the plurality of reflecting portions,
A plurality of side-view type LEDs, which are housed in the LED housing portion of the radiating plate from the rear and are capable of irradiating light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiating plate, are mounted on the front surface. It is provided with an effect member having a decorative substrate provided at the rear of the plate."

According to the structure of the means 9, the game machine has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body having a flat rear surface which has a relief portion which is a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional relief. , And a pattern which is provided on the rear side of the decorative body and constitutes the rest of the decoration, and a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern is displayed by light interference fringes, and is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. A light-transmissive flat plate-shaped decorative member composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet, and a plurality of LED accommodating portions provided behind the decorative member so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, And a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front on substantially the entire rear surface, and the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness by the plurality of reflecting portions. A transparent flat plate that can radiate light to the front, and multiple side views that are housed from behind in the LED housing of the radiant plate and that can irradiate light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiant plate The LED of the type is mounted on the front surface, and the effect member including the decorative substrate provided behind the radiation plate is provided.

Thus, in the effect member, the transparent radiating plate and the decorative substrate are provided behind the decorative member including the decorative body and the decorative sheet, and the plurality of LEDs formed on the rear surface of the radiating plate. A side-view type LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is inserted into each of the housing portions so as to be housed therein. When a plurality of LEDs mounted on this decorative substrate are caused to emit light, the light from the LEDs is emitted from the inner surface of the LED housing portion in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, and It is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions formed on substantially the entire surface, and is emitted forward from the front surface of the radiation plate. Then, the light radiated forward from the radiation plate is radiated forward through the decorative sheet and the decorative body forming the decorative member, so that the translucent decorative member provided with the decoration is provided. It will be decorated with light. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiating plate is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions within the plate thickness of the radiating plate so that the decorative member is illuminated and decorated. , The distance from the front surface of the radiating plate to the front side of the radiating plate can be increased and the light from the LED can be widened as compared with the case where the LED is radiated toward the front. It can be diffused and emitted forward from the radiation plate. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit light, it is possible to widely diffuse the light from the LED and to suppress the appearance of emitting light in a dot shape, so that the decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated. It can be displayed neatly, entertaining the player and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, in the effect member, since the decorative substrate provided on the rear side of the flat plate-shaped decorative member and the radiation plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for disposing the effect member can be easily secured. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other effect members, and by providing various effect members, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player more.

Furthermore, since the decorative member provided with decoration is composed of a decorative body having a relief portion and a decorative sheet having a pattern, the relief portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration, It is possible to give a feeling of depth to the design of the decorative sheet provided at the rear by the lens effect by the relief of the relief portion. Therefore, the embossed portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth, so that the decoration can be performed even if the thickness of the decorative member (the dimension in the front-back direction) is reduced. The effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-described effect can be reliably achieved. it can.

Further, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the relief portion, the decorative body is colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet even if the transparent decorative body is not colored. It is possible to reduce the cost of the decorative body. Further, since the decoration of the ornamental body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily respond to model changes and design changes.

Further, the decoration sheet of the decoration member has a hologram portion in which a part of a picture as a decoration is displayed by light interference fringes, and the light from the LED of the decoration substrate is provided in the game machine. By hitting the hologram part with light from other light emitting means, light in the game hall where this game machine is installed, etc., it is possible to show a predetermined hologram by the interference fringes of light, so the decoration looks good with the hologram. It is possible to improve the player's attention and to attract the player's attention strongly, and it is possible to give a stereoscopic effect to a part of the decoration of the decoration member by the hologram. It is possible to avoid feeling thinness.

Furthermore, since a part of the design of the decorative sheet is composed of the hologram part, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief part, and thus the pattern of the hologram or the like is formed by the lens effect of the relief part. It is possible to give the player a sense of depth and to show the player a decoration that can strongly attract the player's interest. Further, since the decoration sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, in the decorative member, since the outer surface of the decorative sheet is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body by flattening the rear surface of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no frame on the outer circumference of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of openness to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look large. Therefore, the decoration of the effect member (the design of the decorative sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the effect of the effect of the effect member can be sufficiently exerted, and the decoration of the effect member can attract the player's attention. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player.

Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flat, the decorative sheet comes into contact with (abuts on) the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. In addition, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exerted. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is made flat, the dimension of the decorative member formed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be made thin and can realize the above-described effects.

Further, the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, and since the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative object) can be decorated by the pattern of the decorative sheet, it is adjacent to the effect member. By making the decoration mode of the member that is present continuous with the decoration of the effect member, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with a sense of unity and give the player a visual impact and draw attention. In addition to being able to enjoy a large decoration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are accommodated from the rear side, by accommodating the LEDs from the rear in the LED accommodating portion of the radiation plate, It is possible to make the front surface of the decorative substrate as close as possible, and it is possible to reduce the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to reliably embody the gaming machine that exhibits the above-described operational effects.

Further, since the LED of the decorative board is housed in the LED housing portion of the radiation plate and the light from the LED is emitted from the inner surface of the LED housing portion to within the plate thickness, the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate. Even in the area of the radiation plate where the light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, in the central part), the LED housing section should be provided in the area so that the light is emitted from the inner surface. Thus, it is possible to brightly emit light at the site, and the decoration member can be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

Further, since the LED of the decorative substrate is of the side-view type, it is possible to store the LED in the LED housing portion of the radiating plate and cause the LED to emit light. It is possible to irradiate light in different directions, and it is possible to reliably embody a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described operational effects.

In addition, the rear surface of the radiating plate has a plurality of reflecting portions, and since light can be radiated to almost the entire decorative member, even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed, it will be reflected. It is not necessary to change the parts, and it is possible to easily provide a game machine that can easily respond to changes in the decoration of the decorative member and can easily respond to changes in the model or design.

Means 10: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is
A game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation,
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the game area and capable of receiving the game medium,
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to acceptance of the game media into the receiving port.

Here, as the "reception opening", "general winning opening that is always open in the game area", "advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by receiving the game medium because it is always open in the game area Starting prize hole (starting opening) in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game medium is received in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area. "Variable winning openings that can be accepted (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.)", "Ordinary lottery drawn by the game medium passing through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that allows the receiving of the game medium", "the specific area (for example, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing, it becomes possible to accept the game medium, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the game medium is favored by the acceptance of the game medium. "Prize winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium accepted in the prize winning portion is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", Examples of the advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage include a large winning opening and a winning slot for winning a game medium that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern.

In addition, as a "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which a player has an advantage by receiving a game medium into a starting opening, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means According to the special symbol is displayed after changing the stop display, the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result which is drawn by the combination of the stopped special display lottery, and the advantageous game state in the special lottery result display means When a special lottery result to be generated is displayed, an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing the special winning opening (a so-called digital pachi machine)", "character prize winning" When the distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the player's winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. An advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state (what is called a honey machine), "has a special winning opening and a prize winning opening, and is selected by receiving a game medium into the starting opening Depending on the result of the special lottery, the special winning opening or the special winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the special winning opening is predetermined. And the like, which includes an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing in a pattern of (a so-called multi-function peripheral).

According to the configuration of the means 10, the game machine is provided with a game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of receiving openings arranged in the game area and capable of receiving the game medium, and a game to the receiving opening. A pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to acceptance of media. With this, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-described means.

In addition, it is desirable that the effect of emitting decoration of the decoration member by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decoration substrate (light emission effect) is executed by receiving the game medium driven into the game area into the receiving port. As a result, when a game medium is received in the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and in addition, the effect of decorating the decorative member of the effect member with light emission is executed, so that the player can enjoy the game medium. It is possible to easily continue the driving of the game medium aiming at the entrance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, when a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous game state in which the player receives an advantage of the game medium in the starting opening, and the result of the special lottery is selected, the result is presented to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decoration member of the effect member may be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the decoration member is light-emitted, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect described above and entertain the player. Therefore, the special lottery result selected for the player is the player. It can be assumed that the advantageous game state in which is advantageous occurs (for example, "big hit"), and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect having a higher effect by decorating the decoration member with light-emission, an effect for suggesting to the player the special lottery result selected by the lottery (for example, It can be suitably used for reach production) and can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 11: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of revolving bodies each having a plurality of patterns,
A starting operation unit for rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is loaded,
A plurality of stop operating portions for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, respectively,
A slot machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies that have been rotation stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation parts. It is characterized by being.

Here, as the "slot machine", "the number of effective lines for determining a combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game", "of a plurality of spinning bodies" An internal lottery is executed with the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage is given according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the internal lottery that has been drawn.” "The effective line for determining the combination of stop symbols is fixed Has been done”, and the like. In addition, as "privilege", "big bonus (BB)", "regular bonus (RB)", "cherry rush bonus (CRB)", "replay", "long replay time (LRT)", "assist time ( AT)”, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine is provided with a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a starting operation unit for rotating the plurality of rotating bodies by a player operating the game machine after the game medium is loaded. According to the combination of the stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that have been rotation stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating portions and the plurality of stop operating portions for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, respectively. A slot machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, it is possible to achieve the operational effects of any of the above-mentioned means.

In addition, as for the effect (light effect) in which the decorative member is illuminated by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decorative board, the combination of the symbols whose rotation is stopped except one on the effective line is the combination of the winning symbols. When satisfying (so-called, reach), as one of the effects presented to the player, the decorative member of the effect member may be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the decoration member is light-emitted, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decoration member may be light-emitted and decorated, and thus, the decoration member is light-emitted and decorated, which can give a strong impact to the player. , It is possible to make the player think that the advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage is generated when the game is stopped with a specific combination of symbols (for example, "BB"), and increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect having a higher effect by decorating the decoration member with light-emission, it is suitable for an effect for suggesting to the player the selected internal lottery. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 12: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "fusion machine" that fuses the pachinko machine and the pachi-slot machine is a symbol array consisting of a plurality of symbols in response to the operation of the starting operation unit (eg, the operation lever) after a plurality of game media are loaded. While displaying the variable, after that, the fluctuation of the symbol row is stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, and the advantage advantageous to the player (for example, , Advantageous game state). In addition, when the stop operation part is not operated even after the lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Accordingly, in the fusion machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachi-slot machine are fused, it is possible to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-mentioned means.

In addition, as for the effect (light effect) in which the decorative member is illuminated by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decorative board, the combination of the symbols whose rotation is stopped except one on the effective line is the combination of the winning symbols. As one of the effects presented to the player when it is satisfied (so-called reach), the decorative member of the effect member may be light-emitted and the result of the internal lottery may be selected as a winning combination. At this time, the decoration member may be decorated with light emission, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 to 290. FIG. 279 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 280 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 281 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 282 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 283 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 284 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 285 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 286 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 287 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as seen from the front right. is there. FIG. 288 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 289 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 290 is a pachinko machine including the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 368) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose top view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated to the front so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Main frame upper hinge member 510 and main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for opening and closing the door frame 3 and opening and closing the door frame 3, a main frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640, a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 290), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect in accordance with a game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 for giving (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B). And are equipped with. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. As a result, the player can entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the rear rear effect unit 3100, the lower back. Left rendering unit 3200, back lower right rendering unit 3250, back lower middle rendering unit 3300, back rendering unit 3400, back rear left rendering unit 3500, back rear right rendering unit 3600, back front left rendering unit 3700, back front right rendering It is possible to entertain the player by causing the unit 3800 or the like to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 296. FIG. 291 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 292 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 293 is a right side view of the outer frame. Also, FIG. 294 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 295 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 296 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

As illustrated, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right at a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side surface from a portion opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has strength and rigidity enhanced by the recess 11a and the bulge 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further to the front side. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, with the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, the upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a contact the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, which is rearward of the horizontal fixing portion, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in a rear portion of the right side surface that divides the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a left side portion that is opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The right upper connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and abuts the horizontal fixing portion 22a on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side being in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d that extends in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a contact the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the right end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in the form of a flat plate, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted by penetrating the hooking piece 25b back and forth. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 296. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thus, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recessed portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the rearward position in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a laterally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 is provided with an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to the front surface, the rear curtain member 43 forms a curtain inner space 40a which cooperates with the front curtain member 42 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball B stays in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a that is formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that is opened upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that is opened upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d that extends upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and that the upper surface inclines so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the upper end protruding portion 44e that is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and protrudes forward, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is discharged from the first lower hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the discharge hole 60d. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, in a laterally spaced manner, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 connects the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by the two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the side of the player). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass sound.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 299(b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower frame seen from the front lower side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can rotate. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 mounted on the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends upward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extending portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and a downward extending edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. The horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided with a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extension extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely leftward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock main body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 296. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that vertically penetrates the horizontal portion 60a and allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, and rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, so that it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 300 to 308. 300 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 301 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 302 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 303 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 304 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 305 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 306 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 307 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 308 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed into a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 mounted on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) having a vertically extending outer shape in a front view, and has a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view, and the speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The door-relay relay substrate 106, the door-frame main relay substrate 104, and a part of the door-frame sub-relay substrate 105 from the rear side, and the handle-relay relay substrate 106 from the rear side. The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable are provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved to the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for performing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. 309(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. FIG. 310 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 311 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, The rear side of the door frame base 101 is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the rear end of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 has a door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed at a lower right corner in a front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes further forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. And a recessed portion 101c that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted into the recessed portion 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are moved forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, a top plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and which penetrate the front and rear sides. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, penetrates the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle attaching member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from a rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) protrusions 102c that project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c are aligned with the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 by: The axis of the tubular portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the dish unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311 and the like. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a rectangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (FIG. 361). And FIG. 362) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of a rectangle extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. For relaying the connection between the window interior decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portion extending vertically above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle with the outer shape extending leftward and rightward, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. In the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear handle rear substrate 106 is covered by the rear handle relay substrate cover 108.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a portion of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape in which the front side and the left side in front view are opened. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcing frame 111 which is attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of vertically-spaced rear mountings of the right reinforcing frame 112 are attached to the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. And a hook member 116 to be hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction so that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper dish ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a flat plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In this door frame reinforcing unit 110, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the state of being attached to the door frame base 101 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. Then, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 movably attached to the hinge bracket 121 in a vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a that is square in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b that extends forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 cooperates with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can rotate.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 300 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to lock and close the door. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 to be a regular cylinder. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 300 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313. FIG. 312(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 312(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 313(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 313(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box shape that is opened at the front and that has entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540 and a front cover rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. A rear cover 142 for each of a ball removing member 143 having a partition 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of 141, and game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

In the ball feeding unit 140, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. In addition, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper plate ball 241b. Also, it is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the upstream end side of the ball guide passage 241c from the rear side.

The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bent in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extending in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 143b rotatably supported on the rod 143b, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rod 143b, and the rod 143b below the rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 312(a)). The operating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball pulling button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partition 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the rod 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking section 144a faces the partition section 143a, and at the same time, the ball holding section 144b faces the ball hitting supply port 142a, and the ball holding section 144b has the partition section 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked by the blocking section 144a from moving toward the ball holding section 144b (striking ball supply port 142a), and remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the rod portion 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is vertically swung by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is vertically swung in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) on the opposite side to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front and rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 is fed around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side near the crank 147 moves upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. The shaft portion 147b is disposed on the side opposite to the side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 313(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated about an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 484) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by a ball pulling member 143 pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not enter.

Then, when the player presses down the upper bowl ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the operation transmitting portion 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partitioning part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide passage 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the force is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. It can be prevented from bouncing back at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 313(b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The tampering prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a and an upper piece portion 148a which are vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left side. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamper proof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 to be attached to the illegal gaming ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed by operating the provided string to move the illegal game ball B into and out of the first starting opening 2002 and the like, the illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launching device 540 The string attached to the illegal game ball B by force is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal gaming ball B with a string attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 and 315. FIG. 314(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 314(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. Further, FIG. 315 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit body 151. And 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. The ball passage 150a and a full tank receiving passage 610b of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4 which is open rearward on the lower right side in a front view of the through ball passage 150a and can communicate with each other. And a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full tank receiving port 150b when viewed from the front side. Foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c opening forward near the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game ball B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 369). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves downward as it goes downward. When the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308. The glass unit 160 is removably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and at the same time the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

The glass unit 160 is a frame-shaped glass frame 161 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and attachable to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 375). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 375).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base portion 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by the procedure reverse to the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attachable to and detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the regulation of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 has a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 173 projecting forward of the main body 171 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not project into the game area 5a in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

The security cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is protruded rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. . As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 316 and the like. FIG. 316(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 316(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cover pedestal 183 and a front surface of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and an inner base 186 and the handle base 181 rotatably attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner member. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side in a front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 and the base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b radially protruding from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state where the three grooves 181c are aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four rotating shafts (shaft members 187) and four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 182e extending in an arcuate shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the handle return spring 190 are locked by protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 182e. The locking projection 182f is provided.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is concave (curved) so as to be curved inward. The second protrusion 182b is such that the portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And has a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a.

The third protrusion 182c has a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182c has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The fourth projection 182d is such that the portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most projecting portion of the third projection 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees. It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has a light-transmitting property. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side), so that the handle mounting member 102 is The handle unit 180 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and can perform the turning operation without feeling a sense of discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated most clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state for the player by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. It is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320. FIG. 317 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 318 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 319 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 320 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The dish unit 200 has an upper dish 201 and is attached to the front face of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 is attached to the front face of the dish base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213; An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

The production operation unit 300 includes, as the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light, a decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. Vibrating speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

The whole dish unit 200 is bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged such that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is provided with the ball lending operation unit 220 on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is provided on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the frontmost. The upper plate 201 is a guide passage portion 201a (FIG. 324) in which the front end recedes rearward as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulged portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a from a position lower than the upper plate ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of B toward the position. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically, and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, so that the lower dish ball supply port 211c is moved forward. The discharged game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 321 to 324. FIG. 321 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 322 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 323 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 324 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit base 211. The main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper dish main body 212 in the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protruding forward, and attached to the right side of the attachment base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and an upper dish removal unit 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. An upper plate ball removal unit 240 that is mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and on the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left of the center in the front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of a portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. And an upper plate ball feed port 211e, which extends vertically and which is located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e, and the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and to the left of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion port 211g that penetrates through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball-removing slider 242 in the upper plate ball-removing unit 240 is inserted, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h into which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates in the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101 when assembled in the door frame 3. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. Thereby, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the plate ball and the cutout portion 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges more toward the front than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulged portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit 200 so that the closed upper part near the right end of the upper plate main body 212 goes under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper portion, and a part of the production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates near the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. A wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay substrate 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay substrate 105 of the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, the dish upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, and the plate lower right decorative substrate 288. , And relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting projection 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 324. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). (Omitted) After inserting cash or prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine It is for the purpose of, for example, cash or a prepaid card inserted in a ball lending machine to be returned after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper bowl ball removal button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented gaming ball B is subtracted from the cash or the prepaid card loaded into the ball lending machine and the card is returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing bowl and bowl after removal]
The upper plate removal unit 230 and the upper plate removal unit 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. The upper plate removing unit 230 and the upper plate removing unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper plate removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower plate 202.

The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placing projection 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removal of the upper bowl is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the unit 230 before removal of the upper bowl.

The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and has a vertically extending cylindrical front base 231, and a front base 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the cylinder. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the vicinity of the front of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, the upper end thereof is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removing button 222, and the lower end of the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 of the upper plate bowl removing unit 242. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port 211e and the slider insertion opening 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 biasing the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Is equipped with.

The rear base 241 is a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a which project upward from the site where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and which is opened forward. A ball feed guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game from a position lower than the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. And a ball pull-out guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guiding path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guide passage 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and projects forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

In the units 230 before and after removing the upper bowl ball, the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 is moved. Through the front slider 232, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 is positioned at the upper end of the movement. Further, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c contacting the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. Therefore, the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in the state where the upper bowl ball-removing button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball guide passage 241c, and then downward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation-transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

In this way, by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. FIG. 325 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 326 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 327 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 328 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decor unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower portion of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The dish unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and the dishes which are attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 280 attached below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate plate 275, respectively, over the entire surface of the plate unit body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328. The lower plate body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear part is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects further forward than the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball-draining hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate body 251 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal lid 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the lower dish main body 251 has a bottom surface located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 in the state where it is assembled to the dish unit 200, and the lower dish ball vent hole 202a supplies the lower dish ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right sides toward the center in the left-right direction in the upper portion, extends downward, and is spaced apart in the left-right direction. Includes a lower front decoration portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decoration portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear side, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270, a plate lower left decoration unit 280, a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower right decoration unit are formed on the front surface of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front surface decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front face decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's finger to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the top and bottom thereof become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Further, the dish unit body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower end of the front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, and a lower plate body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom surface cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region that is below. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and above the handle insertion opening 252g, the lower front surface. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . Further, when assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower dish ball removal base 261 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is exposed. The bottom surface cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and stores the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharges the game ball B from the lower dish 202 by opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. It is for making things happen.

The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that vertically penetrates in the right front corner in plan view, and the lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted on the upper surface side of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted on the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. A lower bowl removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower bowl removal lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically arranged at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape that extends in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the lower plate ball punching base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction at a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left end side to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and on the right end side, the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit body 252. In the lower dish ball removal unit 260, in a normal state, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower dish ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower dish ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is substantially coincident with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When this slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole to the rear from the position of the through hole, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the lower plate bowl removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the opened state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pressed rearward to release the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266. It Then, when the lower plate ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removing button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 has a translucent plate upper left decoration 271 that extends in the left-right direction and has a semi-cylindrical shape, and a plate upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left decoration 271. And a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper left decoration 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the plate upper left decoration 271 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate upper left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical right and left translucent dish upper right decoration member 276, and a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decoration member 276. And a plate upper right decoration board 278 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from the rear into the dish upper right decoration body 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish upper right decoration body 276 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper right decoration unit 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper right decoration unit 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 partially project upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled to the door frame 3. It is possible to form a raised step between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 side. Thereby, the player can hook his/her finger by utilizing the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is evened. It can be used as a finger hook when performing or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. Further, due to the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing out forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. Be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The dish lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends to the left and right, and has a translucent lower plate left ornamental body 281, and a dish lower left decorator 282 attached to the rear side of the plate lower left ornamental body 281. And a plate left lower decorative substrate 283 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 has a spherical shape. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc curvature that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decoration 281 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower plate left decorative body 281 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

In the state where the plate lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left edge. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end goes into the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is displayed. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right ornamental body 286, and a plate lower right dish attached to the rear side of the dish lower right ornamental body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decoration board 288 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rear center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The plate lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear into the plate lower right decoration body 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. The lower right dish unit 285 of the lower right dish unit 285 is formed into a spherical shape at the lower end of the lower dish unit 286, so that the right end of the dish unit 285 appears to be submerged in the door frame 3. Since the plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower right decoration unit 286, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the plate lower right decoration unit 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be decorated with a substantially uniform light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 329 to 332 and the like. FIG. 329 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 330(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 330(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 331 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 332 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The production operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is configured with an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b arranged between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

The performance operation unit 300 is mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the performance operation unit cover unit 310, the operation unit base 320 housed in the performance operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape having an open upper portion and a rear portion.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 which is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 which is attached to a front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A plate center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear inside the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted on the plate front lower light And a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 is swollen downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction to the front side, and the rear side from this is the production operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 has a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and a forward direction below the dish central upper decorating body 312a. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is formed so that the bulging half arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in the shape of a half arc. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration body 312b extends in a semi-arcuate shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration body 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects more forward than the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state in which the dish unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decoration body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body is The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the plate lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the entire width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the plate center upper decorative member 312a can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The lower plate center reflector 315 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center lower decoration substrate 316 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate lower central decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the plate lower central decoration 312b can be made to emit light by emitting light.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semi-arcuate shape. When the LEDs of the central upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate of the plate lower central decorative substrate 316 are made to emit light, the whole of each can be made to emit light substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The effect operation section cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that protrudes farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower center decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 whose outer shape is formed into a box shape having a substantially cubic shape and which is open at the upper side, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (in this case, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion that is formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and is attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 for penetrating the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opening upward and for rotatably supporting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The main body 321 of the operation section base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 inside. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

In the gear bearing portion 325, the operation ring transmission gear can be mounted rotatably around the axis extending in the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has the flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 333 and 334 and the like. FIG. 333(a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 333(b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 334(a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from above and FIG. 334(b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about the axis extending vertically and a plurality of bushes 333 that are attached to the ring mounting base 331 and move the rotation base 332 upward. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates the ring.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 forming a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operating portion 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operating portion 302. And a ring inner cover 337 which is provided. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light-transmitting annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring attachment base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface in the circumferential direction. And a boss portion 331b for protrudingly mounting the bush 333 rotatably upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a circumferentially spaced outer side from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352.

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to project downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer upper cover attaching portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral edge of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of the circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer ring lower cover 336 has a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a in which circular outer and lower circular arcs extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a project from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a to the upper side and the center side in the circumferential direction. And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a tube extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c that is formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and that is arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in the range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state in which they are assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and have a donut shape as a whole. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotational drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 335 to 337. FIG. 335(a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 335(b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 336 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right side, and FIG. 337 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346 and.

The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally formed with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance between them in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integer multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, but one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the performance operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to freely rotate the rotary operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to cause the drive gear 343 to repeat forward/reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the contents of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation is performed. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 integrally rotates with the bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340 is performed. The spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting the operation ring transmission gear 350 into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and attaching the gear attachment member 351 to the operation portion base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is provided. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. The effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a shape in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 is made to emit light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof to pass through the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331, and outside the ring forming the rotation operation section 302. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, the player can see a light-emitting decoration such as an LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a variety of effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 338 to 340 and the like. FIG. 338 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 339 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and viewed from the lower front. FIG. 340(a) is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and (b) is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical center press operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation portion 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. And a pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urge the elevating base 364 upward are provided.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, an elevating cam driving gear member 370, a lower end of which is connected, a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and an elevating cam member 371 that elevates and lowers the elevating base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. Central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button main body 373 and the elevating base 364 for urging the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373. A central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper portion of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button operation unit 303a is configured by the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 which covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decoration lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and ascending/descending so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decoration lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward in the center thereof is provided. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 form an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a lower surface of the pressing detection sensor 381 and the lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361, respectively, from the center to the front and the rear at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating through the center with a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward due to the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c contacting the upper base 363, and a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move is formed between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downward from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 340). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided at its lower end with a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370.

The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the lift cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

The central button main body 373 has a pair of guide shafts that penetrates the cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at a center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts the upper surface of the elevating base 364, so that the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have a light-transmitting property. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the center button body 373.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the central button decoration substrate 376 are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are full-color LEDs. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can cause the peripheral decoration lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and has an annular base plate portion 378a that is attached to the elevating base 364, and a cylindrical shape that extends upward from the inner periphery of the base plate portion 378a. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer circumference. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

In the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decoration lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the tubular portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 340(a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upper end of the upward movement by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

Therefore, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 exceeds the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 341 etc.).

In this state (state of FIG. 340(a)), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button body 373 is pressed. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the top surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially matching the top surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 343(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the up-and-down cam drive is performed via the driven gear 369 meshed with the up-and-down drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 340 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 340(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being largely protruded from the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 343(b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of projecting below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is apart from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, so that the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this manner, when the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating spring 368 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 340(b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 stops moving downward and the guide pin 364d moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lift drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 are relayed. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 341 to 343 and the like. FIG. 341 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 343(a) is a front view of the dish unit in a normal state, FIG. 343(b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged inside the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation section 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation section 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating section 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation section arranged between the central pressing operation section 303 a and the rotating operation section 302. And 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined such that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 projects slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 341 etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operating portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 to rotate. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is larger than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. When the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened to assist. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavy or to give a click feeling.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by a player's hand. ..

As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a manner that is easy for the player to do and operate the rotation operation unit 302. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be grasped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 342, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged in a row below the effect operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged along the rotation operation section 302, the plurality of LEDs that are lined up are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation section 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state, in the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 343(a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation part 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation part 303a of the pressing operation part 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and press detection is performed. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 comes off from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 343(b)). In the state of this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are the rotational operation portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 343(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 343(a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the moving end downward regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players may find it easier to perform a rotating operation with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be a hindrance to the rotational operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 344 to 346. FIG. 344(a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 344(b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. 345 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 346 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decoration board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402, The door frame left side decoration body 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decoration board 402 can make the door frame left side decoration body 404 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating therethrough in the position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward is extended vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and looks like a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 347 to 349. FIG. 347(a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 347(b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. 348 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 349 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window interior decorations 410b capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see in the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player who is playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and it is possible to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b that are attached to the front surface, extend in a cylindrical shape forward, and are vertically arranged, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the side window interior decoration member 412. Internal reflectors 414 are respectively inserted inside the side window decorations 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416 and the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is a flat plate in the up-down direction and the front-back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side inner panel 417 formed with a through hole 417a that extends in a horizontal direction and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decoration board 418 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decoration member 412, the front end of the side window decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 at a position above the center in the vertical direction and above the center. The side window decoration member 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

The decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the decoration member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the decoration part 410b in the side window at a position behind each of the decoration parts 410b in the side window. Has been done.

The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then rearward from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 has a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, the rear side thereof extends vertically in a straight line, and the front side thereof extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, the rear side extends vertically in a straight line, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and is connected to the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wavy shape so that a 1/4 portion of the door frame right side unit 410 protrudes most forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and makes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 emit light. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 for causing the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light are turned off. It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (at the end of the island equipment) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily operated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity by the other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the whole of the game area 5a difficult for a player to see, and to make it difficult for a player to feel as if being seen by another player, so that another player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three LEDs on the side window interior decoration part 410b are caused to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b are cylindrical, light is emitted in a band shape and in a radial shape. Therefore, the side window interior decorations 410b are made dazzling and the opposite side from the other side. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player, such as the neighbor, to look into the game area 5a. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on the game and to feel uncomfortable due to the induction of mistakes, and to make the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 350 to 352. FIG. 350(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 350(b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 351 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 352 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and covers the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. A top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and a door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456 which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. I have it.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top right decoration board 457. And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 mounted near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively mounted on the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top. A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending leftward and rightward with the same length as the left-right width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right ends near the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protrusion 451b protruding forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed to have a shape in front view substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451b. At the front end of the top top cover 452, the center in the left-right direction protrudes most forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the top surface, which is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which the semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower ends of the door frame top decorations 453 and the lower ends of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically above and outside the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decoration board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can cause the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 each extend in the left-right direction, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating forward and backward are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sound such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay substrate 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 353 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate center upper decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs on these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and decorated. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction, and a coaxial arrangement in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation section 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation section 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotating operation section 302 is provided below the rotating operation section 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter upper decoration body 312a and lower-plate middle decoration body 312b are mounted vertically separated from each other and Door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of the door frame right side unit 410 of the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. The door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, the three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b, and the rotation operation part 302 and the outer periphery are arranged. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be conspicuous.

In addition, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the plate lower center decoration 312b arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a are The thickness of the tubular tube is made slightly thin, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the up-down direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side and operable by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the rotation from the player is performed. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easily visible, and to make the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, so that the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. It is possible to rotate the operation unit 302, and by operating the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-back direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotation operation part 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected to the front side more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center top Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made to stand out greatly. At the same time, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 360. FIG. 354 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 355 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 356 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 357 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 358 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 359 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 360 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and a main body frame. Main body lower hinge assembly attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. The ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, the inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank that is attached to the payout base 551 and extends upward in the shape of a box that extends left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape that is opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 362 and the like. FIG. 361(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 361(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 362 (a) to (c) of FIG. 362 are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape in which a front view extends vertically and a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 on which the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed is placed. It is provided with a placement portion 501c and a game board regulation portion 501d which projects upward from the center of the game board placement portion 501c in the left-right direction and which restricts the lower end of the game board 5 from moving to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the front and back on the right side of the front side of the portion 501e when the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and back, which penetrates the front and rear on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view, the substrate unit. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the front side below the game board mounting portion 501c and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a that extends left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right sides that penetrate through the guide body 502a in the front and rear directions. A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 362 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a of 502, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at both upper and lower end sides of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 362(a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (desirably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 362(b)).

The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases as the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle that intersects the tangent line to the circle that passes through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The body frame upper hinge member 510 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is also the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. A main body frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view in a horizontally extending portion, and has an upper hinge hole 511a for a door frame for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120. I have it.

The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged such that the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is spaced apart from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U shape with the right side opened in plan view. The groove portion 530a is for inserting the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes a meandering state in a plan view, and an illegal tool is left from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 363 and the like. FIG. 363(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 363(b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the ball hammer 543, which has a base end attached to the rotary shaft of the firing solenoid 542, the firing solenoid 542, which is a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541. A launch rail 544 is provided which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is rotated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

Note that, due to the driving strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach the inside of the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 364(a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 364(b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view in the front-rear direction with a width substantially the same as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c of the front plate portion 551a, which has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From the rear plate upper part 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate part 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate part 551b to the right side to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and from the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g that extends to substantially the same position as the right side of the left back plate 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h that connects the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is opened inward of the front and the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing base portion 551 A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward, is provided.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and is located on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and the rear, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially matches the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at an upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 370). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B circulating in two stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying it so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, the inside of the tank rail 553 Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in a front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366. FIG. 365(a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 365(b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 366(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 366(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the upper full ball path unit 580b. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game sphere B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 from the rear, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guide unit 570 has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that has a guide path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the game ball B can flow, and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guide unit base 571. The flat guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 370).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while being repeatedly folded back and forth between the widths of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at the right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a and not protruding. Becomes

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 to 368 and the like. FIG. 367 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit taken along the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 368(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 368(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 has a box-like opening to the rear, through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and meshes with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and the payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581, and the payout device rear side. It is possible to hold the ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing passage 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the position where the ball-removing movable piece 592 closes the ball-removing passage 580b. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 367, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near a right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there. It bends at about 1/3 of the width on the left and right and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer circumference of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape of a concentric circle with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

The ball drop passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached in the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rearward in a rear view at a position at a height of about 1/3 from above. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form a side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout vane 589 is provided with a plurality of vane pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at three intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in a portion that extends toward the rotation axis from above in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout vane 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left side near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. The ball pull-out lever 593 partially penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can be brought into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 368).

When the ball-removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, has a ball-removing movable piece 592. Therefore, it will flow down to the side of the ball passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is closer to the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

In this way, in the state in which the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, and thus the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can move to the outside of the inner surface of the ball-removing passage 580b, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. There is no pinching between the wall surface of the withdrawal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent a strong force from acting on the ball withdrawal movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and withdrawal of the ball due to the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and damage of the piece 592.

From this, since it is possible to make it difficult for the ball-removing movable piece 592 to be damaged, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus pachinko. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball-removing movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball-removing passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the gap is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, by blocking the movement of the game ball B to the outside by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is based on the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball movable piece 592 can be less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a front view extending vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 which is attached to the dispensing base 551 and whose rear side is open, and a upper open tank base 601 which is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and whose front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and that can push the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in a front view and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends about 3/4 of the overall width to the right in front view and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c and an upper portion. An upper tank full discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball-removing passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 370).

On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in order and open downward. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are lined up on the upper surface of a portion extending upward from the rear end in order from the left when viewed from the front. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in front view, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (the downstream end (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 as viewed from the front, and the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to contact the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are respectively installed at the upper full. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

Further, the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613. Rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 370. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 which is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of a ball out by the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied/stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game ball B housed in the ball storage portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B emitted from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball delivery path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storing passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side are reached. It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-filled ball path unit 600 that is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is connected. While the game ball B starts to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received by After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detected state.

When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, in the region of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 371 to 375 and the like. 371(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 371(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 372 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the bottom rear side. FIG. 373 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 374 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 375 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The speaker unit 620a is directed to the front in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b which projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends obliquely downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. In addition, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is mainly a cone type speaker that outputs a low tone.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and a portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Are formed so that the protrusion of the is small. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 as viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in a front view in the speaker cover 621. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43a so that the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inserted. And the space inside the curtain plate 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622, the enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the lower outer frame assembly 40 side through the connection tubular portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 by being resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in the state in which the phase is inverted, so that the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is transmitted to the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass sound. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives the game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 and that is open upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball pulling-out guide portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is discharged downward.

The upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is open to the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end is open to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball drop guiding portion 627 is opposed so that the opening at the upstream end thereof coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long in the left and right directions. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 at the front end, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball removal guiding unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the gas is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632. 375)). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the like. This is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost of the body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 360. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The right side of the back cover 640 in front view is attached to the rear end of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and the left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. Are attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper tank ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the dispensing base 551 is assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating forward and backward and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 376. FIG. 376(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 376(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 which is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 which project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the locking unit 650 assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are located forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and keeps the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key, which is engaged with the transmission member 133 and is inserted into the key hole 132, is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereby a plurality of transmission cylinders 654 are provided. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, so that the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 377 to 384. FIG. 377(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 377(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 378 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. FIG. 379(a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 379(b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 380 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 379(a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 381 is an explanatory diagram showing a region where game balls overflowing from the ball tank flow in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 382 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 383 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 384 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from the outer frame 2 and hinged by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream side end, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. Is equipped with.

The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangle that extends in the left-right direction in a plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that its left side is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with the upper side opened. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end portion of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end portion on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) by about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. Is formed over the entire length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a trough-shaped main guiding portion 553a extending from the upstream vicinity to the downstream end at the bottom portion, and the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game ball B is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed. Have The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left side in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward after extending from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis extending leftward from the right end in the plan view. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. . In the tank guide rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a that extends from the left end to the right in the left-right direction in parallel to the axis extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in a row in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b which bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and whose width direction narrows from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of gaming balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes one line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated from the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Therefore, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the abutting bulging portion 553b. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the generation of spherical balls in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since it becomes difficult to disperse the reaction force, the game ball B inside is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape, and ball clogging (ball clogging) easily occurs. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows through the inside. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball clogging) can be made difficult to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, which is of interest to the player due to the interruption of the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 When a malfunction occurs in the movable production unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. The effect of can be achieved.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m extend rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m while being inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower. And a bypass passage 552g for guiding.

In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides in the left-right direction of the bypass passage 552g, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and It is provided at a position lower than the overflow portion 551j on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open. And an outer terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear side and an upper side of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and an upper surface thereof is an overflow surface portion. And a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, to a rear side. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left upper portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both laterally outer side, the upper ends are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, and extend in the front-rear direction in the shape of a strip plate. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is flush with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m is The left end of the right-hand side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right-side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region enclosed by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also only called the ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and has a front end that is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end becomes lower 552h. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552d of the passage surface 552h to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in a front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g has its rear end along the front end side of a portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right crank shape in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game ball B which is substantially vertical (right angle direction), the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made less likely to occur.

The detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end of the detour passage moves toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553. When discharged, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball debris in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide area.

In addition, the part that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this portion, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from inside the ball tank 552. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, and thus the detour passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b in front view. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of about ½ of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and then extends in the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, It is formed in parallel with the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about ⅓ of the entire length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the right wall side end of the front wall 552b and the rear wall 552c. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. The ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange extending outward in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Is formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely in the left-right direction in the left-right direction are positioned behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )is doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so as to be lowered stepwise rearward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, and then becomes higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after extending to the (nearby position).

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a mounted on the rear surface thereof in a state of being aligned in the left-right direction. The electric wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped by operating the lever. The external terminal board 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, as for the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. It is possible to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface part 501m, and at the same time, to flow from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface part 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by tilting the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 382). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a further increase in the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball crush) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 383, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side which is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

Further, at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is set higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, so that the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and then flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is more than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also higher, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. The flow can be made to flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and being bitten by the directions of the pressures applied to the game balls B being scattered, and the occurrence of the jamming of the game balls B. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that the game balls B in the left and right direction form a line. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the site where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a line in the width direction as they head toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that have been stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, by the tank rail 553, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) while being aligned in a line.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a( Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, the contact of the game ball B does not cause a problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of electric wiring.

Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface section 501m, or to make it difficult for the game ball B to fall from the rear side even if it rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 382) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 382, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by the inclination thereof, and the problem occurs because the game ball B spills out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

Further, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game ball that is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 385 to 393. FIG. 385 is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 386 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 385 seen from the right front side, FIG. 387 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 385 seen from the left front side, and FIG. 388 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back side. .. FIG. 389 is a front view of the game board in which the front component members, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. FIG. 390 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 391 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. 392 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 385. FIG. 393 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area in which the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail.

In the following, when the LED mounted on the decoration substrate has a square shape when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in the direction parallel to the surface of the decoration board (side view LED). Detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion which give a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B. A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. In 2006 or the like, the game is to entertain or pass the handle 182, and to play the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a substantially square shape in front view, and a rear end of the game region 5a that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 393, etc.) that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the game is carried out by hitting the game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 392 and 484, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 394, etc.) that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. An effect board 1720 for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, and a drive board box 1730 for accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 are provided. The rear side of the drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the right side of the drive substrate box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, the first big winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening which enables the acceptance of the game ball B It is provided with a second special winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a, and an outlet 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the inside of the game area 5a, and a game ball B provided in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging from the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side, which is slightly on the upper left side. 2300 and a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. The first attacker unit 2400, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and the center role. A second attacker unit 2600 provided on the right side of the object 2500 above the first attacker unit 2400 and having a second special winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600 provided above the second attacker unit 2600. A side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003 are provided. There is.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall that is open to the front. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010 and the flat front left decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower portion of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. A lower back left effect unit 3200 and a lower right effect unit 3250, and a lower back middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the lower left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the rear front right decoration 3040 in the rear box 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in the back box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500 and front front right production unit 3600 provided between front front right decorative body 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800 and.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 394(a) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 394(b) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel as seen from the rear.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear (out port 2010).

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stopper 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends forward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component member 1000 is provided with an out port 2010 penetrating forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The out opening 2010 is penetrated by a width in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 are arranged to face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a functional display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the functional display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparent, and the game panel 1100, the rear unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component member 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. , It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the front component member 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player's side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the front unit 1000 is attached on the rear side and the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 393, etc.).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge, and a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole and a short long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of engaging stepped portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

As shown in FIG. 394, in the panel plate 1110, a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset to the upper right from the center in a front view. Thereby, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B (circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and a holding step portion (not shown) which is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion has a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the lower full tank ball. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. The tubular portion 3081 of the out-ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into the out recess 1123.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step and a plurality of projecting pins that project forward from the holding step and are respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. The three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. And a pair of engaging pieces that engage with the two engaging step portions on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above, and moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to incline the upper side and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion where it is engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component member 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and it is possible to make the game area 5a appear large (wide) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front component member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted to the front (player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the rear unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. This substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below. You can

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 to 392. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 484) that controls game contents and payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first big winning opening sensor 2402, and a second big winning opening. The sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, the second sub-out sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 385 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400, a detailed illustration of which is omitted in the figure, displays a status indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result selected by the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B in the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The first special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. ing.

Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “win” or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 (the number of rounds). It has a round display consisting of five LEDs for displaying.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 388, 391, 392, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 484) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the substantially center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color effect display device using a white LED as a backlight, and has a width substantially the same as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1602 protruding downward from the lower end surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c that are opened in an upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right at.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 395(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Through, and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B hit in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 or the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. Different from the first big winning opening 2005 and the first big winning opening 2005 in which it is possible to receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B It is possible to receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is provided at the position and is selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The second big winning opening 2006.

Of the plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 at the bottom end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a lower right corner of the game area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out opening 2011 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is arranged on the right side of the right general winning opening 2001.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side slightly to the left. 2300 and the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. A first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. ing.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, above the first attacker unit 2400, and has a second special winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600. Of the side right middle unit 2700, which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has one general winning opening 2001 and the second sub-out opening 2012, and has a gate portion 2003 provided above the side right middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800 which is installed.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398. FIG. 396(a) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 396(b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear, (c) ) Is a left side view of the starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 397 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening with the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 398 is an enlarged front view showing portions of the starting opening unit and the side unit in the game board. The start-up unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out-port 2010 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting opening unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending in parallel with a surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from a peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending from the middle in the front-rear direction to the outer side in the left-right direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape in which a front view shape is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long in the left and right and a semicircular portion whose lower side is a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101 and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110 in a state of being attached to the panel plate 1110. Is forming.

By attaching the starting opening unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting opening 2002 projects forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and then opens upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is reached. Located just below the center of the. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 and guides the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 toward the rear of the gaming panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102, and the back unit 3000. Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Although illustration is omitted, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so as to stand out from the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be prompted to drive the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002. A lottery of special lottery results (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state in which a player, such as a "big hit" game, is advantageous, is performed by allowing the game ball B to be received in the first starting opening 2002 Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

In this starting opening unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B to the rear is inclined at a gentler angle (angle near horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B toward the rear is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting opening 2002, and the pleasure (sense of superiority) of the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning opening 2001. It can be enjoyed for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

Further, in the state where the starting opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 398, the under-rear production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear and is provided in the under-reliment production unit 3300. Light is emitted and decorated by the light from the LEDs of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decoration substrate 3329 of the existing lower back middle decoration unit 3320.

Further, although not shown in detail, in the starting opening unit 2100, a rib may be provided that extends over the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102. The rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part may be rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning opening 2001. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 to the inclined portion. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 comes into contact with the rib and is guided rearward. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is in the first front wall 2203. It is possible to delay the timing of contacting the inclined portion and guiding it to the rear, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side open upward.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate and a second base plate that extends from the base plate back and forth in a gutter shape and is inclined so that the front end thereof moves rearward as it goes downward and is separated from the left and right sides. One guide gutter, a first front wall part that closes the front end sides of the two first guide gutters, and a gutter-like extension from the base plate to the front and back on the left side of the two first guide gutters. And a second front gutter that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion facing upward, and the second guide gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion facing upper left. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 extends vertically with the upper part of the front gutter 2202 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom as a boundary, and near the base plate 2201 so that the lower side moves backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally up to. Therefore, the first front wall 2203 closing the front end side of the first guide trough 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position at a height of about 3/4 from below.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide trough 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the base plate 2201 being in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Then, the first projection gutter 2202 and the second guidance gutter 2204 part that protrudes more forward than the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall 2203 and the second front wall 2205 can receive the game ball B. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. Further, in the side unit 2200, in a state where the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 that project rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrate the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Then, it projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be guided to the rear.

The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the back delivery unit 3050 of the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B transferred to any of the second transfer opening 3062, the third transfer opening 3063, and the fourth transfer opening 3064 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then the game ball B is located below. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

Unlike the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker attached to the first front wall 2203 or the second front wall 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, It is less visible than the first starting port 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and the decoration sticker is not attached to the front surface. , Doesn't look bad.

In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 398, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located rearward, and the back lower left decoration in the back lower left effect unit 3200. The light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light emission decoration, and the back lower counterclockwise decoration 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a portion that is inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the rear lower left of the back unit 3000 due to the portion. The light emitted forward from the lower left left decorative substrate 3203 of the rendering unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the light of the pachinko machine 1 can be reflected. You can improve the appearance.

In the side unit 2200, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, and thus is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is fast. The bottom surfaces of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily attracted to the general winning opening 2001 for a long time while surely allowing the player to recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, it is possible to make the player's interest easily directed to the next game ball B, other winning holes such as the first starting opening 2002, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, and the like. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

In other words, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting opening 2002, and the pleasure (sense of superiority) of the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning opening 2001. It can be enjoyed for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is located from the side of the first guide trough 2202. It is possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined portion of the game ball B. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so that the game ball B is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. There is a risk that the player will feel distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side because the gaming ball B is not paid out, and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall 2203 and the first guide trough 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and moved backward. Since the player can visually recognize the guided game ball B for a short time, it can be recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if an illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

Further, in this side unit 2200, a part of the game ball B is allowed to pass in front of the first front wall part 2203, so that the front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is in front of the game ball. When most of the game ball B (at least half of the game ball B) overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 when B passes through, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. It is possible to entertain the player by giving the illusion of being accepted. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning hole 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and it can be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, even if no bonus (payout of the game ball B or lottery of the first special lottery result) is given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player entertained and continue to enjoy the game, and to prevent a decrease in interest.

In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 of the three general winning openings 2001 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. And has the same shape as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 at the left end, some players can make an illusion that it is received in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is a starting opening, the special drawing result is not drawn, and thus the player feels distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. There is a risk that However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position that cannot be accepted by “right hitting”), which is leftward from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction, and the second Since there is no decorative sticker attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205 to show the starting opening, it can be reconfirmed that the opening is not the starting opening, and the player feels distrust and enjoys the game. It is possible to avoid lowering it.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 as compared with the case where the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the decoration sticker is not attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Although the angle of inclination of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) from the horizontal is not shown, variable winning openings such as a big winning opening and a prize winning opening are openably closed. The winning opening door is larger than the angle of inclination from the horizontal when the gaming ball B is guided to the winning opening side and is rotated around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to move forward. It has an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B to be paid out by receiving the game balls B into the variable winning a prize is larger than the number of the general winning a prizes 2001, most of the game balls B to the variable winning a prize will be given. Will come to wish for a prize. Alternatively, even if the player has a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which the specified winning number is set, he or she desires to win more than the specified number. Therefore, the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is made gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall 2203), so that the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As described above, when the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning port, the accepted game ball B is visible for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning port 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. In contrast, the player can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning port, and at the same time, the general prize port 2001 can enjoy the joy of receiving the game ball B in the variable winning port. It can be tasted for a longer period of time than when it was accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning opening door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time until the winning opening door in the open state is closed. Can make you feel like doing.

In addition, in the two right general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, a portion that extends obliquely downward from the lower end of the portion of the first front wall 2203 that is vertically downward from the upper end of the portion. Is formed longer. As a result, since the prize hole is the general prize hole 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the ordinary lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Therefore, the game ball B accepted in the general prize hole 2001 is given. Can be hidden from the player's view early.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 shows the one in which the front surface of the specific general winning opening 2001 is tilted among the plurality of general winning openings 2001, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all the general winning openings 2001 can be used. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In addition, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined is allowed to enter the game ball B that has been launched to the launch position (so-called "left hit") in the normal gaming state. Although the one provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not tilted is set in the advantageous gaming state (during “time saving”, “probability change” or “big hit”). The game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “right hit”) may be provided at a position where it can enter the ball, or may be provided at both positions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 397, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclined front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening) is opened and then opened. The angle is narrow. When the number of payouts of the game balls B at the time of winning in the special winning opening is made larger than that of the general winning opening 2001, even if the special winning opening is defined, the player can win more than the specified number. I wish. Therefore, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B that has won the big winning opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed when the game ball B that has won the general winning opening 2001 with its front face tilted to the back side. There is. In other words, when the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number of payouts when winning the big winning opening, is won, it is considered to be faster than the speed at which the game ball B winning the big winning opening rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the more the payout holes are paid out, the later it takes to disappear from the player's view. As a result, the more prizes are paid out, the longer the joy of winning can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 395 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward. The side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf part 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 399 to 403 and the like. FIG. 399(a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 399(b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the back. FIG. 400 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 401 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 402 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first special winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 403 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the first attacker unit in a cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side in front view of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in front view, and from the front side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2004, a first special winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 408, etc.). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided in the upper part to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and the first special winning port 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and is more than the second starting port 2004. It is provided at a low position, and the first sub-out opening 2011 is provided below the second starting opening 2004 and at a position lower than the first special winning opening 2005.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, the second start port sensor 2401, and the first ball detecting the game ball B received in the first special winning port 2005. It is provided with a special winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. The first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided in pairs of two, respectively.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming the flow path of the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. A rear cover 2413, a second starting opening door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting opening 2004, and a second starting opening door 2414 movable to open and close the second starting opening 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415 for operating the starting opening solenoid 2415, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first big winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first big winning opening 2005, A first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the one big winning opening door 2417 to open and close the first big winning opening 2005, and a transmission for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 by transmitting the advance/retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418. And a member 2419.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for illuminating and decorating the first special winning opening 2005. A second starting opening sensor 2401, a first special winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403, a magnetic sensor 2404, a starting opening solenoid 2415, a first attacker solenoid 2418, a first special winning opening decoration board 2420 and a panel relay board. A first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 includes a first opening portion 2411a penetrating in the front-rear direction near an upper end on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating in the front-rear direction below the first opening portion 2411a, and a left-right direction. A second opening 2411c that extends longitudinally left and right in an upper part on the left side of the center, and two second guide holes 2411d that extend side by side under the second opening 2411c so as to line up left and right. The first sub-out port 2011 that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the one guide hole 2411b.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed such that the width on the left and right is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inserted. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b projects rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. Each of the second guide holes 2411d projects rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower.

In addition, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c and has two contact portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e are the contact portions of the front cover 2412 for the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is closed. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-back direction.

The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is attached in a state where the detection hole is projected forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

The front cover 2412 is formed in the shape of a box that is opened rearward and is transparent. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 403, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left in a front view, and a game ball to the left from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. It is slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf portion 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a and between the first shelf portion 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf 2412b on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b from the position lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left lower. A third shelf 2412c extending shorter than the section 2412b and a third shelf 2412c are provided with a distance of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B from the left end of the third shelf 2412c to the left. It has a fourth shelf portion 2412d that extends downward from the lower position to the left and that forms a first special winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf portion 2412a, the second shelf portion 2412b, and the third shelf portion 2412c are inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portion 2412a and the like. ing.

The front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f that extends to a height, a third standing wall portion 2412g that vertically extends downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. From the right end of the fourth vertical wall 2412h extending vertically to the lower side of the front cover 2412, the fifth vertical wall 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. From the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and a seventh standing wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the left. Further, it extends downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. In addition, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to lower rightward. At the top, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side after inclining so that the game ball B can be distributed between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l and the first sphere wall portion 2412l so as to lower to the left. And a second lateral wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to be higher toward the outside. The first lateral wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the position of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

In addition, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portion of each of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j toward the direction of approaching each other to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j. It has an extending third lateral wall portion 2412n and a partitioning portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and the space in which the game ball B can flow between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided to open. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The upper shelf portion 2412p has its right end located directly above the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and its left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Further, although not shown, the front cover 2412 is provided in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and in a portion that is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions protruding rearward in shape. These abutting portions are the game balls B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is in a closed state, and the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold the second starting opening door 2414, the solenoid cover 2416, the first special winning opening door 2417, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403 so as to sandwich them.

The second starting opening door 2414 extends in the left-right direction from a flat plate-shaped door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and a lower end of the arm portion 2414b, and with respect to the unit base 2411. A rotary shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a portion below the rotary shaft 2414c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2414b and that is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415. .

The door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

The second starting opening door 2414 can close the second starting opening 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second starting opening door 2414 rotates (rotates) about the rotating shaft 2414c as the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415 moves back and forth in the front-rear direction, whereby the door portion 2414a moves in the front-rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting opening solenoid 2415 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In this starting opening solenoid 2415, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first special winning opening door 2417 includes a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long in the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both ends of the door portion 2417a in the left-right direction, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. The rotary shaft 2417c extends from the lower end in the left-right direction coaxially with each other, and the cylindrical link pin 2417d projects rightward from the lower portion of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a, and then bend forward to the substantially same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a vertically extending slit 2419c of a transmission member 2419 described later.

The first special winning opening door 2417 can close the first special winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first big winning opening door 2417 rotates (rotates) about the rotation shaft 2417c as the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 moves back and forth, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front and rear direction. The first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In the first attacker solenoid 2418, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) in a non-energized state, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 passes through the base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extending portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and the left and right direction near the front end of the extending portion 2419b. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

A plurality of LEDs capable of radiating light to the front are mounted on the front surface of the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 are full-color LEDs. The first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 can cause the first special winning opening 2005 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs emit light.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting opening solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415 is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 passes through the first opening portion 2411a of the unit base 2411. Projecting forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is located above the second starting opening 2004, and the door portion 2414a cannot accept the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. Is becoming That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 403).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is the second opening portion of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is located above the first big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B cannot be received in the first big winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. It is in a state of. That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 402 and 403).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414. After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf portion 2412b, they are discharged from the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the left. The game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left falls to the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 depending on its momentum, and is left by the inclination thereof. Roll towards you. In addition, when the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left comes in contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p and bounces back to the right, a gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. May enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a closing the first special winning opening 2005, with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, They come into contact with each other alternately and roll to the left while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled leftward on the door portion 2417a is discharged to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from its left end after rolling the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, the second horizontal wall portion 2412m passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is then returned to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, both the game ball B circulating on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c are both It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting opening solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is resisted against the biasing force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d on the upper side (door portion 2414a side) of the rotation shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 is pulled backward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting opening door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper side of the second starting opening 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Becomes That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 while the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall part 2412f and the third standing wall part 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls on the first lateral wall portion 2412l. A portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first lateral wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the gaming ball B rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit. It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from its rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is placed on the substrate holder 1200 below from the back guide unit 3050. Is discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the biasing force of the spring. When this transmission member 2419 retracts, the link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed rearward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

As a result, the first special winning opening door 2417 rotates about the rotation shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. It will be moved. The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, so that the first big winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened. The game ball B is ready to be received (see FIG. 402). That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the gaming ball B passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and then the fifth standing wall portion. After being detected by one of the two first special winning opening sensors 2402 through the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, the first It falls on the three lateral wall portions 2412n. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to become lower rearward from the upper surface, and the game ball B dropped onto the third lateral wall portion 2412n rolls rearward due to the inclination, so that the unit base 2411 It is discharged rearward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. ..

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first special winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005. Since the first prize hole 2005 is opened and closed by rotating the door portion 2417a about the rotary shaft 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction, the first prize hole 2005 (first The depth in the front-rear direction applied to the attacker unit 2400) can be made as short as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

Further, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first special winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first special winning opening sensor 2402 to detect the unit base 2411. Since it is designed to be released to the rear, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being stagnant between the first big winning opening 2005 and the first big winning hole sensor 2402, and at the same time, a lot of game balls can be played. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 404 and 405 and the like. 404(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 404(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 405 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100, slightly above the center in the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is in the frame. It is not possible to break in.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-like shape projecting from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel board 1110 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted. This peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

The thicknesses of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 are formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not project, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front surface shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player can exert the effect of reinforcement while exhibiting the effect. I try not to stand out.

More specifically, a plurality of support parts 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in the support portion 2503 provided at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 projects leftmost above the warp inlet 2511 described later, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the portion is intermediate between the vertically extending portions. Has a shape that bulges to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, and at the portion that bulges leftward of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The shape is different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is linearly formed so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 413). The support part 2503 of this part is a state where the support part 2503 is assembled to the game board 5, and the part of the support part 2503 that extends linearly up and down on the front end side is a front left decoration on the back unit 3000 provided on the rear side. It is substantially along a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the front end side of the support part 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support part 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively behind. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support parts 2503, the support part 2503 below the warp inlet 2511 has a rectangular wall extending rightward while the peripheral wall part 2501 extends obliquely. The support part 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 385 and the like). ). The tip side extending to the left and right of the support part 2503 extends in parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, and thus the shape of the shutter 3732 is part of the shape. , And the support portion 2503 is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 389).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter in a portion of the front wall of the peripheral wall 2501 in front view from the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, the game ball B that has been released from the warp outlet 2512 and the warp outlet 2512 that is capable of releasing the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2511 and that is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100. It is provided with a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 405 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from bouncing from the outside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bouncing on the stage 2513 back to the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction when mounted on the 1110 is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2513a) and a lowest portion on both left and right sides (side emission portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, which is higher than the center emission portion 2513a, is located directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 that is provided in the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game ball B can flow. This center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the stop of the front component member 1000). The game ball B, which is almost in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and the first guide passage 2521 separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending in a vertical direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. The outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened obliquely downward to the right along the arc of the upper portion of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 with the center accessory 2500 assembled to the game board 5. Further, the first guide passage 2521 has the right end of its entrance located immediately below the lower end of the hitting portion 1006 of the front component member 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the hitting portion 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 which projects rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an inlet opening upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an outlet opening diagonally downward left with a width of one gaming ball B.

The lower right guide passage 2530, which is assembled to the game board 5, has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is located at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the rear unit can be passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B contacts the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be released from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support part 2503 is shortly projected from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501 and is partially provided on the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is provided on the rear side. It is possible to reduce the hindrance to the visibility of the decorative object of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. Further, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located at positions as close to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 as possible. Since the transparent center accessory 2500 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 on the rear side from being blurred. From this, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of a decorative body or the like provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the support portion 2503 and the like are transparent and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body or the effect display device 1600 that can be light-emitted, light emitted from them can be used for light-emission decoration and a good appearance. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 413 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, and the like in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 413). , The light emitted to the front from the LED on the back left front decorative substrate 3714 in the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, or the like is transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused to give a gorgeous light emission decoration. It can be shown to the player. Note that steps or cutouts may be provided in the support portion 2503, and light from the rear can be diffused due to the steps or the like, so that it can appear more glittering.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided because the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Are provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role object 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role object 2500 is better compared to the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side can be made more visible. In other words, when it is desired to make the non-circulation area (inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind when viewed from the front.

Note that the edge of the support part 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 of the back front left effect unit 3700 (the shape of the ornament) provided on the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support part 2503 from being conspicuously deteriorating the decorative property of the rear decorative body due to the support part 2503 being different from the rear decorative part, and at the same time, the support part 2503 also has a decorative property. Can be increased.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the support part 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and those decorations are provided by the lens effect. Although the thing which suppresses that it looks blurry is shown, it is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 which is distant from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. Alternatively, the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided behind may be made to appear blurred.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided, and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the rear wall portion 2501 may not have a rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. .. Further, when the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support part 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center role object 2500 is not provided with the flange part 2502. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 406 and 407. FIG. 406(a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 406(b) is the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the front member in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 407 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in a cross section.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a second special winning opening 2006 that opens and closes leftward (see FIG. 407).

The second attacker unit 2600 is a second special winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time acting near the second special winning opening 2006. 2602 and. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second big winning opening door 2611 by opening the second big winning opening door 2611 for closing the second big winning opening 2006 so that the second big winning opening 2006 can be opened. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance/retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second special winning opening door 2611, and the second big winning opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 for guiding the accepted game ball B and discharging it backward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened leftward from the center in the left-right direction to the right, and the second big winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning opening door 2611 is provided.

The second big winning opening door 2611 bulges downward from the semicircular bottom side, the right side that is in contact with the right end of the lower side and linearly extends upward, and the left side from the upper end of the right side. It is formed into a so-called blade shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second special winning opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotary shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position distant from the rotary shaft. And a pin (not shown). The second big winning opening door 2611 has a lower rotation shaft rotatably attached so that the upper end moves leftward.

Although not shown in detail, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger projects downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction with the base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, so that the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is located on the game board 5 so that the right side thereof is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the second winning hole 2006 and the peripheral wall of the center accessory 2500. A space in which the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501. Further, the second attacker unit 2600 has a rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the own weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second special winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be received in the second special winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled up. The second special winning opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a by sliding in the slit while being slid.

Thereby, the upper end of the second special winning opening door 2611 is moved to the left, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second special winning opening door 2611 is lowered. It will be in a tilted state. That is, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B that has flown down comes into contact with the second special winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received in the second special winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged rearward. The game ball B discharged rearward from the guide passage 2613 is transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 406 and 407 and the like. The side right middle unit 2700 of the table unit 2000 is arranged immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

The side right middle unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 which is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width of two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear, and the first guide passage 2701 guiding the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 to the rear. And two induction passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, bends rightward, and further bends rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

This side right middle unit 2700, in a state assembled in the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Further, the side right middle unit 2700, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000, and a lower end in contact with an upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can flow is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at a position slightly left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upwards over substantially the entire space (see FIG. 408 and the like).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and is provided behind the back side. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and is a rear unit provided in the rear side. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-outlet port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 395 and 406 and the like. The gate member 2800 of the table unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Has been. The gate member 2800 is a gate unit 2003 for performing a lottery of the ordinary lottery result of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate unit 2003. 2801 and. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that projects obliquely downward and leftward from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003 to the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is, when assembled on the game board 5, its extension line is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800 is located substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the game is provided on both the left and right outer sides. A gap through which the ball B can flow is formed. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 393 and 408 and the like. FIG. 408 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 393 is enlarged. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, above the side upper left unit 2300, there is provided a wind turbine W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center character 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center character 2500 into a part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. Is adjusted so that the wind turbine W enters a region on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. As a result, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center character 2500 with a certain probability by hitting the left side of the center character 2500 to flow down.

The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 of the center accessory 2500 are more than the game balls B that have flowed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted so as to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is driven by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is struck so as to circulate on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 393, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center role object 2500. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or a site on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and a site on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability than that. Be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility of being accepted into the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then, the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is transferred to any of 3064, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is hardly received in the first starting opening 2002. Then, the game ball B which is not received in the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting opening 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and received in the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may flow down onto the side unit 2200, passing between the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, and thus the first probability is high. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is discharged from the side discharge portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then passed to the first passing opening 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting opening sensor. The sheet is detected by 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052, the first special lottery result is selected and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B flowing on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 or is received in the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being caught.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit to the right side of the center character 2500 is received by the second starting opening 2004, whereas the game ball B hit to the left side of the center character 2500 is. The probability of acceptance in the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Thereby, when the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are not in the open state, it is possible to prompt the driving operation (“left hitting”) of the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved to the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 from above the central portion in the left-right direction to the right, with the strength with which the game ball B enters. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with such strength that it comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of just above the gate portion 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is a left side of the gate member 2800, a gate portion by a plurality of obstacle nails N which are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is guided in order of decreasing probability and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and passed to the ninth transfer opening 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out opening sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. When the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2801, the ordinary lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of having a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the eighth transfer opening 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. To the left of.

At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted at the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. The detection of the game balls B by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 gives a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B.

The game ball B, which has not been accepted into the second prize hole 2006 and has flowed down to the left of the second prize hole 2006, enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits from the lower right guide passage 2530. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B discharged downward (obliquely leftward) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly in the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 and the second shelf portion 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf 2412b to the left. Then, the game ball B released from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to its momentum, and their inclinations. Is rolled to the left, and after rolling the fourth shelf 2412d from the door portion 2417a, it is discharged to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400 from the fourth shelf 2412d.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the game balls B abut on the obstacle nails N and do not flow down to the first shelf portion 2412a, but to the upper shelf portion 2412p. May flow down. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination and is discharged to the left from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and then to the obstacle nail N planted to the left. After coming into contact with each other, turning downward, and flowing down to the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first special winning opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left to make the first. It is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing when the game ball B is discharged from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, the first big prize It may be accepted in the winning opening 2005.

Also, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf portion 2412a bounces back to the right due to contact with the obstacle N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2412a may roll rightward against the inclination thereof and may be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The game ball B discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and flows down to the vicinity of the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. Then, due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then is not returned into the game area 5a, but is not returned into the game area 5a, and the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. And is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, and the game ball B is passed through the gate portion 2003, if the "normal win" is selected as the normal lottery result, the second start is performed. Since the mouth door 2414 moves and the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf portion 2412a to the left is received in the second starting opening 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

Further, when the game ball B is discharged from the second shelf 2412b to the left, the game ball B is accepted in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are drawn. As a result, when the “big hit” is selected by lottery, the first special winning opening door 2417 moves and the first special winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the second winning portion 2412b is discharged to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left, it comes into contact with a step on the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and flows down diagonally to the lower right, and the second shelf portion 2412b and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is accepted in any of the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged from the outlet 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

From this, in order to open and close the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and “small hit” is performed. It is necessary to make a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 is required to allow the gate portion 2003 to pass the game ball B to draw (or assign) a "normal win" as a normal lottery result. Therefore, the opportunity to receive the game ball B in the second starting port 2004 is lower than that in the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting opening 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of

Then, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and “small hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 Since the opening and closing, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right hit" so that the game ball B can be received in the first prize hole 2005 or the second prize hole 2006, and the first prize hole. It is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball B into the 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passages to be circulated allow passage of the gate portion 2003 easily. , The second sub-out port 2012 may be easily received, so that the striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the desired guide passage, and the player can play the game ball. It is possible to entertain the typing operation of B.

In addition, there is a possibility that the "normal hit" in which the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state can be drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 by performing the "right hit", Since there is a possibility that the game ball B will be received in the second starting opening 2004 and a “small hit” or a “big hit” may be drawn, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 409 to 412 and the like. FIG. 409 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 410 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 411 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 412 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall that is open to the front. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010 and the flat front left decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower portion of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. A lower back left effect unit 3200 and a lower right effect unit 3250, and a lower back middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the lower left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the rear front right decoration 3040 in the rear box 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in the back box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500 and front front right production unit 3600 provided between front front right decorative body 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800 and.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 409 to 412. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, a back front left decoration 3030, a back front right decoration 3040, and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached on the rear side. The back box 3010 is transparent and made of synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, a rectangular opening penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame in the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the lower side in the left-right direction, and the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable left and right.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface abutting on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting a decorative body, a performance unit, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has a band-plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 409 to 413. FIG. 413 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and shown with the door frame being transparent. The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 while being separated from each other in the left and right directions.

The front left back decoration 3030 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3031 and a decoration seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decoration seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The front left decoration 3030 is opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front right decoration 3040 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3041 and a decoration seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decoration sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). This back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side, is located outside the game area 5a in a front view when assembled on the game board 5. (See FIG. 389, FIG. 413, etc.). Further, the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 have a flat plate shape so that when assembled on the pachinko machine 1, the outer peripheral edge is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Has been extended to.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 413, when viewed from the front, the back front left decoration 3030 is halved from the bottom of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. Has been extended to the position. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in the front view. Further, in other words, the front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 (hatched portion in FIG. 413), and the back rear left from the player side. The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made invisible. Further, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decoration 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 413). Since it extends to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the left front decoration 3030 can be made invisible to the player, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

Further, in the back front left decorative body 3030, it is extended so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and when it is assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it to the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left/right lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decoration 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decoration 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large, and to prevent pachinko. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the front component upper left corner of the front component member 1000, the function display unit 1400 is not attached. Instead of 1400, the back-front left decoration body 3030 can hide the back-rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 (functional part) and the like provided on the rear side.

On the other hand, in the front front right decoration 3040, when viewed from the front, it extends to the upper right corner of the rear box 3010 so as to cover the entire rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 in the rear rear right effect unit 3600, and a transparent front. Even through the constituent members 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the back rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 is invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, by making the player side invisible functional components such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decoration 3040, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. Therefore, it is possible to exhibit the same function and effect as the front left decorative body 3030.

As described above, according to the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided in the rear is covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts hard to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front of the functional component provided on the rear side can be covered by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible to the player. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, by the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, and to give the player a sense of openness and the actual game area 5a. Although the size does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player. At this time, a portion outside the game area 5a in the decoration seal 3032 of the back front left decoration 3030 and the decoration seal 3042 of the back front right decoration 3040, which are provided with a predetermined decoration, is the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since it can be seen from the front through them, it is possible to decorate the outside of the game area 5a with them, and it is possible to make the game area 5a look larger than it actually is, which can attract the player's attention strongly. The board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be used.

Further, as described above, the front front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can make the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 transparent, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the rear unit. Light from 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (on the side of the player) by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

The functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided in the rear are provided from the player side by the parts of the front left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 which are extended to the outside of the game area 5a. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in a front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, the size of the game area 5a is made relatively small in order to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be done may occur, a part of the functional parts is placed outside the game area 5a in such a balance that the game area 5a can be set large relative to the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide it.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the front left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 are decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in a front view. As a result, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a can extend the design in the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. 5a can be made larger than it actually is, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

[5-9c. Back guiding unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 414(a) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 414(b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the rear. The back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both left and right extending ends are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is formed substantially transparent.

The back guiding unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3052 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. Out port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 2010, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. And a magnetic sensor 3055 which is provided in a portion which is located in the rear of the sensor and detects an illegal magnetism.

In addition, the back guiding unit 3050 is received in the first transfer opening 3061 through which the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 is transferred and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 to which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the inner side of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400. Five transfer opening 3065, the sixth transfer opening 3066 to which the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is transferred, and the second big winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 The seventh transfer opening 3067 to which the game ball B thus received is transferred, the eighth transfer opening 3068 to which the game ball B received from the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is transferred, and the side right middle unit 2700. It is provided with a ninth delivery port 3069 to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, although not shown in detail, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B transferred to the first transfer port 3061 to the right and then discharges it downward, and a second transfer path. The game ball B transferred to the transfer port 3062 and the game ball B transferred to the third transfer port 3063 are merged, and then discharged to the second discharge path, and transferred to the fourth transfer port 3064. A third discharge path for guiding the game ball B downward and discharging it obliquely to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is below the sixth transfer port 3066. And a fourth discharge path that discharges diagonally to the lower left after guiding to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge passage.

The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and transferred to the first delivery opening 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. To be done. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second receiving opening 3062, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the inner side and transferred to the third receiving opening 3063. The ball B joins in the second discharge path, and is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the fourth receiving opening 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharging path. ..

It is received in the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400, is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received in the game ball B and the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B transferred to the sixth transfer port 3066 and the game ball B transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 by being transferred to the second winning hole 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 are It is discharged through the discharge passage.

The game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is on the upstream side of the portion communicating with the ninth transfer port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge passage. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the ninth transfer-out port 3069 merges with the fourth discharge passage after being detected by the second sub-out sensor 3054, It is discharged through the four discharge channels.

The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. To detect the game ball B received in the out-port 2010 that is open at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that were not present (the game ball B that has not been granted a privilege, also referred to as “out ball”) belongs to.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is inserted into the out-recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and has a cylindrical portion 3081 that cylindrically extends in the front-rear direction so that the gaming ball B can flow, and a cylindrical portion 3081. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into left and right, a flange portion 3083 that protrudes in the shape of a flat plate in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the tubular portion 3081 A rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and discharged (see FIG. 392). The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with an out-port sensor 3053 between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The cylindrical portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the outlet 2010, and the width in the left-right direction is a width in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned (a width in which the three game balls B are not aligned), and the inner surface on the lower side is It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3081 and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side thereof protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with two out-out sensors 3053 arranged side by side. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing through the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081. The game ball B that has circulated is detected. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the inner surface of the lower side of the tubular portion 3081. As a result, the circulation direction of the game ball B circulating in the tubular portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out-out sensor 3053, so that the out-ball sensor 3053 can be detected smoothly and the game ball B can be detected. Can be promptly discharged to prevent it from staying in front of the outlet sensor 3053.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 has the tubular portion 3081 inserted into the out-recessed portion 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 392).

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, and the front end upper portion of the tubular portion 3081 projects further forward than the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 392). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted in the tubular portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and projects below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided rearward by the out guiding portion 1003 to be received in the out opening 2010. The gaming ball B thus obtained is passed through the inside of the cylindrical portion 3081 and detected by either of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the body frame 4 without contacting the board holder 1200.

According to the out-ball detecting member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the partition portion 3082 partitions between the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is It is possible to guide to the left outlet sensor 3053 side, and it is possible to guide the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the right outlet sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right outlet sensors 3053, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "left hit" or "right hit" depending on the number of gaming balls B detected per hour. Based on the determination, it is possible to promote the driving operation most suitable for the game situation and entertain the intended game.

Further, in the out-ball detecting member 3080, the projection of the partition portion 3082 to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over. Therefore, when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, the partition The game ball B can be escaped to the left side or the right side where the circulation amount of the game ball B of the part 3082 is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out-port 2010 without any delay.

Further, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is projected downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second special winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward by the out-ball detecting member 3080, and by the out-out sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent it from being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010.

In this embodiment, the out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detecting member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recessed portion 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recessed portion 1123. In addition to being possible, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that is not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub-out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub-out mouth sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning a prize. If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B in the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act has been performed on a specific winning opening, It is possible to inform that fraudulent acts are being performed.

Further, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening. The number of “winning balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by detecting the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the first large From the number of "safe balls" paid out by receiving the game ball B into the winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the "ball-out rate" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although illustration is omitted, on the rear side of the game board 5, there is provided a display section for displaying the “ball payout rate”.

In addition, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“all balls”) driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“all balls”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected by the out-out sensor 3053, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054, only the “out-ball” is detected. It is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 by comparing the respective numbers of “” and “all balls”.

[5-9d. Back production unit]
Next, the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 415 to 419 and the like. FIG. 415(a) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 415(a) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 416 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 417 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 418 is an explanatory diagram showing a movable configuration of the rear rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 419 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rear-rear effect unit.

The rear rear effect unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost side (the front surface of the rear wall) in the rear box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape whose front view is open downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The rear-rear production unit 3100 includes a rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 extending in the left-right direction and a rear-rear movable mechanism 3120 for moving the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the up-down direction.

The back-back movable decoration body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and has a translucent decoration body 3111 having a relief-shaped decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of front-side decoration bodies 3111 provided on the front side of the decoration body 3111. The rear-rear decoration board 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and the decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decoration board 3114 are provided. Each of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is a full-color LED. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 can make the decorative body 3111 (back rear movable decoration body 3110) emit light.

The back-back movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 vertically extending on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 vertically extending on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from the upper end in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided on the upper end. Have

The back-rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened downward, and is attached to the inside of the back box 3010. The unit base 3121 extends vertically in a columnar shape on the left side of the unit base 3121. And a slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the back-back movable ornament 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122 that extends up and down in parallel with the slide shaft 3122. Spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 serving as a rotation shaft. The rear rear drive motor 3126 that is attached, the motor base 3127 that attaches the rear rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123, and a slide guide 3130 that can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be moved up and down, and a lower end side of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by moving up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by the rotation of the link member 3133 and that can abut the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-back movable decoration 3110. Is equipped with.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back-rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, a back-rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a back-rear detection sensor 3136. The front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front side. Connection between the front right cover 3138 and the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136, which are mounted on the lower front surface of the front left cover 3137, and the production drive board 1720. The rear-rear relay board 3139 that relays the back-rear, and the rear-rear decoration board 3114 of the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110, which is mounted between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, and the production drive board 1720 are connected. And a back right relay substrate 3140 that is relayed.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the shock. The upper and lower ends of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 projects from the vicinity of the lower end to the right and has a detection piece 3130a detected by the back lower back detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is incapable of rotating about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. The slide guide 3130 is capable of abutting the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 on the upper end surface. Further, the slide guide 3130 is configured such that an upper end surface of a lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can be brought into contact with the lower surface.

The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved vertically only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a cylindrical protrusion rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. And a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the protrusion pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The spring 3132 has its upper end side attached to the unit base 3121 and its lower end side attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, and urges the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The shape of the link member 3133 in a front view is formed in a triangular shape in which each vertex is chamfered with R. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis, and a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the top apex above the rotation axis. And a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 projects rearward in a cylindrical shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and a flat upper end surface, and also extends in the left-right direction. An abutting surface 3134b that extends and is capable of abutting the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the back rear movable decoration body 3110, and is inclined so as to move leftward from the right end of the abutting surface 3134b, And a guide surface 3134c with which the locking protrusion 3116b can come into contact.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 slidably in the vertical direction.

Subsequently, the operation of the rear-rear effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the rear-rear effect unit 3100 is in the retracted position in which the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward as shown in FIG. 418 (FIG. 419(a)), and the slide guide 3130 is in the retracted position. Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the rear rear movable ornament is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of 3110 is in contact.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 3132. The protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The urging force of 3132 urges the link member 3133 in the clockwise direction about the rotation axis, and urges the lock member 3134 in the direction of sliding to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the position due to some reason (defective), the remaining movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from falling (falling). it can.

Further, in the normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b in which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the back rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper-rear effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the rear shaft drive motor 3126 rotates the spiral shaft 3123 in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in plan view), the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the locking projection 3116b of the rear back movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the rear rear movable decoration 3110 does not move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward, away from the movable projection 3116a of the rear rear movable ornament 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123, and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 causes the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 to move. It contacts the upper end surface (see FIG. 419(b)). When the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 and the slide guide 3130 further moves downward, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132.

When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 in which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is rotated counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. When the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted in the second slit 3133b is used. The locking member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 419(c)).

When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking projection 3116b of the rear back movable decoration 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the rear rear movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the lower rear rear detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the fallen back movable ornament 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121 to stop the fall and reach the appearance position (see FIG. 419(c)). In this state of the appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the rear back movable ornament 3110, and the rear rear movable ornament 3110 does not contact.

In the rear-rear effect unit 3100, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in the state of the appearance position where the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped. In this state, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (decoration body 3111) can be illuminated and decorated. The luminous decoration can entertain the player.

When the rear rear movable decoration 3110 is returned from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the rear rear drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the reverse direction (here, in a clockwise direction in plan view). Direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the urging force of the spring 3132. As the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

Further, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing to, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 419(d)).

Then, when the rear movable ornamental body 3110 is moved upward by the slide guide 3130 to the vicinity of the retracted position, the locking protrusion 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b pushes the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides to the right against the biasing force of the spring 3132 that tries to move to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking projection 3116b is located above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressing by the locking projection 3116b against the guide surface 3134c disappears. The lock member 3134 slides to the right due to the urging force of the spring 3132 to be in the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the lock member 3134 prevents the back-removable decoration 3110 from moving downward. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decoration 3110 is detected by the back rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearance position to the normal state of the retracted position.

According to the rear-rear production unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the appearance position invisible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the lock member 3134 that locks (restricts) the back-end movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is released to the left, the lock member 3134 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving it, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when releasing the lock.

[5-9d-1. Movable decoration behind the back]
Next, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 420 to 434. FIG. 420 is a front view showing the back-rear movable decoration body together with the back-rear decoration substrate. 421(a) is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 420, and FIG. 421(b) is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. FIG. 422(a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and FIG. 422(b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the back. FIG. 423 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 424 is an exploded perspective view of the back-removable decoration body disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 425 is a front view showing a part of the back-rear movable decoration body in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 426 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decoration substrate by broken lines in the front view of FIG. 425. 427 (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-back movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same portion as the decorative body of (a), (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back rear decorative substrate in the same portion as the decorative body of (a).

Further, FIG. 428 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 421(a). FIG. 429 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 428 in an exploded manner. FIG. 430 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back-and-back decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the back-and-back movable decorative body and decoration by the decor and the decorative sheet. FIG. 431(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear-rear decoration substrate in the region of the first LED, and FIG. 431(b) is the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the light guide radiating plate in the part which is doing from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body, and a decorative sheet, It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of 1 LED from the front. FIG. 432 is a front view showing a part of the rear back decoration substrate in an enlarged manner and showing the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 433(a) is a front view of the back rear decoration substrate, and FIG. 433(b) is a rear view of the back rear decoration substrate. FIG. 434(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-back movable decorative body, and FIG. 434(b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a different form from that of (a). It is an expanded sectional view, and (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 420 and the like, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and is provided with a decoration portion 3150 having a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 includes two first decorative portions 3151 provided near the left and right ends and a left-right direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 in a front view. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that are arranged in a line. Each first decoration part 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Although not shown in the drawings, the second decorative portions 3152 each imitate a predetermined character and are arranged in a row on the left and right to form a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. In this way, the back rear movable decoration 3110 is decorated with the logo between the two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 420 to 424, the rear rear movable decoration body 3110 in the rear rear production unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by relief-shaped relief. A transparent flat sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3111 having a transparent flat sheet-like decoration 311 and a decoration (pattern) provided behind the decoration 311 and constituting the rest of the decoration portion 3150. 3112, a transparent light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. Rear decorative board 3114, a flat decorative body base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114, and extends vertically to the left of the decorative body 3111. A left slider 3116 and a right slider 3117 that extends vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111 are provided.

[5-9d-2. Backside movable ornaments]
The decorative body 3111 is formed such that the front surface side and the rear surface side are generally flat. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from a general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b protruding forward and shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion. And a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided in a portion that becomes the contour of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusions 3111a in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 are respectively formed on the outer circumference of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom, and the portion imitating the central stamen and pistil. .. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in a double (two-row) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111 a and the third decorative protrusion 3111 c of the decorative body 3111 form a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d (at a first foil stamping region (see FIG. 434(a))) projecting forward of the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the first decorative protrusion 3111a. In FIGS. 425 to 427, a shaded portion having a high density is provided. The decorative body 3111 is colorless and transparent in its entirety except for the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIGS. 428 and 434(a) and the like, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided in a curved front surface portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided. Is not provided on the side surface of the. Thereby, the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, a high-grade feeling can be imparted by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized by the curved metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 426, etc., the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided in a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 in the second decoration portion 3152, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c is not easily visible from the front.

In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected by the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to reflect the light to the back and illuminate the front surface of the decoration sheet 3112 provided on the back, and to make the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decoration sheet 3112 more visible.

The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, the base material of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The base material of the formed decorative body 3111 is attached to a predetermined position of the hot stamping device in a state where the front surface side from which the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like project is directed upward. At this time, above the base material of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate whose lower surface has elasticity and which is heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. .. Then, the hot plate is lowered from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the base material of the decorative body 3111 to a position at a predetermined distance (position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil-pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 434(a)). ..

In the hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, since the portion of the transfer sheet that comes into contact with the decorative body 3111 that is the transfer destination of the metal foil of the transfer sheet has elasticity, the transfer destination ( Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be in a good condition even in a three-dimensionally shaped portion such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil pressed). As a result, as compared with the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, the metal decoration portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metallic decorative portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decoration part 3111d is formed by the hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c, so that the first decoration protrusion 3111d is lowered. It is possible to form a decorative body 3111 by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, in a state where the base material of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is used by using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (first metal foil) of a predetermined color and a second decorative protrusion. It is lowered to a position lower than the portion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil pressing area FS2), and the first metal foil is applied to the tip portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Transcribe. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from the first metal foil, the hot plate is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The second metal foil is transferred to the position (first foil pressing area FS1) and transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 434(b)). As a result, the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b form the decoration 3111 including the metal decoration 3111d of a different color without performing the masking process on the base material of the decoration 3111. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil pressing), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a metal film is formed on the surface of the base material of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film in a portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled off (laser peeled) by laser light, The decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 434(c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided not only on the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also on the side surface portion.

The ornamental body 3111 of the back rear movable ornamental body 3110 has a rear recessed portion 3111e which is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear surface side. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. After this, the recess 3111e makes it possible to equalize the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 and suppress deformation of the resin due to sink marks during injection molding.

The rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear concave portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. Accordingly, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. Through the transparent decorative body 3111, the pattern or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visible.

Further, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided in a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of the later-described first light diffusing portion 3112c and second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the front concave portion 3111e in the rear concave portion 3111e, so that the light emitted from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e portion of the decorative body 3111 is generated by the gap. As a result, diffuse reflection occurs between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the portion of the rear concave portion 3111e. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d in the decoration sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, The first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. This makes it difficult for the mounting boss 3111f to be seen from the front (player side) by the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided at a position in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Back decorative sheet of movable decorative body]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape having substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet having a pattern on its rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, except for the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a which is present, and a second contour portion 3112b which is provided between the second ornamental portion 3152 and the first ornamental protrusion portion 3111a which is formed in double in the ornamental body 3111, A first light diffusing portion 3112c provided in a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (a portion rearward of the third decorative protrusion 3111c); The second light provided in a portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, which corresponds to the second decorative portion 3152 and is doubled in the decorative body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c). And a diffusion portion 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmissive portion 3112e provided at a position behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have

As shown in FIG. 427(b), the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion having a pattern simulating a cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion is The hologram is used as a portion where interference fringes of light are displayed. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaque. In the present embodiment, the hologram portion of the first contour portion 3112a has the same gold color as that of the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111. Further, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a that imitates a cherry blossom is colored using white or pink. It should be noted that the ink (paint) used for the pattern or the like may be one that has glitter that glitters in particles.

The first contour portion 3112a is located outside and rearward of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back movable movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and Since the decorative portion 3111d has a portion of the same color (gold in the present embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can be made difficult to feel.

The first contour portion 3112a is formed in a light gray or white color on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the front pattern and hologram. Further, the light emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the front can be reflected back to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit light more brightly, the amount of light radiated forward from the light-transmitting portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be made to emit brighter light. In addition to the above, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated more uniformly.

Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the ornamental body 3111, the first contoured portion 3112a is flat on the rear surface of the ornamental body 3111 except for the rear concave portion 3111e. It is provided behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into contact with and closely adheres to the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern or hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly viewed from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111 without being diffusely reflected.

The second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black line having a predetermined width, as shown in the figure. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind a portion between the doubled first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 in the second decorative portion 3152. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-shaped gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black of the second contour portion 3112b makes the double metal decoration portion 3111d stand out. It is possible to enhance the decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing section 3112c is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 427(b) and the like, in one petal of the cherry blossoms that is plowed by the first decorative portion 3151 at the portion of the first light diffusion portion 3112c, from the center of the petal to the peripheral edge. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed by printing so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) as it goes. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the first light diffusing section 3112c is caused to emit light, the pear skin pattern of the first light diffusing section 3112c causes a slight Since different shades appear, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the light emission decoration of the first decoration portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing section 3112d is provided on the entire inner side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative sections 3152, as shown by shaded shading in FIGS. 425 to 427. Has been. The second light diffusing unit 3112d has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing unit 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a semitransparent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the second light diffusing section 3112d is caused to emit light, the second light diffusing section 3112d has a predetermined dot-like pattern. It is possible to make the second decoration portion 3152 composed of the characters “” emit light with a uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a rear recess 3111e which is recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state of being. Due to the gap, the light irradiated from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e. The diffusion unit 3112c and the second light diffusion unit 3112d become bright. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d in the decoration sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, The first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 has a predetermined pattern formed by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d. The rest of the portion 3150 excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111 is configured. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent sheet as the base material. ing. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). The first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d may be lens films or prism films.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since the transmissive portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light so that the transmissive portion 3112e is emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and applied to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface side, and the side surface side remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a passes through the transparent portion 3112e from the rear side. The light radiated to leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the light transmitted through the transmissive portion 3112e allows the player to see a light-emitting decoration such that the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) is backlit. In addition, the first contour projection 3112a located outside the first decoration projection 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light that has been transmitted through the transmissive portion 3112e and emitted from the side surface of the first decoration projection 3111a to the outside. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. It is possible to make the decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 is made substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is not framed, so that the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. At the time of displaying, by displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a feeling of unity, and the game can be played. It is possible to give the player a visual impact and pay attention to the player, to enjoy a large decoration, and to prevent a decrease in the player's interest.

Although the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment shows the decorative body 3111 provided with the transparent transparent portion 3112e behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a), the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, you may make it provide the 1st outline part 3112a also in the site|part which becomes behind the metal decoration part 3111d. Thus, when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 from having a bad appearance. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the rear portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the first decoration protrusion 3112a in the first contour portion 3112a can pass through the transparent side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the decoration body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used. Even if the decorative portion 3150 is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate with movable decoration behind the back]
As shown in FIGS. 423 and 424 and the like, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3113a extending left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body. The plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear-rear decoration board 3114 are inserted, and the main body portion 3113a that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the rear-rear decoration board 3114 A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along a rear end side of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. .

The light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

The main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b projects rearward about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end protruding rearward from the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 in a state where the rear-end movable decoration body 3110 is assembled.

The first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner peripheral shape. As shown in FIG. 426, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the low transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151, a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decoration sheet 3112 in which the shade of pink color by the dots is high. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is closer to the center side than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals of the cherry blossoms. The center of the long side of the rectangular inner circumference is located on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Has been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided in the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decoration portion 3152. Further, when the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the respective first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 427(c) and 431(c). It is formed in the open state. By connecting the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to prevent a portion of the main body portion 3113a that is thinner than its thickness from being formed, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the body portion 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, Part of the light is reflected straight to the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. It will be radiated to the inside of 3113c. Then, when the light emitted inside from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the light is emitted from the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body part 3113a, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body part 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing part 3113c, it is emitted to the inside of the first LED housing part 3113c. The light passing through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is partly reflected by the inner peripheral surface portion and the inner peripheral surface portion of the first LED housing portion 3113c which is incident on the main body portion 3113a side. The amount of light of will be greatly reduced compared to before passing.

Therefore, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided inside the body portion 3113a in the direction along the surface of the body portion 3113a. Since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing 3113c, the light passing through the first LED housing 3113c may be blocked by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, in the portion where the first LED 3114a is stored, the light does not pass to the side opposite to the first LED storage portion 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at the optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decoration portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent light emission decoration by being guided to another second decoration portion 3152, and only the desired second decoration portion 3152 in the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 can be surely light-emitting decorated. ..

The operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 431(c), a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 of “I”, “RO”, “HA”, and “☆” are provided. In order to perform light emission decoration, a first LED accommodating portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decorative portion 3152, and light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 in each first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The first LED 3114a is provided as described above. In this embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided between “I” and “RO” and between “RO” and “HA” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is one hole. As a result, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating the "☆" arranged below the "I" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, when the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is illuminated, the "i" above the "☆" may be illuminated, but it is provided at the upper left of the "☆". The first LED housing 3113c housing the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating a part of the "i" is provided with the extending part 3113j extending so as to cover the upper part of "☆". ing. By this extending portion 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for light emitting decoration of "☆" being guided to the "i" side. As a result, even if "☆" is illuminated, "I" is not illuminated. In addition, the extension portion 3113j can reduce (block) that the light for illuminating and decorating the "i" is guided to the "☆" side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be surely light-emitted and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

As shown in FIG. 430 and the like, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery. The plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d are provided in the rear of the five circular portions that imitate the stamens provided around the center in the first ornament portion 3151 that imitates the cherry blossoms. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom behind a circular portion that imitates a stamen located on the center line of the petal. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided inside the body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the body portion 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, Part of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d so as to be fan-shaped diffused toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals in the first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a, so that FIG. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body part 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a side by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing part 3113d, and the reflection thereof. The light can make the petals lighter and brighter.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a quadrangular pyramid, and the reflecting portions 3113e are arranged in a row so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e excludes a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, a portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. Within the plate thickness of the main body part 3113a, the plurality of reflecting parts 3113e can mainly reflect the light emitted in the direction along the plate surface to the front and emit the light from the front surface of the main part 3113a to the front. The light guide radiation plate 3113 according to the present embodiment is formed so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e.

In addition, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and it is possible to easily cope with the design change and the cost. Can be suppressed.

The leg portion 3113f projects rearward from the rear end side of the portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a. As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the leg portion 3113f is provided such that the surface on the first LED housing portion 3113c side is flush with the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted into the main body portion 3113a. You can Also, the leg portion 3113f has a rear surface abutting the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 when assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

The auxiliary reflection portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along the side of the rear end of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f to the front.

The right slider front part 3113h cooperates with a later-described right slider rear part 3115d of the ornament base 3115 to configure a right slider 3117.

Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the flange portion 3113b. The surface can be made invisible, and the appearance can be prevented from being degraded. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the flange portion 3113b that projects rearward from the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114, the light-guide radiating plate 3113 can be removed from the rear-rear decoration substrate 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. The creepage distance EL to the 3114 (the copper foil 3114d or the electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent that.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes that penetrate the main body portion 3113a. The heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing 3113d can be released to the front of the main body 3113a, and the heat effect on the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are used as the through holes, the front sides of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are closed by the decorative sheet 3112 or the decorative body 3111. Even if it is formed, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are compared with the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape). The volume (heat capacity) of the 3113d can be increased. As a result, a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a or second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and the thermal effect on the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 and the like can be suppressed. Further, in the first LED housing portion 3113c that is close to and connected to each other and the first LED housing portion 3113c that has the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large, For the same reason as above, more heat from the first LED 3114a can be dissipated, and abrupt temperature rise can be alleviated.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear side. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a approaches the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. This allows heat to escape from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 through the gap, and suppresses the temperature rise in the back-rear decoration board 3114 to affect the heat. Can be reduced.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions on the rear back decoration substrate 3114, and the front surface is reflected by the reflecting portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted to the front even in a portion of the main body 3113a where the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 is not provided. In other words, even if the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 is smaller than the size of the main body part 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body part 3113a. Therefore, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, so that the distance between the outer circumference of the main body portion 3113a and the outer circumference of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made longer, and the decoration body 3111 can be made longer. The creepage distance EL from the front metal decoration portion 3111d can be made longer to facilitate the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Back decorative board of movable back decoration]
The back rear decorative substrate 3114 has a plurality of side view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top view type second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface. The back rear decorative substrate 3114 includes a plate-shaped substrate main body 3114c, a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 432, etc.) that is provided on each of the front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c and forms a predetermined circuit pattern. An electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 433(b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Further, although not shown in the drawing, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 has a notation section in which the mounting components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e are described. have. The notation portion is provided on the coating film by silk printing in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is inconspicuous.

The back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap between the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 and the flange portion 3113b that is slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b, It is formed to have a size that is substantially constant. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to have a constant size. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to have a size to be housed inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

At the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. Light is emitted toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decoration 3111d). Thus, the first LED 3114a in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151 can light-emit each one of the five petals simulating a cherry blossom.

In addition, at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative protrusions that are doubled in the decorative body 3111 are provided in each of the second decorative portions 3152 that are arranged in the left and right. The light is provided near the rear of 3111a toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. Accordingly, the first LEDs 3114a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 can cause the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in the left and right to emit light one by one.

As shown in FIG. 430 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is a circular portion simulating a stamen located on the center line of the five petals in the central portion simulating a cherry blossom in the first decoration portion 3151. It is provided in the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom. Thus, the second LED 3114b can light-embellish each of the five parts of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitate a stamen in the central portion.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can emit light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is caused to emit light, a portion simulating a stamen in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is made to be closer than other portions. Can also emit light with high brightness, which can attract the player's attention. Therefore, in the light-emission decoration of the decoration portion 3150, a portion where the first LED 3114a emits light in a plane shape and a portion where the second LED 3114b emits light in a dot shape can be provided. It is possible to perform a variety of light emission effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

The substrate body 3114c is a rigid substrate having a thickness slightly smaller than that of the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm) and forms a circuit pattern by etching (hatched portion in FIG. 432). As shown in FIG. 432, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is spaced inward from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL=1 mm in the present embodiment). ing. By this predetermined distance SL, the creeping distance EL and the space distance from the conductive member (for example, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) outside the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are acquired, and the discharge of static electricity or the like occurs. The insulating property against short circuit can be enhanced, and the damage to the rear back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided up to a portion within a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d. Is as wide as possible. Thereby, by transmitting a part of heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the copper foil 3114d can radiate heat, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. , And the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced in cooling effect to prevent damage due to heat.

Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has a predetermined area on the light emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side so that light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the substrate body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. 3114f of the light reflection auxiliary area (area surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 432). As shown in FIGS. 429 and 431(a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f becomes lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. Therefore, compared with the case where the copper foil 3114d is provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, The angle of light emitted from one LED 3114a into the light reflection assisting region 3114f becomes an angle approaching a vertical line on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c, so that the light emitted to the substrate body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. You can

Further, as shown in FIG. 431(a) and the like, after the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is fixed. Since they are in contact with each other, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (amount of light) emitted forward from the light guide emission plate 3113 can be increased to allow the rear rear movable ornament 3110 (the ornament 3111). And, the decorative sheet 3112) can be made to be brighter and lighter.

Further, in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts (see FIG. 431(a) and the like). As a result, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg portions 3113f is worn or rolled, the front surface of the substrate body 3114c is only exposed and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is no such thing. Therefore, the insulation of the copper foil 3114d is lowered and the damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 of this embodiment is assembled into a back-and-back movable decorative body 3110, so that a flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, which will be described later, and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since 3113b and the outer circumference are doubly surrounded, it is difficult to see the outer circumference from the outside and deterioration of appearance is prevented. Further, in the state where the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted into the gap between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the rear side and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In the present embodiment, this creepage distance EL is set to a distance that can cope with a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more, or 10 kV.

Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provides a member (in the present embodiment, provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110). The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. This can prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided in the rear, and thus the decorative portion 3150 can be illuminated and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to prevent the rear decorative body 3110 from moving and to surely perform a desired light emission effect on the back rear movable decoration 3110. Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the back-rear movable decoration can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110.

In addition, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are housed from the rear side with respect to the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 approaches the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a as close as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an electronic component 3114e such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC, the resistor and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 which cannot be seen from the front side, it is not necessary to apply a paint such as white for making the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, It is possible to reduce the cost of the rear back decorative substrate 3114.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base of movable decorative body behind the back]
The ornament base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates through the coating plate portion 3115a, a flat plate-shaped covering plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, a flange portion 3115b that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a. A plurality of openings 3115c and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the cover plate portion 3115a when viewed from the front.

The cover plate portion 3115a has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed between the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to have a size. In other words, the covering plate portion 3115a (decoration body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the back side of the back decoration board 3114 is covered by the covering plate portion 3115a, it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the back decoration board 3114 from the rear and protect the back decoration board 3114. Therefore, it is possible to prevent breakage of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and is located in front of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 at the front end. Is projected so that it is located. This flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and makes the outer peripheral surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 difficult to see from the outside, thereby improving the appearance. Further, since the flange portion 3115b is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 when assembled to the back and rear movable decoration body 3110, The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made to meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from flowing to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 and damaging the back-rear decoration substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-shaped portion that is long in the left and right, and a portion that is open larger than the slit-shaped portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 can be released to the outside of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the heat effect on the back-rear decoration board 3114 can be affected. Can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d cooperates with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to configure the right slider 3117.

The ornament base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the cover plate 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to abut on a portion of the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. .. Thereby, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through the gap between the rear surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of the back-end movable decoration]
Subsequently, main operation effects of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back-back movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment has the decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body 3113. It is assembled by attaching the attachment boss 3111f of the ornamental body 3111 to the ornamental body base 3115 while sandwiching the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the base 3115 (see FIG. 421 and the like). As a result, the thickness of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

The back rear movable decoration body 3110 has a transparent plate-shaped decoration body 3111, a first decoration protrusion 3111a, a second decoration protrusion 3111b, and a third decoration protrusion 3111c protruding forward, and Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a provided with the hologram on which the picture pattern and the light interference fringes are displayed, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is different from the decorative portion 3150. As a result, a stereoscopic effect can be imparted by the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c, and the lens effect by the second decorative projection 3111b and the third decorative projection 3111c. With the hologram, a sense of depth can be added. As a result, even if the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel thin, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficient. It can be shown to entertain the player.

Further, as described above, the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b, the third decoration protrusion 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can give a stereoscopic effect and a sense of depth. The back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner in the front-rear direction. As a result, the space required for installing the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be increased, and a more effective portion inside the game board 5 can be provided. It is possible to easily provide the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player by providing the back decorative movable body 3110. In addition, since the back-end movable decoration body 3110 can be thinned, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for disposing another decoration body. Therefore, by providing another decoration body, It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and a pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy a variety of effects, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players and can be further differentiated. can do.

The back-back movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made conspicuous due to the metallic luster of the metallic decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give the metal decoration portion 3111d a stereoscopic effect and a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 moves from the retracted position, which is invisible to the player, to the visible position, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, which gives the player a premium feeling. Since it is possible to give the player, it is possible to strongly inspire the player to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 flat and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. It is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the ornamental body 3111 and to make the ornament of the back-back movable ornamental body 3110 look large. In addition, since the back-back movable decoration body 3110 has the decoration sheet 3112 having substantially the same size as that of the decoration body 3111, the decoration of the back-back movable decoration body 3110 is not framed. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-back movable decoration object 3110, thereby creating an effect with a sense of unity. The player can be shown to the player, the player can be given a visual impact to be noticed, a large decoration can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at a position behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the first decorative LED 3114a are provided. The two contour portions 3112b can make the first LED 3114a difficult to see from the front, and can suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration portion 3150 and sufficiently exert the decoration effect.

Furthermore, since the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 is provided. The second decoration portion 3152 can be individually light-emitted. Accordingly, it is possible to sequentially light-emit a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right, or to light-emit only the specific first decorative portion 3151 or the second decorative portion 3152. By appropriately decorating the first decoration portion 3151 and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 with light emission, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

In addition, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is lit by the first LED 3114a of the side-view type within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and then radiated in the direction along the surface thereof. Since the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the above, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are illuminated and decorated, the light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide emission plate 3113. You can increase the distance to. Accordingly, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, even if the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 has a small thickness in the front-rear direction, the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly illuminated and the player can be entertained with a visually appealing luminous ornament. In addition, since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly illuminated and decorated by the light guide and emission plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a, the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further increased. The pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is configured to use the first LED 3114a as a side view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b is a top-view type, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (the decoration portion 3150). In the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of (1), a portion that emits light in a dot shape with high brightness by the second LED 3114b can be added to a portion that is light-emitting decorated in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, so that it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and it is possible to entertain the player more and to play the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for, and to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a of the side view type is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light reception on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The part 3113i is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident inside the main body part 3113a. Accordingly, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at a position close to a desired portion that is desired to be illuminated and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be brightly illuminated and decorated, and a more dramatic effect can be obtained. It is possible to entertain high-luminous decorations to the player.

Furthermore, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing 3113c and a second LED 3114a and a second LED 3114b mounted on the back rear decoration substrate 3114, which are inserted into the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the rear side. Since the housing part 3113d is provided, the rear surface of the main body part 3113a can be changed to the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d. Can be made as close as possible to, and the thickness of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 so that the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 are separated from each other. Since the gap is formed in the back side, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat.

In addition, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can form a gap between the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 by the leg portions 3113f, and a plurality of openings can be formed in the decoration base 3115. Since it has the part 3115c, by raising and lowering the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, In addition, heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released to suppress the temperature rise of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114.

It should be noted that a temperature sensor is provided on the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 to move the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 up and down when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (back-rear decoration substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature. The frequency (probability) at which is executed may be increased. As a result, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, so that the surface of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 can be cooled and the occurrence of defects due to heat can be suppressed.

Further, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 with the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 from the rear side, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. Thus, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided and radiated by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate It is possible to prevent the 3114 from being damaged.

Further, since the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is configured such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided in the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 at a position away from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL inside. The predetermined distance SL can also increase the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, enhance the insulating property against discharge of static electricity or a short circuit, and prevent damage to the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like.

In addition, in the back-back movable decoration body 3110, the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a and is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. Not not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be lengthened by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same operational effect as described above can be achieved. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d is smaller than that of the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs on the back-back decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decoration 3110 is moved up and down (movable) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by the driving of the back rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction is generated in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like every time it moves up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 forming the surface of the movable back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 are formed of a synthetic resin having a low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the surface of the movable body 3110 and the decorative body base 3115 is reduced. Static electricity accumulated in the whole is difficult to be discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decorative portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decorative body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decorative portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back-back movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is easily accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Since the creeping distance EL to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is not damaged by electrostatic discharge, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down, and the back-rear movable decoration body It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which both the light emitting effect in which the 3110 is light-emitted and decorated is entertained.

In addition, when the area of the metal decoration part 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration part 3111d to GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another Embodiment of Back-Movable Decorative Body]
Next, mainly with reference to FIG. The details will be described. FIG. 435(a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a back-and-back movable decorative body of the second embodiment different from the back-and-back movable decorative body of FIG. 420, and (b) is a back-and-back movable decorative body of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decorative body in a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back back movable decoration body of 4th embodiment in a cross section.

As shown schematically in FIG. 435(a), the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided with a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a rear side of the decorative body 3161. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 having a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiating plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 for radiating light in a direction along the front surface inside thereof, and a light guide radiating plate. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3164 having a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating the interior of 3163 with light in a direction along the front surface is mounted on the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. And a decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be provided with relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration part 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3161a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The decoration sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (design) is printed. In this decorative sheet 3162, a low transparency portion of the decoration is located in a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiating plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED housing portion 3163a into which the LED 3164a of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of rear surface provided. And a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference thereof is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward with a triangular cross section, and is provided only in a predetermined portion. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is provided so as to reflect light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a to the front, and is arranged in a concentric fan shape around the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect the light from a specific direction forward. Note that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It may be provided, or may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed in the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The rear rear decoration substrate 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a, which are inserted from the rear in the LED housing portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown in the figure, the back rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface of the back inner decorative substrate 3164 at a position inside a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery thereof. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3164 has a coating film made of white solder resist formed on the front surface (both sides).

In the assembled state, the back-back movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment has the decorative sheet 3162 abutting on the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161 and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 on the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. And the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 is thin in the front-rear direction. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164. As a result, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back-and-back decoration substrate 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, which makes them difficult to see from the outside. And it looks good.

Since the rear back movable ornament 3160 has a flange 3161b extending rearward from the body 3161a of the ornament 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3164, a metal ornament on the front of the body 3161a. The creepage distance EL from the 3161c to the back rear decoration substrate 3164 (the copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3164 to allow the back decoration. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. In addition, in the rear back movable decoration body 3160, a decoration base that covers the rear side of the rear rear decoration substrate 3164 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 435(b), has an outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame A light-transmissive flat plate-shaped inner decorative body 3172 that closes the inside), and a light guide radiating plate 3173 that is provided behind the inner decorative body 3172 and radiates forward light in the direction along the entire surface inside. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3174 having a plurality of LEDs 3174a for irradiating the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in a direction along the front surface mounted on the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-back movable decorative body 3170 includes a frame-shaped main body portion 3171a extending in the front-rear direction, a support portion 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a, and a main body portion 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decorative body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

Although not shown, the inner decoration body 3172 is provided with a relief-shaped decoration having unevenness. The inner decorative body 3172 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner decoration body 3172. The light guide radiating plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiating plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape around the determined LED housing portion 3173a, and is provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflecting portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the respective LED housing portions 3173a, which are individually determined, to the front. That is, the plurality of reflectors 3173b are formed to strongly reflect the light from the specific direction to the front. Note that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It may be provided, or may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The back rear decorative substrate 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a, which are inserted from the rear in the LED housing portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the rear back decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface thereof at a position inside the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative substrate 3174 by a predetermined distance SL. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3174 has a coating film made of white solder resist formed on the front surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front side, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. And the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decorative body 3172 are in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, the light guide radiation plate 3173 and the back-rear decoration substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear in the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 of the light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. Around the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3170 is thin in the front-rear direction. In the back-back movable decoration 3170, a gap having the thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decoration 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3174. In this back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the inner decoration body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back-and-back decoration board 3174 are covered by the main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171, and their outer peripheral surfaces are externally exposed. To make it hard to see and to make it look good.

The back-and-back movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3174 by the main body portion 3171a extending rearward of the outer decorative body 3171. The creepage distance EL to (the copper foil of) the back rear decoration substrate 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3174, and the back rear decoration substrate 3174. Can be prevented from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as that of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3170, a decoration body base may be provided to cover the rear side of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3174.

Subsequently, the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 435(c), has an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame A rear rear decorative substrate 3183 in which a light-transmitting inner decorative body 3182 that closes the inside) and a plurality of LEDs 3183a that are provided behind the inner decorative body 3182 and can irradiate light to the front are mounted on the front surface. And are equipped with.

The outer decorative body 3181 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3180 includes a flat plate frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. And a metal decoration portion 3181c which covers. The metal decoration portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. The metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The inner decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decoration 3182 has a flat plate-shaped main body 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body 3181a of the outer decoration 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange 3181b, and is rearward from the outer circumference of the main body 3182a. And a flange portion 3182b extending to the. Although not shown, the main body 3182a is provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3183. Although not shown in the figure, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface at a position inside the back rear decorative substrate 3183 by a predetermined distance SL. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 has a coating film made of white solder resist formed on the front surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back rear movable decoration body 3180 of the present embodiment, the inner decoration body 3182 and the back rear decoration substrate 3183 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3181. In the back-back movable decoration body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decoration body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is connected to the outer decoration body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181. Accordingly, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 prevents the outer peripheries of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back rear decorative substrate 3183 from being seen from the outside.

In this rear-back movable decorative body 3180, the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is provided inside the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c, and the inner decorative body 3182 is Since the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body portion 3182a is separated from the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182, the back decorative substrate 3183 (from the metal rear portion 3181c The creepage distance EL to the foil can be set to a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c is prevented from flowing to the back-rear decoration substrate 3183 and damaging the back-rear decoration substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3180 of the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effect as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration 3180, a decoration base that covers the rear side of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back lower left production unit and back lower right production unit]
Next, the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower lower right effect unit 3250 in the reverse unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 436 to 439 and the like. FIG. 436(a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 436(b) is the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit behind. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 437 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left production unit and the lower right production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 438 is the rear lower left production unit and the lower right production unit as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 439 is an explanatory diagram showing a movable configuration of the lower back left effect unit and the lower lower right effect unit from the front.

The lower back left production unit 3200 and the lower right production unit 3250 of the rear unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the rear rear production unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010. The lower back left production unit 3200 and the lower back right production unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle production unit 3300 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the lower back left effect unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left effect unit 3200 is provided with a translucent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward, and a rear of the lower lower back rotating decoration body 3201, and is translucent. A back lower left decorative body 3202, a back lower left decorative substrate 3203 provided behind the lower lower left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, and a rear lower left decorative substrate 3203 And a lower back left decorative body 3201 is rotatably mounted and a lower lower left decoration 3202 is mounted, and a unit base 3204 mounted on the lower end of the left side of the rear rear effect production unit 3100 is provided. , Are provided.

The lower back left production unit 3200 is attached to the front lower surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation shaft thereof projects rearward, and the lower left drive motor 3205 and the rotation shaft of the lower left drive motor 3205. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 meshing with the drive gear 3206 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and meshed with the first transmission gear 3207. The second transmission gear 3208 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and the second transmission gear 3208 are meshed with each other and are attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. A third transmission gear 3209 having a spur gear shape is provided, and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the lower back left decorative body 3202 is provided.

The lower back counterclockwise decoration 3201 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left decorative member 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower left decorative member 3202, the lower left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. .. The lower back left decoration 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower left rotation decoration 3201 on top of each other and rotating so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are full-color LEDs. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a protruding forward and detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203. When the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 439). ).

When the driving gear 3206 is rotated by the lower back left drive motor 3205, the lower back left production unit 3200 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back lower left effect unit 3200 can cause the lower back left decorative body 3201 and the lower left decorative body 3202 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative board 3203 emit light.

Next, the lower back right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effect unit 3250 is provided behind the lower right rotation decorative body 3251 having translucency, which has a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward, and the rear right rotation decorative body 3251, and is translucent. A lower back right decorative body 3252, and a lower back right decorative board 3253 provided behind the lower right decorative body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear lower right decorative board 3253 The lower back right rotation decoration 3251 is rotatably attached and the lower back right decoration 3252 is attached, and a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear effect production unit 3100. , Are provided.

The lower back right effect unit 3250 is attached to the lower back right drive motor 3255 which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotating shaft projects rearward, and the rotating shaft of the lower back right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that meshes with the drive gear 3256, and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and meshes with the first transmission gear 3257. The second transmission gear 3258 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the second transmission gear 3258 are engaged with the second transmission gear 3258. A third transmission gear 3259 having a spur gear shape and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the back lower right decoration 3252 are provided.

The lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower lower right decorative body 3252, the lower lower right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The lower back right decoration 3252 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower right rotation decoration 3251, and is rotated so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

On the lower back right decoration board 3253, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The lower back right decoration substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253. When the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a, the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 439). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back lower right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back lower right effect unit 3250 can cause the lower back right rotating decoration 3251 and the lower right decoration 3252 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decoration board 3253 emit light.

[5-9f. Underside production unit]
Next, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 440 to 447 and the like. FIG. 440(a) is a perspective view of the lower back middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 440 is a perspective view of the lower back middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 441 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle raising/lowering mechanism of the back lower middle producing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 443 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 444 is the rear lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled from the back. FIG. FIG. 445 is an explanatory diagram showing how the inside-under-the-back decorative body unit is moved up and down by the inside-under-the-back-elevating mechanism in the inside-the-under-the-back effect unit. FIG. 446(a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle rotating decorative body unit in the lower back middle rotating effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor by a table|surface. FIG. 447 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of the LEDs of the lower back middle decoration unit in the lower back middle effect unit.

The lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower lower left effect unit 3200 and the lower lower right effect unit 3250. The under-rear middle production unit 3300 includes an under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 having a back-rear middle rotating decoration body 3310 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-under-middle elevating mechanism for elevating the under-rear middle decoration unit 3320. And 3350.

The shape of the inside-under-the-back decoration 3310 of the inside-under-the-background production unit 3300 is a regular hexagon when viewed from the front. This back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape of "1" to "6" on the entire surface in a clockwise direction centered on the center at an angle of 60 degrees. It is arranged on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a light-transmitting property. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a concave portion 3311 on the rear surface which can accommodate a diffusing lens 3321, a first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, and a front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, which will be described later. Have

As shown in FIG. 443, FIG. 444, etc., the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 and the diffusing lens 3321. It is attached to the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the diffusion lens 3321 so as to sandwich the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side, and protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape. The base plate fixing member 3323 having the shaft part 3323a is provided, and the shaft part 3323a of the base plate fixing member 3323 is provided with the shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft part 3323a is relatively rotatably inserted. And a base 3324.

In addition, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 includes a region detection piece 3325 which projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semi-circular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference which is coaxial with the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding above the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided at the rear of the rotation base 3324 and has an opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, and is transparent. A back under middle decoration 3328, a back under middle second decoration board 3329 provided behind the under back middle decoration 3328 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, and a back under middle second decoration board 3329. A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that are attached to the front surface of the second detecting board 3329 and can detect the area detecting piece 3325, and a position specifying piece that can detect the position detecting piece 3326. And a sensor 3331.

Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the second lower back middle decoration board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached and the lower back middle decoration body 3328 is attached. The movable base 3332 is mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332, the rotation shaft of the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 is mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so as to project forward, and A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3334 that meshes with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-bottom middle lifting mechanism 3350 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And a slide slider 3336 which is guided by the slide rail 3360 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The front end sides of the diffusing lens 3321, the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, and the substrate fixing member 3323 are, in the assembled state, located between the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotation base 3324, and It is accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the rotary decoration body 3310, and is not in contact with any of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 and the rotation base 3324. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs on the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322, it is possible to light-decorate the portion of the numeral decoration (relief) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The LED of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 is a full-color LED. Further, the LEDs on the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 are full-color LEDs.

The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324. As shown in FIG. 446(a), the area detection piece 3325 displays the numbers “3”, “4”, and “5” from between the number decorations “2” and “3” in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. Through the numeral decoration, a circular arc is formed within a range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis between the numeral decorations of "5" and "6".

Each of the plurality (here, six) of position detection pieces 3326 projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on the circumference of a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. Each of the position detection pieces 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is located at the center of the numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. . In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a range of a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and the adjacent An interval of 2×β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis as a center (see FIG. 446(a)). .

A plurality (here, three) of the area specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at intervals of an angle of θ degrees (60 degrees) about the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of clockwise, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are arranged so that the decorations “1” of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 are positioned right above the center of rotation and are “3”, “4”, and “5”. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 446(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position of an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The elevating pins 3332a are slidably inserted into the second slits 3357b of the elevating arms 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting a rotation position.

This under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the under-rear middle rotating decoration body 3310 via the rotation gear 3327 by rotating the drive gear 3334 by the under-rear middle rotating drive motor 3333. You can In addition, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decoration substrate 3329, respectively, and thereby the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310. Also, the underbody decoration 3328 can be illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 441, FIG. 442, etc., the under-bottom middle elevating mechanism 3350 has a unit base 3351 extending to the left and right, and both end sides attached to the under-bottom left effect unit 3200 and the under-bottom right effect unit 3250, and a unit base 3351. The lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 which is attached to the front surface of the unit so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the flat bottom which is attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 and partially faces the front side of the unit base 3351. The gear-shaped drive gear 3353 is meshed with the drive gear 3353, and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 is meshed with the first transmission gear 3354. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity, and is provided with an elevating cam gear 3356 rotatably attached at the upper center of the front surface of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 with the base end side extending in the left-right direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. The first slit 3357a extending to the first slit 3357a, and the second slit 3357b that extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and in which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , And an up/down arm 3357 having a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip, and a back-and-lower center up/down detection sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detection piece 3357c of the up/down arm 3357 are provided. And a lower back intermediate relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

Further, the back-and-lower center elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending elevator slit 3359a through which an elevator pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 of the ornamental body unit 3320 is inserted, and a front cover 3359 mounted on the front surface of the ornamental body unit 3320, the lower cover is moved up and down. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and the tip end side of the elevating arm 3357 moves upward (front side). And a spring 3362 that urges the elevating arm 3357 to rotate in a clockwise direction with respect to the view.

The lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part of the unit base 3351 to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably attached such that the base end is to the right of the elevating cam gear 3356 and is at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356. The elevating arm 3357 has a tip end extending leftward from the elevating cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 is a lower back middle decoration board 3322, a lower back middle decoration board 3329, a region specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lift drive motor. 3352 relays the connection between the lower back middle up-and-down detection sensor 3358a and the production drive board 1720.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the lift slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the horizontal center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359. The elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back-and-lower-in-the-bottom elevating drive motor 3352, the back-and-bottom-in-the-back elevating mechanism 3350 moves through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the elevating cam gear 3356 via the gear portion 3356a. The 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted, and the lift arm 3357 can be rotated. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 through the elevating pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted in the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 and the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the under-rear middle production unit 3300 is in the state of the lowered position where the in-under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the lowermost position. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 of the lower-lower-under-elevation mechanism 3350 has its tip side located below the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the front end raises and lowers the under-rear intermediate substrate 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 445(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of its revolution, and is also located near the proximal end of the elevating arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a. .. More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point between the drive pin 3356b and the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if the spring 3362 exerts an urging force to rotate the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the force line of the urging force causes the drive pin 3356b that is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, so the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arm 3357 and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. Accordingly, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the urging force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the proximal end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the under-rear center production unit 3300, in a normal state, the uppermost numeral decoration among the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower-rear middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be viewed well from the front (player side) (see FIG. 389 and the like). Further, in a normal state, the numerical decoration located at the bottom is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the back lower middle first. By making the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329 emit light, in addition to the light emission decoration of the back and middle rotating ornament, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also emit light (see FIG. 398 and the like). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the back-and-lower center up-and-down drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are passed. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the distal end side, and the elevating arm moves. The tip end side of 3357 is rotated clockwise around the base end side so that the tip end side moves upward.

By rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. Then, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved upward via the elevating pin 3332a. When the drive pin 3356b moves above the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end side. At this time, in the up-and-down arm 3357, since the spring 3362 exerts a biasing force in the clockwise direction, the biasing force assists the upward movement of the inside-under-the-back decoration unit 3320, and The load on the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When this drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back-and-lower center up-and-down drive motor 3352 is stopped, and at the same time, the drive is performed. The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 by the elevating arm 3357 is stopped, and the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 moves to the uppermost position.

When the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force to rotate the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction acts due to the own weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force line of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the drive pin 3356b in contact therewith. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the lifting cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the lifting arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decorative body does not move. The own weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arm 3357 and the like.

It should be noted that in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. Accordingly, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b causes the elevating cam gear 3356 to rotate. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the proximal end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented from moving downward.

In the state in which the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (further, a game ball rolling in the game area 5a). B is positioned above the rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided in the center accessory 2500 that prevents the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501) from rebounding from the outside to the front (player). All the digit decorations are well visible from the side) (see Figure 479).

To return the lower-under-the-back celestial body unit 3320 to the lowered position from the state where it is moved to the raised position, the driving gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction by the under-the-back-elevation driving motor 3352, and the lifting arm 3357 is moved. Rotates counterclockwise to move the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 from the raised position downward. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the elevating arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle lift detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352. , The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 in the normal lowered position (further, the center of the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a is prevented from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501)). The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the position where the pachinko machine 1 overlaps when viewed from the front.

The under-rear middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the present embodiment is configured to rotate the drive gear 3334 by the under-rear intermediate rotating drive motor 3333 in the under-rear intermediate decorative body unit 3320, thereby rotating the under-rear intermediate rotating decorative body 3310. Can be rotated around a longitudinal axis. By rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the six numeral decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333 at any position such as the lowered position or the raised position of the lower back middle rotating body unit 3320.

In the under-rear middle production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, one of a plurality (here, six) of numeral decorations in the under-rear middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned immediately above the rotation center (stop position). is doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 446(a), in the state where the numeral decoration “1” in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located above, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is set to the first area specifying portion. The position detection sensor 3331 detects a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 while detecting by the three region specification sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second region specification sensor 3330b, and the third region specification sensor 3330c. Is not detecting.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the numeral decoration of “1” is the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c cause the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 to move. Is being detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 446(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect, the numeral decoration of "2" indicates an area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of "3" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration of "4" is the range of the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located inside.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detected, the numeral decoration of "5" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a does not detect, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "6" indicates an area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

In this way, by the combination of the detection/non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330, that is, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, any of the numeral decorations can determine the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not the vehicle is located in the stop area including the area.

Then, since the back-under-center rotation drive motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and then rotates 30 degrees, the back-under-center rotation drive is performed. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it becomes possible to stop the desired number decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, it is necessary to identify the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the area of the stop position by the three area specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 are provided, and the position specifying sensor 3331 is used to recognize the origin. Thus, it is possible to reduce the load by suppressing complication of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

More specifically, when it is desired to stop the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 at a desired number decoration at a stop position, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 stop as desired. In the case of the combination satisfying the positions, the position specifying sensor 3331 is displaced in the rotational direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. Therefore, the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is further rotated by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 is separated from the position identification sensor 3331. Then, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is the origin. Then, from there (from the origin), when it rotates by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the back lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, and a desired number is obtained. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

Note that, in the above, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is described by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 which is a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, when the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is further rotated by 13 steps in a combination of the three area specifying sensors 3330 satisfying a desired stop position, the position detecting piece 3326 is The position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detecting away from the position specifying sensor 3331. By stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 when the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected and the origin is at 20 steps, the desired numeral decoration is stopped. Can be stopped exactly in position.

Next, the light emission decoration in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 447, the under-rear middle production unit 3300 includes a plurality of LEDs for causing the under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 to emit light and decorate the under-rear middle decoration unit 3310. It is provided with a decorative substrate 3322 and a second lower back middle decorative substrate 3329. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numeral decorations on the lower middle rotating decoration 3310, and each numeral decoration can be independently illuminated.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3329 are located behind the portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 that is outside the plurality of numeral decorations. The periphery can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the inside-under-representation unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the inside-under-revolving decorative body 3310 by the three area specifying sensors 3330 to some extent. Therefore, based on the detection by the area specifying sensor 3330. By rotating a plurality of LEDs of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 as appropriate, the LEDs are rotated in a state in which only a specific number decoration is illuminated or each number decoration is illuminated in a different color. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a production that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numerical decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the relevant part in the lower back first decorative substrate 3322 to emit light. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002. In addition, when the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002, the LED of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is caused to emit light (or one emission mode is selected from a plurality of emission modes to emit light). ).

As described above, according to the inside-under-the-back production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, this allows the rotating lower-under-the-middle rotating decorative body 3310 having the six stop positions to detect a region having a length extending over the three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions are provided, and three area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 and one position identification that detects the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. By repeating this, all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not non-detected until the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, and the area detecting piece 3325 is detected. By the combination of the area specifying sensors 3330 that are present, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

Then, since the back under-center rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the six position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the under-side center rotating by the detection of the area detecting pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by the detection of the position detection piece 3326 by the one position specifying sensor 3331, and the stop position is displaced. The stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions can be accurately grasped by reducing the number as much as possible.

In addition, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position deviates from the game. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower inner rotating decorative body 3310 can be made higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Accordingly, the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted to the player by the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 that rotates, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be prevented. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is supposed to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of numeral decorations are provided on the front surface, a roulette wheel that stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position after rotating around. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting the movement to any stop position is , The number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is the same, and the ability (the grasp of the stop position) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions are provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. It can be made as large as possible, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

In the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The invention is not limited to this, and the region detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Back production unit]
Next, the back production unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 448 to 455 and the like. FIG. 448(a) is a perspective view of the back surface effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 448 is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 449 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 450 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. FIG. 451 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up/down decorative body unit in the back-up production unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 452 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up/down decorative body unit in the back unit disassembled and seen from behind. It is a figure.

FIG. 453 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotating decorative body in the back-up production unit. FIG. 454(a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the back-up/down decorative body unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and FIG. 454(b) shows the back-up/down decorative body unit in the state where it is moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a raising/lowering decorative body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation ornamental body from a front. FIG. 455 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative substrate from the front in a state in which the back up/down lifting decorative body unit in the back up effect unit is moved to the appearance position.

The back production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back production unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 449 and FIG. 450, the back-up effect unit 3400 includes a back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 having an axial shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back-up front rotating decorative body 3410. A back front decorative body 3421 extending in the left and right direction in which the shaft shaft 3410a penetrates in the center of the left and right direction, and a back rear provided behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface A front decoration board 3422 and a back front decoration board 3422 are provided behind the back front decoration board 3422 and a back front decoration body 3421 is attached to the front surface thereof to rotatably support the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotation decoration body 3410. And a unit base 3423 that operates.

Further, the back production unit 3400 is provided between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear cover 3424 and the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and a unit base 3423 having a rotation axis on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. Back front rotation drive motor 3425 mounted so as to project into the space of the above, spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotation shaft of the back front rotation drive motor 3425, and meshing with the drive gear 3426. A rotary gear 3427, which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-side front rotating decorative body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward, and a back-side front decorative substrate 3422. A rear rotation detection sensor 3428 that is attached to the rear surface of the rotation gear 3427 and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, the back production unit 3400 includes a back elevation drive motor 3429 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 such that the rotation axis projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back elevation drive. The spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshed with the motor gear 3430, and the portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrate the rear cover 3424. An elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424, which has a driving pin 3431b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a. , A back-up/down detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the lift-up cam gear 3431; So that the drive pin 3431b revolves up and down, the base end side is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and the back up and down decoration body unit 3450. A spring 3433 that urges the tip end side 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward and a rear cover 3424 are attached to the rear side, and regulate the upward movement of the rear upper and lower decoration unit 3450. And a rod-shaped restricting member 3434 that operates.

As shown in FIGS. 451 and 452, the back-up/down decorative body unit 3450 includes a back-up rear decoration in which a shaft shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 penetrates in the center. A body 3451, a back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the back upper decoration member 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, and a back rear decoration member 3451 from the back of the back rear decoration substrate 3452. And a lifting unit base 3453 rotatably mounted on the unit base 3423 and rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3440a of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440.

Further, the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 includes a back up rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the up/down unit base 3453 such that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back up rear rotation drive motor 3454. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3455 attached to the drive gear 3455, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 engaged with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456. And a second transmission gear 3457 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453 and a shaft shaft 3440a of the rear-side rear rotating decorative body 3440 that is in mesh with the second transmission gear 3457. And a rotary gear 3458 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rear end.

Further, the back-and-up elevator decoration unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevator unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotary gear 3458 from the rear. 3459 and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back-up production unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 penetrates the back front decorative body 3421, the back front decorative substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear side. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the cover. The back front decoration 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back front rotation decoration 3410 stacked in front and back at the center in the left-right direction, and the rear petals are between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it was rotated so that it is located at. The back front decorative body 3421 has translucency as a whole.

The back upper front decorative board 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. By illuminating the LEDs of the front back decoration substrate 3422, the front back decoration 3410 and front decoration 3421 can be illuminated and decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front decorative substrate 3422 are full-color LEDs.

The unit base 3423 has through holes 3423a through which the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back upper lift detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is formed in an arc shape in which the cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotating decorative body 3410. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the upper and lower lifting decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 is detected by the back-side rotation detection sensor 3428 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semi-circular shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 in the rear upper and lower elevating decorative body unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-and-up lifting detection sensor 3432 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward.

The back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom and has a light-transmitting property. The shaft shaft 3440a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates the back rear decorative body 3451, the back rear decorative substrate 3452, and the lifting unit base 3453, and then the lifting unit base 3453. Extends to the rear side of. The back-up rear decoration 3451 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up rotation decoration 3440 stacked one on top of the other and rotated so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It has the decoration of the shape. The back rear decorative body 3451 is entirely transparent.

The back-up rear decorative board 3452 can make the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 emit light by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface emit light. The LEDs on the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are full-color LEDs.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and a shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be rotatable relative to the base end side (right end side in front view). And an elongated hole-shaped slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lifting unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration imitating cherry blossoms formed on the front surface.

Next, the movement of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the back-up production unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the back production unit 3400 detects the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotation decorative body 3410 by the back rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotary ornament 3410 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 453). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, the back-up front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

Further, in a normal state, the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 in which the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 is provided on the front end side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the entire body excluding the front end side is It is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 454(a)). In addition, the part of the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 that protrudes leftward from the back front decorative body 3421 is located in the rear of the back front left effect unit 3700 in the state assembled in the game board 5, It is invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up/down elevation detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is positioned below the center of its revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the lifting unit base 3453 of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point between the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if the force of rotating the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction such that the front end side moves downward by the own weight of the back and forth elevating/decorating body unit 3450, that force is exerted. The force line passes through the center of rotation of the lifting cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, so the lifting cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lift unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back upper lift decorative body unit 3450 rotates so that the tip side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the own weight of the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up/down lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b that is far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-and-forth lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is moved counterclockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lift unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lift decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back up/down drive motor 3429, the elevator cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431a meshed with the motor gear 3430. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves clockwise, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3453a so that the front end side of the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is moved downward by its own weight.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction and moves above a straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b moves. The slit 3453b slides in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up/down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b. The revolution of the is stopped.

This stops the counterclockwise rotation of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 via the lifting/lowering unit base 3453, so that the front end side of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 including the back/up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is fixed. , And the appearance position is moved to a position lower than the back upper front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 454(b)). In this appearance position, the front side of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 is located lower than the front side of the front upper decorative body 3421, so that the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like are visually recognized from the front. It becomes possible.

In the state in which the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the slit 3453b in the drive pin 3431b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431. As a result, even if the force of further rotating the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is exerted by the weight of the back-side elevating decorative body unit 3450, the force line of the force is applied to the slit 3453b. The elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the contacting drive pin 3431b. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lifting unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise so that the tip side moves further downward from the appearance position. In addition, the weight of the back up and down decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back up and down drive motor 3429 via the up and down cam gear 3431.

It should be noted that in the state in which the back-and-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 is attempted to rotate further in the counterclockwise direction due to the own weight of the back-and-forth lifting decorative body unit 3450, the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b causes the lifting cam gear 3431 to move. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

In a state in which the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back up rear rotating decorative body 3440 provided on the front end side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up rear rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about the longitudinal axis (see FIG. 454(b)). Therefore, when the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized from the front, by rotating the drive gear 3455 by the back-up rear rotating drive motor 3454, the rotating back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be made visible. ..

When the back up/down lifting decorative unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the back up/down driving motor 3429 rotates the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above so that the drive pin 3431b of the up/down cam gear 3431 moves up and down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the tip end side of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 moves upward. When the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up/down detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back up/down drive motor 3429 is stopped to move the back up/down decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position. Can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assists the rotation of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and lifts the back up/down. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 455, the back production unit 3400 of the present embodiment has a back front decorative substrate 3422 provided behind the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421. By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421 can be illuminated. Further, since the back-up rear decorative board 3452 is provided at the rear of the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decoration board 3452 appropriately emit light. By doing so, the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be illuminated.

At this time, the LEDs on the rear upper rear decoration substrate 3452 are caused to emit light in a state where the rear upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side. The body 3440 and the back decorative body 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Left rear production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 456 to 462 and the like. FIG. 456(a) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 456(b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 457 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 458 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 459 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left rendering unit seen from the front, and FIG. 460 is a rear rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left rendering unit disassembled from the back. FIG. FIG. 461 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear-left rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 462 is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back-rear left decorative body unit in the back-rear left effect unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear left effect unit 3500 has a translucent back-rear left rotation decorative body 3510 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back that rotatably supports the back-rear left rotation decoration 3510 at the lower end side. A rear left decorative body unit 3520 and a rear rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in the rear case 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. .

The back-rear left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back-rear left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has a light-transmitting property. The rear-rear left-handed rotating decorative body 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 460).

As shown in FIGS. 459 and 460, the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a rear rear left decoration body 3521 and a rear rear left decoration body 3521 in which an axial shaft 3510a of the rear rear left rotation decoration body 3510 penetrates in the center. A rear rear left decoration board 3522 provided behind the rear surface 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, and mounted from the rear of the rear rear left decoration board 3522 to the rear side of the rear rear left decoration body 3521. , A front cover 3523 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear-rear-left-turning decorative body 3510, and is attached to the rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side is rotatable with the rear-rear-left drive unit 3550. And a movable base 3524 attached thereto.

In addition, the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3524 such that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a rear rear A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear left rotation decorative body 3510 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. And a gear-shaped rotating gear 3527.

The back-rear left decoration unit 3521 of the back-rear left decoration unit 3520 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-rear left rotation decoration unit 3510 are overlapped in the front and back and then rear. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the rear rear left decoration substrate 3522 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decoration body 3521 and a portion that extends in a quadrangle upward from the upper left of the rear portion. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side thereof extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating forward and backward on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the back rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 moves the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 back and forth through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 457 and 458, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the rear rear left decoration unit 3520. , A vertically extending unit base 3552 mounted on the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and mounted in the back box 3010, a unit cover 3553 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3552, and a rotation on the upper front surface of the unit cover 3553. A rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 mounted such that its shaft projects between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on the rotary shaft of the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554. 3555 and.

The rear rear left drive unit 3550 is also a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. An elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a, and an elevating cam gear The drive pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a extending in the left and right direction, and the left and right below the first slit 3558a, the operation pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the left rear decoration unit 3520 is extended. Has a second slit 3558b slidably inserted therein, and a link member 3558 slidably attached in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the lifting cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. A back rear left relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the back side 3553, and a back rear left up/down detection sensor 3562 attached to the back surface of the back rear left relay board 3561 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the up/down cam gear 3557; Is equipped with.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and a support shaft 3551a projects forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520.

The unit base 3552 extends vertically longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape that is open rearward.

The elevating cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 by the drive pin 3557b penetrating the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a back rear left up/down detection sensor 3562 which penetrates the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3558a provided near the upper end and a second slit 3558b provided at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semi-circular shape into which the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 is inserted. The rear rear left relay board 3561 relays the rear rear left decoration board 3522, the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554, and the rear rear left up-down detection sensor 3562, and the performance drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Next, the operation of the back rear left effect unit 3500 will be described. In a normal state, the rear-rear-left production unit 3500 has a rear-rear left decorative body 3510 provided with a rear-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 461 and 462(a). The unit 3520 is in a retracted position in which the unit 3520 hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 and is invisible from the front (player side). Is becoming

Further, in a normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700. Only part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 409 and the like). It should be noted that the portion of the rear facing left up-and-down drive motor 3554 that faces the front is covered by a portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1, so that the player It is invisible from the side (see FIG. 413).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557, and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in the normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3524b located on the right side of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is It is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged by the spring 3559 in the direction of moving upward, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557b that is in contact with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554 through the link member 3558, the up/down cam gear 3557, and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the lifting cam gear 3557 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left. However, since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b. Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557 to prevent the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554, the lift cam gear 3557 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the ascending/descending cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3558a is pressed upward while sliding rightward in the first slit 3558a, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 protruding below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the operation pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is pressed. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 462(a) and 462(b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3559 assists the upward movement of the link member 3558, and reduces the load applied to the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554.

In this way, the rear-rear-left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, whereby the rear-rear-left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. While moving upward while the back rear left rotation decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back front left effect unit 3700, it becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (the retracted position). The position is set as the first appearance position (see FIG. 462(b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. When the drive pin 3557b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear-rear left-right lifting drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the counterclockwise rotation of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 462(c). See)). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

When the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, a force that causes the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 to rotate in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a acts, and the force causes the movable base to move. The link member 3558 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3524b of the 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the lifting cam gear 3557 does not rotate, the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the rear back left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557, and the like.

In the state where the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b is brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. As a result, when the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a by its own weight and the link member 3558 moves downward via the operation pin 3524b, The force acting from the one slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b causes the lifting cam gear 3557 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Therefore, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 can be locked so as not to be rotatable in the second appearance position.

In the state in which the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

In this rear rear left decorative body unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is moved through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around an axis in the front-back direction (see FIG. 461). Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decorative body 3510 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rotating back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 is displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 is used to reverse the motor gear 3555. When the link member 3558 is rotated by rotating the drive pin 3557b of the ascending/descending cam gear 3557, the link member 3558 can be moved downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 is stopped to retract the back rear left decoration unit 3520. It is possible to return to the position state.

Since the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear left decoration substrate 3522 behind the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 and the back rear left decoration body 3521 as shown in FIG. 461. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear back left decoration substrate 3522, the rear rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the rear rear left decoration 3521 can be illuminated and decorated. At this time, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LEDs of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 are caused to emit light, whereby the light emission decoration is performed. The back rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the back rear left decoration 3521 that are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Right after rear production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 463 to 469 and the like. FIG. 463(a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 46(b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 464 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 465 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 466 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit seen from the front, and FIG. 467 is a rear rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled from the back. FIG. FIG. 468 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 469 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-rear right decorative body unit in the back-rear right effect unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The rear-rear right effect unit 3600 has a translucent rear-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a rear portion that rotatably supports the rear-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 at a lower end side. It includes a rear right decorative body unit 3620 and a rear rear right driving unit 3650 mounted in the rear box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction. ..

The rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 of the rear-rear right rendering unit 3600 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom and has a light-transmitting property. The back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 466).

As shown in FIGS. 466 and 467, the rear back right decoration unit 3620 includes a rear rear right decoration body 3621 in which the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3610 penetrates in the center, and a rear rear right decoration body 3621. A back rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back of the 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back rear right decorative board 3622 from the back to the back rear right decorative body 3621 The front cover 3623 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear-rear right-turning decorative body 3610, and the rear cover is attached to the rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side is rotatable to the rear-rear right drive unit 3650. And a movable base 3624 attached thereto.

In addition, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3624 such that the rotation shaft thereof projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear right rotation decorative body 3610, which meshes with the drive gear 3626. And a gear-shaped rotating gear 3627.

The back-rear right decoration body 3621 of the back-rear right decoration body unit 3620 has a light-transmitting property, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-rear right rotation decoration body 3610 are stacked on the front and the rear. The petals on the side are formed so as to be rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back rear right decoration substrate 3622 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decoration body 3621 and a portion that extends in a quadrangle from the upper right of the portion to the upper side. .. The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangle. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side thereof extends above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating forward and backward on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3624b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved back and forth through the rotary gear 3627 meshed with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 464 and 465, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the back rear right decoration unit 3620. A vertically extending unit base 3652 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and is installed in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper portion is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652; A rear rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of 3653 so as to project between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

The rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right, into which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b which extends left and right below 3658a and into which the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted, and has a unit base 3652 and a unit cover 3653. And a link member 3658 mounted slidably in the up and down direction.

Further, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. A back-rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of 3653, and a back-rear right up-and-down detection sensor 3662 attached to the back surface of the back-rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the up-down cam gear 3657 The lower base 3663 is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652, and the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and a support shaft 3651a projects forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 of the rear rear right decoration unit 3620.

The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically with substantially the same length from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed in the shape of a shallow container opened rearward.

The elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 by the drive pin 3657b penetrating the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a back rear right up/down detection sensor 3662 which penetrates the unit cover 3653 and projects rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semi-circular shape into which the drive pin 3657b of the lifting cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back rear right decoration board 3622, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654, and the back rear right up/down detection sensor 3662, and the performance drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Next, the operation of the back rear right effect unit 3600 will be described. In a normal state, the rear-rear right effect unit 3600 has a rear-rear right decorative body 3610 provided with a rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 468 and 469(a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right performance unit 3800 and is invisible from the front (player side). Is becoming

In a normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the whole is in front (on the player side). It is invisible.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is located near the right end of the first slit 3658a in the link member 3658. In a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3624b located on the left side of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is biased in the upward moving direction by the spring 3659, but the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a in the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if the upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657, and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 tends to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right. However, since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b. Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear right lifting drive motor 3654, the lifting cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the lifting cam gear 3657 is rotated. The drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3658a is pressed upward while sliding leftward in the first slit 3658a, and the link member 3658 moves upward. Becomes

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 protruding below the support shaft 3651a and leftward is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a while the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 retracts. It rotates in the clockwise direction from the position (see FIGS. 469(a) and 469(b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3659 assists the upward movement of the link member 3658 and reduces the load on the rear rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654.

In this way, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, whereby the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. As it moves upward, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 moves to the left of the back front right effect unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotating position of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state (the retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 469(b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

When the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b comes to slide to the right in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the clockwise rotation of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 469(c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

When the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force that causes the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a acts, and the rear movable right decorative body unit 3620 moves by the force. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located directly above the revolution center. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate, the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657 and the like.

In addition, even when the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 may be further rotated in the clockwise direction so that the drive pin 3657b abuts on the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a by its own weight and the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3624b, The force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the lifting cam gear 3657 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is prevented, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked so as not to rotate in the state of the second appearance position.

In the state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

In this rear rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved through the rotary gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about its longitudinal axis (see Figure 468). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back rear right rotating decoration body 3610 is displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is a normal state, the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 sets the motor gear 3655 to the reverse of the above. By rotating the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, the link member 3658 can be moved downward, and as the link member 3658 moves downward, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 is stopped to retract the back rear right decoration unit 3620. It is possible to return to the position state.

Since the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decoration substrate 3622 behind the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 as shown in FIG. 468, By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear back right decoration substrate 3622, the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3610 and the rear rear right decoration body 3621 can be light-emitted. At this time, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LED of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 is caused to emit light, thereby providing a light emission decoration. The back rear right rotation decoration 3610 and the back rear right decoration 3621 that are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 470 to 473 and the like. FIG. 470(a) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 470 is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 471 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 472 is an exploded rear front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. 473(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 473(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left effect unit 3700 is, in order from the top, three back front left decorations of a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 473, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the right. The shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 471 and 472, the back-front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back-front left effect unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. -Shaped shutter support member 3712 and the shutter support member 3712 are vertically arranged in a row on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 and are rotatably supported around an axis in the left-right direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3730.

Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and has a translucent flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front left decorative body 3713. The rear front left decoration board 3714 provided on the rear side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear front left decoration board 3714 attached to the front cover 3711 so as to cover the rear front left decoration board 3714 from the rear side. And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front surface of the 3500.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front. A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a rotation member attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3719 and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open/close the shutter unit 3730 are provided.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is formed such that the outer shape is such that the “convex” shape is turned to the right and the corners are rounded (the shape in which “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a on the front surface thereof so as to rotatably support the shaft portions 3733 of the respective shutter members 3731 of the shutter unit 3730. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b which projects cylindrically forward from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and the support plate 3716 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3732 in the left-right direction, and a left-side portion after protruding from the tip of the left-side shaft portion 3733 in the axis-perpendicular direction. And a crankshaft 3734 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward one side.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crank shaft 3734 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3733.

Since the shaft portion 3733 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, the shutter member 3731 can rotate about the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720.

Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 is provided with characters, items, logos, and other patterns according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back-front left decorative body 3713 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714. The plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are full-color LEDs.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing leftward and rightward, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. A portion of the support plate 3716, which is bent to the right on the front end side, is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the rest of the portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that protrudes from the vicinity of the lower end to the right in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in such a direction that the plunger moves forward and backward. The back left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate about the support pin 3716a about the axis in the left-right direction. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion into which the support pin 3716a is inserted being interposed, and a second connection portion 3720 connected to the opening/closing slider 3720. The connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The open/close slider 3720 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of a shutter unit 3730 including a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the front left production unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state, the back front left effect unit 3700 is in a state in which the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 has its plate surface facing forward as shown in FIG. The shutter 3732 is in a closed state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern provided on the rear left front decorative body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (a plurality of shutters 3732). Has been done.

In a normal state, the back left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the urging force of the spring causes the plunger to protrude downward. Further, in the normal state, the opening/closing slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

In this normal state, when the back left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

When the open/close slider 3720 moves downward, the crank shaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crank shaft 3734 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is oriented in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is provided. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 473(b)).

After that, the back left drive solenoid 3717 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has moved upward moves downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can be returned to the closed state which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left production unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the back front left decoration body 3713 is changed from the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3730. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

Further, since the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back-front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is closed, a plurality of LEDs of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 are made to emit light. Thus, the player can see the shutter unit 3730 that is light-emitted and decorated, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, by making a plurality of LEDs of the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 emit light, the back-front left that is light-emitted The ornamental body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front left effect unit 3700, three back front left decoration unit units, that is, a first back front left decoration body unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration body unit 3710C. Since the shutter units 3730 can be independently opened and closed, and the lights of the 3710 can be decorated, a variety of effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects by the three back front left decorative body units 3710. I can show you.

[5-9k. Front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 474 to 477 and the like. FIG. 474(a) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 474 is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 475 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit viewed from the front and FIG. 476 is one rear front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 477(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 477 is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the open state.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 such that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010. .. The back front right effect unit 3800 includes three back front right decorations, a first back front right decoration body unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration body unit 3810C, in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 477, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the left. The shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 475 and 476, the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back-front right effect unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. -Shaped shutter support member 3812, and the shutter support member 3812 is vertically arranged in a row on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 and is supported rotatably around an axis in the left-right direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3830.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and has a translucent plate-shaped back front right decoration 3813 and the back front right decoration 3813. A rear front right decorative board 3814 provided on the rear side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear rear right effect unit attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the rear front right decorative board 3814 from the rear side. A rear cover 3815 attached to the front surface of the 3600.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front. A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and a transmission plate 3816 attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3819 and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open/close the shutter unit 3830 are provided.

The outer shape of the front cover 3811 of the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 is formed in a shape in which the “convex” shape is tilted to the left and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is designed). The shutter supporting member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a on its front surface, which rotatably supports the shaft portions 3833 of the respective shutter members 3831 of the shutter unit 3830. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that projects cylindrically forward from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and the support plate 3816 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3832, and a right-hand side after protruding from the tip of the right-side shaft portion 3833 in the axis-perpendicular direction. And a crank shaft 3834 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward one side.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged, with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crank shaft 3834 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3833.

Since the shaft portion 3833 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, the shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft portion 3833 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820.

Although not shown in the figure, the back front right decorative body 3813 is provided with a design such as a character, an item, a logo, or the like according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back-front right decorative body 3813 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814. The LEDs on the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are full-color LEDs.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. A portion of the support plate 3816 that is bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the rest of the portion extends rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that protrudes from the vicinity of the lower end to the left in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back-front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in such a direction that the plunger moves forward and backward. The back-front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in the direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate about the support pin 3816a about the axis in the left-right direction. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion into which the support pin 3816a is inserted interposed therebetween, and a second connection portion 3820 connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. The connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3820 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of a shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831, and each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is a transmission groove into which the crankshaft 3834 is slidably movable in the front-rear direction. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 477(a), the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 is in a state with its plate surface facing forward, The shutter 3832 is in a closed state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Has been done.

In the normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger is projected downward by the biasing force of the spring. Further, in the normal state, the open/close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

When the open/close slider 3820 moves downward, the crank shaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crank shaft 3834 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates about the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 is oriented in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is provided. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 477(b)).

After that, by turning off the back right drive solenoid 3817 (OFF), the plunger that was moving upward is moved downward by the biasing force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can be returned to the closed state which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the back front right decoration 3813 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

Further, since the back-front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back-front right decorative body 3813, a plurality of LEDs of the back-front right decorative board 3814 are made to emit light when the shutter unit 3830 is closed. Thus, the player can see the shutter unit 3830 that is light-emitted and decorated, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, by illuminating a plurality of LEDs of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814, the back-right right that is illuminated and decorated. The ornamental body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right effect unit 3800, three back front right decoration unit units, that is, a first back front right decoration body unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration body unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 can be independently opened/closed and the 3810 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects by the three back-front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 478 to 483 and the like. FIG. 478 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the rear rear movable decoration body of the rear rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 479 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the under-rear-middle rotating decorative body of the under-rear-middle rendering unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 480 shows that the back-rear rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the rear-rear left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-rear right. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the rear right rotation ornamental body of the production unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 481 shows that the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear right rotating decorative member of the rear-rear right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state. FIG. 482 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state.

FIG. 483 shows the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear rear rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the rear rear of the rear rear left effect unit. Move the left rotating decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the rear rear right rotating decorative body of the rear back right rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is moved from the lowered position to the raised position.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially transparent, in a normal state. As shown in FIG. 389, the back front left decoration 3030, the back front right decoration 3040, and the back bottom left rotation of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are passed through them. Decorative body 3201, back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 of back lower right rendering unit 3250, back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 of back lower middle rendering unit 3300, back top front rotation decorative body 3410 and back top of back rendering unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, and the like can be visually recognized well, and the center role object 2500 is also visible. Through the inside of the frame, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well.

More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the stop 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is located along the side right middle unit up to the vicinity of 2700. Further, the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 of the rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper-rear effect unit 3400 and is invisible to the player.

In addition, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the center of the side unit 2200 and the left general winning opening 2001, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. Is located below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first special winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

Further, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in a lowered position, and is positioned behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 so that the upper part thereof projects into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees this back-and-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 from a diagonally upper position, the numeral decoration above the center of rotation is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be seen well.

Further, the back front decorative body 3421 of the back production unit 3400 extends to the left and right in the upper part of the game area 5a in a front view, and the upper left part in the left-right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center accessory. It can be seen through 2500, and the rest can be seen well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-up front ornamental body 3410 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-up front ornamental body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be seen. The back up/down decorative body unit 3450 having the back up/back rotating decoration body 3440 of the back up production unit 3400 is in a retracted position which is behind the back up front decoration body 3421 in a normal state. It is invisible from the side.

Further, the back-rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-rear left rendering unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is invisible to the player. Further, the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 having the back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 of the back-rear right rendering unit 3600 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-front right rendering unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is invisible to the player.

Further, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front left decoration body units 3710, the upper first back front left decoration body unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative body unit 3710B on the inner side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. In the front view, most of the lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and the right part is inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Furthermore, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are vertically arranged along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back-front right decoration body units 3810, the upper first back-front right decoration body unit 3810A is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. In the front view, the second rear front right decorative body unit 3810B on the inner side and the third rear front right decorative body unit 3810C on the lower side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center on the right side from the left side of the center in the left-right direction. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 is a rear-rear effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700. , And the front right production unit 3800 perform a predetermined production (movable production or light emission production).

Specifically, as an effect using the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 478, by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by a back-rear drive motor 3126, the lock member 3134 is moved. The lock due to is released and the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. This allows the player to see the effect (movable effect) in which the large rear back movable decorative body 3110 that crosses the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise the expectation for the game.

In the rear-rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the rear-rear movable decoration 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the rear-rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the rear-rear movable decoration. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, by properly changing the forward/reverse rotation of the rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the up-down direction. The movable decorative body 3110 can be paid attention to, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 479, the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to move the lower back middle decoration unit 3320. Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and at the same time, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600, which is good from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

Since the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six numeral decorations, by rotating the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310, the impression that the roulette is rotating to the player as much as possible. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as “Soroku”, and the number of the number decoration of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating. Depending on, the "piece" may be advanced. As a result, the player is harassed by whether or not the rotating back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired numeral decoration so that the “piece” advances to the desired “box”. It can be exciting and entertaining the player. Further, the player can make the player feel as if the expected value is increasing as the "pieces" advance, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased.

As an effect using the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower right effect unit 3250, the upper effect unit 3400, the rear left effect unit 3500, and the rear right effect unit 3600 in the reverse unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, in the lower back left production unit 3200, the lower lower left drive motor 3205 rotates the lower back left rotating decoration 3201, and in the lower right production unit 3250, the lower lower right drive motor 3255 rotates the lower back right ornament. Rotate 3251. In the back production unit 3400, the back front rotating drive motor 3425 rotates the back front rotating decorative body 3410, and the back raising/lowering drive motor 3429 moves the back raising/lowering decorative body unit 3450 downward from the retracted position. At the same time as turning to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440. Further, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500, the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 moves the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the retracted position to the slightly upper right first appearance position, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 drives the rear rear The left-hand rotation decorative body 3510 is rotated. Also, in the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654 moves the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the slightly upper left first appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 drives the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625. The right rotation decorative body 3610 is rotated.

As a result, the back upper back rotating decoration 3440, the back left rotating decoration 3510, and the back right rotating decoration 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 to be visible, and the back lower left rotating decoration. Since the body 3201, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251, the back upper front rotation decoration body 3410, the back upper back rotation decoration body 3440, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate, respectively. By rotating the six ornaments, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making it think that something good will happen.

At this time, the back up/down elevating drive motor 3429, the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554, and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654 are appropriately repeated in the forward/reverse direction to set the back up/down elevating decoration unit 3450, the back rear left adornment. The body unit 3520 and the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510, and the back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain the player.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, since the seven ornaments rotate around, it is possible to strongly suggest to the player that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a "big hit" game) occurs. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 481, the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 is used in the back rear left effect unit 3500. The left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right second appearance position, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the rear rear left rotation decoration 3510. Also, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right lifting/lowering drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position, and the back rear right rotation driving motor 3625 drives the back rear right. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate at a position substantially at the height, so that there is something good that surprises the player. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise expectations for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back-rear left-handed rotation decoration body 3510 and the back-rear-right rotation decoration body 3610 at the second appearance position are the eyes of the face of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. You may make it display the effect image which becomes a position. As a result, the player can be shown an effect in which the eyes of the character are spinning, and the player can be entertained.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 482, as shown in FIG. 482, the shutter unit 3730 is operated by the back front left drive solenoid 3717 in the back front left effect unit 3700. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800 changes the shutter unit 3830 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the back front left decoration 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decoration 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the back front left decoration 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, each has three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed respectively, and a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 that are opened and closed. As a result, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

Back unit production unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back production unit 3400, back left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As an effect using the back-front left effect unit 3700 and the back-front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 483, all ornaments may be movable. This allows
By moving all the ornaments, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game state) occurs, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the advantageous game state. In this case, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500 and the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each ornament is described, but when each ornament is moved, the LED of the decoration substrate provided in the rear is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the player can perform the light emission effect of the ornament. It can be shown and can further attract the player's interest.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. With this, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining the light emitting effect, the movable effect, the display effect, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to achieve various effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

[5-11. Main effects of game board]
Next, main operation effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above configuration will be described. In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a on the front side has an opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the game area 5a is distributed with a distribution area in which the game balls B can be distributed. A frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is formed into a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 by partitioning it into an impossible non-circulation region, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the flow area and the inner side becomes the non-flow area, by definition. Then, a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 that is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 toward the non-circulation region side (inner side). At the same time, since the flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the distribution area side (outer side), the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided. Since nothing is extended to the distribution area side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 as possible. Therefore, the substantial distribution area can be set to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial distribution area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-circulation area (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged, the substantial distribution area is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a from being substantially reduced, the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged to thereby prevent the distribution. It is possible to make the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided behind the area, the movable body and the decorative object of the effect unit more visible, and the game ball B in the distribution area for the game and the non-distribution area. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining any of the above effects.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion can be formed by the flange portion 2502 provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since the part 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside) and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange part 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 is improved. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (abuts on) the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 and the like. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged.

Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by mounting the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B contacts. Can be prevented from being elastically deformed and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by contacting the peripheral wall portion 2501, which gives the player discomfort. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, the support part 2503 extending from the peripheral wall part 2501 to the non-circulation region side can be made invisible, and the support part 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided in the rear through the accessory 2500 and the movable body and the decorative object of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, the non-distribution area It is possible to increase the range in which the effect images, movable bodies, decorations, etc., that are provided in the rear of the display area can be made larger, and it is possible to more easily bring out the effect of the effect by the effect device, and to be provided in the rear of the non-circulation area. Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the visible range of the movable body, the decorative object, and the like are large, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be obtained. it can.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the transparent portion provides light for illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, and transmit light from the light emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), so that transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 are flickered. It is possible to make it look lively, improve appearance, and enhance appeal to the player. At this time, a step or a notch may be provided in the transparent support part 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in a movable body (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 or the back rear left effect unit 3500) provided behind the support part 2503. By the light emission from the light emitting means (LED), the above-described effect can be obtained, and the transparent support portion 2503 enables the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front-back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed as a game panel. The lens effect of the support unit 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support unit 2503 is extended with the same thickness as the 1100, and the support unit 2503 has the rear front left decorative body 3030 and the rendering device (the rendering display device 1600). Etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further reduced, and a part behind the support part 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the rendering image of the rendering device, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. ) Visibility can be improved, and the front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be more easily seen.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed at a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown by the tip end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, it becomes difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 is seen, and it seems that details are taken into consideration. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a deep design.

In addition, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and different at that portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 extends from the same position in the front-back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to make an illusion like that, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support portion 2503.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (in the middle) in the front-rear direction of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the rear portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, it is possible to reduce the reduction in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is sufficiently increased. It is possible to keep it, and it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium comes into contact therewith.

Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped so as to follow the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made invisible by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is It seems that it protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, and can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and a good-looking pachinko in the game area 5a. The machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-circulation area, the movable body, the decorative object, and the like of the effect unit can be favorably visually recognized from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the effect of production by the above.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is projected more forward than the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it appears to protrude, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and to easily recognize the distribution area and the non-distribution area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution area side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and at a portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Does not provide the support part 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), the support part 2503 disturbs the visibility of the rendering device (rendering display device 1600 or the rendering unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, it is possible to enlarge the area in which the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen, and it is possible to more easily exert the effect of effect by the effect device, and at the same time, the effect device to the player. It is possible to entertain the production by and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained at the same level as that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502. Therefore, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally resin-molded to form a metal. It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when it is removed from the mold.

Further, since the support part 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the part of the support part 2503 is different from the other parts. It is possible to prevent the difference in shrinkage amount from increasing, and it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from being deformed during molding.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a flat-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 from the rear side. , Rear and rear right/left driving of the back/right rear rendering unit 3600 and the back/left rear raising/lowering drive motor 3554 as functional parts of the back/left rear rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The motor 3654 is arranged such that at least a part thereof is outside the game area 5a in a front view, and between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654, the back rear left. Back front left decorative body 3030 and back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to cover at least the site in the game area 5a of the lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654. Since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 can cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, Through the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100, and the game area 5a, it is possible to make the back side left up/down drive motor 3554 and the back side right up/down drive motor 3654 difficult to see from the player side, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 looks good. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the back, and the front back left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 on the front side can be seen instead of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back right lift drive motor 3654. The appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing power to the player.

Further, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, it becomes difficult to understand the boundary between the game regions 5a defined by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the outer periphery of the game region 5a is not partitioned. It is possible to give a feeling of openness by looking like, and even if the game area 5a has the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made larger. Therefore, by making the game area 5a look larger than the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game on the pachinko machine 1 and to play the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing power to the player.

Further, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are arranged to cover at least a portion in the game area 5a in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to the same effects as the above, the functional parts can be made invisible even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and in front view, the back front extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Since the decorations of the left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a difficult to understand, giving a feeling of openness and playing the game. The size of the area 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. It is possible to make the player more prominent and appeal to the player.

Further, since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 and It is possible to prevent the back-rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being visible, and the appearance can be improved by allowing the player to see the back-rear left effect unit 3500 and the back-rear right effect unit 3600 through the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in front view, at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the game area 5a (in the back rear left lift drive motor 3554). Since it is arranged completely (entirely outside the game area 5a), the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 are arranged between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By keeping the balance, it is possible to prevent the space in the game area 5a from becoming small. In other words, since a part of the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a in a front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a should be reduced. Therefore, the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further exert the above-described operational effects can be provided. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased, in which case The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is expanded. All the driving sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from, and it is possible to make it look as if the front component 1000 or the game panel 1100 is emitting light, and the entire pachinko machine 1 You can improve the appearance of. Further, although the opaque decoration seal 3032 and the decoration seal 3042 are provided on the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040, the respective bases 3031 of the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are provided. Also, since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is reflected on the front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to give the impression that the front left decoration 3030 and the back right decoration 3040 reach the front right decoration 3040 and emit light. It can also be said that the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be understood that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It will be spicy and can look like a piece of decoration. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above even if the back left front decoration 3030 is not sized so as to cover the entire back rear left lift drive motor 3554. It is possible to make the game area 5a look large while reducing the cost required for 3030. It is to be noted that the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654, but the part is a pachinko machine. It is preferable to set the portion closer to the center of 1 (the portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, a predetermined location where the drive source is not located outside the game area 5a (a lower left portion in FIG. 409, that is, a lower left corner portion in the game board 5) extends from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. By providing the decorative body, the game area 5a can be made large.

Further, the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The same effect can be achieved, and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Moreover, since the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are made to extend outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back-front left decoration is inside the door window 101a. It is possible to hide the rear back left production unit 3500, the rear rear right production unit 3600, and the like behind the back 3030 and the front right decoration 3040, and to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Further, since the back front left decoration 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inside of the door window 101a in the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decoration 3030 lifts the back front left lift. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered with the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily long, It is possible to reduce the cost of the back front left decoration 3030 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is provided with translucent decoration. Since the sticker is attached, the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), and the first starting opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first starting opening 2002 than to the general winning opening 2001, and the number of the game balls B received in the first starting opening 2002 is decreased (or the first starting is started). It is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player and suppress a decrease in interest, and it is possible to surely recognize the position of the first starting opening 2002 that the player should aim at, and aim the player at the first starting opening 2002. You can entertain the game.

Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is received in the first starting opening 2002, the player can be harassed, and when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, Depending on whether or not the winning (for example, "big hit") in which an advantageous game state occurs due to the lottery of the first special lottery result, the player can be excited and excited, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. After that, when the winning is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous game state in which the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern occurs, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the first special lottery result is not drawn. As a result, the player is not discouraged, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different in form (appearance), a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a seal is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, the player does not feel uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating, and entertain the player with the pachinko machine 1 to reduce the excitement. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. This can prevent a decrease in interest. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 are emitted. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, and diffuse light from the means (LED on the decorative substrate), the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous and look good. It is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B is placed in the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided to the rear later than the game ball B accepted in 2001, the game ball B accepted in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is made into the general winning a prize port 2001. Since the game ball B can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special drawing result is performed, the joy (superior feeling) due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning. The player can enjoy the game ball B for a longer period of time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Moreover, since the first front wall 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since it can be discharged to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, it is useless for the game ball B being received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling for a long time, to direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, and to make the game progress smoothly, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, after inclining the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface with respect to the game panel 1100, a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. Since it is possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Then, depending on the player, it is possible to give an illusion that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and entertain the player. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning hole 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and it can be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and to the player. As a result, the game can be kept entertaining and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning is achieved. It is possible to omit decoration such as a seal on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of the general winning opening 2001, and by turning that amount to a production device or the like, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 of the back lower middle rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, a rotating back lower middle rotation having an even number of plural stop positions (here, six positions). The decorative body 3310 is provided with a region detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop position and a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, and at the same time, the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of (here, four) sensors including a plurality (here, three) of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect half of the stop positions, and one position specifying sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the inner-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. Therefore, the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detecting piece 3325.

More specifically, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three side-by-side stop positions where the number of the area detection pieces 3325 is half. And the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325 at the time of (position of the decorative numeral “3”). When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated from this state to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. To do. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detection, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying are performed. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “5”), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detection, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detection, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting pieces 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it will rotate to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325. In this state, the above-described detection/non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 is repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

As described above, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, the combination of the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 makes it possible to decorate the underside middle rotation decoration. The rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detection until the back inside middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The current position of the middle-turn ornament 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Then, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 of the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 are detected. After roughly detecting the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by minimizing the shift of the stop position.

In addition, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position deviates from the game. It is possible to prevent a person from feeling uncomfortable (discomfort), entertaining the effect (movable effect) by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and suppressing a decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310) that does not give the player any discomfort.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower inner rotating decorative body 3310 can be made higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Accordingly, the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted to the player by the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 that rotates, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be prevented. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotation surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the front side of the player, and is freely rotated after rotating. Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect in which the rotation stops at the stop position, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the movable effect by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensor 3330) required to detect the movement to the arbitrary stop position. And the number of stop positions of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasp of stop position) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 in the back lower middle effect unit 3300 has the six stop positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have four to ten stop positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) is shown as a rotating body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. As the above, "circling", "straight-moving", "arc-moving", "curved-moving", etc. may be used.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 484 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in the figure, is composed of a main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first start opening sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a second The second starting opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting opening 2004, the general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the first large winning opening 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2402 which detects the game ball B, the second big winning hole sensor 2601 which detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the game ball B which is received in the out opening 2010 Out-out sensor 3053, a first sub-out sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011, a second sub-out sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B in the second sub-out port 2012, And, the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. for detecting the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are respectively inputted through the main control I/O port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starting opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2415. 2612, or the like, or output a drive signal from the main control I/O port to the status display of the function display unit 1400, a normal symbol display, a normal hold display, a first special pattern display, a first special hold number display The drive signal is output to the container, the second special symbol display device, the second special reserved number display device, the round display device, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not included. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical is used for the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054. I am using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

Further, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B is frequently entered. The detection of the game ball B by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3051.

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the outlet 2010, the proximity sensor 3053 having high durability and long life is used as the outlet sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a mechanical switch with a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various kinds of information (game information) regarding games and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511, although a detailed description thereof will be given later.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM during the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when the voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and the firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and the firing that controls the ball feed by the ball feeding solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail at the time of maintenance. 553, a ball guiding unit 570, and the game ball B in the payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201), and a ball removing switch for starting the ball removing operation is provided. ..

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has not only built-in ROM and RAM but also a function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information regarding the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 and various commands regarding payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input port via the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I/O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that "the ball is out" (specifically, the ball is cut off). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the payout device 580 is informed that there is no game ball B), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is a ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number “3” is displayed, the fact that the “counting switch error” has occurred (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, it informs that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, the fact that "CR is not connected" (the electric connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit) is notified, When the number "9" is displayed, the fact that "is in stock" (specifically, the number of gaming balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls) is informed. ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and is sent to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit which outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit which outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's intention is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200. One B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the accepted game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 484, the peripheral control board 1510 uses the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on the control data from this peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The emission data of the game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to each decorative board of the game board 5. , Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door side drive data for transmitting to a drive solenoid and outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a light-up signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation light-up signal to a color LED or the like provided at the door-side drive light-emission data is configured as a frame decoration drive board serial I/O port From the door frame 3 side, or control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the display control unit serial I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Further, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 outputs the signal based on the operation signal. Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side speaker provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass frame speaker 622 of the bass frame 4 have acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal and 4ch stereo). Signal, a 2.1 ch surround signal, or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external device. Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are output by a plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviated to Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU has a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs the interrupt process when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the top screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 is large, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, houses, mountains, roads, and the like that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as the “order of sprite superposition”).

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats the main scan for sequentially setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and the main scan in the direction intersecting the one direction from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels for one line are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 393 and 408 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 to allow the player to rotate the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously recorded in one minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls B are brought into contact with the obstacle nails N so that the game balls are The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates by abutting the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, which is higher than the highest position, the game ball B is in contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, and thus the first probability is high. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, on the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time reduction (time saving)” A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes a "win" is drawn.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center character 2500, the center character 2500 is guided. A plurality of passages 2520 are discharged above the gate portion 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After contacting the obstacle nail N, the nail N passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an inlet opening near the stopper 1006, and an inlet opening with a space leftward from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522 that opens. As a result, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right hit) with the strength of abutting against the hit stop 1006, the strength of entering the first guide passage 2521 and not hitting the hit stop 1006 (right hit) When the game ball B is hit with a strength weaker than a certain degree), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B that has been driven into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, depending on the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the gaming ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. In addition, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through this gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is carried out on the main control board 1310. The closed second starting port 2004 in 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

It should be noted that if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. Further, the maximum number of holding of the normal lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The gate part 2003 and the game ball B passing through the left side of the gate part 2003 have a high probability of being highly likely due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate part 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes it is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out, similarly to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out opening 2012, there is no opportunity to be received in the second big winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the first big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. ..

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received in the second sub-out opening 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second large winning opening 2006, the second of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no chance of being accepted into the starting opening 2004 or the first special winning opening 2005, and the material is discharged outside the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, and thus the second sub-out to the player. It is possible to prompt a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received in the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B in the second sub-out opening 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. The driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522 can be prompted. That is, rather than "right hitting" in which the game ball B abuts on the hitting portion 1006, a driving operation that requires a fine adjustment in the rotation operation of the handle 182 can be prompted, and a driving operation of the game ball B can be performed. It is possible to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 which is mainly.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing the left side of the center accessory 2500, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted at the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006 while the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B discharged to the side of the first attacker unit 2400 through the left side of the second special winning opening 2006 is the first shelf 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b, and the upper left. After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf portion 2412c, the first special winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d into the game area 5a. Is released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2414, the ordinary lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is “ordinary winning”, and the second starting door is When 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, on the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time reduction (time saving)” A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes a "win" is drawn.

Further, while the game ball B is rolling on the first big winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the first lottery result is selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 (first When the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit"), the first special winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening/closing pattern after the elapse of the special variation time. Then, the game ball B is ready to be received. When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout controlling board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B while the first special winning opening 2005 is allowed to receive the game ball B, a large amount of the game ball B can be paid out, and the player Can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, “big hit”, A lottery of special lottery results that generate “middle hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probable change) hit”, “time reduction (time shortening) hit” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time saving (time reduction) hit", " "Probability change short time hit", "Probability no short time hit", "Second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, or the first big winning. If any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern that makes the game balls B in an unacceptable closed state (one opening/closing pattern is 1 (Called a round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if the "2R jackpot" is two rounds, the "5R jackpot" is five rounds, and the "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, and so on.

In the case of "big hit", the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game is changed ("probability change"), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "second big hit", the first special winning opening 2005 makes it possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (special)・Time) is generated. This ST is to maintain a state of probable variation or shortening during a predetermined number of times of variation.

In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 to the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by the lottery, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of this special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. In the suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by a combination of the LEDs that are lit.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that three or more picture strings composed of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each picture string is changed to be displayed in a variable manner. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture strings are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture strings that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. By pressing 367, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and by operating the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board included in the door frame 3, each decorative board included in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back. Lower left rendering unit 3200, lower back right rendering unit 3250, lower back middle rendering unit 3300, back upper rendering unit 3400, back rear left rendering unit 3500, back rear right rendering unit 3600, back front left rendering unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects and to reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Self-supporting member]
Subsequently, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 485. FIG. 485 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the set board 8 of the island equipment in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When it is installed (attached) to the pachinko machine 1, it assists the pachinko machine 1 to stand by and prevents it from falling. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foam resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

Although not shown in detail in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided on the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the dish unit 200 is provided with a groove that extends in the front-rear direction as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a protrusion that is inserted into the groove of the dish unit 200 as a mounted portion. ing. Thereby, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-back direction with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, whereby the self-supporting auxiliary member is attached to the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Accordingly, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding the front end. .. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment is removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily attached by sliding it in a direction opposite to that when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed.

It should be noted that the mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, but “by inserting a projection into a hole” and “of nails”. It is also possible to use "by locking", "by magnetizing by magnet", "by fastener", "by suction cup", "by peelable adhesive material", etc. Further, the position where the mounting portion is provided in the dish unit 200 is not limited to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be “inside”, “at least one of the left and right side surfaces”, “front surface”, or the like. ..

This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 after the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, and stored at the game hall side. When the pachinko machine 1 is detached from the island facility, the dish is reused. It is attached to the unit 200 for use. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the dish unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 has the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that largely protrude forward, the door frame 3 moves forward. Although it is easy to fall down, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the lower mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to assist the pachinko machine 1 to stand up and prevent it from falling forward. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, the space between the dish unit 200 and the plate 8 of the island facility is set. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from tipping forward by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 located at, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from tipping. The pachinko machine 1 is easy to install and does not need to be installed.

Further, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over. Therefore, it is possible to avoid damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to the tipping over, and thus the game hall or the manufacturer. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

Further, since the mounting unit for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting unit of the dish unit 200, the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1 is assisted. Since it is possible to prevent it from falling forward, it is possible to make the effect device, the decorative member, etc. provided in the door frame 3 larger or to project further forward, and thus the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to easily configure a pachinko machine whose appearance is significantly different from that of the machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like are largely projected forward in the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 has high appeal.

In the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the front-rear direction. The frame unit 3 may be attached to and detached from the plate unit 200 by sliding in the left-right direction.

Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable with respect to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and then a functional member detachably provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202). , Door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine is attached. Allow 1 to stand in a stable state. On the other hand, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that a part of the pachinko machine 1 is removed. It can function as a functional member to be configured. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 that bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 is used as the functional member that also functions as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 The frame left side unit 400 can be made to function as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 by being attached to the lower side of the dish unit 200, and can be made to function as a functional member by being removed from the lower side of the dish unit 200 and attached to the left side of the door window 101a. be able to. Therefore, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, it is not necessary to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and it is necessary to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) and then provided on the body frame 4 in a detachable manner (for example, "a substrate cover covering a substrate", "wiring"). "Wiring holding member", "protection cover that protects the rear of the effect display device and movable decorative body," "storage tank for storing the game medium", "guidance member for circulating the game medium", etc.) You may make it double. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. I will be able to become independent in this state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4 to form a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. Therefore, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, it is not necessary to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and it is necessary to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the main body frame 4, the player touches the removable functional member in the state where the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Since this is not possible, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that does not give the player any discomfort.

When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as the functional member provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as the functional member. It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for the above, and to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. Thereby, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island equipment to make it stand by itself, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so that the pachinko machine 1 looks good due to the existence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming worse and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 from interfering with the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand by itself. Thus, the installation work and the removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, compared to the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detached and separately stored, it is not necessary to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the labor for managing the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having the mounted portion attached to the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is assumed that the mounted portion is not included. Is also good.

Further, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be projected downward and brought into contact with the setting plate 8 when being installed in the island facility. Accordingly, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, and it is possible to reduce the time and labor required for management on the game hall side.

[10. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 486(a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 486(a), the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment first performs various types of processing as step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Initializes the data stored in the RAM built in the register or the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as the main control built-in RAM). The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process. Also, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

Next, as the process of step S2, a random number, which is the number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol Variable random number used for lottery processing for a predetermined time (fluctuation time) required for variable display control, whether or not to reach as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol Reach random number used for lottery processing (whether or not to execute the effect), symbol random number used for lottery processing for determining the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (1st symbol random number, 2nd symbol random number), a random number counter that holds random numbers such as random numbers used in the lottery process for winning or losing the second trigger opening 2004 (ordinary random number), etc. I have it.

In addition, in this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first winning opening 2002 is started, the second winning opening 2004 is won. Even when the reach random number is updated, the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter. You may make it different, and the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number, and the second special symbol, which is different from the first reach determination table. By providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only random numbers (fluctuating random numbers) among these random numbers that are not related to winning or losing are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS, for example.

FIG. 486(b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 486(b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2801, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first count sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005, Detection signals from various sensors such as a second count sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, and various magnetic sensors are input. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol (special random number, ordinary random number) is updated, and the counter of the random number counter is updated. The operation is performed.

Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the second special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress status of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning or losing the second trigger opening 2004. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then changes to the special symbol process process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like in the normal symbol process process is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer as the process of step S18.

Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S19, the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, the first count sensor, the second count sensor, the above. When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3051 and the like are in the ON state, the prize ball processing for outputting the payout control command to the payout control board 633 is executed so that the prize balls corresponding to the signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 and pays out the prize balls to the player. In this example, when the game ball B is won in the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port sensor 3052 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball B is won in the second starting port 2004, and the first ball is won. (2) When the starting opening sensor 2401 is in the ON state, "1 ball", when the game ball B is in the first big winning opening 2005 and the first count sensor is in the "ON ball", the "2 large winning opening" When the game ball B is won in 2006 and the second count sensor is in the ON state, "15 balls", when the game ball B is won in the general winning opening 2001 and the general winning opening sensor 3051 is turned on, The "8 balls" prize balls are to be paid out to the player.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking the increase/decrease in the number of pending storages as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the content of the register is restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control is terminated. Becomes

According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 487, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3052. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter, and this is included in the main control. The first starting opening passage processing such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number. The second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not the big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit executing flag is set, the big hit game is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S40) is performed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the contents of the jackpot type) about the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped suggests "15R jackpot". When it becomes, after the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B are won at the first big winning opening 2005 is detected by the first count sensor. A process of controlling the 15R jackpot game which repeats the opening and closing pattern which is closed 15 times is executed.

In the big hit control process, after the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 as described above, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time saving flag is a flag that indicates that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when the jackpot game based on the jackpot that controls the time saving after the jackpot game is finished, and will be described later. Reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in 498 or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of time saving is set so as to end the time saving control when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. That is, start the time saving control after the big hit game, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, the condition is satisfied. The time saving control is ended.

If the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit is made. If the in-execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small-hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests a “small-hit”, the second special winning opening 2006 will be described later. It is closed after opening the second big winning opening 2006 based on the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B or when it is detected by the second count sensor that 10 gaming balls B have been won in the second big winning opening 2006. Perform the process to In addition, when the game ball B which is won in the second special winning opening 2006 and is distributed by the distributing member enters a specific area, the big winning game is controlled to open the first large winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, (28.5 seconds) or after repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed 15 times when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the control is shifted to the 15R big hit game. To do. On the other hand, when the game ball B that has won the first big winning opening 2005 and is sorted by the sorting member does not enter the specific area, and enters the discharge area, it is not controlled by the big hit game and is small. After the winning game is finished, the gaming state (normal state or time saving state) before the small hitting game is controlled again.

Further, the main control MPU is a second special reserved number counter that indicates the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area if neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set. On condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the two special symbol reserved storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39).

FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the same is shown in FIG. 488. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first number of reserved storages is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, when it is determined that the first number of reserved memories is not the maximum value, the following step S43 to make the variable display control of the first special symbol a newly reserved state. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S41. Whether or not to be a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the production pre-determination process of determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before the variation display corresponding to the start winning is started (step S45), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first reserve memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first start opening 2002, the first LED lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserve number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first reserved. In addition to updating so as to correspond to the number of storages, a command (first holding number designating command 0 to 4) for instructing the first number of reserved storages is set in the storage processing (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. Game play mode type), the acquired special random number type (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved counters) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of the one special reserved number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding thereto is set (step S62).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memory, whether to display the result of the variable display of the special symbols based on the generated starting winnings as a big hit, if it is a big hit, type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, execute with the effect display device 1600 The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the reach effect is executed as the game effect, or prior determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is started before the variable display according to the start winning is started. Will be able to grasp.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has a storage area of 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the pre-judgment command is received, the pre-judgment information notified to the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area Stored in advance, when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation display start of the first special symbol is received, the first variation pattern command is received and stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in advance. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). Thereby, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), this can be preceded, for example, at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion is made possible. .

FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage processing (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004, then it is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved memory number reaches its maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “4” (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is not the maximum value thereof, the following step S53 to make the variable display control of the second special symbol newly suspended. The processing of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of second reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Also, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second holding state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is second held. In addition to updating so as to correspond to the number of storages, a command for instructing the second number of reserved storages (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1) is set in the storage processing (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and the random numbers used for the determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, on condition that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85), depending on the first special symbol process flag, one of the following five process processing It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. The first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and the first special symbol is selected based on the read first special random symbol for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)
2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) )
3. A variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and a variation of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) in which lottery process and the like for the aspect is performed
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S83)
5. The mode at the time of fluctuation control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. To stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that the first special symbol stop process (step S84)

The first special symbol process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486) to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed.

FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 492, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation random number) is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the winning of the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 493 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the hit determination table shown in FIG. 494 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 when the first special symbol normal process is executed, the second When the two special symbol normal process is being executed, it is compared with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 494(A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of different first special random numbers, which match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, are different from the big hit determination value. Each of the first special random numbers is matched so that the first special random number coincides with the big hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won, and that the 265 kinds of first special random numbers coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that there is the above-mentioned loss. Associated (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 3/270). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, there are two types of second special random numbers. 113 kinds of second special random numbers that are different from the big hit judgment value, which coincides with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit has been won. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the loss (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 113/270). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit compared to the determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. This is more advantageous for the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process) As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is ended.

The result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a reach determination table at the time saving state used when the gaming state is at the time saving state and a non-time saving used at the time when the gaming state is at the non-time saving state And a reach determination table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table at the time saving state, the above reach is determined so that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach and 71 types of reach random number match the reach determination value indicating that no reach. Random numbers are associated with each.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, 5 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state match the reach determination value indicating that reach, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers are not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that there is reach loss (step S120) as a result of the comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read out at step S102 (step S119) (step S120), the fluctuation occurs. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set and the process is terminated (step S121).

FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 495, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 494(B), and the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing with the selected big hit symbol determination table, the big hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 494(B), the big hit symbol determination table is associated with each symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) in accordance with the determination result (14R hour/hour jackpot, 5R hour/hour jackpot). Remembered The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to a 14R big hit game, and after the big hit game, the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is 100. Until the next big hit game does not occur until it is executed once, the state is terminated and the time is shortened to 14A.
2. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, it is closed. (1 round), after that the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B have been won at the second big winning opening 2006 by the second count sensor. By repeating the opening and closing pattern to close when detected, the game ball B can enter the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) to control the 5R big hit game. , After the jackpot game is finished, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once until the next big jackpot game occurs. 5R time saving big hit A to control to time saving state B which is ended
3. After opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor that 10 game balls B have been won in the second big winning opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) and is controlled to a 14R big hit game, and after the big hit game, the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is 100. Until the next big hit game does not occur until it is executed once, the state is ended.
4. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, it is closed. (1 round), after that the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B have been won at the second big winning opening 2006 by the second count sensor. By repeating the opening and closing pattern to close when detected, the game ball B can enter the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) to control the 5R big hit game. , After the jackpot game is finished, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once until the next big jackpot game occurs. 5R time saving big hit B to control to time saving state B which is ended

In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 6 judgment values are distributed when the 14R hour/hour jackpot is A, and 94 determination values are distributed when the 5R hour/short jackpot is A. There is. That is, when a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 6% probability of being a 14R hour-short jackpot A, and a 94% probability of being a 5R hour-short jackpot A. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed when the 14R hour short-term big hit B is obtained, and 42 determination values are distributed when the 5R hour short-time big hit B is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 58% probability of being a 14R hour-short jackpot B and a 42% probability of being a 5R hour-short jackpot B. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared to the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, the probability of being determined to be 14R hour short jackpot is high. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002, It is in an advantageous state for the player.

In addition, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained, a game state after the big hit game is finished is determined according to the kind of the big hit. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after controlling the big hit game, a process of setting a time saving flag based on the determination result and a process of setting a time saving number according to the type of the big hit in the time saving number counter Executed.

Specifically, when it is determined that the big hits of "14R hour/hour jackpot A" and "14R hour/hour jackpot B" are obtained, after the jackpot game for 14 rounds is executed, a special symbol (first special symbol) And (2nd special symbol) symbol fluctuation is controlled in a time-saving state until it is executed 100 times, and when it is determined that a big hit of "5R time-short big hit A" and "5R time-short big hit B" is obtained. After the jackpot game for 5 rounds is executed, until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 5 times, or until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, it is controlled in a time saving state. In this way, when a lottery result to be a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, it is always controlled to be in a short time state after the jackpot game, and similarly a lottery result to be a big hit by a lottery based on the second special random number. Even when the game is obtained, it is controlled to be in a time saving state after the jackpot game is over. However, when the big hits of "14R hour short and big hit A" and "14R hour short and big hit B" are obtained, the big hit game is better than when "5R time short big hit A" and "5R time short big hit B" are big hit. After execution, it is controlled to be in a time saving state for a long period of time.

In addition, when it is decided to be 14R hour short and big hit A, it is decided to be the 14R hour short and big hit A symbol as the 14R big hit symbol of the first special symbol, and 5R as 5R big hit symbol of the first special symbol when it is decided to be 5R time and short jackpot A Decide on a short-time jackpot A pattern. In addition, when it is determined to be 14R hour short and big hit B in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, it is determined as 14R hour short and big hit B symbol as the 14R hour big hit symbol of the second special symbol, and when 5R time short and big hit B is decided. (2) 5R short-time big hit B design is decided as the 5R big hit design of the special design.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines a lost symbol when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S137, selects one of the lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, reach lose, lose). The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S138, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process ends.

The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbol changes and stops, when the jackpot is specified from the received determination result notification command, the jackpot symbol (the left, middle, and right ornamental symbols are [0] ~ [8] same pattern combination), and if reach reach is specified, lose design with reach (left and right decorative designs are [0] ~ [8] same design) Combination of patterns with different middle decoration patterns; reach loss pattern) is decided, and if the loss is specified, loss pattern without reach (at least left/right of left/middle/right decoration patterns) The decorative pattern is determined to be a combination of different symbols), and the determined stop symbol is display-controlled when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 496 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 496, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the big hit flag is set If it is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and when neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal loss (reach effect). In the case of the “missing” not performed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of losing is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150). Thus, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol. The production control will be performed.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU, of the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the pattern random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variable random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach production to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach production is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers have a low jackpot expectation. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is to be executed, and 18 types of variable random numbers are determination values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation is to be executed. ) Is set as. Note that the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, so that for a player who desires the occurrence of a big-hit game, the expectation of the player for the big-hit game is increased when the super-reach effect is executed. It has become.

Further, in the variation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds are set as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time saving state, and 4 to 60 seconds are set in the time saving state. The corresponding fluctuation time is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time saving state and 2 to 60 seconds in the time saving state.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the count value of the hour/hour counter is set to "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after the time saving counter is counted down (step S152), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short time counter is "0" (step S153). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is ended is set (step S154).

If it is determined in the processing of step S151 that the count value of the hour/hour counter is "0", and if it is determined that the hour/hour counter is not "0" in the processing of step S153, then Then, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process ends.

FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 497, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S171. As the process, the change timer for which the change time is set according to the change pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the change pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process ends.

FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 498, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S181. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of one special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). As a result, the time saving control is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, one time, or five times). The control of the non-time saving state is started.

In the time saving state, in order to enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004, a so-called right-handing instruction (hereinafter, also referred to as a right-handing instruction) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the speaker. Executed by using. Then, as described above, when the predetermined number of special symbol variations ends after the time saving state starts, the time saving state ends and returns to the normal state (non-time saving state). When returning to the normal state, in order to enter the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002, the right-handed instruction ends, and a so-called left-handed instruction (hereinafter also referred to as left-handed instruction) is displayed. It is performed using the device 1600 and a speaker or the like.

Note that, for example, if the number of time saving is 100 times (that is, the time saving state ends by ending 100 times the special symbol variation after the time saving state starts), for example, the 100th variation from the start of time saving ( That is, during the execution of the (time saving final fluctuation), by inserting the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004, in the normal state after the end of the time saving state, the second special symbol fluctuation can be executed up to four times. ..

That is, after the end of the time saving state, although the second special symbol variation (mainly executable during the time saving state) is being executed, since the state is only the normal state, it is a way of striking different from that during the time saving state. A state occurs in which the hit instruction is executed.

Hereinafter, it is assumed that a maximum jackpot variation is included in the maximum four times of the second special symbol variations. In this case, when the big hit variation ends, the big hit game starts, and in the big hit game, in order to enter the game ball B into the big winning opening, the right-handing instruction is executed as in the time saving state.

In addition, in the normal state after the end of time saving, if the player makes a right hit, it is difficult to play the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004, so there is an opportunity to receive a special symbol lottery as compared to the case of making a left hit. Small, that is, the winning probability of the big hit decreases. On the other hand, if the player makes a right-handed stroke without following the left-handed instruction, the player may receive a lottery that is different from the special lottery such as the ordinary lottery, in which the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003. it can. When the player hits the ball to the right, the probability that the game ball B is paid out when the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001 is increased. However, in such a situation where a left-handed stroke should be made, when a right-handed stroke is made (specifically, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls B have passed the gate portion 2003 within a predetermined time), the left A left-handed warning effect is issued to warn the player to strike. The left-handed warning production is a production that does not appear in a situation where a right-handed work should be performed, such as in a time saving state or during a big hit game.

Also, by striking to the left after finishing the time saving, a situation may occur in which the first special symbol fluctuation of the big hit is suspended until the second special symbol fluctuation which is the big hit fluctuation ends. In this case, it is also possible to hold a plurality (up to four) of the first special symbol variation of the big hit. For example, when two of the four first special symbol fluctuations are big jackpot holds, when the two jackpot holds are continuous, and one or two outlying holds between the two jackpot holds. In some cases, in others.

Therefore, unless the game ball B is inserted into the second winning hole 2004, it is executed after the completion of the big hit game by the first big hit hold until the big hit game by the second big hit hold is executed. The maximum number of fluctuations is 3. In addition, when the maximum number (4) of the special special symbol fluctuation big hit hold is obtained, unless the game ball B is inserted into the second winning opening 2004, the big hit is held and the big hit is held. The game is executed.

In addition, when the first special symbol fluctuation which is out of place between the big hit reservations of the two first special symbol fluctuations is held, the game ball B to the second winning hole 2004 after the big hit game by the first big hit holding is finished. By entering, because the second special symbol variation is executed with priority, it is possible to delay the activation of the big hit game due to the second big hit hold.

In addition, the probability of suspending the first special symbol fluctuation of one big hit is higher than the probability of suspending the first special symbol fluctuation of a plurality of big hits (up to four first special symbol fluctuations can be reserved. However, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery is a low probability such as 1/100 or 1/319).

Return to the description of the flowchart. Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (time for displaying that the big hit game is started, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit count counter reaches “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to finish the big hit game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S91) and the special winning opening opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches "0", and the big winning is opened. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S92), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0". Control to be executed.

Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (14R hour/hour short/big hit A start command, 5R hour/hour short/big hit A start command) is set in accordance with the type of jackpot (14R hour/hour short/big hit A start command). Thereby, the effect display of the big hit game according to the kind of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker and the like. Also, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process processing, a big hit start command (14R time short big hit B start command, 5R time short big hit B start according to the kind of big hit (14R time short big hit B) Command).

In addition, the big hit execution flag which shows that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, the big winning opening after-opening process (step S93) of the big hit control process (step S40) Opening/closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or after winning 10 game balls B in the first special winning opening 2005) When the above-mentioned first count sensor detects that the opening/closing pattern for closing the opening/closing pattern is repeated 14 times or 5 times), it is reset when all the rounds that can be executed in the big hit game are completed. While the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is used. The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become executable.

If the big hit flag is not set (step S186), and the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S191), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed is set (step S193). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small hit. In step S191, the small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit according to the kind of small hit (5R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A) A start command). Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker and the like. In the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, a small hit start command (5R small hit B1) corresponding to the type of small hit (5R small hit B1, 5R small hit B2, 14R small hit B) Start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command) are set.

In addition, the small hitting execution flag which indicates that the small hitting game is being executed, when the small hitting game is finished, specifically, the small hitting processing (step S401) of the small hitting control processing (step S41) described later. ) Open/close control of the first big winning opening 2005 according to the type of small hit (for example, after opening the first big winning opening 2005 (for example, 1.8 seconds) or after the game ball B is at the first big winning opening 2005). It is reset when the opening/closing control for closing when the first count sensor detects that the individual prize has been won. While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol in the vessel and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Also, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if it becomes a loss, set the interval timer to the waiting time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. (Step S194), the process proceeds to step S195.

When the processing of steps S186 to S194 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. Then (step S195), this process ends.

FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board 1510 is informed to the player of the fact that the special display (first special design, second special design) when the variable display is stopped becomes a big hit design based on the fact that the mode is changed to the big hit design. Pre-processing for opening the special winning opening that waits until the next round is started or until the next round is started (step S91)
2. Based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped becomes a big hit symbol, the first big prize hole 2005 and the second big prize hole 2006 are controlled to be in an open state, or the next round is started. The first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to be open, and the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or Processing for opening the special winning opening which is closed when the first count sensor or the second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 (step S92)
3. After the completion of all rounds, the jackpot opening post-processing that stands by until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game is over (step S93)

The big hit process flag is operated so as to indicate that the special winning opening pre-processing (step S91) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 486). In the processing for opening the special winning opening (step S92), at the start of a round for controlling the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round of setting and controlling the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 to a closed state, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display of the big hit game according to the number of rounds designated by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker and the like.

FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hitting process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hitting process flag.

1. Small hitting start processing which executes the setting processing for starting the small hitting game (step S400)
2. Processing during small hit (step S401) which monitors the entering and opening time of the game ball B during the small hit game

The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486). Also, when the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small hitting process, the big hitting flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hitting game according to the type of the small hitting (5R small 4 rounds if there is a hit, 13 rounds if there is a 14R small hit) are set in the big hit number counter, and the processing ends. As a result, the big hit game is started following the small hit game.

FIG. 501 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process processing (step S15).

Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Run.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) in which lottery processing or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the random symbol variation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variable display of the above normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805)
4. Normally the variation control stop mode of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control stop of the symbol is normally displayed as the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "universal pattern win", a process for controlling the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 is possible. Ordinary electric accessory release process to be executed (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486).

FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 502, The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains, from the RAM of the main control MPU, the counter value of the normal reserved number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area as the process of step S811. .. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of storages of the above-mentioned normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols in the suspended state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, in step S813, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the processing of step S814, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU.

However, in the processing of the step S811, when it is determined that the number of storages of the normal symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S812 to S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure fluctuation random number are not acquired from the above random number counter), the variable display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put on hold.

Note that the gate passage process (step S802) may be another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines The ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above-mentioned normal reserved number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is judged whether or not the reserved memory number of ordinary symbols is "4" which is the maximum value. To do. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved storage of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned symbol into the newly-held state, the above-mentioned ordinary-reserved number counter is incremented (1 is added. ), and then the previously obtained ordinary random number, the universal figure variation random number (the ordinary random number stored in the temporary storage area, the universal figure variation random number) among the storage areas of the RAM of the main control MPU. It is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the above normal reservation number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value of the above-mentioned ordinary holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is "4" which is the maximum value (the holding storage number of the above-mentioned normal symbol is In the case of the maximum value), the normal random number acquired previously, the general pattern fluctuation random number is discarded without storing in the normal symbol holding storage area, and the variable display control of the acquired normal symbol is newly added. It may be possible not to be held.

FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 503, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S821, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, next, as the processing of step S822, the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is normally stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, universal figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, while counting down the normal holding number counter, when the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. The shift operation is performed in the first-in first-out (first-in first-out) mode for the random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) relating to the display mode in FIG.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 is from the first (first) area. Store in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random number extracted to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. Is stored, and various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is stored. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). ..

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the ordinary figure per hit determination table shown in FIG. 504(A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

The universal figure collision determination table shown in FIG. 504(A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the universal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, the ordinary random numbers are set so that all 10 kinds of ordinary random numbers match the ordinary figure hit judgment value indicating that the ordinary figure hits. It is associated. That is, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the winning is always won per universal figure.

If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the per-universal figure hit is the result of the comparison between the ordinary-drawing hit determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing (step S829), The variation per winning symbol is selected for the universal symbol, and the universal symbol flag is set (step S830), and the regular symbol variation control stop mode (normal symbol stop symbol) is determined as the universal symbol per symbol. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal design is not hit, the general design lost design is determined as the mode (normal design stop design) when the variation control of the normal design is stopped (step S833).

Then, after the lottery process for the ordinary symbols is performed in this way, as a process of step S834, the lottery result (instruction of either normal figure or loss) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the universal figure determination result notification command according to each result. Then, after that, as the process of step S835, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804), this process ends.

FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 505, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a time saving flag set. If (step S841), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving is selected (step S842), and if the time saving flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving is selected. (Step S843).

Then, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol to be executed (general symbol variation pattern) is determined by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process (step S844). ), a normal display fluctuation display of the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display unit of the function display unit 1400 by setting the normal pattern change pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal pattern change in the determined general pattern change pattern Is started (step S845).

Further, when the main control MPU determines the universal figure fluctuation pattern, the main control MPU sets a universal figure variation time corresponding to the determined universal figure variation pattern in the universal figure variation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed on the normal symbol display device (in the variable symbol display of the normal symbol) of the function display unit 1400 for the regular symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the determined universal symbol fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the non-time saving ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table of this example, 20 seconds is set as the universal symbol variation time. On the other hand, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the time saving of this example, 0.8 seconds as the universal symbol variation time so that the universal symbol variation time is shorter than the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving period. Is set. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, when the variable display control of the normal symbol is started, next, as the process of step S847, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation process (step S805), this The process ends.

FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 506, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S851, In step S846, the universal figure fluctuation timer in which the universal figure fluctuation time is set is decremented by 1. Then, the universal figure variation time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of step S853, at the time when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S806), this process ends.

FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stop processing (step S806).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 507, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S861, While performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is notified. Then, the normal figure stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

Then, next, when the universal figure hitting flag is set (step S863), a second starting opening corresponding to the current game state is used by using the universal figure hitting time open pattern table shown in FIG. 504(B). The opening pattern of 2004 is set (step S864).

Specifically, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in the non-time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the non-time saving state is controlled when the opening of the second starting port 2004 is started, the second starting port 2004 is opened/closed when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number is obtained as the drawing hit. The starting opening solenoid 2514 is turned on to execute the opening pattern A in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004, the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 is short, and the game ball when the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state. Is difficult to enter. That is, in the non-time saving state, even if the second starting opening 2004 is opened/closed, the game ball hardly enters.

On the other hand, if the second starting opening 2004 is controlled to be in the time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004. That is, if the non-time saving state is controlled when the opening of the second starting port 2004 is started, the second starting port 2004 is opened/closed when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number is obtained as the drawing hit. The starting opening solenoid 2514 is turned on to execute the opening pattern B in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example). Thereby, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004, the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 is long, and the game ball when the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state. You can enter.

When the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set, then as a process of step S885, a universal figure per start command indicating that the universal figure per game is started is set, and an ordinary symbol process flag is set to an ordinary electric accessory. When the process is updated so that the process shifts to the open process (step S866), this process ends. Note that the universal figure start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the universal figure game according to the type of universal figure instructed by the universal figure start command is the effect display device 1600. It can be executed by a lamp, an LED, a speaker, or the like.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value, when the normal symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal electric auditors product opening process (step S807).

Now, in the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 508, as shown in FIG. 508, the main control board 1310 main The control MPU controls the second starting port 2004 to be in the open state, and if a predetermined time (the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has elapsed (step S872), the second When the starting opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the starting opening 2004 is turned off and the second starting opening 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second start port 2004 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 causes the second start port 2004 to be closed as shown in FIG. 508. If it is the timing to open (step S874), when the starting opening solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 is turned on and the second starting opening 2004 is controlled to be open (step S875), this The process ends.

In the process of step S871, if it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 508, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the second starting port 2004. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), the universal figure end command is set (step S877). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process ends. It should be noted that the universal figure hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the universal figure end command, the effect display device 1600, the effect of the universal figure hit game being executed by the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Can be ended.

[11. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 509, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 mS has elapsed, 16 mS has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS lapse flag is set in step S502 (16 mS lapse flag T is "1"), the 16 mS lapse flag is reset (step S503) and then the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

In the 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Based on the result, the control process related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to various decorative substrates 184, 273 and the like is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady process ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning when 16 mS has elapsed from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process (command of step S601. Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag has been set after the 16 mS steady process ends, the 16 mS steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 mS steady process in the sub-main process.

FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

In the production control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the production process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. A variation pattern command (first variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation pattern) instructing a variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the command analysis process. After performing the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, and the like based on the second change pattern command for instructing the change pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value according to the change effect process. Change production start process to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special symbol (second One special symbol, the second special symbol) fluctuation production during processing to change the production process flag to a value according to the variation end processing in response to the passage of the variation time according to the variation pattern (step S712)
3. Performs a process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a stop display command instructing the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if it is lost, the above effect Variable production end processing that changes the process flag to a value according to the variation production start processing, if it is a big hit, to a value according to the big hit production processing, and if it is a small hit, to a value according to the small hit production processing (Step S713)
4. Processing for executing display control during the big hit game is performed on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the big hit start command for instructing the start of the big hit game, and when the big hit game is finished, the effect process flag is changed. Big hit production process to change to a value according to the production start process (step S714)
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command for instructing the start of the small hit game, processing for executing display control during the small hit game is performed on the effect display device 1600, and the second big winning opening during the small hit game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is distributed to a specific area, when the small hit game is finished, the effect process flag is changed to a value according to the big hit effect start processing, and the game ball B is allocated to the specific area. If not, a small hit production process of changing to a value according to the variation production start process (step S715)

By the above processing special symbol display (first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400) special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed The effect display device 1600 performs variable display of decorative symbols in synchronization with the variable display of No.

[10. Fluctuation control at the end of time saving control]
As described above, in the time saving state, the opening/closing control of the second starting port 2004 is performed in an opening pattern different from that in the non-time saving state. That is, if the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is a time saving state when it is in a short time state, the opening pattern A of the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is used as the second starting opening 2004. If the non-time saving state when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped by opening and closing, the second opening pattern B in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) The starting port 2004 is opened and closed.

In this way, since the opening pattern of the second starting opening 2004 is changed with reference to the time when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, immediately before the time saving state ends (for example, the time saving number of times). If the time saving state A of 100 times, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) of the special symbol in the time saving state (just before the 100th variable display stops) In the case of opening and closing the second starting port 2004 after stopping the normal symbol variation executed in, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed in the open pattern B in the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example). Will be done. Further, when the time saving state ends after the second starting opening 2004 is opened, the player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time saving state is being executed even though the time saving state has ended. Further, there may be a case where a start winning a prize to the second start opening 2004 occurs at an unexpected time such as after the symbol variation is started in the non-time saving state after the end of the time saving state, which is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the variable display of the second special symbol is hardly executed, but to the second starting opening 2004 despite the non-time saving state The start winning award occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), and while the game progresses, the behavior gives the player a feeling of strangeness, which may lead to a decline in the entertainment appeal of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when stopping the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 with a lost symbol (for example, the first One special symbol stop process step S194), usually, the interval timer "0.5 seconds" as the standby time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process process (step S28) and the second special symbol process process (step S39), and until the interval timer times out, the special symbol display (first in the function display unit 1400). One special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device) is controlled so that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not started.

In addition, when ending the time saving state, that is, when the symbol variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game reaches the number of time reductions, when the symbol variation stops (time saving When the last symbol fluctuation in the state has stopped), the interval timer "2 seconds" is set as the waiting time (time for displaying the special symbol stop symbol) until the next variable symbol fluctuation display is started. set. As described above, in the time saving state, after changing the second starting port 2004 to the open state, the second starting port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have passed. Therefore, by setting the interval timer to "2 seconds" when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state is stopped and the time saving state is ended, before the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol in the non-time saving state is started. It is possible to change the two starting ports 2004 to a closed state, whereby it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a starting winning prize for the second starting port 2004 after the symbol variation of the special symbol in the non-time saving state is started.

The period set in the interval timer when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and the time saving state ends is at least equivalent to the opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 in the time saving state (in this example, "1. 5 seconds") or more. Also, when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and the time saving state ends, unless the second special winning opening 2006 has changed to the open state, as the waiting time until the next variation display of the special symbol starts. You may make it set the same time as usual ("0.5 second" in this example).

In this way, when the final special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state stops), regardless of the presence or absence of the first holding number and the second holding number, within a predetermined period By suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (judgment determination), time saving control that can be continued after the final special lottery result in the time saving state has been derived (after the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state has stopped) Can be ended within the predetermined period, and the second holding number can be prevented from increasing after the end of the time saving control. As a result, the game proceeds in a behavior not intended by the game designer that a start winning is generated in the second start opening 2004 and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed despite the non-time saving state. This can be prevented, and the progress of the game in the behavior intended by the game designer (the game property intended by the game designer) can be appropriately realized, so that the player can be prevented from deteriorating by not giving a sense of discomfort. ..

In the above example, when the judgment whether or not it is a time saving state (the judgment as to whether or not to end the time saving state) is performed when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, Although shown as what to do as a reference, when starting the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to determine whether it is a time saving state (for example, the above normal symbol normal process (step S803)) May be performed or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is performed) may be performed as a reference. In this case, at least, the variation time of the normal symbol variation (general symbol variation time: "0.8 seconds" in this example) that is executed in the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time-saving state, and in the time-saving state. The opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 (“1.5 seconds” in this example) may be equal to or longer than the total period (“2.3 seconds” in this example).

Note that the above-mentioned left-handing instruction (instruction that recommends left-handing that appears when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 when returning from the time-saving state to the normal state) is after the time-saving operation. It may be performed before the first normal fluctuation starts. That is, the left-handed instruction may be executed over the start timing of the first normal fluctuation. Further, for example, the end timing of the left-handed instruction may be before the end of the first normal fluctuation after the end of the time saving or after the end of the first normal fluctuation.

Note that, for example, the symbol stops in the final fluctuation in the time saving state, and after the symbol stops, and before the first fluctuation starts after the time saving ends, the left-handing instruction starts. Note that the left-handing instruction using the effect display device 1600 may start after the left-handing instruction using the speaker has started, or the order may be reversed. Further, for example, the left-handing instruction using the speaker may be completed before the left-handing instruction using the effect display device 1600 is completed, or the order may be reversed. It should be noted that it is desirable that the left-handing instruction at the end of the time saving is continuously executed for a predetermined time even if the left-handing is actually started.

In addition, a left-handed instruction that appears at the end of the time saving, and a left-handed instruction in a left-handed warning production that warns that left-handedness is performed due to right-handedness during normal times, a production mode (for example, displayed on the production display device 1600 The displayed form) may be different. When a right-handed stroke is made while a left-handed stroke instruction at the end of time saving is being executed, the left-handed stroke instruction may be continuously executed, or the left-handed stroke instruction is ended and the left-hand strike instruction A left-handed instruction may be executed.

When the second special symbol variation is being executed in a state where the left-handing instruction appearing at the end of time saving has been finished, when the right-handing is performed, the left-handing instruction in the left-handing warning effect described above is executed. The left-handing instruction ends after a lapse of a predetermined time. There is a variation pattern in which the variation time is shorter than the predetermined time. Therefore, in one variation, after the left striking instruction starts and ends, the left striking instruction can be further started. The predetermined time may be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time. If the big hit game starts before the predetermined time elapses, the left hitting instruction ends by the time the big hit game starts.

Further, when a right-handed stroke is performed while a left-handed warning instruction is being executed, the left-handed instruction may be restarted from the beginning by resetting the production time of the left-handed instruction. Although the effect time of the left-handed instruction is reset, the left-handed instruction may be continuously executed without redoing, or the right-handed instruction may be ignored and only the left-handed instruction effect may be provided. It may be executed as it is.

As described above, by inserting the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 during execution of the time saving final fluctuation, a maximum of four second special symbol fluctuations can be suspended, but for example, time saving If you win the ordinary symbol lottery just before the end of the final change, the second winning opening 2004 will be opened during the execution of the first change in the normal state after the time saving, and the second special during the execution of the first change. It is also possible to suspend one more symbol variation.

Hold the second special symbol fluctuation during the execution of the time saving final fluctuation, and further hold one second special symbol fluctuation during the execution of the first fluctuation after the time saving end, only the one second special symbol fluctuation is a big hit. If it is a fluctuation, after execution of the out-of-coil fluctuation held during the execution of the time saving final fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation of the big hit is executed, and the big hit game is started. It should be noted that during the time saving state, the right-handing instruction is executed, and as long as the right-handing instruction is followed, the maximum number of four second special symbol variations may be suspended during the execution of the time-saving final variation. Since it is the highest, before the second special symbol variation of the big hit is executed, the outlier variation is most likely to be executed four times.

On the other hand, for example, if there is no suspension of special symbol fluctuation at the end of time saving, although it will be in a state where fluctuation is not executed, as described above, if you have won the ordinary lottery just before the end of the final time saving fluctuation By executing right-handed, there is a possibility that the second special symbol fluctuation can be executed from the state where the fluctuation has not been executed. In particular, when the second special symbol fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, the time saving ends, the fluctuation is not executed, and then the big hit game is started after one fluctuation is executed.

[12. Production in an advantageous state]
[12-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, an example of specifications of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter will be described. FIG. 512(A) is an example of a hit probability table, and FIG. 512(B) is an example of a big hit distribution table. The hit probability table and the big hit distribution table are stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, for example.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also referred to as special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as special figure 2. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are generically referred to as a special symbol variation, or simply a variation. The special lottery results in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 include a big hit and a small hit.

The hit probability table is a big hit probability during a low-probability state (that is, a non-probability variation state) and a high-probability state (that is, a probabilistic state), a small-hit probability (there is no distinction between a low-probability state and a high-probability state), Is defined. The jackpot probability is common in special figure 1 and special figure 2. Further, the hit probability table defines the small hit probability in the special figure 2. That is, according to the hit probability table of FIG. 512, the small hit is won with a high probability when the special figure 2 is won. In addition, from the winning of the special figure 1, the small hit is not won, or the odds are very low compared to the special figure 2 (for example, 1/300 or less).

In addition, in this chapter, when the small hit is won, the first special winning opening 2005 is an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated plural times (for example, twice).

The jackpot distribution table defines the distribution of jackpot types when the jackpot is won for each of the special maps 1 and 2. "2R", "8R", and "16R" in the jackpot type indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot, and "low accuracy short time", "high accuracy short time", and "high accuracy short time" are the big hits. The game state which shifts after completion is shown.

In addition, "special figure 1_8R low-probability time short design 1", "special figure 1_8R low-probability short design 2", "special figure 1_8R low-probability short design 3", "special figure 2_2R low-probability short design 1", "Special figure 2_2R low certainty short time symbol design 2", "special figure 2_2R low certainty short time symbol pattern 3", and "special figure 2_2R high certainty short time symbol pattern 3" is 10 times, "special figure 2_2R high The number of time saving of the certainty time shortened symbol 1" is 7 times, and the number of time saving of the "special figure 2_2R low certainty time short symbol 2" is 9 times.

The number of time saving is the number of times of change that triggers the end of the time saving state started after the end of the big hit game. In other words, after entering the time saving state, the time saving state ends when the variation of the number of times determined by the time saving ends. In addition, the number of shortening times may be determined by the total number of changes of the special maps 1 and 2, or may be determined by the number of changes of one of the special maps. In this chapter, it is assumed that the number of shortening times is defined by the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 2. That is, for example, in the time-saving state that shifts after the big hit of “special figure 2 — 2R high-accuracy time-short pattern 1”, even if the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 reaches 7, the change of special figure 2 If is not completed 7 times, it shall not be completed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the special display 1 and the special drawing 2 are adapted to start the variable display individually according to the extraction of the special random numbers. Display and can be executed simultaneously (simultaneous change of special symbols). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (held), the reserved special random numbers are individually digested according to the degree of progress of the variation display of the individual special random numbers.

That is, when the changing first special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the first special symbol held in the first special symbol memory display is started, and when the changing second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is stopped. The fluctuation of the second special symbol held in the memory display is started. Further, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are displayed so as to change simultaneously in response to the change of each special symbol.

When either one of the special maps 1 and 2 stops in the display mode showing the big hit, any one of the following processes is performed as the process for the other special map that is changing simultaneously. .. As a first processing example, while controlling the big hit game according to one special figure, the fluctuation of the other special figure is deleted (forcibly stopped at a deviation). In this case, even after the jackpot game is over, the variation of the other special figure deleted is not restarted, and the variation of the next special figure on the other side is started.

As a second processing example, while controlling the big hit game by one special map, while the big hit game is being executed, the passage of the variation time of the other special map is temporarily stopped. During the execution of the jackpot game, the special figure during the fluctuation stop is, for example, a blinking display on the special symbol display (displayed in a mode different from when not paused (a player can recognize that it is paused)) To be done. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the variable display of the other special figure which has been temporarily stopped is restarted from the remaining variable time. As a third processing example, while controlling the big hit game by one special map, reset the fluctuation time of the other special map, and start the fluctuation of the other special map again after the end of the big hit game.

In this chapter, the high-precision non-time saving state is a state in which it is easy to obtain a small hit ball (so-called small hit rush). Hereinafter, an example of specifications for realizing the small hit rush only in the highly accurate non-time saving state will be described.

First, the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the ordinary lottery probability will be described. The variation time of the normal symbol is, for example, about 1 second in both the time saving state and the non-time saving state, which is a short time compared with the variation time of the special symbol variation. Further, in both the time saving state and the non-time saving state, the probability of a normal win is very high in the normal lottery result performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 (for example, 1/1). Further, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 when the normal symbol is won is long in the time saving state (for example, about 6 seconds) and short in the non-time saving state (for example, about 0.7 seconds).

Subsequently, a game method in each state will be described. As described above, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is extremely high as compared with the first special symbol lottery (54552/65536 in the example of FIG. 512(A)). Therefore, in the low-probability non-time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball B is inserted into the second starting port 2004, with a high probability of a small hit. Can be elected.

However, in the low-probability non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of special figure 2 is much longer than the fluctuation time of special figure 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest fluctuation time (for example, about 10 minutes) of the special drawing 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special drawing 1 (for example, about 5 minutes). Therefore, the time interval between winning the small hit and opening the first big winning opening 2005 is very long, and the opening and closing time of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game is short and the number of times of opening and closing is small, Even if the variation of Toku-zu 2 is executed, it is difficult to enter the game ball B into the first special winning opening 2005 in a timely manner during the small hit game.

In addition, specifically, in the small hit game, the total opening time of the first big winning opening 2005 is shorter than the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state. For example, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for about 0.5 seconds and then closed for about 1.35 seconds. A small hit game in which the first pattern is executed only once, or the first big winning opening 2005 is set to 0.5. There is a small hit game in which the second pattern of opening for about seconds and then closing for about 0.7 seconds is repeated twice and then the first pattern is executed once.

Even if the game ball B can be thrown into the first big winning opening 2005 at a timely timing during the small hit game, the variation time of the special map 2 is very long, so that a payout can be obtained per unit time. In addition to that, the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the low-probability non-time saving state, the player basically makes a left hit and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002.

On the other hand, in the short-time state (low-probability short-time state and high-probability short-time state), the fluctuation time of Special Figure 2 is set to be short. Specifically, for example, the variation time (for example, about 1 second) of the out-of-shortening variation (variation in which the reach effect is not executed) of Toku-zu 2 is set shorter than the shortest variation time of Toku-zu 1 (for example, about 4 seconds). Therefore, when the shift variation starts in the state where the special figure 2 is held in the time saving state, the shortening is selected at a high rate of the shift variation (for example, about 90%). Therefore, in the time saving state, the player executes a so-called right hit and advances the game so as to enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004, so that the player can smoothly proceed without reducing the number of balls. The game can be advanced.

Here, since the second starting port 2004 is located downstream of the gate portion 2003 in the flow path of the gaming ball B on the game board 5, most of the gaming ball B toward the second starting port 2004 is the second starting port 2004. Before passing through the gate portion 2003. Further, the first big winning opening 2005 which is opened during the small hitting game is located downstream of the second starting opening 2004 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5. When the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B heading to the first big winning opening 2005 enters the second starting opening 2004 and does not reach the first big winning opening 2005. That is, in order to enter the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2005, the game ball B needs to pass over the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening 2004 is in the closed state.

However, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 when winning in a normal win is long (for example, about 6 seconds), so the game of the right-handed game ball B toward the first big winning opening 2005 Most of the balls B enter the open second start opening 2004 and do not reach the first special winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the time saving state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 and frequently win the small hit, but cannot obtain the payout by the small hit game. .. Further, since the number of prize balls when the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 is, for example, one, the special figure 2 variation can be executed in the time saving state without substantially reducing the number of balls output. It is difficult to increase the number of balls.

Further, the first special winning opening 2005 is arranged at a position where there is almost no gaming ball B reaching the first big winning opening 2005 when so-called left-handing is performed. We are also taking care of so-called attacking actions in which right-handed strokes are alternately repeated to increase the number of game balls B.

Subsequently, in the highly accurate non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 is set to be short (for example, about 1 second) as in the time saving state. Therefore, in the highly accurate non-time saving state, the player executes a so-called right hit and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004. Furthermore, in the high-probability non-time saving state, the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 when a normal win is won is a time sufficient to allow the game ball B to enter the second starting opening 2004 and is short ( For example, about 0.7 seconds), so a considerable number (for example, more than half) of the right-handed game balls B pass over the second start port 2004 in the closed state, and the first big winning port. 2005 is reached.

That is, in the high-probability non-time saving state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 to frequently win the small hit, and obtain the payout by the small hit game. With the above-described specifications, it is possible to realize a small hit rush that makes it easier to obtain a ball in a small hit only in the highly accurate non-time saving state.

FIG. 513 is a transition diagram showing an example of the game state transition of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter. As described above, the variation of Toku-zu 1 is executed in the low-probability non-time saving state, and the variation of Toku-zu 2 is executed in the states other than the low-probability non-time saving state, whereby the player smoothly progresses the game. You can On the other hand, since the transition from the low-probability non-time saving state to the special figure 2 big hit and the transition from a state other than the low certainty non-time saving state to the special figure 1 big hit are irregular, they are described by dotted lines in FIG. 513. ing.

In any state, when the big hit is won, it shifts to either a low-probability time-shortening state, a high-probability time-shortening state, or a high-probability non-time-saving state according to the type of the big hit. In the low-probability time-shortening state, when the variation in the special figure 2 of the number of time-savings determined by the big hit type that triggered the transition to the low-probability time-saving state ends, the state transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving state. In addition, in the high-accuracy short-time state, when the change in special figure 2 of the number of time-savings determined by the big hit type that triggered the transition to the high-accuracy time-shortening state ends, the high-precision non-time-saving state, that is, a small hit rush occurs. Transition.

The transition from the highly accurate time saving state to the highly accurate non-time saving state seems to be a disadvantageous state transition to the player at first glance, but as described above, the small hit lash is realized in the highly accurate untime saving state, which is advantageous for the player. It is a state transition. Therefore, when the highly accurate time saving state ends due to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 determined by the number of times saving, the player can obtain a feeling of excitement without lowering the interest.

[12-2. Rush rush opportunity production]
Hereinafter, the rush rush effect, which is an effect executed from the start of the time saving state (high-accuracy time saving state and low accuracy time saving state), will be described. The rush rush chance presentation is that at the start of the time saving state, it informs that the current state is a time saving state but it is unknown whether it is a high accuracy time saving state or a low accuracy time saving state. It is an effect to notify whether the state is a high-accuracy short-time state (that is, a state of shifting to a high-precision non-short-time state which is a small hit rush state after the end of the specified number of special 2 fluctuations) or a low-precision short-time state. .

514, 515, and 516 are explanatory views showing an example of a rush entry opportunity effect. In FIGS. 514, 515, and 516, an example will be described in which the number of time saving times is 10 and all the changes in the time saving state are outlier changes.

(A) is a state in which the time saving and big hit have ended. On the effect display device 1600, the same decorative pattern indicating a big hit is stopped. In addition, the expected value of the winning coins at the time of winning the big hit increases in the order of low-probability time/short win/big hit, high-probability time/short win/big hit, and high-precision time/short win/big hit. For example, when "7" assortment of decorative symbols is selected, a combination of decorative symbols may be selected so that the winning of the highly accurate time-short, no-big hit is confirmed. In addition, when the odd number of decorative designs is selected, the odds of winning the high-precision, short-time, and large-scale hits are higher than when the odd-number of decorative patterns is selected. The combination of decorative patterns may be selected.

It should be noted that an effect of promoting the decorative design may be executed during the big hit. Specifically, for example, even if the high-accuracy time, short, big hit is won, the odd number or even number is stopped when the symbols are fixed, and promotion production is executed during the jackpot game, even if the decorative symbols are promoted to "7". Good.

(B) is a state in which the time saving/hits have ended and the time saving state has started. A display indicating that the rush entry chance has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), since the time saving state has started, the so-called right hitting is executed and a display (right hitting display) prompting the player to enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. There is. At the start of the time saving state, a large right-handed display (three arrows described as “right-handed!!”) in the middle and lower portions of the effect display device 1600 and a small right-handed display (upper right part of the effect display device 1600 (“ Right arrow!” is displayed.

(D) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 from the state of (C), and the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 has started. The large right-handed display has been deleted from the effect display device 1600. Further, a display showing the maximum value of the remaining shortening times is displayed on the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600. As described above, the number of times saved is 7 times, 8 times, or 10 times. Therefore, in the state of (D) where the fluctuation of special figure 2 has not ended even 1 fluctuation, the maximum value is “10 times remaining”. Is displayed. In addition, the display "Power up the character in 6 seconds!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

It should be noted that the power-up effect of the character is performed by using the six variations from the first variation to the sixth variation in Toku-zu 2 in the time saving state. In the power-up effect, an image of a character wearing an aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the aura color is stepped up in the six changes.

For example, the peripheral control ROM stores a scenario management table for power-up effects. The scenario management table stores a scenario and distribution of power-up effects for each of the low-probability short-time state and the high-probability short-time state. The scenario shows the color of the aura in each of the six fluctuations. In each scenario, it is assumed that the expectation that the aura color in the final variation of the power-up effect is the highly accurate time saving state in the order of white, blue, green, red, and iridescent increases. It should be noted that the iridescent color is selected only when the current state is the highly accurate time saving state.

In addition, it is desirable that the aura color does not step down (for example, white in the next variation of blue) in the six variations of each scenario. This is because the player's expectation may be reduced. Further, for example, when the final aura color in the power-up effect is the same, the higher the expectation of being in the highly accurate time-shortened state may be set, as the number of fluctuations reaching the final aura color is smaller. Specifically, for example, when the final aura color is red, when the red color is reached by the sixth variation of Toku-zu 2 and when the red color is reached by the fourth variation of Toku-zu 2, The latter is more likely to have a highly accurate short working time. Note that the former may have a higher degree of expectation of being in the highly accurate time saving state. This is because the expectation can be extended to the last (sixth) change.

Further, in each scenario, the aura color may be promoted by one stage, may be promoted by a plurality of stages, or may not be promoted by one variation. When the aura color is promoted in multiple steps in one change, in the change, for example, you may step up from white to green without going through blue, or in the change, step up to white, blue, and green in order. You may. In each scenario, the aura color displayed first in the initial fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 may not be the one with the lowest expectation (that is, may not be white).

In addition, "6 seconds" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is an index indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in which the power-up effect is performed, and is different from the actual 6 seconds. That is, for example, as will be described later, “6 seconds left” in the first variation of the time saving state (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining 6 variations) and “after the second variation”. 5 seconds" (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining 5 variations) is displayed. That is, since the remaining time indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until the rock destruction effect is performed, the display indicating the maximum number of time saving may be omitted.

(E) is the first variation in Toku-zu 2 after the time saving state has started, and is the state following (D). On the effect display device 1600, a character wearing an aura and a display "6 more seconds left" are displayed.

(F) is the state at the end of the first variation in Toku-zu 2 after the time saving state has started. After the state of (E), the color of the aura has been promoted from white to blue until the end of the fluctuation, and a display (“power up!!”) indicating that the color of the aura has been promoted is displayed on the production display device 1600. Displayed in. (G) is a state in which the second variation of Toku-zu 2 has started since the time saving state started. The aura color of the character remains blue, and the effect display device 1600 displays “5 more seconds”. The same effect is repeated until the fifth change in special map 2.

(H) is a changing state of special figure 2 for the sixth time since the time saving state started. In the sixth variation of Toku-zu 2, the color of the aura is promoted to red, and a display (“power up!!”) indicating that the aura color is promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of FIG. 514, red is the final aura color in the power-up effect.

(I) is a state at the end of the sixth special view 2 from the start of the time saving state. In the sixth variation, after the aura-colored step-up is completed, the introduction effect of the rock destruction production performed in the seventh to tenth variation of Toku-zu 2 is executed. In (I), "Destroy the rock!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the introduction effect. Only when the current state is the highly accurate time saving state, the character destroys the rock in the rock destruction performance.

(J) is a changing state of the special figure 2 for the 7th time since the time saving state started. An image of a character hitting a rock when the rock destruction effect is started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. During the rock destruction production, for example, the character wears a red aura that is the final aura color of the power-up production.

As a result, even during the rock destruction production, the player does not forget the degree of expectation, which is a highly accurate time saving state. On the contrary, the character may not wear the aura during the rock destruction production. This is because some players do not want other players to know the degree of expectation. When the character wears the aura during the rock destruction effect, the aura color may be stepped up even during the rock destruction effect.

(K) is the state of the seventh variation in FIG. 2 from the start of the time saving state and the state following (J). The effect display device 1600 displays an image of a state in which the rock is cracked but the rock is not broken due to the character hitting the rock. (L) is the state at the end of the seventh variation in FIG. 2 from the start of the time saving state. A display indicating that the rock destruction production is still continuing (“Still still!!”) is displayed on the production display device 1600. After that, the same effect is repeated.

(M) is a changing state of the special figure 2 for the 8th time since the time saving state started. In the rock destruction effect, an image in which the character hits the rock again is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (N) is the state at the end of the variation of FIG. 2 for the ninth time since the time saving state started. The effect display device 1600 displays a display (“Bet on this blow!”) indicating that the next change in Toku-zu 2 is the last change in the rock destruction effect.

(O) is the state during the change of FIG. 2 at the 10th time (that is, the end of the time saving state) from the start of the time saving state. An image of a character hitting a rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that each time the character hits a rock, cracks in the rock may increase. In (O), the number of cracks in rocks is greater than in (M).

(P) is the state of the 10th change in Toku-zu 2 and the continuation of (O) from the start of the time saving state. The effect display device 1600 displays an image that succeeds in destroying the rock (that is, an image showing that the current state is the high-precision short-time state and that the transition to the high non-short-time state is made at the end of the fluctuation). ing. It should be noted that after the image that failed to destroy the rock is displayed, the revival effect may be performed to display the image that succeeded in destroying the rock. (Q) is the state at the end of the 10th variation of FIG. 2 from the start of the time saving state. The effect display device 1600 displays an image (“rush rushing!!”) showing the transition to the highly accurate non-time saving state.

In the case of a high-precision time-shortening state in which the number of hours is 7 times, an image in which the rock breaks at the 7th variation of Toku-zu 2 and an image transitioning to the high-precision non-time-saving state (that is, (P), (Q ) Image, where the remaining number of times in the upper left portion is displayed as “4 times remaining”) is displayed. Similarly, in the case of a high-precision time-shortening state in which the number of time reductions is 9, the image in which the rock breaks at the 9th variation of Toku-zu 2 and the image transitioning to the high-precision non-time-saving state (that is, (P), ( The image of Q), where the remaining number of times in the upper left portion is displayed as "2 more times".

In the example described above, the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 7 times and 9 times is not selected in the low-probability time saving state. If there is a low-probability time-shortening state in which the number of times saved is 7 and 9, there is a rock destruction effect that ends in failure with a small number of fluctuations, so it is not possible to give the player an uplifting feeling. is there.

FIGS. 516(P') and (Q') are examples of the rock destruction effect when the current state is the non-time saving state. (P') is the state of the 10th variation in Toku-zu 2 after the time-saving state has started and the state following (O). In the rock destruction effect, an image in which the character fails to destroy the rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Q') is a state in which the 10th variation of Toku-zu 2 has ended since the time saving state started. A display indicating that the rush entry chance has ended is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After this, the state shifts to the low-probability untimely state.

Note that, for example, in the power-up effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image that prompts pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected, You may notify whether or not you can step up the aura color. Similarly, for example, in the rock destruction effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image prompting the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected. , Rock breakage may be notified.

In addition, when the fluctuation during the time saving state, that is, during the rush entry effect is a big hit change, for example, the big hit is notified by an effect different from the effect of destroying the rock. This is so that the player can clearly distinguish whether the big hit is won or whether the transition to the highly accurate time saving state is successful.

As a specific effect, for example, immediately after the start of the change, the shutter group is closed so as to cover the effect display device 1600. The closed state of the shutter group is maintained for a long time (for example, about 2 minutes) according to the variation pattern, for example. After that, when the shutter group is opened, an icon indicating the type of the big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, the decorative design is stopped. On the other hand, the big hit may be notified by the effect of destroying the rock. As a result, the player cannot immediately recognize whether or not he or she has won the big hit or has transitioned to the highly accurate time saving state, and thus can maintain a sense of tension.

[12-3. Production during the small hit rush]
517 and 518 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect during the small hit rush. (A) is a state at the end of the final fluctuation in the highly accurate short time state, that is, the same state as in FIG. 515(Q). (B) is a changing state of the highly accurate non-time saving state. In the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600, a display (“rushing!!”) indicating that the current state is the highly accurate non-time saving state (that is, the small hit rushing!) is displayed.

Further, in (B), a total acquisition sphere count display area and a timer display area are provided in the lower right part of the effect display device 1600. In the total acquired ball number display area, the total number of acquired balls from the start of the small hit rush and the number of balls paid out by the big hit are displayed. In addition, for example, it is desirable that the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into a general winning opening or a starting opening other than the special winning opening is not included in the total number of acquired balls.

It should be noted that, for example, the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into the general winning opening may be included in the total number of acquired balls. It is desirable to output the image, output a predetermined sound from various speakers, or output a predetermined light from various lamps. This is to make the player recognize that the total number of balls to be acquired has increased due to the game balls B entering the general winning openings.

In addition, the display of the total number of balls won does not always shift to the high-probability non-time saving state. At the end of the change, the total number of balls won will stop counting. However, if you have won the big hit that can not always shift to the high-precision non-time saving state, but if you can move to the high-precision non-time saving state again without falling to the low precision non-time saving state, you will get the total again. The number of balls is displayed again, and the counting is restarted from the value at the last count stop. In addition, although it was won for the big hit that can not necessarily shift to the high-accuracy non-time saving state, if the high-precision time-short and big hit is won during the time-shortening state transitioned by the big hit, At the start, the total number of balls acquired may be displayed again and the counting may be restarted.

In the timer display area, the short hit rush digestion time counted from the start of the small hit rush is displayed. When the small hit rush starts, it may be at the end of the high-precision short time no big hit game, or at the end of the final fluctuation in the high-precision time-short state, or at the start of the first fluctuation in the high-precision time-short state. Good.

(C) is a state in which the high-accuracy non-time saving state has ended the high-accuracy short time no-big hit variation. Since the timer in the timer display area shows the short hit rush consumption time, the timer is stopped at the end of the big hit fluctuation during the highly accurate non-time saving (at the end of the big hit fluctuation). (D) is a big hit game of high-accuracy short-time no big hit. Even during the big hit game, the total number of acquired balls is displayed and added. Although the timer is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the big hit, the timer may be displayed in a stopped state.

(E) is a big hit game of high-accuracy, short-time, no big hit, and is a state following (D). When the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined number of balls, the arrival display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages. For example, the arrival display is performed every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 1,000. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the display “1000 PT breakthrough!!” indicating that the number of shots has reached 1000 in (E) is displayed. In addition to the arrival display, a predetermined light may be output from various lamps, a predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or the BGM may be changed. Note that, for example, after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30,000 shots), the reaching display may not be performed.

Note that, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant or different. Specifically, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant as 1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots,... Or 1000 shots, 5000 shots, 10000 shots, It may be set so that the difference from the previous stage becomes larger as the stage goes later, such as 20000 shots.

(F) is a state just before the end of the big hit game of high-precision short time no big hit. (G) is a state immediately after the end of the big hit game of high-precision short time no big hit. The effect display device 1600 displays a highly accurate non-time saving state, that is, a display indicating that the small hit rush starts again. Further, in (G), there is an acquired sphere count history display area in the upper middle part of the effect display device 1600. In the acquired ball number history display area, a history of the total number of coins acquired by one big hit and the total coins acquired by the small hit rush that wins the big hit is displayed. In (G), since 2910 balls have been won in the big hit and the last small hit rush, "2910" is displayed in the acquired ball number history display area.

(H) is a state in which the total number of balls acquired has reached 5000 during the small hit rush. When the total number of acquired balls reaches the predetermined number of balls, the background image on the effect display device 1600 changes. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages, and for example, the background image changes every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 5000. It should be noted that, along with the change of the background image, a predetermined light may be output from various lamps, a predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or the BGM after the background image is changed may be changed. Note that, for example, the background image may not be changed after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30,000 shots).

In the example of FIG. 517, since the arrival display of the total number of acquired balls is displayed every 1000 shots and the background image is changed every 5000 shots, the total number of acquired balls is 5000 shots, 10000 shots, 15000 shots, .., the arrival display and the background image change are both performed (in this example, the arrival display is always performed at the timing when the background image changes).

The arrival display and the change of the background image on the effect display device 1600 are executed in order in accordance with a predetermined priority order, for example. For example, since the change of the background image is executed less frequently than the arrival display, the change of the background image can give the player a more uplifting feeling than the arrival display. The timing of giving a stronger uplifting feeling to the player differs depending on whether the background image is changed first or later.

The arrival display and the change of the background image may be executed at the same time. By performing the arrival display and the change of the background image at the same time, a synergistic effect can be obtained, and a stronger uplifting feeling can be given to the player as compared with the case where these effects are performed alone. The same applies to the output of light or sound that is executed at the same time as the arrival display or the change of the background image.

(I) is the state at the end of the fluctuation of the short-time win/big hit. Since the rush rush chance production is performed after the completion of the big hit, it is desirable not to notify at this time whether the relevant short working time has a big hit or whether it has a high probability working short win or a low probability working short win.

(J) is a state at the end of the jackpot variation with time reduction and is a state following (I). It is displayed as a result on the effect display device 1600 as well as the total number of acquired balls at the end of the jackpot variation and the cumulative time of the timer. Since the result is displayed at the timing, it is not always possible to shift to the high-precision non-time saving state (small hit rush) again without falling to the low-probability non-time saving state by winning the time saving big hit. Is.

(K) is a state in which the jackpot with time saving is completed. (L) is the state where the rush entry chance has started. (M) is a state in which the final change of the rush entry chance (the final change in the time saving state) is being changed, and is a state in which the effect of destroying the rock is being executed. (N) is the state at the end of the final variation, and is the state in which the transition to the highly accurate non-time saving state has been notified. (K), (L), (M), and (N) are similar to FIGS. 514(A), 514(B), 515(P), and 515(Q), respectively, and thus detailed The description is omitted.

(O) is a changing state of the highly accurate non-time saving state. When it is possible to return to the high-probability non-time saving state again without falling to the low-probability non-time saving state, for example, the display in each display area is as follows. The timer display in the timer display area inherits the value at the end of the immediately previous high-precision non-time saving state. In addition, the total number of acquired balls in the total number of acquired balls display area is the sum of the value at the end of the immediately previous high-precision non-time saving state and the number of balls that have been obtained in the immediately previous time saving bonus. It Further, an image corresponding to the total number of acquired balls is displayed on the background image. Further, in the acquired ball number history display area, a history of the total number of the winning balls obtained by the immediately preceding short-time winning/big hit and the total winning winnings in the small hit rush that has been won for the relevant short-time winning/big hit is further displayed. These histories are displayed, for example, for the last 10 big hits that have been won without falling into a low-probability non-time saving state.

As a result, if the player can return to the high-precision non-time saving state again without falling to the low-probability non-time saving state, it is possible to display a display that takes over the previous state, and the player can cross the low accuracy non-time saving state. It is possible to accurately grasp the payouts that can be obtained without losing. Also, if the total number of acquired balls or the timer is reset each time the high-precision non-time saving state ends, it is less likely that these displays will be large values, and the player will be uplifted. The display contents are as described above, because the user cannot feel the feeling.

In addition, as described above, the total value of the winning balls in one big hit game and the winning balls in the highly accurate non-time saving state (small hit rush) immediately before the big hit game is displayed in the acquired ball number history display area. Therefore, it is possible to show a numerical value larger than the expected value of the winning balls per one big winning game by using the acquired ball number history display area, so that an uplifting feeling can be given. Further, for example, the display mode may be changed depending on the value displayed in the acquired sphere count history display area. Specifically, it is a blue number if it is less than 5000, a red number if it is 5,000 or more and less than 10,000, and a rainbow number if it exceeds 10,000. Further, although the latest 10 times are displayed, the 11th time and thereafter may display the numerical value obtained by summing the numerical values for 1 to 10 times.

[12-4. Performance during a big hit]
The effect during the big hit will be described below. For example, a song that can be played during a high-accuracy, short-time, non-maximum hit is added every time the high-precision, short-time, non-maximum hit is won, without falling into the low-precision non-timeless, big hit. For example, only the song A can be selected in the first highly-accurate time-short, no-bonus hit, and the song B can be further selected in the second highly-accurate time-short, no-bonus. Yes, music C can be further selected in the third highly accurate time, short and big hit, and music D can be further selected in the fourth and subsequent high accuracy, short, no big hits.

It should be noted that in the second and subsequent high-precision short and short wins, the player can select a music piece to be played from the selectable music pieces by performing an operation using a predetermined operation unit. When the player does not select a song, for example, the song A is won in the first highly accurate time/no hit jackpot without straddling the low-probability non-time saving state, and the song A in the second highly accurate time/no hit jackpot. It is assumed that B is a music piece C in the third highly accurate short, short and big hit, and music piece D is played in the fourth and subsequent high accuracy short, no big hits.

Moreover, the music that was playing during the high-precision short, short and big hit may continue to be played even during the high-precision non-time-and-short state, which shifts after the end of the high-precision, short, short and big hit. In addition, even in the highly accurate non-time saving state, the music may be selectable by the player's operation of a predetermined operation unit.

FIG. 519 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect during high-accuracy short time no big hit. Specifically, an effect in which all the songs can be selected by inputting a predetermined command (hidden command) during the high-accuracy short-time, no-hit, will be described.

(A) is a state in which the second highly-accurate, short-time, no-hit, which has been won without falling to the low-probability, short-time, has started. (B) is a state in which the first round of the highly accurate time saving no big hit is being executed. A music selection box and an image explaining a music selection operation are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, since it is the second high-precision, short-time and no-hit jackpot that won without falling into the low-probability non-time saving state, the music A and the music B can be selected. B is selected.

These images are displayed, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a first round start command from the main control MPU. Further, for example, at the same timing, the operation acceptance period of the operation unit for executing the music selection operation starts. The operation acceptance period ends, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a round end command of the final round from the main control MPU.

In the example of FIG. 519, by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the cursor for selecting the music A and the music B is moved, and by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a, the currently playing music is moved to the cursor. Changes to the music pointed to by.

The hidden command operation acceptance period starts, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives the first round start command from the main control MPU and ends when the second round end command is received. .. (C) is a state after the hidden command is input in (B). All songs (songs A to D) can be selected.

The hidden command is, for example, a command for long-pressing (for example, pressing for 3 seconds or more) the central pressing operation unit 303a. As described above, the hidden command operation acceptance period overlaps the music selection operation acceptance period.

In the music selection, the peripheral control MPU changes the central pressing operation unit 303a from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, and the pressed state is not long-pressed (in the above example, the pressed state did not continue for 3 seconds or more). In this case, the music is decided.

If the central pressing operation unit 303a changes from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, when deciding the music, the player intends to execute the hidden command, but the music is decided because the player decides to execute the hidden command. There is a risk that the user may misunderstand that the operation was wrong and do not continue pressing until a long-pressed state, which is a hidden command. Further, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the long-pressed state and the music is decided when the pressed state is changed to the non-pressed state, the music is surely executed when the hidden command is executed. Since the decision is executed, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied, the determination of the music is executed.

Note that, for example, even in the operation for notifying the winning result of the reach effect and the determination operation on the character selection screen and the like to be described later, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state in this way. Alternatively, it may be determined that the central pressing operation unit 303a has been operated.

[13. Demonstration screen production]
[13-1. Normal demonstration screen production]
Hereinafter, an example of the demonstration screen when the fluctuation is not executed will be described. FIG. 520 is an example of the timetable of the demo screen. In the timetable, the display contents on the effect display device 1600, the display time of the display contents, the acceptance of volume control jog, the acceptance of volume light quantity control jog, whether BGM is flowing, and a predetermined movable body (role) In this chapter, it is defined whether or not the back and rear movable decorative body 3110) is in a dropped state.

When the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image showing the volume output from the pachinko machine 1 is displayed and the volume can be adjusted. In the state where the volume light amount adjustment jog can be received, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image showing one of the volume and the light amount is displayed, and the one can be adjusted, and the image is displayed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the state of being displayed, an image showing the other of the volume and the light amount is displayed, and the other can be adjusted.

In addition, as described above, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is a decorative body that can move in the vertical direction. The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located at the above-mentioned retracted position above the game board 5 or at the above-mentioned appearance position at the center of the game board 5 depending on the effect state.

Hereinafter, a specific flow of the production on the demo screen will be described. First, fluctuation or big hit is executed (NO1). When the variation or the big hit ends, the decorative design is stopped on the effect display device 1600 (NO2). After that, when the fluctuation is not held, the stopped state of the fixed decorative symbol is maintained (NO3). In any of NO1 to NO3, the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, the volume light amount adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the variable BGM is flowing, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is not in the dropped state, that is, in the retracted position. However, in NO1, there may be a prohibited section in which reception of the volume adjustment jog is prohibited, such as during a predetermined reach effect or during a predetermined round of a big hit.

Then, a predetermined image is displayed (NO4-1). Next, a telop image (also referred to as a volume light amount adjustment telop) indicating that it is possible to transition to the volume light amount adjustment screen while the predetermined image is displayed, and a character for determining a production state that is being changed later. A telop image (also referred to as a character selection telop) indicating that the transition to the selection screen is possible is displayed (NO4-2).

Note that, for example, the video played in NO4-1 and NO4-2 is a video for 30 seconds, and is loop-played between NO4-1 and NO4-2. In both NO4-1 and NO4-2, the volume adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the volume light amount adjustment jog can be accepted, and the rear rear movable ornament 3110 is in the retracted position. However, in NO4-1, the BGM is flowing, but the BGM fades out from the start of NO4-2 (the sound volume decreases and then stops).

Then, the model demo movie of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed (NO5), then the manufacturer logo is displayed (NO6), then the jog button caution movie is displayed (NO7), and then the demo screen common to the manufacturers (goto). An action prevention movie) is displayed (NO8).

Further, thereafter, the volume light amount adjustment telop and the character selection telop are displayed while the predetermined image is displayed (NO9). The display content of NO9 is the same as that of NO4-2. After the display content of NO9 is displayed, the process returns to NO5. In NO5 to NO9, the volume adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the volume light amount adjustment jog is acceptable, and BGM is not flowing.

Hereinafter, the operation of the rear back movable ornament 3110 will be described. At the time of starting the model demonstration movie in NO5, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves downward and is in a falling state, that is, at the appearance position. After that, in NO6 to NO9, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 maintains the appearance position. Note that in NO9, the rear rear movable ornament 3110 may be moved to the retracted position in order to make the effect display device 1600 easy to see when the screen shifts to the volume light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen. In this case, for example, when the display of the volume light amount adjustment screen and the character selection screen is completed, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position again.

In NO5 to NO9, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 that is not located at the retracted position moves to the retracted position when the game ball B enters the starting opening (the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). In NO5, if the game ball B enters the starting opening while the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is falling from the retracted position to the appearance position, for example, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is detected at the timing of detecting the ball entering. Raise. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be quickly moved to the retracted position at the same time as the start of the variation corresponding to the entry, and the visual effect of the variation using the effect display device 1600 is not obstructed as much as possible. I'm done.

Moreover, in NO5, when the game ball B enters the starting opening while the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropping from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is once dropped to the appearance position. You may raise after making it. This is because, if the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 that is descending makes an irregular motion that suddenly ascends at the same time as the ball enters, some players will mistake this as a production with high jackpot expectation.

In addition, the operation of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 may be determined according to the variation pattern of the variation performed by the entry. For example, a variation pattern in which an effect of lowering the back-back movable decorative body 3110 at the start of variation is performed will be described. In NO5 to NO9, the variation pattern is selected in which the game ball B enters in the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located at the appearance position, and the effect that the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 descends when the variation starts is executed. It has been done.

In this case, for example, at the same time as entering the ball, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to a retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descending position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is executed. When the descending effect is an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, it is desirable to execute the descending effect without canceling it in this way (that is, delaying the descending effect). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular effect (for example, light emission of a predetermined lamp attached to the back rear movable decoration 3110 or output of a predetermined sound from a speaker) may be performed. The rear-back movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position while performing a specific irregular effect.

Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, even if a specific irregular operation of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (for example, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is reciprocally moved up and down a predetermined number of times with a predetermined amplitude). Good. Even if the descending effect is an effect with a high expectation for a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by performing these irregular processes instead of the descending effect. In the first place, in NO5 to NO9, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not in the retracted position, the variation pattern in which the effect of lowering the back-rear movable ornament 3110 at the start of variation is executed (the descending effect is performed at the start of variation. Selection of an effect pattern) may be prohibited. Further, although the selection of the variation pattern is not prohibited (there is a possibility that a descending effect is produced), the descending effect may not be executed when the variation pattern is selected. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that the descending effect may have been selected even if the descending effect has not been executed.

Further, in NO5, the variation pattern in which the game ball B enters the starting opening while the back-rear movable decoration 3110 moves to the appearance position, and the back-removable decoration 3110 descends when the variation starts. The same applies when is selected.

Specifically, in this case, for example, at the same time as entering the ball, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to a retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum lowered position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is performed. Run. It should be noted that before the rise, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 may be once moved to the appearance position (that is, the descending effect is delayed and generated). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 may be raised while performing a specific irregular effect. It should be noted that the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 may be moved once to the appearance position before the rising. Also, in such a case, in the first place, the selection of the fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern in which the descending effect is executed when the fluctuation starts) may be prohibited.

Further, in NO5 to NO9, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is located below the retracted position, the game ball B enters the starting opening, and when the fluctuation starts, another movable body (back rear movable decorative body 3110 and It is assumed that a variation pattern in which an effect that different movable bodies are moved to the movable range of the back and rear movable decorations 3110 is selected at the time of entering the ball. In this case, for example, the rear movable movable body 3110 is moved to the retracted position first, and then the other movable bodies are moved to avoid interference between the movable bodies. Further, when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in the appearance position and the other movable body (a movable body different from the back-rear movable decoration body 3110) does not interfere with the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the appearance position. Is operated with the other rear movable body in the state in which the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearance position, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the retracted position after the other movable body returns to the initial position. May be. In such a case, the movement of the back rear movable decoration 3110 to the retracted position and the movement of the movable body different from the back rear movable decoration 3110 may be performed at the same time.

Further, for example, in the variation pattern (effect pattern), the other movable body (a movable body different from the back rear movable decoration body 3110) may not be operated. At this time, the irregular effect and the irregular operation described above may be performed on the back-back movable decorative body 3110 or the other movable body. Further, in such a case, in the first place, the selection of the variation pattern (effect pattern) in which the effect that another movable body moves to the movable range of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 at the start of variation may be prohibited.

In addition, when the back rear movable ornament 3110 is at the appearance position, a part of the effect display device 1600 is hidden. Therefore, in NO5 to NO9, some players feel that the visual display state of the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not good, and such a player feels that he/she wants to see the image in the good visual display state.

For such a player, the game ball B enters the starting opening (When the game ball B enters the starting opening, the fluctuation starts and these images (for example, the model demo movie stop shown in FIG. 520 is stopped. The rear-back movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position by a trigger other than (for the end of the time image, etc.). As a specific trigger, for example, there is an operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b).

If the game ball B wins the starting opening while the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moving up to the retracted position due to a trigger other than the game ball B entering the starting opening, the back-rear movable The decorative body 3110 continues the raising operation as it is, for example, and returns to the retracted position. Also, while the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is rising to the retracted position, the game ball B wins the starting opening, and the effect pattern determined based on the winning is descended the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. In the case of the effect pattern to be performed, the back-removable decorative body 3110 may be lowered by continuing the raising operation of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 and returning to the retracted position. The descending effect may be executed even during the ascending of 3110. Further, when the game ball B wins the starting opening in a state in which the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has returned to the retracted position by a trigger other than the game ball B entering the starting opening, for example, as it is, Maintain the retracted position.

The decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearance position (the decorative pattern of NO2 is also shown in the stop image of NO9) is, for example, at the end of fluctuation (NO2. It may be displayed in a reduced size as compared with (the pattern shown by) or may be displayed in the same size. When the decorative design is reduced and displayed, the display size of the decorative design is changed, for example, at the time of starting the descent of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in NO5, at the end of the descent, or when the final design of NO3 is displayed. .. Further, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, it may be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the movement range of the back rear movable decoration 3110. However, even in the case of a reduced display, it is displayed in the movement range of the back rear movable decoration 3110. You may make it overlap.

In NO5 to NO9, the example in which the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is located on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 has been described, but other movable bodies may be used instead of or in addition to the back rear movable decoration body 3110. It may be located in front of 1600. However, when a plurality of movable bodies are located on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, it is preferable that the plurality of movable bodies do not overlap (contact) with each other after the movement. Further, in NO5 to NO9, since the image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the movable body that cannot view the image is not moved. In particular, it is desirable not to make the explanation for the player such as the volume light amount adjustment telop invisible. Even if the position after the movement overlaps with the position where such an explanation is displayed, it is moved to the front surface of the effect display device 1600 once in NO5, and when such an explanation is displayed, The movable body may be returned to the original position. Further, the position and size of the explanation display for the player such as the volume light amount adjustment telop may be changed according to the position of the movable body.

[13-2. Another example of volume adjustment method]
Hereinafter, another example of the volume adjusting method will be described. FIG. 521 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen transition for volume control. (A) is a state in which the decorative pattern confirmed after the fluctuation is stopped, that is, a state of NO3 in FIG. 520. (B) is a state in which the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, that is, a state of NO4-1 in FIG. 520.

(C) is a state in which the loop image and the character selection telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. 520 differs from NO4-2 in FIG. 520 in that the volume light amount adjustment telop is not displayed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the state of (C), the screen changes to the character selection screen. In the example of FIG. 521, volume adjustment (adjustment and setting of the output sound output from various speakers is performed only after passing through the character selection screen, and subsequent volume adjustment has the same meaning, so parentheses are used. It is different from the example of FIG. 520 in that it cannot be omitted).

(D) is a state in which the character selection screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 due to the central pressing operation unit 303a being pressed in the state of (C). The character can be selected by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the selected character can be determined by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a.

Note that the character selected here appears on the effect display device 1600 at the time of a predetermined effect, performs a predetermined dialogue effect, or performs a predetermined action. In other words, the subsequent presentation mode changes depending on the selected character. Further, the content of the effect (for example, the above-mentioned dialogue or action) when the character appears differs depending on the selected character. Also, for example, the volume of the dialogue at the time of production differs for each character. Also, for example, the BGM differs depending on the selected character.

(E) is a state determined by the character by the central pressing operation unit 303a being pressed in the state of (D). When the character is determined, for example, the line of the character is output from the speaker. For example, the dialogue is output at a volume similar to that of the dialogue effect of the character performed while the character is changing.

For example, many players feel that the dialogue effect by the character A is noisy even at a volume of 3 (volume of 5 levels (1 is the minimum volume, 5 is the maximum volume)), and the dialogue effect by the character B is noisy even at the volume of 5. Many players feel it. In this way, the volume can be adjusted after actually listening to the dialogue of the character when the character is determined, so that the player can select an appropriate volume for himself.

(F) is a state after the character is selected. After the character is selected, the character selection screen is erased, and a display different from the volume adjustment screen, such as the loop image described above, is displayed. The reason why such a screen is displayed before the state where the screen can be shifted to the volume adjustment screen is to prevent the player from merely adjusting the volume.

Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the character A having a large sound of the dialogue effect is selected on the character selection screen. At this time, if the screen is switched to the volume adjustment screen immediately after the character A is determined, the player will just do the work of reducing the volume without thinking. On the other hand, by temporarily displaying a display different from the volume control as described above, the player loses consciousness from the character he/she has selected, so that a player forgets the character he/she selects before the volume control becomes possible. There is. Since the player reduces the volume in a state of remembering that he/she has selected the character A, by reconfirming that the character selected by himself/herself is the character A when the dialogue of the character A appears thereafter, a sense of security can be obtained. Or you can get delight.

In (G), the loop image, the character selection telop, and the volume light amount adjustment telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. (H) is a state in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the state of (G) and a volume light amount adjustment screen is displayed. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the volume changes, and by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a, a light amount adjustment screen is displayed. Although not shown, in the light amount adjustment screen, the light amount is changed by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the central pressure operation unit 303a is pressed to shift to the volume adjustment screen.

(I) is a state where the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. For example, on the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the central pressing operation unit 303a, the loop image is displayed again.

In addition, when the fluctuation starts while the volume control screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to continuously perform the volume control, and the image for performing the volume control shows the visibility of the fluctuating effect. It can be continuously displayed in a manner that does not significantly hinder it. As a result, it is possible to execute the volume adjustment while confirming the actual volume during the fluctuation.

Although the example in which it is not possible to move to the volume light intensity adjustment screen without passing through the character selection screen has been described, in addition to or instead of passing through the character selection screen, if a specific condition is not satisfied, the volume light intensity adjustment screen is moved to. It may not be possible. The specific conditions include, for example, the entry of the game ball B into a general winning opening that allows a prize ball to be obtained at the time of entry, the elapse of a predetermined time, or the like (or a combination thereof).

The predetermined time may be longer or shorter depending on the operation status of the operation means operable by the player. Further, when the condition that the volume (output sound) can be changed is satisfied, thereafter, the volume (output sound) may be changeable without going through the character selection screen. Further, the changed volume (output sound) may end at the end of the change of the specific number of times. Note that, in the changing specific effect, the effect may be advanced with the volume (output sound) specific to the specific effect, instead of the selected volume (output sound). Further, after the character is selected and before the transition to the volume adjustment screen, a predetermined operation may be performed on a predetermined operation unit to increase the number of volume patterns selectable on the volume adjustment screen ( For example, when the predetermined operation is not executed, the volume of 5 levels (output sound) can be selected, but when the predetermined operation is executed, the volume of 10 levels (output sound) can be selected. etc).

[14. Up-and-coming production]
Hereinafter, the stand-up effect will be described. The stand-up effect is one of the effects executed during the SP reach (a special effect, and the SP reach that appears in the following description also corresponds to the special effect). SP reach is a reach effect that is more likely to be selected in the big hit variation and is less likely to be selected in the outlier variation, as compared to the normal reach effect. That is, the SP reach is a reach production with a high expectation of a big hit compared to a normal reach production. In the stand-up effect, a display indicating a jackpot expectation degree is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when a dialogue “Ka-ra-no-” described below is displayed, the effect display device 1600 is displayed after the dialogue is displayed. The jackpot expectation displayed in is promoted.

FIG. 522 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stand-up effect. (A) is a state in which the production is started during the SP reach and started. On the effect display device 1600, for example, the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in a blurred state. Subsequently, in (B), the background color of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the effect display device 1600 changes. The background color after the change is blue or red. In addition, it is assumed that the higher the jackpot expectation of the variation is, the more easily red is selected as the background color after the change rather than blue.

Subsequently, in (C), a dialogue "Ka-ra-no-" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the image and the background color of the central pressing operation unit 303a are erased. Note that in (C), the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the background color may be continuously displayed. When the line is displayed, the jackpot expectation is subsequently promoted. Subsequently, in (D), the line is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed again in a blurred state. For example, the background color of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is promoted from blue to red at the timing when the line is erased from the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (E), the blurred image and the background color of the central pressing operation unit 303a are deleted, and the large image of the red central pressing operation unit 303a (large red push display) is clearly displayed in the effect display device. Displayed at 1600, the user is prompted to press the central pressing operation unit 303a. The images of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed at this time include, for example, a small blue image (small blue push display), a large blue image (large blue push display), and a large red image (large red display). Push display), and a large rainbow-colored image (rainbow push display). In addition, it is assumed that the jackpot expectation becomes higher in the order of blue small push display, blue large push display, red large push display, and rainbow large push display, and the rainbow large push display is selected only in the big hit variation.

In the state of (E), when the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the operation valid state and the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation valid state, it is announced whether the variation in execution is a jackpot variation or a deviation variation. To be done. In (F), it is announced that the fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation.

In addition, in (A), a blurred image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, and in (E), immediately before a clear image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. Also, the effect from the display of a clear image of the central pressing operation unit 303a to the end of the display of the image is also referred to as button display effect.

FIG. 523 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the stand-up effect. In the example of FIG. 522, the line “Ka-ra-no-” is displayed in the fanning effect, and the background color in the fanning effect is promoted. However, in the example of FIG. The dialogue "No ~" is displayed, and the button image in the button display effect is promoted.

Descriptions of (A) and (B) are omitted because they are similar to those of FIGS. 522(A) and 522(B), respectively. Subsequently, in (C), the blurred image and the background color of the central pressing operation unit 303a are erased, and the large blue push image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a clear state, and the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. You are encouraged to do so.

Subsequently, in (D), the dialogue "Ka-ra-no-" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to overlap the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a. In addition, in (D), in order to concentrate the player's consciousness on the line "ka-ra-no-", the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the display prompting the pressing may be deleted. Subsequently, in (E), the dialogue "Ka-ra-no-" is deleted from the effect display device 1600, and the blue large push image is promoted to the red large push image at the timing when the dialogue is deleted. .. Since (F) is the same as FIG. 522(F), description is omitted.

When performing the promotion effect during the button display effect, the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is effective during the period from the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect to the appearance of the promotion effect. It may or may not be valid. Since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is effective during the period, it is possible to satisfy the player who wants to know the winning result quickly. Further, since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is invalid during the period, it is possible to satisfy the player who wants to enjoy the effect until the end, and the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. If the operation is invalid, it is confirmed that the promotion effect is performed, and the player can feel an uplifting feeling.

In this way, in order to avoid deciding that the promotion effect is to be performed when the operation is invalid even though the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, the button display is performed. Regardless of whether the promotion effect is performed during the effect, the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a may be enabled for a predetermined time after the button display effect is started.

In the rising effect, there may be a pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed and only the button display effect is executed. The type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a that may be displayed in the button display effect may be different between when the stirrup effect is executed and when only the button display effect is executed without the stirrer effect. ..

Specifically, for example, in the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed, only the blue large push, the red large push, and the rainbow large push can be displayed in the button display effect, but in the pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed, Suppose a small push, blue big push, red big push, and rainbow big push can be displayed. Accordingly, the pattern in which the stirrup effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the pattern in which the stirrup effect is not executed.

Further, in such a case, it is desirable that the pattern in which the agitation effect is executed has a higher appearance frequency than the pattern in which the agitation effect is not executed and only the button display effect is executed. This is because, as described above, the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed has a higher expectation of a big hit. In addition, for example, in a pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed, BGM flows in the button display effect, but in a pattern in which the fanning effect is executed, BGM is flown in the fanning effect, but the BGM is stopped in the button display effect, and there is no sound. It is desirable to put it in a state. As a result, it is possible to create a feeling of tension in the button display effect in the pattern in which the fanning effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed.

In addition, for example, when the fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, in a pattern in which the fanning effect is executed, and when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect, The pattern in which the effect of vibrating the vibration speaker 354 is executed may be executed.

FIG. 524 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing at which the promotion effect in the rising effect is performed. The promotion effect can be executed, for example, at any of timings 1 to 7 shown in FIG. Timing 1 is immediately after the instigation effect is started (for example, the timing of (A) in FIG. 522 or the timing immediately after (B) is started). At timing 1, the player cannot recognize or slightly recognizes the first background color in the stirrer effect, so if the promotion effect is performed at timing 1, the player is less aware of the background color. It can give a sense of surprise.

Timing 2 is timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the stirrup effect (for example, the timing of FIG. 522(C)). At the timing 2, since the player can completely recognize the first background color in the stir production, for example, when the background color is blue, the player is discouraged, but the promotion production is performed at the timing 2. This can eliminate this discouragement.

Timing 3 is the same as the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing at the start of FIG. 523(C)). In the example of FIG. 524, it is assumed that the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a ends at the same time when the button display effect ends.

At the timing 3, since the player cannot recognize the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect, the player can be surprised if the promotion effect is performed at the timing 3. You can Further, if the promotion effect is performed at the timing 3, at least the image with the lowest expectation of a big hit (blue small push), despite the timing at which the player has not yet recognized the image type of the central pressing operation unit 303a. Since it is confirmed that there is no such thing, an uplifting feeling can be obtained.

Timing 4 is immediately after the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing immediately after the start of FIG. 523(C)). Timing 4 is, for example, a timing at which it is difficult, even after 0.008 seconds have elapsed from the start of the button display effect, that the player can operate the central pressing operation unit 303a. At the timing 4, since the player is in a state in which the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect is weakly recognized, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise when the promotion effect occurs.

Further, for the player who knows that promotion effect may occur at the timing 4, for example, the effective period starts by hitting the central pressing operation unit 303a repeatedly before starting the button display effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide another game property of whether or not the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a can be executed before the promotion effect.

Timing 5 is a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button display effect (however, the first half of the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a). At the timing 5, since the player can completely recognize the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a, for example, if the image is a small blue push, the player is discouraged, but at the timing 5, promotion effect. This disappointment can be eliminated by performing.

Timing 6 is a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button display effect (however, the latter half of the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a). At the timing 6, since a considerable amount of time has elapsed since the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a was displayed, the promotion effect can be shown to the player who is half giving up on the appearance of the promotion effect. Therefore, a sense of surprise can be provided.

Timing 7 is just before the end of the button display effect. By executing the promotion effect at the timing 7, it is possible to show the promotion effect to the player who is not willing to operate the central pressing operation unit 303a even if the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. .. In addition, for example, if the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a does not start until the promotion effect occurs even if the button display effect starts, the freeze effect is executed by executing the promotion effect at timing 6 or timing 7. It is possible to realize a production like a production and to make the player have a strong expectation.

When the promotion effect is executed after the start of the button display effect, the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a may be used as a trigger for executing the promotion effect. Specifically, for example, from the start of the button display effect to the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7), the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, but the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is invalid. It is said that. Then, at the timing of the promotion effect, the effective period of the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed within the valid period, promotion effect is generated, and the operation is invalid during the promotion effect. Then, the button image after promotion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation valid period starts again. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation valid period, the winning result of the fluctuation is notified.

Further, for example, although the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts at the time of starting the button display effect, the central pressing is performed after the start of the button display effect and before the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, promotion effect may occur. After that, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the effective period after the upgraded button image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the winning result of the change is notified. It should be noted that it is desirable that the pattern in which the promotion effect is performed after the start of the button display effect is selected only when the big hit is changed (that is, the big hit is determined). If the pattern is selected in the outlying fluctuation, the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a in the expectation that the winning result will be announced by the button effect, but the player unexpectedly develops (whether it is a big hit or not). This is because there is a risk that it will become a watermark.

Further, for example, although the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts at the time of starting the button display effect, the central pressing is performed after the start of the button display effect and before the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, an effect that expects the promotion effect to occur (for example, a serif effect such as "Don't be impatient! I'll be promoted soon!") may be executed. In such a case, the promotion effect is not performed at the timing when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed as described above, but is performed at the predetermined promotion timing.

Further, for example, when the promotion effect occurs after the start of the button display effect, immediately after the line "Ka-ra-no-" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the insulting effect is executed once again after the promotion, and thereafter. The button display effect may be executed again. In this case, the promotion target by the promotion effect may be the background color that appeared in the last fanning effect, the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect, or both. Good.

Specifically, for example, when the stirrup production ends with a blue background, and "Ka-ra-no-" is displayed after the blue small push display is displayed in the button display production, then it is promoted to a red background. The stirrer effect may be performed, and the button display effect in which the blue small push display is displayed may be performed. In addition, specifically, for example, in the case where the fanning effect ends with a blue background, and "ka-ra-no-" is displayed after the blue small push display is displayed in the button display effect, then the blue background is displayed. The stirrer effect may be performed again, and the button display effect in which the red large push display is displayed may be performed.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the example in which the promotion effect is performed by only one of the stirrup effect and the button display effect has been described, but the promotion effect may be performed by both of them. In addition, the promotion effect may be executed a plurality of times within the one stirrer effect and the one button display effect. Although the example in which the background color changes as the stirrer effect has been described, in addition to the background color, the background color is displayed before the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed and overlaps with the area in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. It is not necessary to be concerned with the background color, such as by changing the color of the effect displayed in (such as the effect of gathering light).

[15. Hold notice production]
[15-1. Hold notice production by change of hold color]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the hold display is displayed until the hold display is consumed. By changing, it is possible to execute a hold announcement effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree for a variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the hold display. Further, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change.

Specifically, based on the game ball winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are established), the main control board 1310 transmits a reservation number designation command and a preliminary determination command. .. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the command analysis process of step S601, when the hold number designation command and the preliminary determination command are received, the hold advance notice determination table corresponding to these commands, that is, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command. (Hold memory number) and pre-judgment information specified from the pre-judgment command (big hit, small hit, reach lost, lost) corresponding to the pending notice decision table selected, the judgment set in the pending notice decision table By comparing the value with the read random number for determining the pending notice, the type of the pending notice pattern set in the pending notice determination table is determined.

It should be noted that, in the pending notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each pending notice pattern is different for each of the preliminary judgment information (either big hit, small hit, reach lose, or lose) specified by the advance judgment command, and each hold pending pattern is different. The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

Further, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting conditions are satisfied), the number of holdings (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command is increased, thereby displaying the effect. One hold display is additionally displayed on the device 1600. On the other hand, when the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold number (hold storage number) specified by the hold number designation command decreases. , The hold display on the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern, and the hold display is displayed. The display mode of the hold display can be changed every time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on another hold display is started (start condition is satisfied).

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative design (variable display of the special design) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display is deleted, but the decoration design is changed. Even after the start of the variable display (variable display of the special symbol), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changeable. In such a case, before and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display, the position at which the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 is moved, like other hold displays. By doing so, the possibility of changing the display mode of the hold display by executing the hold change effect may be suggested.

Next, a holding color determination table in which a plurality of types of holding color patterns are set for each holding number (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 525, 526, and 527. To do. The pending notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 525(A) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins in the starting opening without holding and during fluctuation non-execution. FIG. 525(B) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins at the starting opening without suspension and during execution of variation. FIG. 526(C) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there is one reserved. FIG. 527(D) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there are two reservations. FIG. 527(E) is a reserved color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there are three reservations. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the pre-determination command to determine the reserved color when there is no reservation and the variation is not being executed.

In the reserved color determination table, a pattern indicating a reserved color at a timing when the reserved color can be changed, a distribution in a hit variation of the pattern, and a distribution in a deviation variation are defined. It should be noted that the start of the hold 1 change means that the change is started in a state in which the hold of the color change target by the pattern is the first hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed in the next change). Is. Similarly, the start of the change of the hold 2 is a state in which the change is started in a state where the hold of the color change target by the pattern is the second hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed by the next successive change). It's time. Similarly, at the time of the start of the change of the hold 3, the change is held in a state where the hold of the color change target by the pattern is the third hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed three times ahead of the change). It's time to start.

The peripheral control MPU changes the reserved color at each timing according to the color indicated by the pattern. Note that the allocation in the reserved color determination table is predetermined so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher in the order of white, blue, green, red, and iridescent. Further, the distribution is predetermined so that the rainbow color is selected only when the big hit changes.

In addition, in each pattern of the reserved color determination table, a change to a reserved color with a low jackpot expectation is not performed. Specifically, for example, after the reserved color becomes blue, it does not return to white. This is because if there is a possibility that the reserved color with a low jackpot expectation level may change, the player cannot obtain a sense of expectation even if the reserved color has a high expectation degree.

In addition, the reserved color determination table has a pattern in which color promotion is executed in multiple stages. Specifically, for example, there is a pattern in which, from the state in which the reserved color is white, blue and green are skipped and the color changes to red. Due to the existence of such a pattern, for example, at the final timing of the change of the reserved color, even if the white color remains, there is still a possibility that the color will be changed to a color with a high expectation for a big hit at a stretch. Expectations can be maintained to the end.

In addition, for example, the hold color of blue or more may be selected only in the reach variation, or the hold color of red or more may be selected only in the variation in which the SP reach is executed. In addition, when a variation is suspended in a state where a big hit variation is included in the variations being executed or suspended, the peripheral control MPU forcibly changes all the retained color change patterns for the variation to white (that is, The pattern may be defined as a standard color).

FIG. 528 is an example of the changing pending color determination table. In the changing pending color determination table, a pattern indicating a reserved color at a timing when the variable pending color can be changed during the execution of variation, distribution in the hit variation of the pattern, distribution in the outlying variation, and variation pattern by variation It is defined for each hold color at the start. That is, the peripheral control MPU determines the pending color change pattern being changed according to the hold color at the start of the change, the change pattern of the change, and whether the change is a hit change or a deviation change.

In the example of FIG. 528, three promotion timings are defined for each variation pattern, but the number of promotion timings may be different for each variation pattern. Also, the promotion timing itself may be different for each variation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern in which the SP reach is varied, the promotion timing includes, for example, when the reach is established, when the SP reach is developed, and when the second half of the SP reach is started. The jackpot expectation and change pattern of each reserved color are the same as those in the reserved color determination table.

FIG. 529 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pending notice effect due to the change in the pending color. (A) is a state in which the fluctuation is not held and the fluctuation is performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002 while the fluctuation is being performed. In (B), the reserved color determination table in FIG. 525(B) is referred to, and the reserved color at the time of winning and at the start of variation is determined to be green.

(C) is a state in which the variation in (B) has ended. (D) is a state in which the variation corresponding to the green hold is started. (E) is a state in which reach has been developed in the fluctuation. In (E), the hold remains green. (F) is a state in which SP reach is developed in the fluctuation. In (F), the hold remains green. (G) is a state in which the second half of SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of SP reach, the hold turned red.

[15-2. Pending notice production due to gacha coin change]
Up to this point, the pending notice effect due to the change in the pending color has been described. In the following, the hold announcement effect when the hold is displayed as a gacha coin and the hold is changed will be described. In the pending notice production, for example, when a prize is won, the hold is displayed in the form of a coin (hereinafter referred to as a gacha coin), and when the hold moves, the number of coins increases or a coin different from the normal form (hereinafter , Called rare gacha coins).

Then, for example, at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold, in the effect display device 1600, the same number of gacha coins as the number of gacha coins and rare gacha coins are executed to obtain the same number of pending displays. Then, the hold display indicating the change currently being executed changes to the hold display of the color with the highest jackpot expectation among the acquired hold displays. It should be noted that not only the change to the hold display to the color with the highest jackpot expectation but also to any of the displayed hold displays may be performed. It should be noted that although the gacha coins and rare gacha coins are displayed as suspended, the gacha coins and rare gacha coins may be displayed as suspended without executing the gacha coin at the start of the change corresponding to the suspension.

A gacha coin holding determination table in which a plurality of types of gacha coin holding patterns are set for each holding number (holding storage number) specified by the holding number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 530, 531 and 532. .. The gachacoin hold determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 530(A) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins in the starting opening without holding and during fluctuation non-execution. FIG. 530(B) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins at the starting opening without holding and during variation execution. FIG. 531(C) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there is one hold. FIG. 532 (D) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there are two holds. FIG. 532(E) is a gachacoin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in the state where there are three holds. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the pre-determination command to determine the suspension of gacha coins without suspension and during non-execution of fluctuation.

The gachacoin hold determination table, like the hold color determination table, a pattern indicating the type and number of gachacoins at the timing when the hold color can be changed, distribution in hit variation of the pattern, and distribution in outlying variation, Is defined.

The peripheral control MPU changes the type and number of gacha coins at each timing according to the type and number of gacha coins indicated by the pattern. In order to increase the jackpot expectation in the order of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, and 5 rare gacha coins, the allocation in the gacha coin holding decision table is predetermined. Has been. In addition, even five rare gacha coins with the highest jackpot expectation may be selected according to the deviation.

It should be noted that, similar to the holding color determination table, in each pattern of the gacha coin holding determination table, a change to a gacha coin having a low jackpot expectation is not performed. Further, similar to the reserved color determination table, the gacha coin pending determination table has a pattern in which a plurality of stages of promotion of gacha coins are executed. Also, if the fluctuation is suspended while the big hit fluctuation is included in the fluctuations that are being executed or suspended, the peripheral control MPU forcibly displays the normal white suspension instead of the gachacoin suspension. You may do it.

In addition, in the illustrated gacha coin hold determination table, when the gacha coin hold is displayed, the gacha coin is always displayed from the time of winning, but for example, a normal white hold is displayed at the time of winning. There may be a pattern in which the hold is changed to the gacha hold by the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the hold is started. However, it is desirable that there is no pattern that changes into a gacha coin after the reserved color is promoted to blue or higher. This is because there is a risk that the reserved color may lower the sense of expectation that the color has been promoted.

FIG. 533 is an example of a gachacoin reserved color correspondence table. In the gachacoin reserved color correspondence table, the correspondence between the type and number of gachacoins at the start of fluctuation and the reserved color with the highest jackpot expectation among the pending displays obtained by the Gacha at the start of fluctuation, and the jackpot fluctuation and deviation. The distribution in which the corresponding correspondence is selected for each fluctuation is defined.

The gachacoin reserved color correspondence table is defined so that a situation in which a gachacoin-based gacha-coin is executed but only a white reserved display can be obtained does not occur. This is because if such a situation occurs, the player will not be able to have a sense of expectation in the performance of playing a toy.

In addition, "coin" in the reserved color column indicates that the change is executed while the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is displayed in the reserved state without executing the gacha. In the gachacoin hold decision table, the jackpot expectation is set to be low when the GachaCoin is not executed. However, as shown in FIG. If not, the jackpot may be set to be confirmed.
Further, the gachacoin reserved color correspondence table does not have to include the pattern in which the gacha coin is not executed. That is, in this case, when a pending display of gacha coins or rare gacha coins appears, it always changes to a pending display having a jackpot expectation degree of blue holding or higher.

As for the big hit change, the change to the "coin" that indicates that the change is executed with the display of gacha coins or rare gacha coins is executed without executing the Gacha-gacha, 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins Any of the number of coins, five gacha coins, one rare gacha coin, and five rare gacha coins is set to be lower than the rate of changing to a colored pending display (in the case of one coin, 32/ At 128 it remains a coin, but at 96/128 it changes to some color). This is because the expectation is generally higher when the display is changed to the colored hold display, so that it is possible to suppress the end of coins as much as possible.

By the distribution shown by the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, the reserved color with the highest jackpot expectation is determined for the plurality of reserved displays obtained by using the plurality of gacha coins or the rare gacha coins. The color of the hold display other than the hold color having high expectation is randomly determined, for example.

Specifically, for example, if three coins have been acquired and it has been decided to display red as the reserved color, the reserved color indicated by the remaining two coins is expected to exceed red. It means that it is randomly selected from "coins", "blue", "green", and "red" excluding the iridescent color. Also, instead of random, for example, “blue”, “green”, “red” is pattern 1, “green”, “green”, “red” is pattern 2, “blue”, “red”, “red” is pattern 3, and so on. A plurality of patterns may be provided for each number of coins and the final color, and the pattern may be determined from among them. In addition, when the reserved color with the highest jackpot expectation is not determined (when one of the displayed reserved colors is determined), for example, pattern 2 is easier to be promoted to red than pattern 1, etc. It is good to set up.

It should be noted that in the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, all reserved display colors acquired by a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins may be defined. In this case, even if the holding color with the highest jackpot expectation is the same, it is preferable that the sorting is set so that the jackpot expectation becomes higher as the number of holding displays having the holding color increases. For example, using three gachacoins, you get the "red, red, red" hold display than when you get the "red, blue, white" hold display and the hold display changes to red. When the pending display changes to red, the jackpot expectation is higher.)

Note that the change pattern of the hold display in the change after the change to the colored normal hold display at the start of the change by the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is determined using the changing hold color determination table in FIG. 528. That is, even in the case of the gacha coin suspension notice, after the change to the colored normal suspension display, the suspension change pattern by the suspension color is used as in the case where the suspension color change notice continues. However, regarding each pattern of the changing pending color determination table of FIG. 528, even if the distribution of each pattern when the big hit is changed and the distribution when it is out of change are different depending on whether the gachacoin holding notice is passed or not. Good.

In the example described above, the effect that the gachacoin hold is changed to the hold color display by the Gacha-coin is performed at the start of the change of the hold corresponding to the gachacoin, but it is executed at another timing after the start of the change. Good. The timing may be, for example, immediately before the reach is established, immediately after the reach is established, or when the SP reach is developed when the SP reach is executed. However, for example, when an image prompting the operation of the specific operation unit is displayed during the reach effect and the effect prompting the operation of the operation unit is executed, the last relevant timing must be before the display start of the image. Is desirable.

In addition, for example, if the final holding color is the same, the holding color will be higher so that the jackpot expectation is higher when the gachacoin holding notice is sent than when the gachacoin holding notice is not sent. It is desirable that the distribution is set in the decision table, the gachacoin reserved color correspondence table, and the like.

In the above-mentioned example, the number of stages of holding gacha coins (5 stages of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, 5 rare gacha coins) and the number of stages of reserved colors (White, blue, green, red, iridescent five levels) are the same, but may be different. If the number of stages is different, it is desirable that the number of stages for which gachacoin is reserved is larger. Eventually, the gachacoin hold also changes to a hold for colored display, so that the player recognizes the final jackpot expectation by holding the colored display. That is, if there are many stages of reserved colors, it is difficult for the player to grasp the final jackpot expectation unless the order of jackpot expectations of all colors is remembered.

Although not shown, in the peripheral control ROM, for example, as a suspension at the time of winning, a distribution in which a gacha coin suspension display is selected and a distribution in which a normal suspension display (colored suspension including white) is selected And a table defined for each fluctuation pattern is stored. The peripheral control MPU refers to the table and selects the gacha coin holding display or the normal holding display, and depending on the selected display mode, refers to the gacha coin holding color correspondence table or the holding color determination table to change the holding. Determine the pattern.

Although the jackpot coin hold display when the gachacoin hold display is selected is generally set higher than the jackpot expectation when the normal hold display is selected, the gachacoin hold with the lowest jackpot expectation (gacha It is assumed that the highest-ranking hold (red) that can be selected even with the deviation of the normal hold display is higher than the jackpot expectation.

FIG. 534 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a gacha coin holding notice effect. (A) is a state in which the fluctuation is not held and the fluctuation is performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002 while the fluctuation is being performed. In (B), the gachacoin hold determination table of FIG. 530(B) is referred to, and the hold display at the time of winning is set to "1 gachacoin" and the hold display at the start of fluctuation is set to "3 gachacoin". FIG. 533 is a diagram when red is determined as a reserved color in FIG. 533.

(C) is a state in which the variation in (B) has ended. (D) is a state in which the fluctuation corresponding to the holding changed to the gacha coin has started. At the start of the change, the hold display, which was “1 gacha coin”, is changed to “3 gacha coins”. (E) is a state in which the gacha-coin production is executed three times using three gacha coins. The gacha coin reserve color correspondence table is referred to, and the reserve color with the highest jackpot expectation is determined to be green. Therefore, in (E), the one with the highest jackpot expectation is green among the three reserved displays obtained in the Gagging production.

(F) is a continuation state of the fluctuation. The hold display corresponding to the change has changed to green, which has the highest jackpot expectation among the three hold displays obtained in the Gacha production. (G) is a state in which reach has been developed in the fluctuation. In (G), the hold remains green. (H) is a state in which SP reach has been developed in the fluctuation. In (H), the hold remains green. (I) is a state in which the latter half of SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of SP reach, the hold turned red.

Since the change mode of the hold display after the gacha coin hold notice is changed to the normal hold display (colored hold display including white) is the same as when the gacha coin hold notice is not passed, (G), (H ) And (I) are similar to FIGS. 529 (E), (F), and (G), respectively. Note that, in addition to this, for example, the three pending displays obtained in the Gacha-gacha production are set to “blue”, “green”, and “red”, and the state of FIG. 534(F) is changed to red, and FIG. 534(G) is displayed. The timing at which the color is promoted, such as indicating the final color before the start of reach shown in, may be appropriately determined.

[16. Reach collapse simulated production]
The reach collapse pseudo continuous production will be described below. First, the pseudo continuous effect will be described. Pseudo continuous effect is an effect to perform the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design multiple times during one fluctuation of the first special design display or the second special design display. .. “Ending the variation of the decorative design” means, for example, a mode in which a part or the whole of the decorative design is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation of the decorative design is once finished, and the decorative design. In some cases, the pseudo-relational pattern (the pattern in which the pseudo-reliance is determined if this symbol stops) is stopped, and the like. In addition, a pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N continuous pseudo continuous effects, and the M-th variation of the decorative pattern in the N continuous pseudo continuous effects (M is 1 or more N The following natural number) is referred to as the M-th consecutive pseudo continuous effect.

In addition, while the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is changing once, while actually suggesting to the player that the action may be performed again, the action is actually performed again. The effect that is not performed is called “pseudo-gase effect”. There is also a pseudo gasse effect in which two consecutive pseudo continuous effects are executed, but the third consecutive pseudo continuous effect is suggested but the third continuous pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous effect” or “pseudo continuous”.

Pseudo continuous production occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative design and ending the variation of the decorative design is performed again during one change of the first special design display or the second special design display. When it is determined that the peripheral control MPU, at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design may stop the pseudo continuous design. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as "continue!" in the middle decorative pattern as a pseudo continuous pattern. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd numbers or even numbers and no reach is generated) may be used as the pseudo continuous symbol.

Whether or not pseudo-run is executed and the number of pseudo-runs when pseudo-run is executed in each change are defined in the change pattern. Further, the variation pattern selection rate in the variation pattern table is determined such that the larger the number of pseudo-repetitions, the higher the jackpot expectation.

FIG. 535 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the reach collapse pseudo-serial effect. FIG. 535(A) shows a state in which the fluctuation has started. Subsequently, in (B), the left decorative design is stopped, and the right decorative design is the same design as the left decorative design, for example, it is about to stop in a swinging manner (it is about to reach). In (C), the decorative pattern is maintained in the state of (B), and an image prompting the user to press the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(D) is a state immediately after the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (C). The decorative pattern, which is about to reach, starts to change again, and a display (“×2!”) indicating that the second pseudo-link has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (E), the left decorative design is stopped again, and the right decorative design is the same as the left decorative design, for example, it is about to stop in a swinging manner. Further, a display (“×2”) indicating that the second pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), the decorative pattern maintains the state of (E), and the effect display device 1600 displays an image prompting the user to press the central pressing operation unit 303a.

It is assumed that the same effect is repeated and the fourth pseudo run is performed. In (G), the decorative pattern is maintained in the state of (E), and an image prompting the user to press the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A display (“×4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(H) shows a state in which the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (G), but the reach is formed without breaking the decorative pattern that was about to reach the reach state. A reach state is formed with an even number of decorative patterns. In addition, it is assumed that the expected value of the payout balls obtained in the big hit is large in the order that the decorative patterns are even numbered, odd numbered numbers other than 7, and 7 numbered. A display (“×4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Although it has been described that it is about to reach (the upper and lower positions of the left and right decorative patterns are slightly different), from the state of being reach (the upper and lower positions of the left and right decorative patterns are the same), FIG. As in (c), an image prompting the user to press the central pressing operation unit 303a may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 536 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach symbol promotion effect that is executed subsequent to the reach collapse pseudo continuous effect. The reach design promotion effect is an example of SP reach. FIG. 536(I) shows a state where the reach symbol promotion effect has started. The characters “Promote reach pattern!” are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the reach design promotion effect, for example, even reach is promoted to odd reach or 7 reach, or odd reach is promoted to 7 reach. Here, the order of even reach<odd reach<7 reach is advantageous (for example, a big hit is easy). In particular, this 7-reach will be a very intense production (for example, a big hit expectation is over 80%). In addition, in (I), since the reach collapse effect is finished, the display indicating the number of pseudo consecutive times is deleted from the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (J), an image prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A white effect image is displayed on the background of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a. Further, in (J), for example, the decorative pattern in the reach is displayed in a swaying manner.

(K) is a state in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (J) and the reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted (“promotion!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, the decorative pattern has been promoted to odd reach. In addition, the color of the background effect image has changed from white to blue.

For example, the color of the effect image of the reach pattern promotion effect background is white for even reach, blue for odd reach other than 7, and red for 7 reach. Even if the reach symbol fails to be promoted, the reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) based on the reach symbol is performed, the winning is announced, and the symbol is determined.

Then, in (L), the character "promote reach symbol!!" is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in (M), an image prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, at this time, for example, the decorative pattern in the reach is displayed in a swinging manner.

(N) is a state in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (M) and the reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted (“promotion!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, the decorative design has been promoted to 7 reach. In addition, the color of the background effect image changes from blue to red. Although illustration is omitted, after that, a reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) with 7 symbols is performed, and the winning is announced and the symbol is determined.

In addition, the first period in which the reach collapse pseudo continuous production, which is an effect of the same mode (reach symbol mode) that is repeatedly performed, is performed, and from the end of the first period, final determination of the reach symbol (reach symbol promotion effect Comparing the second period up to the last) with the second period, it is desirable that the second period is longer. Since the player pays the most attention to the winning result of the fluctuation, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the second period in which the winning result is more directly notified, and the above-mentioned 7 Since the jackpot expectation of reach is set to an unprecedented numerical value, it is possible to provide the player with an uplifting feeling for a longer time in the second period than in the first period.

Further, it is desirable that the number of times the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the first period is greater than the number of times that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the second period. As the time from the start of fluctuation to the prompting of the operation of the operating unit becomes longer, the player tends to think that if the operation of the operating unit is prompted, the player may be notified of the result of the change. .. Therefore, in the second period in which the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation is long, if the number of times of urging the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is large, the player will be prepared for each operation, which may cause tiredness. The number of times is as described above.

Further, it is desirable that the time interval between the effects that prompt the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a that is repeatedly performed in the first period is shorter than the time interval between the effects that prompts the central pressing operation unit 303a that is repeatedly performed in the second period. Hereinafter, the effect for urging the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is also called an operation request effect. As described above, since the second period is a more direct presentation of the winning result than the first period, if time is spent between the operation request productions in the first period, the player's interest will be increased. Because it cannot maintain. In addition, as the time interval between the effects that prompt the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a that is repeatedly performed in the first period, the effect that prompts the first central pressing operation unit 303a in the second period after the end of the first period is displayed. For the same reason, it is said that it is shorter than the time interval until the time.

Further, it is desirable that the operation valid period in the one operation request effect in the second period is longer than the operation valid period in the one operation request effect in the first period. This is because the second period is a more direct presentation of the winning result than the first period, and therefore, there is a player who feels nervous and wants to perform the pressing operation slowly during the second period.

Depending on the content of the reach collapse pseudo continuous effect (for example, the pseudo continuous number is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 3 times)), even if the SP reach is subsequently developed, the operation request production may not be executed. However, it is desirable that the ratio of the operation request performance to be executed in the SP reach is higher than the ratio of the operation request performance not to be executed in the SP reach that has been developed after the reach collapse pseudo-relation effect has occurred. As a result, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling due to the occurrence of the reach collapse pseudo-reproduction.

As described above, in the examples of FIGS. 535 and 536, the display form of the operation request effect in the first period is one type, but the display form of the operation request effect in the second period is plural types (with a blue effect). Display, and display with a red effect).

Also, a timer (may be a gauge or the like) indicating the remaining operation valid period after the operation request effect is started may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the first period is shorter than the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the second period.

Although not shown, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request performance in the second period, a predetermined movable body may operate according to the winning result. Specifically, for example, if the variation is a big hit, the movable body operates, and if the variation is a deviation, the movable body does not operate. On the other hand, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, the movable body does not operate regardless of the winning result.

Further, even when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, the movable body may move, but the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the second period. In this case, the operation mode of the movable body is different (for example, the operation direction and the operation amount of the movable body are different, or the movable body that operates is different).

Further, in the first period, a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect) may be executed when the reach collapses and the pseudo-relation starts. There may be multiple types of such specific effects. In addition, depending on the type of a specific effect, the degree of expectation of a big hit of the variation may be increased, or the next reach collapse may be determined, so that it may appear.

In addition, when a specific effect with high expectations appears, it is desirable that the expectations do not decrease in the specific effect of transition (specifically, for example, when a green cut-in effect appears, blue The cut-in effect does not appear). In addition, in the first period, the predetermined movable body may operate when the reach collapses and the pseudo-relation starts. Note that the operation of the movable body may be the same every time, or the operation or the accessory that operates may be different depending on the current number of times of pseudo repetition.

Further, although a plurality of operation request effects are executed in the first period, the time interval between operation request effects may be gradually shortened, or the time interval between operation request effects may be shortened after a predetermined number of times. May be. However, for example, the time interval between the last operation request effect and the last operation request effect may be longer than the time interval between other operation request effects.

[17. Sugoroku Stage Production]
Below, the production during the Sugoroku stage will be explained. The Sugoroku stage is an example of a specific effect state, and the Sugoroku effect is performed during the change to progress the game. Specifically, a map of Sugoroku is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates during fluctuation, and when the rotation stops, only the number indicated by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, A character drawn on Sugoroku's map advances in a square. The effect indicated by the square where the character has stopped is executed in the change or the change being held.

It should be noted that the rotating operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 does not necessarily have to be performed in all variations. In a variation in which the rotating motion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is not performed, for example, the character does not move the square, that is, stays in the same square. In addition, as a trigger for starting the Sugoroku stage, you may move to the Sugoroku stage with a predetermined probability at the start of fluctuation, or if it is specified that you will stay at the Sugoroku stage for a predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the advantageous gaming state. Alternatively, the process may be performed as a part of the prefetching effect using the above-described pre-determination command.

537 and 538 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect on the Sugoroku stage. (A) is a state immediately before the start of fluctuation. A large decorative pattern is stopped in the center of the effect display device 1600. Nothing is displayed in the Sugoroku square. It is also assumed that there are three pending changes at the time of (A). (B) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. A large decorative pattern starts changing in the center of the effect display device 1600.

In (C), the large decorative pattern in the center of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the small decorative pattern changes in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600. Further, at the timing when the large decorative design is deleted, a display showing the effect contents is displayed in a square. Further, for example, at the timing, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 starts rotating. It should be noted that the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be started at the timing of (B).

In (D), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating. The number of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 located at the uppermost side indicates the number of squares the character advances. In (D), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 indicates “2”.

In (E), the character moves two squares. The "x" in the cell after moving two cells indicates that no special effect is performed. Therefore, no special effect is performed, and the decorative pattern is stopped in (F). When the decorative design is stopped, a large decorative design is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600.

In (G), in the effect display device 1600, the camera that shoots the Sugoroku stage moves so that the character is positioned at the last cell of the suspect cells displayed on the effect display device 1600. Perform the performance. At the end of (G), it is the same as (A). Then, the next fluctuation starts at (H). Details of (H) are the same as those of (B). After that, the same effect is repeated.

(I) is a state in which the final fluctuation of the stage is executed, and the details are the same as in (C). (J) is a continuation state of the final fluctuation. In (J), a raising operation (an operation different from the rotating operation) is performed so as to approach the hold display area (hold display area for the change) in the effect display device 1600 while the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is still rotated. To do. Note that the ascending operation can be executed only in the final fluctuation. When the ascending operation is performed, the content of the cell of Sugoroku changes to one with a high expectation of a big hit. In the state of (I), the contents of the squares that were “x”, “?”, and “x” are all changed to “reach” in the state of (J).

The probability that the ascending operation is performed is set to be higher when the final variation is the out-of-range variation, that is, when the ascending operation is performed. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation be higher than the jackpot expectation when the raising operation is not performed. It should be noted that, as in (K), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may hide a part or the whole of the reserved display area, or it may not be hidden when it comes close to the reserved display area.

Further, the ascending operation may be performed after the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is stopped (that is, after the number is determined). However, it is desirable that the start of the ascending operation is later than the start of the rotating operation in the final fluctuation. As described above, when the ascending operation is performed, the jackpot expectation becomes high, and the player can have an expectation for the ascending operation even after the rotation operation is started.

(K) is a continuation state of the final fluctuation. At (K), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position while rotating. It should be noted that the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may stop rotating and then return to the initial value. In (K), the hold of the hidden hold display area is changed from the normal display to a blue hold display (a hold display having a higher jackpot expectation than the normal hold display).

It should be noted that the rotating operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be executed even in a variation in a rendering state other than the Sugoroku stage, but from the probability that the rotating operation is executed in each of a plurality of continuous variations in the Sugoroku stage, It is desirable that the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of a plurality of continuous fluctuations is set to be lower in the rendering state other than the stage. This is because the player can enjoy Sugoroku more as the character moves more and more squares on the Sugoroku stage.

On the other hand, there may be an effect state in which the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of a plurality of continuous fluctuations is set higher than that of the Sugoroku stage. This is because a player can be provided with a sense of surprise because there is a staging state in which the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310, which seems to be provided for a sugoroku stage, continuously rotates.

Further, although the example in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates is described, an operation of changing the position may be performed instead of an operation of not changing the position such as the rotating operation. For example, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be slightly raised while being rotated (raising width smaller than the raising operation in the final variation).

[18. Specific zone production]
The effect of the specific zone will be described below. Examples of the specific zone include a pine zone and a super pine zone. The pine zone is, for example, a zone that plunges into the Sugoroku stage of the previous chapter. In addition, the super pine zone is, for example, a zone where there is a possibility of rushing in regardless of the stage.

Note that, for example, entry into these specific zones is executed as a look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect is an effect in which an effect suggesting the result of a pending change is executed before the pending change starts. Peripheral control MPU, transmitted from the main control MPU, referring to the special symbol pre-determination command for the suspended special symbol variation, the suspended special symbol variation each hit variation (that is, big hit variation or small hit variation ) Is determined (prefetch determination), and the prefetch effect can be executed based on the determination result.

After entering the pine zone and the super pine zone, the inrush state of these zones continues until the variation corresponding to the prefetch-determined hold (also referred to as the prefetch target variation). It is assumed that there is a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuations corresponding to the pre-determined hold of the pine zone and super pine zone. Further, it is assumed that the expectation of a big hit of the prefetch target change is higher when the user enters the super pine zone than when the player enters the pine zone. It is preferable that the pine zone and the super pine zone in which the newly-held fluctuation is the pre-reading fluctuation are not executed while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed or is being held.

539 and 540 are explanatory views showing an example of a pine zone effect. (A) is a state where the fluctuation during the Sugoroku stage is being executed. The second pending change of the change being executed in (A) is the prefetch target change. From the variation of (A), the prefetching effect for the prefetching target variation is performed. In (A), an effect is performed in which the character is stopped in the square described as "pine zone". (B) is a continuation state of the variation of (A). A display indicating that the player has entered the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (C), the decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. Further, a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone (“in pine zone...”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The change ends in (D). Also in the next variation of (C), for example, effects similar to those of (C) and (D) are executed.

(E) is a state where the prefetch target variation has started. Subsequently, a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (F) is a state in which the reach is established in the variation of the prefetch target. In the state where the reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600.

In this way, when a particular production with a high jackpot expectation such as the timing when the reach is established is being executed, the display indicating that the pine zone is being stayed is erased, so that the pine zone is stayed until then. It is possible to draw attention to the fact that a specific effect is being performed, to a player who paid great attention to being in the middle. Further, if the fact that the player is staying in the pine zone is constantly displayed, the player's tension may continue and he may become tired. It should be noted that the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone may be erased a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, it may be erased every time the execution of the pseudo-relation is confirmed.

In other words, before the SP reach effect (the rock-paper-scissors game effect described later) is started, at a specific timing (when the reach is established, when the pseudo-fixed display is displayed, or when the reach or the pseudo-rean occurs. It is advisable to delete the display indicating that the pine zone is being stayed once, for example, when performing (emphasized) production related to.

In (G), the state in which the reach is applied continues. In (G), the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. (G) is a timing at which the player is waiting for whether or not to develop into SP reach, and at this timing, the player staying in the pine zone with a high expectation for a big hit is re-displayed, so that the player can You can expect to develop into SP reach by remembering that you are in the Matsu Zone.

(H) is a state in which the rock-paper-scissors game production that is SP reach has started. The rock-paper-scissors game production is an SP reach that develops due to changes in the look-ahead targets in the pine zone and super pine zone. The rock-paper-scissors game production is, for example, an extremely high jackpot expectation among SP reach productions (for example, a SP jackpot production which is selected only when the jackpot changes and has the next highest jackpot expectation). Even if you enter the pine zone, the rock-paper-scissors game performance is not always executed, but when you enter the super-pine zone, the rock-paper-scissors game performance is always executed. It has been done.

Further, at the start of the rock-paper-scissors competition production, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the production display device 1600, and is also erased during the rock-paper-scissors competition production. This is because the scissors game production is a performance that has a very high expectation of a big hit, and is intended to draw the player's attention to the scissors game production. For this reason, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is set higher at the start of the rock-paper-scissors competition production than at the time of entering the pine zone.

(I) is a continuation of the Janken game production. The shout of rock-paper-scissors is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (J), a rock-paper-scissors game is being conducted, which is directed to the rock-paper-scissors game. The hand of the teammate character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (J), the state in which the teammate character has won the rock-paper-scissors game against the enemy character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (that is, the variation is a jackpot variation). In (K), the effect display device 1600 informs that the big hit is won, and the decorative design is stopped in the combination of big hits.

541 and 542 are explanatory views showing an example of the super pine zone effect. The entry into the super pine zone is executed, for example, as a pending notice effect. Specifically, for example, the hold is displayed in a mode indicating the possibility of entering the supermatsu zone (hereinafter, also referred to as supermatsu suggestion hold). In addition, a display of a mode in which the hold indicates that the entry into the super pine zone is confirmed (hereinafter, also referred to as a super pine confirmed hold), for example, a hold corresponding to the winning at the time of winning is displayed as a super pine suggestion hold, When the hold in the normal display mode moves, it changes to the supermatsu suggestion hold.

(A) is a state where the fluctuation is being executed and three fluctuations are suspended. (B) is the state of (A), in which the fluctuation is newly suspended. In (B), the time of winning the new hold is the supermatsu suggestive hold (the hold described as “supermatsu?”. If the supermatsu is a confirmed hold, it is described as “supermatsu!”. And may be displayed in a color (for example, red) different from the standard color (for example, white). Chomatsu suggestion suspension is the variation of prefetch target. (C) is a state in which the fluctuation has ended.

(D) is a state in which the next fluctuation has started. (E) is a continuous state of the fluctuation of (D). In (E), the production display device 1600 is executing a dialogue production (“may be the super pine zone...”) that suggests entry into the super pine zone. (F) is the state at the end of the fluctuation. In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays a display (“...”) indicating that the entry into the super pine zone was suggested but the entry into the super pine zone was not possible.

(G) is a state after the next fluctuation of (F) is started. One super pine suggestion hold has moved. In addition, in (G), the line effect (“Is it really a super pine zone!”) suggesting the entry into the super pine zone is displayed again. The serif effect in (G) is an effect that has a higher degree of expectation of entering the super pine zone than the serif effect in (E). In this way, when performing an effect that suggests entry into the super pine zone multiple times, it is desirable that the degree of expectation of entry into the super pine zone is not lowered in the multiple effects.

In (H), the effect display device 1600 displays a display confirming entry into the super pine zone. As in (H), the supermatsu suggested suspension may be changed to the superpine confirmed suspension at this timing. Note that in the example of FIG. 541, the super pine suggestion hold changes to the super pine confirmed hold at the timing when the display confirming that the rush into the super pine zone appears, but the super pine confirmed hold is changed before that timing. Needless to say, may appear. Also, in the example of FIG. 541, the entry into the super pine zone from the suggestion entry to the super pine zone is performed over two variations, but it may be performed once.

In (I), the decorative pattern is displayed in the center, and the effect display device 1600 displays an indication that the user is staying in the super pine zone. Further, the supermatsu fixed hold has been changed to a hold display of a mode with high expectation (red hold display in (I)). For example, in this state, the fluctuation is digested.

(J) is a state in which the change of the prefetch target has started. (K) is a state in which the reach is established in the prefetch target variation. Similar to the pine zone, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600 when the reach is established.

In this way, when a particular production with a high jackpot expectation such as the timing when the reach is established is being executed, the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is erased It is possible to draw attention to the fact that a specific effect is being performed, to a player who paid great attention to being in the middle. Also, if the super pine zone is constantly displayed, the player's tension may continue to be tired. The display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone may be erased a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, it may be erased every time the execution of the pseudo-relation is confirmed.

That is, similar to the pine zone described above, before the SP reach effect (the rock-paper-scissors game effect described above) is started, at a specific timing (at the time when the reach is established, at the time when the pseudo-reliable display is displayed, It is advisable to once erase the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone, for example, when performing (emphasized) production related to the occurrence of reach or pseudo-relation.

In (L), the state where the reach is applied is continued. In (L), similarly to the pine zone, the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. Since the super pine zone is in a state of higher expectation for a big hit than the pine zone, the player can get a feeling of uplifting again by displaying the indication while staying in the super pine zone again.

(M) is a state in which the rock-paper-scissors game production that is SP reach has started. As mentioned above, when you enter the Chomatsu Zone, the rock-paper-scissors game is always executed. In (M), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600 again. As a result, it is possible to strongly appeal to the player that the game has started to be played with rock-paper-scissors.

(N) is the state of continuation of the scissors game production. The shout of rock-paper-scissors is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (N), a display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. As mentioned above, the super pine zone has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pine zone. Therefore, in the rock-paper-scissors game production, the display is performed at the timing when the rock-paper-scissors game is actually performed, so that the player is uplifted by the synergistic effect of the rock-paper-scissors game production and the two highly anticipated productions of super pine zone. You can get a feeling.

In (O), a rock-paper-scissors game, which is a game of scissors, is being held. The hand of the teammate character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (O), the state in which the teammate character has won the rock-paper-scissors game against the enemy character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (that is, it is reported that the variation is a jackpot variation).

In addition, in (O), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is deleted from the effect display device 1600. This is because at the timing when the winning result of the fluctuation is already informed, only the winning result is important to the player, and whether or not the player stays in the Chomatsu zone is not important. In (P), the effect display device 1600 is informed that the big hit has been won, and the decorative design is stopped in the big hit combination.

In addition, although the example where the super pine suggestion hold starts after the super pine suggestion hold has been explained, if the super pine suggestion hold appears but you can not enter the super pine zone, for example, Even during the corresponding fluctuation, although the entry of the Chomatsu Zone is suggested, the production will fail.

Also, in the above-mentioned example, special effects were not executed for fluctuations that were not pre-reading target fluctuations while staying in the pine zone or super pine zone, but in these fluctuations, specific effects (for example, start of rock-paper-scissors competition effects) Continuous production that suggests) may be executed. Further, entry into the pine zone and the super pine zone may be executed by a normal production (a part of the production performed within one variation) that is not the look-ahead production. Specifically, for example, a rush suggestion effect, a rush effect, and a rock-paper-scissors game to the pine zone or the super pine zone may be executed with one change.

Note that, as a general rule, the rush to the pine zone is performed by the character stopping on the square indicating the pine zone on the Sugoroku stage, so unlike the super pine zone, the pine zone may not be indicated by the suspended display. desirable. If you indicate the pine zone with a hold display on the Sugoroku stage, the contents of the Sugoroku grid that have not been displayed until after the start of fluctuation will be suggested by the hold display, which may reduce your enjoyment as a Sugoroku. Because there is.

In the pine zone and the super pine zone described above, for example, an example in which the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone is deleted at the stage when the reach occurs is explained. An image different from the display image (for example, reach enhancement effect) may be displayed so as to overlap on the higher priority side. The point is that the player can not recognize the display indicating that he is staying in the pine zone or super pine zone (or, although they are displayed in an overlapping manner, that he is staying in the pine zone or super pine zone, very slightly). Is visible).

[19. Hold peeping production]
Hereinafter, the hold peep effect, which is an example of the hold notice effect, will be described. FIG. 543 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the reserved look-in effect. (A) is a state where the variation is being executed. Three variations are withheld in (A). In (B), the character appears from below the effect display device 1600, and one of the reserved display areas is displayed without hiding the reserved display (the reserved display located at the center of the lower part of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the currently executed change. Part (a part is to completely hide a predetermined number (for example, one) of the four reservations, and/or a part to be hidden for each of the four reservations (that is, a display of all four reservations is completely reserved). It is hidden). The character may hide the entire reserved display area. Moreover, you may hide the hold display (the hold display located in the lower center of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the variation that the character is currently executing.

In (C), the character disappears from the effect display device 1600, and a part of the hold display hidden by the character (the third hold in FIG. 543) is changed to a hold display with a high expectation green hold display. Is changing. (D) is the end of the fluctuation. The decorative pattern is stopped by a combination indicating that the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation. As in the example of FIG. 543, when only the on-hold display that is on hold is hidden, it is desirable that the on-hold peep effect is executed only when the change in execution is a deviation change.

In addition, in the case where the normal look-out variation pattern (a variation pattern in which a special effect such as reach effect is not performed has a long variation time (for example, about 10 seconds)) is selected, the suspended peep effect is executed. At the start of fluctuation, the character does not appear at the start of fluctuation as in the example of FIG. 543, but appears after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of fluctuation. Also, in the case of a shortened variation pattern (a variation pattern in which a special production such as a reach production is not performed, the variation time is short (for example, less than 10 seconds)), when the hold peep production is executed, when the variation starts or The character may appear after an extremely short time (a time shorter than 3 seconds described above) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 0.5 seconds later).

Further, before (B), a stirrer effect of the reserved look-in effect may be performed. In the stirrup production, specifically, for example, a character appears on the production display device 1600 to approach the hold display area but does not hide the hold display area. In addition, although the stirrer effect is performed, the character may then disappear without hiding the hold display area. In the above-described shortened variation pattern, since the variation time is short, it is desirable that the fanning effect is not performed or is performed in a short time (for example, about 1 second). Moreover, when such a stirrup effect is performed and the character hides the hold display area, the hold display may be changed without fail.

Also, in the example of FIG. 543, a part of the hold display hidden by the character has changed, but there may be a pattern in which all the hold displays change, or a pattern in which all the hold displays do not change. May be.

Even if the hold display of a color having the same jackpot expectation degree, for example, the jackpot expectation degree is higher when the hold peep effect is used than when the hold peep effect is not passed. To do. As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling when the suspended look-in effect is executed. On the contrary, even if the hold display of the color having the same jackpot expectation degree, the jackpot expectation degree may be higher when the hold peep effect is not passed than when the hold peep effect is passed. .. Expectations of the player in the holding peep effect where the big hit expectation degree is suppressed with a high probability or the hold display always changes at the time of occurrence, and the normal hold color change production where the occurrence is unpredictable but the big hit expectation degree is high You can balance the feeling.

Further, as in the example of FIG. 543, it is desirable to notify that the hold display changes in the effect display device 1600 by the fact that the character has retreated from the hold display. If the character suggests that there is a change in the reserved color or the changed reserved color before the character retreats, the period during which the player feels nervous in the reserved peep effect is shortened, and the interest is reduced. Because.

However, for example, a luminous body different from the effect display device 1600 (for example, a lamp or LED mounted on the front wall portion 2101 of the starting opening unit 2100 or a lamp or LED provided near the starting opening unit 2100). In the case where the effect display device 1600 emits light in the same color as the reserved color displayed on the effect display device 1600, before the character retreats on the effect display device 1600 (that is, before the changed reserved color is displayed), May be made to emit light in the reserved color. Normally, the player mainly executes the game while looking at the effect display device 1600. However, the player can have a sense of expectation by feeling an abnormality caused by a slight change in the color of the light-emitting body that is in sight. ..

Since the purpose is to make the player recognize the change in the color of the light emitting body before the change in the hold color of the effect display device 1600, an effect (control for changing) the hold color of the effect display device 1600 is made. The timing of execution is before the timing of performing the effect of changing the color of the light emitter, or even at the same timing, the player is notified by the change of the color of the light emitter before the change of the reserved color of the effect display device 1600. If it can be recognized, there is no problem.

In addition, immediately before the light-emitting body emits light, or immediately before the emission color of the light-emitting body is changed, the light-emitting body may emit light in a holding color (for example, white) in a normal display mode. Specifically, for example, when the hold color of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 changes from blue to green, the emission color of the light-emitting body changes from blue to white before the change of the hold color on the effect display device 1600. , And then changes from white to green. In addition, although the example in which the holding color in the normal display mode is white has been described, the color is not limited to white, and there is no problem as long as it is a color that is not likely to be selected as the holding color after promotion in this holding change effect. Further, when displaying white, there is no problem whether it is lit or blinking. If it is lit, the liquid crystal can be watched, and if it is blinking, it can be appealed that the pending change is being performed.

In such a case, it is desirable that the time during which the emission color of the light-emitting body emits white light is extremely short (for example, shorter than the shortest variation pattern among all the variation patterns). This is because if the light-emitting body emits white light for a long time, the player may misunderstand that the pending display changes to white, which has a low expectation of a big hit.

In addition, when the hold display mode in the effect display device 1600 is a hold of a special mode that cannot be expressed only by the color (for example, super-pine suggestion hold as described above), the light-emitting body is, for example, in the effect display device 1600. Light emission by a color that is not used in the held color change (for example, when white, blue, green, red, or iridescent held color change can be performed in the effect display device 1600, the light emitter emits purple). Alternatively, the hold display mode is expressed by executing light emission in a predetermined pattern. The light emission of the predetermined pattern includes, for example, a pattern in which red flashes and a pattern in which red and green are alternately emitted.

Further, in the example of FIG. 543, a series of effects in which the character hides the hold display and evacuates is performed only once, but the effect may be performed multiple times. When the effect is performed a plurality of times, the mode of the hold display may change each time, the mode of the hold display may change at least once, or the mode of the hold display may not change even once. Good.

Moreover, it is desirable that the holding peep effect is performed only for the holding of special figure 1. When the game is being advanced mainly due to fluctuations in Toku-zu 2, for example, a very short fluctuation time is often selected, such as a time saving state, so it is necessary to execute the holding peep effect at high speed. This is because it may confuse the player.

In addition, a plurality of types of characters may exist in the pending look-in effect. The expectations of the plurality of characters may be different, or the expectations of some or all of the characters may be common. The expectation level may be a hold change expectation level in the hold peep effect, or may be a big hit expectation level in the pending change. Specifically, for example, the holding expectation degree becomes higher in the order of the character A, the character B, and the character C, and the character C is selected only when the holding change is executed. Further, for example, although the character B has a higher pending change expectation than the character A, the character A may have a higher jackpot expectation when the pending change occurs than the character B. Further, the character A and the character B may have the same hold change expectation degree and the big hit expectation degree, and the character C may be set to have the hold change expectation degree and the big hit expectation degree higher than those of the character A and the character B.

Although it is desirable that the pending look-in effect be performed only when the variation during execution is out of reach, the variation during execution is a non-reach variation or a reach variation where the jackpot expectation is not high (for example, out of normal reach). It is more desirable that the holding look-in effect is performed only in the case of (variation etc.). In other words, it is desirable that the pending look-in effect does not occur not only when the change in execution is a big hit change but also when a reach effect having a high expectation of a big hit such as SP reach is executed.

If an on-hold peep effect occurs during a change in SP reach, the player thinks that the on-hold change has a higher expectation than the currently executed change, and the SP concerned This is because expectations for reach may be weakened.

[20. Still image production]
The still image effect will be described below. The still image effect is an effect in which a dynamic display is displayed in parallel with the display of the still image on the effect display device 1600. The still image during the still image effect may be an image (for example, an object (sprite) such as a character image or a background image) that has been displayed as a dynamic display until just before the start of the still image effect. Alternatively, it may be a still image whose display is started at the same time when the still image effect is started. When the still image effect is finished, the still image is released from stillness, and the still image is changed to a dynamic display. Further, when the still image effect is finished, the still image may be erased and a new dynamic display may be displayed.

Note that the image stillness in this chapter includes not only complete stillness but also modes sufficient to make the player recognize that the image is still. Specifically, for example, a mode in which the image (object) is slightly shaken, a mode in which an effect is applied to the image (object), a mode in which the image (object) is slightly enlarged or reduced, etc. include.

[20-1. Rocket production]
544, 545, and 546 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the rocket effect. The rocket effect is an example of the SP reach effect in which the still image effect may be executed.

When the rocket effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, starts, in (A), a display indicating that the rocket effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (B), an image of a character A (a character with a white head in the figure), a line "Ignition line ignition!" by the character A, and a rocket that ignites the ignition line are displayed on the effect display device 1600. ..

In (C), the image of the character A is erased from the effect display device 1600. Further, in (C), the squib is shorter than in the state of (B) (that is, a spark is traveling on the squib). In (D), the character A is displayed again on the effect display device 1600, and a dialogue by the character A that "the fuel is insufficient! The rocket cannot be fired as it is!" is further displayed. Further, in (D), the squib is shorter than that in (C).

In (E), an image of the character B (a character with a black head in the figure) and a line by the character B, "Replenish fuel by the time the spark reaches the rocket!", are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Has been done. Further, in (E), the squib is shorter than in the state of (D).

In (F), the image of the character B and the line "I will arrive in 5 seconds!" by the character B are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (F), the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a mode in which the rocket is zoomed up near the squib, and the squib is shorter than in the state of (E). In addition, until (M) described later, the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a zoomed-up state near the squib.

In (G), the effect display device 1600 displays the line "Refill in 3 seconds!" and the image in which the character A tries to lift the fuel. The image “Replenish in 3 seconds!” is displayed until the end of FIG. 545 (N) described later. In (G), the squib is shorter than that in (F). That is, from the start of (B) to the start of (G), sparks proceed along the squib and the squib is gradually shortened. On the other hand, from the start of (G) to the end of (M) described later (immediately before the timing of informing the special lottery result), a still image effect in which the image of the fuse and the spark is stationary is executed.

In (H), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of the character A lifting fuel. In (I), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of the character A trying to throw fuel. In FIG. 545(J), an image in which the character A throws fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (K), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of the character A trying to lift fuel. In (L), an image in which the character A lifts fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The images of the character A and the fuel in (K) and (L) are the same as the images of the character A and the fuel in FIGS. 544 (G) and (H), respectively.

That is, between FIG. 544(G) and FIG. 545(J), a series of effects in which the character A tries to lift fuel, lifts fuel, tries to throw fuel, and throws fuel are repeated. The series of effects for the second time starts from FIG. 545 (K), and the series of effects ends midway through (L).

In (M), the images of the character A and the fuel are erased from the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 displays a rocket image in which the spark and the fuse are stationary. In (N), the stillness of the still image is released, sparks reach the rocket from the fuse, and the image that the rocket is successfully launched, that is, the image that notifies that the special lottery result is a big hit is the effect display device 1600. Is displayed in. In (O), the effect display device 1600 displays an image display for notifying that the special lottery result “big hit! Congratulations!” is a big hit.

FIG. 546 is an example of the final stage of the rocket effect when the special lottery result is out of alignment. In FIG. 546(N′) following FIG. 545(M), an image in which sparks disappear in the middle of the fuse and the rocket fails to fire, that is, an image notifying that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is displayed. In (O′), an image is displayed although it indicates that the special lottery result “sorry...” is out of order. Even if the special lottery result is a big hit, at the timing of FIG. 545(N), even if an image notifying that the special lottery result is out is displayed as shown in FIG. 546(N′). Of course, after that, a revival effect (for example, an effect as shown in FIG. 545(N) or a revival-only effect) may be performed.

The display mode of the character A and the fuel, which is a dynamic display during the still image presentation, may suggest the special lottery result. Specifically, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, compared to the case where the special lottery result is a big hit, the characters such as "chance" on the clothes worn by the character A during the still image production. Is preferably displayed, or the fuel is displayed in a specific color (for example, red) in the still image effect, and it is desirable that the selection ratio of the effect is high.

Further, although an example in which a plurality of dynamic displays (character A and fuel) are displayed on the production display device 1600 during the still image performance is shown, the number of dynamic displays may be one. Further, when a plurality of dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image effect, the satisfaction of a specific condition during the still image effect (for example, the game ball B enters a predetermined winning opening) is satisfied. The number of dynamic displays may be increased in response to this.

Specifically, for example, during static image presentation, each time a game ball B enters the predetermined prize hole, a character that supports the character A is additionally displayed one by one with a predetermined number (for example, five) as an upper limit. May be done. The additionally displayed character, for example, repeats the support effect, which is an example of a series of effects including a plurality of effect elements, one or more times. Note that, similarly to the repetition of the series of effects shown in FIGS. 544 and 545, the support effect may be ended in the middle of the series of effects (for example, the support effect starts from effect A, effect B, effect C). In the case of a series of effects executed in this order, the support effect may end after execution of effect A or effect B in the Nth (N is a natural number) series of repeated effects).

In addition, when a plurality of characters are additionally displayed, it is desirable that the timing of the support effect by the plurality of characters be synchronized. That is, when a new character is additionally displayed, the cheering effect for the new character starts in a state of being synchronized with the schedule of the cheering effect being executed by the already displayed additional display character. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the character is additionally displayed, and can also draw the player's attention to the support effect by the plurality of characters. Further, in addition to or instead of the additional display, a display indicating the number of additional displayed characters or the number of characters to be additionally displayed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Of the dynamic displays during the still image effect, it is desirable that only the one that has been displayed since the start of the still image effect (that is, the character A and the fuel) indicates the special lottery result. That is, it is desirable that the dynamic display added after the above-described specific condition is satisfied after the start of the still image effect does not suggest the special lottery result. This is because the player may be confused if all of these dynamic displays suggest a special lottery result.

In addition, it is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image effect is displayed in a portion other than the central portion such as a corner of the effect display device 1600 (the lower right corner in the examples of FIGS. 544 and 545). Further, it is desirable that the display size of the dynamic display during the still image effect is smaller than the display size of the still image (the rocket including the fuse and the spark in the examples of FIGS. 544 and 545). The reason for notifying the result of the special lottery is that the rocket after the stationary state is released is to the utmost so that the rocket is attracted attention rather than the dynamic display.

It should be noted that the colors of the title display in FIG. 544(A) (“Let the rocket fire! Big hit with successful launch!”), for example, white, red, iridescent, are prepared, and white <red <rainbow The expectations may be increased in order. Also, a plurality of title display types may be provided even when the still image effect is not executed. For example, the jackpot expectation is 1% for white that does not execute still image effects, 5% for red that does not execute, 100% for rainbow that does not execute, 10% for white that is executed, and 20% for red that is executed. It is recommended that the rainbow be 100%. If the red color is the same when the still image effect is executed and when it is not executed, the red color when the still image effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation.

Further, when comparing the white when the still image effect is executed and the red when the still image effect is not executed, white when the still image effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation. In other words, the big hit expectation degree is indicated by the title display color and the presence/absence of the still image effect. However, the still image effect has a larger contribution to the big hit expectation degree, so that the still image effect is higher in the upper title display color. The big hit expectation degree may be higher when the still image effect is executed with a lower title display color than when it is not executed. By doing so, even if white is displayed in the title display that is displayed before the still image effect is executed, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment.

In addition, it is desirable not to perform the light emission of the lamp, the output of the sound from the speaker, the operation of the movable body, etc. in accordance with the dynamic display during the still image presentation. The reason for notifying the result of the special lottery is that the rocket after the stationary state is released is to the utmost so that the rocket is attracted attention rather than the dynamic display.

The outline of the rocket effect described with reference to FIGS. 544 to 546 is summarized as follows. First, a dynamic effect is performed in which a spark advances along a squib and the squib of the rocket is gradually shortened, and then the squib and the spark are stationary (the rocket is also stationary). Then, the dynamic effect of the character A and the fuel is executed while the squib and the spark are stationary. Then, the static effect of the character A and the fuel is terminated at the same time that the squib and the stillness of the spark are released, and the effect (the success or failure of the rocket launch effect) of notifying the special lottery result is executed.

FIG. 547 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the schedule of the dynamic effect of the character A and the fuel after the still image effect is started in the rocket effect. Each element in FIG. 547 shows the elements of the series of effects described above. Element 1 is a state in which the character A is trying to lift fuel as shown in FIG. 544(G), and element 2 is a state in which the character A is lifting fuel as shown in FIG. 544(H). Element 3 is a state in which the character A tries to throw fuel as in FIG. 544(I), and element 4 is a state in which the character A throws fuel as in FIG. 545(J).

Pattern A is an effect pattern in which elements 1 and 2 are executed after the first series of effects, and then a rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect (that is, an effect of notifying the special lottery result) is executed. is there. In the above-described FIGS. 544 to 546, the effect of the pattern A is executed.

The pattern B is an effect pattern in which the element 1 and the element 2 are executed after the second series of effects, and then the rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect is executed. The pattern C is an effect pattern in which the element 1 and the element 2 are executed after the third series of effects, and then the rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect is executed.

That is, the patterns A, B, and C are effect patterns in which a series of effects ends halfway and a rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect is executed. On the other hand, the pattern D is a production pattern in which the launch success effect or the launch failure effect of the rocket is executed after the series of effects of exactly five times. In this respect, since the pattern D is different from the patterns A, B, and C, the case where the pattern D is selected is better than the case where the patterns A, B, and C are selected. However, it is desirable that the selection rate of each pattern be set so that the jackpot expectation is high. If the big hit expectation degree of the pattern D having the longest still image production time is low, the special lottery result is highly likely to be out of place in the still image production even though the player has long expected. This is because the situation that often discourages the player occurs frequently. Further, the pattern D may be set so as to be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit.

Further, since the time for producing a still image becomes longer in the order of pattern A<pattern B<pattern C, for example, the jackpot expectation becomes higher in the order of pattern A<pattern B<pattern C (≦pattern D). It is desirable that the selection rate of each pattern be set. If the big hit expectation of a pattern with a long still image production time is low, in the still image production, there is a high possibility that the special lottery result will be off even though the player has expected for a long time. This is because the situation that often discourages people frequently occurs.

As described above, in any of the effect patterns, a series of effects is executed once or more during the still image effect. As a result, since the stillness is not released until at least one series of effects has proceeded once, the player can prepare for the effects for which the special lottery result is informed during that time, and by extension, the player's mind. It is possible to suppress excessive tension.

On the other hand, as described above, a plurality of effect patterns in which the number of times of a series of executed effects is different are predetermined. As a result, it is difficult for the player to predict at which timing the special lottery result notification will be performed after the series of effects has proceeded once, so that the player will feel a sense of tension after proceeding once. Can be provided. That is, by predefining the effect pattern shown in FIG. 547, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate sense of tension during the still image effect.

Although it is difficult to predict at which timing the effect of notifying the special lottery result will be executed, as shown in FIG. 547, the timing of executing the effect of notifying the special lottery result is set as a specific timing. ing. In the example of FIG. 547, this is after element 2 or element 4 is executed. If there is a possibility that the special lottery result will be notified after all the elements (1 to 4), the tension will continue to be sustained and the player will be tired. This can happen.

Note that all the effect patterns shown in FIG. 547 repeatedly execute a series of effects starting from element 1 and then proceeding in the order of element 2, element 3, and element 4, but a series of repeated effects. There may be an effect pattern in which the order of elements in or the element at the start is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 547. Specifically, for example, there may be an effect pattern that repeats a series of effects that proceed in the order of element 3, element 4, element 1, and element 2. Further, for example, there may be an effect pattern in which a series of effects that proceed in the order of element 4, element 2, element 1, element 3 are repeated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, an example in which the still image effect is executed during the SP reach is explained, but for example, the still image effect is performed before the reach state is reached (that is, during the variable display of all the decorative symbols). May be performed, or the still image effect may be performed after the reach state is reached and before the SP reach is started. A still image effect may be executed as an effect that suggests that the reach state is reached, or a still image effect that is an effect that suggests that SP reach starts after the reach state and before the start of SP reach. May be performed. In addition, a series of effects may be started before the still image effect is performed (for example, the series of effects may be executed one or more times before the start of the still image effect, or the first time). Still image production may start during the series of production).

[20-2. Battle production]
548, 549, and 550 are explanatory views showing an example of the battle effect. The battle effect is an example of the SP reach effect in which the still image effect may be executed. When the battle effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, starts, in (A), a display indicating that the battle effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (B), the main character (white character) and the enemy character (black character) are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), the protagonist and the dialogue of the protagonist are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), the enemy character and the dialogue of the enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (E), an image in which the main character and the enemy character jump at each other is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the hero and the enemy character attack each other in the air. In (G), an image of the main character and the enemy character landing is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

From the start of (G) to the end of FIG. 549 (J) described later (immediately before the timing of the special lottery result notification), a still image effect in which the images of the main character and the enemy character are stationary is executed. In (H), the images of the main character and the enemy character are stationary. Further, in (H), an image of a ally character (characters shaded with diagonal lines) in which an adhesive plaster (the character "bond" in the circle) is put in the first aid box is displayed.

In (I), the images of the main character and the enemy character are still still. In addition, in (I), the image of the teammate character who has the bandage (the character "bukuro" in the circle) in the first aid box is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 549(J), the images of the main character and the enemy character are still still. Further, in (J), the image of the teammate character who has tweezers (the letter "pi" in the circle) in the first aid box is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (K), the effect display device 1600 displays an image of a teammate character who has gauze (the character "ga" in a circle) in the first aid box. In (K), before the ally character finishes putting the gauze in the first aid box, that is, before the series of effects in which the ally character puts things in the first aid box ends, the stillness of the image of the enemy character is released and the hero stands. The effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the enemy character is lying down and a display indicating that the hero has won. In addition, in (K), the stillness of the image of the enemy character may be released after the ally character finishes putting the gauze in the first aid box.

In the example of FIG. 549, the image of the main character in (J) is the same as the image of the main character in (K) (the pose has not changed), and the main character remains stationary from (J) to (K). , The hero may also be released from stillness. In (L), the effect display device 1600 displays “Big hit! Congratulations!” to inform that the special lottery result is a big hit.

Like the battle production, you can give the player a sense of tension by executing the still image production immediately before notifying the special lottery result, but since the player does not know when the stillness will be released, the still image production is in progress. You must be nervous through. Therefore, the dynamic display during the still image effect can distract the player, which in turn can relieve the tension.

In addition, the player who sees the still image effect in the battle effect learns that the special lottery result is notified just before the ally character, which is a dynamic display, finishes putting the gauze in the first aid box, so that the same effect is given again. When executed, the production can be enjoyed without excessive tension until the teammate character starts putting the gauze in the first aid kit.

In addition, when the dynamic display during the still image effect is a specific mode, the mode of the dynamic display may be selected so that the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit is high. Specifically, for example, in the case where the bandage in (I) is red, compared to the case where the bandage is white, the special selection result is a big hit. Is set.

However, if the selection rate of the particular aspect is high, the jackpot expectation degree due to the appearance of the dynamic display itself in the still image effect is high, and the player's interest in the appearance of the particular aspect is diminished. Therefore, the appearance rate of the particular aspect becomes low (for example, 1/4 or less) when the dynamic display during the still image production appears, and the particular aspect is achieved even if the special lottery result is a big hit. It is desirable that the selection ratio of is set to be low (for example, 1/2 or less).

Also, a plurality of dynamic displays may be displayed during the still image effect. When a plurality of dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image performance, it is necessary to satisfy the satisfaction of a specific condition during the still image performance (for example, the game ball B enters a predetermined winning opening). The number of dynamic displays may be increased at the occasion.

Specifically, for example, each time a game ball B enters the predetermined winning opening during the still image presentation, one teammate character may be additionally displayed with a predetermined number of people (for example, five people) as an upper limit. .. The additionally displayed teammate character also produces the same effect as that of the teammate character in FIGS. 548(H) to 549(K), for example. In addition, when a plurality of teammate characters are displayed, it is desirable that the effects by the plurality of teammate characters are synchronized. That is, when a new teammate character is additionally displayed, the support effect for the new teammate character starts in a state of being synchronized with the schedule of the support effect that is being executed by the teammate character that is already displayed. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the character is additionally displayed, and can also draw the player's attention to the support effect by the plurality of characters.

Of the dynamic displays during still image effects, it is desirable that only the teammate character that has been displayed since the start of the still image effects is the one that indicates the special lottery result. That is, it is desirable that the dynamic display added after the above-described specific condition is satisfied after the start of the still image effect does not suggest the special lottery result. This is because the player may be confused if all of these dynamic displays suggest a special lottery result.

In addition, it is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image effect is displayed at a position other than the central portion of the effect display device 1600 (in the lower right corner in the examples of FIGS. 548 and 549). Further, it is desirable that the display size of the dynamic display during the still image effect is smaller than the display size of the still image (the hero and the enemy character in FIGS. 548 and 549). The reason why the special lottery result is notified is only to attract attention to the enemy character and the hero after the stillness is released.

In addition, it is desirable not to perform the light emission of the lamp, the output of the sound from the speaker, the operation of the movable body, etc. in accordance with the dynamic display during the still image presentation. The reason why the special lottery result is notified is only to attract attention to the enemy character and the hero after the stillness is released.

In addition, the dynamic display by the teammate character in FIGS. 548(H) to 549(K) may be executed before the start of the still image effect. As a result, the player can confirm the dynamic display by the teammate character before the still image effect is started, and the special lottery result is given to the player who has seen the still image effect during the battle effect in the past. It can remind you of the timing of notification.

Although it is difficult to predict at which timing the effect of notifying the special lottery result will be executed, the effect of notifying the special lottery result is the same as in the series of rocket effect and schedule (FIG. 547). The timing of execution is defined as a specific timing. For example, the special lottery result is notified immediately before the teammate character finishes bandaging the first aid box or immediately before the teammate character finishes bandaging the gauze. If there is a possibility that a special lottery result will be announced just before the end of all the elements, the tension will continue and the player may be tired. is there.

Note that, for example, like the dynamic display during the still image effect of the rocket effect, the dynamic display of the teammate character during the still image effect may be an effect in which a series of effects is repeated one or more times. Specifically, for example, an ally character puts a bandage on the first aid box, an ally character puts a bandage on the first aid box, an ally character puts tweezers on the first aid box, and an ally character puts gauze on the first aid box. A series of effects executed in this order may be repeatedly executed one or more times.

In addition, for example, white, red, and iridescent colors are prepared for the title display (“Win the enemy character! Win big!”) in FIG. 548(A). The expectations may be increased in order. Also, a plurality of title display types may be provided even when the still image effect is not executed. For example, the jackpot expectation is 1% for white that is not executed as a still image, 5% for red that is not executed, 100% for a rainbow that is not executed, 10% for white that is executed, and 20% for red that is executed for still image. , The rainbow to be executed is 100%. When the static image effect is executed and when it is the same red color, the red when the still image effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation, and when the still image effect is executed. When white is compared with red when the still image effect is not executed, white when the still image effect is executed has higher jackpot expectation. By doing so, even if white is displayed in the title display that is displayed before the still image effect is executed, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment.

In addition, a series of effects by the teammate character may start before the still image effect is performed (for example, the series of effects may be executed one or more times before the start of the still image effect). The still image effect may start during the first series of effects).

FIG. 550 is an example of an effect when the still image effect is not executed during the battle effect. Following FIG. 548(G), the process proceeds to FIG. 550(H′). In (H′), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the image of the enemy character is released from static, the enemy character is falling while the hero is standing, and that the hero has won. Further, in (H'), an image of a teammate character who puts a bandage in the first aid box similar to that in FIG. 548 (H) is displayed.

In (I′), the effect display device 1600 continuously displays an image in which the enemy character is falling while the hero is standing and that the hero has won. Further, in (I'), an image of a teammate character who has a bandage on the first aid box similar to that in FIG. 548(I) is displayed.

In (J′), an image in which the enemy character is falling while the main character is standing and that the main character has won are continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (J′), an image of a teammate character who has tweezers put in an emergency box similar to that in FIG. 549(J) is displayed.

In (K'), the effect display device 1600 continuously displays an image in which the enemy character is falling while the hero is standing and that the hero has won. Further, in (K′), an image of a teammate character who puts gauze in the first aid box similar to that in FIG. 549(K) is displayed. Subsequently, in (L′), the same display as in FIG. 549(L) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Thus, the presence of the still image effect during the battle effect and the case where the still image effect is not performed can increase the timing of giving the player a sense of tension.

The example in which the still image effect is executed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle effect and the example in which the still image effect is not executed are described. However, as in the examples of FIG. 548, FIG. 549, and FIG. The dynamic effect during the still image effect when it is performed (the effect that the ally character puts an object in the first aid box) and the dynamic effect that is executed after the special lottery result notification when the still image effect is not performed are common. Is desirable.

Since these are common, for example, a player who has seen a dynamic effect executed after the special lottery result notification when the still image effect is not performed is notified by the dynamic effect and the special lottery result. Since the simultaneity is stored, it is possible to more strongly recognize that the special lottery result will be notified soon when the dynamic effect during the still image effect is viewed. In addition, since the player who has seen the dynamic effect during the still image effect remembers that the special lottery result will be notified after the dynamic effect is started, the player will not receive the special effect without the still image effect. If the dynamic effect is executed after being notified that there is a deviation in the lottery result, the true special lottery result may be notified after the dynamic effect (that is, the revival effect may be performed). You can have a sense of expectation.

In addition, the selection rate of the effect is set so that the jackpot expectation degree when the still image effect is performed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle effect is higher than the jackpot expectation degree when the still image effect is not performed. It is desirable that the Since the still image effect is an effect that gives the player a feeling of tension, it is possible to provide the player with many situations in which a big hit is reported in exchange for the feeling of tension. Conversely, the jackpot expectation when the still image effect is performed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle effect is higher than the jackpot expectation when the still image effect is not performed, the effect selection rate is It may be set. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a large number of situations in which a big hit is notified and a feeling of uplifting is obtained at a stretch when a still image effect is not performed and a feeling of tension is not felt so much.

In addition, when the still image effect is not executed and the special lottery result is out of alignment, in FIG. 550 (H′), it is shown that the main character is falling while the enemy character is standing and that the main character is defeated. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and continues until FIG. 550 (K′). Even if the hero is defeated, the dynamic display of putting an object in the first aid box by the teammate character as in FIGS. 550(H') to (K') is executed.

Further, when the still image effect is executed and the special lottery result is out of alignment, in FIG. 549(K), when the ally character finishes putting the gauze in the first aid box, the still image of the hero is released, and the enemy An image in which the hero is falling while the character is standing and a display showing that the hero is defeated are displayed on the effect display device 1600. After that, the dynamic display in which the ally character puts an object in the first aid box is continuously executed while the image in which the main character is falling is displayed while the enemy character is standing.

The continuously executed dynamic display is, for example, a series of effects in FIGS. 548(H) to 549(K) or a series of effects repeatedly executed. In this case, for example, the size of the dynamic display of the teammate character is not changed until the series of effects is completed at least once, and the size of the dynamic display of the teammate character is exceeded at a predetermined timing exceeding once. To increase. After that, the series of effects is ended, and, for example, an image in which the ally character is treating the hero is displayed, and the decorative pattern of the combination of the alien characters is displayed.

In addition, when the still image effect during the battle effect is performed, in FIG. 549(K), the main character is falling while the enemy character is standing and the main character is in spite of the special lottery result being a big hit. May be displayed on the effect display device 1600, which indicates that the player has been defeated. That is, an effect may be executed to make the player once think that the special lottery result is out of order.

In this case, similar to the effect in which the special lottery result is out of alignment, for example, following FIG. 549(K), for example, an image in which the hero is falling while the enemy character is standing and a display indicating that the hero is defeated are displayed. And are continuously displayed, and the effect by the teammate character is also continued. For example, after a lapse of a predetermined time after the main character falls down, a revival effect is performed to notify that the special lottery result is a big hit. In the revival effect, for example, an image in which the ally character is treating the hero is displayed, and the hero makes a guts pose while falling.

The revival effect may be performed, for example, at a predetermined timing when the size of the teammate character, which is a dynamic display, has not changed, or at a predetermined timing after the size of the teammate character has increased. May be. It is also possible to select one of these two types of timings in accordance with a predetermined selection rate and set the revival effect to be executed at the selected timing. In this case, it is desirable that the selectivities of the two types of timing be different. When the revival effect is executed at a timing when the selection rate is low, the player can be surprised and the player's uplifting feeling can be improved at once. It should be noted that although two types of timing have been described, there may be two or more types of timing.

Note that the series of effects executed in the battle effect may be ended in the middle of the series of effects. Specifically, for example, the above-mentioned ally character puts a bandage on the first aid box (element 1), the ally character puts a bandage on the first aid box (element 2), and the ally character puts tweezers on the first aid box ( Element 3), an effect in which the teammate character puts gauze in the first aid box (element 4), in the order of execution, element 1, element in the Nth (N is a natural number) repetition of the series of effects. The series of effects may be ended immediately after the execution of 2 or the element 3.

551 and 552 are explanatory views showing another example of the battle effect. Differences from FIGS. 549 and 550 will be described. In FIGS. 551 and 552, a timer effect is added. 551(A) to (F) are the same as the effect contents other than the timer effect, respectively, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In (A), for example, a timer is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the start of the battle effect, that is, the start of the title display, and the timer value starts to decrease. A timer is a dynamic display in which the timer value decreases over time. The initial value of the timer in (A) is 30 seconds. The timer is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device 1600, but may be displayed at another position as long as the player can recognize the content of the battle effect.

In (A) to (E), the timer value decreases with the passage of time. In (E), the timer value becomes 0 seconds. In (F), the display "Maybe..." is displayed in the area where the timer value was displayed.

The still image effect starts from (G). In (G), in the area where the timer value was displayed, a display of "heat or intense heat?" indicating the expectation of a big hit in the special lottery result is displayed. In (H), a display of "intense heat!" indicating that the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit is very high is displayed in the area where the timer value was displayed. The display of the area where the timer was displayed in (F) to (H) is an expectation suggestion display that suggests the jackpot expectation of the special lottery result. The expectation indication may not necessarily be displayed in the area where the timer was displayed.

Further, from (F) to (H), the expectation suggestion display changes across the start of the still image effect. The expectation level indication display maintains a dynamic display before and after the start of the still image effect. It should be noted that the expectation display may have different display areas and display contents as long as the player can recognize that the display is within the timer effect.

It should be noted that the light emission mode of each lamp when the expectation suggestion display is performed may be a light emission mode corresponding to the expectation suggestion display, or the expectation degree from the start of the expectation suggestion display to the start of the still image production. In the light emission mode corresponding to the suggestion display effect, light emission corresponding to the still image effect may be performed after the still image effect is started.

In the example of FIG. 551, the expectation suggestion display changes over the start of the still image effect, but the timer value may decrease over the start of the still image effect. That is, the start timing of the decrease of the timer value may be before the start of the still image effect, and the timing when the timer value is 0 seconds may be after the start of the still image effect. In this case, the timer display maintains the dynamic display before and after the start of the still image effect.

It should be noted that the light emission mode of the various lamps when the timer display is performed over the start of the still image effect may be a light emission mode corresponding to the timer display, or from the start of the timer display until the start of the still image effect. In the light emission mode corresponding to the timer display effect, light may be emitted corresponding to the still image effect after the still image effect is started.

Subsequently, in (I), the expectation indication indicating that the dynamic display is maintained over the start of the still image effect is erased, and the timer effect ends. That is, the display is the same as when the timer effect is not executed. That is, the timer effect is finished during the still image effect before notifying the special lottery result. Since the notification of the special lottery result after the still image effect is more important to the player than the expectation indication, it is possible to end the timer effect before the notification and concentrate the player on the still image effect. desirable.

In addition, the expectation suggestion display, which is a dynamic display, is executed over the start time of the still image effect, but the still image effect is more effective than the time from the start of the expectation suggestion display to the start of the still image effect. It is desirable that the time from the start to the end of the expectation indication is short. Although the special lottery result will be notified when the still image effect is finished, if the expectation suggestion display is running for a long time as a dynamic display even after the still image effect is started, the player's attention will be the expectation suggestion display. This is because there is a risk that the tension caused by the still image effect may be excessively reduced.

552(J) to (M) are the same as those in FIGS. 548(I) to 549(L), respectively, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

Note that the sound output from the various speakers in response to the expectation indication is one shot (that is, the sound that is output only once without being repeated), and after the output of this one shot is completed (player However, after the sound of one shot is no longer heard), the still image effect ends, the dynamic display starts, and the special lottery result is shown.

Note that the timer effect may end before the start of the still image effect, that is, in the state where the dynamic display is being performed, without the timer effect straddling the start of the still image effect. Specifically, for example, the timer value becomes 0 seconds before FIG. 551(H), the expectation suggestion display is displayed from FIG. 551(H) to (I), and the expectation suggestion display is displayed. Image production may be started.

However, the jackpot expectation when the timer effect is finished before the start of the still image effect is higher than that when the timer effect is not executed, but the timer effect is executed across the start of the still image effect. It is desirable that the performance selection rate is set lower than the jackpot expectation in the case of a hit. This is because when the timer effect and the still image effect are not executed at the same time, the player is given a synergistic expectation of the two effects when they are executed at the same time. Further, the effect in which the timer effect is executed over the start time of the still image effect may be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit (that is, a big hit confirmation effect).

As described above, by causing the timer to appear and displaying the expectation suggestion display after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the player can expect the appearance of the expectation suggestion display from the time when the timer appears. ..

The timer effect may appear in SP reach, movie reach, etc. other than the battle effect. Further, in the same type of variation pattern, it is desirable that the selection ratio of the timer effect is determined so that the jackpot expectation degree when the timer effect appears is higher than the jackpot expectation degree when the timer effect does not appear. Further, it is desirable that there is no variation pattern in which the timer effect always appears.

In addition, although the timer effect is described here as a timer effect that decreases, the timer is not displayed in FIGS. 551(A) to (E) and the dynamics in FIGS. 551(F), (G), and (H) are displayed. Only the expectation suggestion display as a display may be displayed. If the expectation suggestion display is a still image in such a case, the expectation suggestion display does not necessarily appear in the battle production, so the player does not expect the appearance of the expectation suggestion display. You may not notice the expectation indication. Therefore, as described above, the expectation indication is dynamically displayed before and after the start of the still image effect.

The timing of the display start of the timer is, in addition to the above-mentioned timing, for example, at the start of fluctuation, during the change of all decorative symbols, when the left decorative symbol is stopped, when the right decorative symbol is stopped, after the reach is established and before the SP reach is started, or It may be a predetermined timing after the start of SP reach and before the notification of the special lottery result.

Further, the timer value may start decreasing at the same time as the timer is displayed, or the timer value may start decreasing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was displayed. If the timer value starts to decrease after a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was displayed, the timer value is not displayed at the timing when the timer is displayed but is displayed at the timing when the timer value starts to decrease. May be.

In addition to the above-mentioned timing, the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 seconds is, for example, during the change of all decorative symbols, when the left decorative symbol is stopped, the right decorative symbol is stopped, after the reach is established and before the SP reach is started and after the SP reach is started. Further, it may be a predetermined timing before the notification of the special lottery result or the timing of notifying the special lottery result. Note that, for example, the timing at which the timer value starts decreasing and the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 second are selected, and the initial value of the timer is determined based on the selected timing.

Note that a plurality of timers may be simultaneously displayed in the timer effect. In this case, the display start timing of each of the plurality of timers, the timer value decrease start timing, and the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 second may be different. Further, in this case, the effects executed after the timer values of the respective timers become 0 seconds may be different. In this case, before execution of the timer effect, a display indicating that a plurality of timers are displayed simultaneously, a display indicating the number of timers displayed at the same time, or the like may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, a plurality of timer effects are sequentially executed in one variation (that is, a new timer is displayed after the timer value of one timer becomes 0 seconds and then the timer is hidden). May be. In this case, the effects executed after the timer values of the plurality of timers have become 0 seconds may be different. In addition, when the timer effect is executed a plurality of times, a display indicating that the timer effect is executed after and before the execution of the timer effect, a display indicating the number of times the timer effect is executed, and the like. May be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Note that the effect selection rate is set such that the jackpot expectation degree when a plurality of timers are displayed sequentially or simultaneously is higher than the jackpot expectation degree when only one timer is displayed. Further, when a plurality of timers are displayed in order or simultaneously, for example, the expectation suggestion display, which is a dynamic display that is shown after the timer value of the plurality of timers finally reaches 0 seconds, is a still image effect. Straddle the start of. Thereby, it is possible to make the player understand that the still image effect is an effect directly linked to the notification of the special lottery result, and it is possible to attract attention to the still image effect.

In addition, when a plurality of timers are displayed simultaneously or in sequence, a still image effect may be performed a plurality of times. In this case, for example, the expectation suggestion display, which is a dynamic display shown after the timer value reaches 0 second, is executed across each of the plurality of start times of the still image effects. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention to each of the plurality of still image effects.

The timer effect may be executed as the prefetch effect. In this case, for example, the display and decrease of the timer value start from the change before the change of the prefetch target, and the timer value becomes 0 second in the change of the prefetch target. It should be noted that although the timer effect has been described in FIG. 551, another dynamic display effect may be executed instead of the timer display which is a dynamic display.

[20-3. Reel production]
553 and 554 are explanatory views showing an example of the reel effect. The reel effect is an example of the SP reach effect in which the still image effect may be executed.

In (A), reel production, which is an example of SP reach production, starts. A title image (for example, “Align the same numbers on the straight line of the reel!”) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the start of the reel effect. When the reel effect starts, the image of the reel of the slot is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the image in which the number in the reach state is stopped is displayed in the middle stage of the left reel and the middle stage of the right reel. The numbers displayed on the middle stage of the left reel and the middle stage of the right reel remain stationary until the reel effect is finished. Further, in the reel image in (A), a state in which the middle reel is changing is displayed.

In (B), the fluctuation speed of the middle reel is gradually reduced, and the same number as the number in the reach state appears on the upper stage of the middle reel. In (C), a display indicating that the number stops between the middle reel upper stage and the middle reel middle stage, and after 10 seconds, the number stops at either the middle reel upper stage or the middle reel middle stage (“10 seconds later”). The display "Stop somewhere!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The display "Stop after 10 seconds!" is an effect that suggests that the countdown effect described below is executed, and is displayed in the same area as the area where the countdown effect described below is displayed. In order to clearly recognize that the countdown effect to be described later is being executed, a display that says "I'll stop in 10 seconds!" may be displayed in an area larger than the area in which the countdown effect is displayed. In this case, the area where the countdown effect is displayed may partially or entirely overlap.

From (C) to FIG. 554 (N) described later, the numbers on the reels are stopped, that is, the still image effect is being executed. Further, from (D) to FIG. 554(N), a countdown display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), a countdown display (“10”) indicating the remaining 10 seconds is displayed. Further, in (D), two cheering characters are displayed at the left end and the right end of the effect display device 1600, and the cheering effect is executed from (D) to FIG. 554(N). The support effect and the countdown display effect are dynamic display effects during the still image effect. In (D), the two support characters hold the fan downward.

In (E), a countdown display ("9") showing the remaining 9 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (F), a countdown display (“8”) indicating the remaining 8 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the left side with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (G), a countdown display (“7”) indicating the remaining 7 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with one leg kicked out are displayed.

In (H), a countdown display (“6”) indicating the remaining 6 seconds and two cheering characters having the same fan as in (D) facing downward are displayed. In (I), a countdown display ("5") showing the remaining 5 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with both feet on the ground similar to (E) are displayed. .. In FIG. 554(J), a countdown display (“4”) showing the remaining 4 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the left side with both feet on the ground similar to FIG. 553(F) are displayed. It is displayed.

In (K), a countdown display (“3”) showing the remaining 3 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with one leg kicked out as in FIG. 553(G) are displayed. ing. In (L), a countdown display (“2”) showing the remaining 2 seconds and two cheering characters having a fan on the right side with both feet on the ground similar to FIG. 553(D) are displayed. ing. In (M), a countdown display (“1”) showing the remaining one second, two cheering characters having a fan facing downward like FIG. 553(E), and two cheering characters are displayed. There is.

In (N), a countdown display (“0”) showing 0 seconds remaining and two cheering characters having a fan on the left side with both feet on the ground similar to FIG. 553(F) are displayed. ing. That is, between FIG. 553(D) and FIG. 554(N) during the still image effect, as a dynamic display, a countdown display that counts down for 10 seconds and a series of effects by two cheering characters are repeated. Is running. The countdown display is not a series of effects that are repeatedly executed, that is, an aperiodic effect.

Note that, as described above in the examples of FIGS. 553 and 554, the series of effects (support effects in the support character) as the dynamic display is such that the two support characters have downward fans and both feet touch the ground. With the fan on the right side on the left side with the left side, the fan on the right side on the left side with both feet on the ground, and the fan on the right side with one leg kicked out.

It is preferable that the countdown display, which is an aperiodic effect, and the display of the support effect by the support character, which is a periodic effect, are displayed in the vicinity or overlapping. If they are displayed in places far from each other, there is a risk that one of the effects will be missed. In this way, by making it easy to see the countdown display and the display of the cheering effect at the same time, the player who wants to gradually raise the mood while paying attention to the countdown display and notifying the special lottery result, and the cheering effect It is possible to satisfy the needs of both the player who wants to pay attention and always feel good during the reel production.

Further, the visibility of one of the countdown display and the display of the support effect may be higher than that of the other. Specifically, for example, the effect is collected only on the one side, the effect is larger than the other side on the one side, or the display size of the one side is made larger than the display size of the other side. By making the visibility of the countdown display higher than that of the cheering effect, it becomes easier to gradually raise the mood as the countdown progresses, and by making the visibility of the cheering effect higher than that of the countdown effect, the mood is always felt during the reel production. It becomes easy to raise.

After the countdown display of (N) becomes 0, the stillness in the still image effect is released. That is, the decoration image of the middle reel displayed on the effect display device 1600 slowly starts again. In (O), the numbers on the middle reels move from the upper stage to the middle stage, the same numbers stop on a straight line, and it is notified that the special lottery result was a big hit.

Note that, for example, when the specific condition is satisfied during the still image effect, the stillness in the still image effect may be forcibly released, that is, the intermediate effect may be skipped and the process may shift to (N). .. A plurality of game balls B shot by operating the handle 182 at a predetermined timing (for example, a countdown display remaining from 7 seconds to 3 seconds) from the start of the still image effect are provided at a predetermined starting opening. The case where a plurality of game balls B pass through the gate portion 2003, which normally starts the variation of symbols, is an example of the specific condition.

It should be noted that among the dynamic effects during the still image effect (support effects in the support character), the above-described series of effects may have a plurality of display modes. Specifically, for example, there are a plurality of colors of clothes of the support character (for example, when red is selected, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when white is selected). .. Further, the series of effects is composed of a plurality of display modes (display modes of the support characters in each of FIGS. 553 (D) to (G)), but a plurality of types of series of effects having different display modes constituting the series of effects are provided. May exist. On the other hand, among the dynamic effects during the still image effect, it is desirable that the non-periodic effect (countdown display in the examples of FIGS. 553 and 554) has a single display mode. In other words, it is desirable that the aspect of the aperiodic effect does not change even if the aspect of the series of effects changes. In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 553 and 554, since the timing of informing the special lottery result is notified by the non-periodic mode, the player can accurately take the timing because the mode of the non-cyclical effect does not change. it can.

A suggestion effect indicating that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed is displayed during the still image effect may be executed before the start of the still image effect. The suggestion effect may be executed even when a series of effects that may be repeatedly executed during the still image effect is not executed (that is, a so-called gasse effect may exist).

The suggestive effect is preferably an effect that allows the player to infer that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed are displayed. Specifically, for example, at the timing of FIG. 553(B), although not shown, a support character such as a noisy noise is displayed in the right corner and the left corner of the effect display device 1600, or the effect is displayed or the support is performed. An example of the suggestion effect is an effect such as performing an effect such that effects are gathered on the character. As a result, the player can guess the appearance of the support character, and can have a sense of expectation. In addition, it is desirable that the above-described aperiodic effect is not executed during execution of the suggestive effect. This is because it is possible to prevent the player from lowering the attention of the aperiodic effect by the suggestive effect in a situation where it is not determined that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed during the still image effect are displayed.

It is desirable to change the light emission mode of a predetermined lamp or to output a predetermined sound from a speaker in accordance with the countdown display. The special lottery result is the most important concern for the player, and since the special lottery result is notified after the countdown display is finished, the player's expectation is increased by the emission of light and the output of sound in accordance with the countdown display. improves. However, in order to prevent the player from feeling too nervous, it is preferable that the predetermined lamp emits light and the predetermined sound emits as described below.

For example, the light emission mode of the predetermined lamp is to keep the light off or the lighted state (that is, not to blink). Further, for example, only a part of the lamps in the door frame or the game board repeats a predetermined lighting pattern, and the other lamps are turned off or maintained in a lighting state. Further, in order to prevent the player from feeling too nervous, it is desirable that the predetermined sound is SE (Sound Effect) instead of BGM (Back Ground Music).

Further, during the countdown display, for example, a concealed image may be placed on the front side of the player in the countdown display so that part or all of the countdown display is invisible (or difficult to see). However, it is desirable not to make the countdown display invisible in the latter half period of the still image effect. This is because the countdown display effect can make the player have a strong sense of expectation, especially in the latter half, and does not reduce such expectation.

[20-4. Bee extermination production]
555 and 556 are explanatory views showing an example of the bee extermination effect. The bee extermination effect is an example of the SP reach effect in which the still image effect may be executed.

When the bee extermination effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, starts, a display indicating that the bee extermination effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 555(A). In (B), a display for introducing a bee extermination practice effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), a display indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit when the queen bee is defeated and that the central pressing operation unit 303a should be pressed to defeat the queen bee, and the central pressing operation unit 303a Image is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (D), a display indicating that the special lottery result is not a big hit even if the soldier bees are defeated is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (E), a display indicating the start of bee extermination practice is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), practice production of bee extermination has started. In (F), a sleeping queen bee (a large bee located in the center of the rendering display device 1600), a plurality of soldier bees, an aim for defeating the bees, and an operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a (“ "Aim and press!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The practice production is a dynamic production in which each soldier bee moves as a dynamic display. Also, the aim is moving. Also, the sleeping queen bee, for example, moves up and down slowly (in the lower part of the effect display device 1600 in (F)), but the sleeping queen bee has a nose lantern. It may be moving in such a manner that only one shakes.

In (G), the dynamic effect continues, the queen bee that shakes and moves to the upper part of the effect display device 1600, the moving soldier bees, the moving aim, and the operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a. And are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (H), the effect display device 1600 displays that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed and the insecticide is sprayed.

In the bee extermination effect, when the moving aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, an image in which the queen bee is exterminated is displayed. In (J), since the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed at the timing when the moving aim is on the soldier bee, the queen bee cannot be defeated. Therefore, in (I), a display indicating that the queen bee could not be defeated ("Fu... was saved") is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Also, in the practice production, when the moving aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, for example, the display in (I) indicates that the queen bee has been defeated. The display shown in FIG. 556 (J), which will be described later, is replaced with a display such as "Do your best in that condition!". That is, even if a display indicating that the queen bee has been eliminated (display indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit) is performed in the practice effect, FIGS. 556(J) to (N) described below are executed.

The practice effect may be set so that the queen bee cannot be eliminated. Therefore, for example, although the aim is moved only on a position not on the queen bee or on the soldier bee, or the aim can be moved to a position where the queen bee can be eliminated, even if the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed at that position, the queen bee is pressed. An effect such as displaying an image that failed to get rid of is executed.

In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, it may be set so that the queen bee can be defeated in the practice effect. For that purpose, for example, the aim is to move only on a position that is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, or it is possible to move only the position other than the position, but increase the spray area of the insecticide so that the queen bee is included in the spray destination. , Etc. are executed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 556 (J), a display for introducing the production effect of bee extermination is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The display indicates that the production effect starts with the soldier bees already exterminated. In (M), a stationary queen bee, a plurality of stationary soldier bees, a moving aim, and an operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a (“press at target timing!”) are displayed. ing. Also, the stationary soldier bees in (K) are not located on the queen bee.

In (L), the effect display device 1600 displays that the central pressing operation unit 303a is operated and the insecticide is sprayed on the queen bee at the timing when the aim is at a position on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee. In (M), an image showing that the queen bee has been successfully eliminated, that is, an image showing that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed. In (M), the stillness of the queen bee, which was statically displayed until immediately before, is released. In (N), a display (“Big hit! Congratulations!”) indicating that the special lottery result was a big hit is displayed.

In addition, if the special lottery result is a big hit, so that you can exterminate the queen bee in the production production, for example, move only the position where the aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, or move only the other position Although possible, it is desirable to perform an effect such as increasing the spray area of the insecticide so that the queen bee is included in the spray destination. By forcibly exterminating the queen bee in this way, it is possible to eliminate an operation error of the central pressing operation unit 303a by the player when the special lottery result is a big hit.

Also, if the special lottery result is out of order, it is possible to exterminate the queen bee so that it cannot be defeated in the production production, for example, the aim is not on the queen bee or only on the soldier bee, or the queen bee can be defeated Although the aim can be moved to the position, even if the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed at the position, an image in which the queen bee is not eliminated is displayed, and the like is performed.

In the example described above, only the central pressing operation unit 303a is used for the bee extermination effect, but a plurality of operation units may be used. Specifically, for example, the aim may be moved using the rotation operation unit 302. In addition, for example, in the practice effect, the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to eject the insecticide, and in the production effect, the peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed to eject the insecticide. Good.

As described above, in the production effect of the bee extermination effect, the pressing instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed during the still image effect (that is, when the queen bee and the soldier bees that are still images are displayed). When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the special lottery result is notified. In other words, since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a during production performance is important, the player's sense of tension is excessively increased. Therefore, the player is likely to make a mistake in operating the central pressing operation unit 303a.

In order to suppress such excessive tension of the player and reduce the occurrence of operation mistakes, practice effects are executed before the production effects. As described above, in the practice production, the soldier bees are obstructing the movement of the queen bees and the difficulty of exterminating the queen bees is high, and in the production production, the difficulty of exterminating the queen bees is low because the soldier bees have been exterminated. As a result, in the production effect, the player can operate the central pressing operation unit 303a with a margin without feeling as much pressure as in the practice effect, and operation mistakes are reduced, so that the player's satisfaction is improved.

It should be noted that the production effect time (the aim is moving and the central pressing operation unit 303a is enabled) is longer than the time of the practice effect (the time when the aim is moving and the central pressing operation unit 303a is enabled). It is desirable that the time is longer). Thereby, the player's operation mistakes in the production effect are reduced, and the player positively operates the central pressing operation unit 303a in the production effect.

Further, in the production effect, the central pressing operation unit 303a may be pressed a plurality of times. In this case, in the production effect, for example, an insecticide is sprayed every time the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed while the aim is moving, so that the queen bee can be easily exterminated. Therefore, the performance of the special lottery result is expected to be higher when the production production that receives the press of the central pressing operation unit 303a only appears once than when the production production that receives the press only appears. It is desirable that the selection rate of is defined. As a result, the player's motivation for operating the central pressing operation unit 303a can be improved.

Similarly, in the practice effect, the central pressing operation unit 303a may be pressed multiple times. In this case, in the practice effect, for example, an insecticide is sprayed every time the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed while the aim is moving, and an effect that allows the queen bee to be exterminated easily is executed. Therefore, the performance of the special lottery result is higher than that of the practice effect in which the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is received only once, so that the jackpot expectation of the special lottery result is higher. It is desirable that the selection rate of is defined. As a result, the player's motivation for operating the central pressing operation unit 303a can be improved.

Further, the success rate of extermination of the queen bee in the production effect may be set to be different depending on the result of the practice effect (successful elimination or failure of extermination of the queen bee). For example, in the display in FIG. 556 (J), the line “It seems to be difficult to say” (display that appears when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed) is displayed when the jackpot expectation is low, If the expectation for a big hit is high, it is desirable to replace the line with a line like "I made a mistake but it was a little more". This can improve the player's motivation for the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the production effect when the jackpot expectation is high. Further, for example, the practice effect that always succeeds in exterminating the queen bee may be set to be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit. In addition, as described above, in the practice production, the queen bee may not be defeated without fail. That is, the display of FIG. 556(J) may be made to appear only when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed.

In addition, in both the practice effect and the production effect, the aim is a dynamic display, but it is desirable that the aim movement is a regular movement (for example, a display that is repeatedly performed such as moving to a figure eight). This makes it easier for the player to press the central pressing operation unit 303a at a timing when the aim is at a position on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee. Further, the aim used for the practice effect and the actual effect may be selected from a plurality of types of aim, and it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is set differently depending on the selected types of aim. For example, if the size of the aim is small, the jackpot expectation is low, if it is large, the jackpot expectation is high, and if it is oversized, the jackpot expectation is extremely high. Has been. Also, for example, when the aim is blue, the big hit expectation is low, when the green is high, the big hit expectation is high, and when the aim is red, the big hit expectation is extremely high. It is set.

Further, the number of selectable sights may be different between the practice effect and the production effect. For example, the number of aiming points that can be selected in the production effect may be greater than, less than, or the same as the number of aiming points that can be selected in the practice effect.

When the number of selectable aim in the production performance is larger than the number of selectable aim in the practice effect, for example, two types of small aim and large aim can be selected in the practice effect, and small aim in the production effect. You can choose from three types, a large aim and an oversized aim. At this time, an oversized aim with an extremely high jackpot expectation is selected only for the production effect, so that the player can quickly increase the expectation in the production effect.

Further, when the number of selectable aim in the production effect is larger than the number of selectable aim in the practice effect, for example, in the practice effect, three types of a small aim, a large aim and an oversized aim can be selected, In the production production, two types can be selected, a large aim and an oversized aim. At this time, the oversized aim may be selected even in the practice effect, so that the player's expectation can be increased at the time of the practice effect. Further, in the production performance, the small aim with the lowest expectation of a big hit is not selected, so that the player's expectation can be increased even during the production performance.

In addition, when the number of selectable aim in the production effect is the same as the number of selectable aim in the practice effect, for example, in the practice effect, three types of a small aim, a large aim and an oversized aim can be selected, Even in production, you can select from three types: small, large, and oversized. At this time, the same degree of expectation is shown in the practice effect as in the production effect, so that the player can focus on both the practice effect and the production effect.

The selected aim in the practice effect and the production effect may be selected according to the selection rate set for each, or according to the selection rate set as a combination of the selected aim in the practice effect and the production effect. It may be selected. However, in any case, it is preferable that an aim with a lower jackpot expectation than the aim selected in the practice effect is hard to be selected or not selected in the actual effect. As a result, for the player, the production performance seems to have a higher jackpot expectation degree than the practice effect, so that the expectation can be maintained or improved.

Specifically, when the selected aim in the practice effect and the production effect are selected separately, the selection rate in the production effect of the aim with a low jackpot expectation is lower than the selection rate in the practice effect of the aim. It is set. Further, for example, an aim with a higher jackpot expectation than the aim selected in the practice effect may be forcibly selected in the actual effect.

Further, when the selected aim in the practice effect and the production effect is selected as a combination, the selection rate of the combination in which the aim in the production effect is lower than the aim in the practice effect is the selection rate of other combinations. It is set lower. In addition, a combination in which the aim in the production effect is lower in expectation of a big hit than the aim in the practice effect does not have to be included in the selection target.

In the production effect, it is desirable that no sound be output from various speakers in order to concentrate the player on the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. If the sound is output, it is desirable that only the sound corresponding to the dynamic display is output, such as the sound of moving the aim. In the practice effect, BGM or the like may be output from the speaker. Further, in the production effect, in order to concentrate the player on the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a, various lamps provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are not blinked (that is, kept off or turned on). Is desirable.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a movable body (not shown) imitating a tool (for example, a can of insecticide, an insect net, etc.) used for exterminating bees. The movable body is movable on the front side of the effect display device 1600 in front view. At this time, the movable body is used instead of the aim in the bee extermination effect. For example, in the practice effect and the production effect, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the movable body moves to the front side of the queen bee in the effect display device 1600 in front view.

At this time, it is desirable that the moving mode of the movable body be different between the case where the queen bee is successfully eliminated in the practice effect and the case where the queen bee is successfully eliminated in the production effect. For example, in the practice production, when the queen bee is successfully eliminated, it is desirable not to move the movable body largely (a dynamic display in which the queen bee moves around the initial position of the movable body on the inner side in a front view) In). This is because if the movable body largely moves, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit. On the other hand, in the production effect, the movable body may move largely when the queen bee is successfully eliminated.

557 and 558 are explanatory views showing another example of the bee extermination effect. Differences from FIGS. 555 and 556 will be described. In FIGS. 555 and 556, the example in which the production effect with low difficulty is executed after the practice effect with high difficulty is shown, but in the examples of FIGS. 557 and 558, the difficulty level of multiple times (for example, up to two times) Low practice performance can be executed. In addition, the practice production can be performed multiple times, but the production production is difficult.

In this way, a plurality of practice effects with low difficulty are performed, so that the player can get used to the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and relieve the tension. In addition, the player, who has become accustomed to the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a by a plurality of practice effects and is relieved of tension, can enjoy the production effects by feeling the capture factor in the production effects having a high difficulty level.

After FIG. 555(C), a transition is made to FIG. 557(D′). In (D'), the special lottery result is not a big hit even if you defeat the soldier bees, the practice production starts with the soldier bees already exterminated, and there are two practice productions. The display shown is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (E′), a display indicating the start of the first practice effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (F′), as in the case of FIG. 556(K), the queen bee that is a static display is static, the multiple soldier bees that are static display are static, and the moving aim is a dynamic display. And an operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a (“press at the timing!”) are displayed. Also, the stationary soldier bees at (F') are not located on the queen bee.

In (G′), the effect display device 1600 displays that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed at a timing when the aim is not on the queen bee and the insecticide is sprayed. Therefore, in (H′), as in FIG. 555(I), a display indicating that the queen bee could not be eliminated is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (I′), a display indicating the start of the second practice effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (J'), (K'), and (L') are the same as (F'), (G'), and (H'), respectively.

In FIG. 558 (M′), a display indicating that the production effect has started and that the soldier bee and the queen bee are moving in the production effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (N′), a queen bee that is a static display that moves, a plurality of soldier bees that are dynamic displays that move, a sight that is a dynamic display for defeating a bee, and a central pressing operation unit 303a. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (O') is the same as (N').

In (P'), the central display operation unit 303a is operated at the timing when the sighting is at a position on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, and the display that the insecticide is sprayed on the queen bee is displayed on the effect display device 1600. .. In (Q'), an image showing that the queen bee has been successfully eliminated, that is, an image showing that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed, and the soldier bee is still moving. If the queen bee is successfully defeated, not only the queen bee but also the soldier bee may be defeated. (R') is the same as in FIG. 556(N).

As described above, in the example of FIGS. 557 and 558, the practice effect can be executed a plurality of times (up to twice) in the bee extermination effect. Further, in the production production, the queen bee and the soldier bee are moving, but in the practice production, the queen bee and the soldier bee are stationary.

In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, there may be a surprise production pattern in which the queen bee can be defeated in the practice production and the special lottery result can be notified as it is (that is, the production production is not executed). Even in this case, after the judgment effect (practice effect) of the special lottery result by the still image effect, the judgment effect (production effect) of the special lottery result by the dynamic effect that is not the still image effect may be executed. However, after the jackpot effect (production effect) of the special lottery result by the dynamic effect that is not the still image effect, the judge effect (practice effect) of the special lottery result by the still image effect is not executed.

However, even when a surprise production pattern exists, the selection rate of the surprise production pattern is preferably lower than the selection rate of the other pattern (for example, 1/10 or less of the selection rate of the other pattern). Due to the low selection rate of surprise production patterns, it is possible to improve the uplifting feeling of the player at once by winning in the surprise production patterns, and conversely, if the selection rate of the surprise production patterns in which the production production is not executed is high, This is because the player's expectation for the actual production may be reduced.

In addition, at least once of the practice effect may be replaced with the operation explanation effect. The operation explanation effect is, for example, an effect in which the effects (F') to (G') or (J') to (K') are automatically executed without the player's operation. Specifically, for example, in the operation explanation effect, the insecticide is triggered by the elapse of a predetermined time without displaying the display prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and validating the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. It differs from the practice effect in that the effect of spraying the agent is displayed and the retreat cure result is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned surprise effect pattern may be applied to the operation explanation effect.

Note that, for example, in the above-described practice effect and production effect, the queen bee may be enlarged and displayed by zooming up the central portion of the effect display device 1600 while the queen bee is stationary. This makes it easier to focus on the queen bee. Further, the zoom-up may be performed for the above-mentioned model effect. Also, in the example of FIG. 558, the queen bee is moving in the production production, but only the soldier bee may move and the queen bee may be stationary.

[20-5-1. Reach production with Daruma-san lying down]
559 and 560 are explanatory views showing an example of the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls. The reach effect in which Mr. Daruma fell is an example of the SP reach effect in which the still image effect may be executed. In the following, the still image effect includes not only an effect of displaying a still image and a dynamic display but also an effect of displaying only a still image.

In the reach production in which Daruma-san falls, if the main character plays the demon “Daruma-san has fallen” and the main character wins all other participants (hereinafter also referred to as non-demons), the fluctuation is It's a big hit. After the protagonist character utters "Dharma-san has fallen", if the non-demon turns to the non-demon and moves in that state, the protagonist character has won the non-demon. Further, when the variation is a marginal variation, in the reach production in which Mr. Daruma falls, the production in which the protagonist character is touched by a non-demon occurs.

FIG. 559(A) shows a state in which the reach effect in which Daruma-san fell is started after the reach pattern of the decorative pattern is shown. In (A), in the effect display device 1600, the protagonist character utters a line saying "Darumuma-san ga", and during that period, four non-demons are gradually displayed to be closer to the protagonist character. In (B), the protagonist character utters the line "fallen!". Further, in (B), when the main character finishes saying the line, the non-demon moves back and stops, and the non-demon moves until the main character finishes saying the line.

In (C), the still image effect continues, and for example, the hero character and the non-demon are still in the state at the time of the end of (B). In (D), two of the non-demons endure the stillness and move, so that the still image effect ends. The non-demon who has moved in (D) does not appear after (E) described later. Even if the still image in the still image effects from (B) to (C) is released, the special lottery result corresponding to the variation is not notified. That is, in (D), all the non-demons do not move, and the non-demons do not touch the main character.

Subsequently, in (E), in the effect display device 1600, the protagonist character utters a line "Da~ru~~ma~~", while the remaining two non-demons gradually approach the protagonist character. The display is being done. In (F), the protagonist character utters a dialogue saying "sa-n-ga---", and during that time, the remaining two non-demons are gradually displayed as they approach the protagonist character.

In (G), as in (B), the protagonist character utters the line "fallen!". Further, in (G), as in (B), the protagonist character stops after turning back to the non-demon when it finishes saying the line, and the non-demon moves until the protagonist character finishes speaking the line. Image production starts.

In addition, the stop position of each non-demon in (G) is a position very close to the main character (specifically, the main character after the rest is specifically released is said to have "Daruma-san has fallen". The position is such that the player recognizes that the non-demon always touches the main character within the period). Therefore, if all the non-demons are won at the end of the still image effect starting from (G) (if the still image effect starting from (G) ends due to the movement of all non-demons), the special lottery result is It is a big hit, and if the non-demon survives even after the still image effect starting from (G) ends, the special lottery result is out of range. That is, the still image effect starting from (G) can function as a judge effect indicating the special lottery result.

The still image effect continues until FIG. 560 (J) described later. In (H), the still image effect is continued, and the line "Is it possible to stop for another 5 seconds?" is displayed by the main character. In (I), the countdown display of 5 seconds declared by the dialogue of the main character in (H) starts.

In FIG. 560(J), a display indicating that the countdown is 4 seconds remaining is displayed. In (K), a display indicating that the countdown is 3 seconds remaining is displayed, and two non-demons move without being able to stand still, and the still image effect is completed. In the example of (K), the remaining two non-demons are moving in the middle of the countdown, but if the special lottery result is a big hit, if the timing until the end of the countdown, the remaining two non-demons The demon may move at any time.

Note that, for example, the timing at which the special lottery result is notified may be the same when the special lottery result is a big hit and when it is not. Specifically, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, when the non-demon moves to stand still at the timing when the rest of the countdown reaches 0 seconds, and the special lottery result is out of range, When the rest of the countdown reaches 0 seconds, the protagonist character is touched by a non-demon.

In (L), the protagonist character emits a line saying that "all non-demons have been found!", that is, that all non-demons have been won, that is, the special lottery result was a big hit. In (M), an image notifying that the special lottery result “big hit! Congratulations!!” is a big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

If the special lottery result is out of alignment, for example, there is a non-demon that does not move even if the countdown starting from FIG. 559(I) reaches 0 seconds, and after the countdown reaches 0 seconds ( The still image effect may be finished at the same time as the timing of 0 second or after a predetermined time has elapsed from 0 second). Then, while the protagonist character again utters "Daruma-san has fallen!", the surviving non-demon touches the protagonist character and is notified that the special lottery result is out of order.

As described above, the countdown starts after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the still image effect. That is, even if the still image effect is started, the special lottery result is not shown at least until the countdown display is started, so that the player is not excessively nervous until the countdown display is started.

Also, if the special lottery result is a big hit, the static display is released at some timing until the countdown reaches 0 seconds and the dynamic display starts, and if the special lottery result is out of sync, the countdown After 0 seconds, the stillness is released and the dynamic display starts. In this way, the countdown display is a display indicating the length of a part of the period of the still image effect because the countdown display ends by the end of the still image effect, and the end of the still image effect (FIGS. 559 and 560). In the example of (1), it is also a display showing a timing indicating the special lottery result). Therefore, after the countdown display is displayed, the player can suddenly increase the feeling of tension and the feeling of expectation.

In the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma fell, the special lottery result is not shown at the end of the first still image effect, and the special lottery result is shown at the end of the second still image effect. By showing the special lottery result together with the release of the stillness, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension in the still image effect, but there are not a few players whose feeling of tension becomes too high. Therefore, before the series of effects showing the special lottery result at the end of the still image effect, by executing the series of effects not showing the special lottery result at the end of the still image effect, the player can become accustomed to the still image effect. , It is possible to give the player an appropriate sense of tension that does not become excessive in the still image production.

Hereinafter, the still image effect for which the special lottery result is not shown after the still image effect is called a non-notification still image effect, and the still image effect for which the special lottery result is shown after the still image effect is also called a notification still image effect.

The non-notification still image effect is prepared for accustoming the player to the still image effect, and makes the player have a sense of expectation by spending a lot of time on the notification still image effect, which is important for the player. be able to. On the other hand, the period of the notification still image effect may be shorter than the period of the non-notification still image effect. Since the non-notification still image effect is for a long time, the player can be accustomed to the still image effect in advance and is not excessively nervous in the notification still image effect. The notification still image effect functions as a winning notification effect that leads to notification of the winning result of the special lottery, and the non-notification still image effect functions as a preparation effect for preparing the mind.

In addition, the reach effect in which the Daruma-san falls (hereinafter also referred to as the reach effect in which the first Daruma-san falls) is longer than the period of the non-notification still image effect, and the non-notification still image is longer. There may be both a reach effect in which the Daruma-san has fallen (hereinafter also referred to as a reach effect in which the second Daruma-san has fallen) in which the notification still image effect period is shorter than the effect period.

In this case, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation degree when the first Daruma-san falls reach effect is higher than the jackpot expectation degree when the second Daruma-san falls reach effect. By doing this, the jackpot expectation is higher when the period of the notification still image effect is longer than the period of the non-notification still image effect, and the player becomes more special as the stationary period becomes longer in the notification still image effect. Immediately before the notification of the lottery result, it is possible to increase the tension and the expectation all at once.

On the other hand, the jackpot expectation degree when the first Daruma-san's fall reach effect occurs may be lower than the jackpot expectation degree when the second Daruma-san's fall reach effect occurs. By doing this, the jackpot expectation becomes higher when the period of the non-notification still image effect is longer than the period of the notification still image effect, and when the still period in the non-notification still image effect is long, the game is The person can obtain a sense of expectation from an early stage (before the notification still image effect is started).

In addition, in the still image production in the reach production in which Mr. Daruma falls, a plurality of poses in which the non-demon stops may be prepared. For example, each non-demon pose is selected in the order of standing on both legs <standing on one leg <pose of swan so that the probability that the non-demon will move when the stationary state is released increases, that is, the expectation of a big hit increases. However, in the reach production in which Daruma-san fell, it is desirable that the pose of standing on both feet with the lowest expectation of a big hit appears at the highest rate. Since it is easy to select the pose with the lowest expectation of a big hit, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling excessive tension.

In particular, an effect in which a non-demon stops in a swan pose (an effect with the highest expectation of a big hit) may be executed only in a big hit variation (that is, in this case, the appearance of the swan pose indicates a big hit confirmation). As a result, when the player stands still in a pose with a particularly high expectation of a big hit, the player can feel awaiting the cancellation of the stillness in the still image effect.

Note that the main control MPU selects the variation pattern in which the reach effect in which Daruma-san fell is executed, but these non-demon stop poses during the reach effect in which Daruma-san fell receive the command from the main control MPU. It may be selected as the notice effect by the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU may suddenly select a pose (for example, standing on one leg) with a high expectation for a big hit in the non-notification still image effect executed first, or the big hit expectation degree in the notification still image effect executed last. You may choose a high pose. In the non-notification still image effect executed first, if a pose with a high jackpot expectation is suddenly selected, the player can be expected from an early stage, and the notification still image effect executed last In the case where a pose with a high expectation for a big hit is selected, the player can immediately increase the sense of tension and the sense of expectation immediately before the notification of the special lottery result.

In addition, in the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls, for example, in comparison with the rate at which a pose with a high expectation for a big hit (for example, standing on one leg) is selected in the first non-notification still image effect executed, it is executed last. The proportion of poses with a high expectation for a big hit in the notification still image production is low. This makes it possible to give the player an expectation from the first non-notification still image.

On the other hand, in the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma fell, compared to the proportion of the pose (for example, standing on one leg) with a high expected jackpot in the non-notification still image effect executed first, the notification still executed last In the image rendering, a pose with a high expectation for a big hit may be selected at a high rate. As a result, the player can enjoy the final notification still image effect without giving up on the effect having a high expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma fell, compared to the rate at which a pose with a high expectation for a big hit (for example, standing on one leg) is selected in the non-notification still image effect that is executed first, the notification still effect that is executed last The proportions at which poses with high jackpot expectations are selected in the image rendering may be the same. As a result, the player has a certain degree of anticipation for the non-notification still image effect, and even if a pose with a high jackpot expectation does not appear in the non-notification still image effect, the final notification still image effect is produced. Up to a certain degree of expectations can be obtained.

Note that the still image effect may be performed three or more times in the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls. In this case, for example, by setting only the end of the final still image effect as the notification still image effect, it is possible to further suppress the player's feeling of tension.

From the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the non-notification still image effect (the period in which the hero character says "Darumuma-san" and "fallen!" in FIGS. 559 (A) and (B)), The period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect (in the figures 559 (D) to (F), the main character is “Da-Ru-Ma-”) and “Sa-n-ga-”. It is desirable that the period) is longer. As a result, the dynamic display period immediately before the notification still image effect can be extended, and the player's expectation can be improved during that period. On the other hand, the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the non-notification still image effect may be longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period of the dynamic display immediately before the non-notification still image effect, and to give the player the expectation that the non-notification still image effect will be performed with high expectations. ..

Further, for example, the period of the non-notification still image effect is longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. Thereby, the player can enjoy the notification still image effect while maintaining the tension increased by the non-notification still image effect. On the other hand, the period of the non-notification still image effect may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the player's sense of tension increased by the non-notification still image effect can be temporarily reduced, so that the player does not feel excessive tension in the notification still image effect.

Further, for example, the period of the notification still image effect is longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. Thereby, the player can enjoy the notification still image effect while maintaining the tension increased by the non-notification still image effect. On the other hand, the period of the notification still image effect may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the notification still image effect is started in a state where the player's sense of tension increased by the non-notification still image effect is temporarily reduced, and the player does not become too nervous in the notification still image effect.

Although the example in which FIG. 559 (A) starts after the reach mode of the decorative pattern is described, the non-notification still image effect is executed before the reach mode of the decorative pattern is shown, and the non-notification still image effect is performed. The reach mode may be displayed after the end of, and the notification still image effect may be executed thereafter. By executing the non-notification still image effect before the reach mode is shown, the player expects that the decorative pattern may stop in the reach state after the still image is released in the non-notification still image effect. You can

In addition, the reach effect in which the notification still image effect is executed after the non-notification still image effect as described above, and the Daruma who only performs the notification still image effect without the non-notification still image effect is performed. There may be both a fallen reach production. In this case, the non-notification still image effect is not performed, and only the notification still image effect is performed. In the reach production, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is high although the appearance rate is low. As a result, when a non-notification still image effect appears, the jackpot expectation is high, and thus even a player who is already accustomed to the still image effect can obtain an expectation by the appearance of the non-notification still image effect. ..

As described above, when the notification still image effect is executed, although the special lottery result is shown in the dynamic display immediately after the end of the notification still image effect (for example, FIG. 560(K)), the display of the still image is ended. The specific result of the special lottery can be determined after the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, FIG. 560(M)). For example, as shown in FIG. 560(M), a video that directly informs that the jackpot is a big hit is displayed, or three sets of decorative symbols are displayed so that a specific special lottery result can be determined. ing.

The predetermined time is shorter than the period of the notification still image effect, for example. As a result, the player can determine the specific special lottery result while maintaining the tension caused by the notification still image effect. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the notification still image effect. As a result, the player can determine the state in which the feeling of tension caused by the notification still image effect is alleviated, and a specific special lottery result.

The predetermined time is shorter than the period of the non-notification still image effect, for example. As a result, the non-notification still image effect can be impressed on the player as compared with the period until the specific lottery result is notified. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the non-notification still image effect. As a result, the non-notification still image effect in which the special lottery result is not shown can impress the player with the predetermined time indicating the specific special lottery result, and the tension and expectation of the player can be increased in the predetermined time. it can.

In addition, the said predetermined time is shorter than the period of the dynamic display production just before the notification still image production, for example. As a result, the dynamic display can be impressed on the player as compared with the period until the specific lottery result is notified. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. This makes it possible to give the player an impression of the predetermined time indicating the specific special lottery result from the dynamic display that does not show the special lottery result, and to increase the tension and expectation of the player at the predetermined time.

Further, in the non-notification still image effect, it is desirable that the BGM that has been flowing until immediately before is flowing as it is. As a result, although the image is still, the BGM remains, so that the player can recognize that the non-notification still image effect is a series of effects that continue from the effect until immediately before, and the still image is displayed. Even if it is done, it does not make the player too nervous. On the other hand, in the notification still image effect, it is desirable that the BGM be stopped or the BGM volume be lowered. As a result, not only the image stops, but also the BGM stops or becomes smaller, so that even a player who is accustomed to the still image effect can obtain a certain amount of tension in the notification still image effect.

Also, a predetermined movable body may be operated when the notification still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by operating a predetermined movable body at the timing, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is the special lottery result, and the player's uplifting feeling is improved. On the other hand, when the non-notification still image effect is finished and the dynamic display is started, it is desirable that the movable body is not operated. This is because, even after the non-notification still image effect, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit, even though the effect for showing the special lottery result continues.

A predetermined sound may be output when the notification still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by outputting a predetermined sound at the timing, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is the special lottery result, and the player's uplifting feeling is improved. On the other hand, it is desirable not to output the predetermined sound when the non-notification still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts. This is because, even after the non-notification still image effect, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit, even though the effect for showing the special lottery result continues.

In the above example, the countdown display is started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the still image effect, but the countdown display may be started at the same time as the start of the still image effect. Further, as described above, the still image effect may end at the same time when the countdown ends. Therefore, when the countdown display starts at the same time as the start of the still image effect, and the countdown display ends at the same time as the end of the still image effect, the countdown display indicates the entire period of the still image effect itself. In this case, the player can measure the timing at which the still image effect ends by looking at the countdown display, and thus can prepare for the mind.

When the countdown display indicates a part of the still image effect and ends at the same time as the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is longer than the countdown non-display period in the still image effect. They may be the same, may be the same, or may be short. In order to suppress the player's feeling of tension in the countdown display, it is possible to suppress the player's excessive feeling of tension and expectation as the countdown display period is longer in the still image effect. On the other hand, the shorter the countdown display period of the still image effect, the more the player's sense of expectation and tension can be improved.

Further, when the countdown display indicates a part of the still image effect, and starts after the start of the still image effect and ends before the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is , May be longer than or equal to the total countdown non-display period (that is, the total period from the start of the still image effect to the time before the countdown display and from the end of the countdown display to the end of the still image effect). Good or short.

The countdown display may be started before the start of the still image effect and may be ended during execution of the still image effect (before or at the end). As a result, as described above, the player looks at the countdown display during the still image effect to measure the timing at which the still image effect ends and prepares for the mind, and at the same time displays the countdown display before the start of the still image effect. By looking at it, the start timing of the still image effect can be measured and the mind can be prepared even before the start of the still image effect.

In the example described above, the countdown display is executed only in the notification still image effect, but the countdown display may be executed also in the non-notification still image effect. The jackpot expectation when the countdown display is executed in the non-notification still image effect is preferably higher than the jackpot expectation when the countdown display is not executed in the non-notification still image effect. The player's feeling of tension is suppressed by the countdown display, but if the jackpot expectation is low even if the countdown display is executed multiple times, it is difficult to obtain the feeling of tension and the frequency of obtaining a feeling of uplifting due to the jackpot. This is because it is not expensive, and it becomes difficult for the player's interest to improve.

On the other hand, the jackpot expectation degree when the countdown display is executed in the non-notification still image effect may be lower than the jackpot expectation degree when the countdown display is not executed in the non-notification still image effect. As a result, the smaller the number of times the tension is suppressed, the higher the jackpot expectation is, so the number of times of winning the jackpot in the high tension is increased, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the period of the countdown display executed in the notification still image effect may be longer, the same, or shorter than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-notification still image effect. ..

Since the special lottery result is shown after the notification still image effect is finished, the notification still image effect is likely to increase the tension of the player as compared with the non-notification still image effect. Therefore, since the period of the countdown display executed in the notification still image effect is longer than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-notification still image effect, the effect of suppressing the player's tension is increased. On the other hand, since the period of the countdown display executed in the notification still image effect is shorter than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-notification still image effect, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires a sense of tension.

Also in the non-notification still image effect, the countdown display may be performed during a part of the non-notification still image effect, or the countdown display may be performed during the entire period of the non-notification still image effect.

When the countdown display is executed during a part of the still image effect, the pattern of the period of the countdown display is (1) the countdown display starts from the start of the still image effect and before the end of the still image effect. Pattern A that ends in, (2) the countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect and ends before the end, and (3) the countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect, In addition, there is a pattern C that ends when the still image effect ends.

When the countdown display is executed during a part of the non-notification still image effect, it is preferable that the effects are selected in the order of pattern B<pattern C<pattern A so that the jackpot expectation becomes higher. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-notification still image effect is finished, the non-notification still image effect is less likely to attract the player's interest as compared with the notification still image effect. Therefore, by setting a high jackpot expectation degree for pattern A in which the countdown display starts at the same time as the start of the non-notification still image effect and for pattern C in which the countdown display ends at the same time as the end of the non-notification still image effect is set high. It is possible to make the player pay attention from the start to the end of the non-notification still image effect.

On the other hand, when the countdown display is executed in a part of the period of the notification still image effect, it is preferable that the effects are selected in the order of pattern A<pattern B<pattern C so that the jackpot expectation becomes higher. In other words, in the notification still image effect, the larger the start timing of the countdown display and the later the end timing thereof, the higher the jackpot expectation, so that the player starts the countdown display earlier until the countdown display starts. You can enjoy the production, hoping that the countdown will not end early after the countdown display starts.

In addition, when the pattern B having a low jackpot expectation appears in the non-notification still image effect, the pattern C having a high jackpot expectation degree in the notification still image effect is suppressed in order to suppress a decrease in interest of the player thereafter. It is desirable that it should be selected.

If the timing at the end of the still image effect is the same as the timing at the end of the countdown display, the countdown display may be recognizable for a predetermined period even after the timing at which the still image effect ends. Specifically, for example, although the still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts at the same time as the countdown display becomes “0”, the countdown display of “0” remains displayed for a predetermined period after that, or the countdown display continues. The display may be enlarged, the countdown display may be made semitransparent, or the countdown display may be covered with an effect such as smoke. As a result, it is possible to leave the afterglow of the countdown display to the player.

In addition, it is desirable that the length of the countdown non-display period in the non-notification still image effect is longer than the length of the countdown non-display period in the notification still image effect. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-announcement still image effect, by prolonging the countdown non-display period, it is possible to attract the player's attention and give a sense of tension. On the other hand, the length of the countdown non-display period in the non-notification still image effect may be shorter than the length of the countdown non-display period in the notification still image effect.

Further, the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the total length of the non-notification still image effect may be larger than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the total length of the notification still image effect. desirable. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-announcement still image effect, the percentage of the countdown non-display period in the entire period of the non-announcement still image effect is increased to attract the player's attention and give a sense of tension. You can On the other hand, the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the total length of the non-notification still image effect is smaller than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the total length of the notification still image effect. Good.

[20-5-2. Another example of reach production where Daruma fell down]
FIG. 561 shows another example of the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls. In FIGS. 559 and 560, an example in which the non-notification still image effect is executed only once has been described, but in FIG. 561, the non-notification still image effect is executed a plurality of times.

After FIG. 559 (D), the process proceeds to FIG. 561 (E′). That is, (E') is a state immediately after the end of the first non-notification still image effect. In (E′), in the effect display device 1600, the protagonist character utters the line “Daruma-san ga”, and during that time, two non-demons are gradually displayed closer to the protagonist character. In (F'), the main character utters the line "fallen!". Further, in (F'), when the main character finishes saying the line, the non-demon moves back and stops, and the non-demon moves until the main character finishes saying the line.

In (G'), the still image effect continues, and for example, the main character and the non-demon are still in the state at the end of (F'). In (H'), the non-demon did not move even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the still image effect, so the still image effect ends and the image displayed in (G') fades out. .. The image gradually fades out from (H') to (I').

The effect of (J') is the same as that of FIG. 559(E), and the effects thereafter are the same as those of FIGS. 559 and 560. Even if (I′) ends and the dynamic effect starts, the special lottery result is not shown. Therefore, the still image effects up to (I′) are non-notification still image effects.

As described above, at the end timing of the first non-notification still image effect (FIGS. 559 (C) to (D)), the still image is not faded out (without effect or the like on the still image) and is moved as it is. It has been switched to the physical display. That is, at the moment when the display is switched to the dynamic display, the entire still image displayed as the non-notification still image cannot be recognized by the player. On the other hand, at the end timing of the second non-notification still image effect (FIG. 561 (H') to (I')), the still image fades out and the display is switched to the dynamic display.

In this way, in the reach production in which the Daruma-san has fallen once, the player is further accustomed to the still image production by performing the non-notification still image production a plurality of times, and the player feels excessive tension with respect to the still image production. Can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as the number of non-notification still image effects increases, the player may get tired of the non-notification still image effects. Therefore, when non-notification still image effects are performed a plurality of times in the reach effect in which one Daruma-san has fallen, by fading out the image at the end of some non-notification still image effects, the non-notification still image effects Variation occurs, and the player is not bored even if a plurality of non-notification still image effects are performed. Even if the non-notification still image effect is performed only once in the reach effect in which Mr. Daruma falls, the image may be faded out at the end of the one-time non-notification still image effect.

The fade-out time in the non-notification still image effect accompanied by fade-out is preferably shorter than the still time of the image in the non-notification still image effect. This is because, if the fade-out time is longer, the tension increased by the display of the still image in the non-notification still image effect may be completely released during the fade-out time. In order to relieve the tension caused by the display of the still image, the fade-out time when the non-notification still image effect ends and the image fades out is longer than the still time of the image in the non-notification still image effect. Good.

In the example of FIG. 561, after the image displayed in the non-notification still image effect is faded out and completely erased, the dynamic display of “Daruma-san has fallen” is started in (J′). However, the dynamic display of “Daruma-san has fallen” in (J′) may be started during or after the fade-out of the image displayed in the non-notification still image effect.

Specifically, for example, the dynamic display of "Daruma-san has fallen" in (J') is started from the timing of (H') or (I'). In this case, for example, a semi-transparent image being faded out is displayed overlaid on the dynamic display of "Daruma-san has fallen" in (J'). As a result, it is possible to dynamically display to the player that "Daruma-san has fallen down" while leaving the lingering sound of the still image.

In addition, a first display time that is a display time of a still image in a non-notification still image effect accompanied by image fade-out, and a second display time that is a display time of a still image in a non-notification still image effect not accompanied by image fade-out. The lengths of and may be the same or different. For example, when the expectation of jackpot of the fall of Daruma is different depending on the appearance of the non-notification still image effect accompanied by the fade-out, the player is notified of the non-notification still image by the difference between the first display time and the second display time. By paying attention to the display time during the performance, it is possible to create a sense of further tension and anticipation.

For example, since the second display time is longer than the first display time, the length of the second display time can be closer to the length of the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time. By maintaining the balance of the length of time, it is possible to impress the player with the effects of both. However, it is desirable that the second display time be shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time in order to keep the balance of the time lengths between the effects. Note that the length of the second display time may be longer than the length of the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time.

On the other hand, since the second display time is shorter than the first display time, the difference between the total length of the first display time and the fade-out time and the length of the second display time can be increased. It is possible to strongly impress the player with a series of effects including non-notification still image effects and fade-out.

Further, the length of the third display time, which is the display time of the still image in the notification still image effect, and the length of the first display time may be the same or different. For example, when the third display time is longer than the first display time, the sense of tension can be increased in the notification still image that notifies the special lottery result. In particular, when the third display time is longer than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time, the effect becomes remarkable. The third display time may be longer than the first display time, and the third display time may be shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time.

Note that, as described above, the jackpot expectation degree may be different depending on the mode of the still image in the still image effect (for example, when a non-demon stands on both legs, stands on one leg, or poses as a swan). Big hit expectation is different). For example, a still image with a high jackpot expectation is displayed by performing a fade-out after a non-notification still image effect in which a still image with a high jackpot expectation is displayed (for example, a non-demon stands on one foot or a swan pose). It is possible for the player to clearly recognize it, and it is possible to improve the player's expectation.

On the other hand, for example, after a non-notification still image effect in which a still image with a low expectation for a big hit (for example, a non-demon standing on both feet) is displayed, the still image is immediately deleted by not performing fade-out. Since it shifts to the production of, it is possible to suppress the discouragement of the player. It should be noted that there is a fade in the case of a non-notification still image effect with a plurality of non-notification still image effects with different expectations, and there is no fade in the case of a non-notification still image effect without a plurality of non-notification still image effects with different expectations. , May be used.

It should be noted that when the image fade-out is being executed, it is desirable not to maintain the light emission mode of the lamp, which was performed in the immediately previous non-notification still image effect. Specifically, for example, when the image fade-out is being executed, not the light emission mode of the lamp used in the immediately preceding non-notification still image effect, but the dynamic display immediately after (the main character is "Daruma-san is rolling" Lamp! As a result, when the image fade-out starts, the player can recognize that the non-notification still image effect has ended, and the player can pay attention to the next effect.

Further, when the image fade-out is being executed, it is desirable not to maintain the sound output in the immediately preceding non-notification still image effect. Specifically, for example, when the image fade-out is being executed, not the sound output in the immediately previous non-notification still image effect, but the dynamic display immediately after (the main character is "Daruma-san has fallen!" The sound corresponding to the effect) is output. As a result, when the image fade-out starts, the player can recognize that the non-notification still image effect has ended, and the player can pay attention to the next effect.

In the example of FIG. 561, the non-notification still image effect without the image fade-out and the non-notification still image effect with the image fade-out are performed within one change (Daruma-san's fall reach effect). However, one of these non-notification still image effects may not be executed within the reach effect in which Daruma-san falls once.

Further, in the example of FIG. 561, the non-notification still image effect with the image fade-out is executed after the non-notification still image effect without the image fade-out, but the non-notification still image effect with the image fade-out is executed. After that, a non-notification still image effect without image fade-out may be executed. Since the non-notification still image effect accompanied by the image fade-out is executed, the player feels a lingering effect on the non-notification still image effect due to the fade-out, so the non-notification without the image fade-out executed thereafter is performed. You can also enjoy the still image production.

Note that the non-notification still image effect may be ended by an image effect other than fade-out as long as it can leave a lingering sound to the player. For example, changing the contrast, brightness, and/or transparency of an image, and monochromeizing or colorizing the image are examples of the image effect. Another example of the image effect is to superimpose another image or a moving image on the image displayed in the non-notification still image effect. Further, instead of fading out, for example, a part or all of the image is displayed in a manner that the image is cracked or a hole is opened, and a part or all of the display content of the image itself is changed, so that the non-notification stationary is performed. The image production may end.

In addition, even if both the reach effect in which Daruma-san performs the non-notification still image effect with fade-out and the reach effect in which Daruma-san does not perform the non-notification still image effect with fade-out is performed, both can be executed. Good. If both can be executed, it is preferable that the reach effect in which the Daruma-san falls, which performs the non-notification still image effect accompanied by the fade-out, has a higher jackpot expectation. Fade out can leave a lingering impression on still image production, but if the expectation of a big hit is nonetheless, the player will have a stronger impression when the special lottery result is out of order, and Mr. Daruma will fall. This is because there is a risk that interest in reach production will fade.

On the other hand, for example, the reach production in which Daruma-san does not perform the non-announcement still image production with fade-out falls down more than the reach production in which the non-announcement still-image production with fade-out falls. It may be high. As a result, regarding the reach effect that Daruma who performs non-announcement still image production with fade-out fell, leaving the impression to the player due to the afterglow of the fade-out, Daruma who did not perform non-announcement still image production with fade-out fell. With regard to the reach effect, it is possible to leave an impression on the player because the possibility of a big hit is high, and it is possible to leave an impression on the player in a well-balanced manner with respect to both effects.

Note that the notification still image effect may also be faded out at the end. Since the image fades out at the end of the notification normal image effect, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling by feeling the aftereffect of the effect connected to the big hit. ..

[20-6. Notification process selection reach production]
562, 563, and 564 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the notification process selection reach effect. The notification process selection reach effect is an example of the SP reach effect in which the still image effect may be executed.

In FIG. 562(A), the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state. In (B), the notification process selection reach effect has started. Further, in (B), the still image effect is started. In (B), on the left part of the effect display device 1600, an image of a gauge for suggesting the degree of expectation that the special lottery result in the change during execution is a big hit, on the right part of the effect display device 1600, The image of the patrol lamp for notifying one of the special lottery results in the middle (that is, directly showing whether the special lottery result is a big hit or a big hit without suggesting the jackpot expectation etc.) is static. It is displayed as an image.

In (C), the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 while the image of the gauge and the image of the patrol lamp corresponding to the notification process selection reach effect are displayed as still images. Further, one of the image of the gauge and the image of the patrol lamp (the image of the gauge in (C)) is displayed in the same bright mode as that of (B), and the other (the image of the patrol lamp in (C)) is displayed in the dark mode. ..

In the image of the effect operation unit 301, a display indicating that the notification method indicated by the image displayed in the bright mode is selected by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. Further, in the image of the effect operation unit 301, by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the image displayed in the bright mode and the image displayed in the dark mode can be exchanged (that is, the notification method is selected). The display shows that you can do it. Note that the image of the effect operation unit 301 may be displayed as a still image, and for example, the center pressing operation unit 303a in the image moves up and down, the rotation operation unit 302 in the image rotates, It may be displayed as a dynamic display such as an arrow moving in the image.

When the player presses the central pressing operation unit 303a in (C), or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) was displayed, the notification method displayed in a bright mode is selected. To be done. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, one (for example, the degree of expectation) may be forcibly selected, or the degree of expectation or one shot may be randomly selected. Announcements may be selected.

In addition, in (C), both the image of the gauge and the image of the patrol lamp may be displayed in a bright mode without changing from the state of (B). In this case, for example, in (C), the expectation suggestion is selected when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the left side, and the one notification is selected when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right side. An image indicating the selection method by operation is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in this case, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) was displayed, for example, one (for example, expectation suggestion) is forcibly selected, or an expectation suggestion is randomly made. Alternatively, one-shot notification is selected.

(D) is a state in which one notification is selected in (C). In (D), the still image effect ends and the stillness is released, and only the image of the patrol lamp is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600. Then, in (D), a dynamic display in which a patrol lamp is turned on is displayed as a display indicating that the special lottery result in the change was a big hit. In (E), an image that more clearly notifies that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed. Note that a predetermined movable body may be moved in (D).

In addition, for example, when the special lottery result in the variation is out of order, in (D), for example, a dynamic display in which the effect display device 1600 goes dark without the patrol lamp lighting up is displayed, and in (E), "Sorry. An image notifying that the special lottery result is out is displayed.

FIG. 563(D') is a state in which the expectation suggestion is selected in FIG. 562(C). In (D'), the still image effect is completed and the stillness is released, only the image of the gauge is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and "collect gauge" is displayed. The gauge can be accumulated up to 8 levels, and in (E'), the gauge is accumulated up to 3 levels, and a display (“Still more!”) indicating that there is an opportunity to accumulate the gauge is displayed on the production display device 1600. It is displayed. Note that, for example, only when the special lottery result is a big hit, the gauge may be set up to the maximum value of 8 stages.

In addition, after the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, the expectation degree suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has elapsed without operating the central pressing operation unit 303a. It is not necessary to increase the number of gauge steps in (D'). This is because there is a possibility that the player did not operate the central pressing operation portion 303a because he/she does not want to know the degree of expectation, and this is to satisfy such a player's desire.

In (F'), the state returns to the state similar to that in FIG. 562(C). However, the number of stages of the gauge displayed as a still image may reflect the number of stages accumulated in the immediately preceding effect as in (F'), or the gauge is completely accumulated as in (C). It may be displayed in a non-existent state.

(G′) is a state in which the expectation suggestion is selected in (F′). In (G′), as in (D′), the still image effect ends and the stillness is released, only the image of the gauge is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the message “Store gauge!” is displayed. To be done. However, it is different from (D') in that the gauge is accumulated from the number of stages accumulated in the immediately preceding effect.

In (H′), the gauge is accumulated up to four levels, and a display (“more and more!”) indicating that there is still an opportunity to accumulate the gauge is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (I'), the state returns to the same as in (F').

Then, when the expectation suggestion is selected and a series of effects for accumulating the gauge is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the expectation suggestion effect ends and is currently displayed at the end of the effect for accumulating the gauge for the predetermined number of times. A display is made to indicate that the number of stages of the gauge that is showing the big hit expectation degree (“to that!” in (J′)). (J') is a state at the end of the effect for accumulating the gauge for the predetermined number of times. In the state of (J'), the gauge has accumulated up to 6 levels.

In (H'), the image of the gauge is darkened and the image of the patrol lamp is displayed in a bright mode. Further, although the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed, the display prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, but the display prompting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is not displayed. In other words, after executing the effect of accumulating the gauge a predetermined number of times, in (H'), one notification is forcibly selected. That is, the number of gauge steps in (J') indicates the jackpot expectation.

FIG. 564(I′) shows the state where the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (J′), and shows the special lottery result by turning on or off the patrol lamp as in FIG. 562(D). In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of (J′), the process proceeds to FIG. 564(I′) even if the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed. Subsequently, in (J′), as in FIG. 562(E), an image that more clearly notifies that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed.

After selecting the suggestion of expectation, a still image effect of selecting the notification method again is performed (for example, FIG. 563 (F′), (I′)), but one notification is selected in the still image effect. In this case, as shown in FIG. 562(D), the one-shot notification indicating the special lottery result is given by the display of the patrol lamp.

The still display of the still image effect gives the player a feeling of tension and a sense of expectation, but since the player is still, some players find it lacking in fun. Therefore, in the notification process selection reach effect as described above, in the still image effect, it is possible to select the notification method of the special lottery result from the suggestion of the expectation or the one-shot notification, and thus even for such a player, the still image It can make you interested in the production.

Further, as described above, in the still image effect, while it is possible to make multiple selections regarding suggestion of expectations or one notification, it is possible to select only the patrol lamp of one notification in the final still image effect. It is set. As a result, in the notification process selection reach production, the special lottery result is finally shown by one notification. Further, in the notification process selection reach effect, since it is possible to select the expectation suggesting effect a plurality of times, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation. Even after selecting the expectation suggestion effect more than once, it is possible to switch to one-time notification, so that the player can know the special lottery result at a stage when he is satisfied with the expectation, and eventually the player can be notified. Never get bored.

In the above example, when the expectation suggestion was selected, the number of stages of the gauge increased in the production that accumulated the gauge, but the number of stages of the gauge did not increase and the production ends with the previous number of stages. You may. For example, if the gauge is below the predetermined level (for example, 0 level) even after the effect of accumulating the gauge a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) is finished, the big hit may be determined.

In addition, when accumulating the gauge, for example, a continuous striking effect is performed in which the player is urged to repeatedly strike the operation unit such as the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the number of stages of the gauge is increased according to the number of consecutive hits. You may break. However, the maximum number of gauge stages in the performance that accumulates the gauge each time is determined by the predetermined distribution based on the result of the special lottery before the start of the production, and after reaching the maximum number of stages, the operation section is repeatedly hit. However, no more than the maximum number of steps will be reached.

As described above, in the still image effect executed in the notification process selection reach, when the expectation degree suggestion is selected from the effects (FIG. 562(C)) in which both the expectation degree suggestion and the one-time announcement can be selected. Includes a first still image effect in which the continuous hit effect is not executed and a second still image effect in which the continuous hit effect is executed when the expectation suggestion is selected. Further, the still image effect executed in the notification process selection reach includes the third still image effect (FIG. 563 (H′)) in which only one notification can be selected.

The effective period of the rendering operation unit 301 may differ depending on the type of still image rendering. For example, after the third still image effect, the special lottery result that is most important to the player is forcibly shown, so that the player can obtain the special lottery result by his/her own operation. The effective period in is preferably longer than the effective period in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. Further, when the suggestion of the degree of expectation is selected in the second still image effect, the consecutive hitting effect that allows the player to enjoy checking the degree of expectation is performed by the operation of the player himself. Therefore, the effective period in the second still image effect is preferably longer than the effective period in the first still image effect.

Moreover, the size of the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed during the still image effect may be different depending on the type of the still image effect. For example, after the third still image effect, the special lottery result that is most important to the player is forcibly shown, so that the player can obtain the special lottery result by his/her own operation. It is desirable that the image of the effect operation unit 301 in is larger than the images of the effect operation unit 301 in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. Further, when the suggestion of the degree of expectation is selected in the second still image effect, the consecutive hitting effect that allows the player to enjoy checking the degree of expectation is performed by the operation of the player himself. It is preferable that the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the second still image effect is larger than the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the first still image effect so that the image can be executed.

Further, in the above-described example, one notification is selected by operating the central pressing operation unit 303a in the third still image effect, but a plurality of operating units (for example, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation are selected. One notification may be selected by prompting the operation of the operation unit selected from the unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302) and operating the operation unit. In this case, for example, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the selected operation unit.

Moreover, the image of the effect operation unit 301 may appear at the same time as the start of the still image effect, or may appear after the start of the still image effect. Further, the length of time from the start of the still image effect until the image of the effect operation unit 301 appears may be different depending on the type of the still image effect. For example, in the order of the third still image effect>the second still image effect>the first still image effect, the time from the start of the still image effect to the appearance of the image of the effect operation unit 301 is long.

The special lottery result is shown after the third still image effect, the continuous hit effect is executed after the second still image effect when the expectation suggestion is selected, and the first still when the expectation suggestion is selected. After the image rendering, the continuous stroke rendering is not executed and the degree of expectation is suggested. That is, since the important effects for the player are performed in the order of the third still image effect>the second still image effect>the first still image effect, the effect operation unit 301 is started in this order from the start of the still image effect. By prolonging the time until the image of appears, it is possible to give the player a period of time to prepare for the operation for starting the important effect.

In the example described above, the effect is described in which the gauge gradually accumulates up to a predetermined stage after a lapse of a predetermined time after the expectation suggestion is selected. Good. As a result, the player can immediately confirm the degree of expectation. In this case, at the same time as the expectation suggestion is selected, the gauge may gradually accumulate up to the predetermined stage, or at the same time when the expectation suggestion is selected, the gauge becomes the predetermined stage without passing through the intermediate steps. Good.

In addition, when the expected degree suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has passed without operating the central pressing operation unit 303a, for example, the image of the effect operation unit 301 is changed from FIG. 562(C). The erased image may be displayed, in which case the number of gauge steps need not be changed. As a result, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation does not increase unless the production operation unit 301 is operated, so that the player can be given an incentive to operate the production operation unit 301. However, in the final effect in which the expectation suggestion can be selected, even if the expectation suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has passed without operating the central pressing operation unit 303a, It is desirable that an effect that accumulates is executed.

In the example described above, the number of stages of the gauge was 0 at the timing before the player selected the suggestion of the degree of expectation (timing of FIG. 562(B)). All may be accumulated. However, if all the gauges are set so that the big hit is decided, and if all the gauges are made at that timing, the big hit is decided at that timing and the player selects the notification process. Since there is a possibility that the reach effect cannot be enjoyed to the end, in such a case, it is desirable that at most of the gauge, only a part of the gauge is accumulated.

Regarding the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the final state, the effects are put together, the color is changed according to the jackpot expectation degree (for example, if the gauge is a predetermined number of stages or more, red, the gauge is the predetermined number). If it is less than the number of stages, it may be white. As a result, not only the gauge but also the image of the effect operation unit 301 can make the player feel an expectation.

Further, in the notification process selection reach production, the image of the production operation unit 301 in the selection production other than the last that can select both the expectation and the one-shot notification, and the production in the final selection production in which only one-shot notification can be selected. The image of the operation unit 301 may be common. As a result, since the image of the effect operation unit 301 does not change even in the last state, the player estimates the jackpot expectation only based on the gauge level, so that the player's consciousness is concentrated on the effect in which the gauge accumulates. be able to.

Further, for example, the display period of the image of the effect operation unit 301 and the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 (the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 are the same. However, only the one notification can be selected. In the selection effect, the display of the image of the effect operation unit 301 may be started before the start of the effective period of the effect operation unit 301. The final selection effect is the player's expectation in the notification process selection reach effect. Is a production that can be enjoyed in the highest state, and by starting the display of the image of the production operating unit 301 before the start of the effective period of the production operating unit 301, the player can surely perform the last selection operation. You can enjoy doing it.

Further, the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 in the final selection effect in which only one notification can be selected is the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 in a selection effect other than the last in which both the suggestion of expectation and one notification can be selected. Longer is desirable. This allows the player to surely enjoy the last selection operation. Note that the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 in the final selection effect in which only one notification can be selected is the effective period of the effect operation unit 301 in a selection effect other than the last in which both the suggestion of expectation and one notification can be selected. It may be shorter or the same.

In addition, when the expectation suggestion effect is selected, a plurality of still image effects are executed, but even in the dynamic display performed during the plurality of still image effects, the expectation suggestion and one shot are performed. You may display the image of the production|operation production part 301 in selection productions other than the last which can select both notifications. Thereby, the player can prepare for the selection operation in the next still image effect.

[20-7. Hold set production]
565 and 566 are explanatory views showing an example of the hold set effect. The hold set effect is an example of an effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In FIG. 565(A), all the decorative symbols are changing, and there are three reservations. In addition, in (A), although five hold displays are displayed, the center hold display is a hold display corresponding to the change being executed, and each of the other hold displays is changed for each of the four subsequent changes. It is the corresponding pending display.

In the state of (A), the game ball B enters the starting opening (the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) and acquires a new hold, so that there is a possibility that the hold set effect is started. is there. In (B), the hold set effect is started by the above-mentioned trigger. Since the game ball B has entered the starting port and has acquired a new hold, there are four holds in (B). When the hold set effect starts, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect in which the great devil appears.

In (C), the still image effect is started, and the great devil appearing in (B) is displayed as a still image for a predetermined time. In the still image effect, the hold display on the effect display device 1600 does not change.

In (D), the still image effect ends, and the effect that the main character appears in the effect display device 1600 is executed by dynamic display. In (E), the protagonist character utters a line "Holding Meeting Chance!", and each of the suspension displays on the effect display device 1600 moves to the upper part of the protagonist character image.

In (F), in the effect display device 1600, the pending displays that have moved to the upper part of the main character are united to form one ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a courage ball). As a result, the hold display is temporarily not displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (G), a state in which the main character is throwing a courage ball is displayed. In (H), a state in which the demon hero receives the courage ball thrown by the main character is displayed.

In (I), the still image effect is started, and the large demon king receiving the courage ball is displayed as a still image. In FIG. 566 (J), which will be described later, since the special lottery result indicates that the holding is a big hit, the still image effect also functions as a judge effect.

In FIG. 566(J), the still image effect ends and the stillness is released, and the special lottery result of the pending change of “WIN!!” and the ongoing change is a big hit on the effect display device 1600. Is displayed.

Subsequently, in (K), in addition to the display in (J), a hold display is displayed in the original area, and a display indicating which hold corresponds to the special lottery result is a big hit. In the example of FIG. 566, the pending display corresponding to the one-to-one variation of the variation being executed shines together with the effect, and the special lottery result corresponding to this variation is a big hit. In (J) and (K), all the decorative patterns are changing.

The appearance timing of the effect indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit (effect in (K), hereinafter also referred to as big hit effect) may be immediately before or at the end of the variation being executed. As a result, the player's tension can be maintained until the end of the change in execution.

In the illustrated example, the big hit effect has a size that covers the hold display corresponding to the big hit variation, but may have a size smaller than the hold display. Specifically, for example, the big hit effect may be an effect (for example, the inside of the hold display lights up) that occurs only inside the hold display corresponding to the big hit variation.

Further, the jackpot effect may overlap a part of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot, and a part of the jackpot effect may be outside the hold display. In addition, the jackpot effect may be displayed on a layer that overlaps at least a part of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot and has priority over the hold display (that is, a layer on the front side of the player) in the effect display device 1600. . That is, in this case, at least a part of the hold display is hidden by the big hit effect.

In addition, when all the special lottery results of the pending changes and the ongoing changes are out of alignment, for example, in (J), all the special lottery results are out of line, such as “sorry...”. A display indicating that the fact is displayed is displayed, and the hold display is displayed again on the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as (B) to (D), that is, in the normal manner.

In addition, when there is a big hit change in the running change and the pending change, the big hit effect may be displayed after performing an effect similar to the above-described deviation. In this case, the jackpot effect may be displayed after displaying "WIN!!" as the revival presentation after the stray presentation, or the jackpot effect itself may be displayed without displaying "WIN!!" May be At this time, the big hit effect may be a change after the next change of the currently executed change and before the big hit change.

In addition, when there is no big hit change in the change in execution and the change in hold, the change in hold is quickly exhausted after the end of the hold set effect (specifically, for example, the change time is 2 seconds or less. It is desirable that a fluctuation pattern with a short degree is selected). The variation that the special lottery result is known to be out of order does not attract the player's interest, and if the variation time is long, the player's discouragement continues for the duration of the variation. This is because it reduces the interest.

Further, when there is a big hit change in the running change and the pending change, the change before the big hit change may or may not be quickly exhausted. As the fluctuations prior to the big hit fluctuations are quickly digested, the fluctuations that are known to be out of the special lottery result can be ended early, and the big hit game can be started. Efficiency is improved. On the other hand, when the fluctuation before the big hit fluctuation is not quickly digested, the player's feeling of excitement for winning the jackpot can be maintained during these fluctuations that are not quickly digested.

As described above, in the hold set effect, whether or not there is a change in which the special lottery result is a big hit is informed of the change in execution and the change in hold. Since there is a total of 5 fluctuations when the fluctuations being executed and the fluctuations being held are summed up, the pending collective effect is successful according to the jackpot expectation in the fluctuations for 5 times. For example, if the special lottery result of the variation being executed is out of order and the special lottery result of the next variation pending is a big hit, in the normal production, the production out of the variation of the current execution is performed, but the hold set. In the effect, an effect indicating a big hit in the variation during the execution is performed. In other words, the chances that time-consuming out-of-order effects will appear are reduced, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

As described above, at the end of the first still image effect (that is, the still image effect in the state where the hold display is displayed), whether or not there is a big hit change in the change being executed and the change being held. Do not show judge results.

Note that, for example, the hold change effect may be performed after the end of the first still image effect until the effect display device 1600 stops performing the hold display (for example, the period of FIG. 565(D)). Specifically, for example, the hold change effect is set so that the jackpot expectation of the change corresponding to the hold display changed to red is higher than the jackpot expectation of the change corresponding to the hold without changing the hold display. To do. The tension given to the player by the first still image effect is temporarily relaxed by the end of the still image effect, but the pending change effect is performed at the timing described above, so that the game is performed even during the period until the courage ball is formed. It can make people expect.

In the example of FIG. 565, the hold gathering opportunity is executed in (E) and the courage is formed in (F). However, even if the holding gathering opportunity fails and the courage is not formed, the production is executed. Good. Specifically, in (F), the formation of the courage ball fails, each hold display returns to its original position, and the position of the hold display is displayed as it is without moving until the fluctuation ends. Instead of the effects of (G) and (H), for example, an effect in which the hero character attacks the great devil with his bare hands is performed, and instead of (I), the great devil after being attacked is displayed as a still image. Still image effect is performed (that is, a still image in a mode different from (I) is displayed). Then, similarly to FIG. 566(J), whether or not there is a big hit change among the changes being executed and the changes being held is notified.

Note that the jackpot expectation in the case where the still image effect as the judge effect is performed after the success of the holding gathering chance is higher than the jackpot expectation in the case where the still image effect as the judge effect is performed after the failure of the holding gathering opportunity. .. In other words, when the hold group chance fails, the still image effect and the still image are released while the hold display is displayed and the special lottery result is notified, and the hold group chance succeeds and the hold is achieved. The jackpot expectation is higher when the still image effect and the still image are released in the state where the display is not displayed and the special lottery result is notified.

If the hold display is displayed during the still image effect, the hold display may be a dynamic display. For example, each hold display is displayed in a swaying or rotating manner, or even if the hold display itself is stationary, the brightness of each hold display changes, or the effect of the hold display changes. May be. By displaying the hold display as a dynamic display during the still image effect, the dynamic display and the still image are compared and recognized in a distinctive manner.

In addition, it is preferable to continuously display the jackpot effect until the variation with respect to the hold, which is shown to be the jackpot, ends. This is because it gives the player a sense of security.

However, on the other hand, if the display that the big hit is confirmed is displayed for a long time (until the change to the hold which is shown to be the big hit ends), it is seen by the next player with white eyes, which is unpleasant. Since it is not possible to deny the possibility of feeling, for example, it is displayed until just before the end of the running change, or until the start of the next change of the running change. The display may be made only for a relatively short time.

The relatively short time is, for example, a time shorter than the static display (I), a period less than half the dynamic display period (J), or less than half. The period and the latter half period of the dynamic display (J) may be set. By being erased at the start of the next change of the running change or the running change, the player's consciousness is directed to the big hit game state, so the player prepares for the big hit game (for example, how to hit at the start of the big hit). Be aware of changing to right-handed).

In the above-described example, the jackpot effect is displayed until the end of the change in which the special lottery result is a big hit, but the special lottery result may be erased during the execution of the change in which the special lottery result is a big hit and before the end. .. This allows the player to pay attention not only to the jackpot effect, but also to the changing production in which the special lottery result is a jackpot.

Further, when deleting the big hit effect, the big hit effect may be suddenly deleted, or the big hit effect may be gradually deleted (for example, the transparency of the big hit effect is increased to gradually disappear). By suddenly deleting the jackpot effect, no lingering effect of the jackpot effect is left on the player, so that the player's consciousness can be swiftly turned to the jackpot game. Further, by gradually deleting the jackpot effect, it is possible to leave a finish of the jackpot effect on the player and enhance the impression of the jackpot effect.

When deleting the big hit effect, another big effect may be applied to the big hit effect to delete the big hit effect. Specifically, for example, after another effect is applied on the big hit effect to make the big hit effect unrecognizable, the other effect is deleted, or another big effect is applied on the big hit effect. After making it recognizable, the jackpot effect is deleted along with the other effect. By applying another effect to the big hit effect and deleting the effect, it is possible to leave a finish of the big hit effect on the player and enhance the impression of the big hit effect.

[20-8. Split reach production]
567 and 568 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the divided reach effect. The divided reach effect is an example of the reach effect in which the still image effect may be executed. In FIG. 567(A), all the decorative patterns are changing.
When the big hit expectation rate is different depending on the decorative pattern that stops in the reach state (for example, the reach state of the "7" design is higher than the reach state of other decorative patterns), the reach of the big hit expectation degree is low. When the decorative pattern is stopped in this state, the player's feeling of uplifting may be reduced. In the split reach effect, a plurality of types of timing for determining the decorative pattern to be stopped in the reach state are provided, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's feeling of elation.

In (B), the display area in the effect display device 1600 is divided into upper and lower parts, and the same reach effect (the main character (white character in the figure) and the enemy character (black character in the figure) battle in the upper and lower display areas. Directing) is executed as a dynamic display. However, in one (upper) display area, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped in a reach manner, and in the other (lower) display area, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are changing. is there.

In (C), following (B), the same reach effect is executed as dynamic display in the upper and lower display areas, and the main character and the enemy character are attacking each other. Further, in (C), as in (B), in one (upper) display area, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped in a reach manner, and in the other (lower) display area. The left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are changing.

In (D), the display area (upper display area) in which the decorative design is stopped in the reach state is selected from the upper and lower display areas divided in (B) to (C). Further, in (D), the display content of the selected display area is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect is started. In the still image effect, for example, the display content displayed in the upper display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed as a still image on the entire effect display device 1600. Even during the still image effect of (D), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped (still) in the reach mode.

In (E), the still image effect is finished, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (E), as the display showing the special lottery result, an image in which the main character loses to the enemy character, a display of "sorry...", and a decorative design stopped due to a combination of deviations are displayed. Since the special lottery result is shown in (E) after completion of the still image effect of (D), the still image effect of (D) also functions as a judge effect.

568(D') is a state in which the display area (lower display area) in which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are changing is selected after (C). In (D'), the display content of the selected display area is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect is started. In the still image effect, for example, the display content displayed in the lower display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed as a still image on the entire effect display device 1600. In addition, in (D'), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed even during the still image effect.

In (E'), the still image effect is finished, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (E'), the battle effect of the main character and the enemy character is performed again, and at the same time, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are changed in the state where the reach mode is formed (which decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state). It is unclear in (E') whether to do it). Further, in (E'), the display "Which symbol is the reach!?" is displayed.

At (F'), the battle effect of the main character and the enemy character continues, and the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped in the reach state. At (G'), the still image effect starts. After the still image effect of (G') is finished, a special lottery result is shown in (H') described later, and thus the still image effect of (G') also functions as a judge effect.

Note that in the still image effect in (G′), the same still image as the still image in FIG. 567(D) is displayed. That is, the case where the display area in the reach state is selected from the split display status, and the case where the display areas in the non-reach state are selected from the split display status and via (D′) to (F′) Therefore, the still image in the still image effect is common. As a result, the player can be strongly impressed with the impression of the still image.

In (H'), the still image effect is finished, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (H'), as the display showing the special lottery result, an image in which the main character wins the enemy character, the display "Win!!", and the decorative pattern stopped by the combination of the big hits are displayed.

As described above, immediately after the start of the split reach effect, the display area is divided into upper and lower parts, the decorative effect is stopped in the reach state while the reach effect is performed in one display area, and the reach effect is performed in the other display area. Even the decorative pattern is changing in the reach state without stopping.

As a result, after starting the divided reach effect, it is not known which decorative pattern the reach takes until a predetermined time elapses, so that the player can obtain a feeling of tension and expectation even after the reach effect is started. In addition, by executing one of the display areas after selecting one display area from the divided display areas, the player can strongly recognize which display area is selected.

In addition, when a display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected from the divided display areas, after the still image effect is executed, an effect for recognizing which decorative pattern is in the reach state is provided. After performing the dynamic display, the decorative design is made stationary in the reach state, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

In addition, the jackpot expectation degree when the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected from the divided display areas, the jackpot expectation degree when the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected It is desirable that it is set higher. When the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected, there is a possibility that the reach state with the decorative pattern with a high expectation for a big hit (for example, the reach state with the “7” pattern) remains. is there.

However, in the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state, when the reach state is formed with the decorative pattern with a high expectation for a big hit (for example, the “7” pattern), the decorative pattern is fluctuating. The jackpot expectation when the display area is selected may be set lower than the jackpot expectation when the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected.

In the still image effect (FIG. 567(D), FIG. 568(D′)) after one display area is selected from the divided display areas, an effect that prompts the operation of a predetermined operation unit is executed. Good. In this case, for example, by operating the predetermined operation unit, the stillness is released and the effect proceeds.

It should be noted that in the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D′)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected, the decorative pattern is in the reach state because of the number of types of operation units that may be operated. It is desirable that the number of types of operation units that may be prompted to be operated in the still image effect (FIG. 567(D)) after the stopped display area is selected is larger.

Specifically, for example, in the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected, the operation of only the central pressing operation unit 303a may be prompted, and the decorative pattern is in the reach state. In the still image effect after the stopped display area is selected, there is a possibility that the operation of either the central pressing operation unit 303a or the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is prompted.

As described above, the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected also functions as a judge effect, so, for example, if the expectation of the judge effect is different depending on the operation unit that prompts the operation. Therefore, it is better that more operation parts may be operated.

Even if the number of types of selectable operation units is the same, the type of image that prompts an operation in the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D′)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected. From the number, it is desirable that the number of types of images prompting the operation in the still image effect (FIG. 567(D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected is larger.

Specifically, for example, in the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected, only the image in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in white or red may be displayed. In the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected, an image in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in white or red, or the main character inside the central pressing operation unit 303a May be displayed.

As described above, the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected also functions as the judge effect, so for example, the judge effect depends on the number of types of the image of the operation unit to be displayed. It is better that more images may be displayed in order to have different expectations.

In addition, the display area in which the decorative design is stopped in the reach state is selected from the effective period of the operation unit in the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D′)) after the display area in which the decorative design is changed is selected. It is preferable that the effective period of the operation unit in the still image effect (FIG. 567(D)) after being performed is longer. If the operation part is operated during the still image performance after the display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected, the judge effect starts, so the player operates the operation part during the still image performance. There is a demand for reliable implementation, and therefore, it is desirable that the period of validity be long.

Further, in the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected, it is desirable that the BGM that has been flowing until immediately before is still flowing. On the other hand, in the still image effect (FIG. 567(D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected, it is desirable that the BGM be stopped or the BGM volume be lowered. As a result, the BGM is linked to the movement of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern (BGM flows during the change of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, and the BGM stops or becomes smaller in the reach state). Particularly in the still image effect in the reach state, not only the image stops but also the BGM stops or becomes small, so that a feeling of tension can be strengthened.

However, even in the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected, it is desirable that the effect sound corresponding to the effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit is output. This is to surely prompt the player to operate the operation unit.

In addition, when the still image effect (FIG. 567(D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is finished and the dynamic display is started, a predetermined movable body may be operated. May be. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by operating a predetermined movable body at the timing, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is the special lottery result, and the player's uplifting feeling is improved. On the other hand, when the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D′)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected and the dynamic display is started, it is desirable not to move the movable body. .. This is because, even after the still image effect, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit, even though the effect for showing the special lottery result continues.

Further, when the still image effect (FIG. 567(D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected and the dynamic display is started, a predetermined sound may be output. Good. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by outputting a predetermined sound at the timing, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is the special lottery result, and the player's uplifting feeling is improved. On the other hand, when the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D′)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changed is selected and the dynamic display is started, the predetermined sound is not output. Is desirable. This is because, even after the still image effect, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit, even though the effect for showing the special lottery result continues.

The series of effects shown in FIGS. 568(E′) to (F′) may be repeated. Specifically, for example, in the first (F') effect, a reach is reached with a decorative design (for example, "6" design) with a low expectation for a big hit, and then (E') effect is performed again. Be seen. Then, in the second production of (F'), a reach state is reached with a decorative design (for example, a "7" design) with a high expectation for a big hit, and the production progresses to (G'). By advancing the effect in this way, in the first (F') effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's sense of expectation, even if the player reaches the reach state with a decorative design having a low expectation of a big hit.

In the divided display in FIGS. 567(B) to (C), different effects may be performed in one display area and the other display area. As a result, the player can enjoy two types of effects with one change. Further, when the big hit expectation degree of the effect displayed in each display area is different, the player selects not only whether or not the decorative pattern is in the reach state, but which of the effects having the different big hit expectation degree is selected. You can see Ruka with tension and expectation.

In the case where effects with different jackpot expectations are executed in each of the divided display areas, for example, in the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state, the effect with a high jackpot expectation changes, and the decorative pattern changes. A production with a low expectation for a big hit is being executed in the displayed display area. As described above, the jackpot expectation when the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected is lower than the jackpot expectation when the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected. By performing an effect with a high expectation for a big hit in the display area in which the symbols are stopped in the reach state, it is possible to suppress the player's discouragement when the display area is selected.

On the other hand, when effects with different jackpot expectations are executed in each of the divided display areas, for example, in the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state, the effect with high jackpot expectation changes, and the decorative pattern changes. A production with a high expectation for a big hit is being executed in the displayed display area. As described above, the jackpot expectation when the display area in which the decorative pattern changes is selected is higher than the jackpot expectation when the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected. When the display area is selected by performing a production with a high jackpot expectation in the display area in which the design is changing, an extremely high jackpot expectation is obtained, so that the player's feeling of uplifting is strongly improved. be able to.

[21. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the rear back movable decorative body 3110 in the rear rear production unit 3100, a transparent conductive material is provided behind the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A light emitting plate 3113 and a back rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided, and are mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c formed on the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be housed therein. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are caused to emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a changes from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light is emitted in the direction along the direction, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on the substantially entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. Then, the light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 that form the decorative member, so that the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative member having a light property (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) is light-emitted and decorated.

At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decoration body is formed. Since 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are configured to emit light, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a is irradiated with light toward the front. It is possible to increase the distance until the light is radiated forward, and to diffuse the light from the first LED 3114a widely and radiate it forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is made to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of emitting light in a dot shape. The seat 3112 can be uniformly illuminated to make it look beautiful, entertaining the player, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110, since the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the flat plate-shaped decoration members (the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-back direction is thin. It is possible to make it easy to secure a space for arranging the rear back movable ornament 3110, and arrange other effect members (back upper front rotating ornament 3410, rear rear rotating ornament 3440, etc.). It is possible to easily secure a space for playing the game, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is more entertaining to the player by providing various effect members.

Further, the decorative member (movable rear decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a are included, the embossed portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the embellished portion 3150, and the embossed portion is embossed. A depth effect can be added to the design of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind by the lens effect. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth (decoration portion 3150) can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the ornamental body 3111 and the pattern of the ornamental sheet 3112, and thus the thickness of the back and rear movable ornamental body 3110 ( The decorative effect does not decrease even if the size in the front-rear direction is reduced, and it is possible to attract or entertain the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 thinner. It is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects.

Further, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a behind the decorative body 3111 having the relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since 3112 is provided, it is possible to make the decorative body 3111 colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, and the cost for the decorative body 3111 is reduced. Can be made Further, by changing the design of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration portion 3150) of the decorative body 3111 (back movable movable decorative body 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

Further, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed by the light interference fringes, and the first LED 3114a of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided. From the other LED provided in the pachinko machine 1, light from the effect display device 1600, light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are holograms of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the light by hitting the portion, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, and the hologram can be strongly attracted to the player. This makes it possible to give a stereoscopic effect to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decoration body 3110, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling thinness even if the back-back movable decoration body 3110 is made thin.

Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by the hologram, the hologram includes the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having a relief portion such as 3111c, it is possible to give a feeling of depth to a pattern such as a hologram by the lens effect of the relief portion, which can attract the interest of the player strongly. The possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the hologram portion is provided in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

In addition, in the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is made flat so that the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The outer peripheral edge of 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration portion 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the back-back movable decoration body 3110. In addition to being able to do so, the decoration can be made to look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 (such as the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112) can be made more conspicuous, the decoration effect of the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be sufficiently exerted, and the back-and-back movable decoration body can be exhibited. By the decoration of 3110, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player can be provided.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with (abutted against) the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that the light between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 becomes light. Does not diffusely reflect, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exerted. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, the dimension of the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 can be reduced and the above-described operational effects can be realized.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and it is possible to decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111) by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, so that a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It is possible to show the game, to give the player a visual impact and draw attention to the player, to enjoy a large decoration, and to prevent a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are housed from the rear, the first LED housing of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is housed. By housing the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made as close as possible, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 can be front and rear. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

Further, the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 houses the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, as compared with the case where the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation plate 3113 is less likely to reach the light from the outer peripheral surface (for example, the central portion). However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at the site and irradiating light from the inner surface thereof, the site can be made to emit light brightly, and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet). 3112) can be uniformly decorated with light emission.

Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is of the side-view type, it is only necessary to accommodate the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. Light can be emitted from the inner surface (light receiving portion 3113i) of the portion 3113c in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects is reliably realized. be able to.

In addition, since a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide/radiation plate 3113, light can be radiated to almost the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration portion 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflection portion 3113e, and it is possible to easily deal with the change of the decoration of the ornamental body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

The back and rear movable decorations 3160 and 3170 can also achieve the same effects as the above. It should be noted that the periodic shake and rotation of the hold display and the periodic shake and rotation of the decorative pattern may be a series of effects repeatedly executed in the dynamic display during the still image effect.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and to a gaming machine (parrot machine) in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112 is shown. Not something to do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be a single decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

<Slot machine>
An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings by taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 569 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 570 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted, FIG. 571 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. FIG. 573 is an enlarged view of the Z1 portion of FIG. 572, FIG. 574 is an enlarged view of the Z1 portion of FIG. 572 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 576(a) is an enlarged view of the Z2 part of FIG. 575, and FIG. 576(b) is an enlarged view of the Z2 part of FIG. 575 showing the connector holder moved. 577 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 576(a), FIG. 578 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 579 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. 581(a) and 581(b) are perspective views of the main part of the case member for explaining the temporary holding state of the connector holder, FIG. 582 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, and FIG. 583 is a wiring relay member. 584, FIG. 584 is an exploded perspective view of the connector holder, FIG. 586 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 587 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another form, FIG. FIG. 589 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing the guide structure of the case member, FIG. 590 is a partial perspective view of the symbol variable display device showing another form of the handle, and FIG. 591 shows the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer main body side. 592 is a perspective view of the main part, FIG. 592 is a cross-sectional view of the main part showing the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the variable display device, FIG. 593 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, and FIG. A perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine, FIG. 595 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 594, FIG. 596 is a rear view of the heat dissipation port seen from the back side of the slot machine, and FIG. 597 is a part of the slot machine showing a power supply device. Sectional front view, FIG. 598 is a perspective view showing a state where the power supply device is looked up from below, FIG. 599 shows another form, and a side plate of the outer body and a main part cross-sectional view of the power supply device, and FIG. 600 is another form. 601 is a schematic sectional view of the illuminating device, FIG. 601 is a perspective view of a door-type front member showing a transparent plate and a light emitting unit in an exploded manner, and FIG. 602 is a perspective view of a door-type front member showing a transparent plate in an exploded view. 601 is a sectional view of a door-type front member with a transparent plate, which is equivalent to FIG. 601A-A line, FIG. 604 is a disassembled and assembled perspective view of hinge fittings, FIG. 605 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, and FIG. 607 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the member, and FIG. 607 is opened. 608 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle, FIG. 608 is a perspective view seen from the back side showing the upper half of the door-shaped front member, and FIG. 609 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the connector cut in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 610 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part of a door-type front member showing another example of the hinge fitting, FIG. 611 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part of the door-type front member shown in FIG. 610 during opening, and FIG. 612 is a model unit. FIG. 613 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening/closing member is opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 569 and 570, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer main body 100 having a front opening, and a door-like door that opens laterally on the front surface of the outer main body 100 with a rotating shaft 100a. A door-type front member 200 rotatably attached to the front body, a symbol variation display device 300 for varying a plurality of symbols by a driving means, a case member detachable from the outer main body 100 and having an opening 401 on the front surface. 400 and an image display body 500 for displaying an arbitrary image.

[1. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 569 to 572, the outer main body 100 has side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right sides of a bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 is installed on top of the side plates 102, 102 to provide a vertically long “mouth” in front view. It is formed in a letter-shaped frame shape, and a back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame to form a box shape with only the front face opened. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined rearward, and thus the opening of the outer body 100 has a rearward inclination. In addition, in the top plate 103, a plurality (in the embodiment, in an embodiment) in an area facing the upper bar 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 593) of the game machine installation island in a state where the game machine installation island (not shown) is installed. 4) through holes 132, 132... Are drilled.

[1-1. Outer body-partition plate]
A partition plate 105 in the shape of a shelf plate is provided in the outer main body 100 substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in a front view having a projecting portion 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. 569 and 570, and has vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends thereof. The side plates 102, 102 are fixedly attached to the inner surfaces thereof, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. A cylindrical projection (not shown) is formed on the mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 by burring processing (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the pilot hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-machined in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 to be positioned. Further, at the innermost portions on both sides of the partition plate 105, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer body 100.

[1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, from the medal ejecting device 110 for ejecting medals, which are game media, to the medal receiving tray 201 at the lower front surface of the door-shaped front member 200, and from the medal ejecting device 110. An auxiliary storage box 111 for storing medals that overflow is provided, a power supply device 112, and the like.

[1-1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-medal ejection device]
The medal discharging device 110 is a device body 110a having a built-in driving means, to which a hopper 110b for storing medals is attached, and a medal discharging port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device body 110a. Certain medals are sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the drive means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow gutter 110d for discharging an overflowed medal, and the above-mentioned auxiliary medal storage box 111 for medals faces below the projecting end of the overflow gutter 110d. The medal ejecting mechanism of the medal ejecting device 110 may be any known one, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[1-1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply device]
As shown in FIGS. 594 to 598, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion where three members of a bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, a side plate 102 on the left side when facing the front, and a back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. There is. The power supply device 112 is for supplying electricity to electric parts such as the medal discharging device 110 and is a component that easily generates heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to a mounting portion of the power supply device 112. The mouth 104a is opened.

The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is made of transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, so that it is easy to find an unauthorized operation on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 598) of the power supply device 112. The device case 112a includes an upper surface plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear surface plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front surface plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear surface plate 112c, and the inside of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r that covers the bottom (see FIG. 598). On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a facing the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state. However, this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. Will be blocked.

As shown in FIGS. 594 and 595, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is below the guard portion 102b. It is designed to allow one side to sneak in. As a result, even if the one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the guard portion 102b closes the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 599 shows another embodiment in which the guard part 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly projected to the side plate 102 side, and the tip of the guard part 102b is formed. It is designed to fit in the groove.

As described above, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer main body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is closed by the side plate 102 during use, It is easy to incorporate the substrate 112s and the like using the open surface, and it is not necessary to attach the cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s and the like are incorporated into the device case 112a, so that workability is improved.

A large number of vent holes 112g, 112g,... Are formed in the upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a so that heat is not trapped inside. .. The device case 112a is raised like a stilt by legs 112h, 112h provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-temperature relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,... Of the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat dissipation port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air behind the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If an inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 598) is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a to raise the ventilation space 112i, the height of the leg 112h and the heat dissipation port 104a can be increased. Even if there is a difference in height, the ventilation space 112i can communicate with the heat dissipation port 104a.

[1-1-2-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that projects from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. It is fixed to the outer body 100 by a combination of 112 m and a heat dissipation port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100.

That is, the outline of the heat dissipation port 104a is formed smaller than the outline of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat dissipation port 104a. Further, the projection 112m provided on the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is located at a position inscribed in the heat dissipation port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat dissipation port 104a in order to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It is composed of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 which is inscribed in the vertical side of the heat dissipation port 104a so as to resist the overturning operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, by simply pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112m into the heat dissipation port 104a, the rear surface (back side) of the device case 112a (upward) and FIG. At, the fixation to the right (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 in the left direction in FIG. 594. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted in a direction other than the pulling direction by a simple operation of fitting the protrusion 112m.

On the other hand, a plurality of through holes 112p for screws are formed in the mounting piece 112k protruding from the front plate 112d, and wood screws 112q are passed through at least one of the through holes 112p to fix the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. As a result, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted also in the pulling direction, so that the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[1-1-1-2-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving electric power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. In the past, a bulge portion was provided beside the heat radiation port 104a and the power cord was pulled out from the bulge portion. However, at this position, even if the power cords are bundled, there is a high risk that the power cord will be grounded. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and the power cord must be put out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for that, so that the slot machine 1 may be moved on a manufacturing line or between lines. There is a possibility that the power cord may slip on the ground or move under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1 and get caught there.

On the other hand, in the heat dissipation port 104a of the embodiment, the cord outlet 104b is expanded from the upper side thereof to the upper side, and the power cord is pulled out therefrom. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, the installation is completed simply by setting the power supply device 112 in the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and screwing in the single wood screw 112q. It is possible to significantly reduce the installation work. Further, according to the present invention, the fixing is completed by screwing on one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to visually recognize and can be surely fixed. .. By the way, conventionally, it is necessary to screw onto a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112, and in particular, the screw fixing to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize, and thus it may be forgotten.

Further, since the heat dissipation port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat dissipation port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra step and cost are hardly generated. On the contrary, since the position of the heat radiation port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are made to coincide for fixing, the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally molded, so that there is almost no cost. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a, which are useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112, can be implemented with almost no cost.

[1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 which is a core of wiring means described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. The back plate 104 is attached (see FIGS. 569 and 570), and a ventilation hole 133 for heat dissipation is formed above the wiring relay member 113.

[2. Door type front member]
571 shows the front side of the door type front member 200, and FIG. 569 shows the back side of the door type front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side of the front side, and an operation section 202 is provided at the substantially center of the front side. In the operation unit 202, an insertion slot 203 for inserting medals, an effect button 204 that can be operated by a player, and an insertion (drawing) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later. One-drop button 205 for instructing to drop), a MAX-insert button 206 for instructing to insert the maximum number (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and a medal selector 207 described later. A medal return button 208 for returning the coins to the medal tray 201, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (a payment release command) of medals stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and A starting lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300, three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c for stopping each reel 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, etc. are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the configuration is not limited to these.

Further, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the slot 203, a medal gutter 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207, and a return gutter 213 is connected to the lower side. The medal selector 207 is a known one that switches the flow path by turning on/off a built-in solenoid (not shown). When the player waits for a medal to be inserted by the player, the flow path is on the medal gutter 212 side, In addition, in a state where the insertion of medals is rejected, such as the insertion of medals exceeding the specified number, the flow path is set to the return gutter 213 side. The medal trough 212 is designed such that its tip end faces the hopper 110b of the medal ejecting device 110 when the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position covering the front surface of the outer main body 100, and the medal selector 207 is inserted from the insertion slot 203. The medals that have flowed through the medal gutter 212 pass through the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return gutter 213 is connected to the front side medal tray 201, and the medals flowing from the insertion opening 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201.

[2-1. Door type front member-transparent window]
The door-shaped front member 200 has a size that covers the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and an upper half portion thereof is covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. It is 214. The transparent window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the pattern variable display device 300 can be seen vertically side by side. The regions of the display body 500 and the pattern variable display device 300 are visually divided into upper and lower parts. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the pattern variation display device 300, the positions of the image display body 500 and the pattern variation display device 300 are switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[2-2. Door type front member-transparent window-transparent plate]
For the transparent plate 214a, a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a methacrylic resin containing rubber having excellent impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical characteristics, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used in the embodiment. ) Is a substantially upside-down trapezoidal shape, and has an edge member 214b that bulges to the front side with the side facing the player as the front, on the periphery of the three sides (the left and right sides and the upper side) excluding the bottom. 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a resin molding frame. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed around the periphery of the flat plate-shaped transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the pattern variable display device 300, bending and distortion are unlikely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 603, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid structure but a shell-like structure having an internal space, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or letters on its surface are incorporated in the internal space.

Note that in FIG. 602, the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. 603. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to the illustrated shape, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the position where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the peripheral edge of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, but may be provided at least on one side.

In addition, reference numeral 218 in FIGS. 601 and 602 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners above the transparent plate 214a, and is a screw threaded through the through hole 214c (see the enlarged view of FIG. 601) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 602 fitted between the edge members 214b and 214b. While the fixing member 218 serves as a corner decoration on the outside, the fixing members 218 are provided with respect to the through holes 200a and 214d (see the enlarged view of FIG. 601) provided at the corners of the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a, respectively. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door type front member 200, and thus plays a role as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door type front member 200.

601 to 603, reference numeral 217a is a light emitting body of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b is a reflecting member that supports the light emitting body 217a. As shown in FIG. 603, the reflection members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right sides are set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitting body 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the configuration in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitting body 217a can be arranged closer to the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it is as if it is a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. , Is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. The reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light of the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) toward the upper side of the slot machine 1. ing.

The light emitting unit 217 having the above-described configuration can perform an effect of appealing the occurrence of a big hit to the surroundings by turning on during a game, especially when a big hit occurs. In this way, by providing a highly appealing effect to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won the jackpot, and the gaze of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further enhances the game. In addition, by appealing to the surroundings that a big hit has come out, it is expected that the model will become more popular and the operating rate will be improved.

The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the plate-shaped bottom side of the door-shaped front member 200 is provided in the concave groove 219 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 602) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Insert it diagonally from the front side and fit it in a fitting type, and in that state, make the transparent plate 214a upright and bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-type front member 200, and further, of the door-type front member 200. It is fixed by screws 603 (see FIG. 569) passed from the back. FIG. 603 shows a main part of the door-shaped front member 200 cut at this time. As is clear from FIG. 603, if the player temporarily detects a foreign substance from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign object to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[2-3. Door type front member-locking device]
A lock device 215 that is opened and closed by using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end of the door-type front member 200.

[3. Pattern change display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and includes, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, 301c that can be individually rotated by a driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are incorporated and housed. It is a well-known one which has a device case 302 for performing a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c.

The device case 302 has a modified hexagonal column shape except for the three sides facing the front (player) from the octagonal column that is laid down sideways, and the bottom plate 304, the top plate portion 305, and the right side in FIG. 579. Of the right side plate 306, the left side plate 307 of the left side, a vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, an upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, the bottom plate 304 and the rear plate 308. It has a box shape surrounded by a lower swash plate 310 provided between the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and a part of the arc of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

Further, the top plate 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 which can be changed between a use state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate portion 305 is laid down. It is designed to be carried around.

The configuration in which the variable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 as described above is closely related to measures for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400, and thus the opening 401 of the case member 400 is provided with sufficient strength for cantilevering the image display body 500. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 traverses the opening 401, it obviously obstructs the insertion/removal of the device case 302 into/from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made changeable and is laid down on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can easily pass under the reinforcing bar 402. Therefore, only by providing the variable handle 311 on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the opening portion 401 of the case member 400 so as to cross the opening portion 401. Become. By the way, in the conventional device case, since the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle, there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar in the opening of the case member.

Although the handle 311 of the embodiment has a structure in which the handle 311 is changed by swinging between a standing use state and a lying non-use state, the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the non-use state is implemented. It is not limited to the form. For example, as shown in FIG. 590, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather and have retaining portions 315, 315 at both ends. Using the band-shaped handle 311 provided, the structure in which the center is pulled up from the non-used state shown in FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to a non-use state lying down.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 572 and 579, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is provided on the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 according to the embodiment, and the lower handle 316 is grasped to push the device case 302 or By pulling, the case member 400 can be easily put in and taken out.

[4. Case member]
The case member 400 has a size that substantially matches the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404, 404 erected on both right and left sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is provided upright on the rear edge, and the rear plate 405 and a top plate 406 that covers the upper surfaces of the side plates 404, 404 have a box shape having an opening 401 on the front surface.

In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear face plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plates 404, 404 and the inner surface of the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are reinforced by metal. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and metal reinforcing bars 402 that cross the opening 401 are provided between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. Then, below this reinforcing bar 402, as an installation area for the symbol variable display device 300, and below the reinforcing bar 402, as an installation area for the image display body 500, the opening 401 is further provided. A region surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is allocated as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409 which is a main control board is mounted on an inner wall surface of a rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub-board 510 (see FIG. 612)) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

As shown in FIG. 569, skylights 443 and 443 are formed on the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The skylight portions 443, 443 are divided into two parts with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, and each of them is an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132... Of the outer main body 100. It is located in a region including the intersection and is sufficiently wider than the through holes 132, 132... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight 443 is brought close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through hole 132 can be found out by groping on the basis of the peripheral edge of the skylight 443, so that the position of the throughhole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator cannot look into the skylight 443. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylights 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, it is possible to reduce the weight and further reduce the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement.

As shown in FIGS. 570, 573, 574 and 580, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 are provided on the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 so as to project the bosses 410 from the back plate of the outer body 100. The boss holes 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. The bosses 410, 410 are provided near the wiring window 411, which will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 570, 573, while the boss holes 114, 114 on the outer body 100 side are near the wiring relay member 113. Therefore, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 570, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A taper portion 413 is formed at an end portion of the recessed step portion 412 on the rear surface plate 405 side, the taper portion 413 extending in a rearward direction. The taper portion 413 guides the projecting step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The fitting with the concave step portion 412 can be smoothly performed. In this way, the case member 400 is guided straight to the inner side of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the recessed step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid or integrally press-formed on the plate 105, while a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 so that the wheel 414 rolls in the groove of the rail member 115. Good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 589, a convex rail member 116 is laid or integrally press-formed on the partition plate 105, while flanges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400. The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the collars 415 and 415 of the wheels 414.

Further, the case member 400 is stopped by the rocking lever type stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 569, 570, 586 and 591 while being set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIGS. 569 and 570, the stopper 117 is axially attached to the front end portion of the partition plate 105 and the two mounting members 118 and 118 vertically provided on the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 586. The operating position in which the case member 400 is partially engaged and the non-operating position in which the case member 400 is not engaged as shown by the phantom line in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is formed into a key shape as shown in FIG. 587 and engages with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

Further, the stopper 117 axially attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing the side plate 404 of the case member 400 and the locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the top plate 406 as shown in FIG. 591. With the case member 400 being pushed into a predetermined position, the operating posture and the non-operating posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400.

In addition, the rear surface plate 405 of the case member 400 is provided with a long hole-shaped wiring window 411 penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer body 100. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the pattern variable display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 572, 573 and 592, and the lower side of the main substrate 409. And a horizontally long empty space 417 on the upper swash plate 309 (or may be considered as a horizontally long triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main substrate 409) and the back. It functions as an opening that connects the plates 104.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 573 and 580, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf plate-like temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially middle position of the height of the empty space 417. Further, on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, recesses 419 and 419 are formed as wiring passages that pass through to the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

If the arrangement of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300, the wiring window 411 will be the reel 301a of the symbol variable display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c, the horizontal plane HL passing through the center of rotation and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height positions of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are set to the lower limit, that is, the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, they are arranged.

[5. Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-shaped unit that is capable of displaying an image and includes at least a liquid crystal display (a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening/closing member 90 (see FIG. 612) that is closed at. Note that the image display body 500 is attached with the hinge metal fitting 420 to the reinforcing member 407 provided on the side plate 404 on the left side of the case member 400 in FIG. 579 (see the hatched portion in FIG. 579 for the mounting position), and is rotated by the hinge metal fitting 420. It is supported freely.

Further, as shown in FIG. 612, a sub-board 510 is assembled on the back surface side of the image display body 500. Therefore, it becomes possible to integrally configure the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-board 510, the handling becomes easy, and the wiring connecting them can be omitted, and the wiring work in the case member 400 can be performed. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-board 510 appears so as to project from the inside of the case member 400, so that workability with respect to the sub-board 510 can be significantly improved.

[5-1. Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 604 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. Since the hinge fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge metal fitting 420 is fixed to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, the fixing member 420a, the rotating member 420b to be attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 604), and the rotating member 420b. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the member 420a.

The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a lateral fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf board, one end of the long link 420d is a pin P1 on the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e, and a short link is on the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the pivoting member 420b of the hinge fitting 420 has a sideways bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf board, one end of the long link 420d is a pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. Further, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

In this way, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 form a four-bar rotary chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. 605. A so-called bi-lever mechanism is constructed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is used as a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 605(a) to 605(c), the both lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory about the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. In other words, the hinge fitting 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the rotation outside of the image display body 500. The distance from the edge is set to be almost constant.

The long links 420d and the short links 420c are set with overlapping regions 420g and 420h so as to vertically overlap each other when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long links 420d). The region 420g is bulged in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), and pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are coaxially aligned with each other and a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) is inserted to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the both lever mechanisms to lock the image display. It is for fixing 500 to the open position.

[5-2. Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 579 and 580, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 (on the right side in FIG. 579) opposite to the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420. The piece 421 is pivotally mounted, and when the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 579, the tip end thereof engages with the receiving portion 508 provided on the back side of the image display body 500, and in this state. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the opposite direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the image display body 500 becomes rotatable around the hinge fitting 420. Normally, in the state before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while the image is displayed when the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100. The display 500 is unlocked so that it can be rotated.

[5-3. Image Display-Connector]
By the way, since an image display body 500 that can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the case member 400 is operated. Must first open the front door member 200 on the front side and then open the image display body 500 on the back side, which may reduce workability and cause trouble. .

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to be the same as the rotation direction of the door-type front member 200, and the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-type front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. That is, the image display body 500 is rotated with the door-shaped front member 200, and it is possible to visually recognize not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by a single lateral opening operation.

Here, as described above, in the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 of the embodiment, the rotation locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-type front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge metal fitting 420. Although it is designed to approximate a rotation locus with the center of rotation as the center of rotation, there is still a relative deviation in the movement of the two. Therefore, in the connector 700 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 608 and 609, the fixed sheath member 701 is formed on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500 and slid inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is housed freely, and the tip of the rod 702 is rotatably connected to the rear surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the locking device 215) by a stopper shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 607, the image display body 500 is opened/closed together as if the image display body 500 is an accessory of the door-type front member 200 in association with the opening/closing of the door-type front member 200, and both of them are generated at that time. The rod 702 of the connector 700 moves in and out of the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative displacement of the movement.

The maximum protruding length when the rod 702 is most protruded from the rotating outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is as follows when the image display body 500 is at the open position (for example, when the image display body 500 is opened by 90°). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the connector.

Further, the stop shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the locking device 215 so as to be vertically movable, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been done. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved upward against the bias of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving the stopper shaft 703 upward and floating the lower end. That is, the stopper shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip end portion of the rod 702 and held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

Further, in FIG. 608, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 of the fixed sheath member 701. It is intended to be housed and held inside, and engages with the hooking wall 702b at the end of the groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the blind movement of the rod 702. The rod 702 is provided with a tab 706 protruding from the side surface thereof in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction, and the stopper 704 is unlocked by pinching the tab 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like this. Further, a retaining piece 701a is hung on the bottom surface of the fixed sheath member 701 on the front end side and inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining pieces 701a come into contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 is most protruded, and prevent the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

Further, in FIG. 608, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion provided on the rear surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 engages with the reinforcing bar 402 that crosses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 579, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided with a slide-type guide section 402a that is inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. The engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably (replaceable) attached to the image display body 500. There is.

By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation loci of the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described expandable rod-type connecting tool 700, and is made by a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 collides with the image display body 500 that is stopped while the door-shaped front member 200 is open, which impairs smoothness. There is a risk. On the other hand, for example, the image display body 500 may be provided with a biasing means such as a coil spring so as to always bias in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-type front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 closes by itself while pulling the connector by the action of the biasing force, so that the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for accompanying the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge metal fitting 420, which is one element for accompanying rotation in the above description, is not limited to the structure of the both lever mechanism as described above, and a single pin 420k as shown in FIG. 609 and FIG. It may be a simple one that rotates the image display body 500.

In the structure in which the attaching means of the image display body 500 to the case member 400 has a hinge structure and the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door, the locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above ( When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, it is said that the case member 400 is basically kept locked while being mounted on the outer body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary such as checking the wiring work space 408. It is possible to select handling, and in that case, important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub-board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, which is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. ..

A gap 10 is provided before and after the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is inserted by a finger passing through the gap 10. You can grab it. In addition, a handle port 422 is formed in a front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (a reinforcing band 444 between the sky window portions 443 and 443), and a finger passing through the handle port 422 causes the top plate 406 to move. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be appropriately used as the handle port 422 and the gap 10 depending on the handling place and posture. For example, it is more balanced to carry the case member 400 in a bag shape using the handle port 422 at the time of transportation before incorporating the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, while the case member 400 attached to the outer main body 100 is shown in FIG. As described above, since the handle port 422 is hidden behind the outer main body 100 and a finger does not enter, the case member 400 is pulled out by hooking the finger on the reinforcing member 407 through the gap 10. A lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 572 and 579) of the device case 302 described above projects from the center of the front surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer main body 100 is pushed or pulled by the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with a screw, and thus the lower handle 316 is provided in front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Equal to

[5-4. Image display-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire area of the opening 401 of the case member 400 above the reinforcing bar 402. Further, on the lower side of the image display body 500, a frame member 501 that integrally surrounds a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the symbol variable display device 300 in a frame shape is integrally hung. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300 are framed by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 includes a light-emitting source such as an LED, a light-emission control board for controlling the light-emitting source, and a decoration member arranged in front of the light-emitting source and capable of transmitting light. Parts are provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 will be described below as a front opening/closing member 90 (see FIG. 612).

[5-4-1. Image Display-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
Illumination devices 502 are provided above and below the back side of the frame member 501, and the illumination device 502 brightly illuminates the symbol of the symbol variable display device 300. Since the frame member 501 is vertically provided below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variable display device 300, the light source can be brought close to the symbol variable display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 in such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the illuminating device 502 in the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low light amount as compared with the conventional illuminating device.

As shown in FIG. 572, the illumination device 502 exemplified as the embodiment has a strip-shaped substrate elongated in a direction orthogonal to the paper surface of the drawing (the width direction of the slot machine 1 and the same direction as the rotation axis of the reels 301a... ). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in 503. The lower illuminating device 502 has the LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is covered with, for example, a milky white translucent lid plate 505. The upper illuminating device 502 is arranged with the LED 504 facing downward in a translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section and having a milky white color, for example.

Note that the upper lighting device 502 is installed so that the lighting direction is obliquely downward toward the player side, that is, toward the transparent plate 214a side from directly below as shown in FIG. 572. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 572) of the main irradiation area of the LED 504 having a relatively strong directivity is obliquely directed to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a.

If a rod-shaped light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the illumination device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 572 is changed to a plate-shaped or concave reflection member that encloses the light source, and direct light is emitted. It may be set so that the center line of the main irradiation area, which is directed by the total sum of the reflected light, obliquely strikes the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. If the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a as described above, even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, there is almost no effect.

According to the experiment, when the illumination direction of the illuminating device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the curved specific portions of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are strongly reflected and become difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is obliquely directed to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the reel outer peripheral surface is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, 301c It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason is that the light emitted from the illuminating device 502 hits the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused over the whole, or the transparent plate 214a is illuminated brightly so that the reel 301a, It is presumed that a wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or that they are synergistic.

The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can be applied to the lower illumination device 502, and of course, can be applied only to the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. Note that in FIG. 600, the upper lighting device 502 in FIG. 572 is arranged on the lower side, and the lower lighting device 502 is arranged on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the lighting device 502 is “lower”. And "bottom" should be read as "top".

By the way, when an LED is adopted as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) it is driven at a low voltage, so that it is driven at a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at startup and about 600 V at operation). The safety is higher than that of the cold cathode tube of (b), the life is longer than that of the cold cathode tube, (c) It is more durable than the cold cathode tube which is a glass tube, and (d) the width of the production is possible because of the multicolor emission. (E) It is lighter than the cold-cathode tube used in combination with the inverter, and thus the load of the hinge fitting 420 supporting the image display body 500 is small.

[6. Wiring means]
For example, each of the insertion buttons 205 and 206 and the starting lever 210 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “generic” as a generic name thereof) attached to the outer main body 100, such as the medal emitting device 110, the power supply device 112, and the operation unit 202 of the door-shaped front member 200. It may be referred to as “main body side electric component”) and, for example, the main board 409 or the like in the case member 400 (there may be simply referred to as “case member side electric component” as a general term for the case member side electric component). Connected to each other. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, since the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 612 and 613) including the front opening/closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100, replacement of the model unit 50, etc. At this time, a rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electric component (case side electric component) and the case member side electric component.

[6-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 582 is attached to the upper portion of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. As shown in FIGS. 572 and 573, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. There is. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 that is screwed, a cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two large and small in the embodiment) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as large and small in the embodiment) housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120. Sometimes referred to as “connector connection terminal board”) 122 and 123.

Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 582 and 583 is fixedly attached to the attachment plate 120 and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with a connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 582 and 583 is mounted in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed, freely movable state, and thus the enlarged view of FIG. 583. It can be moved in the vertical direction as shown in, and can also be moved in the horizontal direction. The small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that forms a pair with the connector 427 at the tip of the harness 426 that is connected to the case-member-side electrical components other than the main board 409. It should be noted that the connector 125 and the connector 124 are board fixing types that are fixed to a printed board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standard ones are used.

Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 projecting from the openings 126 and 127 side by side, and a lower half. And a tunnel-shaped wiring duct 129 projecting toward the front of the section.

The main body side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 pass through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or are bundled in a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 569, the outer body 100 is distributed to the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by the alternate long and short dash line L in FIG. Through the wiring openings 109 provided at the back of the partition plate 105, they are respectively connected to the main body side electric components. Of course, when there is a main body side electric component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 569) in the region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical idea can be understood.

(A) On the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, between the horizontal plane passing through the center of rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300 and the horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, self The wiring window 411 is formed at a height where the lower side is located.

(B) On the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, the wiring relay member 113 that relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electrical components and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electrical components is installed.
(C) A vertical wiring path is formed along the inner surface of the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 for passing wiring.
(D) The main body side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 are guided to the side of the case member 400, and from there, connected to the main body side electric component through the wiring path.

In the gaming machine provided with the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wiring 119 does not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100. Since it bypasses the wiring route provided along (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 578)), the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. In comparison with the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wiring 119 passes substantially behind the center of the back plate 104 and passes behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the diameters of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are reduced. Can be large. It should be noted that the larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force during rotation.

[6-2. Wiring means-connectors 425, 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 that are connected to the electric components are respectively connected.

The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-shaped attachment piece 431 that has a through hole 430 substantially at the center thereof and is projected on both sides of the holder main body 429. The wiring relay member 113 is composed of a well-known button type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nilatch”: registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, as shown in FIGS. 573 and 576(a). The attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support tube 128, and the button type panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support tube 128 and locked. Therefore, the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, so that the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 are not disconnected.

[6-2-1. Wiring relay board-connectors 425, 427-temporary fixing shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 425. The 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary shelf 418 provided on the case member 400.

As shown in FIGS. 573, 574, 580, and 581, the temporary fixing shelves 418 are shelf-plate-shaped members facing the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400, and are shown in FIG. Thus, the substantially horizontal bench part 433 on which the connector holder 428 is mounted, the bench side plates 434 erected at both ends of the bench part 433, and the three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from the bench side plates 434. , 435. A space is provided between the center one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 and the other upper and lower two pieces so that the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted therein. Note that one bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hooking portion 436 is extended at a tip thereof, and is supported at one end by applying a force to the finger hooking portion 436 with a finger in the X direction shown in FIG. 576(b). It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and in the bent state, the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435. The imaginary line in FIG. 576(a) shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook 436 is bent into a key shape, and by doing so, the connector holder 428 can be detached as if pressing a button as indicated by arrow Y. You can do it easily.

Then, as shown in FIG. 574, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. By fitting it between 435, the connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing rack 418. Of course, even if it is called temporary fixing, the connector holder 428 is set so as not to come off from the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the work of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer body 100, the connectors 425, 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424, 426 hit the parts in the case member 400, and of course, the parts. There is no danger of damaging yourself.

Then, as shown in FIG. 576(b)→FIG. 576(a), in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one of the bench side plates 434 is bent outward as described above. If the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 of itself is in contact with the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are the connectors of the wiring relay member 113. Since it fits into 124 and 125 (details of which will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state to lock the attachment piece 431 to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by the chain double-dashed lines in FIGS. 573 and 574, if the guide rail 440 for guiding is provided on the bench portion 433, it is sufficient to push the connector holder 428 inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 as a support base and is separated from the case member and does not come into contact with the outer body 100. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the above description, the following technical ideas can be understood.
(A) an outer body having a box-like shape having a front surface opened and a back surface covered with a back plate, and including a power supply device and other main body side electric parts;
(B) A model unit provided with a pattern variation display device for varying a plurality of symbols on a case member that is detachable from the outer body, and other case member side electric parts,

(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body to relay the main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wirings connected to the case member side electric component,
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring,
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector,
(F) a temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder,

(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member before the model unit is attached to the outer body. In the state where the model unit is mounted on the outer main body, the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means so that the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member (i) a gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the mounting of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are separately performed. In contrast to this, for example, the connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method is conceivable in which the connectors are automatically coupled by the operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a large load is applied to the connector coupling portion, which makes the reliability uncertain, and there is a problem in that costly measures are required. is there.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention has a structure in which one door type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100 and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-type front member is divided into upper and lower two stages, and the upper door-type front member is a component of the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may become unstable. There is a problem that a new crime prevention structure is required for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door type front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is connected to the component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and during playing. Further, since only the model unit 50 is the replacement target when the model is changed, and the door-type front member 200 is not the replacement target, the burden on the amusement hall for changing the model is reduced.

[6-2-2. Coupling of connectors 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to the single connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425, 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 at the predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the difficult problem of "correct positioning" of the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 is caused. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 on the side of the wiring relay member 113 is not accurate, the connectors 425, 124 and the connectors 427, 125 cannot be collectively coupled. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at a mass-production cost. As a means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector provided with a mechanism for increasing flexibility at the time of joining without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still heavy.

On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector substrates 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113, which is a substrate supporting member, are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are attached to the respective connectors, and at least one of the connector substrates 122 and 123 is wired. The relay member 113 is non-fixedly accommodated in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121, and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (the "orthogonal" here is not strictly 90 degrees). It means that it is about 90 degrees according to the common wisdom of society.) In such a structure, when the connector 425 and the connector 124 are set as the coupling sights of the connector holder 428, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position between the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 will move and the deviation will occur. Since it is moved for correction, the connector 427 and the connector 125 can be connected.

In the above gaming machine, if the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connectors due to manufacturing errors or the like, Since the non-fixed connector connecting terminal board floats together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors that are not the connection target. Therefore, it is possible to collectively connect the connectors of a plurality of systems by using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is of a general-purpose and inexpensive type such as the DIN standard that is used by soldering it to a printed circuit board, and the cost is also low.

Further, the connector holder is securely fixed to the wiring relay member by a fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark), and further to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member. On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via the flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. .. Therefore, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the model unit. No load is applied to the department. Therefore, the reliability of connector coupling is very high.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is allowed to float and the large connectors 425 and the connectors 124 are set as the coupling reference as in the embodiment, as compared with the opposite configuration, is the connector 425, 124. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the small connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easier to automatically correct the deviation. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 577, the connectors 425 and 124 are configured to be coupled to each other before the other connectors 427 and 125, which facilitates the alignment of the connectors for coupling.

In addition, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 577, the chamfered portion C (at the peripheral corner portion of the convex tip of the convex connector 425, 427 and/or the peripheral corner portion of the insertion port of the concave connector 124, 125). If the chamfering is linear or curved, the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C improves the connectivity between the connectors.

Further, as in the embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are allowed to move freely, it is possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be allowed to move freely. In that case, the same effect as above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. 585. In this example, the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428 is provided with a receiving tube 429a provided with a female screw, while ear pieces 427b having play holes 427a are formed on both sides of the connector 427, and the receiving tube 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. A play hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted in the connector 427, and a screw 427c with a washer prevents the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the play hole 427a and the receiving cylinder 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be integrally fixed to the mounting plate 120. Further, in the embodiment, the two connectors are treated as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 572 and 580, it is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variable display device 300 on the back side of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 that penetrate the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are formed near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the pattern variation display device 300 to the main board 409 and the like, and in FIG. 579, a right side surface of the device variation display device 300 toward the device case 302 ( A cable 313 (see FIG. 580) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-type front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is provided as shown in FIG. 580. The cable 313 is housed in the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 and connected to the main board 409 or the like. It should be noted that the cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not drop out from the cable groove 437.

However, the main substrate 409 and the like and the reel substrate 312 are both electric members on the case member side inside the case member 400, and originally, it is not necessary to draw the cable 313 out of the case member 400. The reason why the wiring holes 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are provided in the case member 400 so as to bypass the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

The reel board 312 is installed at a non-hinge side of the door-type front member 200 among the side surfaces of the pattern variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of workability of wiring for inserting and removing the connector in a limited space. Is preferred. On the contrary, if the reel board 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-type front member 200, the door-type front member 200 (see FIG. 569) that has been fully opened and the reel board 312 are located close to each other. Because they face each other, it is impossible to secure a large work space required for inserting and removing the connector.

On the other hand, on the other hand, it is assumed that the connecting portion of the substrates (main substrate 409, sub substrate 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel substrate 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. The cable 313 crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or conversely, the cable 313 may be hooked when the device case 302 is pulled out.

On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 so as to bypass the cable 313 to the outside, as in the embodiment, the above-mentioned trouble of the cable 313 does not occur. Further, it is better to perform the wiring work in a state where the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel substrate 312 is also a wiring cost. There is a margin to say. Therefore, the cable 313 is loosened with the device case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the looseness of the cable 313 becomes large depending on the amount of pulling out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the inner corner of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. You can escape the loose part of the.

Further, in the case where the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, it is between the inner side of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. The wiring using the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 does not need to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables that traverse the inside of the case member 400.

Besides, in FIG. 579, reference numeral 441 is a function separation relay terminal plate.

The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a completed product in which the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island in the game arcade, but at this time, the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the game machine installation island top bar 600 are made of wood screws or the like as shown in phantom line in FIG. In the case of stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight portion 443, and The fixing member 601 is tightened over the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver to fixedly connect the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the game machine installation island. Since a plurality of through-holes 132 are provided, they can be arbitrarily selected and used from among them, if necessary. For example, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper rail 600 can be selected even if the position or size of the upper rail 600 varies. In addition, when the game machine is entirely replaced, if the through hole 132 used is changed, it is possible to prevent a harmful effect that a hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper crosspiece 600 (so-called stupid hole formation).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 593, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is cooled by a cooling fan (not shown) of the image display body 500. , And reaches the ventilation hole 133 of the back plate 104 from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S, and then escapes to the inside of the game machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, and this acts as a barrier to block the gap S in a wide range, so that the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked at this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 is blocked. It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[7. Design of each reel, design row]
On each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, as shown in FIG. 614, a symbol string (a total of 21 symbols shown in the array numbers 0 to 20) which is configured by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. Is attached to the reel band (pattern band). FIG. 614 shows a state in which the symbol arrays described on the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are two-dimensionally developed. In addition, the above-mentioned array number is conveniently shown in order to identify the symbols arranged in the symbol sequence. Further, in FIG. 614, the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached is shown as a left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached is shown as a middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached is shown as a right reel. In the description of the above, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are also referred to as necessary.

Each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of continuous symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, which are openings 401 (also referred to as symbol display windows; It is arranged so as to be visible through the display window 401) (see FIG. 615 described next).

Further, the types of symbols are, as shown in FIG. 614, “7” symbols painted in red (hereinafter referred to as “red 7 symbols”)”, “7” symbols painted in blue (hereinafter “ "Blue 7 design"), "BAR design", "Cherry design with cherry design", "Watermelon design with watermelon design", "Replay design", "Bell design" "Bell pattern", "designated as "right" (hereinafter referred to as "design")", "designated as "positive" (hereinafter referred to as "design")" is there. The bell pattern can be divided into a "bell 1 pattern" in which one star is drawn and a "bell 2 pattern" in which two stars are drawn, depending on the number of stars drawn in the bell. it can.

In FIG. 614, the "red 7 pattern" is two of array number 3 and 6 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 12 in the reel band 321b, and array number 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. The "blue 7 pattern" corresponds to one of array number 16 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 15 in the reel band 321c. The "BAR symbol" corresponds to one of the array number 11 in the reel band 321a, two of the array numbers 6 and 9 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array number 2 in the reel band 321c. The "cherry pattern" is one of the array number 10 in the reel band 321a, three of the array numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and the array numbers 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. The two correspond. There are five "replay symbols", which are array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17 on the reel band 321a, and array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, and 11 on the reel band 321b. No. 16·5 corresponds to the five reel numbers 321c, which are array numbers 1, 5, 8, 13, and 17. "Bell 1 pattern" has three array numbers 13, 15, and 18 on the reel band 321a, and five array numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18 on the reel band 321b. In the reel band 321c, the three array numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond. The "bell 2 pattern" corresponds to three array numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a and two array numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. "Watermelon design" has three array numbers 9, 14, and 19 in the reel band 321a, two array numbers 4 and 13 in the reel band 321b, and an array number 3 in the reel band 321c.・The four numbers of 6, 11, and 20 correspond. The "significant symbol" corresponds to one of the array number 20 in the reel band 321a, one of the array number 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array number 18 in the reel band 321c. The "regular pattern" corresponds to one of array number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. Note that the types of symbols are merely examples, and are not limited to these types.

[8. Frame member]
FIG. 615 shows an enlarged view centering around the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401 in the slot machine 1 viewed from the front. According to FIG. 615, a symbol display window 401 is formed in the central portion of the frame member 501, and a plurality of indicators (corresponding to “various indicators” described later) including lamps and LEDs around the symbol display window 401. Are shown to be located. Then, a part of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is made visible through the symbol display window 401. Further, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged above the frame member 501, and the image and the like (including moving images) displayed on the image display body 500 are visible to the player. Is becoming In the following, each of the above components shown in FIG. 615 will be described in detail.

[8-1. Design display window]
As shown in FIG. 615, from the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols in the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c can be visually recognized. From the top of the three positions where this symbol is displayed, "upper row (or upper row position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301a is displayed), "middle row (or middle row position)" (for example, , The position where the "replay symbol" of the reel 301b is displayed), and the "lower stage (or the lower position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301c is displayed).

From the above, in the symbol display window 401, it is possible to display "number of columns x number of reels" symbols. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of 9 symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 from "the number of stages (3) x the number of reels (3)".

Various lamps are provided on the left end of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be hereinafter unified as a display panel 501) (on the left side as viewed from the symbol display window 401), among which “BET1” and “BET2” are provided. ", BET3" is a BET lamp (bet lamp) 614. The numbers of the BET lamp (the above-mentioned "BET1", "BET2", "BET3" numbers 1, 2 and 3) are Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets and the number of medals bet), that is, "1" is 1 bet (the number of medals bet is 1), and "2" is It means that 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2) and “3” correspond to 3 bets (also called a MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

The effective sequence is determined according to the number of bets. This "effective sequence" is also called an effective line. In the following, they are collectively referred to as the effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is judged to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one activated line. That is, even if each of the symbols constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if each symbol is not lined up on any of the activated lines (that is, the predetermined symbol). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not lined up on the activated line), it is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In this way, when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not lined up on the activated line, it is determined that the disjointed symbol combination mode (that is, the lost symbol combination) is displayed.

Next, the bet number and the effective line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, as a general rule, a game involving three cards is specified or recommended (the specified number is three). However, in the bonus state, a game is played by multiplying two cards (a specified number of two cards). In addition, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment are two lines, that is, a straight-lined line that rises to the right (a line that rises to the right) and a straight line that descends to the right (a line that descends to the right). Specifically, in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 615, a line (that is, a line rising to the right) 623b in which "BAR symbol-replay symbol-sense symbol" is displayed, and "Bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" Only the two lines of the line in which "" is displayed (that is, the line descending to the right) 623a are valid lines.

The bet number and the effective line are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be a line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, one or a plurality of straight lines, a mountain line, a V line, or the like. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of effective lines may be set. Further, the number of effective lines may be changed according to the bet number of medals in the game.

The combination of symbols on the activated line displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 615 is “Bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” displayed on the lower right line 623a, which is one of the activated lines. Since this symbol combination is a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role (replay role), in the next game, bets are automatically placed without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It becomes possible to do. Even if "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the activated line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols of the symbols is displayed. However, the combination of the symbols "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol" is displayed on the middle line which is not the active line, so that the player can recognize that the replay has been won. In addition, like the above-mentioned replay combination (replay combination), it is difficult to grasp the winning combination on the activated line at a glance, but prepare a symbol combination that is difficult to grasp the winning combination in the entire symbol display window 401. As for the other winning combinations, symbol combinations may be prepared in the same manner. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance only by the effective line, when looking at the entire symbol display window 401, the winning of the winning combination (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line. It is possible for the player to easily understand what has been done.

[8-2. Various indicators]
As shown in FIG. 615, the display panel 501 is lit around the symbol display window 401 in accordance with the progress of the game of the slot machine 1 (for example, based on the result of the internal lottery or the ART first win lottery) (or A plurality of indicators such as flashing lamps and LEDs are arranged. Of the plurality of such display devices, various display devices other than the special display LED 612 will be described.

The error lamp 604 starts lighting (or blinking) when some trouble, failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “error”) occur during the game of the slot machine 1, and that an error is currently occurring. It is a lamp that has the role of notifying players, etc. (including the staff of the hall). In FIG. 615, an error is abbreviated in the vicinity of the error lamp 604, and a character “ERR” is drawn. Since it is difficult to indicate the details of the error only by lighting or blinking by the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display the information indicating the details of the error that has occurred on the special display LED 612 provided separately. ..

The section display lamp 605 starts lighting (whether or not there is flashing) when the game number management process to be described later is started, and turns off when the game number management process is completed. That is, the section display lamp 605 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player or the like (including the staff of the hall) that the number-of-games management process is being performed. Note that the timing at which the section display lamp 605 is turned on (or blinks) may be any timing within the game in which the game number management process is started. “Inside the game in which the game number management process has started” means from the time when the start lever 210 is operated until the game medium (medal, credit data) can be inserted to execute the next game (the game. When the result of the game in which the number management process is started is a re-play, it is equivalent to (until it is in the state of being automatically bet). For example, a plurality of modes including a mode in which the game medium can be immediately inserted when the special role is selected in the internal lottery, and a mode in which the so-called freeze process can be performed and the game medium can be inserted several seconds later. One of the modes may be determined with a predetermined probability. In the case of a mode in which a so-called freeze process is performed and a game medium can be loaded after a few seconds, by causing a liquid crystal effect and a reel effect during the so-called freeze process, the player is expected to start the game number management process. A stirrup production may be performed. The conditions for starting the game number management process will be described later.

The replay lamp 606 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player that a replay (a game can be played again without betting a new medal) can be performed when the game result is a replay (described later). In FIG. 615, the character “REP” is abbreviated for replay in the vicinity of the replay lamp 606.

The start lamp 608 is a lamp that has a role of starting lighting (or blinking) when the bet number reaches the MAX bet and urging the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation). In FIG. 615, the character “STR” is abbreviated as “STR” near the start lamp 608.

The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp that has a role of prompting the player to bet by keeping lighting (or blinking) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 615, the character “INS” is drawn in the vicinity of the medal IN lamp 610 for the abbreviation of insert (entering game value).

The stored number display LED 613 displays the number of stored coins when a medal (game value) that can be used by the player is stored by the player inserting a medal or paying out a medal according to the game result. The display has a role of notifying the player of the number of stored medals, and is composed of two horizontally arranged 7-segment LEDs (the left side shows the stored number display LED 613a and the right side shows the stored number display LED 613b). For example, when the upper limit of the number of medals that can be used by the player is 50 and the upper limit is stored, "5" is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a and the stored number display LED 613b is displayed. By displaying "0", the number of stored medals of "50" is displayed so that the player can identify it.

The BET lamps 614 (614a to 614c) indicate the number of BETs when a BET operation for betting a medal (game value) is performed with a specified number as an upper limit before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. The display has a role of notifying the bet amount (BET number) of the gaming value in one game by displaying, and includes three lamps corresponding to the BET number. Specifically, when the BET number is 1, the BET lamp 614c is turned on, when the BET number is 2, the BET lamp 614c is turned on in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the BET number is the upper limit of 3 (MAXBET). Then, the BET lamp 614a is further turned on, so that all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on.

It is assumed that the display of these display devices described above is controlled by the main board 409 (see FIG. 616 described later).

In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, and a 7-segment LED for displaying the accumulated payout number of medals in the bonus game and counting the bonus game are separately provided. Good.

Further, the display device such as the stored number display LED 613 and the special display LED 612 (described later) is not limited to the 7-segment LED as long as the information to be displayed on the display device can be displayed. For example, the number of segments may be different from "7" (14 or 16 segments), and LCD (liquid crystal display), VFD (fluorescent display tube), organic EL, or the like is used instead of the LED. You may.

[8-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a function of displaying the number of payouts of a medal (game value) when a game result is paid out, thereby displaying the number of payouts of the game value to the player. The display is composed of two laterally arranged 7-segment LEDs (a special display LED 612a on the left side and a special display LED 612b on the right side). Specifically, a two-digit number can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out in accordance with the game result, the medals are paid out one by one. By changing the display contents such as “01”, “02”,..., “15” in total, the player can be notified in real time of the payout status of the gaming value (medal).

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of an instruction function display for displaying the instruction content of the “instruction function” in the game, in addition to the role of the payout number display. Although details of the “instruction function” will be described later, in summary, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the generation of an instruction by the “instruction function” is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 is displayed. Information indicating the pressing position of the reels 301a to 301c and the stopping order (which can be read as the pressing order and the pressing position of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) is displayed as an instruction function display, and depending on the contents of the display. When the reel 301 is stopped, a game result that is advantageous to the player is provided.

In the instruction function, the performance that affects the generation of an instruction (specifically, lottery related to the instruction function and management of state transition, etc.) is controlled by the main board 409, and specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function. The main board 409 manages not only the control of the state transition and the state transition but also the indication function display on the special display LED 612. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main board 409, the instruction function of the same content is instructed even in the display means other than the display destination of the instruction function display (for example, the image display 500). Although it is possible to display, the display may be controlled by a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) other than the main board 409. The connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub-board 510 is illustrated in FIG. 616.

Explaining in a specific example, when the push order small combination (in this example, one of the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6”) is selected as the winning combination during the ART game, the main board 409 (particularly, Under the control of the CPU 1110), the instruction content of “appropriate pressing order” corresponding to the selected winning order small combination is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, when the player understands the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612, the player can recognize the proper pressing order. On the other hand, the same information as the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510 by a command or the like, so that the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 that has received the command indicates “appropriate”. It is possible to display an image showing “push order” on the image display body 500. A specific display example of the indication function display will be described later in [10-3-6].

In the slot machine 1, it is possible to perform such an instruction function display in a mode in which any display on the display panel 501 also has a function (in this example, the special display LED 612 for displaying the payout number is displayed. Be done). That is, on the special display LED 612, the indication function display and the payout number display are performed, but by displaying each display period separately, for example, both can be displayed without confusion. Note that, in the present embodiment, the function of displaying the number of payouts is also used, but a display having other functions may also be used, or a display dedicated to displaying the instruction function may be provided.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 lights up to notify the occurrence of the error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. It also has the function of displaying error information. The display timing of the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error information display will be described later in [10-3-7] and the like.

[9. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 616 schematically shows the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like equipped in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for centrally controlling the progress of the game, and a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input/output interface 1116, etc. are mounted on the main board 409. The main board 409 has a function of affecting the result of the game (acquisition of the game value). Specifically, for example, an internal lottery executing means for performing an internal lottery, a bonus game based on the result of the internal lottery. A bonus game execution means for executing the above, an RT state control means for controlling the RT state, an ART first win lottery means for performing an ART first win lottery, a hell state not under game number management processing, and a plurality of advantages being under game number management processing Game state control means for controlling to one of the states, instruction function control means for executing control relating to whether or not to permit operation of the instruction function, number of games for managing the number of games executed by the player It has a game number management control means for executing management processing, a payout control means for paying out medals as a prize based on a winning combination, and the like. Details of each of these means will be described later.

In addition, the slot machine 1 includes, as an example of a configuration not shown in FIG. 616, a door opening detection switch that detects an open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (stored medal clearing switch), and a medal selector 207. A medal selector inner lever detection sensor provided therein, a stop button LED (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lighted around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are provided. These components are controlled by the main board 409.

The above-described one-sheet insertion buttons 205 and 206, the start lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, the storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors (not shown). Thus, the operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are output to the main board 409.

Note that, hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as needed. The respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c corresponding to this are called a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

Further, the slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main board 409, and various signals are input to the main board 409 from these devices. The devices include the symbol variation display device 300, the medal discharging device 110, and the like.

The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is a stepping motor, and each reel 301a, 301b, 301c can be independently rotated and stopped, and at the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from the top to the bottom in the symbol display window 401. Is displayed while changing to.

Further, each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c has a position sensor 331a, 331b, 331c for detecting a reference position for rotation, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c has a position sensor 331a, 331b, 331c, respectively. Are provided correspondingly (left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the stop position information of each reel can be obtained on the main board 409.

The solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed in the medal selector 207. The insertion sensor 207b detects a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is OFF, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out, and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. The medals that have flowed through the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is also invalidated at the same time, so that neither bets nor medals are stored by inserting medals.

The medal releasing device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the paid-out medals one by one in the ejection opening 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been done. Further, the auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a full-medal sensor 111a, and when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the medals have exceeded the predetermined number is output to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, the image display 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, etc. perform an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage, and inform the player, the hall employee, or the like that the abnormality has occurred (FIG. 660 described later). Equivalent to "Auxiliary storage full tank error" shown in).

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variable display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c described above is output from the main board 409. Further, a drive signal is input to the medal releasing device 110 from the main board 409 according to the type of a combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and in response to this, the medal releasing device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharge device 110 or there is no medal at all, the detection of the number of coins by the payout sensor 110e will be delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 409. In response to this, the main board 409 reports that an abnormality has occurred in medal payout. The contents to be notified are displayed on the error lamp 604, the special display LED 612, the image display body 500 and the like to notify that an abnormality has occurred to the player, the hall employee or the like (see “Payout medal empty error” shown in FIG. Equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by, for example, a harness, and the main board 409 is connected to each of these indicators through corresponding ports. The lighting and display of can be operated.

The slot machine 1 includes a sub-board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409. The sub-board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input/output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio system). An amplifier) 1126, a sound source IC 1128, etc. are mounted. The sub-board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, light emission (or lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) of the illumination device 502, and the operation of the speaker 512.

Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall through the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. The connection configuration in FIG. 616 is only an example in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) other than the main board 409 may be connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from the various substrates connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, various information on games managed by the sub-board 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information notifying malfunctions or defects of components of the slot machine 1) are holed. It becomes possible to output to the computer 1200.

In addition, the power supply device 112 is provided with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power supply switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can be operated only by opening the door-type front member 200. Of these, the power switch 112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is one of a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) having different winning probabilities of the winning combination. It is configured to be set to any of the above, and is configured so that a person involved in the hall can change from one set value to another set value. Further, the reset switch 112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated together with the setting key switch 112t when changing the setting. Note that these switches described above may be installed on the main board 409.

The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the number of bets on medals has been determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter the player stops the reels 211a, 211b, 211c. When the reels are operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stop-controlled, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the activated line, and necessary. Accordingly, a specified number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded. However, since the number of sliding frames is determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated, the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the activated line is determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated. . Therefore, instead of determining the game result from the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the activated line, the game result may be determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated.

As described above, the reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, respectively (see FIG. 614). Then, from the display contents (the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the activated line) displayed in the symbol display window 401 when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line (upward right line 623b and downward right line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

In addition, in this example, the description is given with two active lines, but when the slot machine 1 has a plurality of active lines, a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of active lines. It is determined whether or not there is. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, the medals are paid out in a quantity obtained by adding up the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number (for example, 15) can be defined as the upper limit of the number of medals paid out per time (9 in the present embodiment). In such a case, if the total number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple activated lines exceeds the upper limit, a predetermined number of medals of the upper limit are paid out and the upper limit is exceeded. Minutes are truncated. Also, the excess of the upper limit value is not divided into subsequent games and paid out.

In the following, when the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the activated lines, the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as the winning symbol) The combination is complete, or the winning symbol is complete.

The slot machine 1 design includes "red 7 design", "blue 7 design", "BAR design", "cherry design", "replay design", "bell 1 design", "bell 2 design", and "watermelon design". "," Significant design" and "regular design" are as described above, but of these, "red 7 design", "blue 7 design" and "BAR design" stand out compared to other designs. Easy and easy to identify. The term “easy to identify” as used herein means the degree to which the player can easily identify the symbols, including the state in which the reel is rotating and the state in which the reel is stopped. Due to the color and the size of the symbols, these symbols are easy to stop and aim at such that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player stops the symbols even while the reels are rotating. (That is, it is easy to press). Further, as for “significant pattern” and “regular pattern”, as can be seen from FIG. 614, “justice” can be read in the form of a circle with two patterns of “significant pattern” and “regular pattern”. As described above, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged adjacent to each other in the vertical direction, and only one reel 301a, 301b, and 301c is arranged.

These symbols are only symbolic symbols by themselves (only one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination becomes a predetermined combination. .. That is, a predetermined game privilege is awarded. Below, the combination mode of the symbols permitted corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIGS. 617 to 622 will be described.

[9-1. Combination of winning combination and design]
Here, a winning combination (including a winning combination) in the internal lottery executed by the internal lottery executing means and a combination of symbols corresponding thereto will be described with reference to FIGS. 617 to 622. FIG. 617 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when the setting is 1. FIG. 618 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when the setting is 2. FIG. 619 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when the setting is 3. FIG. 620 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when the setting is 4. FIG. 621 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when the setting is 5. FIG. 622 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when the setting is 6. The lottery tables (also referred to as winning value determination tables) shown in FIGS. 617 to 622 are stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. As will be described later in detail, in the slot machine 1, the internal lottery execution means included in the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes the internal lottery.

[9-1-1. Overview of instruction function]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described below is assumed to have an instruction function using a push order small win, as an example of a function of the gaming machine. The push order bells 1 to 6 can display the bell symbol alignment only when the order in which the reel stop button 211 is operated is proper. In the gaming machine having the instruction function, the winning of the ART first win is determined by the ART first win lottery executed by the ART first win lottery means included in the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

If you win the ART first win lottery, the ART game will start. In the ART game, mainly when the push order bells 1 to 6 are selected as the winning combination in the internal lottery, the reel stop according to the instruction is given by instructing the proper push order in which the most medals can be expected to be paid out. Allow the player who has performed the operation to win many medals. On the other hand, during the game period other than the ART game (non-ART), since the above-mentioned pressing order is not instructed, it is possible to make the medal acquisition in the proper pressing order uncertain, and the medals for each gaming state. This can make a difference in the expected number of coins to be acquired and the pace of medal consumption. Such an instruction function is an example of a function of the slot machine 1, and detailed processing thereof will be described later.

Further, supplementing the pushing order, since the slot machine 1 uses three reels 301a to 301c, the pushing order (stop order of the reels 301) is "left-middle-right" and "left-". There are six types of "right-middle", "middle-left-right", "middle-right-left", "right-left-middle", and "right-middle-left". In the following description, the respective pressing orders will be referred to as “forward pressing”, “sandwich pressing”, “middle forward pressing”, “middle reverse pressing”, “reverse sandwiching pressing”, and “reverse pressing”. In addition, the “pushing order 123” described in the remark 1 column of FIGS. 617 to 622 corresponds to the pressing order (forward pressing) of “left-middle-right”, and the “pressing order 132” is “left-right- It corresponds to the pressing order of "middle" (sandwich pressing), the "pressing order 312" corresponds to the pressing order of "right-left-middle" (reverse sandwiching pressing), and the "pressing order 213" is "middle-left-right". “Pressing order 321” corresponds to “right-middle-left” pressing order (reverse pressing), and “pressing order 231” is “middle-right-left”. Corresponds to the pressing order of (reverse press).

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a procedure of a stop operation for stopping the reel 301, the left reel 301a is used during a game in which the push order is not instructed, such as a period (non-ART) in which the ART game is not played. Is first recommended (that is, the reel stop button 211a is first stopped), "left push ("forward push" or "sandwich push")" is recommended, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are recommended. When a stop operation that does not follow the recommended procedure is performed by first stopping the game, it may be possible to take a disadvantageous measure for the player, such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery.

Such a stop result in the slot machine 1 is, for example, in the case of a winning combination in which the winning combination corresponds to the pressing order small combination (in this example, the pressing order bell), the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop button 211a, Depending on the pressing order of (211b, 211c), the mode of the stop result is different. Such a difference in the mode of the stop result can be realized as follows, for example. That is, as a winning combination corresponding to the “push order bell”, a plurality of types of winning combinations each having an appropriate pressing order associated therewith (specifically, “push order bell 1” to “shown in FIGS. 617 to 622”). When the winning combination is "push order bell 1", for example, when the winning combination is "push order bell 6", push (left/middle/right) corresponds to "appropriate push order". Different combinations of the selected winning combinations allow the operation of a plurality of types of condition devices. Then, at this time, according to the priority order in which the drawing pull-in control of the symbols when stopping the reels 301 is different according to the order of pressing the reel stop button 211 (for example, "number of sheets priority control" or "symbol combination number priority control"). By setting it to be executed, it is possible to change the mode of the stop payout based on the pressing order, and as a result, it is possible to make a difference in the payout number.

Here, "number priority control" means that the number of payouts at the time of winning (when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the activated line) is the highest when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted. It means the pull-in control that gives priority to the condition device that increases and draws the symbol of the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device from the "retractable symbol" onto the effective line and stops it. The "symbol combination number priority control" means that when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted, the condition device that gives the largest number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by the "drawable symbol" is given priority. However, it refers to the pull-in control in which the symbol corresponding to the condition device is pulled in on the effective line and stopped.

Then, for example, "push order bell 1" that makes the normal push "appropriate push order" is selected as a winning combination, and the push operation of the reel stop button 211 is "appropriate push order (left/middle/right order). It is determined that the pull-in control by the above-mentioned "number of sheets priority control" is carried out in the case of ", and the pull-in control by the above-mentioned "symbol combination number priority control" is carried out in the case of "unsuitable pushing order". At this time, in the case of “appropriate pressing order”, the condition device of the eight-combination combination having the largest number of payouts at the time of winning is prioritized, and the symbol combination of the eight-combination combination is drawn onto the activated line. On the other hand, in the case of "inappropriate pressing order", the condition device for the one-card combination or the condition device for the zero-card combination is given priority, and the symbol combination of the one-card combination or the zero-card combination is drawn on the activated line. Thus, when "push order bell 1" is selected as the winning combination, if the reel 301 is stopped in "appropriate press order", eight reels will be awarded, while "unsuitable press order" When the reel 301 is stopped at “”, a winning combination (one winning combination, 0 winning combination) having a smaller payout number than the eight winning combination can be won.

Note that the symbols that can be drawn onto the activated line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 when the reel stop button 211 is stopped (specifically, for example, a maximum of 4 frames). Up to is allowed), depending on the timing of this stop operation (pushing timing), there are a drawable design and a non-drawable design. As a result, the appearance of the stop result varies depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device according to the push timing is also preset.

As described above, in the slot machine 1, when the winning combination associated with the “appropriate pressing order” is won, the operation of the plurality of condition devices is allowed and different priority control regarding the drawing pull-in control of the reel 301 is performed. By setting, when the game based on the “appropriate pressing order” is played, the privilege that is advantageous to the player (for example, comparison It is possible to stop at a stop result that can give more medals).

Although not illustrated in FIGS. 617 to 622, other push order small wins may be prepared separately from the push order bells 1 to 6, or a push order replay win may be used. When the push-order replay combination is used, for example, when the condition device of “up lip 1+normal maintenance lip” shown in FIGS. 617 to 622 is operated, and the stop operation is performed in an appropriate push order, "Lift Lip 1" is displayed and a high-lip state (for example, RT1 to RT2) is entered, and if a stop operation is performed in an improper push order, "normal maintenance lip" is displayed and a high-lip state is entered. It is preferable not to In this case, however, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed regardless of the order in which the stop operation is performed, and the next game is executed without inserting the privilege (game medium (medal, credit data)) as the re-game. A privilege to receive a lottery) will be granted.

The above is the outline of the instruction function in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the following description, the ART game using the push-order bell as described above is an example of the special game advantageous to the player, but the special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 is limited to the ART game. It is not a thing, but includes other advantageous game states (for example, a bonus game, an AT game, an RT game, etc.). In addition, the instruction function is not limited to the instruction function using the pressing order, and in addition to this, for example, a pressing position (a role in which the privilege granted based on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 can be changed) It may be used.

[9-1-2. Type of winning role]
The lottery table shown in FIGS. 617 to 622 will be described. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared depending on the RT state, and FIGS. 617 to 622 show general states (RT0), RT1, RT2, RT3, and bonuses as examples of the RT state in the slot machine 1. The internal state and the bonus state are shown. In addition, in this specification, the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state are also included in the RT state. Here, the general state is a state in which neither the bonus game nor the RT is in progress, the bonus flag is not established, and the state is controlled after the bonus game is finished. The bonus internal state is a state in which the bonus (specifically, BB1 and BB2 described later) is won by the internal lottery, and the winning state of the bonus is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous game state in which a bonus (specifically, BB1 and BB2 described later) is won by an internal lottery, and a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed to shift the bonus. Although BB1 and BB2 are shown as bonuses in FIGS. 617 to 622, other types of bonuses can be installed in the slot machine 1, such as RB bonus and single bonus (SB). It may be provided. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a state corresponding to each bonus, but a detailed description of each state is omitted because it is similar to that of a general gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 617 to 622, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning probability (or a registered number) for each winning combination is set for each RT state, and prepared in advance corresponding to each RT state. An internal lottery is performed using the selected lottery table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device according to the winning combination is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the operated condition device is displayed on the activated line, which will be described later. Reel stop processing is performed. Then, when any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the activated line, the payout of medals based on the winning combination is performed. In the payout of medals based on the winning combination, the payout number of medals may be set to be different depending on the RT state and the number of medals (specified number) of the game. At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table according to the specified number.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, one condition device and one reel control pattern are in a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when preparing a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination, Multiple conditions may be met for the winning combination. By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stop results (symbol combinations displayed on the activated line) for one winning combination.

The winning combinations shown in FIGS. 617 to 622 can be roughly divided into bonus combinations (BB1 and BB2), small combinations (watermelon combination, cherry combination, bell combination) and replay combinations (replay combination). If none of the winning combinations is won, it is called “out”. Note that, although “defeat” is not a winning combination in the strict sense, it may be included in the winning combination for the sake of convenience in the following description.

Here, each of the combinations will be briefly described. The “bonus combination” is a combination that triggers the execution of the bonus game, and specifically, “BB1” and “BB2” correspond to the bonus combination. The "replay combination (replay combination)" is performed by the BET processing (state and processing in which the start lever 210 can be operated) described later without inserting a medal, and the next game can be executed (replay). It is a role. The “small winning combination” is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the small winning combination displayed on the activated line. As described above, the winning combinations “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” shown in FIGS. 617 to 622 may be collectively referred to as “push order bell”. In FIGS. 617 to 622, the number of push-out bells to be paid out is described in plural ways because the number of payouts may differ depending on the stop order and stop position of the reel 301. On the other hand, the “common bell” is a bell in which the bell pattern can always be stopped regardless of the pushing order. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

For specific roles such as watermelon role, cherry role, and replay role, in addition to normal roles (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, normal maintenance replay role (illustrated as normal maintenance lip in FIGS. 617 to 622)) Special prizes (special watermelon, special cherry, and special maintenance replay (shown as special maintenance lip in FIGS. 617 to 622) are included in the winning combinations. Details of these special bonuses will be described later. In this specification, a concept including both a normal watermelon role and a special watermelon role is simply referred to as a watermelon role or a watermelon, and similarly, a concept including both a normal cherry role and a special cherry role is simply referred to as a cherry. The role or the cherry is called, and the concept including both the normal maintenance replay role and the special maintenance replay role is simply called a maintenance replay role, a maintenance replay or a maintenance lip.

Further, regarding the maintenance replay combination, in addition to the normal maintenance replay combination and the special maintenance replay combination, the special maintenance replay combination (illustrated as a special maintenance replay in FIGS. 617 to 622) is included in the winning combination. Details of this special maintenance replay combination will also be described later.

Further, “out” means that no winning combination is selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination. In the case of “out”, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped, except when the established state of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the bonus internal state).

The push order-independent bell pays out 9 coins regardless of the push order, whereas the push-order bell pays out one medal or is not paid out when the push order bell is in an improper push order. . Therefore, by allocating the numbers in this way, when the player is controlled to the bonus state (bonus game), the number of medals held by the player can be increased without being substantially reduced.

Moreover, even if the result of the internal lottery is not "out of order" and you win any one of the winning combinations (bonus, replay, and small winning combination), the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination executes the pull-in control described later. Stop operation (operation to press the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming to be stopped in the symbol display window 524 (more strictly, the effective lines 623a and 623b) within a possible range. If not done, it is not possible to display the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination on the activated line. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, even if one of the winning combinations is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to this winning combination is not displayed on the activated line, the same as when the “out” is selected, In step S6 of FIG. 623, it is determined that the game result is a loss. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for the bonus combination and the rare small combination (watermelon combination, cherry combination), if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing (push position), the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line. However, for other general small wins (push order bell, common bell) and replay wins, the corresponding symbol combination should be displayed on the activated line even if the operation is stopped at any time. The design is arranged so that it can be done (however, it is also necessary to stop the operation in the proper pressing order for the combination that requires the pressing order). In addition, if the game result is lost even though you have won a winning combination, instead of randomly displaying a symbol combination of "out of sync", instead of winning the prize based on that winning combination The predetermined symbol combination (stop result) shown is controlled to be displayed in the symbol display area. And the symbol combination (stop result) displayed at the time of such a loss is called "zero (or zero)" in the following.

Further, in the description of this embodiment, the expression “bell zero (bell zero eye)” is used for “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”. Bell zero is a set of bells (to be exact, 8 pieces of bells) due to a stop operation being performed in an improper pushing order when a pushing order bell for which a proper pushing order is determined for each winning combination is elected. It means that the symbol combination of the bell combination which can be paid out is not stopped, and another symbol combination in which the bell combination is eliminated is displayed. In the case of such a bell zero, the bell zero is displayed as a stop result, and payout (including no payout) less than the original bell alignment is performed.

In addition, in the description of the present embodiment, the expression “split (separation)” may be used in addition to the above “zero (separation)”. "Bare" is not a "straight line" that is relatively easy for a player to recognize the feature of a stop line, but a stop line that looks like a combination of patterns (so-called). It means that it is a "dazzle". That is, the "separation" is one of the categories related to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even if it is a separation, it is not always lost, so that the medal may be paid out.

[9-1-3. Winning form of winning role]
In the winning combination illustrated in FIGS. 617 to 622, in addition to the winning combination (single combination) in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity, multiple winning combinations are simultaneously selected The role (simultaneous winning) is also included. When a single winning combination is won, subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, when a simultaneous winning combination is won, subsequent reel stop control is performed based on simultaneous operation of condition devices based on the winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. Then, in the reel stop control when the simultaneous winning combination is won, a predetermined priority order (for example, a priority order such as "replay>small role>bonus" or "replay>bonus>small role"). Accordingly, the reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is permitted, and the bonus according to the winning combination is paid out. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small wins, the method of setting the activated line, etc., control may be performed so that simultaneous winning combinations are won, and when simultaneous winnings occur, respectively. Benefits will be paid out according to the winning role of. In any case, the small role is a "non-carried-over part" that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning status of the winning role that could not be won in the winning game is not carried over from the next game. Even if the simultaneous winning of the winning combination is selected, the medals corresponding to the winning combination will not be paid out to the winning combination that cannot win the winning game.

Further, in the case where the bonus combination and the small combination are simultaneously won, the combination selected in such a combination is also referred to as a duplicate combination. Even when a bonus role and a small winning combination are simultaneously won, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations are activated at the same time as in the case of simultaneous winning between the small winning combinations, and the predetermined priority order (for example, According to the winning combination, the reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is allowed according to the priority order such as "game>small combination>bonus" or "re-play>bonus>small combination". Benefits are paid out. However, for the bonus combination, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning combination of the bonus combination is carried over until the symbol combination of the bonus combination is displayed in the subsequent games. It can be used as a "carryover". Specifically, the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is a "carry-over combination". A replay role and a small role (for example, a Bell role) are "non-carried-over roles". In this way, even when the "carryover combination" and the "non-carrying-out combination" are simultaneously elected by the winning of the overlapping combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. Then, if the symbol combination corresponding to the "carry-over combination" is not displayed in the winning game, the winning state of the "carry-over combination" is carried over to the next game or later. However, in such a "next game", when you win another small win, both the "carry-over win" and "another small win" are won, but in this case, Since they are selected in different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate hands.

In the case of simultaneous winning, which combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is preferentially displayed on the activated line is determined based on the priority order setting in the reel stop process.

The winning combinations roughly classified above will be described below in detail.

[9-1-4. Bonus part]
The winning combinations “BB1” and “BB2” shown in FIGS. 617 to 622 are bonus combinations. When the bonus combination is selected as the winning combination, the corresponding condition device “BB1” is activated, the reel stop process is performed, and the privilege is awarded based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, the symbol combination (“red 7” set) corresponding to the condition device “BB1” is displayed on the activated line, whereby the bonus game (BB game) is executed. This bonus game is a game in which the player has an opportunity to concentrate medals over a plurality of games, and in the present embodiment, for example, the prescribed number of games is two, and the bonuses in FIGS. 617 to 622 are given. The bonus game is advanced using the lottery table shown in the state. Then, the bonus game ends when the number of bonus games exceeds a prescribed upper limit number (for example, 30 games) or when the total number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds a prescribed number (for example, 200 games). When the bonus game ends, the bonus state shifts to the general state. Even if the symbol combination "BB1" or "BB2" is displayed on the activated line, the medal as the prize is not paid out.

Here, the symbol combinations corresponding to "BB1" and "BB2" are arranged so that they cannot necessarily be drawn onto the activated line depending on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (see FIG. 614). However, "BB1" and "BB2" are carry-over roles that can carry over the winning flag, and even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game (it is not aligned), the winning establishment state after the next game is The game is played as a bonus internal state until it is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped.

When the internal lottery results in the winning of the replay combination or the small combination while the bonus internal state is controlled, the winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order.

[9-1-5. Replay role]
The winning combination “replay” shown in FIGS. 617 to 622 is a winning combination of the replay (re-playing combination). At the time of winning the replay combination, the condition device for the replay is activated, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is allowed on the effective line (either of the lines 623a and 623b). The process (step S5 in FIG. 623) is performed. In the slot machine 1, at the time of winning the replay, it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is always displayed on the activated line, and it is determined that the symbol combinations of the replay are complete. In the next game, automatic betting is performed without inserting a medal again or betting operation (operation for inserting a stored medal), and a replay game in which the same game as the previous game is executed again becomes possible. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, the medal as the prize is not paid out.

The replay combination includes a sustain replay combination (displayed as “maintenance lip” in FIGS. 617 to 622), a raised replay combination (displayed as “updip” in FIGS. 617 to 622), and a lowered replay combination (FIGS. 617 to 622). "Display lower" and 7-combination replay combination (shown as "7-combination rep" in FIGS. 617 to 622) and 7-composition fake replay combination (displayed as "7-combination crepe" in FIGS. 617 to 622). is there. The maintenance replay combination is a replay combination in which the RT state is not changed and the current RT state is maintained. The raising replay combination includes a raising replay combination 1 that can be selected only at RT1 and a raising replay combination 2 that can be selected only at RT2. The raising replay combination 1 functions as a transition combination from RT1 to RT2, The raising replay combination 2 functions as a transition combination from RT2 to RT3. The lower replay combination is a combination that can be selected only at RT3, and functions as a transition combination from RT3 to RT2. The 7-set replay combination is a replay combination that can be selected only in RT3, and when the 7-set replay combination is selected in RT3, it functions as a combination to which the ART game is added. Like the 7-set replay role, the 7-set fake replay role is a replay role that is selected only in RT3 and cannot be added to the ART game even if it is selected in the internal lottery.

In addition, the maintenance replay role can be selected independently in the internal lottery for the normal maintenance replay role and the special maintenance replay role, while the special maintenance replay role, the raised replay role 1, the raised replay role 2, the lowered replay role, and 7 sets. Neither the replay role nor the 7-piece fake replay role is selected alone in the internal lottery, and is always duplicated at the same time as the normal maintenance replay role.

When "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", which is a simultaneous winning combination of Special Maintenance Replay and Normal Maintenance Replay, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed "Left-Middle-Right". When it is stopped in order (press forward), the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line, and other pressing orders (reverse push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse) When it is stopped by pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line. When "Special maintenance Lip + Normal maintenance Lip" is selected by the internal lottery in the hell state where the game number management process is not in progress, the hell state shifts to the advantageous state. Further, in the advantageous state in which the game number management process is being performed, when “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip” is selected by the internal lottery in the advantageous states A to D, the state shifts to the advantageous state E, and in the advantageous state E, “special When "Maintenance Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip" is selected by internal lottery, the addition of the ART game is confirmed.

When "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the Raise Replay Combination 1 and the Normal Maintenance Replay Combination, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "Right-Middle-Left". When it is stopped by pressing (reverse push), the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, and the other pushing order (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse push) ) When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line.

When "Raise Lip 2 + Normal Maintenance Rep", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the Raise Replay Combination 2 and the Normal Maintenance Replay Combination, is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "Right-Left-Middle". When it is stopped with (reverse pinch push), the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, and the other push order (forward push, pinch push, middle forward push, reverse push, middle reverse push) ) When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line.

When the "Lower Lip + Normal Maintain Rep", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the Lower Replay and the Normal Maintain Replay, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "Middle-Left-Right" ( When it is stopped by pressing the middle button, the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed on the activated line, and in other pressing orders (forward pressing, pinching, reverse pinching, reverse pressing, middle reverse pressing) When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line.

When "7 sets of reps + normal maintenance reps", which is a simultaneous winning combination of 7 sets of replays and normal maintenance replays, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed with "right-middle-left". When the operation is stopped in order (reverse push) and at an appropriate timing (timing at which 7 symbols can be pulled in), the symbol combination corresponding to the 7-play replay combination (7 doublet pattern) is displayed on the activated line, and other than that. It corresponds to the maintenance replay role if it is stopped in the pressing order of (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse push), or if it is a reverse push but not stopped at an incorrect timing The symbol combination is displayed on the activated line.

When the "7 set fake lip + normal maintenance lip" which is a simultaneous winning combination of the 7 set fake replay role and the normal maintenance replay role is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is "right-middle-left". When the stop operation is performed in the push order (reverse push), the symbol combination (7th zero) corresponding to the 7 set fake replay combination is displayed on the activated line, and the other push orders (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch) When it is stopped by pressing, middle forward pressing, middle backward pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the activated line.

A feature of the game privilege of the replay game is that instead of paying out medals, automatic betting is performed in the next game without consuming new medals. In addition, since replay is a winning role without paying out medals, even if the winning frequency is increased by increasing the winning probability, there is little disadvantage for the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (general state), the probability of winning is about once every 6 to 7 times. This makes it possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time period) within a certain range. In other words, this means that the winning combination of replay can have a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the progress of the game.

Further, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are evenly arranged on the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination, and the same replay combination). By setting other symbols (symbols that do not form a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the replay combination) from one to a maximum of four, which are arranged between the symbols that form the combination mode of the corresponding symbols, It is possible to arrange the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination without the need for pressing. In such a case, if the priority of the winning combination displayed is “replay (replay combination)>small combination>bonus”, the condition device for the replay combination and other combinations (small combination and bonus combination) Even if the condition device is activated at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is always stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the other combination is not stopped and displayed.

[9-1-6. Bell role]
Next, the bell role as a winning combination will be described. The bell role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals when winning. In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described push order bell 1 to push order bell 6 as the bell combination, there is a common bell in which the push order does not matter. When the common bell is selected by the internal lottery, the combination of bell symbols is displayed on the activated line even if the reel stop button 211 is operated in any order.

[9-1-6-1. Push order does not matter bell]
First, a description will be given of a push-order-independent bell (common bell) in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of paid-out medals based on winning) at the time of winning does not change depending on the pushing order of the reel 301.

When the "pushing order unquestioned bell" shown in Figs. 617 to 622 is selected as the winning combination, any corresponding symbol combination is always stopped on the activated line regardless of the pushing order and the pushing timing of the reels. The condition device operates as follows. Therefore, when such a condition device operates, regardless of the stop order and the stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, the symbol combination of the bell combination is stopped and displayed to win the bell combination, and the winning combination. The payout of coins (8 coins) corresponding to the above is given as a privilege.

[9-1-6-2. Push order bell]
Next, the push order bell in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of paid out medals based on the winning) at the time of winning can be changed depending on the pushing order of the reel 301 will be described.

The winning combinations "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" shown in FIG. 617 are win combinations of the push order bell that are prepared mainly for surely giving the privilege to the player in the ART game. .. As described above, each of the “push-order bell 1” to the “push-order bell 6” is associated with one of the six proper push orders (see FIG. 617).

In FIG. 617, the winning probabilities of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” are made equal, and when these are summed up, the winning probability of “push order bell” is 20478/65536, but The winning probabilities of the forward bell 1” to the “push forward bell 6” may be arbitrarily distributed under the condition that the above sum value is satisfied. In this way, the winning probabilities can be evenly distributed (the winning probabilities of 6-choice bells can be equalized) with respect to the six proper pushing orders of the "push-order bell," and the specific pushing It is possible to make it difficult to select the proper pressing order. In such a case, in the normal game in which it is recommended to stop the left reel 301a for the first time, it is possible to suppress the proportion of the push-order bell winning, and to reduce the payout rate in the normal game. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in the special game.

According to FIGS. 617 to 622, “push order bell 1” is a winning combination of the push order bell combination that makes the proper push order the proper push order, and “push order bell 2” is the proper push order of the sandwiching push. It is a winning combination of the push order bell combination, "Pushing order bell 3" is a winning combination of the pushing order bell combination that makes the proper pressing order for sandwiching, and "Pushing order bell 4" is a proper middle order pressing. Pushing order is a winning combination of small pushing order, "pushing order bell 5" is a winning combination of pushing ordering bell role that makes reverse pressing a proper pressing order, and "pushing order bell 6" is middle backward pressing It is a winning role of the push order bell role that makes the appropriate push order. Therefore, the “push order bell” in this embodiment is a so-called “six-choice bell” in which the proper push order is divided into six ways. Note that, of course, the setting of such an appropriate pressing order can be freely set within a predetermined limit at the designing stage of the gaming machine.

In this way, the push-order bells “push-order bell 1” to “push-order bell 6” only pay out eight medals as winning the bell role only when the stop operation is performed in an appropriate push order. If the stop operation is performed in an improper push order, "Bell Zero" will be displayed on the activated line, and there will be less benefits (1 or 0 medals are paid out).

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the non-ART state that is not the ART state, it is recommended to press the left side (forward or pinch). Therefore, when the game is performed in the recommended procedure in the non-ART state, the push order bell (specifically, the push order bell 1 to the push order) that makes the proper push order other than left push (forward push or pinch push) Even if the player wins the bell 6), the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination cannot be displayed on the activated line. However, in the ART game, the proper pressing order is instructed, and the stop operation according to the instruction content is allowed, so that the bell role can be easily won when the pressing order bell is won. If the player performs a stop operation that is different from the recommended procedure and improperly wins medals during non-ART, take measures such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery to pay out overall medals. The expected value of may be adjusted appropriately.

Further, in the slot machine 1, it is not necessary to recommend a specific pressing order as described above. For example, except when the instruction function display such as during an ART game is displayed, when the specific pressing order is not the recommended procedure, the player may perform the stop operation in an arbitrary pressing order, and in such a case, Since there is no recommended procedure, there is no need for adjustment (measures such as temporary stop of ART lottery) in the case of "unreasonably earning medal by performing stop operation different from recommended procedure" as described above. Becomes If a specific pushing order is not the recommended procedure, it is desirable that the winning probabilities of the pushing orders in the small pushing order win be the same. By making the winning probabilities for each push order the same, the expected value of the payout can be equalized no matter which push order the game is played, so that the player can enjoy the game with the desired push order with peace of mind. it can.

[9-1-7. Rare role]
There are watermelon roles and cherry roles as rare winning roles. The watermelon combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (5 coins) when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. The winning combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (two) when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line.

[9-1-8. Special role]
As described above, the watermelon role, the cherry role, and the maintenance replay role include the special watermelon role, the special cherry role, and the special maintenance replay role, in addition to the normal watermelon role, the normal cherry role, and the normal maintenance replay role, respectively. There is. When the special watermelon role, special cherry role, or special maintenance replay role is selected in the internal lottery when the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is the hell state described later, the transition destination from the hell state is advantageous Any one of A to advantageous state E is determined. That is, in the hell state, the special watermelon combination, the special cherry combination, and the special maintenance replay combination function as a transition trigger to the advantageous state (end trigger in the hell). The determination probabilities of the transition destinations when these special roles are selected by the internal lottery in the hell state will be described later. In addition, a special watermelon role, a special cherry role, or a special maintenance replay role is selected in the internal lottery when the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is one of the advantageous states A to E. Even if it is done, the same processing as when the normal watermelon role, the normal cherry role or the normal maintenance replay role is selected (the payout process of the game medium is performed as a prize, but the hell state and the advantageous state There is no migration process between). That is, the special role is a role that exhibits a different function from the normal role only when in the hell state. The game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display includes whether or not the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, and the execution of the instruction function display is executed when the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed. It refers to multiple game states with different conditions.

In addition, the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state is that the special watermelon role, the special cherry role or the special maintenance replay role is selected in the internal lottery when the hell state is selected, and the symbol combination corresponding to these special roles is It is preferable to be performed by being displayed on the activated line, but even if the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is not displayed on the activated line, a special watermelon role in the internal lottery when in the hell state, It may be performed when a special cherry character role or a special maintenance replay character is selected.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 617 to 622, with respect to the normal winning combination (normal watermelon, normal cherry, normal maintenance lip in RT2 and RT3), the probability of being selected in the internal lottery differs depending on the setting. However, the probability of being selected in the internal lottery is the common probability for all settings for special roles (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance replay role). Although not shown in FIGS. 617 to 622, the winning value assigned to each special winning combination within the random number range of 0 to 65535 is unique to all settings. For example, assuming that the random number value assigned as the winning value of the special watermelon is 10,000 to 10448, the winning value of the special watermelon is 10,000 to 10448 in all the setting values of the settings 1 to 6. The same applies to special cherries and special maintenance replays.

The above is the combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and the symbols corresponding to each winning combination.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a person involved in the hall can set any one of the settings 1 to 6, and BB1, “BB1+normal watermelon”, and “BB1+normal cherry” for each setting. , BB2, "BB2 + normal watermelon", "BB2 + normal cherry", normal watermelon, normal cherry, push order bells 1 to 6, common bell, normal maintenance lip, "up lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "up lip 2 + normal maintenance" The winning probabilities for "Rip", "Lower Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip", "7-Pack Lip + Normal-Maintenance Lip", and "7-Pack Fake Lip + Normal-Maintenance Lip" are different. On the other hand, the winning probabilities for special roles (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance lip) are common to the settings 1 to 6, and even if the setting is changed, the winning probability for the special role is not changed. That is, the winning probability of the winning combination that functions as a trigger for shifting from the hell state to the advantageous state is a common probability for all settings. However, the probability of winning the special watermelon, the probability of winning the special cherry, and the probability of winning the special maintenance lip may be the same for settings 1 to 6, or the probability of winning the special watermelon, the probability of winning the special cherry, and the probability of winning the special maintenance lip. Although different for each setting, the combination probability of the special watermelon, the special cherry, and the special maintenance lip may be common to the settings 1 to 6. Although not shown in FIGS. 617 to 622, so-called bonus combinations such as BB1 may be divided into special BB1 combinations and normal BB1 combinations. For example, in FIGS. 617 to 622, the probability that the BB1 role is selected is 44/65536, but when the special BB1 role and the normal BB1 role are divided, for example, the probability that the special BB1 role is selected is 65536. It can be set to 33 minutes and the probability that the normal BB1 role is selected is 11/65536. In this case, if all the settings are made common, the probability that the BB1 is selected is different for each setting, so the probability that the special BB1 role is selected is common to all the settings, and the normal BB1 role is selected. It is advisable to provide a range in the ball-out rate by providing a setting difference in the probability of being selected.

Further, the symbols are not limited to the symbols and the combination mode of the symbols described above. Further, in addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. Then, the types of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily limited to the provision of all winning combinations, and a winning combination of a necessary type may be appropriately selected.

For example, a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination (or a replay combination) may be set, and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is on the activated line only when the reel 301 is stopped in an appropriate pressing order. A push order replay combination that is displayed may be provided.

In addition, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination (bell combination in the present embodiment) is displayed on the activated line is determined based on the order in which the reel stop button 211 is stopped and operated. Instead of, the push position small winning combination determined based on the timing when the reel stop button 211 is stopped may be prepared. Although detailed description is omitted, the push position sub-winning means that the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (push position) and at an improper stop timing. , A small winning combination showing different winning modes. When such a push position small winning combination is installed, by giving an instruction so that the player can easily recognize the proper push position in the ART game, the game can be performed when the push position small winning combination is won. It is possible for a player to easily win a corresponding role, and it is possible to obtain many medals.

In addition, the player of the slot machine 1 performs an internal lottery based on the lottery probability of the winning combination (FIGS. 617 to 622), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, the number of payouts, and the arrangement of the symbols (FIG. 614). It may be possible to find a game method in which the maximum payout can be expected in a situation where the winning combination selected by the player cannot be known. Hereinafter, such a game method is tentatively referred to as "maximum efficiency hitting method". When playing a game with the maximum efficiency batting method, depending on the reel stop position, it is difficult to draw the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination onto the activated line (watermelon role, cherry role , Chance chance, etc.), the reel stop button 211 is pressed and stopped at a specific timing such that the expected payout amount is maximized in consideration of the winning probability and the number of payouts. By performing a pressing operation on the remaining reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol aspect, it is possible to pull in symbol combinations corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations and obtain a large amount of payouts. In other words, the maximum-efficiency hitting method can be said to be a game method in which the loss of the winning combination is suppressed as much as possible.

[10. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 etc.).

FIG. 623 is an example of a main routine showing the basic processing procedure of one game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for a game start is executed. Especially when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned various devices are checked for connection and operating status, and the presence/absence of backup data is confirmed. If backup data exists, a process to restore the state before power-off To execute. If backup data does not exist, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203 or, if there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the one-piece insertion button 205). Then, the operation of the starting lever 210 is awaited. That is, the bet amount for one game is determined, and the BET process is performed until the start lever 210 can be operated. In addition, when the slot machine 1 is a dedicated machine for playing three cards in which a game can be executed by inserting three medals, the one-button insertion button 205 may not be provided.

In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 that is in the operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process for determining whether or not any winning combination should be the result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is one of the stages before all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start to rotate in step S4 are in a stopped state (become stopped by the player's stop operation). It is executed to determine whether or not the winning combination of (1) is selected as the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the activated line. It is allowed to stop.

Next, in step S31, instruction function processing is performed as processing relating to the ART instruction function (so-called ART navigation). In the instruction function processing, not only is the winning of the ART game and the start thereof determined, but also during the ART game, the ART navigation that teaches (instructs) the pressing order to the player is executed. Details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the instruction function processing of this example, the main board 409 manages all the central control related to the instruction function (ART initial win lottery, determination of ART game number, execution of ART game, transition of RT state, display of instruction function, etc.). To do. On the other hand, it is assumed that the sub-board 510 manages the auxiliary control related to the instruction function (navigation display on the image display body 500, etc.). The display content of the display is limited to that according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main board 409 (content that is not different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content of the instruction function (which may be read as the display content of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. Further, the display contents of the instruction function display displayed on the special display LED 612 under the control of the main substrate 409 and the display contents of the navigation display displayed on the image display body 500 under the control of the sub-substrate 510 are paired. The correspondence relation is not limited to 1 and may be a correspondence relation of 1 to n (a plurality of patterns). That is, when any special function LED 612 is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the main board 409, the sub-board 510 executes the navigation display in the display mode corresponding to the special function LED display on the image display body 500 or the like. The specific display mode of the navigation display does not have to be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. Good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 or the main board 409 may specify which display mode the navigation display is performed. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the main board 409 may perform all the processes related to the instruction function process.

Further, in the instruction function process of step S31 shown in this example, it is assumed that the content of the instruction function of the ART is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Here, since the internal lottery process is performed each time the game is executed, the ART initial win lottery performed based on the result of the internal lottery process is also performed each time the game is executed. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function processing be ended before the reel rotation processing of step S4 described in the next stage is started.

Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting the rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation processing, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is validated when the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are validated. The operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying the fact is turned on, and the timer count is started until the next reel rotation process is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c.

In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player's pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamp is turned off in the order of acceptance, and the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c is stopped. To execute.

In the next step S6, at the time when it is determined that all the lines 301a to 301c are in the stopped state in step S5, there is a winning symbol on the "effective line" (whether a symbol corresponding to any winning symbol is present). Based on (whether the combination mode is displayed), a determination process for determining a winning combination is executed. Specifically, by collating the “display content (symbol combination mode) displayed on the activated line” with the “symbol combination allowed to be stopped on the activated line corresponding to the winning combination” Determine the winning combination. Further, the determination process of step S6 may be performed based only on the "display content (combination mode of symbols) displayed on the activated line". In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a line (downward right line 623a) in which the "bell design-replay design-bell design" shown in FIG. 615 is displayed, and "BAR design-replay design-significant design". Two lines in which is displayed (upward-right line 623b) are set as "effective lines". However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this.

In step S7, a medal payout process is executed based on the content of the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6. Further, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination involving a change in the RT state as in the case of type 2 BB, the RT state is changed (RT state change shown in FIGS. 617 to 622). And give various game benefits by replaying.

The above is the processing procedure of one basic game of the slot machine 1. Here, in steps S2 (BET processing) to step S4 (reel rotation processing), internal processing is performed triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively called a starting process. Hereinafter, a specific description of this starting process will be given.

[10-1. Startup process]
FIG. 624 specifically shows each process performed in the starting process.

In the start-up process, first, in step S101, the insertion of medals or the operation of the single-insertion button 205 or the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If the MAX bet operation or the medal insertion is performed, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. It should be noted that this determination is made by inserting medals corresponding to the MAX bet (that is, inserting three or more medals in the case of the game of the specified number of three, and inserting two or more medals in the game of the specified number of two). It is assumed that the condition is satisfied only when the one-sheet insertion button 205 or the MAX insertion button 206 for MAX bet is operated.

In the next step S102, as a reception process, the bet number (MAX bet only in this example) is determined, and the activated line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when three medals are thrown in when the specified number of coins is three, two lines, an upward right line 623b and a downward right line 623a, become effective lines, which are effective lines. Turn on the lamp.

In step S103, the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is valid, and in that case, whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted. If the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103 and the operation of the starting lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S105.

Further, if the player does not perform a bet operation or a medal insertion or a MAX bet is reached in step S101, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S104. At this time, the determination in step S104 is also not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

Further, in the replay game, it is not necessary to newly bet a medal. This automatically sets the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. As a result, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

In step S105, the operation of the starting lever 210 is invalidated in response to the operation of the starting lever 210 in step S104.

Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are started to rotate, and random numbers are extracted (obtained) based on the operation of the start lever 210. As this random number, any one of 0 to 65535 is extracted. When the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. Regarding the timing of extracting the random number at this time, it may be performed immediately after the operation of the starting lever 210 or may be performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) during the programming process. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

In step S107, a winning determination (matching of the random number value) of which winning combination corresponds from the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number value) is performed. In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated with a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number value performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value matches (matches or matches) the predetermined random number value of the winning combination. For example, when the winning random number of BB1 is 0 to 43, if the extracted random number is any one of 0 to 43, it is determined that BB1 is winning. At this time, when it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned on. The winning probabilities for each winning combination in the hit determination performed by collating the extracted random number value with the hit determination table are as shown in FIGS. 617 to 622. The winning probabilities of “BB1+normal watermelon”, “BB2+normal cherry”, normal maintenance lip at RT2 and “lowering lip+normal maintenance lip” at RT3 are different depending on the setting. However, the winning probabilities are not limited to these depending on the setting, and the winning probabilities of BB1, BB2, normal watermelon and normal cherry may be different depending on the setting.

Then, in the flag processing, when determining the hit value determination table that serves as a determination reference when matching the extracted random number values in the game, the game state flag such as a BB game flag described below is referred to when determining the hit value determination table. The winning value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, the hit value determination table corresponding to the game state flag (RT state flag) in the ON state in the game is set and the extracted random number values are collated. As the game state flags, flags corresponding to the RT states are prepared, and for example, there are a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When both the bonus internal flag and the bonus internal flag are OFF, the general state flag is always turned ON.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, there is a “miss” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and any condition device is not activated. Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (when activated/established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition device. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices are satisfied, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the activated line. The above steps S106 and S107 are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps will be collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. The extraction of the random number and the flag processing correspond to the internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 623 described above).

As described above with reference to FIG. 623, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function processing shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 624, this instruction function process may be executed as part of the flag process of step S107 of FIG. 624, or step S108 may be performed after the flag process of step S107 is completed. The wait timer time-up may be executed before the time is up.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing when the flag process or the instruction function process is executed, a group of condition devices that are allowed to operate based on the winning combination, the instruction content of the instruction function to be generated, etc. At least a part of the information determined on the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) by command communication (corresponding to “instruction information command” described later). Note that the command for notifying these pieces of information may be a command that is appropriately summarized.

Further, the command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) as a result of the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can adopt the following command modes. . That is, the winning combinations are divided into groups based on their types, the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211, and the like, and for the winning combination selected by the internal lottery, the group including the winning combination can be identified in a main form. Commands can be sent from the board 409 to the peripheral board (eg, the sub-board 510). The classification criteria for grouping the winning combinations are not limited to the above example, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, when presence/absence of push order is added to the classification criteria, all bell roles (push order bell 1 to push order bell 6) included in the push order bell are grouped into a common bell role as a push order unquestioned bell. By making different groups, it is possible to divide the bell role into groups depending on the presence or absence of the pushing order. At this time, the role of bell is divided into a group of push order bells and a group of push order unquestioned bells. Further, the same applies to the replay combination, and for example, it may be divided into a push order replay group and a normal replay group (push order does not matter). Further, all winning combinations may be grouped only by the presence/absence of the pushing order, and in such a case, all winning combinations can be divided into a group with a pushing order or a group without a pushing order. Instead of grouping the winning combinations, the condition devices based on the winning combinations may be grouped. Below, the command for notifying such a grouped winning combination will be described in more detail.

First, regarding the command transmission that notifies the grouped winning combination, when the instruction function display is executed, a command that can understand all the details of the grouped winning combination (so-called "complete navigation" command) May be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what kind of winning combination the selected winning combination is and what kind of pressing order it is. Therefore, the reel stopping method advantageous for the player. It is possible to display a navigation display (so-called "complete navigation") that can reliably indicate the.

Further, when the instruction function display is executed for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, a command that can understand a part of the breakdown of the grouped winning combination (for example, only the first stop can be instructed "Partial navigation") may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize a part of the information regarding the selected winning combination, so that it is possible to partially indicate the reel stop method advantageous to the player (for example, only the first stop). A so-called "partial navigation") can be displayed.

Regarding the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combinations, if the instruction function display is not executed, a command that does not give a detailed description of the grouped winning combinations may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group and whether or not the instruction function display can be executed, based on the group indicated by the command. , I cannot recognize any more information. For example, although it is known that the winning combination is one of the push order bells, the proper pressing order and a concrete breakdown of the winning combinations (any one of the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6”) Can be recognized to the extent that they do not know. It should be noted that a command for notifying the winning combination grouped when such an instruction function display is not executed may be considered as a “condition device command”.

Further, when the instruction function display is executed, it is not necessary to limit the small wins to be grouped to the push order bell, and other wins (for example, the push order replay) may be grouped together. . In other words, in this case, regardless of whether the push order bell is selected as the winning combination or another combination, if the proper pressing order is the same, commands indicating the same group shall be transmitted. Means In addition, even when the instruction function display is not executed, it is not necessary to limit the small wins to be grouped to the push order bell, and it is possible to group other wins, but in such a case, Indicates that the type of winning combination (whether it is another role or bell) cannot be discriminated on the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) that has received the command, and the winning combination instruction is given in a state unrelated to the instruction function display. Cannot be performed (for example, when the instruction function is not executed, it is not possible to display a navigation indicating that the other winning combination has been won on the image display body 500). It is desirable to send commands by grouping them according to the type of push order small winning combination, such as separate (replay).

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed in the main board 409 by transmitting the command for notifying the winning combinations grouped in this way, and the peripheral boards can independently win the winning combinations and their winning combinations. It is possible to prevent the determination of the pressing order.

In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start processing (specifically, the game one time before the game) has timed out (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). A timer called this wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of the rotation of the reel in the game to the start of the rotation of the reel in the next game. It is a thing. If the wait timer has timed out (4.1 seconds have already passed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S109. Also, this determination loops until the wait timer times out.

In step S109, rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. When the speed of rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, 301c becomes constant, the operation valid lamps of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player will know that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c has become effective.

In the slot machine 1, the reels that have started to rotate continue to rotate at the above-mentioned constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) by the player is accepted. ..

Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset and the wait timer is started until the next starting process, and the starting process is ended.

[10-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collation of the extracted random number values) is allowed as the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding winning combination) corresponding to the game. If the corresponding winning combination is allowed here, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is operated, and the information of the operated condition device is used as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery to perform the subsequent processing (reel stop processing, (Determination process, payout process, etc.).

In the slot machine 1, a range of random number values (this is referred to as an extraction range) when performing random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 65535 (that is, 2 16 =65536 random numbers). In the present embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is set to 0 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to this. When the extraction range of this random number is expanded, the range of the random number value that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased accordingly, so that the phenomenon that a specific random number value is biasedly extracted is unlikely to occur.

Within the above extraction range, a random number value corresponding to each winning combination is further assigned in advance. For example, when the random number value corresponding to the winning combination “BB1” is selected from the random number values within the extraction range (“0” to “65535” in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment), the result of the internal lottery Means "winning BB1", and the condition device BB1 is processed as an information command in the game. Further, by utilizing this, the winning probability of BB1 (probability that BB1 is selected as a result of the internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the random number value corresponding to the extraction range and BB1. In the examples of FIGS. 617 to 622, the winning probability of BB1 in the general state is [total number of random number values corresponding to BB1/total number of random number values within the extraction range] 384/65536.

In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random numbers are called winning values corresponding to each winning combination. Further, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined winning combination is set to consecutive random number values “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4” within the extraction range, the winning combination of this predetermined winning combination is obtained. The range of values is a random number value "1" to "4". When it is determined (matched) that the extracted random number value corresponds to any one of the random number values “1” to “4”, it means that “the predetermined winning combination is won” as a result of the internal lottery. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 617 to 622, a single winning combination that wins only one winning combination (eg, BB1, BB2, watermelon, cherry, common bell, maintenance replay) is prepared. However, as described above, in addition to such a single winning combination, a simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations simultaneously wins may be prepared. When such a duplicated combination is prepared, the winning value of the duplicated combination is also included in the above winning value.

From this, the range of the winning value is determined for all winning combinations, and it is determined by the internal lottery whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of the winning value of any winning combination. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the winning value range of any winning combination, it is lost. That is, the range of the winning value of the loss is outside the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. The winning value may also be referred to as the winning allowance value.

By the way, a single winning combination corresponds to one winning combination with respect to one extracted random number value, and a simultaneous winning combination has a plurality (eg, two) winning combinations with respect to one extracted random number value. Corresponds to. That is, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that the winning combination has been won. At this time, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations of the plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (operation is allowed). However, even if a plurality of condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are simultaneously established, since the priority of the condition device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, actually, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices are set. It is not always possible to stop on the active line. For example, if the replay combination and the bonus combination are simultaneously elected, and if the replay combination is prioritized, the reel stop processing of step S5 is performed so that the replay combination is prioritized. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the activated line regardless of the pressing order and the pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the activated line and is always the replay combination. The symbol combination will be stopped.

Further, according to FIGS. 617 to 622, during the bonus, the hit value of the push-order-independent bell (common bell) in which the winning (or establishment) can be expected without depending on the push timing and the push order in the stop operation is in the extraction range. Occupies all. Then, in the present embodiment, when the replay is established, the next game is provided without automatically betting and the medals are not consumed, and when the push order unquestioned bell is won, eight medals are paid out. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large amount of medals are paid out during the execution period (during the bonus) of the bonus game.

As can be seen from FIGS. 617 to 622, in the slot machine 1 of this example, a special role (special watermelon) that functions as a transition trigger to change from the hell state to any of the advantageous states A to E , Special cherry, special maintenance lip) is determined by using an internal lottery random number value used in the internal lottery (lottery of the condition device). Therefore, it is not necessary to use a new random number value different from the internal lottery random number value. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property using the hell state and the advantageous state while making the control load more efficient, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[10-3. RT state control processing]
The RT state control process performed in the slot machine 1 will be described below.

[10-3-1. RT state transition control processing]
FIG. 625 is an example of a block diagram showing the transition of the RT state. The RT state transition control is executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

When the data value in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 is cleared (RAM cleared), the general state (RT0) is set. The replay composition probability in the general state (combination probability of sustain replay role, up replay role 1, up replay role 2, down replay role, 7-set replay role, and 7-set fake replay role) is about 1/7.3. . In such a general state, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals bet for the player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period. . That is, the general state is a state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game. Note that in FIG. 625, the replay combination probability is expressed as the RP combination probability.

In the general state, the reel stop button 211 is not stopped in a proper order even if any one of the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6” is selected by the internal lottery, and the 0-bell When the zeroth line is displayed on the activated line, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from the general state to RT1. The replay synthesis probability at RT1 is about 1/7.3. In such RT1, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals bet by the player for executing the game is more than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period, as in the general state. There will be more.

At RT1, when “up rep 1+normal maintenance rep” is selected by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of up rep 1 is displayed on the activated line, the CPU 1110 shifts from RT1 to RT2. Control. When the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, the basic ART game is started on condition that the ART first win lottery is won, and the basic ART game is started. In this specification, a general term for a game in the basic ART, a special zone to be described later, and a special zone in preparation is called an ART game. However, when the player shifts from RT1 to RT2 in a state where he/she has not won the ART initial win lottery, the basic ART game is not started, and the instruction function display and the ART game number addition lottery described later are not performed. However, in the case of being controlled to a high replay probability state (e.g., equivalent to RT2 in this example) in a state where the ART initial win lottery has not been won, the indication function display does not work when the push order bell is won. However, if the payout rate exceeds "1", the above-described game number management process may be started. This is because the state in which the payout rate exceeds "1" is advantageous to the player.

During the ART game, an ART game is executed in which the instruction function can continuously operate over a plurality of games (the instruction function display can be continuously executed over a plurality of games). Specifically, when any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery, the CPU 1110 controls so as to display an instruction function described later. Further, the sub-board 510 also controls so that the display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409. The replay synthesis probability at RT2 is about 1/16. In such RT2, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is larger than the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game within the certain period. That is, in RT2 in which the instruction function display is performed, when the player executes the game, the number of medals increases accordingly. However, the ART game is set to 50 games by one shot, and if it is not won in the lottery for adding the number of ART games described later, the game ends in 50 games. Specifically, if the number of ART games is added to the number of ART games during the ART game, the number of ART games is increased, and the ART games are continued until the number of added ART games other than the above 50 games is exhausted. The indication function is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of ART games is not increased and the lottery is not won, the instruction function display described below is displayed from the start of the basic ART game to the completion of 50 games. finish. At the same time, the display on the sub-board 510 according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is also ended. When the display by the sub-board 510 according to the instruction content of the instruction function is finished, even if any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 The proper stop operation sequence is not specified. Then, when the 0-th page zero-zero is displayed on the activated line, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from RT2 to RT1. Even if the basic ART game is over, RT2 is maintained until the 0-bell zero is displayed on the activated line. Therefore, although the right to execute the replay game is frequently given, the instruction function display is displayed. It will not be done.

In addition, stochastically, “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” are not selected in the internal lottery during the ART game, and the specified number of games is displayed without displaying the instruction function once. It is possible that 50 games will be consumed if the ART game number addition lottery is not won, and 50 games if the ART game number addition lottery is won). In such a case, even if the number of games specified above is exhausted, the ART game continues until the instruction function display is performed, and once the instruction function display is performed, the ART game ends. Is configured.

Further, in this example, one shot of the ART game is set to 50 games, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to 50 games.

In this example, the ART game is managed until the prescribed number of games such as 50 games is exhausted, but instead of this, until the prescribed number of medals, for example, a net increase of 100, is added. You may make it manage the number of sheets which an ART game continues.

During the basic ART, when any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery, the proper stop operation sequence of the reel stop button 211 is clearly shown by the instruction function display. Therefore, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with the instruction function display, the RT state is maintained at RT2 (however, when the symbol combination corresponding to the rising rep 2 is displayed, the process proceeds to RT3). However, even though one of the “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery and the proper stop operation sequence of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, When the reel stop button 211 is not operated in accordance with the instruction function display, the zero-sheet zero is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 controls to shift from RT2 to RT1.

At RT2, when “up rep 2+normal maintenance rep” is selected by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, control is performed so as to shift from RT2 to RT3. When the RT state is changed from RT2 to RT3, the special zone is entered and the ART game is added with a high probability (details will be described later). In this RT3 as well, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 displays an instruction function display to be described later when any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery. To be controlled. Further, the sub-board 510 also controls so that the display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

The specialization zone ends with 5 games. Specifically, when "Lower Lip + Normal Maintenance Rep" is selected in the internal lottery, if it is in the specialized zone (if 5 games have not been exhausted), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination will be The display is controlled so that the instruction function display, which will be described later, is displayed. On the other hand, when "Lower Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip" is selected in the internal lottery, if 5 games have been consumed since the specialization zone was started, the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay role will be displayed. Then, control is performed so that an instruction function display described later is performed (see FIGS. 617 to 622 for each). Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lowered replay combination is displayed, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from RT3 to RT2. Further, when the zero-sheet zero-zero mark is displayed on the activated line at RT3, the CPU 1110 controls to shift the RT state from RT3 to RT1. The replay synthesis probability at RT3 is about 1/16. It should be noted that when five games have been consumed since the specialization zone was started, but the symbol combination corresponding to the lowered replay combination is not yet displayed, the basic ART game is controlled under the RT state of RT3. The lottery state during ART at this time is a high-probability state. Therefore, even during the special zone or during the special zone preparation, as in the basic ART, when any one of the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6” is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button is selected. The proper stop operation sequence of 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, and the RT state is maintained at RT3 as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with the instruction function display, but the reel is not followed according to the instruction function display. When the stop button 211 is operated to display the 0-sheet bell zero line on the activated line, the process moves to RT1.

In any of the general state, RT1, RT2, and RT3, when the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated (when the bonus is established), the inside of the bonus is set. The inside of bonus is a state in which the bonus flag is established but the bonus game is not yet started. In other words, when the bonus combination is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated, but the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is the effective line in the game won in the internal lottery. Even if it is not displayed in, the game continues to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in the activated line in the subsequent games. The replay combining probability inside the bonus is about 1/7.3. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus symbol is displayed on the activated line inside the bonus (when the bonus is won), the bonus game is started and the bonus is in progress. During such a bonus, when the game is played for a certain period, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game becomes larger than the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game within the certain period. . Then, when the bonus game ends, the game returns to the general state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 controls the RT state to any one of the general state (RT0 state), the RT1 state, the RT2 state, the RT3 state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state. It On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the instruction function, and basically, the execution of the ART game in which the instruction function can continuously operate over a plurality of games is performed in such an RT state. It is controlled by a system different from that of. As described above, the ART game with such an instruction function is mainly executed in RT2 and RT3. However, if the execution condition of the ART game is satisfied (for example, winning the ART execution lottery), any RT state is set. , ART games can be executed. However, this is not the case when the restriction of the rule or the like is violated, and for example, the ART game cannot be executed in the bonus state. In the following, the control processing of the state related to the instruction function will be described in detail.

[10-3-2. Lottery related to ART]
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the following lottery is performed as a lottery related to ART. First, there are an ART first win lottery and an ART first win lottery state transition lottery as a lottery related to ART performed in a normal game state (hell state, advantageous state A to advantageous state D) which is neither an ART game nor a bonus. Further, as lottery related to ART performed during the ART game (during the basic ART, during the specialized zone or during preparation for the specialized zone), there are a specialized zone lottery and an additional lottery for the ART game. In addition, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 has the first ART state as the lottery state related to the ART in the normal game state (non-ART, RT1, RT2 and RT3 in which the instruction function is not generated) which is neither the ART game nor the bonus. Control to any one of a plurality of lottery states (advantageous state A to advantageous state D) having different advantages of winning lottery, and when the game state is neither in the normal game state nor in the bonus (during the ART game), special zone lottery or It is controlled to any one of a plurality of lottery states (ART medium/low probability state, ART medium/high probability state, specialized zone, specialized zone in preparation) with different advantages of the number of ART games.

In the hell state, the operation of the instruction function is not confirmed, and when a special role is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state, it shifts to one of the advantageous states A to E, but in these advantageous states A to E, , The operation of the indicator function is definitely confirmed once (the indicator function display is always displayed once). In addition, the winning probability (probability of transition to advantageous state E) of 50 ART games executed when one game is executed in the hell state is a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special cherry role, etc.) in the internal lottery. It is a composite probability of the probability that the maintenance replay part will be selected) and the probability that the transfer destination will be determined to the advantageous state E in the transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) when the special part is selected in the internal lottery. ..

During the ART game, the CPU 1110 controls the lottery state related to ART to any one of an ART medium/low probability state, an ART medium/high probability state, a specialized zone preparation state, and a specialized zone state. The ART medium low probability state, the ART medium high probability state, the specialized zone preparation state, and the specialized zone state are collectively referred to as the ART medium lottery state. The ART medium/low probability state is a lottery state in which the winning probability in the special zone lottery or the ART game number addition lottery that is performed at a non-normal time (ART flag ON) is performed with a relatively low probability. The ART medium-high probability state is a lottery state in which the winning probability in the special zone lottery and the ART game number addition lottery performed at a non-normal time (ART flag ON) is relatively high. The special zone preparation state is a lottery state when the special zone lottery is won but the special zone is not yet started (that is, the special zone lottery is won but the RT state is not yet shifted to RT3. State). The specialization zone state is a lottery state in the specialization zone.

As described above, both the specialized zone state and the specialized zone preparation state are the lottery states related to the ART controlled when the special zone lottery is won in the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state. is there. Further, the CPU 1110 only during the control to the ART medium low probability state and the ART medium high probability state, the ART lottery state in the basic ART (lottery state relating to ART which is not in the specialization zone or the specialization zone preparation). Is determined based on the result of the ART mid-lottery state transition lottery as to which of the above-mentioned ART mid-low probability state and ART mid-high probability state is controlled. This lot drawing state transition during ART is performed by using a lottery table during ART lot state transfer shown in FIG. 643 described later. In the ART medium/low probability state, the transition lottery to the ART medium/high probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery. Further, in the ART medium/high probability state, the transition lottery to the ART medium/low probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery. The specific transition probability in the ART lottery state transition lottery is as shown in FIG. 643 described later.

The specific winning probability in the specialized zone lottery is as shown in FIG. 644 described later. The special zone lottery is performed every game in a non-normal time according to the ART lottery state and the condition device operated as a result of the internal lottery. If you win the specialized zone lottery, when "Up Lip 2 + Normal Maintenance Lip" is selected in the internal lottery in the subsequent games, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "Right-Left-Middle" (reverse The CPU 1110 displays an instruction function so that the sub-board 510 displays the instruction function determined by the main board 409 so that the sub-board 510 can perform a stop operation by pinching. When the player operates the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, the RT state shifts from RT2 to RT3, and the specialized zone is started. It However, in the present embodiment, the special zone can be won only when a watermelon, a cherry, or a loss is selected in the internal lottery in the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state. Therefore, in the specialized zone state and the specialized zone preparation state, the result of the specialized zone lottery is always non-win. The specialized zone state ends in 5 games as described above. Thereafter, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lowered replay combination is displayed, the process shifts from RT3 to RT2, and the ART lottery state at this time is controlled to a high probability state.

The lottery for increasing the number of ART games is performed depending on the advantageous state B (when the ART game is executed when the precursor game is exhausted), the ART lottery state, and the condition device operated as a result of the internal lottery. It is performed when the special zone lottery is not won. However, the special zone lottery and the lottery for adding the number of ART games may be simultaneously performed. In the ART game number addition lottery, an addition determination lottery for deciding whether or not to add the ART game number and an addition game for deciding the number of games to be added when it is decided to add the ART game number The number determination lottery is included. The specific winning probability in the addition determination lottery is as shown in FIGS. 635 and 641 described later. The specific number of ART games to be added in the additional game number determination lottery is as shown in FIGS. 636 to 639 and FIG. 641(b) described later.

The additional game number determination lottery is a lottery performed when the additional game number determination lottery is won, and the specific lottery probability in the additional game number determination lottery is, in the ART medium low probability state, described later using FIG. , The number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery. Further, in the ART medium-high probability state, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery by using FIG. 637 described later. Similarly, when the special zone is set, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery by using FIG. 638 described later, and when the special zone is being prepared, the later-described FIG. 639 is used. Then, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery. However, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", the specific lottery probability in the additional game number determination lottery is shown in FIG. a), and the number of games to be added when winning the additional game number determination lottery is as shown in FIG. 641(b).

[10-3-3. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 623, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the main board 409 selects the winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIGS. 617 to 622 for the lottery table). When the main processing of the instruction function processing is performed by the main board 409 and the generation of the instruction is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) has the same instruction. It is possible to display the function instruction on another display device or the like (navigation display, instruction generation effect). Although the display modes of the instruction function display and the navigation display may be various, both displays are required to have display contents in accordance with the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

FIG. 626 is a diagram for explaining a rough processing flow of the instruction function processing. In FIG. 626, regarding the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1, a series of processing executed by the main board 409 and a series of processing executed by the sub-board 510 upon receiving a command from the main board 409 are shown together. ing. FIG. 627 is a flowchart showing an example of processing relating to the generation of the instruction function executed by the main board 409 among the instruction function processing shown in FIG. 626. Here, first, the outline of the instruction function processing will be described with reference to FIG. 626, and in [10-3-4] and thereafter, the processing relating to the generation of the instruction function will be described with reference to FIGS. 627 to 634. The flow of the game will be described as well.

Although various flags are used in the following description of the instruction function processing, these flags are used in the memory (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510) in the board that executes the instruction function processing. This is an internal flag that is held, and the value or the like is rewritten or read by the CPU or the like (eg, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118) of each board. Further, when the flags of the same name are used between the main board 409 and a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), it is basically assumed that these internal flags have a common data format. It is assumed that the value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a signal such as a command to the.

In addition to the above internal flags, variable data may be used. These variable data are also stored in the memory of the board that refers to the variable data (for example, in the case of the main board 409, the RAM 1114 and the sub-board 510). In this case, the value is stored in the RAM 1122) and its value is read or rewritten by the CPU or the like (for example, the CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409, the CPU 1118 in the case of the sub board 510).

First, in step S61 of FIG. 626, the main board 409 executes processing relating to whether or not to generate the instruction function (processing relating to generation of the instruction function). More specifically, the winning of the ART first win lottery is determined, whether or not the ART game can be started, and the number of continued ART games are determined.

When it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated as a result of the processing related to the generation of the instruction function, the main board 409 causes the special display LED 612 to display the instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game. Processing is performed (step S62). By this instruction function display, it is possible to show an appropriate stop order of the push order small winning combination established during the ART, or to show that a predetermined symbol should be arranged in the predetermined stop order.

In addition, in the case of the game in which it is determined in step S61 that the main board 409 does not need to display the instruction function, the specific display function display by the special display LED 612 is not performed in step S62.

While the main board 409 displays the instruction function in step S62 based on the result of the process related to the generation of the instruction function in step S61, the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display is given by a command or the like. It is transmitted to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) (instruction information command). When the indication function display is not performed, the fact may be notified by the indication information command, or the indication information command may not be transmitted. However, if the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary for the receiving side to determine that the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the peripheral board (sub-board 510) can recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game, based on the reception of the instruction information command. Display contents (instruction contents) can also be understood.

Then, the peripheral board (here, the sub-board 510) that has received the instruction information command from the main board 409 performs the processing shown in steps S63 to S65 of FIG. 626 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the instruction function process shown in FIG. 626, the process relating to the generation of the instruction function (step S61) is first executed by the main board 409, but the subsequent processing by the main board 409 and the sub-board 510 (specifically, Does not limit the execution timings of the processes of step S62 and steps S63 to S65).

First, in step S63, it is determined whether or not the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) displays (or has performed) the instruction function display in the game, and the indication function display is (or has been performed). ) (YES in step S63), the instruction generation effect process is performed as the process in step S64. If the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) determines in step S63 that the instruction function display is not performed (or was not performed) (NO in step S63), the peripheral board is instructed as the processing in step S65. Performs function-related processing.

The instruction generation effect process in step S64 is an "instruction generation effect" for instructing the player about the stop order and stop position of the reel 301 (target symbol, that is, timing of stop operation) on the image display body 500 and other display devices. Is a process for displaying a so-called ART navigation or the like. It should be noted that the instruction content shown to the player by the instruction generation effect is limited to that in accordance with the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display processing. For example, it is not permissible that the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "reverse push" although the instruction content indicating the "forward push" is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display. Even if the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating “forward pressing” and indicates “the left reel 301a should be stopped first” as the instruction according to the instruction generation effect content, the second subsequent Even if the reel 301b to be stopped is not designated, it is not allowed. In addition, the fact that the instruction content by the instruction generation effect is limited to the content displayed according to the display content on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-described pressing order, and is a guideline of the pressing place in the instruction function display. Also applies when is determined. That is, for example, although the instruction content indicating that "a red 7 symbol should be aimed at by all reels" is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "BAR symbol". It is not permissible to be "aim to aim at" or "to aim at the red 7 symbol only on some reels".

In addition, regarding a specific effect form of the instruction generation effect, various effect modes such as displaying the pressing order and the symbols on the liquid crystal screen, lighting the LEDs associated with the reels 301a to 301c, and the like are conventionally known. However, any one or a combination thereof may be used.

The instruction function-related processing in step S65 is related to the instruction function when the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612 (for example, a game in non-ART or a game in which no winning order is selected in the push order even in ART). This is a process for displaying a predetermined effect screen and the like. It should be noted that, among the above-mentioned "pushing order-independent winning combinations", not only the winning combinations that can be expected to pay out the maximum number of coins regardless of the playing method at the time of winning like the pressing-order-independent winning bell, but depending on the playing method It also includes winning roles where you cannot expect the maximum number of payouts or you cannot get the payouts. To be more specific, not only is the winning combination (eg, watermelon combination) that can be obtained when playing with a game method that is expected to give the maximum payout (corresponding to the above-mentioned “maximum efficiency batting method”), A winning combination that cannot be obtained when playing in the "maximum efficiency batting method" (for example, a symbol combination using a symbol arranged on the opposite side of the symbol arrangement of the reel 301 from the symbol combination of the above watermelon role is prepared, It is a single winning combination that is determined as a winning by stopping the symbol combination, and includes a so-called chance winning combination.

The instruction function processing is completed by performing the processing of steps S61 to S65 described above. In the following, each process (step S61 to step S65) performed as the instruction function process by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 will be described in detail.

[10-3-4. Processing related to generation of instruction function]
The flow of the game including the process relating to the generation of the instruction function shown in step S61 of FIG. 626 will be described with reference to FIG. 627.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 627, it is determined whether the game number management flag is ON. The number-of-games management flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the number-of-games management process is in progress. Any of the above) means that when it is OFF, it means that the game number management processing is not performed (that is, the hell state). When the game number management flag is ON (YES in step S601), the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the number of games executed during the game number management process (the number of games executed by the player while the game number management flag is set to ON) is counted. Specifically, when one game is executed during the game number management process, the game number counter GC is incremented by 1 as the number of games executed during the game number management process. After that, the process proceeds to step S603.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E and the withdrawal state are prepared as the states during the game number management process, and any one of these advantageous states is controlled.

Here, the outline of each advantageous state of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E and the pullback state will be briefly described. The advantageous state A is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and when the instruction function display is performed once in the game after the 32 games have been executed, the advantageous state A ends and the state shifts to the hell state. . The advantageous state B is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and after the 32 games have been executed, the advantageous state E described later is entered. The advantageous state C is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and when the 32 games are executed, the next game is shifted to the advantageous state D described later. In the advantageous state D, 10 games are set as a chance zone (hereinafter, referred to as “CZ”), and a rare small role (watermelon role, cherry role) is selected by an internal lottery during the 10 games as the CZ. There is a 100% chance that the game will shift to the advantageous state E from the next game, and if one of the "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, there is a 1/4 probability. Then, the game shifts to the advantageous state E from the next game, but when the CZ ends without shifting to the advantageous state E, the state shifts to the hell state. The advantageous state E is a state in which the instruction function flag is set to ON and the execution of the ART game is permitted, and the preparation state until the RT state is changed from RT1 to RT2, the running state of the ART game, and the advantageous state E. include. Further, in this advantageous state E, the instruction function continuously operates for the specified number of games (“50 games+α” (α is the number of additional games) in this example) unless the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value. However, when the ART game of the specified number of games is exhausted, the game is finished unless the number of ART games is added. After the advantageous state E ends, as long as the number-of-games management flag is ON (as long as the number-of-games counter GC does not exceed a predetermined threshold value), the pullback state A or the pullback state B described later is controlled.

In this example, the advantageous state does not end and the state shifts to the hell state without displaying the instruction function even once. However, when any of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E is controlled to the advantageous game state (particularly the advantageous state A), and the instruction function display is displayed even once during the game number management process. Even when the bonus combination that increases the number of medals is selected by the internal lottery even if it is not released, the instruction function display may not be performed as special processing (special processing execution means).

By the way, in many conventional slot machines, when an ART first win lottery is won, a precursor game is played over a plurality of games (for example, 32 games), and the ART game is often executed after the precursor game is executed. It was In such a conventional slot machine, there is a possibility that the player may win the ART first win lottery even if he/she has not won the ART first win lottery. For example, when the precursor game is executed. That is, after the precursor game is executed, there are cases where the ART game is executed and cases where the ART game is not executed. Then, the expectation game that can give the player the expectation of winning the ART first win lottery is executed during the predictive game, so that the predictive game can attract the player's interest.

However, in such a conventional slot machine, if the player does not win the ART first win lottery even though the precursor game is executed, the player is greatly discouraged. In particular, if the result of the ART first win lottery is not clearly shown until the set omen game is exhausted, the player must execute the omen game in the possibility that the ART first win lottery is not won. Of course, if you haven't won the ART first win lottery, your interest will drop significantly. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the hell state, if the player wins the ART first hit lottery and the transition destination is determined to be one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state C (that is, the ceiling game (precursor game) In the case where the transition destination is determined to be the advantageous state to be set), when the set ceiling game is exhausted, the instruction function display is always performed once. As a result, the player will not be forced to execute the precursor game even if he/she may not have won the ART first win lottery, and it is confirmed that the instruction function display will be performed at least once. Will be executed. Moreover, since the degree of profit for the player after the precursory game has been digested varies depending on the advantageous state, it is possible to preferably suppress the decline in interest without loosing the significance of the precursory game. .. In this example, when the set ceiling game (precursor game) is exhausted, the instruction function display is always displayed once, but the operation of the instruction function display is not always set. The ceiling game is not limited to being played only when it is consumed. For example, if it is not a mode in which the result of the ART first hit lottery can be grasped at the time when the indication function display is executed, the indication function display may be activated in the middle of the precursor game. "The mode in which the result of the ART first hit lottery can be grasped when the instruction function display is executed" means that the instruction function is displayed in the middle of the omen game when the number of times the instruction function display has been activated is one during the omen game. When the display operates, it corresponds to a mode in which it is possible to know that the ART game is not executed at that time.

Further, as described above, the hell state is a state in which execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, and the advantageous state is a state in which execution of the instruction function display is confirmed. However, the execution of the indication function display is not finalized in the pullback state. Therefore, when defining the hell state and the non-hell state (advantageous state A to advantageous state E, pullback state A and pullback state B), the state in which execution of the instruction function display cannot be permitted is the hell state. The non-hell state is a state in which execution of the instruction function display can be permitted.

Further, in the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B and the advantageous state C of this example, 32 games are set as the ceiling, but it goes without saying that the ceiling is not limited to 32 games. It is preferable to set the number of games to 32 or less.

Further, in the advantageous state D of this example, 10 games are set as CZ, but it goes without saying that the number of games set as CZ is not limited to 10 games.

In the processing from step S603, processing according to the state is performed. Specifically, if it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous state A flag is ON (YES in step S603), the advantageous state A time process is performed (step S604). When it is determined that the advantageous state A flag is OFF in step S603 (NO in step S603), the process proceeds to step S605, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state B flag is ON (step S605). If it is determined in step S605 that the advantageous state B flag is ON (YES in step S605), the advantageous state B time process is performed (step S606). When it is determined in step S605 that the advantageous state B flag is OFF (NO in step S605), the process proceeds to step S607, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state C flag is ON (step S607). If it is determined in step S607 that the advantageous state C flag is ON (YES in step S607), the advantageous state C time process is performed (step S608). When it is determined in step S607 that the advantageous state C flag is OFF (NO in step S607), the process proceeds to step S609, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state D flag is ON (step S609). When it is determined in step S609 that the advantageous state D flag is ON (YES in step S609), advantageous state D time processing is performed (step S610). When it is determined that the advantageous state D flag is OFF in step S609 (NO in step S609), the process proceeds to step S611, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state E flag is ON (step S611). If it is determined in step S611 that the advantageous state E flag is OFF (YES in step S611), the advantageous state E time process is performed (step S612). When it is determined in step S611 that the advantageous state E flag is OFF (NO in step S611), the process proceeds to step S613, and the pullback state process is performed (step S613).

If it is determined in step S601 that the number-of-games management flag is OFF (NO in step S601), the process proceeds to step S614, and the hell state process is performed.

Hereinafter, the processing in the hell state, each processing in the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, and the pullback state processing will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 628 to 634. 628 to 634 are flowcharts showing an example of each processing executed by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. More specifically, FIG. 628 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the hell state. FIG. 629 is a flowchart showing an example of the advantageous state A process. FIG. 630 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the advantageous state B. FIG. 631 is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the advantageous state C. FIG. 632 is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the advantageous state D. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing in the advantageous state E. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing an example of the pullback state processing.

[10-3-4-1. Hell state processing]
In the hell state, first, it is determined whether or not a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) has been selected in the internal lottery (step S6011). When it is determined in step S601 that one of the special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, and special maintenance replay role) has been selected in the internal lottery (YES in step S6011), the selected special role. The transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) is performed according to the type of. This transfer destination determination lottery is a lottery for determining the advantageous state of the transfer destination, and the transfer destination is determined from the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E.

In the transition destination determination lottery in step S6012, the advantageous state A is determined with a probability of 59,600,65,536, the advantageous state B is determined with a probability of 3,935,65,536, and the advantageous state C is determined with a probability of 2000,65,536. , With the probability of 1/65536, the advantageous state D is determined, and with the probability of 1/65536, the advantageous state E is determined. In addition, the slot machine 1 of this example is configured so that a person concerned with the hall or the like can change it to any setting among the settings 1 to 6, and each winning combination is selected in the internal lottery for each of these settings. The probability of being different is different. However, with regard to the probability that the special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) is selected in the internal lottery, the same probability is set in any of the settings 1 to 6. Here, the probability that a special watermelon role is selected, the probability that a special cherry character role is selected, and the probability that a special maintenance replay role is selected may be common to each of Settings 1 to 6, or each special character may be selected. Although the probabilities of being output are different for each setting, the combination probabilities that the special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, and special maintenance replay combination) are selected may be common to the settings 1 to 6.

When the transfer destination is determined in step S6012, the transfer destination is determined in steps S6013 to S6016, and the game state flag corresponding to the transfer destination is set to ON.

Specifically, when it is determined that the transition destination is in the advantageous state A (YES in all of steps S6013 to S6016), the advantageous state A flag is set to ON (step S6017). After that, the process advances to step S6018, and the number of ceiling games is set to 32 (TA←32). After that, the process advances to step S6019, and the precursory flag is set to ON.

If it is determined that the destination is the advantageous state B (YES in steps S6013 to 6015 and NO in step S6016), the advantageous state B flag is set to ON (step S6022). After that, the flow advances to step S6023, and the number of ceiling games is set to 32 (TB←32). After that, the process advances to step S6019, and the precursory flag is set to ON.

If it is determined that the destination is the advantageous state C (YES in steps S6013 and 6014 and NO in step S6015), the advantageous state C flag is set to ON (step S6024). After that, the process advances to step S6025, and the number of ceiling games is set to 32 (TC←32). After that, the process advances to step S6019, and the precursory flag is set to ON.

When the precursor flag is set to ON in step S6019, the hell state flag is then set to OFF (step S6020), the game number management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the process in hell state is completed. To do.

When the number of ceiling games is set, the precursor effect is performed until the number of ceiling games is exhausted. However, during the sign production (until the number of games of the ceiling game is exhausted), if you win the ART first win lottery or select the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) in the internal lottery, Even if all the ceiling games have not been exhausted, the ART game and the bonus game are executed.

When it is determined that the destination is the advantageous state D (YES in step S6013 and NO in step S6014), the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6026). After that, the process advances to step S6027, and the number of CZ games is set to 10 (CZ←10). At this time, the ceiling game number is not set (the ceiling game number may be set to 0 game). After that, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), the game number management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state process ends.

If it is determined that the transition destination is in the advantageous state E (NO in step S6013), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6028). After that, the process advances to step S6029, and the number of ART games is set to 50 (ART←50). When the ART game number ART is set to 50 games (YES in step S6129), the ART flag is set to ON (step S6030). After that, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), the game number management flag is set to ON (step S6021), the hell state process ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

In addition, when the special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) is not selected in the internal lottery (NO in step S6011), the processing in steps S6012 to S6021 is skipped and the game is executed. The number management state is not started (it is not shifted to the advantageous state), and the hell state continues.

By the way, when the destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed in the hell state, the result is changed to an advantageous state regardless of the result of the lottery, and the instruction function display is always displayed once. The determination as to whether or not the special role has been won (step S6011) and/or the transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) corresponds to the ART first hit lottery in the hell state. However, when it is defined as "ART game execution lottery", the determination of whether or not a special part has been won in the internal lottery (step S6011) does not correspond to "ART game execution lottery", and the transfer destination determination lottery Only (step S6012) corresponds to the “ART game execution lottery”.

In the hell state, when it is determined that the special role has been selected in step S6011 (YES in step S6011) and the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed, the game number management flag is set to ON, The game number counter GC starts counting from the next game. Even if it is in the hell state and the bonus game is being executed, if it is determined that the special combination is selected in step S6011 (YES in step S6011) and the transition destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed, The game number management flag is set to ON, and the counting of the game number counter GC is started from the next game. Therefore, in this case, if the transition destination is one of the advantageous states A to C, the ceiling game is exhausted during the bonus game, and if the transition destination is the advantageous state D, the chance zone ( CA) will be executed, and if the transition destination is the advantageous state E, the bonus game ends and the RT game starts when the RT state changes to RT2 (RT0 is controlled after the bonus game ends). Will be done. When the game number management process is started (when the game state relating to the indication function display is changed from the hell state to the advantageous state), the special process described above is excluded (that is, the bonus combination is performed during the game number management process). (Except when is selected by an internal lottery), the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, comparing the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON and the period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF, the period set to ON is longer, The period in which the number management flag is set to ON is configured to be 70% or less of the entire game period. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing gambling.

[10-3-4-2. Advantageous state A processing]
In the advantageous state A, first, in step S6031, the digestion process of the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, each time the game is executed, one is subtracted from the ceiling game number set as 32 games (TA←TA-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the ceiling game number in step S6031, thereafter, it is determined whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (step S6032). ). The predetermined threshold value G is a value that is set so that the number of medals to be paid out to a player in one game number management process does not exceed a specified value. In this example, when the prescribed value is N, the predetermined threshold G is set to a value obtained by dividing N by the inclination value (the number of net increase per game). For example, in the case where the number of game media to be paid out to the player in one game number management process is regulated not to exceed 3000, when the inclination value is set to 2 [sheets/game], 1500 games are set as the predetermined threshold G. Is set. However, in a slot machine equipped with a bonus game, a value obtained by subtracting the shortest bonus game number from the above G may be set as the predetermined threshold value. For example, when it is specified that the number of game media to be paid out to the player in one game number management process does not exceed 3000, the inclination value is 2 [sheets/game] and the shortest bonus game number is 34 games. Then, the 1466 game is set as the predetermined threshold.

When the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6034, and the ART initial win lottery is performed (step S6034). The ART initial win lottery performed in step S6034 is a lottery that determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip” or “normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is as shown in FIG. 640. .. Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is neither "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" nor "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is set to 1/65536. There is. FIG. 640 is a table used in the ART initial win lottery when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip” or “normal maintenance lip”.

Here, the ART initial win lottery performed in step S6034 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery performed in step S6034 is as shown in FIG. 640 (“special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip”). As shown in the column of time), it is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number K of games remaining until the game number management process is completed). To be done.

Specifically, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, if the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or more than the first specified number, ART The winning probability in the first win lottery is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first stipulated number, in the ART initial win lottery The winning probability is 4/65536. The first prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first win lottery, a predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) Is preferably a value that can be digested without terminating halfway. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games executed when the ART first win lottery is won is 50 (when the additional lottery is not won), the first prescribed number is 50 or more. However, it is not limited thereto. However, since the ART game is not started immediately even if the ART first win lottery is won, it is preferable to set the game to (50 games+α) in consideration of the number of games in the preparation state. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", if there are 100 or more games remaining until the end of the game number management process, there is a 100% chance of winning the ART first win. If the number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than 100 games, it is only possible to win the ART first win lottery with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is relatively small. Therefore, even if the ART game is executed by winning the ART first win lottery. Instead, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly ended midway. As a result, it is possible to reduce discouragement that can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first stipulated number. By making (4/65536 in this example) lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or more than the first specified number. , The number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process while maintaining the same proportion as compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is constant regardless of the number-of-games counter GC counted during the number-of-games management process. When K is equal to or more than the first stipulated number, it is possible to realize a further game effect such that it is possible to realize a game property in which the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) is increased. Becomes

Further, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance lip, as shown in FIG. Is 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first prescribed number. Based on whether or not there is a win, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery will be determined in one of two stages: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number of games remaining K until the end of the number-of-games management process K The winning probability in the ART first win lottery may be gradually decreased as is smaller.

When the ART first win lottery is won (YES in step S6035), the process proceeds to step S6036, and the ceiling game number is set to 0 (TA←0). Thereafter, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6037), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6038), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6039), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. Then, the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6041). After that, the process advances to step S6042, and RT state transition processing is performed.

The RT state transition process of step S6042 is a process of transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when the "increase rep 1+normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6041. The indication function is displayed so that the operation is stopped by pressing (reverse). When the player operates the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 controls the shift from RT1 to RT2. Then, on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6043), the advantageous state A time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if the "up rip 1 + normal maintenance rep" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not comply with this even though the instruction function display is displayed, in step S6042, from RT1 to RT2. Is not controlled. When "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip" is not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6043, but the player did not follow this even though the instruction function display was displayed. At this time, although the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6042, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6043. It is to be noted that the instruction function display is performed when "raise REP 1+normal maintenance REP" is selected in the internal lottery until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed. In other words, when "up rep 1 + normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery at RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, control to shift to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 1 is not displayed on the activated line because the instruction function display is not followed, the RT flag is set to ON although the RT flag is maintained. Further, according to the lottery tables of FIGS. 617 to 622, the “raising lip 1+normal maintenance lip” corresponds to only one condition device of the pushing order, but like the pushing order bell, there are six pushing orders. It is preferable to have a corresponding condition device.

The ART flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not an ART game is in progress. When it is ON, it means that ART is in progress. When it is OFF, it is not in ART. , That is, in non-ART.

If the ART initial win lottery in step S6034 is not won (NO in step S6035), the process advances to step S6044, and it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TA=0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), the process does not proceed to step S6053 described later (that is, the processes in steps S6053 to S6061 are not performed), and the advantageous state A is continued without shifting to the hell state. It

If the player wins the ART first hit lottery (YES in step S6035), the advantageous state A ends and the player shifts to the advantageous state E even if the number of ceiling games has not been exhausted, while the ART first hit lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6035), the advantageous state A continues until the number of ceiling games is exhausted. However, although not shown in FIG. 629, even if the player loses the ART initial winning lottery (NO in step S6035) and the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), a bonus combination is given in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line. During the execution of this bonus game, the ART first win lottery is performed with a probability of 328/65536. When the ART first win lottery is won, the advantageous state E is immediately set after the bonus game is completed. On the other hand, if the ART first win lottery is not won during execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TA←32), and the advantageous state A process is performed again.

When it is determined in step S6044 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TA=0) (YES in step S6044), the process advances to step S6053, and the game number counter GC of the current game management process, that is, the game number counter GC currently in progress After the counting is started (after the number-of-games management flag is set to ON), it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once (step S6053). Whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once is determined by the internal lottery after the count of the game number counter GC is started (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or blinking)). One of the "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected, and the maximum payout number (8 in this example) among the prize payout numbers corresponding to the "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected. The determination is whether or not the stop operation mode for paying out (sheet) has been instructed even once.

When it is determined in step S6053 that the instruction function display is performed once or more during the game number management process (YES in step S6053), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6054), and the precursor flag is turned off. (Step S6055), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6056), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6057), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6058). After that, the process proceeds to step S6059, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6059), the advantageous state A time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

If it is determined in step S6053 that the instruction function display has not been performed even once during the game number management process (NO in step S6053), the instruction count is set to 1 (step S6060), and the instruction The function flag is set to ON (step S6061). As a result, in the advantageous state A processing, it is determined that the instruction function display has not been performed even once even if the number of ceiling games TA (32 games in this example) has already been exhausted. The hell state is not transitioned until the instruction function display is performed at least once, and the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

However, although not shown in FIG. 629, if the bonus game is executed after the count of the game number counter GC is started, even if the instruction function display is performed after the count of the game number counter GC is started. Even if has not been performed once (even if NO is determined in step S6053), the processes of steps S6054 to S6059 are performed, and the advantageous state A is shifted to the hell state. For example, the bonus game (BB1, BB2) is selected in the internal lottery without winning the ART first hit lottery, and the bonus game is executed, but the bonus game is being executed. Also, if the ceiling game is set to 32 games after the bonus game is finished without winning the ART first win lottery and the advantageous state A processing is performed again, the ceiling function game is displayed without displaying the instruction function 32. When the game is exhausted, after the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state A, the instruction function display is not displayed even once, but the advantageous state A is shifted to the hell state.

When it is determined in step S6032 that the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process exceeds the predetermined threshold value G (NO in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6053, and during the game management process. It is determined whether or not the indication function display has been performed even once (step S6053). In this step S6053, if it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times during the game number management process (YES in step S6053), the processes in steps S6054 to S6059 are performed, and then the advantageous state A is obtained. The time processing ends and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, considering the combination probability (26280/65536) that one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery and a predetermined threshold G (1500 games), the probability. Although it can occur only with a very low probability, stochastically, the game number counter GC does not have to be displayed once after the game number counter GC starts counting, and the game number counter GC has a predetermined threshold value. There may be a case where it is determined that it exceeds G (a case where NO is determined in step S6032 and a case where NO is determined in step S6053). In this case, the processes of steps S6054 to S6059 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to 1 (step S6060), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6061). As a result, even if the number of games (game number counter GC) executed during the game management process exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state A is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

Further, as described above, even after the set ceiling game number TA (32 games in this example) is exhausted, if the instruction function display is not performed even once during the game number management process, the hell Since the advantageous state A continues without shifting to the state, as a result of the subtraction processing in step S6031, the remaining ceiling game number TA may become negative. Therefore, when the ceiling game number TA, which was 32 games at the initial value, becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the ceiling game number TA is set to “FF”, and when the ceiling game number TA is “FF”. As long as the advantageous state A continues without shifting to the hell state or the advantageous state E, the process of step S6031 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6044. As a result, even if the advantageous state A is continued after the ceiling game number TA becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to prevent the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 from being an error and interrupting the game, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Even in step S6031, when the remaining ceiling game number TA becomes negative, even if the game is executed, the remaining ceiling game number TA remains set to "FF", and in addition, "FF" is used in the first place. It may be a process of keeping "00" without setting it to "." Further, the remaining ceiling game number TA has been described as a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that it may be an addition method in which it is added each time the game is executed.

In this example, when the ceiling game number TA, which was initially 32 games, becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the ceiling game number TA is set to “FF”, but instead of this, , "FF" may be set without being set to "FF".

Further, in this example, the initial value of the ceiling game number TA is 32 games, and the subtraction method in which the ceiling game number TA is subtracted each time the game is executed has been described, but it is needless to say that the addition method may be used. .

[10-3-4-3. Advantageous state B processing]
In the advantageous state B, first, in step S6071, the digestion process of the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, each time the game is executed, one is subtracted from the ceiling game number set as 32 games (TB←TB-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the ceiling game number in step S6071, whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is below a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example) or not. Is determined (step S6072). When the game number counter GC is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6072), the process proceeds to step S6073, and the ART game number addition lottery is performed (step S6073). The advantageous state B is a state in which it is decided that the game is transferred to the advantageous state E and the ART games of at least 50 games are executed when the games of the number TB of ceiling games are exhausted, so that the ART performed in step S6073. The number-of-games addition lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the number of games of the ART game is further added. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip” or “normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games is shown in FIG. 641(a). It is as follows. Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is neither "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" nor "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery is set to 1/65536. ing.

The number of games to be added when winning the ART game number addition lottery is as shown in FIG. 641(b). It should be noted that in the case of ““Special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep” not winning” shown in FIG. 641(b), the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep” and “normal maintenance rep”. Not only when it is neither a “rep” but also when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is a “normal maintenance lip”.

Here, the lottery for increasing the number of ART games performed in step S6073 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery performed in step S6073 is predetermined as shown in FIG. 641(a). Is determined based on a difference K between the threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number K of games remaining until the end of the game number management process).

Specifically, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, if the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is the second prescribed number or more, the ART The winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of games is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number K of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the second stipulated number, the number of ART games will be added to the lottery. The winning probability at is 4/65536. The above-mentioned second stipulated number can be set arbitrarily, but even if an ART game is added on the basis of winning the number of ART games and being drawn in a lottery, the value that can be consumed without ending the ART game in the middle Is preferred. In the present embodiment, when the ART game number addition lottery is won, a maximum of 300 games is added. Therefore, the second prescribed number is preferably 300 games or more, but is not limited to this. Absent. Therefore, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is 300 or more, there is a 100% probability that the number of ART games will be If the number of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than 300 games, it is possible to win the additional number of ART games only with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is small, the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery becomes relatively small. Therefore, the ART game number addition lottery is won and the ART game is added. However, it is possible to prevent the ART game from being forcibly ended midway. As a result, it is possible to reduce discouragement that can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of ART games to be added when the number of games K remaining until the end of the number of games management process is less than the second stipulated number is added. The winning probability in the lottery (4/65536 in this example) is added to the number of ART games when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or more than the second specified number. 65536) compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process, while keeping the same proportion. When the number K of games remaining until the end of the number management process is equal to or more than a prescribed number, it is possible to realize a game property in which the winning probability (655536/65536 in this example) in the ART game number lottery is increased. It is possible to produce further operational effects.

Further, as shown in FIG. 641(b), regarding the number of games to be added when the number of ART games is added to the lottery, the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”. When it is, the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is different between the second prescribed number and less than the second prescribed number. Specifically, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" Compared with, the number of games to be added is set to increase. As a result, if the number K of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is small, the number of ART games to be added when the number of ART games to be added is won is relatively small. Even if the ART game is added as a result and the ART game is forcibly ended midway, it is possible to reduce the discouragement that can be given to the player.

In the embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the second prescribed number. Based on whether or not there is an ART game number, the winning probability in the lottery will be determined in one of two stages: a high probability (65536/65536) and a low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery is set in multiple stages, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process As K decreases, the winning probability in the lottery for adding ART games may gradually decrease.

After that, proceeding to step S6074, it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TB=0). If the number of ceiling games is 0 (YES in step S6074), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6075), the advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (step S6076), and the advantageous state E flag is set to ON. (Step S6077), the number of ART games is set (step S6078), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6079). After that, the process advances to step S6080, and the RT state transition process is performed.

Note that, in step S6073, the ART initial win lottery may be performed instead of the ART game number lottery. In this case, the ceiling game number TB is set to 0 and then the process proceeds to step S6074.

The RT state transition process of step S6080 is a process of transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when “up lip 1+normal hold lip” is selected in the internal lottery, since the instruction function is activated in step S6079, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of “right-middle-left”. The indication function is displayed so that the operation is stopped by pressing (reverse). When the player operates the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 controls the shift from RT1 to RT2. Then, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6081) on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, and the advantageous state B time process ends and the process returns to the main routine. However, if the "upgrade rep 1 + normal maintenance rep" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not comply with this even though the instruction function display is displayed, in step S6080 from RT1 to RT2. Is not controlled. When "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip" is not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6081, but the player did not follow this even though the instruction function display was displayed. At this time, although the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6080, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6081. It is to be noted that the instruction function display is performed when "raise REP 1+normal maintenance REP" is selected in the internal lottery until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed. In other words, when "up rep 1 + normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery at RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, control to shift to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 1 is not displayed on the activated line because the instruction function display is not followed, the RT flag is set to ON although the RT flag is maintained. Further, as described above, it is preferable to have a condition device corresponding to 6 types of pushing order, such as the pushing order bell, also for the "lifting lip 1+normal maintenance lip".

Note that in step S6078, the number of games for one shot of the ART game (50 games in this example) is set if the additional lottery in step S6073 has not been won, but if the additional lottery in step S6073 is won, The number of games (50+α) obtained by adding the number of games α to be added is set.

If it is determined in step S6074 that the number of ceiling games is not 0 (TB=0) (NO in step S6074), regardless of whether or not the player has won the ART game addition lottery in step S6073. The processing of steps S6075 to S6081 is not performed. That is, the advantageous state B is continued without shifting to the hell state.

When it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6072), it is determined whether or not the instruction function display is performed even once during the game management process. (Step S6082). That is, after the count of the game number counter GC is started (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or blinking)), any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery. Is selected and the stop operation mode for paying out the maximum payout number (8 in this example) out of the prize payout numbers corresponding to the “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is instructed even once. It is determined whether it has been done.

In the advantageous state B, when the ceiling game number TB is exhausted, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E and the ART game is executed, but it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value. (NO in step S6072). For example, the state of the game number counter GC is changed from the hell state to the advantageous state E, the ART game is executed, the ART game is added, and the state of the ART game is finished but the state is not changed to the hell state. In the case where the state is continuously shifted to the advantageous state B (for example, when the player wins the ART first win lottery in the pullback mode and is shifted to the advantageous state B), the ceiling game TB is exhausted in the advantageous state B. This is a case where the number-of-games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). In such a case, if the instruction function display is performed even once, the advantageous state B is forcibly transitioned to the hell state. However, during the game number management process, the instruction function display is 1 Occasionally, it will not be done twice. In that case, even if it is in the advantageous state B, the instruction function display is performed once without forcibly shifting to the advantageous state E (without executing the ART game), and then forcibly. The advantageous state B is transferred to the hell state. As a result, even if the number of games (game number counter GC) executed during the game management process exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed immediately and the instruction function is not immediately displayed without displaying the instruction function. The advantageous state B is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6072), in step S6082, whether the instruction function display is performed during the game number management process. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function display has not been performed even once during the game number management process (NO in step S6082), the instruction count is set to 1 (step S6089), and the instruction function flag is set. Is set to ON (step S6090). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function display is performed during the game number management process (YES in step S6082), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6083), and the precursor flag is set to OFF. The advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (step S6085), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6086), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6087). After that, the process proceeds to step S6088, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S60888), the advantageous state B time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine. As a result, when the game number counter GC is started by shifting from the hell state to any of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, even if the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value, The advantageous state B is not shifted to the hell state even if the instruction function display is not performed even once, and the hell state is always performed after the instruction function display is performed once.

Further, when it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6072), the set ceiling game number TB (32 games in this example) is exhausted. However, since the advantageous state B continues without shifting to the hell state if the indication function display is not displayed once during the game number management process, the result of the subtraction process in step S6071 is The number of remaining ceiling games TB may be negative. Therefore, if the ceiling game number TB, which was 32 games in the initial value, becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, the ceiling game number TB is set to FF, and when the ceiling game number TB is FF, the hell state or As long as the advantageous state B continues without shifting to another advantageous state, the process of step S6071 is not performed. As a result, even if the advantageous state B is continued after the ceiling game number TB becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to prevent the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 from being an error and interrupting the game, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Even in step S6071, if the remaining ceiling game number TB becomes negative, even if the game is executed, the remaining ceiling game number TB remains set to "FF", and in the first place, "FF" is set. It may be a process of keeping "00" without setting "". Further, the remaining ceiling game number TB has been described as a subtraction method that is subtracted each time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that it may be an addition method that is added each time the game is executed.

[10-3-4-4. Advantageous state C processing]
In the advantageous state C, first, in step S6091, digestion processing of the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, each time the game is executed, the ceiling game number set as 32 games is decremented by 1 (TC←TC-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the ceiling game number in step S6091, whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). Is determined (step S6092). When the game number counter GC is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6092), the process proceeds to step S6094, and the ART initial win lottery is performed (step S6094). The ART initial win lottery performed in step S6094 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip” or “normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is as shown in FIG. 640. .. Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is neither "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" nor "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is set to 1/65536. There is.

Here, the ART first win lottery performed in step S6094 is performed in the same manner as the ART first win lottery performed in step S6034. That is, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery performed in step S6094 is as shown in FIG. 640 (“special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”). Based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number K of games remaining until the end of the game number management process), Will be decided.

Specifically, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, if the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or more than the first specified number, ART The winning probability in the first win lottery is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first stipulated number, in the ART initial win lottery The winning probability is 4/65536. The first prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first win lottery, a predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) Is preferably a value that can be digested without terminating halfway. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games executed when the ART first win lottery is won is 50 (when the additional lottery is not won), the first prescribed number is 50 or more. However, it is not limited thereto. However, since the ART game is not started immediately even if the ART first win lottery is won, it is preferable to set the game to (50 games+α) in consideration of the number of games in the preparation state. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", if there are 100 or more games remaining until the end of the game number management process, there is a 100% chance of winning the ART first win. If the number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than 100 games, it is only possible to win the ART first win lottery with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is relatively small. Therefore, even if the ART game is executed by winning the ART first win lottery. Instead, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly ended midway. As a result, it is possible to reduce discouragement that can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first stipulated number. By making (4/65536 in this example) lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or more than the first specified number. , The number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process while maintaining the same proportion as compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is constant regardless of the number-of-games counter GC counted during the number-of-games management process. When K is equal to or more than the first stipulated number, it is possible to realize a further game effect such that it is possible to realize a game property in which the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) is increased. Becomes

Further, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance rep, as shown in FIG. 640 (the column when the normal maintenance rep is elected), regardless of the number K of remaining games until the end of the game number management process, The odds of winning in the ART first win lottery are always 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first prescribed number. Based on whether or not there is a win, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery will be determined in one of two stages: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number of games remaining K until the end of the number-of-games management process K The winning probability in the ART first win lottery may be gradually decreased as is smaller.

If the ART first win lottery is won (YES in step S6095), the flow advances to step S6096, and the ceiling game count is set to 0 (TC←0). Thereafter, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6097), the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6098), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6099), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (Step S6100), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (Step S6101). After that, the process advances to step S6102, and RT state transition processing is performed.

The RT state transition process of step S6102 is a process of transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when the "increase rep 1+normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6101, and therefore the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-middle-left". The indication function is displayed so that the operation is stopped by pressing (reverse). When the player operates the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 controls the shift from RT1 to RT2. Then, on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6103), the advantageous state C time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if the "up rip 1 + normal maintenance rep" is not selected in the internal lottery or the player does not comply with this even though the instruction function display is displayed, in step S6102, the process is changed from RT1 to RT2. However, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6103. It is to be noted that the instruction function display is performed when "raise REP 1+normal maintenance REP" is selected in the internal lottery until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed. In other words, when "up rep 1 + normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery at RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, control to shift to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 1 is not displayed on the activated line because the instruction function display is not followed, the RT flag is set to ON although the RT flag is maintained.

If the ART initial win lottery in step S6094 has not been won (NO in step S6095), the flow advances to step S6104 to determine whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TC=0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6104), the processes in steps S6106 to 6109 described later are not performed. That is, the advantageous state C is continued.

If the player wins the ART first win lot (YES in step S6095), the advantageous state C ends and the state transitions to the advantageous state E even if the number of ceiling games has not been exhausted, while the ART first win lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6095), the advantageous state C continues until the number of ceiling games is exhausted. However, although not shown in FIG. 631, even if the player loses the ART initial winning lottery (NO in step S6095) and the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6104), a bonus combination is given in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line. During the execution of this bonus game, the ART first win lottery is performed with a probability of 328/65536. When the ART first win lottery is won, the advantageous state E is immediately set after the bonus game is completed. On the other hand, if the ART first win lottery is not won during execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TC←32), and the advantageous state C process is performed again.

If it is determined in step S6104 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TC=0) (YES in step S6104), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6106), and the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF ( In step S6107), the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6108). Then, in step S6109, 10 games are set as the number of games in the chance zone (CZ←10), the advantageous state C time processing ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

If it is determined in step S6092 that the number-of-games counter GC has exceeded the predetermined threshold G (NO in step S6032), the flow advances to step S6112 to display even one instruction function display during the game management process. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S6112). Here, if it is determined that the indication function display has been performed one or more times (YES in step S6112), the indication function flag is set to OFF (step S6113), and the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6114). The advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6115), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6116), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6117). After that, the process advances to step S6118, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6118), the advantageous state C time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, also in the advantageous state C, as in the case of the advantageous state A, the combination probability (26280/65536) that any one of the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery. ) And a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), the probability function can occur at an extremely low probability, but in theory, the instruction function display is 1 after the game number counter GC starts counting. There may be a case where the number-of-games counter GC is determined to exceed the predetermined threshold G without being repeated (a case where NO is determined in step S6092 and a case where NO is determined in step S6112). In this case, the processes of steps S6113 to S6118 are not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6119), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6120). As a result, even if the number of games (game number counter GC) executed during the game management process exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed immediately and the instruction function is not immediately displayed without displaying the instruction function. The advantageous state C is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

In addition, even when the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value and even after the set ceiling game number TC (32 games in this example) is exhausted, an instruction is given during the game number management process. If the function display has not been performed even once, the advantageous state C continues without shifting to the hell state. Therefore, as a result of the subtraction process in step S6091, the remaining ceiling game number TA may become negative. It can happen. Therefore, when the ceiling game number TA, which was initially 32 games, becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the ceiling game number TC is set to "FF", and when the ceiling game number TC is "FF". As long as the advantageous state C continues without shifting to the hell state or another advantageous state, the process of step S6091 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6104. Thereby, even if the advantageous state C is continued after the ceiling game number TC becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to prevent the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 from being an error and interrupting the game, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Even in step S6091, if the remaining ceiling game number TC becomes negative, even if the game is executed, the remaining ceiling game number TC remains set to "FF", and in the first place, "FF" is set. It may be a process of keeping "00" without setting "". Further, the remaining ceiling game number TC has been described as a subtraction method that is subtracted each time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that it may be an addition method that is added each time the game is executed.

[10-3-4-5. Advantageous state D processing]
In the advantageous state D, first, in step S6131, the digestion process of the CZ game is performed. Specifically, each time the game is executed, the number of CZ games set as 10 games is decremented by 1 (CZ←CZ-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the CZ game number in step S6131, whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example) Is determined (step S6132).

When the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6132), the process proceeds to step S6134, and the ART first win lottery is performed (step S6134). The ART initial win lottery performed in step S6134 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E, and is set to have a high probability compared to any of the advantageous states A to C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 642, when a rare small win (watermelon win, cherry win) is selected in the internal lottery, there is a probability of 65536/65536 (100%) to win the prize. If any one of the "push order bell 1" to the "push order bell 6" is selected in the lottery, the ART initial win lottery in step S6134 is selected so that the probability of winning is 16384/65536 (25%). Is done. Further, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip” or “normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is as shown in FIG. 640. Is. When the bonus game (BB1, BB2) is selected in the internal lottery during the CZ in the advantageous state D and the bonus game is executed, the bonus number is not exceeded unless the game number counter GC exceeds the threshold G. After the game is executed, it is determined that the advantageous state E is entered and the ART game is executed.

Here, the ART initial win lottery performed in step S6134 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is a rare small winning combination (watermelon playing, cherry playing), "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6", or normal maintenance lip, the ART first win in step S6134 The winning probability in the lottery is as described above regardless of the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number K of games remaining until the end of the game number management process). 642 and FIG. 640 (as shown in the column when the regular maintenance lip is won). On the other hand, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery performed in step S6134 is as shown in FIG. As shown in the "Maintenance Rep" column at the time of winning), the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number K of games remaining until the end of the game number management process). It is decided based on.

Specifically, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or more than the specified number, the ART first win The winning probability in the lottery is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the specified number, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery Is 4/65536. The above-mentioned specified number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first win lottery, the predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) is midway through. It is preferable that the value can be digested without ending with. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games executed when the ART first win lottery is won is 50 (when the additional lottery is not won), the above-mentioned prescribed number is 50 or more. Are preferred, but are not limited thereto. However, since the ART game is not started immediately even if the ART first win lottery is won, it is preferable to set the game to (50 games+α) in consideration of the number of games in the preparation state. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", if there are 100 or more games remaining until the end of the game number management process, there is a 100% chance of winning the ART first win. If the number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than 100 games, it is only possible to win the ART first win lottery with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is relatively small. Therefore, even if the ART game is executed by winning the ART first win lottery. Instead, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly ended midway. As a result, it is possible to reduce discouragement that can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the number of games management process is less than the specified number In the example, 4/56553) is set to be lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the number K of games remaining until the game number management process is equal to or more than a specified number, thereby reducing the number of games. Compared with the case where the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the management process, the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is the specified number while keeping the same proportion. It is also possible to bring about a further effect such that it becomes possible to realize a game property in which the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) in the above case is realized.

Further, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance rep, as shown in FIG. 640 (the column at the time of the normal maintenance rep winning), regardless of the number of games K remaining until the end of the game number management process, As described above, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is always 4/65536.

In the embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, is the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process less than the prescribed number? Based on whether or not the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is determined to be one of two stages, a high probability (65536/65536) and a low probability (4/65536). , But not limited to this. For example, if the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number of games remaining K until the end of the number-of-games management process K The winning probability in the ART first win lottery may be gradually decreased as is smaller.

If the ART first win lottery is won (YES in step S6135), the flow advances to step S6136 to set the number of CZ games to 0 (CZ←0). Thereafter, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6137), the advantageous state D flag is set to OFF (step S6138), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6139), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (Step S6140), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (Step S6141). After that, the process advances to step S6142, and RT state transition processing is performed.

The RT state transition process of step S6142 is a process of transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when “up lip 1+normal hold lip” is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6141, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of “right-middle-left”. The indication function is displayed so that the operation is stopped by pressing (reverse). When the player operates the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 controls the shift from RT1 to RT2. Then, on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6143), the advantageous state D time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not comply with this even though the instruction function display is displayed, in step S6142, from RT1 to RT2. Is not controlled. When "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip" is not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6143, but the player did not follow this even though the instruction function display was displayed. At this time, although the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S61042, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6143. It is to be noted that the instruction function display is performed when "raise REP 1+normal maintenance REP" is selected in the internal lottery until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed. In other words, when "up rep 1 + normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery at RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the activated line, control to shift to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 1 is not displayed on the activated line because the instruction function display is not followed, the RT flag is set to ON although the RT flag is maintained. Further, as described above, it is preferable to have a condition device corresponding to 6 types of pushing order, such as the pushing order bell, also for the "lifting lip 1+normal maintenance lip".

If the ART initial win lottery has not been won in step S6134 (NO in step S6135), the flow advances to step S6144 to determine whether the CZ game count is 0 (CZ=0). If the number of CZ games is not 0 (NO in step S6144), the processes in steps S6153 to 6160 described below are not performed. That is, the advantageous state D is continued without shifting to the hell state.

If the player wins the ART first win lot (YES in step S6135), the advantageous state D ends and the state transitions to the advantageous state E even if the number of CZ games has not been exhausted, while the ART first win lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6135), the advantageous state D continues until the number of CZ games is exhausted. However, although not shown in FIG. 632, even if the player loses the ART initial winning lottery (NO in step S6135) and the number of CZ games is not 0 (NO in step S6144), a bonus combination is given in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line. During the execution of this bonus game, an additional lottery is performed in which the number of ART games is increased with a probability of 328/65536. If the additional lottery is won, the bonus game is finished and the advantageous state E is immediately transferred. The ART game including the number of added games is executed. On the other hand, when the bonus lottery is not won during the execution of the bonus game, 50 games are set as the number of ART games (ART←50), and after the bonus game is finished, the advantageous state E is immediately set to 50 The ART game of the game is executed.

If it is determined in step S6144 that the number of CZ games is 0 (CZ=0) (YES in step S6144), the process advances to step S6153 to see if the instruction function display was performed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not (step S6153).

If it is determined in step S6153 that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times during the game number management process (YES in step S6153), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6154), and the advantageous state D flag is set. Is set to OFF (step S6155), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6156), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6157). After that, the process advances to step S6158, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6158), the advantageous state D time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, also in the advantageous state D, as in the case of the advantageous state A and the advantageous state C, the combined probability (“the pushing order bell 1” to “the pushing order bell 6”) is selected in the internal lottery ( Although it can occur only with a very low probability in consideration of (26,280,65536) and a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), it is probabilistically instructed after the game number counter GC starts counting. There is a case where it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value G without displaying the function once (NO in step S6132 and NO in step S6153). obtain. In this case, the processes of steps S6154 to S6158 are not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6159), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6160). As a result, even if the number of games (game number counter GC) executed during the game management process exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed immediately and the instruction function is not immediately displayed without displaying the instruction function. The advantageous state D is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

Further, as described above, even after the set CZ game number CZ (10 games in this example) has been exhausted, if the instruction function display is not performed even once during the game number management process, the hell. Since the advantageous state D continues without shifting to the state, as a result of the subtraction processing in step S6131, the remaining CZ game number CZ may become negative. Therefore, when the CZ game number CZ, which was initially 10 games, becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, the remaining chance game number CZ is set to “FF”, and the chance game number CZ is “FF”. At times, as long as the advantageous state D continues without shifting to the hell state or the advantageous state E, the process of step S6131 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6144. As a result, even if the chance game (CZ) is continued after the chance game number CZ becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 is prevented from being an error and being interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in step S6131, when the remaining chance game number CZ becomes negative, even if the game is executed, the remaining chance game number CZ is left set to "FF", and in the first place "FF" It may be a process of keeping “00” without setting it to “00”. Further, the remaining chance game number CZ has been described as the subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that it may be an addition method in which it is added each time the game is executed.
[10-3-4-6. Advantageous state E processing]
Advantageous state E is processing during the ART game. In the advantageous state E, first, in step S6171, the digestion process of the ART game is performed. Specifically, each time the game is executed, one is subtracted from the number of ART games preset in step S6040, step S6067, step S6100, step S6140 or step S6197 (ART←ART-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the number of ART games in step S6171, whether the number-of-games counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the number-of-games management process is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example) or not. Is determined (step S6172).

When the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6172), the process proceeds to step S6173, and it is determined whether the special zone is not set (step S6172). S6173).

If it is determined in step S6173 that the specialized zone is not in effect (YES in step S6173), the specialized zone lottery described above is performed using the specialized zone lottery table in FIG. 644 (step S6174). If the special zone lottery in step S6174 is won (YES in step S6175), the process advances to step S6176, and the RT state transition process is performed (step S6176).

The RT state transition process of step S6176 is a process of transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when "up lip 2 + normal hold lip" is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the right-left-middle push order (reverse pinching). The indication function is displayed so that the push operation can be stopped. When the player stops the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the lift replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, and the CPU 1110 controls the shift from RT2 to RT3. When the special zone lottery is won, the ART lottery state is shifted from the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state to the special zone preparation state. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line, the special zone preparation state is shifted to the special zone state.

In step S6177, the addition determination lottery is performed. In the addition determination lottery in step S6177, first, whether or not the number of ART games is to be added is selected by lottery, and when it is determined to be added (YES in step S6178), the process proceeds to the addition game number determination lottery in step S6179. A lottery will be drawn on whether to add the game. Then, in step S6180, the additional game number N determined in the additional game number determination lottery is added (ART←ART+N). As described above, the addition determination lottery is performed using FIGS. 635 and 641(a), and the addition game number determination lottery is performed using FIGS. 636 to 639 and 641(b). FIG. 635 is an example of a lottery table used for the addition determination lottery, FIG. 636 is an example of a lottery table used for the addition game number determination lottery in the ART medium low probability state, and FIG. 637 is an ART medium high probability state. Is an example of a lottery table used for the additional game number determination lottery, FIG. 638 is an example of a lottery table used for the additional game number determination lottery in the specialized zone, and FIG. 639 is preparing for the specialized zone. 2 is an example of a lottery table used in a lottery for determining the number of games to be added.

When it is determined in step S6173 that the special zone is in effect (NO in step S6173), steps S6174, S6175, and S6176 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S6177. If it is determined in step S6175 that the special zone lottery in step S6174 has been lost (NO in step S6175), step S6176 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6177.

In step S6181, the ART lottery state transition lottery is performed using the ART lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 643. As described above, the ART lottery state transition lottery is a lottery for deciding whether to control the ART lottery state in the basic ART to the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state. Then, based on the result of the lot selection state transition during ART in step S6181, the lot selection state transition process during ART in step S6183 is performed.

More specifically, in the ART medium/low probability state, referring to “Low→High” in FIG. 643, there is a probability according to the condition device operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, and there is a transition lottery to the ART medium/high probability state. Is performed (step S6181), and if this transition lottery is won (YES in step S6182), transition control to the ART medium-high probability state is performed (step S6183). If the transfer lottery in step S6181 is lost (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is ended, and the ART medium/low probability state is maintained. In addition, in the ART medium-high probability state, with reference to “High→Low” in FIG. 643, the transition lottery to the ART medium-low probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. If I win this transition lottery (step S6181) (YES in step S6182), the transition control to the ART medium/low probability state is performed (step S6183). If the transfer lottery in step S6181 is lost (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is ended, and the ART medium-high probability state is maintained. The during-ART lottery state transition lottery in step S6181 is performed using the during-ART lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 643. FIG. 643 is a lottery table used in the lottery state transition lottery during ART. Note that "Low" shown in FIG. 643 means "ART medium low probability state", and "High" shown in FIG. 643 means "ART medium high probability state". The ART lottery state transition lottery is executed every time the internal lottery is performed (each time the game is executed) in both the ART medium high probability state and the ART medium low probability state.

If it is determined in step S6177 that the addition determination lottery has been lost (NO in step S6178), the process advances to step S6184 to determine whether or not the ART game is consumed. In the ART game exhaustion determination performed in step S6184, it is determined whether all ART games to be executed have been exhausted, and if it is determined that all ART games to be executed have been exhausted (YES in step S6184). The advantageous state E flag is set to OFF (step S6185), the pullback state flag is set to ON (step S6186), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6187), and the ART flag is set to OFF (step S6187). (S6188), the process in the advantageous state E ends, and the process returns to the main routine. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6184 that the ART game to be executed has not been digested (NO in step S6184), the process proceeds to step S6181 and the ART game is continued.

Although not shown in FIG. 633, there is a step of determining the RT state when the final game of the ART game is finished (when YES is determined in step S6184). If the RT state determined here is RT1, the pullback state A flag is set to ON in step S6186, and if the RT state is RT2, the pullback state B flag is set to ON. The pullback states A and B will be described later.

When it is determined in step S6172 that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (1500 games in this example), that is, the number of games executed by the player in the game number management process falls below the predetermined threshold value. If it is determined that it has exceeded (NO in step S6172), the flow advances to step S6190 to determine whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once during the game management process (step S6190). During the game management process, if it is determined that the indication function display is performed (YES in step S6190), it is determined whether the ART flag is ON (step S6191).

When it is determined in step S 6191 that the ART flag is ON (YES in step S 6191 ), the ART flag is set to OFF (step S 6192 ), and the advantageous state E flag is set to OFF (step S 6193 ), and the instruction is given. The function flag is set to OFF (step S6194), the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6195), and the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6196). After that, the process proceeds to step S6197, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (GC←0), the advantageous state E time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine. That is, when the number of games counted during the number-of-games management process reaches a predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6172), even if the ART game is in the middle (of the ART game). Even if the ending condition is not satisfied (even if the specified number of games (50 games in this example) has not been exhausted), the running ART game is forcibly ended midway. When it is determined that the ART flag is OFF in step S 6191 (NO in step S 6191 ), step S 6192 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S 6193.

By the way, in the advantageous state E as well as in the advantageous state A, the advantageous state C, and the advantageous state D, any one of the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6” is selected by the internal lottery. Considering the combined probability (26280/65536) and the predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), the probability can occur only with a very low probability. If it is determined that the game number counter GC has exceeded the predetermined threshold value G without the instruction function display being displayed even once after that (NO in step S6172 and NO in step S6190). In some cases). In this case, the processes of steps S6191 to S6197 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to 1 (step S6198), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6199). As a result, even if the number of games (game number counter GC) executed during the game management process exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed immediately and the instruction function is not immediately displayed without displaying the instruction function. The advantageous state E is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

Further, as described above, even after the ART game number ART (50 games+α in this example) to be executed has been exhausted, the instruction function display is displayed even once during the game number management process. Otherwise, the advantageous state E continues without shifting to the hell state, and as a result of the subtraction processing in step S6171, the remaining ART game number ART may become negative. Therefore, if the ART game number ART, which was initially 50 games+α, becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, the ART game number TA is set to “FF”, and the ART game number TA is “FF”. If so, as long as the advantageous state E continues without shifting to the hell state or the pullback state, the process of step S6171 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6184. As a result, even if the advantageous state E is continued after the number of ART games ART becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to prevent the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 from being an error and interrupting the game, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Note that in step S6171, when the remaining ART game number ART becomes negative, even if the game is executed, in addition to the process of keeping the remaining ART game number ART set to "FF", "FF" in the first place. It may be a process of keeping “00” without setting it to “00”. Further, the remaining ART game number ART is described as the subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that it may be an addition method in which it is added each time the game is executed.

Here, the additional game number determination lottery and the additional game number determination lottery performed in step S6177 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the ART game number addition determination lottery performed in step S6177 is as shown in FIG. 641(a). Is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number K of games remaining until the end of the game number management process).

Specifically, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, if the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is the second prescribed number or more, the ART The winning probability in the addition determination lottery is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). If the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", and the remaining game count K until the end of the game count management process is less than the second stipulated number, the ART game count is added. The winning probability in the decision lottery is 4/65536. The above-mentioned second stipulated number can be set arbitrarily, but even if an ART game is added on the basis of winning the additional number determination drawing for the ART game, the ART game can be exhausted without ending midway. It is preferable that the value can be set. In the present embodiment, when the winning of the ART game number addition determination lottery is won, a maximum of 300 games is added. Therefore, the second prescribed number is preferably 300 games or more, but is not limited to this. Not a thing. Therefore, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is 300 or more, there is a 100% probability that the number of ART games will be If the number of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than 300 games, the odds of adding the number of ART games will be won only with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is small, the winning probability in the ART game number addition determination lottery becomes relatively small. Therefore, the ART game number addition determination lottery is won and the ART game number is selected. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly ended midway in spite of the addition. As a result, it is possible to reduce discouragement that can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number of ART games when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number of games management process is less than the second stipulated number The probability of winning in the additional determination lottery (4/65536 in this example) is the probability of winning in the additional determination lottery of the ART game when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or more than the second prescribed number (this example Then, by lowering it to 65536/65536), compared with the case where the winning probability in the addition determination lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process, Realizing a game property in which the odds (65536/65536 in this example) in the ART game number increase lottery when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or more than the specified number are the same while maintaining the same rate. It is possible to bring about a further effect such as the above.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 641(b), the number of games to be added in the additional game number determination lottery in step S6179 when the additional number of ART games is won is also selected in the internal lottery. When the combination is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is different between the second prescribed number and less than the second prescribed number. Specifically, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" Compared with, the number of games to be added is set to increase. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is small, the number of ART games to be added in step S6179 is relatively small when the number of ART games to be added is determined, and therefore the number of ART games is increased. Even if the ART game is added and the ART game is added to the game, and the ART game is forced to end midway, it is possible to reduce the discouragement that can be given to the player. Become.

In the embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the second prescribed number. Based on whether or not there is an ART game number, the winning probability in the lottery determination lottery is determined to be one of two stages of high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the winning probability in the number of ART games to be added is determined in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the remaining number until the end of the game number management process As the number of games K decreases, the winning probability in the ART game number addition determination lottery may gradually decrease. In the above description, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the additional determination lottery of the ART game is changed. Without changing the probability (65536/65536), refer to the table used in the additional game number determination lottery shown in FIG. 641(b) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second stipulated number. You may do so. That is, the number of games to be added in the additional game number determination lottery may be changed without changing the winning probability in the additional game number determination lottery.

[10-3-4-7. Processing when pulling back]
The pull-back state is controlled after the advantageous state E ends when the number of ART games to be executed is exhausted and the game number counter GC does not exceed the predetermined threshold G (YES in step S6184). In this example, a pullback state A and a pullback state B are prepared. The winning probability of the ART first win lottery is set higher than the advantageous states A to C and the advantageous state E and lower than the advantageous state D in each of the pullback states A and B, but it is advantageous. It may be set higher than the state D.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RT state is not shifted from RT2 to RT1 in principle during the ART game, but the internal lottery results in “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”. Even if one of them was selected and the proper stop operation sequence of the reel stop button 211 was clearly indicated by the instruction function display, the reel stop button 211 was not operated in accordance with the instruction function display, so that the 0-bell When the zeroth line is displayed on the activated line, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 controls the process to shift from RT2 to RT1. In this example, as described above, if the RT state when the final game of the ART game is finished (when YES is determined in step S6184) is RT1, the pullback state A is controlled and the final game of the ART game is finished. If the RT state at that time is RT2, the pullback state B is controlled. Since the pull-back state is determined according to the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is finished, even if the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is started is RT2, the final state of the ART game is In the game, when the 0-bell zero-zero is displayed on the activated line, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT1, and the pullback state A is controlled.

The pullback state process will be described below. In the pull-back state, first, every time the game is executed, the ART initial win lottery is performed according to the pull-back state (step S6201). The winning probability in the ART first win lottery is as shown in the ART first win lottery table of FIG. 640 when the winning combination selected in the inner lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”. When the winning combination selected in (4) is a winning combination other than the “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, it is as shown in the ART initial win lottery table in the pull-back state of FIG. 645. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, as shown in FIG. 640, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is common in the pullback state A and the pullback state B. is doing. On the other hand, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is a winning combination other than the "special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip", as shown in FIG. 645, the pullback state A and the pullback state B are compared. Then, the pullback state B is more advantageous to the player than the pullback state A in that it is easier to win the ART first win lottery.

Here, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip", the ART initial win lottery performed in step S6201 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery performed in step S6201 is as shown in FIG. 640 (“special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”). As shown in the column of time), it is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number K of games remaining until the end of the game number management process). To be done.

Specifically, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, if the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or more than the first specified number, ART The winning probability in the first win lottery is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first stipulated number, in the ART initial win lottery The winning probability is 4/65536. The first prescribed number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first win lottery, a predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) Is preferably a value that can be digested without terminating halfway. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games executed when the ART first win lottery is won is 50 (when the additional lottery is not won), the first prescribed number is 50 or more. Preferably there is. However, since the ART game is not started immediately even if the ART first win lottery is won, it is preferable to set the game to (50 games+α) in consideration of the number of games in the preparation state. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", if there are 100 or more games remaining until the end of the game number management process, there is a 100% chance of winning the ART first win. If the number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than 100 games, it is only possible to win the ART first win lottery with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is relatively small. Therefore, even if the ART game is executed by winning the ART first win lottery. Instead, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly ended midway. As a result, it is possible to reduce discouragement that can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Also, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first stipulated number. By making (4/65536 in this example) lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or more than the first specified number. , The number of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process while maintaining the same proportion as compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is constant regardless of the number-of-games counter GC counted during the number-of-games management process. When K is equal to or more than the first stipulated number, it is possible to realize a further game effect such that it is possible to realize a game property in which the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) is increased. Becomes

Further, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance lip, as shown in FIG. Is 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the first prescribed number. Based on whether or not there is a win, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery will be determined in one of two stages: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number of games remaining K until the end of the number-of-games management process K The winning probability in the ART first win lottery may be gradually decreased as is smaller.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as long as the game number management flag is ON (as long as the game number counter GC does not exceed the predetermined threshold) after the end of the advantageous state E, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is determined. The pullback state is controlled to be relatively higher than in the normal state (for example, the advantageous state A, the advantageous state C, and the hell state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and after the advantageous state E ends, a predetermined threshold G and the number-of-games management are performed. Even if the difference K from the game number counter GC counted during the process (the number K of games remaining until the end of the game number management process) is, for example, a third prescribed number or more, the pullback state is controlled. Good. Also in this case, if the number K of remaining games after the end of the advantageous state E until the end of the number-of-games management process is, for example, less than the third stipulated number, the pullback state is not controlled, and therefore the ART first win lottery is won and the ART game is won. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly ended midway in spite of the execution of. As a result, it is possible to reduce discouragement that can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. After the advantageous state E ends, the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number K of games remaining until the end of the game number management process) is, for example, the third rule. If the number of games is less than the number, the game number management process may be terminated and the state may be shifted to the hell state. However, although the game number management process is continued, the winning probability in the ART first win lottery is the same as that in the normal time. The probability (for example, 1/65536) may be set.

When winning the ART first hit lottery in step S6201 (YES in step S6202), is the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example)? It is determined whether or not (step S6205).

When it is determined that the game number counter GC is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6205), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6206) and the ART game number is set to 50 games (step S6205). (S6207), the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6208). After that, the process advances to step S6209, and RT state transition processing is performed.

The RT state transition process of step S6209 is a process of transitioning the RT state, but this process is a process performed in the pullback state A and is not performed in the pullback state B. This is because the RT state transition process of step S6209 is a process of transitioning the RT state from RT1 to RT2 as a preparatory process for executing the ART game, and therefore is not performed in the pullback state B in which the RT state is RT2, and RT This is because the state is changed to RT2 in the pullback state A in which the state is RT1. After that, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6210).

If the number-of-games counter GC has reached the predetermined threshold value G in step S6205 (NO in step S6205), the flow advances to step S6211 to display the instruction function display even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not it has been broken (step S6211). During the game management process, if it is determined that the instruction function display is performed (YES in step S6211), the pullback state flag is set to OFF (step S6212). Specifically, if the current pullback state is the pullback state A, the pullback state A flag is set to OFF, and if the current pullback state is the pullback state B, the pullback state B flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, if the instruction function flag is ON (YES in step S6213), the instruction function flag is set OFF (step S6214), and the game number management flag is set OFF (step S6215). If it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is OFF (NO in step S6213), step S6214 is skipped, the process proceeds to step S6215, and the game number management flag is set to OFF. (Step S6215). After that, the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6216), the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6217), the withdrawal state process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, even in the pullback state, as in the case of the advantageous state A, the advantageous state C, the advantageous state D, and the advantageous state E, any one of the “pushing order bell 1” to the “pushing order bell 6” in the internal lottery In consideration of the combined probability (26280/65536) that is selected and a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), the probability can occur only at an extremely low probability, but stochastically, the game number counter GC When it is determined that the number-of-games counter GC has exceeded the predetermined threshold value G without the indication function being displayed once even after the count is started (NO in step S6205 and NO in step S6211). (If determined). In this case, the processes of steps S6212 to S6217 are not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6218), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6219). As a result, even if the number of games (game number counter GC) executed during the game management process exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The pull-back state is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

When the number-of-games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (1500 games in this example) (NO in step S6205), normally, it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is OFF (step S6203). It is determined as NO in S6213). However, in rare cases, it may be determined that the answer is NO in step S6211 as described above, and the instruction function flag may be set to ON in step S6219. In this case, it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is ON (YES in step S6213).

If the number-of-games counter GC has reached the predetermined threshold value G in step S6205 (NO in step S6205), the game is moved to the hell state regardless of the result of the ART first win lottery. . More specifically, when the number-of-games counter GC reaches a predetermined threshold value G in step S6205, even if the player wins the ART first win lottery in step S6202, the ART game is not executed and is in the pull-back state. Is ended and the state is shifted to the hell state, and the count of the game number counter is ended (the game number management process is ended).

When it is determined that the ART initial win lottery in step S6201 has not been won (NO in step S6202), the pull-back state maintenance lottery is performed (step S6203). The mode of this maintenance lottery is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number K of games remaining until the end of the game number management process).

The maintenance lottery in step S6203 will be described in detail. When the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or larger than the third prescribed number, in the pullback state A, a probability of 49/50 is won. The maintenance lottery is conducted (that is, the probability of losing is 1/50), and in the pullback state B, the maintenance lottery is conducted so that the probability of winning is 19/20 (that is, 1/20 probability). To lose). Therefore, when the pull-back state A and the pull-back state B are compared, the pull-back state B is easier to win the ART first win lottery, but the pull-back state B is more difficult to maintain than the pull-back state A. On the other hand, when the number K of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the third prescribed number, the maintenance lottery common to the pullback state A and the pullback state B is performed. That is, regardless of whether the player is in the pullback state A or the pullback state B, the maintenance lottery is performed so that the winning is performed with a probability of 7/50 (the probability of losing is 43/50). As described above, when the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or larger than the third prescribed number, the withdrawal state A is more likely to be maintained in the withdrawal state than the withdrawal state B, but the number-of-games management process ends. When the remaining number of games K up to is less than the third stipulated number, the pullback state is transitioned to the hell state with a relatively high probability regardless of the pullback state A or the pullback state B. .. As a result, if the number K of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is small, the winning probability in the maintenance lottery becomes relatively small. Therefore, even if the ART game is executed by winning the ART first win lottery, It is possible to suppress the situation where the ART game is forcibly ended midway. As a result, it is possible to reduce discouragement that can be given to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning in the maintenance lottery when the number of games K remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than the third stipulated number The probability (7/50 in this example) is the winning probability in the maintenance lottery when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or greater than the third prescribed number (in this example, in the pullback state A, By lowering it to 49/50 or 19/20 in the case of the withdrawal state B), the winning probability in the maintenance lottery is kept constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is possible to realize a game property in which the winning ratio in the maintenance lottery is increased when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or more than the third stipulated number, as compared with the case of performing the same. It is possible to produce a further effect such as

The above-mentioned third stipulated number can be set arbitrarily, but if you consider that you win the ART first win lottery with a relatively high probability when you win the maintenance lottery and the pullback state is maintained, the ART game is executed. At this time, it is preferable that the predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment) is a value that can be consumed without ending midway. In the present embodiment, since the number of ART games executed when the ART first win lottery is won is 50 (when the additional lottery is not won), the third prescribed number is 50 or more. However, it is not limited thereto.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the third prescribed number. Based on whether or not there is a winning probability in the maintenance lottery, there is a high probability (49/50 in the pullback state A, 19/20 in the pullback state B) and a low probability (50/50 minutes). Although it is determined to be one of the two steps of 7) and 7), it is not limited to this. For example, when the winning probability in the maintenance lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, the number of games K remaining until the end of the game number management process is small. The winning probability in the maintenance lottery may gradually decrease as the number becomes higher.

If the maintenance lottery in step S6203 is lost (NO in step S6204), the process advances to step S6211, and it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once during the game management process. (Step S6211). During the game management process, when it is determined that the instruction function display is performed (YES in step S6211), the processes in steps S6212 to S6217 described above are performed (that is, it is determined that the state is shifted to the hell state). Then, the processing in the pullback state is terminated and the process returns to the main routine. On the other hand, during the game management process, if it is determined that the instruction function display is not performed (NO in step S6211), the processes in steps S6212 to S6217 are not performed, and the instruction count is set to 1 ( In step S6218), the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6219).

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game number management process is started when the hell state is shifted to the advantageous state. During the game number management process (that is, during the advantageous state or the pullback state), unless a specific condition is satisfied (for example, unless there is a bonus game execution history (execution history during the game number management process)). It is guaranteed that the indication function display is performed once (see FIGS. 629 to 634). The instruction function display here means the number of payouts when a combination in which the number of payouts of game media is different when the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 (for example, the pushing order or the pushing position) is selected in the internal lottery. Is the instruction display that is performed so as to be operated in the stop operation mode that has the largest number. In this example, when “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” are selected by the internal lottery, the stop operation is performed in the push order corresponding to the eight pieces with the largest payout number. The displayed instruction is equivalent. Therefore, when a combination other than a combination in which the number of payouts of the game medium is different when the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different is selected in the internal lottery, the selected combination is instructed (stop operation mode). Even if it is instructed (navigated) which combination is selected by the internal lottery, instead of the instruction, the instruction does not correspond to the instruction function display here. In this case, even if the target combination of the instruction function display (the combination in which the number of payouts of the game medium differs depending on the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different), the largest number of payouts (this example) Even if it is instructed that a combination having a larger payout number than "the push order bell 1" to "the push order bell 6" is selected, the instruction is the instruction function display here. Is not equivalent to. In addition, even if the combination of payouts of the game media is selected by the internal lottery when the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different and the stop operation mode is instructed, the player disobeys the instruction. It is assumed that the instruction function display here is performed even if the stop operation is not performed in the mode in which the number of payouts is the largest. Furthermore, if the reel stop button 211 has a different stop operation mode, the replay combination in which the RT state after that is different (for example, “up lip 1+normal maintenance lip 1” in this example) or an appropriate stop operation mode must be operated. For example, when a replay combination for which a symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not displayed is selected by internal lottery, even if a stop operation mode instruction is given, the instruction is also equivalent to the instruction function display here. do not do.

By the way, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the ART game (including the specializing zone and preparing for the specializing zone), as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display, RT2, RT3 to RT1 However, if the reel stop button 211 is operated without following the indication function display, the transition from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 may occur. That is, it is a game property in which the player has a right to select whether the state after the end of the advantageous state E is controlled to the pullback state A or the pullback state B. I can say. Therefore, in the state after the end of the advantageous state E, it is difficult to win the ART first win lottery, but the pullback state is easily maintained, and the pullback state that is easy to win the ART first win lottery but the pullback state is difficult to maintain. It becomes possible for the player himself to select in which of the states B the game is to be played. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in an ART game, which tends to be monotonous by simply digesting the game. Further, even if the player moves from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 because the reel stop button 211 is operated without displaying the instruction function display, after the ART game is finished, the pullback state is controlled to be easily maintained in the pullback state A. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In particular, during the ART game (including the specializing zone and preparing for the specializing zone), as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with the instruction function display, it is controlled to the pulling back state A, so the game to select the pulling back state B The player selects a high-risk high-return game as compared with the pullback state A in which it is easy to be transferred to the hell state but is easy to win the ART first hit lottery. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether the state after the end of the advantageous state E is relatively low risk low return state or relatively high risk high return game is played. It can be selected according to the desire of the person.

However, when the player tries to select the pullback state B of relatively high risk and high return, the player moves from RT2 or RT3 having a relatively high replay synthesis probability to RT1 having a relatively low replay synthesis probability. Need to take the risk of If the number of remaining games in the ART game is large, there is a possibility that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" will be selected by the internal lottery until the ART game ends. Although the cost is high, the number of medals paid out to the player during the ART game is reduced accordingly (in some cases, the number of medals consumed in the execution of the game is more than the number of medals paid out as an award. There is a risk of increasing. On the other hand, when the number of remaining games in the ART game is small, more medals can be acquired as the prize paid out to the player during the ART game, but the internal lottery is performed before the ART game ends. There is a risk that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" cannot be selected. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the withdrawal state is determined according to the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is finished. Therefore, the game is transferred to RT1 in the last game of the ART game. Is preferred. However, one of the “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is not necessarily selected in the internal lottery in the final game of the ART game. Therefore, it is preferable for the player who intends to select the pullback state B so as not to shift to RT1 until the end of the ART game, but it is also possible to shift to RT1 at an early point. You can have fun at what point you should switch to RT1.

Further, although some players do not want the pull-back state B of relatively high risk and high return, the indication function display is performed during the ART game (including the specializing zone and preparing for the specializing zone). There is a case where the reel stop button 211 is mistakenly operated without wrestling, but on the contrary, it can give a sense of tension to the game during the ART game (including the specialization zone and the specialization zone preparation). In addition, even if the player does not desire the withdrawal state B, the game is played under the condition that the ART initial win lottery probability is relatively high, and therefore the player does not feel a loss.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added when the game is switched from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 during the ART game (including the specializing zone and preparing for the specializing zone). Even if the digestion is continued without stopping the progress of the ART game or the like while performing the final determination lottery, the ART initial win lottery probability is controlled to the pull-back state B, which is relatively high.

By the way, as described above, in step S602, when one game is executed during the game number management process, the game number counter GC is incremented by 1 as the number of games executed during the game number management process. In the slot machine 1 of the present example, the predetermined threshold is set to 1500 games, and when the threshold is exceeded, the game number management flag is forcibly set to OFF. Therefore, in principle, the game number counter GC is set. It does not exceed 1500. However, the number-of-games management process continues until the indication function is displayed at least once during the number-of-games management process. Therefore, although the probability is extremely low, the number-of-games counter GC may exceed 1,500 games. obtain. In particular, in the slot machine 1 of this example, since the process of the game number counter GC is performed in 8 bits, it is possible to count up to 65536 games. However, it cannot be said that the game number counter GC stochastically exceeds 65536 games. Therefore, in this example, when the game number counter GC reaches the threshold value of 15000 games in step S602, the game number counter GC is set to FF. When the game number counter GC is FF, NO is determined in step S6032, step S6072, step S6092, step S6031 and step S6172. As a result, even if the instruction function display is not executed during the game number management process, it is possible to prevent the process of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 from being an error and the game is interrupted, and to prevent a decrease in interest. It becomes possible to do.

[10-3-5. Production process at the time of winning]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to perform a production operation lottery based on the result of the internal lottery, and execute a production that can give the player a sense of expectation based on the result of the production operation lottery. .. Specifically, the result information of the internal lottery is command-transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), and the sub-board 510 receiving this command performs the effect operation lottery based on the result information of the internal lottery. Then, the effect mode determined by this effect operation lottery is controlled to be displayed on the image display body 500 and the like, and at the same time, the audio effect is also effected.

FIG. 646 is an effect operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won at RT1, FIG. 647 is an effect operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won at RT2, and FIG. 648 is an effect operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won at RT3. Is. As can be seen by referring to FIGS. 646 to 648, in the internal lottery, BB1, “BB1+watermelon”, “BB1+cherry”, BB2, “BB2+watermelon”, “BB2+cherry”, watermelon, cherry, “push order bell 1” ~ "Push order bell 6", common bell, maintenance replay, "up lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "up lip 2 + normal maintenance lip", "down lip + normal maintenance lip", "7 sets lip + normal maintenance lip" In addition, when one of a plurality of winning combinations such as “7 complete fake lip+normal maintenance lip” is won, the effect can be executed. Of the plurality of winning combinations, all the winning combinations except the maintenance replay and the “uplifting rep + 1 normal maintaining rep”, regardless of whether the RT status is RT1 to RT3, are The production operation probability is the same. On the other hand, with regard to the maintenance replay and the "uplifting rep 1+normal maintenance rep", the effect operation probabilities when winning in the internal lottery are different depending on whether the RT state is RT1 to RT3.

Note that the winning combinations column of FIGS. 646 to 648 describes only winning combinations (see FIGS. 617 to 622) in each state of RT1 to RT3. The table used for the production operation lottery is not necessarily limited to the one in which the production tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 are prepared as shown in FIGS. 646 to 648. For example, data having the same effect operation probability may be prepared as a common table, and tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 may be prepared only for data having different effect operation probabilities. FIG. 649 is another example of the effect operation lottery table. Describing with reference to FIG. 649, for example, among the winning combinations shown in the winning combination columns of FIGS. 617 to 622, “maintenance replay”, “raising lip 1+normal maintaining lip”, “raising lip 2+normal maintaining lip”, As for winning combinations other than "lowering lip + normal maintenance lip", "7 sets of lip + normal maintenance lip" and "7 pieces of fake lip + normal maintenance lip", common production operation lottery is performed as shown in FIG. 649(a). Of the winning combinations that are prepared as a table and shown in the winning combination columns of FIGS. 617 to 622, “maintenance replay”, “raise lip 1+normal maintenance lip”, “raising lip 2+normal maintenance lip”, and “lowering lip+” “Regular maintenance lip”, “7 regular lip+normal regular lip” and “7 regular falip+normal regular lip” correspond to RT1 to RT3 as shown in FIGS. 649(b) to 649(d). You may make it prepare the table in which the production operation probability was set. For example, when the effect tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 are prepared as shown in FIGS. 646 to 648, lottery tables for “the number of RT states×the number of winning combinations (condition devices)” are created. Since it becomes necessary, the data capacity becomes enormous, and a large verification period etc. is required, which leads to the extension of the development period.However, there is a problem that the bonus is not established and the replay synthesis probability When there are multiple RT states (RT1 to RT3) that are different from each other, but when there is a winning combination (up lip 1, up lip 2, down lip) that may transition between these RT states Although the operation probability is changed, the production operation probability when a winning combination (rare small combination such as cherry or watermelon) that is not a winning combination that transitions between multiple RT states is won does not change, so the data capacity In other words, for a winning combination (replay combination) whose winning probability changes depending on the RT state, if the production operation probability is not changed according to the winning probability, replay will occur frequently even if the production operates and it is expected. It is not necessary to prepare lots of lottery tables for winning combinations (bonus combinations (BB1, BB2) and small winning combinations (bell, watermelon, cherry)) whose winning probability does not change depending on the RT state, although an abnormal production state occurs. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, and particularly when the main 409 has to be controlled, the capacity is limited, which is a significant effect.

Specifically, when the RT state is RT1, when the maintenance replay or the “uplift rep 1+normal maintenance rep” is won in the internal lottery, the effect is performed with a probability of approximately ½. Since the normal gaming state before the ART game starts (the gaming state before the winning combination of the ART first win lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the rising lip 1 is displayed on the activated line) is also RT1, in such a gaming state The production will be performed with a probability of approximately one half. On the other hand, when the RT state is RT2 or RT3, the production is performed only with a very low probability as compared with RT1. Hereinafter, RT1 is referred to as a low-rep state in which the replay synthesis probability is relatively low, and RT2 and RT3 are referred to as high-rep states in which the replay synthesis probability is relatively high.

When the low-lip state and the high-lip state are compared, the high-lip state has a higher replay synthesis probability, but the high-lip state is in a state in which it is more difficult to perform the effect than the low-lip state. When the production is performed, the player expects that the bonus (BB1, BB2) or the rare small winning combination (watermelon, cherry), which is expected to win the ART, is won. However, if the performance is frequently performed in the high-rip state, not only the player may not have such expectations when the performance is performed, but also the performance itself becomes troublesome. There is a risk. Therefore, in this example, in the high-lip state, the effect is less likely to be performed than in the low-lip state, so that it is possible to appropriately give the player a sense of expectation when the effect is performed. In addition, such a game property gives the player a right to select whether the RT state after the ART game is finished is controlled to a high-rep state or a low-rep state. It can be said that it is a game. Therefore, the RT state after the end of the ART game is RT1 that is difficult to win for a specific winning combination (replay in this example) but has a high production operation probability, and the RT state after the ART game is easy to win for a specific winning combination (replay in this example), but the production operating probability It becomes possible for the player himself to select in which state, RT2 or RT3 having a low value, the game is to be played. Even in such a case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in an ART game, which tends to be monotonous and simply consumes the game. Although it is preferable for a player who wants to select an RT state after the end of the ART game, which is capable of producing an effect at a high frequency, to prevent the transition to the RT1 until the last game of the ART game is reached. Since it is possible to switch to RT1 at an early point, it is possible to have fun at which point in time to switch to RT1. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the RT2 or the RT3 is changed to the RT1 during the ART game, the addition game number determination lottery is performed and the progress of the ART game or the like is not stopped. Even if the digestion is continued, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest because the production with high expectation is performed with high frequency in the RT state after the ART game is over.

In each of FIGS. 635 to 649, as shown in FIGS. 617 to 622, the special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) and normal combination (normal watermelon combination, normal cherry combination) , Normal maintenance replay) is not shown separately. This is only when the hell is in effect when the special part is selected in the internal lottery, and when the game number management flag is set to ON, the internal lottery is selected. This is because even if a special character is selected in, the function as the special character cannot be exerted. That is, when the number of games management flag is set to ON and a lottery is performed using one of the tables in FIGS. 635 to 649, the lottery is performed without distinguishing between the special combination and the normal combination. Will be seen. For example, referring to the table of FIG. 642 used in the ART first win lottery performed when the game number management process is not being performed and the ART game is not in progress, the special watermelon and the normal role as a single role in the internal lottery will be described. Regardless of which watermelon (see FIGS. 617 to 622) is selected, the ART first hit lottery is performed with reference to the watermelon as a single role shown in the table of FIG. 642.

As described above, by performing the process of each step shown in FIG. 627, the process relating to the generation of the instruction function by the main board 409 (step S61 of FIG. 626) is performed, and based on the result of the process, the process shown in FIG. The processing after step S62 of the processing relating to the generation of the indicated instruction function is performed.

[10-3-6. Indication function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main board 409 determines to generate the instructing function as a result of the instruction function generating process (specifically, for example, at the time of winning the push order small win in the ART game). The instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display process). In the instruction function display process, the main board 409 selects a display mode of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from a plurality of display modes prepared in advance (for example, the display data is held in the ROM 1112 or the like). .. Hereinafter, the instruction function display displayed using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

First, an example of the indication function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 615, the slot machine 1 is provided with two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) arranged side by side, and using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, two-digit characters and numbers are displayed. The indication function is displayed by displaying.

650 and 651 are diagrams for explaining the indication function display. FIG. 650 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 651 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612b. In both FIG. 650 and FIG. 651, the “segment display” column shows the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the “content” column shows the contents indicated by the displayed alphanumeric characters. Further, in FIG. 651, a display outline of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 and the like when the corresponding instruction function display is performed is shown in the “navigation display” column, and the “usage purpose” column shows the relevant display. The situations and situations where the display is used are shown. The navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 will be described later.

In the instruction function display of this example, the following rules are provided as an example of rules regarding the instruction function display.

(1) Two 7-segment LEDs (7-segment) are used to perform indication function display (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating a guide of the pressing place, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating a pressing order.

(2) During the period in which the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display is started at least by the time the acceptance of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started, and the last reel 301 that is rotating. The display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the reel stop operation. That is, the period for displaying the instruction function and the period for displaying the number of paid-out images do not overlap. As a result of the game, when the gaming value (medal) is not paid out, that is, when the payout number is “0”, the payout number display may not be performed. As a supplementary requirement, if the indicator function is displayed and the payout number is not displayed, the indicator function is canceled (not displayed) at the same timing as when the payout number is displayed. As an alternative, the instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.

(3) When one of the reels 301a to 301c that is rotating is first stopped in the game in which the special display LED 612 is used to display the designated function, the stopped reel displays the designated function ( If it is not the reel indicated as the first reel to be stopped by the special display LED 612b (that is, the reel different from the instruction content is first stopped), or the timing of pressing the reel stop button 211 is the instruction function display. Even when the timing does not correspond to the position indicated by the (special display LED 612a) as the guide of the pushing place (that is, the reel stop operation is performed at a position different from the instruction content), The display mode on the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation on the reel 301 is completed.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated, the main board 409 determines which instruction content is displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the instruction function display in the game. It will be decided based on the winning combination. First, the instruction contents that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 650 and 651.

The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content of the “reference of the pushing location” displayed on the special display LED 612a within a range that does not deny the “appropriate pushing location” based on the winning combination of the game. be able to. Specifically, for example, when "BB1 (7 red symbols)" is selected as the winning combination, the main board 409 determines the instruction content to display "2" (7 red symbols) on the special display LED 612a. However, in addition to this, since the game method aiming at the "red 7 symbol" is not denied, the instruction content for displaying "0" (no designation) may be determined.

In addition, the main board 409, in the same manner as the instruction content of the “reference of the pushing position”, regarding the instruction content of the “pushing order” displayed on the special display LED 612b, the “appropriate pushing order” based on the winning combination of the game. The instruction content can be arbitrarily determined within the range that does not deny. For example, it is assumed that "push order bell 1" in which the normal push is "appropriate press order" causes the instruction function in the game selected as the winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of “pushing order” to be “left/middle/right” (six selection pressing order), and according to the display example of FIG. 651 (details will be described later). , "1" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, as the instruction content for clarifying only the "left" of the first stop without revealing the second stop and the third stop, "left first (2 options)" may be used as the instruction content. According to the display example of 651 (details will be described later), “A” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, from the condition that the range of "appropriate pressing order" is not denied, the instruction content of the pressing order may include at least the game procedure based on "appropriate pressing order". That is, as the instruction content having the possibility that the left reel 301a may be stopped first, "left first or right first" (segment display "E" in FIG. 651) or "left first or middle first" (FIG. The segment display “F” of 651) may be used as the instruction content, and further, the instruction content that makes the pressing order unknown (the segment display “0” of FIG. 651) may be used.

Next, the display examples shown in FIGS. 650 and 651 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 650, as a guide for the pushing position, there are four ways of “0 (no designation)”, “1 (chance symbol)”, “2 (red 7 symbol)”, and “3 (BAR symbol)”. Numbers are set to be displayed. When "0" is displayed as a guide for the pressing place, it means that the guide for the pressing order is not specified, that is, the operation at a specific stop timing is not instructed in the game, but in such a case Even if there is, when the reel stop button 211 is pressed down without being aware of the stop timing (unspecified stop operation), the symbol combination based on some winning combination is not always aligned on the activated line. In other words, if you want to surely stop the symbol combination based on the winning combination in the game in which "No designation" is selected, the predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed like the maximum efficiency batting method described above. It is required to stop at. Specifically, for example, when "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is won during ART, "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, but the push order bell is a proper push button. As long as it is a stop operation in order, it is possible to arrange the symbol combination of the bell role regardless of the stop timing (without omission). On the other hand, for example, if the special display LED 612a displays “0” when the winning combination is a combination (eg, watermelon combination) that may be missed depending on the stop timing, the stop timing is not considered. If you press the reel stop button 211, you may miss the role of watermelon, and in order to win the role of watermelon surely, when the symbols that make up the symbol combination of the role of watermelon are within the retractable range. It is necessary to press the reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing.

Here, it is preferable that the design used as a guide for the pushing position is a design that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reel 301 is rotating, but the target operation is stopped at an appropriate timing. Even if it does, it is not always necessary to stop the symbol on the activated line.

Further, for the symbols corresponding to “1” to “3” shown in FIG. 650, the corresponding symbols may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the target "chance symbol" in "1" may be a "correct" symbol or a "right" symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Further, the target symbol of "2" may be the "blue 7" symbol instead of the red 7 symbol. Note that the segment display shown in FIG. 650 is merely an example, and the segment display pattern can be increased or decreased and set within a range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, a segment display may be added for symbols (eg, watermelon symbols) other than those illustrated in FIG. 650. Further, the pattern set as a guide for the pushing place is not limited to one, and for example, the segment display such as "either the red 7 design or the blue 7 design" is set as a guide for the pushing place is set. May be. Also, as common to FIGS. 650 and 651, the correspondence between “contents” and “segment display” does not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of “segment displays” showing the same “content” are prepared. May be.

Next, referring to FIG. 651, 16 display patterns are set and displayed, and alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” are assigned as the display contents of the segment display. .. The details of each display pattern will be described below in detail. Note that when displayed in 7 segments, capital letters “B” and “D” may be indistinguishable from the numbers “8” and “0”, respectively, and therefore, in FIG. 651, “b” and “d”. Will be displayed in lower case.

The display "0" on the special display LED 612b is used when the pressing order is not limited (the pressing order does not matter). However, as described in the "Usage" column, it is not used only when the winning combination does not matter in the pressing order, but when the winning combination is a winning combination that can be won by an alternative, the pushing order is intentionally specified. It can also be used if not. In addition to the push order bells and replays, the winning order in which the pushing order does not matter includes a low winning role (rare role) such as a chance eye, watermelon, and cherry. Therefore, when the instruction function is displayed when the rare combination is won, the display on the special display LED 612b is “0”, but at this time, the expected display such as “Chance!” and the type display of the rare combination are displayed in the navigation display. It may be performed. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach the player that the game has a high degree of expectation, which is different from the normal game. Also, in the latter case where the pushing order is not dared when a winning combination that can be won by an alternative is chosen, the proper pushing order is not indicated, so the navigation display example is "????". .

The indications "1" to "6" on the special display LED 612b are used when the stop order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as a proper pressing order, and the so-called 6-option pressing order is displayed. You can When the 6 selection push order is displayed on the instruction function display, at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second are indicated on the navigation display. Thirdly, the reel to be stopped will be clarified by the erasure method, but it may be explicitly indicated.

Further, the displays "7" to "9" on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined as a proper pressing sequence whether any one of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first. Thus, it is possible to display a so-called three-option push order. When the three-function pressing order is displayed on the instruction function display, the reel to be first stopped is indicated on the navigation display.

When the pressing order such as "1" to "9" is displayed on the special display LED 612b, if the stop operation is performed according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b, the most payout is performed. A favorable game result is provided to the player, such as a push-type bell winning in a stopped form of the number of pieces. As described above, in order to obtain the stop system with the largest number of payouts, the stop operation must be performed at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination that may be missed.

Further, “providing a game result that is advantageous to the player” described in the preceding paragraph includes “suppressing that the game result that is disadvantageous to the player is provided”. A specific example will be described below. For example, push order replay is prepared to stop different symbol combinations depending on the push order, and at the time of winning of the push order replay, if the stop operation by the "specific push order" is performed, the blue 7 symbol alignment stops. You can do it. This blue 7 symbol set is used as one of the effects for teaching the addition when the push order replay is won during ART and it is internally determined that the number of ART games is to be added, for example. To do. When such a push order replay is won, displaying the "specific push order" as an instruction function when the number of ART games is added leads to the provision of "a game result advantageous to the player". On the other hand, when the number of ART games is not increased even if the push order replay is won, if the "specific push order" is displayed as an instruction function, it is assumed that the blue 7 symbol arrangement is stopped by the stop operation according to the instruction. However, since the "game result advantageous to the player", which is the addition of the number of ART games, is not provided, the "game result unfavorable to the player" is provided. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such a “game result unfavorable to the player”, when the number of ART games is not increased at the time of the push-order replay winning, the “specific push” is performed. It is possible to display the pushing order so as to avoid "order". Since the game is played according to the instruction function display as described above, the blue 7 symbol alignment in which the number of ART games is not added does not appear, so that "the player is provided with a disadvantageous game result. It is possible to “suppress”, and as a result, “an advantageous game result is provided to the player”.

On the other hand, unlike the case where "1" to "9" are displayed, the display "A" to "F" on the special display LED 612b indicates "a part" of the pressing order that may lead to a game result advantageous to the player. Used when displaying. For example, the display "A" indicates only that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (two alternatives) the reel to be stopped second. Further, for example, in the case of the display "d", it is indicated that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and neither the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Then, even if the proper pressing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected in the first stop, any one of the remaining two reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) that is rotating again in the second stop. By selecting whether or not to stop, it is possible to make four choices as a result. In addition, if the proper pressing sequence is satisfied only by the selection at the first stop, it is possible to make two selections.

As described above, when the special display LED 612b displays the pressing order such as "A" to "F", even if the stop operation is performed according to the display content, the pressing order is not always proper. However, when the proper push order can be finally selected, the push order bell wins in the stop form with the largest number of payouts, which provides advantageous game results to the player.

The display examples on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above, but in reality, the two-digit value obtained by combining these is displayed on the special display LED 612 to indicate the instruction content in the game.

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the first example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode that makes it easy to grasp the instruction content. Appropriate reel stop operation can be executed while looking at the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and an advantageous game result can be expected as compared with the case where the instruction function display is not performed. In addition, by making it easier for the player to draw attention to the display device that displays such an instruction function, it is possible to create a gaming nature that was not available in conventional gaming machines.

In addition, the display examples as shown in FIGS. 650 and 651 do not necessarily require all the symbols and the pressing order as a reference of the pressing place, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it can be expected that the amount of data required for the main board 409 to perform the indication function display can be reduced.

[10-3-7. Instruction generation effect processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 displays the instruction function with the special display LED 612 based on the result of the instruction function generation processing, while displaying the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display. By transmitting the instruction information command, the instruction content is notified to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510). Then, the sub-board 510 that has received such an instruction information command displays an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) according to the display content of the instruction function display on the image display body 500 or the like (instruction generation effect process).

That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function is generated, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function, while displaying the navigation display having the same content as the instruction content of the instruction function on the image display body 500. As a result, the content of the instruction is announced in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

Further, as described above in the description of step S31 of FIG. 623, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409. The sub-board 501 may determine the display mode for navigation display from a plurality of display modes as long as the display content does not have to be contrary to the instruction content displayed by the instruction function display (corresponding relationship of 1 to n). ).

As a display example of the navigation display, for example, when "push order bell 2" is selected in the internal lottery, "1" is set at the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, "3" at the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and the right reel. By displaying "2" at the corresponding position of 301c, the stop order of the left, right, and middle pinch pushes is instructed. In this navigation display, further, based on the content of the instruction information command that the push order bell is won, the display color of the image indicating the stop order is set to yellow, which reminds the bell, or the reel to be stopped next (for example, , When all reels 301 are rotating, it is a reel to be stopped first, and when two reels are rotating, it is equivalent to a reel to be stopped second) than images showing other stop orders. It may be highlighted.

Further, in the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output, and specifically, the reel to be stopped first When the reel is the left reel 301a, an example in which a voice such as "Left!" is output at a timing before the first stop of the reel is performed can be given. When performing voice output, different voice output (for example, a non-ART high probability state or a non-ART low probability state) based on the type of winning combination (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.) or lottery state (for example, Different characters, dialogue, intonation, etc.) can be used properly. By performing the navigation display including the audio output in this way, the notification of the instruction content to the player can be made more reliable, and the navigation display that changes according to the game situation can be provided to enhance the interest of the player. Can be expected to.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function display and the navigation display can be displayed in parallel, so that the instruction content by the instruction function can be more surely transmitted to the player.

FIG. 652 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period by various display devices and the like. In FIG. 652, various display devices and the like are described on the vertical axis, and a display period such as at which timing in the progress process of one game shown in the horizontal axis the display and transmission are performed is shown. .

First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 652 will be described. The instruction information 801 corresponds to an instruction information command. When the instruction information 801 is ON, it means “transmit”, and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means “standby”, and the instruction information command is not transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510.

The instruction function 802 corresponds to the instruction function controlled by the main board 409, means “display” when the instruction function 802 is ON, and the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function. When the instruction function 802 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special function LED 612 does not display the instruction function.

The payout number 803 corresponds to the number of gaming values paid out as a result of the game. When the payout number 803 is ON, it means “display”, and the special display LED 612 displays the payout number. When the payout number 803 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. The information regarding the number of payouts is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 and the program processing, it can be displayed again even after the power is turned off.

The segment error 804 corresponds to that the details (for example, type and content) of the error are displayed on the segment LED when the error is detected. When the segment error 804 is ON, it means “display” and the special display LED 612. In, the details of the error are notified (error display). When the segment error 804 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special display LED 612 does not display an error.

The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to a navigation display of an instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510, means “display” when the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the navigation display is not performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal navigation 805, navigation display is performed with content that does not violate the display content of the instruction function 802. Although detailed description is omitted, data relating to the display on the sub-board 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510, and the data can be appropriately read back even when the power is cut off. And

The liquid crystal error 806 corresponds to the details (for example, type and content) of the error being displayed on the liquid crystal display when the error is detected, and means “display” when the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. Details of the error are notified on the liquid crystal screen of the display body 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and details of the error are not notified on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal error 806, the error is notified with contents that do not conflict with the notification in the segment error 804.

The error occurrence 807 shows the occurrence status of the error, but in this figure, it may be read as the main board 409 detecting the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error has occurred (when an error has been detected) at the timing when it is turned on, and when the error occurrence 807 is OFF, no error has occurred (the error has been detected). Does not mean). When the error occurrence 807 turns off after turning on, it means that the error is resolved at the timing of turning off.

The display and transmission from the instruction information 801 to the segment error 804 are managed by the main board 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub board 510.

Further, in FIG. 652 and other drawings, the “first stop button” is the reel stop button 211 that is the first one of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c corresponding to the rotating reels 301a to 301c. Means that. Similarly, the “second stop button” means the reel stop button 211 on which the reel 301 has been stopped second, and the “third stop button” is the third (or last) reel 301. Means the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed.

Next, a display period (including a transmission period and the like) of each display device shown in FIG. 652 will be described. The timing chart of FIG. 652 is shown in a situation in which the game is played without an error during AT in which the instruction function is executed, and the payout is not generated in the game.

In FIG. 652, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the pressing operation of the starting lever 210 is performed. Further, according to the instruction function 802, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 ends the stop operation for all reels 301 from the timing when the operation of pressing the reel stop button 211 can be accepted (the third stop button is pressed). Is displayed. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is started from the start of rotation of the reel 301, and the display end timing is the same as the instruction function display. Note that in the example of FIG. 652, the navigation display is started before the instruction function display is started, but the navigation display is displayed based on the content of the instruction information command, and the content of the instruction information command is displayed. Since it is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is performed with the same content as the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited to this.

Further, in the timing chart of FIG. 652, the timing of “starting stop button press acceptance” and the timing at which the instruction function 802 is turned ON appear to be the same, but strictly speaking, after the start press acceptance of the reel stop button 211 is started. The display of the instruction function is not started by the special display LED 612. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “display” of the instruction function 802 is performed before the timing of “starting the acceptance of the stop button press”, and in the processing of the program by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409. Also, the instruction function display is executed before the timing when the stop button press acceptance starts. The timing of such "start of stop button press acceptance" and "indication function display" is the same in the timing charts shown in other examples.

Further, in FIG. 652, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is the timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display body 500 is the start time of the rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of the display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the above-mentioned display (instruction function display and display navigation) is performed at any timing in the period from when the pressing operation of the starting lever 210 is performed until when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted. May be started.

[10-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process ends, an operation for stopping the reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (a stop operation, that is, an operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is awaited. FIG. 652 shows the content of the reel stop process by the “table system” as an example. The flow of the reel stop control process will be described below.

In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected according to the condition device that has operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with a pattern corresponding to all condition devices in a one-to-one correspondence, and these patterns are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409 as read-only table data.

When the reel stop control table is selected based on the condition device established in step S201 described above, the reel stop control table enters a standby state until the pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, it is determined whether or not the reels of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F=0, that is, OFF). It is also determined whether or not any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until the pressing operation of all reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processing in step S202 and subsequent steps is repeated.

Here, the order in which the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted (stop operation procedure) is, as described above, “forward pressing”, “sandwiching pressing”, “middle forward pressing”, “middle reverse”. There are six types of "push", "reverse pinch push", and "reverse push", but in the following description relating to FIG. Pay attention to and classify in three different pressing sequences. That is, when the first stop reel is the left reel 301a, it is called "forward push", when it is the middle reel 301b, it is called "middle push", and when it is the right reel 301c, it is called "reverse push".

In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has stopped (left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF=0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. In step S201, if the left reel stop button 211a is first (first) pressed from the standby state for the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c along the "forward-press" stop operation procedure, step S202 Is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0). The "first reel" referred to here is a reel that first receives a stop operation or that stops first. In this example (“forward pressing”), the stop operation of the left reel 301a is firstly accepted, so the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F=0). Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S204.

In the next step S204, the first reel stop processing is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop processing, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

In step S206, a reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the effective line of the slot machine 1 is only two lines of the upward right line and the downward right line, at this point, the number of stop control tables for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) is reduced to one. You can decide. That is, the symbols in the upper position or lower position of the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is called a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter) can be the winning symbol. If the symbol has a certain nature, select a reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the symbol. It will be.

In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F=1), and the process proceeds to the next step S208.

Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON (LF=1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in the stopped state. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF is only turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

When the processing of step S202 and subsequent steps is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, and therefore the determination of step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether the flag (middle reel stop flag MF) indicating that the middle reel 301b is in the stopped state is OFF (MF=0) and the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. To do. Here, since the "forward push" stop operation procedure is followed, the press operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S211.

In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0) as in step S203. Since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F=1) at this point, this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

In step S213, as a medium reel stop process, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above) To execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stop reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216 to set the middle reel stop flag MF to ON (MF=1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209 again, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are merely in the stopped state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in the stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Since this is not the case, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 to repeat the subsequent processing.

Further, in the processing from step S202 onward for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF=0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processing of steps S218, S220 and the like is the same as the above-described processing of step S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211, S213), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is turned ON (MF=1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Finally, in step S209, all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in the stopped state at this point, so this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop processing ends.

It should be noted that the description similar to the above can be applied to the case of the "middle press" stop operation procedure, and thus the details are omitted. However, in the case of the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, there are some differences from the above description, and therefore the following description will be made.

The "reverse push" stop operation procedure differs from the above "forward push" or "middle press" stop operation procedure in step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop processing). is there. That is, in the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is in a stopped state, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stop lines of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid symbols. It is possible to align the winning symbol corresponding to any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning symbol can be prepared for any activated line, and any one of them may be selected.

[10-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control for pulling the winning symbol corresponding to the establishment flag (corresponding winning symbol) into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible is performed (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when the reel stop operation by the player is accepted, the range in which it can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (the range in which the winning symbol can be drawn, for example, 4 symbols) (Minutes) is determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning symbol within the range, control is performed to pull this into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reel. The "retractable range" here means the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel after the reel is stopped until the reel is stopped. Say. For example, if the maximum retractable range is four symbols, when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, the reel can be further rotationally moved up to four symbols based on the position.

Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even when there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning symbol is within the retractable range. If there is, it is possible to move the corresponding winning symbol to the inside of the symbol display window 401 and then stop it. By performing this pull-in control, the player displays the winning symbol as long as there is the winning symbol within the pull-in range even if the timing of pushing the relevant winning symbol is somewhat early. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible (missing the game privilege without being able to obtain the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination because the winning symbols cannot be arranged).

In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the replay combination or the common bell that does not matter the pressing order is operating, the winning symbol can be surely aligned without requiring the player's eyes. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to each of the replay combination, the bell combination, etc., the corresponding respective winning combination symbols are arranged at a maximum of every four symbols (the above-mentioned figure. 614). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum pull-in number is set to 4 (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of a maximum of 4 as described above are always effective regardless of the push timing (push position). It becomes possible to pull in the line.

Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are arranged in the middle row when a predetermined replay combination is won, when focusing on the replay symbols, the other symbols are the maximum between the replay symbols on the left reel 301a. Four pieces are arranged (see FIG. 614). As a result, in the left reel 301a, no matter which position on the reel the stop operation is received, the replay symbol is always pulled in and stopped on one of the activated lines as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay combination is operating. be able to.

Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn in rather than the bonus symbol. When a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in the winning game, the state of establishment of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game, and the next game In the subsequent games in which a small combination (or a replay combination) has not been established, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

The above is an example of the reel stop processing based on the table method. Aside from this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this as well, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Further, in the present embodiment, either reel control processing of the control method or the table method may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

[10-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process ends, the main board 409 has the winning symbols on any of the activated lines in the symbol display window 401 (the combination mode of symbols corresponding to any winning symbol is displayed. Whether or not) is determined. In FIG. 654, the content of this determination process will be specifically described.

When all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, the winning symbols are arranged on any of the activated lines from the mode of the stopped eyes in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning symbol). Whether or not the combination mode of the symbols to be displayed is displayed) is determined. In addition, a stop eye when all reels 301 are stopped is called a stop eye.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state and OFF state of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game flag). If the bonus game flag is ON, the determination at step S301 is satisfied, and thus the process proceeds to step S302. If the bonus game flag is OFF, the determination at step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). Explaining the determination of the symbol combination in a specific example, if the bonus is BB1 shown in FIGS. 617 to 622 and the like, the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is a symbol arrangement of “red 7” on the activated line, When such a symbol arrangement is stopped on any of the diagonal lines, it can be determined that the two kinds of BB symbols (bonus symbols) are stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the activated line (YES in step S302), a bonus game start process regarding the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process ends. To do. The bonus game start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 655. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not the bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination), and if it is determined to be a replay symbol, the replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay game. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is turned off (step S306), and the process ends.

When it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not the replay symbol (NO in step S304), as the next determination process, the symbol combination is a small symbol symbol (a symbol combination indicating a winning of a small symbol symbol). ) Is determined (step S308). When it is determined in step S308 that it is a small winning symbol, as a process of step S309, the payout of the specified number of medals according to the aligned small winning symbols is executed (the specified number of medals is paid from the medal discharging device 110). put out). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). As a result, the player is notified (announced, displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination has been paid out. After the processing in step S309 is completed, the corresponding small winning combination winning flag is turned off (step S310), and the processing is completed.

When it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not a small winning symbol (NO in step S308), none of the determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 described above are satisfied, and any on the activated line. The winning symbols of "No" are not available. In addition, the result at this time is also referred to as a “missing eye (a combination mode of disjointed symbols)”. In such a case, the losing process is executed (step S311). In the losing process, if the winning flag that is in the ON state at this point is any other winning flag except the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF. Further, if none of the winning flags is ON (at this time, the losing flag is ON), the losing flag is turned OFF. After the losing process in step S311, the determining process ends.

The processes from step S302 to step S311 are processes to be executed when the general state or the bonus internal state is controlled. Next, the processing after step S312 performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. The process here is a process executed during a bonus game (BB game) controlled in a bonus state.

In step S312, it is determined whether or not the bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the activated line. The "bonus game payout symbol" here is a generic term of symbol combinations in which medals are paid out by aligning during the bonus game, and specifically, a bonus game payout combination (in this example, In the state or the internal state, the payout is defined as the same as the small winning combination, but a special bonus exclusive winning combination may be prepared). When an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a payout process of a specified number of medals according to the aligned bonus game payout symbols is executed (step S313). In the medal payout process, the specified number of medals are paid out from the medal ejection device 110, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. Through such medal payout processing, the player is notified (announced, displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the bonus game payout combination has been paid out.

Subsequent to step S313, in step S314, bonus game end determination processing for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 656), and then the determination processing ends.

When it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol is not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is turned OFF (step S315), and the process is ended. As a pattern that becomes NO in step S312, there may be a case where the bonus game payout combination has been won but has been eliminated, and a case where the bonus game payout combination has not been won. In the process of step S315, the establishment flag of the bonus game payout combination is turned off in the former case, and the loss flag is turned off in the latter case. In addition, in the case where a bonus exclusive winning combination that is surely won during the bonus game is prepared, and when the bonus exclusive winning combination can be won without losing the bonus exclusive winning combination, the processing of step S315 is performed. It may be omitted.

The above-described processing of steps S301 to S315 is the game state determination processing performed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110). After that, the ART game determination processing is performed in step S320.

Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the instruction function as described above, the determination process (ART game determination process) regarding the continuation/end of the ART game and the management of the number of games is performed for each game. There is a need to do. The ART game determination process corresponds to a performance process that affects the generation of an instruction, and is therefore executed by the main board 409.

It should be noted that the timing of the ART game determination process may be any appropriate timing of the determination process shown in FIG. 654, but here, as an example, the processes of steps S306, S310, S311, S314, and S315 are performed. Later, it is assumed that the ART game determination process of step S320 is performed. Details of the ART game determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[10-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination in step S302 in FIG. 654 is satisfied, the bonus game start processing is executed. This bonus game start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, a BB flag) is ON. When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned on and the bonus flag is turned off. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the bonus game is cleared. As a result, the cumulative payout number is accumulated from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the bet number of the prescribed number of the bonus game (the prescribed number of the BB game is 2 in this example).

If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF. That is, it may occur when some improper means (for example, goto action) is performed or the slot machine 1 is out of order. Therefore, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and the above-mentioned LED or the like is displayed to notify the occurrence of the error.

[10-5-2. Bonus game end determination processing]
Next, the bonus game end determination processing of step S314 of FIG. 654 will be described with reference to FIG. 656.

First, in step S451, in response to the fact that the medals have been paid out in step S313 in FIG. 654, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the bonus game.

Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative payout number exceeds the total payout number (for example, 200) defined for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, and the cumulative payout amount during the bonus game is displayed (displayed on the payout amount display LED 612. The cumulative payout amount is provided separately by an LED or the like for display. It may be displayed on this).

On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is turned off (step S460), and the process ends.

[10-5-3. ART game determination processing]
FIG. 657 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of ART game determination processing. As described above in [10-3-3] and the like, the ART game is a game that is executed based on winning the ART in the ART lottery, and when the ART game is being executed, the push order small win ( When a winning combination of "push order bell" is won, instruction information such as "appropriate press order" is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), and an instruction effect (navi display) according to the instruction function display is displayed. It is displayed on the image display body 500 and the like. The ART game determination process is a determination process regarding the start, continuation, end, and the like of such an ART game, and is executed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110) that is the control body of the ART. Hereinafter, an example of the ART game determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 657.

First, the outline of the ART game will be described. The ART game is started when the start condition of the ART game is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the end condition of the ART game is satisfied. [10-3-3] As described in the instruction function processing below, when the start condition of the ART game is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (ART flag) is turned on to start the ART game, At the end of the ART game, the ART flag is turned off. Information such as an internal flag relating to the ART game such as the ART flag and the number of ART games described later is held in a memory (for example, RAM 1114) in the main board 409 which controls the ART game, but in the sub-board 510. Similar information may be held in a memory (eg, RAM 1122).

The conditions for starting the ART game (conditions for turning on the ART flag) are as described in detail in [10-3-2] and below, but in a nutshell, winning the ART in the ART first win lottery That is.

In step S501 of FIG. 657, as the first process of the ART game determination process, the current ART flag is compared with the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game to determine whether or not the ART flag is ON. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether the ART flag is turned from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. It is assumed that the value of the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the ART flag has been turned ON (YES in step S501), the number of ART games at the start of ART is set (step S502), and the process ends. The number of ART games at the start of ART (so-called initial number of games) may be set to a fixed number of games in advance, the number of games may be drawn at the time of winning the ART, or determined by another method. However, here, as an example, it is assumed that the initial number of games determined by the above-described instruction function processing is set as the number of ART games at the start of ART.

The ART game is started from the next game by performing the process of step S502. At the start of the ART game, the start of the ART game and the effect of clearly indicating the number of ART games to the player are performed (for example, display of the ART start screen).

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the ART flag is turned ON in step S501, that is, if the ART flag is OFF or the ART flag is ON from the previous game (NO in step S501), the ART flag is It is determined whether or not it is ON (step S505), and if the ART flag is ON (YES in step S505), it is determined whether or not it is in the specialized zone (step S506). Here, if it is determined that the ART flag is ON and that it is not in the specialized zone (YES in step S505 and NO in step S506), it means that one game in the ART game has been played. Is subtracted from the value of the number of ART games by "1" (step S507). If it is determined in step S506 that the zone is in the specialized zone (YES in step S506), the number of ART games is not subtracted, so step S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S508. If it is determined in step S505 that the ART flag is not ON (NO in step S505), since the ART game is not in progress, the process ends.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the number of games at the start determined at the start of the ART game, the addition function of adding the number of ART games based on satisfying a predetermined condition during the ART game. Is assumed to have. When the number of ART games is added, a predetermined internal flag (addition flag) is turned on, and the number of ART games to be added (number of additional games) is determined. The condition for determining the addition is not particularly limited, and may be the winning of a specific winning combination in the role lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Also, the method of determining the number of games to be added is not limited to a particular method. Then, the processes of steps S508 to S510 described below are processes that are performed when the function of adding the number of ART games is added.

First, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the addition flag is ON. If the addition flag is ON (YES in step S508), a process of adding the addition game number to the current ART game number is performed (step S509), and the addition flag is turned off (step S510). As a result, the number of remaining ART games is increased by the additional amount, and the duration of the ART game, which is advantageous to the player, is extended.

After the processing of step S510 (after the processing of step S506 if the addition function is not provided), it is determined whether or not the current number of ART games is "0" (step S511), and if it is "0" Since the condition for ending the ART game is satisfied, the ART flag is turned off (step S512), and the process ends. At this time, not only is the player clearly notified of the end of the ART game, but also information about a series of ART games (for example, the total number of payout medals in the ART game and the number of continued ART games) is clearly displayed to the player. You can

If it is determined in step S511 that the current number of ART games is not "0" (NO in step S511), the ending condition of the ART game is not satisfied, and therefore the process is ended without changing the ART flag. As a result, the ART game is continued in the subsequent games.

The ART game determination process described with reference to FIG. 657 is a processing example in the case where the game period controlled to the game state for the ART game (ART game period) is a system in which 1 count is subtracted for each game. If the ART game period is managed by another subtraction method (for example, the ART game period is determined by the number of appearances of ART navigation), it is desirable to perform an appropriate ART game determination process according to the subtraction method. ..

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag indicating the start of an ART game (for example, an ART start flag) may be prepared separately from the ART flag for the ART game determination processing. The ART start flag is an internal flag that is turned ON when the ART first win lottery is won and the ART game start condition is satisfied. In such a case, in a series of processes by the ART game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the ART start flag is ON. If the ART start flag is ON, in step S502, the ART initial game is started. After setting the number, a process of turning on the ART flag and turning off the ART start flag may be performed. If the ART start flag is OFF in step S501, the process of step S505 and subsequent steps is performed. You can do this.

[10-6. Control of production operation]
The above is an example of the control mainly by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, the control of various effect operations is executed by the sub-board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the sub-board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118 or the like) based on various commands (information command, output signal) output from the main board 409. As described above, the various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

For example, the presentation mode includes one that is completed only in the game (hereinafter, referred to as a one-shot production mode), one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Of these, in the single-shot production mode, a production that suggests the winning flag (instruction production, notification production, details will be described later), production that informs payout of medals (payment appearance, it is also possible to inform the number of payouts) There is.

The suggestive effect is an effect that indirectly notifies the player of the winning flag (notification effect), which is different from the effect of directly informing the player of the winning flag. For example, a form of a winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. , Such as displaying colors and the like. In addition, the suggestive effect is performed even when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of losing). In this case, it is an effect whose content is hard to notice that it is lost (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken by any winning combination). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

In the notification effect, for example, when the winning flag is a bonus role or when the player wins in the ART first win lottery, the result regarding the game such as “bonus confirmed!” or “ART winning!” is clearly shown to the player. It is something that can be announced. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination (because a large number of medals may be obtained) that is pleasing to the player, such as a bonus or ART. That is, when the player wins the ART first win or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate that.

Note that the various presentation modes described above can be executed as the display of an image by the image display body 500, the generation of a sound effect by the speaker 512 or the like, the light emission or lighting by the LED decoration, or the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues to play the game for a long time. The presentation mode is not limited to being performed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, a doll that imitates a character, a movable model, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at positions different from those of the reels, and can be started and stopped independently of the player's operation as part of the production. What is to be executed) or illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light typified by a rotating lamp) may be provided to execute various effects. By adopting such a method, it is possible to fully entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[10-7. Game number management processing]
By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game number management processing for managing the number of games is executed by the game number management control unit of the CPU 1110. The game number management control means of the CPU 1110 starts the game number management process (starts the game number counting process) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition, and the game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. By ending the number management process (ending the game number count process), the number of games executed by the player during the game number management process as the specific section is counted and the number of games is managed. When a predetermined ending condition is satisfied and the game number management process ends, the number of games counted in the game number management process is initialized and returns to zero.

The above-mentioned predetermined start condition for starting the game number management process is to shift from the hell state to another state (advantageous state A to advantageous state E). That is, the game number management process is started when it is determined that the instruction function display is to be performed at least once or more immediately or after a plurality of games (for example, 32 games) have been exhausted. Therefore, the game number management process is started from the next game in which the special combination is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined end condition for ending the game number management process is that the number of games counted during the game number management process is set to a predetermined threshold value (in this example, 1500 games are set as described above). ) Is reached and the instruction function display is performed one or more times (first condition), and even if the number of games counted during the game number management process does not reach the predetermined threshold, That is, the game state involved in execution shifts from the advantageous state to the hell state (second condition). When either one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the game number management process ends. For example, when the ceiling game is exhausted without winning the ART first win lottery, even if the number of games counted during the number-of-games management process does not reach the predetermined threshold, the instruction function display is executed. The game state involved shifts from the advantageous state to the hell state. When any one of the above two conditions is satisfied in the game number management process, the game number management process ends. Here, the transition of the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display from the advantageous state to the hell state may be performed immediately after the ART game ends, or after the pullback state ends after the ART game ends. You may move to.

In the present embodiment, the instruction function display is always performed once or more during the game number management process, but this is not essential. That is, the above-mentioned first condition may be that the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value (when one or more instruction function displays are performed during the game number management process. May be excluded from the conditions).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start condition for starting the game number management process and the condition for ending the game number management process are compared, the start condition for starting the game number management process is higher. Is configured to be. Therefore, comparing the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON and the period in which the game number management process is set to OFF, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON is longer. ing. However, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON should not exceed 70% of the entire period (the sum of the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON and the period in which it is set to OFF). Is becoming The period in which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON is a period in which the game is controlled to one of the advantageous states A to E and the withdrawal state, and in this example, one shot has a threshold of 1500 games. It will be the maximum. The period in which the game number management process is set to OFF is the period in which the hell state is controlled. In this hell state, the execution of the ART game is not finalized (in other words, the operation of the instruction function display is not permitted, and the condition device is grouped as described above), but the ART game is not executed. The winning probability in the first win lottery (the probability of being determined to be YES in step S6011) is 1/20, and the game can be won by executing a game less than 32 games set as the ceiling game number. There is. As a result, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing gambling.

Further, the CPU 1110 of the slot machine 1 has an ART game forced termination means, and this ART game forced termination means, even if the ART game is in progress, counts the number of games (game number counted in the game number management process. Based on the fact that the number counter GC) has reached a predetermined threshold value, the ART game is immediately and forcibly terminated. However, if the instruction function display is not executed once during the game number management process, even if the number of games (game number counter GC) counted in the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value. , The hell state is not entered until the indication function display is executed once. Therefore, even if the number of games (game number counter GC) counted in the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold during the ART game, as long as there is no bonus game execution history during the game number management process, The ART game is continued until the indication function display is executed once. On the contrary, when there is a bonus game execution history during the game number management process, even if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, the count is made in the game number management process. When the number of played games (the game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, the state is shifted to the hell state, so that the ART game is forcibly ended during the ART game.

Further, the CPU 1110 of the slot machine 1 also has an instruction function display execution right extinguishing unit. This instruction function display execution right extinguishing means, for example, even when the ART game is not in progress, when the instruction function display execution right is given, the number of games counted in the game number management process (the number of games) is counted. When the counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, a process of extinguishing the execution right of the assigned instruction function display is executed. However, also in this case, if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value. Even if it does, it does not shift to the hell state until the indication function display is executed once. Therefore, even if the number of games (game number counter GC) counted in the number-of-games management process reaches a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display is 1 unless there is a bonus game execution history during the number-of-games management process. Until execution is performed, the execution right of the assigned instruction function display is not extinguished and is maintained. On the contrary, when there is a bonus game execution history during the game number management process, even if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, the count is made in the game number management process. When the number of played games (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, the state is shifted to the hell state, so that even if the execution right of the instruction function display is granted, the execution right of the instruction function display disappears. Become. The right to execute the instruction function display corresponds to the right to execute an ART game in which the instruction function can continuously operate over a plurality of games and the right to operate the instruction function display only once (one game). In addition, the state in which the right to execute the instruction function display is given means that the RT state is in the precursor game (during the ceiling game is being exhausted) or in the ready state (the ceiling game is exhausted and the instruction function flag is set to ON. The RT1 state) corresponds to this.

In the game after the ART game is forcibly ended in this way, the game state related to the execution of the indication function display is controlled to the hell state. Even if the ART game is forcibly ended, the RT state remains at RT2 or RT3, and the process shifts to RT1 based on the appearance of the 0-bell zero. In this way, the ART game is forcibly terminated on the basis of the number of games counted in the game number management process reaching a predetermined threshold, so that the number of game media as a prize can be shortened. It is possible to prevent accidental occurrence of a situation in which a large amount is given, and in turn it is possible to suppress unnecessarily inciting euphoria.

Even when the number of games (game number counter GC) counted in the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value during the execution of the bonus game, the bonus game does not end midway and is executed to the end. It

Further, when the BB is won and the bonus game is executed in the hell state, the game state related to the execution of the indication function display in the bonus game is controlled to the hell state unless the special role is won. Up to. Then, in this hell state and when the special role (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance lip) is won during the bonus game, the transition destination is any one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state D. For example, the game number management flag is set to ON, the count of the game number counter GC is started, and the hell state is shifted to the advantageous state of the shift destination. However, if the transition destination is in the advantageous state E, although the game number management flag is set to ON and the counting of the game number counter GC is started, the RT state is changed from RT1 to RT2 after the bonus game is finished. It will be started when it is migrated. It should be noted that during the bonus game or inside the bonus, the lottery related to the execution of the indication function display (ART first win lottery, etc.) may not be performed. For example, even if the special part is selected in the internal lottery, the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 may not be performed, and it is not determined in step S6011 whether the special part is the special part. May be (ie the same as when the normal role was chosen). However, in the game in which the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is selected in the internal lottery, a lottery (ART initial win lottery, etc.) relating to the execution of the instruction function display may be performed.

[10-8. Overall game flow]
An overall game flow in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 658. FIG. 658 is a time chart showing an example of the overall flow of the game. In describing the overall game flow, each control state in the slot machine 1 of the present example will be summarized and described.

First, in the slot machine 1 of this example, when viewed from the perspective of the RT state, a general state that is controlled after the bonus game is finished, and RT1 and RT1 that are controlled when a zero-bell zero appears, and a replay 1 is raised. RT2, which is controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to “1” appears, or when a symbol combination corresponding to lowered replay appears at RT2, and RT3 which is controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to raised replay 2 appears at RT2, BB1 Either of the bonus internal state controlled when the symbol combinations corresponding to these winning symbols BB2 have not appeared, or the bonus state in which the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 or BB2 appears and the bonus game is being executed. The crab is controlled by the RT state control means.

Further, from the viewpoint of the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display, it is confirmed that the hell state in which the execution of the instruction function display is not yet determined and the execution of the instruction function display is performed at least once. The instruction function control means controls one of the states A to E and the pullback state. As described above, in the advantageous state, in addition to the advantageous state E in which the instruction function display is controlled by the ART game that can continuously operate over a plurality of games, the degree of expectation of shifting to the advantageous state E is different. The states A to D and the pullback state are prepared.

Further, the instruction function control means sets the instruction function flag to either an ON state in which the operation of the instruction function is permitted or an OFF state in which the operation of the instruction function is not permitted. The operation of the instruction function by the instruction function control means is not allowed even if the ART first win lottery is won unless the number of ceiling games is exhausted, and is allowed based on the exhaustion of the number of ceiling games (ON), ART. When the game ends, the allowance is canceled (OFF).

Further, the game number management control means sets the game number management flag to the ON state where the game number management control is performed (the number of games executed by the player is counted), and the game number management control is not performed (game). (The number of games played by a person is not counted.) OFF state is controlled. The game number management control by the game number management control means is not executed in the hell state (OFF), but is executed based on the transition from the hell state to any of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E (ON). ..

From the viewpoint of the game state that the player can understand (hereinafter, referred to as “appearance state”), the general game state in which the ceiling game number is not set and execution of the instruction function display is not fixed, The indication game state in which the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed and the ceiling game number is set, the single instruction state in which the instruction function display is performed only once, and the instruction function flag is set to ON after the ceiling game number has been exhausted Prepared state (state ready for execution of ART game, that is, state in which ART game can be executed when symbol combination corresponding to raised replay 2 appears), symbol combination corresponding to raised replay 2 appears and ART The player can recognize that the game is in one of the ART state during the game and the pullback state after the ART game is finished (pullback state).

The instruction function is permitted to operate in the above-described preparation state and ART state, and is not permitted to operate in the normal game state, the precursor game state, and the pullback state. However, regarding the precursor game state and the CZ state (advantageous states A and D of the present embodiment), the state (the precursor game state and the CZ state) is exhausted by a predetermined number of games (32 games in the advantageous state A, and in the advantageous state D). Although the instruction is given after waiting 10 games), the present invention is not limited to this, and when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" are selected in the internal lottery. If any one of them is selected, the pushing order may be instructed, and the state may be immediately shifted to the hell state when the predetermined number of games is exhausted.

The number-of-games management control is not executed in the general game state, but is started based on the special combination being selected in the internal lottery (that is, the state being changed from the hell state to the advantageous state). When it is determined that the number of games executed by the player during the game number management process (game number management flag ON) exceeds a predetermined threshold, it is confirmed that the instruction function display is executed one or more times. As a condition (except when the bonus game is executed), the game number management flag is set to OFF.

Next, the overall game flow will be described. When the RT state is RT1 and the game state related to the execution of the indication function display is the hell state, the appearance state becomes the general state. In the general state, both the instruction function flag and the game number management flag are OFF. Then, when a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state and transitions to any of advantageous state A to advantageous state E, the number of games is managed. The flag is set to ON. As a result, the appearance state is changed from the general game state to the precursor game state (when transitioning to the advantageous states A to C), CZ (when transitioning to the advantageous state D), and the ART game (when transitioning to the advantageous state E).

In the omen game state, the ceiling game number is set and the instruction function flag is set to OFF. When the number of ceiling games is exhausted, the instruction function flag is set to ON. In FIG. 658, the advantageous state A is first controlled, the instruction function display is executed only once, then the state is shifted to the hell state, and the game number management flag is set to OFF.

When a special role is selected in the subsequent internal lottery in the hell state and one of the advantageous states A to E is selected, the game number management flag is set to ON and the appearance state is the general game. The state shifts to the omen game state. FIG. 658 shows a mode in which the hell state is shifted to the advantageous state B.

When the ceiling game is consumed in the advantageous state B, the appearance state shifts from the precursor game state to the preparation state, and the instruction function flag is set to ON. Then, when the “up rep 1+normal maintenance rep” is selected in the internal lottery, and the symbol combination corresponding to the up rep 1 is displayed by the player performing the stop operation based on the indication function display, the RT state Is shifted from RT1 to RT2, and the first ART game shown in FIG. 658 is started (enters the ART state). When the ceiling game is exhausted in the advantageous state B and the precursor game state is shifted to the ready state, the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state B to the advantageous state E.

Since the instruction function flag is set to ON during the ART game (during the ART state), even if "lower lip + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery, the player is displayed based on the instruction function display. The RT state is maintained at RT2 as long as the stop operation is performed, but when the symbol combination corresponding to the lowering replay is displayed by stopping the operation against the indication function display, the RT state is maintained with the indication function maintained. It will be moved from RT2 to RT1. However, when "up rep 1 + normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery and the stop operation is performed based on the indication function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the up rep play 1 is displayed and the RT state is displayed. Returns from RT1 to RT2.

Further, even if the instruction function flag is OFF, when “up Lip 1+normal maintenance Lip” is selected in the internal lottery, the symbol combination corresponding to the up Lip 1 is stopped by the player by the stop operation. It may be displayed accidentally. In this case, the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, but the ART game is not started because the number of ceiling games has not been exhausted. Then, when the 0-th bell zero is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to R1.

When the first ART game shown in FIG. 658 ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display shifts from the advantageous state E to the pullback state. The RT state is maintained at RT2 as long as the 0th page zero is not displayed, but when the 0th page zero is displayed, the state is shifted from RT2 to RT1.

The withdrawal state ends when you lose the maintenance lottery, and the instruction function display is executed on the condition that the instruction function display is executed at least once (except when the bonus game is executed). The game state involved is shifted from the pullback state to the hell state. However, when the number of games counted by the number-of-games management control means reaches the threshold value in the pullback state, the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF and the designated-functions display is displayed if the instruction function display has been executed once or more. The game state related to the execution of is changed from the pullback state to the hell state.

In this example, the number of games counted by the number-of-games management control unit has not reached the threshold value at the time when the first ART game ends, and in FIG. 658, the state when the ART first win lottery is won in the pullback state. It is shown. When the ART first win lottery is won in the withdrawn state, the instruction function flag is set to ON, the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the advantageous state E, and the second ART game shown in FIG. 658 is started. It At this time, if the RT state has been shifted to RT1, the ART game is started by shifting from RT1 to RT2, but if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game is immediately started. However, in this case, even if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game may be started after several games have been executed. Then, when the second ART game shown in FIG. 658 ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display shifts from the advantageous state E to the withdrawal state.

In this example, the number of games counted by the number-of-games management control means has not reached the threshold value at the time when the second ART game ends, and in FIG. 658, BB1 is selected by internal lottery in the pullback state. The state when it is played is shown. When BB1 is selected in the internal lottery, the RT state until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed becomes a bonus internal state, and when the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed, it becomes a bonus state and the CPU 1110 has. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the bonus game is executed, if the player wins the maintenance lottery without winning the ART first win lottery in the pull-back state, the pull-back state ends, the game state becomes the general game state, and the instruction function display is executed. The related game state is changed from the pullback state to the hell state, and the game number management flag is set to OFF. Further, even when the bonus game is being executed, when the game number management flag is set to OFF, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

In FIG. 658, during the bonus state (during execution of the bonus game), it is determined that the ART first win lottery is won and the state is shifted to the advantageous state B, for example, and the ceiling game of 32 games is set to the precursor game state. The state is shown. At this time, the game state relating to the execution of the indication function display is shifted from the hell state to the advantageous state, and the game number management flag is set to ON. Then, when the bonus game ends, the RT state shifts from the bonus state to the general state (RT0), and when the 0-bell zero pattern is displayed in the general state, the RT state shifts from the general state (RT0) to RT1. To be done.

In FIG. 658, since the ceiling game is not yet digested at the time when the bonus game ends, the omen game state continues. Then, when the 0-bell zero is displayed, the RT state is shifted from the general state (RT0) to RT1, and when the ceiling game is exhausted and the instruction function flag is set to ON, the appearance state is the precursor game state. To the ready state.

After that, when "raise replay 1 + normal maintenance replay" is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the raise replay 1 is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2 and is shown in FIG. 658. The third ART game is started to enter the ART state, and the game state relating to the execution of the indication function display is shifted to the advantageous state E.

During the third ART game, when the number of games counted during the game number management process (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold, The number management flag is set to OFF, and the game number management process ends. When the number-of-games management process ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF and the running ART game is forcibly ended. At this time, the ART game is forcibly terminated midway, even if the prescribed number of games has not been exhausted. When the ART game is forcibly ended in this way, the game state relating to the execution of the indication function display is shifted to the hell state, and the appearance state becomes the general game state.

Even if the number of games counted during the game number management process (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold value, the game number management process is performed. If the indication function display is not executed once during the transition to the hell state is avoided until the indication function display is executed at least once, and if the ART game is in progress, the ART game continues and The instruction function flag is also kept in the ON state. When the instruction function display is performed once, the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF and the number-of-games management process is completed, and at the same time, the instruction function flag is set to OFF and the running ART game is forced. When finished, the game state related to the execution of the indication function display is shifted to the hell state.

However, if even one bonus game is executed during the game number management process, even if the instruction function display is not displayed even once during the game number management process, the bonus game is not displayed during the game number management process. When the counted number of games (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold value, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process is executed. At the same time, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, the running ART game is forcibly ended, and the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 658, when the ART first win lottery is won and the game is shifted to the advantageous state during the execution of the bonus game (during the bonus state), the number of games counted during the game number management process. When the number of games reaches the threshold, even if the instruction function display is not performed even once during the game number management process, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process ends, and at the same time, the instruction function flag is displayed. Is set to OFF, the running ART game is forcibly ended, and the game state relating to the execution of the indication function display is shifted to the hell state.

Even if the ART game is forcibly ended, the RT state is maintained at RT2 unless the 0-bell zero is displayed, and the RT-state is set to RT1 based on the 0-bell zero being displayed. Will be migrated. In FIG. 658, the game state related to the execution of the indication function display is controlled to RT2 for a while after the state is shifted to the hell state, and then the state is shifted from RT2 to RT1.

Then, when the special role is selected by the internal lottery in the hell state and the game state relating to the execution of the indication function display is changed from the hell state to any of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E (in FIG. 658). When the advantageous state C is entered, the game number management flag is set to ON and the game number management process is started. Then, when the advantageous state is set in which the number of precursor games is set, the appearance state changes from the general game state to the precursor game state.

Although FIG. 658 does not show the mode in which the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3, the special zone lottery is won (YES in step S606), and the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 2 is on the activated line. Is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3, and the special zone state is set.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, when the advantageous state D is entered, the chance zone (CZ) is entered, but in FIG. The chance zone (CZ) is not shown in the state column.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a period in which the game number management flag is set to ON (period in which it is controlled to an advantageous state) and a period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF (hell state) The period during which the game number management flag is set to ON is higher than the period during which the game number management flag is set to ON, and the game number management flag is set to ON during the entire period. The period during which it is set is set not to exceed 70%. In the hell state where the number-of-games management flag is set to OFF, the instruction function display is not executed, but the probability that a special role is selected in the internal lottery is higher than that of the 32 games set as the number of ceiling games. It is configured so that a special role can be selected by executing a few games. Moreover, even if the transition destination when the special character is selected is not the advantageous state B or the advantageous state E, when the transition destination is the advantageous state C or the advantageous state D, the expectation of the ART game is given to the player. Can be given. Therefore, when the number of games (game number counter GC) executed during the game management process exceeds a predetermined threshold value G, the game number management process is ended and the state is shifted to the hell state, but in the hell state, the advantageous state A As compared with the above, the expectation that the ART game is executed is increased, so that it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of interest while suppressing gambling.

[10-9. Processing when an abnormal condition occurs]
The processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail.

In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during a game, an error is notified according to the detected error type. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 is turned on (or blinks), and the special display LED 612 can display an error indicating the type of the error. Note that the special display LED 612 normally displays an instruction function display and a payout number display. In some cases, no error is detected, but a sudden power failure is included in the abnormal state.

When the above-described abnormal state occurs, it is necessary to cancel the error in order to return to the normal game state (in the case of power off, it is sufficient that no error display remains after power is returned). The method of releasing the error differs depending on the error that has occurred, but it is often necessary to turn off the power (OFF/ON).

[10-9-1. RAM clear]
Here, the clearing of data values (RAM clear) in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the time of a specific operation such as setting change or power OFF/ON, the value of the data held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is erased or initialized in an address range corresponding to each operation. A clear process (RAM clear) of rewriting to a value is performed. Therefore, even when the error canceling process is performed, there is a possibility that part of the data held in the RAM 1114 will be cleared if the power is turned off and on.

However, if the error clearing process is performed during the indication function display or the power is cut off during the payout of medals, the RAM clear clears the data used for the indication function display and the payout number display. , It is assumed that the game may be interrupted. In the slot machine 1, the RAM clearing target range in the RAM 1114 is set in advance in view of such a problem.

FIG. 659 is a diagram for explaining a data block of RAM. FIG. 659 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, where the upper end is the beginning of the memory address and the lower end is the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area where data is not read or written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is collected on the end side of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 659, in the RAM 1114, a plurality of “areas” are predetermined according to the type of data to be stored. In addition, five types of "clear range 0" to "clear range 4" are defined as the RAM clear target range. It should be noted that each clear range may include an unused area 1114z.

First, the clear range of RAM clear will be described. "Clear range 0" basically means a target range that is not executed and corresponds to all erasure. That is, the RAM clearing in the clear range 0 is not performed by normal maintenance or error processing. From another point of view, the set value data area 1114a is not cleared of data values except when the RAM is cleared in the clear range 0. This means that the set value data area 1114a is basically not cleared.

“Clear range 1” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the start of setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, of the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 659, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

“Clear range 2” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, of the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 659, the data areas below the lamp ON data area 1114d are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

“Clear range 3” means a target range in which RAM is cleared at the end of the bonus. The RAM clearing from the clear range 0 to the clear range 2 requires work by a hall clerk or the like as an opportunity to execute each RAM clear, but the RAM clear at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the end of the bonus. Will be executed. In clearing the RAM at the end of the bonus, specifically, the data area in the used area shown in FIG. 659, which is equal to or smaller than the replay input number area 1114j, is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the instruction function display area. 1114i is not cleared.

The “clear range 3” is also a target range in which the RAM clear is performed when the power is simply turned off/on. That is, when the power is turned off/on without performing setting change or reset operation, the data area that is the target range in “clear range 3” is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the "clear range 3", the instruction content of the instruction function is not erased by turning the power off/on.

“Clear range 4” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the start of each game. The RAM clear at the start of each game is automatically executed, for example, by an internal process when the start lever 210 is operated in a state where the bet number of medals is determined. In clearing the RAM at the start of each game, specifically, the data area of the display flag area 1114l or less among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 659 is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the interrupt check are used. The timer area 1114k is not cleared.

Next, each data area shown in FIG. 659 will be briefly described. A set value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the set value data area 1114a.

Information indicating the open/closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or the front opening/closing member 90) is stored in the door flag area 1114b, and the door-shaped front member 200 (or the front opening/closing member 90) is stored in the door monitoring timer area 1114c. Time information for recognizing opening is stored.

The lamp ON data area 1114d stores information regarding lighting of lamps (for example, the replay lamp 606, the start lamp 608, and other display devices arranged on the display panel 501). Information indicating the number of credits (the number of stored medals) is stored in the number-of-credits area 1114e. The credit display area 1114f stores information for displaying the number of stored medals on the stored number display LED 613. The payout number area 1114g stores information indicating the number of payouts (medal payout number) indicating how many gaming values have been paid out in the game. The payout display area 1114h stores information for displaying the number of paid-out medals on the special display LED 612. The instruction function display area 1114i stores information corresponding to the instruction content of the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612.

The replay insertion number area 1114j stores the number of game values to be inserted during the replay operation (the number of medals inserted during replay). In the interrupt check timer area 1114k, timer information necessary for executing the interrupt process is stored.

Information indicating an error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored in the display flag area 1114l. In the medal payout number area 1114m, the payout number of gaming value to be paid out as a result of the game is stored. In the insertable number area 1114n, information indicating a state of whether or not a game value can be inserted is stored. In the number-of-medals-insertion area 1114o, the number of game value inserted before the start of the game is stored. The random number storage area 1114p stores random numbers used in the condition device.

In this way, in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, by setting the range in which the RAM clear is performed for each of various actions (when changing the setting, turning the power OFF/ON, etc.), it can be expected to realize efficient memory control.

Note that the RAM 1114 defines a range (capacity) that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the game machine, and data such as programs must be stored within the specified range. However, in recent years, regarding the processing related to the test signal and the processing related to fraud, the data related to the program for the processing is stored in an unused area outside the above defined range (for example, the unused area 1114z in FIG. 659). Is allowed. However, use of such an unused area is limited to a gaming machine having an instruction function.

Further, in the slot machine 1, after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off, whether or not the data displayed before the RAM is to be redisplayed is determined by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510). ) Can be determined for each type of data. That is, the CPU 1110 (or the CPU 1118) may refer to the data stored in the data area where the RAM has not been cleared to redisplay the data as much as possible when the power is restored, or may display the specific data (for example, The data relating to the payout number display, the data relating to the navigation display, etc.) can be theoretically redisplayed, but may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, referencing the data saved in the stack point of the RAM 1114 is also included.

[10-9-2. error indication]
Next, the error display on the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 660 is a diagram for explaining an error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the “notification type” column of FIG. 660 (which will be described later but includes some that are not errors) is displayed in the “SEG” column with the special display LED 612. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is notified in a distinguishable manner. Of the errors shown in the “Notification type” column of FIG. 660, each error other than “communication error (during series code error)” detected by the sub-board 510 has a main error detection signal when the error occurs. The board 409 is notified. The errors shown in FIG. 660 are a part of the errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1. In addition to the illustrated errors, there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub-board 510.

The outline of each error shown in the "Notification type" column of FIG. 660 will be described below.

The “RAM error” is an error notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, “communication error (during series code error)” is detected when there is an error in the series code transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510, but since it is detected by the sub-board 510, a special display No error is displayed on the LED 612.

Although "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed" is not an error, the "setting value" is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the operation, and thus is shown in FIG. 660. The setting value of the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114, for example. Note that the notification timing of “during setting change” is the start of a predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing of “setting confirmation” is the start of a predetermined setting check operation.

The “illegal payout error” is an error notified when an abnormal payout is made. Specifically, a payout count switch (not shown, which is a switch for counting the number of paid-out medals, for example, except when the medals are paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of a driving means (not shown) included in the medal discharging device 110, (Provided in the medal releasing device 110) is turned on. In FIG. 660, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing at which the error is detected is “when the main game is not stopped” or “when the main game is stopped”. The higher priority is detected when the main game is not stopped. However, the same "HF" is segment-displayed on the special display LED 612 regardless of the timing of detection.

The "inserted medal passing time 1 error", "inserted medal passing time 2 error", "medal passing sequence 1 error", "medal passing sequence 2 error", "medal passing interval time error", and "inserted medal backward error" The error is notified when there is an abnormality in the process of inserting a medal from the medal insertion slot 203 and reaching the hopper 1110b. The abnormality referred to here includes not only an abnormality relating to the passage route of the medal but also an abnormality caused by the insertion of a foreign object other than the medal.

In the slot machine 1, when the insertion sensor 207b detects the passage of a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 (when the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state), the lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the shoot sensor are then detected. It reaches the hopper 110b while the passage is detected at. The lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the shoot sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207 and detect passage of medals at predetermined positions where they are provided (not shown). Further, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, so that even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, the medal is passed through the medal selector 207 and the return gutter 213. It is returned to the sauce pan 201. When the medals whose passage has been detected by the insertion sensor 207b have not moved through such a normal process (prescribed medal passage sequence), the main board 409 determines whether or not each sensor has detected and the detection time. Detect each of the above errors.

The outline of each error is explained. The “insertion medal passage time 1 error” is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign matter other than medals) are accumulated in the vicinity of the insertion sensor 207b. It is detected when it continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). The “inserted medal passing time 2 error” is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign matter other than medals) stay near the lever sensor. Specifically, the medal detection by the lever sensor is a predetermined time. It is detected when it continues (for example, 500 ms). The detection target period of the "inserted medal passage time 2 error" is always set, but the notification timing of the error is set at the start of medal acceptance (or at the end of the game such as after completion of the payout process).

The "medal passing sequence 1 error" is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the lever sensor is not detected (OFF) but the medal detection by the selector sensor is performed. More specifically, the error is detected when the lever sensor has not detected a medal in a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the passage of the medal is detected by the selector sensor. The "medal passing sequence 2 error" is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the shoot sensor is not performed after the medal detection by the selector sensor. More specifically, the error is detected when the shoot sensor does not detect a medal within a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the selector sensor detects that the medal has passed.

The “medal passage interval time error” is an error that is notified when a medal passes in a manner that is not expected under normal circumstances. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, some object is detected with a passage interval shorter than the shortest medal passage interval (that is, the passage interval when medals are continuously inserted) assumed during normal operation. The error is detected when the situation that the vehicle has passed is detected over a predetermined frequency (for example, five consecutive times).

The “inserted medal backward error” is an error that is notified when a medal moves on a route other than the prescribed medal passing sequence, and particularly when a backward movement is detected. Specifically, it is detected based on the order of detection of medals by each sensor (insertion sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, shoot sensor, etc.) provided in the medal selector 207.

Further, the “payout medal jam error”, the “payout medal empty error”, and the “auxiliary storage full tank error” are errors reported when there is an abnormality related to the payout or storage of medals. To explain the outline of each error, first, the "payout medal jam error" is an error that is notified when a medal is jammed during the medal payout from the hopper 110b. Specifically, when the payout count switch is in the ON state for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or more, the error is detected. The "payout medal empty error" is an error that is notified when the medals in the hopper 110b are empty. Specifically, when the medals from the hopper 110b are not normally paid out and the payout is retried (payout retry), if the payout count switch is in the ON state for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) or more after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. The “auxiliary storage full tank error” is an error that is notified when the medal auxiliary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, when the medal full sensor 111a of the medal auxiliary storage box 111 detects the storage of medals exceeding a predetermined standard, the error is detected.

The "priority" column of FIG. 660 shows the priority of notification between errors. In the present example, the priority means the priority when a plurality of errors are detected at the same time, and even if an error having a higher priority than the error is detected after one error is detected. , Display contents are not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, it may be determined to switch to the display of the error with a higher priority detected later. Further, an example of display on the special display LED 612 is shown in the “SEG” column. In any case, in the slot machine 1, when a plurality of errors are detected, it is not possible to restart the game (play the next game) unless these errors are canceled.

In addition, when “video” is “◯” in the “notification method” column, for example, an image for notifying an error is displayed on the image display 500. However, the notification image by “video” is required to have display contents that are the same as the error display on the special display LED 612. When the “sound” is “◯”, for example, a notification sound is output from the speaker 512. When the “lamp” is “◯”, for example, the error lamp 604 is turned on or blinks. In the notification by sound output or lamp output, the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error. For example, when an error of high priority is detected, the error of low priority is detected. The notification mode may be emphasized in comparison.

Further, the “reset cancellation” column shows whether or not the error can be canceled by a reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. When the error that can be reset is released by resetting, the data area of “clear range 2” (see FIG. 659) of the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared.

When "immediate" is written in the "responsiveness" column, it means that the main board 409 can detect the error when the slot machine 1 is in operation. For example, when an illegal payout error is detected, the main board 409 immediately issues a command notifying the detection. That is, even if it is described as "immediately", it is not always necessary to display the error immediately when the error is detected. For example, after the result of the game is obtained (after the payout process is completed, or the payout process is performed). It is also possible to display an error before (start of). The fraudulent payout error is an urgent error that means that the gaming value has been fraudulently paid out.

[10-9-3. Error processing]
In the following, the processing when the error described in the previous chapter in the slot machine 1 occurs during a game (error occurrence processing) will be described. The specific details of the error occurrence process differ depending on what kind of requirement definition the slot machine 1 has regarding the error. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 has a requirement definition (first requirement definition) relating to an error as described below, and the details of the error occurrence processing performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Grouping based on importance (for example, strong error and weak error) is not performed for a plurality of errors.
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is continuously displayed.

661 and 662 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the present embodiment. 661 and 662 are combined into one flow chart. In this flow chart, the overall processing procedure of one game is based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. 623 and further details the processing performed when an error occurs. Shows. It should be noted that FIG. 661 and FIG. 662 show an example of the processing procedure when the game progresses when the power is off (that is, when the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 663, which will be described later, is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure of the power failure recovery processing in the present embodiment. In FIG. 663, the processing procedure is applied even when the power is turned off/on in the processing of FIGS. 661 and 662.

[10-9-3-1. Error processing (when power is off)]
With reference to FIGS. 661 and 662, the processing procedure of one game including the processing at the time of error occurrence (at the time of non-power interruption) will be described. Note that the overall flow of processing overlaps with the series of processing shown in FIG. 623, so detailed description of the already described processing will be omitted. Further, unless otherwise specified, the processes of FIGS. 661 and 662 are executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). Further, in order to make it easy to understand the situation in which each process is performed, correspondence with the “state of the gaming machine” shown in FIG. 653 is also shown.

First, in FIG. 661, as described in the BET processing of FIG. 623, after a specified number of game values (specifically, medals) have been inserted, the game is performed by the player pressing the start lever 210. It is started (step S801). The flow of such a game corresponds to “inserting a medal” to “pressing the starting lever” shown in FIG. 653.

When the game is started by depressing the starting lever 210, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a condition device whose operation is permitted based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not it is a section in which the special display LED 612 can display the indicating function. Here, the section in which the instruction function display is possible means a game (for example, during an ART game) in which the instruction function display by the instruction function can be executed. Note that, so far, although it has been mainly described that the instruction function display is performed during the ART game, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific game period other than the ART game (for example, relatively winning an ART is won. The instruction function display may be performed even in a chance zone (CZ, etc.) that is easy to perform. In such a case, an affirmative determination is obtained in step S804 even in games other than ART games.

If it is determined in step S804 that the display of the indicating function is possible (specifically, if it is determined that the main board 409 gives an instruction by the indicating function) (YES in step S804), in step S803. The instruction content by the instruction function is determined based on the acquired condition device (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

Then, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to "start of reel rotation" shown in FIG. 653. Then, by transmitting the instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display body 500 or the like to perform the navigation display at a predetermined display timing related to the navigation display based on the received instruction information command. In the slot machine 1, the instruction information command in step S808 may be transmitted at a timing before the start of rotation of the reel 301 (step S807).

After that, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing related to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). Specific display examples of the indication function display are as shown in FIGS. 650 and 651. Further, the predetermined display timing regarding the “navigation display” and the “instruction function display” is as described above with reference to FIG. 653. Then, after the instruction function display in step S809, in step S810, acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S804 that it is not a section in which the instruction function display is possible (specifically, when it is not determined that the main board 409 issues an instruction by the instruction function) (NO in step S804). , The rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S811) without performing the processing relating to the instruction function as shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809, and the acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started ( Step S812).

Steps S810 and S812 correspond to “reel stop button press acceptance possible” shown in FIG. 653. After the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (first stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 652 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to “pressing first stop button” shown in FIG. 653.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S813 and the pressing of the second stop button performed thereafter (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process of step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process of step S819 is performed. In FIG. 662, when an error is detected in step S814, the process of step S819 is shown to be performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is still rotating. The process of step S819 may be performed after the reel stop operation is performed on the remaining reels 301. This also applies to step S816. In the processing after such error detection, the priority (importance) may be set differently according to the type of error, and the processing may be selectively used based on the priority. For example, an error such as “HF (illegal payout error)” that is unlikely to occur in a normal game situation should be a high priority error. Then, when such an error with high priority is detected, it is better to perform the process of step S819 without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating. preferable.

In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (second stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 652 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to “pressing second stop button” shown in FIG. 653.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the second stop button in step S815 and the pressing of the third stop button performed thereafter (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process of step S817 is performed. When an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining spinning reel 301.

In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (third stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 652 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to "depressing third stop button" shown in FIG. 653.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected within a predetermined time period (for example, until all reels 301 are stopped) after the third stop button is pressed in step S817. Yes (step S818). After that, the process of step S819 is performed regardless of the presence or absence of error detection in step S818.

In step S819, the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is ended. However, if it is determined in step S804 that it is not a section in which the instruction function display is possible (NO in step S804), since the instruction function display in step S809 is not performed, special processing needs to be performed in step S819. There is no.

After that, in step S820, all reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it is possible to determine the winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to “stop all reels” shown in FIG. 653.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 662, the processing of steps S819 and S820 is performed regardless of whether or not an error has been detected during the game up to that point, but the subsequent processing is whether or not it is determined that an error has been detected. It depends on what. Specifically, if no error has been detected during the game so far, the processing from step S821 is performed, and if an error is detected during the game so far, the processing from step S825. Is done.

First, as a normal-time process in which no error is detected during the game until then, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the game value is paid out. In paying out the gaming value, when the stop of the winning combination is confirmed based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), no error is detected and the game ends. When it is determined that there is a payout in step S821 (YES in step S821), the display of the number of payouts on the special display LED 612 is started (step S822), and at the same time, a payout process for gaming value (medals) is performed (step S823). .. After that, since no error has been detected, the game ends.

On the other hand, as the processing when an error is detected during the game until then, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming value is paid out (step S824).

The process of step S824 is the same as the process when no error is detected (step S821), and when it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824), step S822 (payout number display) and S823. The process of (payout process) is also the same.

However, if an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the processing of steps S816 and S827 is performed to cause the special display LED 612 to display an error. When the payout process is performed in step S823, after the payout process is completed, the payout amount display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S825), and then the processes of step S826 and subsequent steps are performed. If it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, the processing in step S826 and subsequent steps is performed as it is.

In step S826, the special display LED 612 displays the type of error detected so far (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. After that, an error canceling process is performed according to the error notified by the error display by the hall clerk, sales office, or the like (step S827), and the game ends.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 661 and 662, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected during the game, the special display LED 612 displays an instruction function display and a payout number display. It is possible to notify the player, the hall clerk, or the like of the type of the detected error by displaying the error without blocking.

[10-10. Modification]
It should be noted that in the present embodiment, a method of reducing discouragement that can be given to the player by forcibly ending the ART game halfway though the ART game is executed by winning the ART first win lottery. As the winning probability in the ART first win lottery executed in steps S6034, S6094, S6134 and S6201, the difference K( between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process The number is determined based on the number of games K remaining until the end of the game number management process. Similarly, the winning probabilities in the ART game number addition lottery in step S6073 and the step S6177 addition game determination lottery, and the number of games added in the step S6179 addition game number determination lottery are the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process. It is decided based on K. Furthermore, the winning probability in the maintenance lottery in step S 6193 is also determined based on the number K of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process. However, the method for reducing the discouragement that may be given to the player by forcibly ending the running ART game midway is not limited to the above method. For example, the ART image being executed is forcibly terminated midway due to the effect image displayed on the image display body 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 and the instruction function display processing executed by the main board 409. This can reduce discouragement that can be given to the player. The effect images displayed on the image display body 500 will be described below with reference to FIG. 664 by taking the step S6177 addition determination lottery and the step S6179 addition game number determination lottery, which are the processes executed during the ART game, as an example. At the same time, the instruction function display processing will also be described. Note that FIG. 664 is an example of an effect image related to the addition determination lottery and the addition game number determination lottery.

The effect image displayed on the image display body 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 is the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining until the end of the game number management process. It is decided based on the number of games K). Similarly, the mode of the instruction function display process executed by the main board 409 is also determined based on the number of games K remaining until the end of the game number management process.

First, a case where the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or larger than the fourth specified number will be described. When the addition game lottery in step S6177 is won during the execution of the ART game and the number of addition games of the ART game is determined by the addition game number determination lottery in step S6179, the image display body 500 is displayed in FIG. As shown in, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed. Such an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 204 makes the player expect that he/she has won the additional determination lottery of the ART game, but has a predetermined probability even when the player loses the additional determination lottery in step S6177. Since it is displayed, even if an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 204 is displayed, it does not determine that the player has won the additional determination lottery of the ART game.

When the player decides to win the addition determination lottery of the ART game, even if the player operates the effect button 204 by displaying an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204, the image display body 500 is shown in FIG. 664(b). The lost image is displayed.

When the player wins the add-on determination lottery of the ART game and an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 204 is displayed and the player operates the effect button 204, the image display 500 shows the image display body 500 as shown in FIGS. 664(c) to 664(e). As shown in, the number of additional games is displayed. FIG. 664(c) shows that the number of games to be added is 20 games, and FIG. 664(d) shows that the number of games to be added is 70 games. ) Indicates that the number of games to be added is 300 games.

In FIG. 664, “30G remaining” displayed on the upper left indicates that the number of remaining ART games is 30, and “TOTAL 1400” displayed on the lower right indicates that the number of games is being managed. It indicates that the game number counter GC counted at 1400 is 1400. In the present embodiment, when the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example), the game number management process ends and the advantageous state changes to hell. Since it is moved to the state, "TOTAL displayed in the lower right
“1400” means that the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management processing is 100 games.

Next, a case will be described in which the number of games K remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number. During the execution of the ART game, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “special maintenance lip+normal maintenance lip”, there is a probability of 65536/65536 to win the additional determination lottery in step S6177. When the number of additional games to be added to the ART game is determined by the additional game number determination lottery in step S6179, when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number of games management process is equal to or greater than the fourth specified number on the image display body 500. Similarly to, an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 204 is displayed (FIG. 664). As described above, the image prompting the user to operate the effect button 204 as described above makes the player expect that he/she has won the additional determination lottery of the ART game, but in the case of losing the additional determination lottery in step S6177. Since it is also displayed with a predetermined probability, even if an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 204 is displayed, it does not determine that the player has won the add-on determination lottery of the ART game.

When the player decides to win the addition decision lottery of the ART game, even if the player operates the effect button 204 by displaying an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 204, the image display body 500 remains until the end of the game number management process. Similar to the case where the number of games K is equal to or larger than the fourth specified number, the lost image shown in FIG. 664(b) is displayed.

However, when the player operates the effect button 204 when an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 204 is displayed by winning the additional game lottery in the ART game, the player selects the additional game lottery in step S6177, and the additional game in step S6179. Even if the number of ART games to be added is determined by the number determination lottery, the images shown in FIGS. 664(c) to 664(e) are not displayed on the image display body 500, and FIG. 664(b) is displayed. The lost image shown in is displayed. Then, when the number of ART games that has already been specified by the player is exhausted (when the ART game executed when not added is exhausted), it is actually added and the ART game is internally Even if it continues, the image display body 500 displays an end effect image indicating that the ART game has ended. Therefore, although the ART game is continuing internally, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the ART game is continuing. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly ended midway though the ART game has been continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged, which in turn makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

However, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special maintenance lip + Normal maintenance lip", the ART game is added with a probability of 65536/65536, so the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip is When it is displayed on the activated line, the player understands that the ART game will be added at that time. Therefore, when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is equal to or greater than the fourth prescribed number, the instruction function display is performed in a mode in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip is displayed on the activated line (in order. Although the pressing instruction function is displayed), if the number of games K remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth stipulated number, the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip is not displayed on the activated line. The indication function is displayed. Specifically, of the four types of pressing order excluding forward pressing (pressing order of 123) and reverse sandwiching pressing (pressing order of 312), the indication function display of the pressing order determined by the equal probability is performed). There is. Here, not only the forward push (the pushing order of 123) but also the reverse pinch pushing (the pushing order of 312) is excluded from the indication function display, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 617 to 622. This is because the pressing order) is an instruction function display that is performed in order to display the raise replay 2 that triggers the transition to the specialized zone on the activated line. Therefore, in order to avoid entering the special zone even if you have not won the special zone lottery, there are four ways except for forward push (123 push order) and reverse pinch push (312 push order). Among the pressing orders of, the pressing function indicating the pressing order determined by the equal probability is displayed. This is because it rarely rushes into the specialization zone, and one of the four pressing orders is frequently instructed, so that it is confused with this. In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance lip, it is determined with an even probability in any one of the six pressing sequences, and the stop operation in the determined pressing sequence is prompted. The instruction function display is performed as follows. As a result, even when the number K of games remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth stipulated number, even if the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", It is unlikely that the player will know this.

The above-mentioned fourth stipulated number can be set arbitrarily, but even if an ART game is added, the ART game does not end midway and the total number of ART games, including the number of added games, is exhausted. It is preferably a value that can be set. In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of ART games to be added is 300, it is preferable that the fourth prescribed number is 350 or more in consideration of the initial number of ART games.

In the modification described above, when the ART game is added, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth stipulated number, the lost image shown in FIG. 664(b) is displayed. Is always displayed, but is not limited to this. For example, when an ART game is added and the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth prescribed number, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 664(b)). The lost image shown in FIG. 664(b) may be displayed when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the lost image. Further, the above-mentioned certain condition may be changed according to the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management processing (for example, the number K of remaining games until the end of the number-of-games management processing becomes small. The probability that a lost image will be displayed will be proportional to. Even in this case, even if the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip is on the effective line so that the player does not understand this. The indication function display is performed in a manner not displayed.

Also, in the above-described modified example, although the ART game is added on the basis of whether or not the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth prescribed number, FIG. Although it is determined whether or not to display the lost image shown in b), the criterion of whether or not to display the lost image does not always need to be based on whether or not it is less than the fourth stipulated number. .. For example, the number of remaining ART games including the number of added ART games is compared with the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management processing, and the remaining number of ART games including the number of added ART games ends the number-of-games management processing. When it is determined that the number of remaining ART games is less than K, the image indicating that the ART game has been added is displayed, and the remaining ART game number including the added ART game number ends the game number management process. If it is determined that the number of remaining games is more than K, the lost image may be displayed. Even in this case, even if the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip is on the effective line so that the player does not understand this. The indication function display is performed in a manner not displayed.

Further, in the present modified example, if the number of games K remaining until the end of the number-of-games management process is less than the fourth stipulated number, it is won in the addition determination lottery in step S6177, and is added in the addition game number determination lottery in step S6179. Even if the number of ART games is determined, the image display 500 displays a lost image indicating that no additional ART game is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in order to give the player the impression that even if an ART game is added, the ART game will not be forcibly terminated midway, the number of games added will be smaller than the number of games actually added. An image indicating that the process has been performed may be displayed on the image display body 500. For example, if the number of remaining ART games is 30 and the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is 50, if the number of ART games is increased by 50, the number of remaining ART games will be It will be 80 games. However, since the number of remaining games K until the end of the number-of-games management process is 50 games, it is not possible to exhaust all the remaining 80 games of the ART games, and when the 50 games are exhausted, the ART games are interrupted. Will be forced to end. Therefore, even if the number of ART games actually added is 50, it is added that the number of games (20 or less) is smaller than the number of actually added games (50 games). Is displayed on the image display body 500. However, in that case, it is better to display the number of games to be actually added to the data of the additional game number lottery table. This is because if a numerical value that is not included in the data of the additional game number lottery table is displayed, the player may be aware of it. However, in such a case, a difference may occur between the threshold value of 1,500 games and the number of ART games that are currently consumed (displayed). In that case, if the difference is smaller than the minimum number of games to be actually added to the data of the number-of-addition games lottery table, the ending effect image described below is executed, and if it is larger, the number of ART games is “0”. At this point, the effect as shown in FIG. 664 may be added, and the effect may be performed based on the numerical value actually present in the data of the game number lottery table. From the above, it is possible to give the player the impression that all ART games including the number of added games have been exhausted, and the player is discouraged because the ART game is forcibly ended midway. It is possible to suppress the giving of the information, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Even in this case, even if the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip is on the effective line so that the player does not understand this. The indication function display is performed in a manner not displayed.

By the way, although it has been determined that the ART game is to be added, a lost image is displayed on the image display body 500, or the number of games added is smaller than the number of games actually added. When the image indicating the effect is displayed on the image display body 500, the ART game is internally continued. Therefore, it is preferable to display an end effect image indicating the end of the ART game on the image display body 500 until the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process becomes zero. As a result, even if the running ART game is forcibly ended midway, the appearance of the ART game seems to be over, so that the ART game is forcibly ended midway. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged, which in turn makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In the present modification, as described above, the ART game being executed is midway due to the effect image displayed on the image display body 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 and the instruction function display processing executed by the main board 409. A method of reducing discouragement that can be given to the player by forcibly ending it will be described by taking as an example the step S6177 add-on determination lottery and the step S6179 add-on game number determining lottery, which are the processes executed during the ART game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to the ART initial winning lottery in steps S6034, S6094, step S6134, and step S6201, the lottery for adding the number of ART games in step S6073, and the maintenance lottery in step S6203.

The gaming machine represented by the slot machine 1 described in the present embodiment can be represented as a technical idea in addition to the gaming machine described in claim 1.

The gaming machine of technical idea 1

A gaming machine comprising a plurality of variably displayable symbol rows and a stop operation means capable of stopping the variably displayed symbol rows, wherein a game result appears when the stop operation means is operated,
Instruction control means capable of executing an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means,
Advantageous game executing means capable of executing an advantageous game capable of continuously generating an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operating means by the instruction control means,
An additional lottery means for performing an additional lottery related to the number of games executed in the advantageous game,
For controlling a predetermined effect, and an effect control means that can be controlled to perform an effect based on the result of the additional lottery,

As the game state related to the execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, one of an instruction allowance state in which execution of the instruction is acceptable and an instruction incapable state in which execution of the instruction is impossible A controllable instruction state control means,

Instruction state transition control means capable of transitioning from the instruction permissible state to the instruction incapable state based on that a parameter that can be updated as the game progresses satisfies a predetermined condition in the instruction permissive state. ,
Equipped with
The effect control means,

In the instruction permissible state, there is provided means for controlling based on a parameter that can be updated as the game progresses, including whether or not to perform an effect based on the result of the additional lottery. ..

The gaming machine described in the above technical idea is equipped with an advantageous game (for example, ART game) capable of continuously generating an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means. This type of gaming machine is also provided with a winning combination lottery means for carrying out a winning combination lottery each time the game is executed.

In the above-mentioned winning combination lottery, a plurality of winning combinations are selected as a lottery target, and a prize is awarded to the player when the stop operation means is operated in an appropriate operation mode and when it is operated in an incorrect operation mode. Indicators with different amounts of game media are included. The indicator corresponds to the “push order bell 1” to the “push order bell 6” in the present embodiment, and when operated in an appropriate operation mode, for example, 8 game media are awarded as a prize, which is incorrect. When operated in the operation mode, for example, 1 or 0 game media is awarded as a prize (when 0 game media is not awarded as a prize). The above-mentioned appropriate operation mode and incorrect operation mode correspond to cases where the pressing order is correct and incorrect, but are not limited thereto. For example, when the correct timing for stopping the stop operating means (reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is set as an appropriate operation mode, for example, eight game media are awarded as a prize and the stop operating means is stopped. When the answer is incorrect, for example, 1 or 0 game media may be awarded as a prize (in the case of 0, a prize game media is not awarded).

Although not described in the above technical idea, the gaming machine of the present technical idea is an advantageous game for executing an advantageous game execution lottery in which an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means can be continuously generated over a plurality of games. Equipped with an execution lottery means. The ability to continuously generate an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means means that an instruction to prompt the stop operation means to be operated in an appropriate operation mode can be continuously generated over a plurality of games. Means that. Therefore, the above-described advantageous game execution lottery corresponds to the transition destination determination lottery described in the present embodiment if the instruction impossible state (hell state) described later, and the instruction allowable state (advantageous state or pullback state) described later. In that case, the “ART initial winning lottery”, the “addition determination lottery”, etc. described in the present embodiment correspond to the above. The internal lottery in the hell state described in the present embodiment is a lottery in which a special combination can be selected, but does not correspond to the above-mentioned “execution lottery of advantageous game”. The reason is that even if a special role is selected in the internal lottery, it is only determined that the hell state is shifted to the advantageous state, and an advantageous game (ART game that can be continuously generated over a plurality of games). ) Is not a lottery that decides the execution.

Further, the gaming machine of the present technical idea is provided with display means (image display body 500) for performing a predetermined display effect. The display means is controlled by the effect control means (corresponding to the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510) so that an effect based on the result of the advantageous game execution lottery or the result of the additional lottery is performed. For example, a confirmed effect of winning the execution lottery of the advantageous game, an expected effect indicating that there is a possibility of winning the execution lottery of the advantageous game, an addition confirmation effect indicating that the player has won the additional lottery, and an addition lottery. The display means displays the number of advantageous games that have been added by winning the game. It should be noted that, in the display means, display effects for instructing the operation mode of the stop operation means may be performed.

Execution of advantageous game (eg ART game) If the result of the lottery is a specific result, the advantageous game is executed. That is, if the advantageous game execution lottery result is a specific result when the advantageous game is not being executed, the advantageous game is executed immediately or after a plurality of games have been executed, and the advantageous game is executed when the advantageous game is being executed. If the result of the lottery (additional lottery) is a specific result, the advantageous game is added and the execution period is extended.

As a lottery state in which the execution lottery of the advantageous game is performed, a plurality of lottery states having different degrees of expectation for obtaining a specific result are prepared. In the present embodiment, as the lottery state when the advantageous game is being executed, an ART medium/low probability state, an ART medium/high probability state, a specialized zone, and a specialized zone preparing are prepared. Further, as a lottery state when the advantageous game is not being executed, a hell state, advantageous states A to E, and a withdrawal state are prepared, but the lottery state is not necessarily limited to this.

Further, as the game state related to the execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, one of an instruction permitted state in which the instruction can be permitted and an instruction incapable state in which the instruction cannot be permitted can be performed. It is configured to be controllable. The instruction allowable state corresponds to the advantageous state described in the present embodiment, and the instruction impossible state corresponds to the hell state described in the present embodiment. Even if the instruction is allowed, the instruction function flag described in the present embodiment is not necessarily set to ON, but the instruction is issued at a desired timing (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied). It is possible to set the function flag to ON. On the other hand, the instruction-disabled state is incapable of setting the instruction function flag to ON, and is defined as an advantageous state when the instruction function flag is set to ON.

In the present embodiment, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON corresponds to the above instruction allowable state, and the period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF corresponds to the above instruction incapable state. ..

When a special role (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance lip) is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction-disabled state is changed to the instruction-allowed state. Here, a plurality of states in which the degree of expectation that the advantageous game is executed are different are prepared as the instruction allowing state. When the instruction-disabled state is changed to the instruction-allowed state, the counting means executes counting of parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. The parameter referred to here is the number of games executed in the present embodiment, but is not limited to this. For example, the difference number (the number of game media provided as a prize and the number of game media provided for execution of the game) And the number of times the above-mentioned indicator is selected in the internal lottery.

When the parameter counted by the above counting means satisfies the predetermined condition, the instruction permitting state ends and the instruction impossible state is entered. In the present embodiment, when a parameter (for example, the number of executed games) counted in the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E as the instruction allowance state or the pullback state reaches a threshold value, the instruction allowance state ends and the instruction impossible state. Will be moved to. When the above-mentioned parameter reaches the threshold value during execution of the advantageous game (for example, ART game), even if the advantageous game being executed is in the middle (the advantageous game being executed is a termination condition). Even if the number of games has not been played), the instruction allowable state ends and the instruction incapable state is entered, so that the advantageous game being executed is forcibly terminated.

The above parameters are updated with the progress of the game, but the updating method may be a method of adding and updating with the progress of the game, or subtracting and updating from the specified value with the progress of the game. It may be a technique. For example, when the above-mentioned parameter is “the number of games executed”, 1 is added when one game is executed by the addition update method, and 1 game is executed by the subtraction update method. 1 is subtracted. In the present embodiment, when one game is executed, the number of executed games is incremented by 1, and when the number of executed games reaches the threshold value, the instruction allowing state ends. On the other hand, in the case of the subtraction update method, when one game is executed, 1 is subtracted from the threshold value, and when it becomes 0, the instruction allowing state ends.

In the present embodiment, the number of stay games in the instruction allowance state is higher than the number of stay games in the instruction allowance state when comparing the number of stay games in the instruction allowance state. In the instruction allowance state, when the counted parameter reaches the threshold value, the instruction is not permitted. In the hell state, which is an uninstructable state, the transition to the advantageous state has not been decided, but the expectation level for executing the ART game (the expectation level for transitioning to the advantageous state B or the advantageous state E) is at least. In the advantageous state A, the degree of expectation that the ART game is executed is higher than the expected degree. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing gambling.

By the way, when the parameter (for example, the number of executed games) counted in the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E as the instruction allowable state or the pullback state reaches the threshold value, the instruction allowable state is changed to the instruction impossible state. In the gaming machine of the present technical idea, it is possible to give the player discouragement when winning the additional lottery related to the addition of the number of execution games of the advantageous game as the above parameter approaches the above threshold value. Will be more likely. For example, when the above parameter is “the number of executed games”, if the “number of remaining games until reaching the above threshold” is smaller than “the number of advantageous games executed as an advantageous game”, the advantageous game is being executed. In addition, the advantageous game is forcibly ended midway, and even if the player wins the execution lottery of the advantageous game, it may result in disappointment to the player.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, the effect based on the result of the additional lottery performed on the display means (image display body 500) is controlled based on the parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. That is, the addition performed by the display means (image display body 500) based on that the above parameters have reached the specified value (for example, the number of games executed in the instruction allowing state has reached the specified number of games). The contents of the production based on the result of the lottery can be changed. Specifically, when the additional lottery is won before the above-mentioned parameters reach the specified value, the effect indicating that the winning is won (hereinafter referred to as “pre-specified additional effect”) is performed with a relatively high probability. , When the above parameters have reached the specified value, when the player wins the additional lottery, the effect indicating that he/she has won or the effect that indicates the number of games added (hereinafter, these effects are collectively referred to as "specified additional effect"). Will be performed with a relatively low probability, and in most cases, a normal effect (for example, the same effect as when the player is drawn in the additional lottery) is only performed. If an effect that indicates that the player has won the additional lottery or an effect that indicates the number of games that have been added is performed, it will give the player a feeling of uplifting, but an effect that indicates that the player has won the additional lottery If the effect indicating the number of games added is not performed, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uplifted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discouraged and then discouraged, which in turn makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest. It should be noted that, even if the effect indicating that the prize has been won or the effect indicating the number of games that have been added when the additional lottery is won after the above-mentioned parameters have reached the specified value, even if it is not stochastically performed at all. Good.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present technical concept, when a win is selected in the extra lottery, the probability that an effect indicating that the prize has been won or an effect indicating the number of games that have been added is performed is determined based on the specified value. Although the probability is set to two levels and the probability that the "additional effect after stipulation" is performed, it may be set to multiple levels instead. In this case, as the number of games between the above threshold and the above parameters (that is, the number of games remaining until the above threshold is reached) becomes smaller, when the execution lottery of the advantageous game is won, the effect indicating that the winning has been achieved. It is advisable to gradually reduce the probability that an effect that indicates the number of games added is performed.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present technical concept, even if the above-mentioned parameters reach the specified value, even if the player wins the additional lottery, the probability is lower than that before the above-mentioned parameters reach the specified value. Although an effect indicating that the player has won and an effect that indicates the number of games that have been added are made to be performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the above parameter reaches the specified value, even if the additional lottery is won. It is possible not to perform any of the effects indicating that the winning has been selected and the effect indicating the number of added games, or to indicate that the winning number has been selected for the additional lottery although the number of additional games is not indicated. Instead of the game actually added by the addition lottery, an effect indicating a smaller number of false addition games may be performed. When performing an effect that shows a smaller number of false additional games than the actual games added by the additional lottery, perform an effect that shows a smaller number of games than the difference between the above threshold and the above parameters. Is preferred.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, after the above parameters have reached the specified values, the effect indicating that the additional lottery has been won or the effect indicating the number of added games is not performed or is relatively performed. Although it is made to be played only with a low probability, in addition to these, from the appearance that the advantageous game is continued even if the advantageous game is internally continued due to the addition of the advantageous game. So that it becomes difficult to grasp, when the number of advantageous games already specified to the player has been exhausted, the advantageous game end production is performed, and the production indicating that the advantageous game is being executed is finished. Preferably. As described above, after the effect indicating that the advantageous game is being executed is finished despite the advantage game being continued, the advantage game is executed instead of the effect indicating that the advantage game is being executed. An effect that is not understood to be in the middle (for example, the same effect as the normal time (when the advantageous game is not executed)) is performed. As a result, it is less likely that the player will realize that the advantageous game has continued, and even if the advantageous game was continued by winning the additional lottery, the advantageous game was forcibly terminated midway. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged due to the loss, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. However, even if the player is not made aware of the fact that the advantageous game is continued, the instruction control unit executes the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation unit (in this case, the player is given an advantage game). If not, it feels the same as when the operation mode of the stop operation means is instructed).

[11. Sign production]
In this chapter, an example of a precursor effect of the slot machine 1 will be described. The slot machine 1 of this chapter performs an AT (assist time) entry lottery, which is an example of an advantageous game state during execution of a normal game, and when an AT is won in the lottery, the number of games selected in the lottery (for example, 0 game to 32 games). The AT game (first special gaming state) starts after the precursor game (selected from the games).

An AT is an advantageous game in which a payout by a winning small win can be easily received as compared with a normal game by executing an effect indicating the type of a winning small win using the image display body 500 and the speaker 512. It is an example of a state.

As will be described later in detail, in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, in each game, a small win of medium 1st bell is won with a high probability (for example, 1/4.37 as described later). In this chapter, the middle 1st bell means that when the middle reel 301b is first stopped after the symbol variable display device 300 is started, the bell is displayed on one predetermined line (for example, to the right) in the symbol variable display device 300. When the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first, it is possible to receive a uniform payout of a high number of medals (for example, 10 coins), and a bell appears on one line in the symbol variation display device 300. It is a small role that does not collect and cannot receive medals.

For example, when the middle 1st bell is won during the AT game, the starting lever has a higher probability (for example, 1/1 during the AT game and 0/1 during the normal game excluding the precursor game) compared to the normal game. Immediately after the pressing operation of 210, it is notified that the middle 1st bell has been won (for example, "1" is displayed at a position corresponding to immediately above the middle reel 301b of the image display body 500, or "middle" is output from the speaker 512. "!" is output.) As a result, during the AT game, it becomes easier to receive the payout of 10 coins with the middle 1st bell than during the normal game.

[11-1. Various tables for precursor production]
Hereinafter, first, the winning combination winning probability and the state transition winning probability in the slot machine 1 of this chapter will be described. FIG. 665 is an example of the small winning combination lottery table. The small win lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the small win lottery table, the lottery value of each small win and the small win when each small win is won in each state (that is, when the AT flag is OFF (during the normal game) and when the AT flag is ON (during the AT game)). The payout number of medals when the winning combination is aligned with a predetermined line (a line generally called an effective line) in the symbol variable display device 300 is defined.

The winning probability of each small win is the quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of all small wins in the state. For example, the probability of winning a weak watermelon when the AT flag is OFF is 300/65536. In this chapter, the payout amount and the lottery value are common when the AT flag is OFF and the AT flag is ON. As described above, since the value in the probability column (probability of winning) can be calculated from the lottery value of each small win, the small win lottery table may not include the probability column.

In the example of FIG. 665, the lottery values for the medium 1st bell, the special bell, the replay, and the outfall are higher than the lottery values for other small wins. These small wins with a low winning rate that do not correspond to any of the 1st bell, special bell, replay, and out of play are also called rare wins.

FIG. 666 is an example of an AT initial winning lottery table. The AT initial hit lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the AT first hit lottery table, the lottery value for the AT first hit in the normal game (however, excluding the AT precursor game (hereinafter, also referred to as the precursor game)) is defined for each small win won in the game. There is. The AT first hit lottery performed during the normal game is also referred to as A1 lottery, and the AT first hit lottery performed during the rescue state game described later is also referred to as D1 lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value in the AT first win lottery table is 65536. For example, when a weak watermelon is won during the normal game, the AT is won with a probability of 3000/65536, and the game shifts to the precursor game. In addition, in this chapter, the lottery value is common in the A1 lottery and the D1 lottery. Further, in the example of FIG. 665, the AT lottery table includes a probability column, but the value of each probability column can be calculated as a quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the denominator 65536. The table may not include a probability column.

FIG. 667 is an example of a precursor game number lottery table. (A) is a precursor game number lottery table in the case of winning the AT first win during the base game, and (b) is a precursor game number lottery table in the case of winning the AT first win during the rescue state game. Is. The precursor game number lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. The precursor game number lottery when the player wins the AT in the normal game is also called an A2 lottery. The precursor game number lottery when the player wins the AT in the rescue state game is also referred to as D2 lottery, and the D2 lottery includes two types of lottery (D2-1 lottery and D2-2 lottery). Details of the D2-1 lottery and the D2-2 lottery will be described later.

The winning probability of the precursor game number is a quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of the precursor game number in the state. For example, the winning probability of the number of precursor games of 5 games in the normal game (A2 lottery) is 4096/65536. As described above, since the value in the probability column (probability of winning) can be calculated from the lottery value of each aura game, the aura game number lottery table may not include the probability column.

In the example of FIG. 667(a), when the AT is won during the normal game, the precursor of 5 games, 8 games, 16 games, or 32 games is selected, and the winning rate is 5 games<8 games<16 games. <32 games increase in order. Further, in the example of FIG. 667(b), when the AT is won during the rescue state game, the precursor of 0 game, 1 game, 2 games, 3 games, or 4 games is selected, and the winning percentage is D2- In the case of one lottery, the probability increases in the order of 4 games <3 games <2 games <1 game <0 games, and the signs of 4 games are selected with an extremely high probability, and the signs of other games are selected. It is extremely low, and in the D2-2 lottery, the number of precursor games 0 is most easily selected, and the number of precursor games 4 is most difficult to be selected.

FIG. 668 is an example of an AT stock lottery table. Although the details will be described later, the omen game is basically the final four games of the omen game, which is the latter half game (third special gaming state), and the omen game, which is the omen game before the start of the latter half game (first game). 2 special game state), and. (A) is an AT stock lottery table that is referred to during the first half of the omen, and (b) is an AT stock lottery table that is referred to during the second half of the omen. The AT stock lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example.

If the AT stock lottery is won during the precursor game, the AT game is stocked. The stocked AT game is released, for example, after the completion of the AT game that has entered after the precursor game, for example, after the precursor game, or without the precursor game.

In the AT stock lottery table, the lottery value of AT stock is defined for each small winning combination in the game. The AT stock lottery performed during the first half game is also called B1 lottery, and the AT stock lottery performed during the second half game is also called C1 lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value in the AT stock lottery table is 65536. For example, when a weak watermelon is won during the first half of the game, the AT stock is won with a probability of 1500/65536. In addition, in this chapter, the lottery value of the AT stock in each small win is different in the B1 lottery and the C1 lottery. Further, in the example of FIG. 668, the AT stock lottery table includes a probability column, but the value of each probability column can be calculated as a quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the denominator 65536, and thus the AT stock lottery The table may not include a probability column.

FIG. 669 is an example of a pseudo bonus lottery table. The pseudo bonus lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409. The pseudo bonus is an example of an advantageous game state. For example, the pseudo bonus can be won during the normal game including the precursor game and the AT game.

When the pseudo bonus is won, the pseudo bonus precursor game within a predetermined number of games is executed. After the end of the pseudo bonus sign game, when a specific small winning combination (for example, replay) is established, the reels are stopped in a predetermined pressing order to start the pseudo bonus from the next game. The predetermined pressing order is notified by, for example, the image display body 500 or the speaker 512.

In the predetermined pressing order, the player aims at the bonus symbol (for example, "7" or "BAR") and presses the bonus symbol so that the bonus symbol has a predetermined shape (for example, "7/7/7"). , “BAR, BAR, BAR”, “7,7, BAR”, etc.), but even if the predetermined shape is not obtained, the pseudo bonus is entered.

In addition, during the pseudo bonus, for example, the lottery value of the small winning combination probability table similar to that when the AT flag is ON is referred to. Further, during the pseudo bonus, as in the case of AT, an effect indicating the type of the winning small winning combination is executed using the image display body 500 and the speaker 512, and payout by the winning small winning combination is made compared with the normal game. Can be easily received.

The pseudo bonus ends with a predetermined end condition. The fact that a predetermined number of games have been executed since the start of the pseudo bonus, that a predetermined number or more of medals have been paid out since the start of the pseudo bonus, that a predetermined number of small wins have been established a predetermined number of times since the start of the pseudo bonus, etc. Is an example of the ending condition of.

In this way, the points where the bonus symbols are aligned in a predetermined shape (for example, "7/7/7", "BAR/BAR/BAR", "7/7/BAR", etc.) and the number of medals increases are started. Is generally called a pseudo bonus because it is very similar to a real bonus, but details of the pseudo bonus in this chapter will be described later.

FIG. 670 is an example of an AT initial game number lottery table. The AT initial game lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409. The AT initial game number lottery table defines the number of AT games in the case of winning the AT first time or winning AT stock for each state at the time of the lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value in the AT initial game number lottery table is 128. For example, in the case of winning the AT first win during the normal game, the probability that the initial number of AT games is 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, and 300 games is 32/128 in all cases. The expected AT initial game numbers in the A1 lottery, B1 lottery, C1 lottery, and D1 lottery are 162.5 games, 112.5 games, 96.875 games, and 193.75 games, respectively. In other words, the expected number of AT initial games is large in the order of rescue state game> normal game (excluding precursor games)> precursor first half game> precursor second game.

FIG. 671 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop type of various bells. (A) is an example of a stop type of a common bell. When the common bell is won, the bells are stopped in the middle stages of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c (in the middle stage) regardless of the reel stop order, and 10 medals are paid out.

(B1) is an example of a stop type in which the middle reel 301b is first stopped when the middle 1st bell is won. In this case, the bells stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel 301c (all of which rises to the right), and 10 medals are paid out. (B2) is an example of a stop type in which the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is first stopped when the middle 1st bell is won. In this case, the bell does not stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bell does not align in a horizontal row or diagonally and stops in a lost shape, so that medals are not paid out.

(C1) is an example of a stop type in which the middle reel 301b is first stopped when the special bell is won when the AT flag is off (that is, when the AT is not in progress). In this case, the bells stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c (the lower stage is aligned), and two medals are paid out. (C2) is an example of a stop type in which the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is first stopped when the special bell is won when the AT flag is off (that is, when the AT is not in progress). In this case, although the bell stops at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the bell does not align in a horizontal row or diagonally and stops in a lost shape, and one medal is paid out.

(C3) is an example of a stop type in which the middle reel 301b is first stopped when the special bell is won when the AT flag is on (that is, during AT). In this case, the bells stop at the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the right reel 301c (same downward right alignment), and 10 medals are paid out. (C4) is an example of a stop type in which the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is first stopped when the special bell is won when the AT flag is on (that is, during AT). In this case, the bell does not stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bell does not align in a horizontal row or diagonally and stops in a lost shape, so that medals are not paid out. That is, the special bell is configured so that the control for stopping the reels is different (the control for changing the symbols to be displayed is executed) depending on whether or not the AT is in progress (whether or not the AT flag is ON).

[11-2. Specific example of precursor production]
672 and 673 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a precursor effect. (A) is a state in which the lever is turned on in the first half of the omen. (A) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won. If you win the special bell or the middle 1st bell during the first half of the game, the reel pressing order for paying out 10 medals (the maximum number of payouts in the middle 1st bell winning game) (press to stop the middle reel 301b first) The effect indicating "order" is executed at a predetermined ratio, and the player can obtain 10 medals by following the instruction of the effect.

It should be noted that the predetermined ratio may be the same as the ratio at which the press order effect is executed in the AT game, but is lower than the ratio at which the press order effect is executed in the AT game, and in the normal games other than the precursor game. It may be higher than the rate at which the push-order effect is executed. For example, when the execution ratio of the push-order effect when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won in the AT game and the normal game is 1/1 and 0/1, respectively, in the case where the middle 1st bell is won in the first half of the omen The execution ratio of the push-order effect is 1/2.

Specifically, for example, on the image display body 500, enemy characters are displayed at positions directly above the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c. Further, the enemy character in the center is displayed as if it appears to be in front of the other enemy characters, and the number "1" is displayed below the enemy character in the center. Further, the special display LED 612b displays "8" indicating that the pressing order for the first reel of the middle reel 301b is correct (see FIG. 651).

In addition, in the push order instruction effect, in addition to the display effect using the image display body 500 and the like, a sound such as “middle!!” is output from the speaker 512, and the middle reel 301b is the left reel 301a and the left reel 301a. It may be turned on more strongly than the right reel 301c to indicate that the middle reel 301b is stopped first.

In (B), the player first stops the middle reel 301b and then stops all reels in accordance with the instruction in (A). In the pattern variation display device 300, the bells are aligned in the upward right direction, and 10 medals are paid out. The image display body 500 displays an image in which three enemy characters have been knocked out and knocked down, and an image described as “10 GET!” indicating that 10 payouts have been made. In addition, the special display LED displays “10” indicating that 10 pieces have been paid out.

(C) is the state when the lever is on in the second half of the omen. (C) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won. When the middle 1st bell is won during the second half of the omen, an instruction effect different from that of the first half of the omen is executed. In other words, an effect indicating the pressing order of the reels that cannot obtain 10 medals (here, the pressing order to stop the left reel 301a first) is executed, and the player follows the instruction of the effect to obtain one coin. You can get a medal.

Specifically, for example, on the image display body 500, enemy characters are displayed at positions directly above the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c. In addition, the left enemy character is displayed in a state of appearing in front of other enemy characters, and the number "1" is displayed below the left enemy character.

In addition, a dialogue saying "it's left!" indicating that the left reel 301a should be stopped as the first stop is displayed. Further, the special display LED 612b may display “7” indicating that the pressing order for the first reel 301a to be the first stop is correct (see FIG. 651), or the special display LED 612b may not be lit.

Although the background image on the image display 500 is not drawn in FIG. 672, for example, there may be a period in which the background image is displayed, and further, (A) (that is, the first half game) and (C) (that is, the first half game). The background images in the latter half game may differ. The period in which the background image is displayed is longer in (A) than in (C), for example. In (C), since the number of games remaining until the start of AT is small, the main effect is focused on rather than the background image.

In (D), the player first stops the left reel 301a and then stops all reels according to the instruction in (C). In the pattern variation display device 300, the bell stops at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bell stops in a horizontal line or diagonally without aligning, and one medal is paid out. Further, on the image display body 500, an image in which three enemy characters are knocked out and knocked down and an image described as “1 GET!” indicating that one payout has been made are displayed. .. Further, the special display LED displays “1” indicating that one payout has been made. It should be noted that (B) and (D) have the same aspect of the image displayed on the image display body 500, but for example, (B) has a larger number of medals to be paid out, and therefore more effects can be obtained. Images in different modes may be displayed, such as an image in a mode in which is displayed.

(E) is a state at the time of lever-on in the game in which the rare small winning combination is won in the latter half of the omen. Even when a rare small winning combination is won in the first half of the omen, effects similar to (E) and (F) described later are performed. In (E), it is assumed that the strong cherry has been won. When the rare small winning combination is won during the second half of the omen, for example, an image (“CHANGE!”) indicating an opportunity and an image of the enemy character are displayed on the image display body 500.

It is desirable that the image size of the enemy character is larger than the image size of the character displayed when the lever is turned on in the game in which the middle 1st bell is won. Further, for example, the rare small winning combination may be shown by the color of the enemy character's clothes, the aura worn by the enemy character, or the enemy character itself (for example, if the winning character is cherry, red, watermelon). If so, green etc.). In (E), since the player has won the strong cherry, for example, an enemy character dressed in red may be displayed.

In FIG. 673(F), in (E), the player has won the cherry on the symbol variation device 300. Two medals have been paid out. When the strong cherry is won, it is possible to arrange the cherries on the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel. The image display body 500 displays an image in which the enemy character appearing in (E) has been knocked out and knocked down. Further, the special display LED displays "2" indicating that two payouts have been made.

(G) is the state when the lever is on in the final game in the second half of the omen (that is, the game immediately before the start of AT). In the final game in the latter half of the omen, rock-paper-scissors will be produced. In (G), an image indicating that rock-paper-scissors starts is displayed on the image display body 500. The hand displayed on the left side of the image display body 500 is the hand of the ally character, and the hand displayed on the right side is the hand of the enemy character. Further, in (G), as in (C), the player wins the middle 1st bell, and an effect indicating a pushing order for first stopping the left reel 301a is executed.

The effect indicating that the player has won the middle 1st bell and indicates the pushing order for stopping the left reel 301a first may be displayed until the end of the game, but since it is the final game of the precursor game, Push order for first stopping the left reel 301a until the result of the final game is displayed (for example, after the start lever 210 is pressed for a predetermined time or when the second stop button is pressed) You may delete the effect which shows. This is to focus the player's consciousness on rock-paper-scissor production.

(H) is a state after the player first stopped the left reel 301a and then stopped all reels in the final game in the latter half of the omen (that is, the game immediately before the start of AT) in accordance with the instruction in (G). Is. The image display body 500 displays an image in which the teammate character wins the enemy's game by playing rock-paper-scissors, an image informing the entry into the AT game, and an image showing that one payout has been made.

(I) is a state when the lever of the AT start game is turned on. An image (AT start! 100G!) showing that an AT game that continues at least 100 games has started is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, (I) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won. When the middle 1st bell is won during the AT game, an effect indicating the pushing order of the reels for paying out 10 medals is executed, and the player can obtain 10 medals by following the instruction of the effect. ..

As described above, in the first half of the omen state, when the middle 1st bell or the special bell is won, the middle push instruction (that is, the instruction to stop the middle reel 301b as the first stop) appears, so that the player acquires more medals. It is possible and interest is improved. Further, in the second half of the omen, a left push instruction (that is, an instruction to stop the left reel 301a as the first stop) appears when the middle 1st bell or the special bell is elected, so that an extreme increase in the number of medals acquired by the player is suppressed. It is possible to suppress the loss of holes. In other words, in the precursory state of this chapter, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and reduce the burden on the hole without depending on the setting of the AT transfer probability of the slot machine 1.

[11-3. Various flows for precursor production]
FIG. 674 is a flowchart showing an example of the flag process of step S107 in FIG. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery for a winning combination according to the random number extracted in step S106 of FIG. 624 and the lottery value shown in the small winning combination probability table of FIG. 665 (S6721). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not AT_FLG is off (S6722). When AT_FLG is on, it indicates that the current state is the AT state, and when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the AT state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT_FLG is on (S6722: NO), it executes the processing when the AT_FLG is on (S6723), and ends the flag processing. Details of step S6723 will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_FLG is off (S6722: YES), it determines whether AT_ZN_FLG is off (S6724).

When the AT_ZN_FLG is on, it indicates that the current state is the precursory state of the AT, and when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the precursory state of the AT. AT_ZN_FLG is a general term for AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2 described later. AT_ZN_FLG being on indicates that it is on when at least one of AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, and that AT_ZN_FLG is off means that both AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2 are off.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6724: NO), it executes the processing when AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6725), and ends the flag processing. Details of step S6725 will be described later. When determining that AT_ZN_FLG is off (S6724: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_ST_FLG is off (S6726). When AT_ST_FLG is ON, it indicates that the AT is in stock (that is, when the AT stock lottery is won but the stocked AT is unreleased). When it is OFF, AT is stocked. Indicates that there is no state.

When determining that AT_ST_FLG is ON (S6726: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes processing when AT_ST_FLG is ON (S6727), and ends the flag processing. Details of step S6727 will be described later. When determining that AT_ST_FLG is off (S6726: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether KYUSAI_FLG is off (S6728). When KYUSAI_FLAG is on, it indicates that it is in the relief state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not in the relief state.

When determining that KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6728: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6729), and ends the flag process. Details of step S6729 will be described later. When determining that KYUSAI_FLG is off (S6728: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs AT initial winning lottery (A1 lottery) with reference to the AT initial winning lottery table (S67210).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT has been won in the AT initial winning lottery in step S67210 (S67211). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has not been won (S67211: NO), the flag processing ends. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the player has won the AT (S67211: YES), it refers to the A1 lottery column of the AT initial game number lottery table (FIG. 670) and performs the AT initial game number lottery (S67212). ..

Then, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the precursor game number lottery table and performs the precursor game number lottery (A2 lottery, FIG. 667) (S67213). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of predictive games won is more than 4 (5 or more) (S67214).

When determining that the number of precursor games is four or less (S67214: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_ZN_FLG2 (S67215) and ends the flag processing. When AT_ZN_FLG2 is ON, it indicates that the current state is the latter half of the AT state, and when OFF, it indicates that the current state is not the latter half of the AT state.

When determining that the number of precursor games is five or more (S67214: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_ZN_FLG1 (S67216) and ends the flag processing. When the AT_ZN_FLG1 is on, it indicates that the current state is the precursory half of the AT, and when it is off, the current state is not the precursory half of the AT.

FIG. 675 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during AT sign, that is, processing when AT_ZN_FLG is ON (S6725). First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_ZN_FLG1 is on (S6731).

When determining that AT_ZN_FLG1 is on (S6731: YES), CPU 1110 of main board 409 notifies sub-board 510 that AT_ZN_FLG1 is on, and CPU 1118 of sub-board 510 sets effect state 1 ( S6732). The effect state 1 is an effect state in which an operation instruction effect for first stopping the middle reel 301b is executed when the winning combination is “middle 1st bell” or “special bell”. Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the AT stock lottery table for B1 lottery, executes AT stock lottery (B1 lottery) (S6733), and transitions to step S6738 described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG1 is off (S6731: NO), it notifies the sub board 510 that AT_ZN_FLG1 is off (AT_ZN_FLG2 is on), and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510. Sets effect state 2 (S6734). The effect state 2 is an effect state in which the operation instruction effect for first stopping the left reel 301a is executed when the winning combination is "medium 1st bell" or "special bell".

Only one of the effect state 1 and the effect state 2 can be set. That is, when the process of step S6731 or step S6734 is executed in a state where one of the effect states has already been set, for example, after the set effect state has been reset, the process of step S6731 or step S6734 is executed. Alternatively, a new effect state may be overwritten without resetting the already-set effect state.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether C1_KINSHI_FLG is off (S6735). When C1_KINSH_FLG is on, it indicates that the C1 lottery is prohibited, and when it is off, it indicates that the C1 lottery is not prohibited.

When it is determined that C1_KINSHI_FLG is off (S6735: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes the AT stock lottery (C1 lottery) by referring to the AT stock lottery table for C1 lottery, and transitions to step S6738. To do. In the AT stock lottery table described above, the winning percentage of AT stock is set lower in the C1 lottery (that is, the lottery in the latter half of the sign and when C1_KINSHI_FLG is off) than in the B1 lottery (that is, the lottery in the first half of the first sign). If the AT stock win rate is set low, it is possible to reduce the burden on the hall, and in the latter half of the omen, a rock-paper-scissor production will be executed to inform the user whether AT rush or not, so the AT stock win rate is low. This is because the interest of the player is less likely to deteriorate.

When it is determined that C1_KINSHI_FLG is ON (S6735: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes the pseudo bonus lottery (C2 lottery) with reference to the pseudo bonus lottery table, and transitions to step S6738.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the player has won the lottery (that is, one of the B1 lottery, the C1 lottery, and the C2 lottery) in the step immediately before step S6738 (S6738). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that it has not won the lottery in the step immediately before step S6738 (S6738: NO), the CPU 1110 transitions to step S67311 described below.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the lottery in the step immediately before step S6738 has not been won (S6738: YES), it refers to the AT initial game number lottery table and draws the initial game number lottery of the stocked AT. Perform (S6739). When the number of games of the pseudo bonus is fixed or when the ending condition of the pseudo bonus is that a predetermined number of predetermined small winning combinations are established, the process of step S6739 may not be executed. When the number of pseudo bonus games is determined by lottery, in step S6739, the number of pseudo bonus games is determined using, for example, a pseudo bonus game number lottery table (not shown).

When the pseudo bonus is won, for example, the pseudo bonus is immediately activated. Specifically, the next game after the game that wins the pseudo bonus (more specifically, the pseudo bonus starts after a predetermined time (period) has elapsed since the result of the game that won the pseudo bonus and the game where the pseudo bonus was won is shown. (The state transits to the pseudo bonus state.) The predetermined time (period) is, for example, the time (period) from the stop of all reels to the end of payout of medals). That is, there is no precursor game of pseudo bonus. In addition, since there is no precursor game of the pseudo bonus, the effect indicating whether or not the pseudo bonus is won (the effect equivalent to the rock-paper-scissors effect before the start of AT) may not be executed. Further, the digestion game in the pseudo bonus may be subtracted from the precursor game. Thereby, for example, the pseudo bonus can be started while digesting the second half of the omen, and when the second half of the omen is finished during the pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is executed from the second half of the omen game to the AT game. be able to.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_ST_FLG (S67310). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining precursor games (S67311). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining games of the precursor game is four (S67312). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is four (S67312: YES), it turns off AT_ZN_FLG1 and turns on AT_ZN_FLG2 (S67313).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the effect state 1 is set (whether or not AT_ZN_FLG1 is on) (S67314). When CPU 1110 of main board 409 determines that effect state 1 is not set (whether AT_ZN_FLG1 is off) (S67314: NO), processing when AT_ZN_FLG is on ends.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the effect state 1 is set (AT_ZN_FLG1 is on) (S67314: YES), it performs the precursory puncture lottery (S67315). The precursory puncture lottery is a lottery for erasing the already-winned ATs (first hit AT and stock AT) and ending the precursory state. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the precursor punk lottery has been won (S67316). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the precursory punk lottery has not been won (S67316: NO), the processing when AT_ZN_FLG is ON is ended.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that it has won the precursor punk lottery (S67316: YES), it turns off all the flags (S67317), turns on KYUSAI_FLG (S67318), and ends the processing when AT_ZN_FLG is on. To do. In other words, although the AT disappears as a result of winning the precursor punk lottery, it is possible to enter the rescue state.

In other words, by having a game property that won the AT lottery and does not necessarily move to the first half of the omen even if it moves to the first half of the omen, I hope that the player does not just enjoy the omen production and win the punk lottery. You can proceed with the game. Therefore, unlike the omen of the conventional slot machine that merely provides a sense of security, the slot machine 1 of this chapter can provide a thrill to the player even during the omen.

When determining that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is not 4 (S67312: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 (S67319). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is not 0 (S67319: NO), the CPU 1110 transitions to step S67314 described above. When it is determined that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 (S67320: YES), AT_ZN_FLG is turned off (S67321), and the processing when AT_ZN_FLG is on is ended.

FIG. 676 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in a state where ATs are stocked, that is, processing when AT_ST_FLG is ON (S6727). First, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 sets effect state 1 (S6741). That is, in the precursor of the stocked AT, the middle push instruction appears when the middle 1st bell and the special bell are elected, that is, the same state as the first half of the precursor. In addition, in step S6741, the production state 2 (that is, the same state as the second half of the omen) may be set instead of the production state 1.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_STZN_FLG is off (S6742). When the AT_STZN_FLG is on, it indicates that it is a precursory state of the stocked AT, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not a precursory state of the stocked AT.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_STZN_FLG is ON (S6742: NO), the CPU 1110 transitions to step S6745 described below. When determining that AT_STZN_FLG is off (S6742: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 sets 5 games as the number of precursor games of AT stock precursor (S6743).

Note that the number of precursor games of the AT stock precursor does not have to be five, but is preferably shorter than the average number of precursor games of the AT per initial hit (the average number of precursor games in the A2 lottery). This is because if a large number of games are required to be released even though ATs are stocked, the player's interest will be reduced. Further, when AT_FLG is off and AT_ST_FLG is on, the precursor game is always set via step S6743, and therefore AT stock is not released without the precursor after the end of AT. .. In other words, the AT villa will always go through the AT stock sign.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_STZN_FLG (S6744). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining precursor games of AT stock (S6745). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining predictive games of AT stock is 0 (S6746). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games in AT stock is not 0 (S6746: NO), the processing when AT_ST_FLG is ON is ended.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining predictive games of AT stock is 0 (S6746: YES), it turns off AT_STZN_FLG (S6747), turns off AT_ST_FLG (S6748), and when AT_ST_FLG is on. The process ends.

As described above, the AT stock sign is in the same state as the first half of the sign when AT hits first, and the effect state 2 is not set in the AT stock sign. That is, in the AT stock precursor, the AT stock is released without passing through the same state as the latter half of the AT initial hit.

FIG. 677 is a flowchart showing an example of the relief state process, that is, the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6729). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 notifies the sub-board 510 that KYUSAI_FLG is on, and the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 executes the operation instruction effect of first stopping the left reel 301a in any winning combination. Yes (S6751).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the AT first hit lottery table and executes the AT first hit lottery (D1 lottery) (S6752). The initial winning probability in the D1 lottery is the same as the initial winning probability in the A1 lottery (FIG. 666). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT initial winning lottery (D1 lottery) is won (S6753). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT initial win lottery (D1 lottery) has not been won (S6753: NO), it turns off KYUSAI_FLG (S6754) and ends the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT initial winning lottery (D1 lottery) has been won (S6753: YES), it refers to the AT initial game number lottery table and executes the AT initial game number lottery (S6755). ).

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the precursor game number lottery table for the D2 lottery and executes the precursor game number lottery. However, in the game before the game that has won the precursory punk lottery, when the player plays the game in accordance with the instruction to the operation instruction (that is, the reel is stopped in accordance with the notified push order of the reel), D2- If one lottery is conducted and the instructions are not followed, the D2-2 lottery shall be conducted.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of predictive games won is more than 4 (5 or more) (S6757). When determining that the number of precursor games is four or less (S6757: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_ZN_FLG2 (S6758) and ends the processing when KYUSAI_FLG is on. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is five or more games (S6757: YES), it turns on AT_ZN_FLG1 (S6759) and ends the processing when KYUSAI_FLG is on.

FIG. 678 is a flowchart showing an example of processing after reels are completely stopped. The process of FIG. 678 is performed immediately after, for example, YES in step S209 of FIG. 652. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not AT_ZN_FLG2 is ON (S6761). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG2 is off (S6761: NO), the CPU 1110 transitions to step S6765 described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG2 is ON (S6761: YES), whether or not left-push navigation (that is, an operation instruction effect in which the left reel 301a is first stopped) is generated in the game. Is determined (S6742). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the left navigation is not generated (S6742: NO), the CPU 1110 transitions to step S6765 described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the left push navigation is generated (S6742: YES), the CPU 1110 determines whether or not the game is middle-pressed (that is, whether the middle reel 301b is in the first stop) (S6763). ). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the middle press has not been made (that is, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c was in the first stop) (S6763: NO), the process proceeds to step s6765 described below.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the middle press has been performed (S6763: YES), it turns on C1_KINSHI_FLG (S6764). That is, in the latter half of the omen (in the state where the effect state 2 is set), when the middle push is performed despite the left-hand navigation, the C1_KINSHI_FLG is set and the C1 lottery is not performed. (See step S6735). As a result, when the middle 1st bell or the special bell is won in the latter half of the omen, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the middle reel 301b first and winning 10 medals.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the game is a game immediately before the AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the game is not the game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765: NO), the process proceeds to step S6767 described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the game is a game immediately before the AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765: YES), the sub-board 510 is stopped by pressing the left push navigation command, that is, the left reel 301a as the first stop. A command for executing an effect indicating that it should be performed is notified (S6766).

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 (S6767). When determining that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is not 0 (S6767: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 ends the processing after the reels are completely stopped, which is shown in this flowchart.

When determining that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 (S6767: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes a freeze effect for 10 seconds (S6768). During the freeze effect, the reel is not started even if the start lever 210 is pressed. Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_FLG (S6769), and ends the processing after the reels are completely stopped, which is shown in this flowchart.

[11-4-1. Specific example 2 of precursor production]
FIG. 679 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the omen effect. FIG. 679(A) shows a state in which the AT game started in FIG. 673(I) has ended. As described above, it is assumed that the player has won the AT stock according to the left-hand navigation in the game in the latter half of the omen shown in FIGS. 672(E) to 673(F). In (A), a display indicating the result in the AT game (for example, the total number of continuous games of AT and the number of acquired medals) is displayed on the image display body 500.

(B) is a state where the precursor game of AT stock has started. Since he owns AT stock, he immediately enters the precursor game of AT stock after AT ends. As described above, the precursory game of AT stock is in the same effect state as the first half of precursory at the time of AT first hit. (B) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won, and a middle press instruction appears when the lever is turned on.

(C) is the final game of the AT stock precursor game. It is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won, and the middle push instruction appears when the lever is turned on. Furthermore, since it is the final game of the precursor game, the rock-paper-scissor effect has been executed and the teammate character has won. (D) is a stocked AT start game.

The AT released in FIG. 679 is obtained in the latter half of the aura as described above. Also, if the player does not follow the left-hand navigation in the second half of the omen, C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on, so stocking AT in the latter half of the omen means that the player follows the left-hand navigation when the left-hand navigation appears. That is, the reels are stopped in the pushing order in which the number of medals to be obtained decreases in the middle 1st bell or the special bell.

In this way, in the sign of the AT stocked according to the operation instruction that is unfavorable to the player, by not passing through the latter half of the sign that the unfavorable operation instruction appears, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

As described above, the effect state 2 may be set instead of the effect state 1 in step S6741. As a result, the precursor of the stocked AT becomes similar to the latter half of the precursor, so that the number of medals acquired by the player is reduced and the burden on the hole can be suppressed.

Further, for example, in step S6741, a lottery may be performed, and the effect state 1 or the effect state 2 may be selected and set according to the result of the lottery, or the player's operation (for example, the effect button 204 before the lever is turned on. The production state 1 or the production state 2 may be selected by the operation (pressing), or the selection rate of the production state 1 and the production state 2 in the lottery may be changed by the operation of the player.

In addition, when the selection rate of the effect state can be changed by the operation of the player, the selection rate of the effect state may be changeable according to the operation mode. Specifically, for example, when the number of times the effect button 204 is pressed before the lever is turned on is less than 100 times, the effect state 1 is set, and the number of times the effect button 204 is pressed before the lever is turned on is 100 times or more. If there is, the effect state 2 is set. As a result, when the number of times the effect button 204 is pressed is small (less than 100 times), the time required for the pressing operation is short and the AT can be rushed into quickly. However, since the effect state 2 is set, the left push navigation is set. Appears, and the number of medals consumed until AT entry increases. On the other hand, when the effect button 204 is pressed many times (100 times or more), the pressing operation takes a lot of time and it takes time to rush into the AT, but since the effect state 1 is set, the middle-push navigation is performed. It is possible to suppress the number of medals to be consumed until the AT appears and appears. In this way, different game characteristics can be provided according to the operation of the player.

Further, also in the release of AT stock, it is possible to go through both the first half and the second half of the precursor as in the case of the initial hit of the AT.

It should be noted that, in the game of FIGS. 672(E) to 673(F), that is, in the state where the player has followed the left-hand navigation in the sign second half game of the first hit AT, the effect of notifying the AT stock winning when the AT stock is won is It is not executed in the precursor game until the first hit AT starts. Also, there is no notification other than the final game of the precursor game controlled after the initial hit AT is finished, and it is reported that AT is executed in the final game of the precursor game (notify that the stock has been stocked. It is desirable that it is not a performance that does. By not notifying that AT stock has been won by the release of the first hit AT, the player does not know whether the AT stock is present, so that the player can enjoy the game after the completion of the first hit AT with a sense of tension.

Further, as described above, in the AT initial game number acquisition lottery, the C1 lottery has a smaller average number of games and a lower degree of advantage than the A1 lottery. That is, the average number of games is large and the degree of advantage is high in the AT first hit that rushes after the end of the second half of the sign, compared to the AT stock that was won when the left-hand navigation was followed in the latter half of the sign. The second half of the AT sign is in a state of entering the AT when the remaining precursor games are exhausted, and if the AT stock acquired in the latter half of the AT sign is more advantageous than the AT first hit, the player will win a large number of medals in a short period of time. This is because it will be acquired and the burden on the hole will increase.

[11-4-2. Specific example 3 of aura production]
FIG. 680 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the indication effect. (A) is a state when the lever is on in the game in the latter half of the omen. In the game of (A), the special bell has been won, and the left push navigation indicating that the left reel 301a should be stopped as the first stop appears as in FIG. 672(C). In addition, as described in the AT initial win table of FIG. 667 and the AT stock lottery table of FIG. 668, the AT initial win and AT stock win rate when the special bell is established are extremely low (for example, 0). Is desirable.

In (B), the middle reel 301b is first stopped in the game, and then all reels are stopped. Since the middle reel 301b is stopped first when the special bell is won when AT_FLG is off, the bells of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are stopped at the lower stage, and two medals are paid out. That is, the number of medals to be paid out is larger than in the case where the left reel 301a is first stopped according to the left push navigation (in this case, one medal is paid out). In addition, a rare character with a fan appears on the image display body 500, and a rare effect for supporting appears.

In (B), although the special bell is established in the second half of the omen and the left-hand navigation is generated, the middle reel 301b is stopped first, so that step S6764 is executed and C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on. That is, there is a disadvantageous situation for the player that the AT stock lottery is not performed.

However, if the AT stock lottery is prohibited, it will be extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, when the C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on, the AT stock lottery is not performed, but the pseudo bonus lottery is advantageous for the player in step S6737. Will be done. It is desirable that the winning rate of the pseudo bonus is extremely lower than the winning rate of the AT stock lottery (AT stock lottery table of FIG. 668, pseudo bonus lottery table of FIG. 669). This is to avoid creating a situation that is advantageous to the player even though the left navigation is ignored.

It should be noted that the rare effect described above can appear only when the player presses the middle button (that is, the same operation as in the case of following the navigation that appears in the first half of the omen), even though the left-handed navigation appears in the latter half of the omen. It is not a production that appears due to the result of a lottery such as a winning lottery or an AT lottery, and it is also a production that does not appear if you operate according to the navigation). Even when C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on due to the middle press and is in a disadvantageous situation for the player, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player by causing the rare effect to appear. Although the AT stock lottery may be performed when C1_KINSHI_FLG is on, it is preferable that the winning rate when C1_KINSHI_FLG is on is lower than when C1_KINSHI_FLG is off.

(C) is the state when the lever is on in the game in which the rare small combination (strong cherry) is won in the latter half of the precursory game to (B). In (C), no special effect is performed. In (D), in (C), the player has won a cherry on the symbol variation device 300. Also in (D), no special effect is performed.

In the games (C) and (D), although the pseudo bonus lottery is performed, the winning rate is extremely low as compared with the AT stock lottery. Here, for example, if a special effect such as the AT stock lottery (effects as shown in FIG. 672(E) and FIG. 673(F)) is performed, the winning rate of the pseudo bonus is extremely low, but the game is played. It is desirable that no special performance is performed as described above, as it will make people expect.

It should be noted that in the game in which the left-handed navigation is issued in the latter half of the omen, even if the right reel 301c is first stopped, the C1_KINSHI_FLG is not turned on. This is because if C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on in all operations other than the first stop of the left reel 301a, the player may be overly nervous because of fear of operation error, and more medals than expected can be paid out. Because there is no. In other words, by setting the condition that C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on (the rate at which the AT lottery is executed) to be the same as the pushing order in the first half of the omen, it is possible to give a sense of tension between the first half of the omen and the latter half of the omen. it can.

In the example described above, when the special bell is won when the AT_FLG is off, two medals are obtained when the middle reel or the right reel is first stopped, and one medal is obtained when the left reel is first stopped. However, one medal may be paid out when the middle reel or the right reel is first stopped, and two medals may be paid out when the left reel is first stopped.

As a result, when the special bell is elected in the latter half of the omen, pressing C1_KINSHI_FLG will turn on if you press the center button without following the left-hand navigation, and the number of medals won by the special bell will decrease, so the player will not be able to navigate to the left-hand navigation. Will follow.

In the latter half of the omen, when a game method (a game in which the middle reel 301c is first stopped) in which the proportion of the AT state transition lottery executed is reduced, the proportion of the AT state transition lottery executed is From a viewpoint of paying out medals, although it decreases, the ratio is higher than that of a game method (a game in which the left reel 301a is first stopped) in which the ratio of execution of the transition lottery to the AT state does not decrease.

[11-4-3: Another example 3 of precursor production]
FIG. 681 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the indication effect. FIG. 681(A) shows the same state as FIG. 679(D), that is, the game started by the AT stocked during the sign of AT first hit. In the above-described flowchart and lottery table, when the AT stock lottery is won, it is assumed that one AT is stocked. However, one AT stock lottery may win a plurality of AT stocks. That is, for example, when the AT stock lottery is won, the stock number lottery is performed. Here, it is assumed that a plurality of AT stocks have been acquired in the game in the latter half of the aura shown in FIGS. 672(E) to 673(F).

It should be noted that, for example, one AT stock lottery can obtain a predetermined number (for example, 10) or less of AT stock, but in order to prevent the player's medal acquisition amount from becoming excessive, the stock number is selected in the lottery. The smaller the number, the higher the selection ratio (for example, the minimum stock number is 49152/65536, 2 is 8192/65536,...).

(B) is a state in which AT is completed. The same effect as in FIG. 679(A) is performed. (C) is a game in which the sign of the second stocked AT has started. Even if the AT ends in (B), since the AT stock remains, the sign of the second stock AT starts from the game following the AT end in (B). In (C), the rock-paper-scissor effect that notifies whether or not the second stock AT has entered is being executed.

In this way, for each stocked AT, the notification effect (rock-paper-scissor effect) indicating whether or not the stock AT can enter the game immediately before the start of the stock AT is executed. However, regarding the notification effect when the AT stock is elected, it may be executed for the first AT stock, but it is desirable not to be executed for the second and subsequent AT stocks. If the notification production is executed for the second and subsequent AT stock winnings, the player can easily predict the number of stocks in advance, and the interest in the notification production (janken production) showing whether or not the stock AT can be started. This is because there is a risk of losing.

(D) is a state in which all reels are stopped according to the left-hand navigation in the game of (C). The notification effect is not performed here either. (E) is a game next to (D), in which AT is started. As in (E), in the game in which the AT is started, an effect for notifying that the AT is started for the first time is executed.

As shown in (C) to (E), one game is selected as the number of predictive games of the second stock AT. In this way, when a plurality of AT stocks are won, it is desirable that the maximum number of games of the precursor of the second and subsequent stock ATs is shorter than the number of games of the precursor of the first stock AT. .. This is because the player is irritated if the number of games with the precursor of the second and subsequent stock ATs is long despite the fact that a plurality of AT stocks have been won.

However, it is desirable that the number of precursor games is 1 or more (that is, 0 game is not selected) even for the second and subsequent stock ATs. This is because if the number of precursor games for the second and subsequent stock ATs is 0, the ATs continue to exhaust the player and the burden on the hole becomes excessive. On the other hand, the number of precursor games of the second and subsequent stock ATs may be 0, and in this case, a large number of medals can be quickly acquired due to the continuous ATs.

Further, when the maximum number of stocks (10 pieces) is acquired in one AT stock production, it is desirable that the precursors of the second and subsequent stock ATs are all one game. As a result, the stock AT starts at the forefront of one game, so that the player can guess that the maximum number of stocks has been acquired before discharging all the stocks, and expectation is high. Increase.

In addition, when a predetermined operation is performed and a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery for increasing the number of precursor games of the second and subsequent stock ATs may be performed. The predetermined operation is, for example, an operation of pressing the single-sheet insertion button 205 three times before the start lever 210, and the predetermined condition is, for example, lottery for a winning combination by pressing the start lever 210. As a result, the sign can be lengthened by the player's operation, so that the interest of the player who wants to enjoy the sign production is improved. Further, if a rare effect or the like is performed in the lottery, the interest of the player will not be lowered. Even if the start button 210 is pushed after pushing the throw button 206 different from the one-sheet throw button 205, the lottery for delaying the AT release is not executed. In the example described above, the number of predictive games of the second and subsequent stock ATs is increased, but the number of predictive games of the first stock AT may be increased.

[11-4-3: Concrete example 4 of precursor production]
FIG. 682 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the indication effect. (A) is a state in which the lever is turned on in the final game in the first half of the omen, and the same effect as in FIG. 672(A) is performed. (B) is a state in which all reels are stopped in the final game in the first half of the omen. In (B), the condition of step S6765 of FIG. 678 is satisfied, and the process of step S6766 is executed. That is, in (B), left-hand navigation appears.

Specifically, in (B), the line saying "It's left!" is also output from the speaker. In this way, the middle push navigation appeared in the first half of the omen, before entering the latter half of the omen (more accurately, when the first half of the omen game is over and before the next game is started) In addition, by notifying the player that the left reel 301a should be stopped for the first time, it is possible to suppress the mistake in the reel pushing order in the latter half of the omen. As a result, it is possible to prevent C1_KINSHI_FLG from being turned on during the latter half of the omen, that is, to prevent the AT stock lottery from being stopped by suppressing mistakes in the pushing order of the reels during the latter half of the omen.

(C) is a state in which all reels are stopped in the final game in the first half of the omen, and is a state following (B). In (C), a line saying "It's left!" indicating that the left reel 301a should be stopped first is displayed on the image display body 500. The displayed dialogue is the same as the display when the lever is turned on in the latter half of the omen. The word "left!" displayed in (C) (hereinafter, also referred to as "large left push") appears when the lever is turned on when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won in the second half of the omen. "!" (for example, FIG. 672 (C), hereinafter also referred to as a small left-pressed serif). In (C), the dialogue of the operation instruction (“left!”) is continuously output from the speaker.

(D) is the state when the lever is turned on in the first game in the latter half of the omen. The effect of (D) is similar to that of FIG. 672 (C), but, for example, the point that the large left-pressed dialogue appearing in (C) is continuously displayed, and the dialogue of the operation instruction from the speaker (“ It's on the left!") is still output.

(E) is a state when the lever is turned on in the first game in the latter half of the omen, and is a continuation of (D). Although the large left-pressed dialogue is still displayed on the image display body 500, the output of the dialogue of the operation instruction (“left!”) from the speaker is completed. If the dialogue is continuously output from the speaker, it may interfere with the game of another player in the vicinity. Therefore, it is desirable that the output of the dialogue sound is finished before the display of the dialogue. Also, the large left-pressed dialogue is continuously displayed until the first stop of the game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a mistake in the reel pushing order in the start game in the latter half of the omen. On the other hand, the display of the dialogue may be finished before the output of the dialogue sound. This is because some players want to enjoy the presentation of the omen using the image display body 500.

Note that, for example, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 measures the time from the transmission of the left-hand navigation command in step S6766 to the pressing of the start lever 210, and notifies the sub-board 510. For example, when the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 determines that the measurement time has elapsed after the large left-pressed serif is displayed, it erases the large left-pressed serif. Therefore, depending on the lapse timing of the measurement time, the large left pushing serif may be erased before the start lever 210 is pressed, after the start lever 210 is pressed and before the first stop of the reel.

By doing this, enough time has passed since the large left-pressed dialogue was displayed, and when the player has been sufficiently notified of the pressing order, the large left-pressed serifs will be erased to play other effects. Person's attention. Instead of measuring the measurement time, instead of the predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the large left-pressed dialogue may be deleted.

If the large left-pressed serif is erased after a predetermined time has passed, the predetermined time is set so that the large left-pressed serif can be displayed over the first game and the next game in the second half of the omen. It is okay (specifically, for example, about 5 seconds, which is longer than 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game), and a predetermined time so that the large left-pressed dialogue is erased during the first game in the second half of the omen. May be defined (specifically, for example, about 3 seconds shorter than 4.1 seconds which is the shortest time of one game, or the wait time when the game is consumed at the fastest (that is, the maximum wait time). (About 1.5 seconds, which is shorter than about 2.5 seconds) In addition, when the predetermined time is set so that the large left-pressed dialogue is erased during the first game in the second half of the omen, "1 game" The freeze effect in which the freeze time is determined so that "the shortest time of 4.1 seconds+freeze time>predetermined time" is executed in the first game in the latter half of the omen.

Note that in FIG. 682, since the start lever 210 is pressed before the large left pressed serif is erased, the large left pressed serif is continuously displayed, but instead of the large left pressed serif being erased, the small left pressed serif is deleted. The left-pressed dialogue (that is, the dialogue displayed when the special bell or the lever for turning on the middle 1st bell is elected in the latter half of the omen) may be displayed. The display is continuously displayed until the reel is first stopped.

In (F), the left reel 301a is first stopped in the games (D) and (E), and then all reels are stopped. In (F), the large left-pressed dialogue is erased, and the same effect as in FIG. 672(D) is performed.

In the example of FIG. 682, as described above, the display size of the large left pressed serif is larger than the display size of the small left pressed serif, but the display size and display position of these serifs may be the same. In this case, similarly to the above-described example, the dialogue displayed from the time when all the reels of the precursor first half end game are stopped can be continuously displayed even when the lever of the precursor second half start game is turned on, but the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 When the lever is turned on, the left push navigation command may not be transmitted to the sub-board 510.

In this case, even when the lever is turned on, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 displays the dialogue based on the command transmitted in step S6766. By not transmitting the command again when the lever is turned on, it is possible to avoid the reception failure or delay of the command by the sub-board 510, and to avoid the above in the display of the large left-pressed dialogue.

In addition, in the game in the latter half of the omen in which the large left push dialogue is continuously displayed from (C), when the middle reel 301b is first stopped without following the instruction of the large left push dialogue, the large left push dialogue is The display time of may be extended, or a small left push line may be displayed.

In addition, in the game of the second half of the omen, when the middle left reel 301b is stopped for the first time while the large left-pressed serifs have already been erased, the large left-pressed serifs may be displayed again, or the small left-pressed serifs may be displayed again. May be displayed. By these processes, it is possible to make the player who has made a mistake in the pressing order in the latter half of the omen understand the correct pressing order.

In the above-mentioned predictive game number lottery table (FIG. 667), the predictive game number at the time of the AT initial winning is 5 or more, but the predictive game number of 4 or less may be selectable. When the number of precursor games of 4 or less is selected in the AT initial hit, for example, the latter half of one game is executed, and the precursor game before that is set as the first precursor game.

As described above, when the number of games in the latter half of the omen is one, it is desirable that the large left-pressed dialogue be erased at the latest in the middle of the one game (for example, 3 seconds after the start of display). When the number of games in the latter half of the omen is one game, it is highly possible that a final effect for informing the AT rush is executed in the one game, so the large left-pressed dialogue can be displayed during the entire period of the one game. In that case, such a fixed effect (the above-mentioned rock-paper-scissor effect) may be hindered and the player's interest may be lowered. However, even in the latter half of the game consisting of only one game like this, if the middle reel 301b is stopped for the first time after erasing the large left pressed dialogue, the large left pressed dialogue is displayed again or the small left pushed You may display the dialogue.

[11-4-4: Concrete example 5 of foreshadowing production]
FIG. 683 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the omen effect. The effect of FIG. 683 is an example of an effect performed when AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, that is, in the latter half of the omen. (A) is a state at the time of lever-on in the game in which the rare small winning combination was won in the second half of the omen. In (A), the same effect as in FIG. 672(E) is performed. In the game (A), it is assumed that a weak watermelon is won. However, the enemy character displayed in (A) may be displayed in a mode showing a watermelon (for example, the clothes of the enemy character is green).

When the left reel 301a is stopped for the first time, the weak watermelons line up to the right (that is, the watermelons stop on the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel 301c) or descend to the right. (I.e., the watermelon stops on the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the right reel 301c), and when the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c is stopped for the first time, the lower stages are aligned (the left reel 301a, It is a watermelon design in which the watermelon stops on the lower stage of the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c.

(B) is a state in which the middle reel 301b is stopped as the first stop in the game of (A). When the weak watermelon is established in the latter half of the omen, the middle reel 301b is stopped as the first stop (that is, the same operation is performed as in the case of following the instruction (middle press navigation) when the special bell and the middle 1st bell are established in the first half of the omen) ), a predetermined message is displayed on the image display body 500.

As the predetermined message, for example, “It is okay to press the middle button, but the left button is pushed first, the probability of pulling in is higher! Oh! By the way, the pulling probability is that the symbols are easy to align. Message (hereinafter, also referred to as a kind message) is displayed (in the figure, the message described above is omitted and it is described as "You can press the middle key..."). The kind message may be output as sound from the speaker as well as being displayed on the image display body 500.

(C) is a state in which all the reels are stopped and weak watermelons are aligned. The kind message is deleted, and the same effect as in FIG. 673(F) is performed. As described above, when the middle reel 301b is stopped for the first time, the watermelons are aligned in the lower stage. Therefore, if the maximum number of sliding frames of each reel is 4 when the middle reel 301b is stopped for the first time, in order to arrange the watermelons, in order to align the watermelons, one of the lower, middle, upper, or upper watermelon It is necessary to press the reel stop button at the timing of being located at the upper frame (one of these five frames in total).

On the other hand, when the left reel 301a is stopped for the first time, the watermelons can be both aligned to the right and aligned to the right. Therefore, when the left reel 301a is stopped for the first time, in order to align the watermelons, for the left reel, the watermelons are in the lower, middle, upper, or upper one to four stages (these are the total of seven frames). The left reel stop button 211a may be pressed at the timing of being located at (). That is, when the left reel 301a is stopped for the first time, the player has more time to press.

Therefore, by displaying the kind message in (B), even a player who plays the game with the slot machine 1 for the first time can know an appropriate playing method. In order to reduce the amount of data, instead of the message in (B), the line “left!” similar to that in FIG. 672 (C) (that is, the display recommending left-hand pressing displayed in the first half of the omen). May be displayed.

The kind message is preferably hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display. Since the player feels that if the kind message is displayed even after a time sufficient for the player to fully understand the contents of the kind message, it is hindering the performance performed on the image display body 500. is there.

Also, even after the predetermined time has elapsed and the kind message has been hidden, it is desirable that the kind message can be displayed by pressing the middle reel stop button 211b without pressing the start lever 210 again. .. This is to allow the player who could not read the message while the message is displayed to be able to guide the game method again. That is, a kind message can be displayed multiple times in one game.

Although the kind message can be displayed again without pressing the starting lever 210 again in this way, when the number of remaining precursor games is 0 and the freeze effect is being executed (the processing of step S6768 in FIG. 678 is executed). The kind message does not start when you are. This is to concentrate on entertaining the AT game to the player when the number of remaining precursor games is 0 and it is determined that the AT game will start from the next game.

In the freeze production for 10 seconds, for example, the screen is suddenly blacked out in the first half 5 seconds and the blackout state is continued, and the display for notifying that the AT has been won in the image display 500 in the second half 5 seconds ( For example, an effect of displaying a message such as "Congratulations!" is performed. It should be noted that the kind message displayed before the start of the freeze effect is erased by the time the effect in the latter half 5 seconds of the freeze effect starts at the latest.

That is, when the AT starts in the game next to the game in which the kind message is displayed, the time required for the game is 10 seconds of the freeze time added to the game progress time, and therefore one kind message is displayed. Longer than the time it takes.

Further, when the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kind message is displayed, the kind message may be continuously displayed, and only the kind message display time may be reset. Further, when the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kind message is displayed, the effect of displaying the kind message may be redone from the beginning. By performing these processes, a kind message is displayed until the predetermined time has elapsed after the middle reel stop button 211b was pressed again. Therefore, even if the player is slowly reading the message, the display time of the kind message can be extended and the kind message can be read to the end.

On the other hand, even if the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kind message is displayed, it is not necessary to reset the kind message display time and redo the kind message production, that is, the kind message being executed. The display effect may not be affected. Some players press the middle reel stop button 211b continuously a plurality of times in order to surely stop the middle reel 301b. For example, the kind message display time becomes longer where the player does not intend. This is in order to avoid the accident.

In the example of FIG. 683, the kind message has already been deleted at the time of (C), but since the kind message includes information advantageous to the player, the start lever 210 is pressed and the next kind message is displayed. Even if the game starts, it is desirable to continuously display the kind message until a predetermined time elapses from the start of displaying the kind message. In this way, the kind message can be displayed over a plurality of games (two games) in the latter half of the omen, and if the first game in the latter half of the omen is not finished within the predetermined time, the kind message does not cross the plurality of games. It can also be displayed in only one game.

However, when the game two games after the display of the kindness message starts, it is desirable to forcibly hide the kindness message even if a predetermined time has not passed from the start of displaying the kindness message. This is because it is highly possible that the player thinks that the information of the kind message is unnecessary and that the game is being advanced one after another.

At this time, a new effect due to the pressing of the starting lever 210 is executed, but, for example, all of the display by the kind message effect, the sound, and the lamp light emission become the display, the sound, and the light emission by the new effect. Prioritize. This allows the player to more surely understand the game method. Further, for example, although the display of the kind message is prioritized over the display by the new effect, the new effect may be prioritized by the kind message effect regarding sound and light emission. This allows the player to enjoy a new effect while making the player understand the game method.

Further, for example, regarding all of the display, sound, and light emission, the new effect may be prioritized over the kind message effect. That is, in this case, the kind message is deleted at the same time when the new effect is started. As a result, in particular, for example, if the new effect is an effect with a high AT expectation level, the player's expectation is improved compared to the case where the kind message is continuously displayed.

As described above, the kind message is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in principle, but some players feel that the kind message information is unnecessary. Therefore, for example, the kind message is hidden at the start of the AT game. Furthermore, the 10-second freeze in step S6768 may not be executed. As a result, even if a kind message is displayed in the sign final game, the kind message can be erased by pressing the start lever 210 to immediately start the first game of the AT.

In this case, the freeze effect in step S6768 is executed, but the freeze time may be shortened. For example, if the freeze time is 0.5 seconds and the game proceeds at the fastest speed, the kind message display time is 0.5 seconds, which is the freeze time, and is the game time of one game considering the weight. It is 4.6 seconds, which is the addition of 1 second, and the kind message display time (5 seconds) can be shortened.

[11-4-5: Concrete example 6 of precursor production]
FIG. 684 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the indication effect. (A) is a state at the time of lever-on of a game next to the game won in the puncture lottery in step S67315 in the first half of the omen, that is, a rescued game. As described above, since the process of turning off all the flags in step S67317 is performed after winning the puncture lottery, the rescue state is entered in the state where the precursory state is completed.

Since the puncture lottery of the sign is provided in this way, the load on the hole can be suppressed because the player does not always enter the AT even when the sign changes. On the other hand, by making it possible to enter the relief state after the precursory puncture, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In (A), the image of the enemy character is displayed on the image display body 100. In addition, a left-hand navigation (that is, the same operation instruction as when the lever is turned on when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won in the first half of the first sign) appears on the image display body 500. In addition, the dialogue of the left-handed navigation by the enemy character is displayed. It should be noted that it is desirable that the enemy character and the dialogue are displayed in such a manner that the player may be disadvantageous if the dialogue is followed, but the instruction to press the middle key is not directly displayed. Further, a display such as "Don't be fooled by the enemy character!!" may be displayed together.

(B) is a state in which the middle reel 301b is first stopped without following the left-hand navigation in (A). The image display body 500 displays an image in a manner in which the enemy character is damaged. (C) is a state in which all reels are stopped. An image of the enemy character flying away is displayed.

In (B), when the left reel 301a is first stopped according to the navigation in (A), for example, the AT win rate in the rescue state game decreases, or the AT initial game number at the time of AT win This is a disadvantageous situation for the player, such as a decrease in the average value. When the left reel 301a is stopped for the first time, for example, an image in the form of being attacked by the enemy character is displayed on the image display body 500, which may suggest that the situation is unfavorable. Good. As described above, the specification allows the advantageous lottery to be taken when the player does not follow the left-handed navigation, so that the player can be provided with a strategy element.

In the rescue state game, the AT initial winning lottery may be set only when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the correct answer. For example, the correct answer pressing order is four kinds of pressing order (middle→right→left, middle→left→right, right→left→middle, right→middle→ Only one of the left) may be the correct answer (the probability that you can get the AT first hit lottery is 25%, and the difficulty to get the lottery is high), or three are the correct answer (That is, the probability that the AT initial win lottery can be received is 75%, and the difficulty of receiving the lottery is low).

In this case, in the rescue state game, when the rest of the reels other than the left reel 301a is stopped as the first stop, but the correct answer cannot be made in the pushing order, in (C), for example, an image in which the enemy character is attacked is displayed. Good.

In addition, when the player wins the AT lottery in the rescue state, if the game is being played in accordance with the operation instruction (middle push navigation) in the first half of the omen in the game that has won the omen punk lottery, If the player is playing the game without following the warning sign number lottery table D2-2 (see FIG. 667 for all), the sign game lottery step S6756 is performed.

In the example of FIG. 667, for example, although the number of precursor games can be selected from 0 to 4 games, when the operation instruction is followed (when the precursor game number lottery table of D2-1 is used), the maximum game The number 4 games is selected at an extremely high rate. It should be noted that, in the game winning the aura punk lottery, if the operation instruction in the first half of the aura is not followed, the rescue state may not be entered in the first place. This is to give a penalty to the player who is not playing the game as instructed. Even if the player does not win the AT first win, it is desirable that the rescue state game be finished in one game. By setting the rescue state for only one game, the player can enjoy the rescue state game with a sense of tension.

(D) is the state when the lever is on in the next game in the relief state. It is assumed that the AT first win is won in the rescue state, and that in (D), it is in the omen state. It is desirable that the navigation indicating the pushing order does not appear in the omen up to the AT that is won in the rescue state. As described above, by not displaying the navigation indicating the pushing order, the player does not know whether or not he/she has entered the sign, so that the player can feel a sense of tension. In addition, since the number of the AT predictive games won in the rescue state game is four at the maximum, the number of medals acquired by the player is not significantly reduced even if the navigation showing the pushing order is not displayed.

On the other hand, the push-order navigation may be able to be displayed even after the next game in the rescue state. For example, the number of games that can be displayed in the push-order navigation after the rescue state is finished is selected by lottery. For example, the push order can be displayed only in the rescue state game> The push order can be displayed up to the first sign game after the rescue state game ends> The push order can be displayed up to the second sign game after the rescue state game ends> The rescue state game The selection ratio in the lottery is set so that the push order can be displayed up to the third precursor game after the end>the push order can be displayed up to the fourth precursor game after the rescue state game ends.

It should be noted that the freeze effect may be performed in the game that has transitioned to the rescue state (for example, in (A)). In the freeze effect, first, all reels are stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). For example, if a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the effect button 204 10 times or more) is performed for 5 seconds in this stopped state, the AT first hit lottery is performed in the rescue state game, and if not performed, the rescue is performed. It is possible that the AT initial win lottery is not performed in this state.

When the AT initial hit lottery is performed by performing the predetermined operation, for example, the AT initial hit lottery is performed by rotating the reel in the normal direction (normal reel rotation direction) although it is in the freeze. Notify that. On the other hand, when the AT initial hit lottery is not performed without performing the predetermined operation, for example, the AT initial hit lottery is not performed by maintaining the reel stopped state or rotating the reel in the reverse direction. Inform.

In order to receive the AT first hit lottery in the rescue state, an operation with a higher degree of difficulty may be required than the operation of pressing the effect button 204 10 times or more in 5 seconds while the reel is stopped in the above example. Specifically, for example, the effect button 204 is pressed 20 times or more within 5 seconds of the reel stopped state, or the reel stopped state is shorter than 3 seconds (that is, shorter than the shortest game time (4.1 seconds) of one game). For example, the effect button 204 is pressed ten times or more while the reels are stopped. In other words, the rescue state may be a gaming state in which the game is provided for a time shorter than the shortest playing time (4.1 seconds) of one game.

It should be noted that, for example, in the case where the AT first win is won in the rescue state, the time may be set longer than that of the other predictive games by executing the freeze effect in the predictive final game. As described above, when the player wins the AT in the rescue state, the navigation does not appear in the warning sign, so a freeze effect is suddenly given to notify the winning of the AT first hit, and the player's uplifting feeling is sharply increased. be able to. Further, in order to remind the player of the AT winning, it is desirable that the AT winning effect in the rescued state is the same as the AT winning effect (rock-paper-scissor effect) when the above-mentioned signs are passed.

The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine other than the slot machine, such as a pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

Although the present invention has been described in detail above with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims It includes the configuration.

1 Slot Machine 10 Gap 21 Transparent Plate 50 Model Unit 90 Front Opening/Closing Member 100 Outer Main Body 100a Rotating Shaft 101 Bottom Plate 102 Side Plate 102a Convex Surface 102b Guard Part 103 Top Plate 104a Heat Dissipation Port 104b Code Exit 105 Partition Plate 106 Projection 107 Piece 108 Mounting piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharging device 110a Device main body 110b Hopper 110c Discharging port 110d Overflow gutter 110e Dispensing sensor 111 Game auxiliary storage box 111a Medal full sensor 112 Power supply 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Rear plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg 112i Vent space 112j Step 112k Mounting piece 112m Projection 112m-1 Projection 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Board 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay Member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector substrate 123 Connector substrate 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 The opening 128 Supporting cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay Terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent 200 Door type front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal saucer 202 Operation part 203 Medal insertion slot 205 1 insertion button 206 MAX insertion button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage Release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal gutter 213 Return gutter 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitting body 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflecting member 218 Fixing member 219 Recessed groove 300 Pattern variation display device 301a Left reel (first reel)
301b Middle reel (second reel)
301c Right reel (3rd reel)
302 device case 303 drive means 304 bottom plate 305 top plate part 305 top plate part 306 right side plate 307 left side plate 308 rear plate 309 upper swash plate 310 lower swash plate 311 handle 312 reel substrate 313 cable 315 retaining portion 316 grips 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Symbol display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide portion 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main substrate 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Recessed step portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 Collar 416 Hooking portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hinge metal fitting 420a Fixing member 420b times Moving member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlap area 420h Overlap area 420h Overlap area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle port 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 engagement Stop hole 443 Skylight 444 Reinforcing band 449 Main substrate 500 Image display 500s Broken line area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Lighting device 503 Substrate 505 Light transmissive lid plate 506 Tube frame 507 Light transmissive cover 508 Receiving part 509 Engaging part 510 Sub-board 512 Speaker 600 Upper bar 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a, 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Storage number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Right downward line 623b Right upward line 700 Connection tool 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Preventing piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hooking wall 703 Stop shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Knob 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I/O interface 1130 I/O interface 1200 Hall computer

Means 1: Operation means operable by the player,
Production display means capable of displaying a predetermined production,
Operation instruction effect execution means capable of executing operation instruction effects for the operation means based on the establishment of a special execution condition ,
An operation instruction effect display means for displaying the operation instruction effect executed by the operation instruction effect execution means on the effect display means,
Performs a privilege granting lottery on the granting of benefits, a and benefits of the grant is determined the gaming machine that privilege is granted,
Wherein the gaming machine,
As the privilege, a state in which a large amount of game media is easily acquired, and a first game state in which the first operation instruction effect of the operation instruction effects can be executed,
A second game state in which an instruction effect having the same instruction content as the instruction content shown in the first operation instruction effect can be executed,
There is at least a third game state in which a second operation instruction effect having instruction content different from the instruction content shown in the first operation instruction effect can be executed ,
As the situation of the gaming machine,
After a predetermined number of games have been exhausted in the second game state, the game state shifts to the third game state, and in the third game state, a predetermined number of games has been exhausted before the game state transitions to the first game state. There is the first situation to do,
When the right to grant the privilege is acquired in the third gaming state of the first situation, the second gaming state is transferred after the first gaming state of the first situation ends. , It is possible to make a transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state granted by the acquired right without passing through the third gaming state,
Even if the right to grant the privilege is obtained in the third gaming state of the first situation, it is confirmed that the right to grant the privilege is obtained in the third gaming state of the first situation. An amusement machine characterized in that an informing effect for informing is not executed .

Claims (1)

An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Production display means capable of displaying a predetermined production,
Operation instruction effect execution means capable of executing operation instruction effect for the operation means,
An operation instruction effect display means for displaying the operation instruction effect executed by the operation instruction effect execution means on the effect display means,
A gaming machine in which one game is completed by performing a lottery on winning and displaying a result of the lottery on a predetermined display unit,
The gaming machine has a plurality of gaming situations,
The plurality of game situations,
Normal gaming state,
A first special game state different from the normal game state,
A second special game state different from the normal game state and the first special game state, a game state different from the normal game state and the first special game state, and related to the second special game state Including at least three special game states,
When in the first special game state, a first operation instruction effect corresponding to an operation mode that facilitates acquisition of a game medium is executed as the operation instruction effect for the operation means,
When in the second special game state, an instruction effect having the same instruction content as the instruction content shown in the first operation instruction effect is executed as the operation instruction effect for the operation means,
In the third special game state, when a predetermined number of the games are exhausted, the state changes to the first special game state, but is indicated by the first operation instruction effect as the operation instruction effect for the operation means. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a second operation instruction effect having an instruction content different from the instruction content being displayed.